ประกาศกรมเจ้าท่า ที่ 7/2566 เรื่อง กำหนดมาตรฐานระบบคุณภาพในการผลิตและมาตรฐานของภาชนะที่ใช้บรรจุ การขนถ่ายเคลื่อนย้าย การจัดเก็บและการจัดแยก วิธีการจัดทำและขอความเห็นชอบหรือรับรองคู่มือกำหนดความปลอดภัยในการบรรทุก การจัดให้มีเอกสารกำกับการขนส่ง การใช้เอกสารข้อมูลความปลอดภัย การกำหนดรายละเอียดและวิธีการจัดให้มีเอกสารกำกับการขนส่ง และการจัดทำมาตรการและแผนความปลอดภัยของเรือและท่าเรือที่บรรทุกหรือขนถ่ายสิ่งของที่อาจทำให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้

ประกาศกรมเจ้าท่า ที่ 7 / 2566 เรื่อง กำหนดมาตรฐานระบบคุณภาพในการผลิตและมาตรฐานของภาชนะที่ใช้บรรจุ การขนถ่ายเคลื่อนย้ายการจัดเก็บและการจัดแยก วิธีการจัดทำและขอความเห็นชอบหรือรับรองคู่มือกาหนดความปลอดภัยในการบรรทุก การจัดให้มีเอกสารกำกับการขนส่ง การใช้เอกสารข้อมูลความปลอดภัย การกำหนดรายละเอียดและวิธีการจัดให้มีเอกสารกากับการขนส่ง และการจัดทำมาตรการและแผน ความปลอดภัยของเรือและท่าเรือที่บรรทุกหรือขนถ่ายสิ่งของที่อาจทำให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ อาศัยอานาจตามความในข้อ 3 (1) ข้อ 5 ข้อ 6 วรรคสอง ข้อ 7 ข้อ 11 วรรคสอง ข้อ 13 (3) ข้อ 13 วรรคสอง ข้อ 14 ข้อ 15 ข้อ 16 และข้อ 17 ของกฎกระทรวง การดาเนินการสาหรับสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ พ.ศ. 2564 ประกอบกับมาตรา 190 แห่งพระราชบัญญัติการเดินเรือในน่านน้ำไทย พระพุทธศักราช 2456 และที่แก้ไขเพิ่มเติม เพื่อกำหนดมาตรฐานระบบคุณภาพในการผลิตและมาตรฐานของภาชนะที่ใช้บรรจุ การขนถ่าย เคลื่ อนย้าย การจัดเก็บและการจัดแยก วิธีการจัดทาและขอความเห็นชอบหรือรับรองคู่มือกาหนด ความปลอดภัยในการบรรทุก การจัดให้มีเอกสารกากับการขนส่ง การใช้เอกสารข้อมูลความปลอดภัย การกำหนดรายละเอียดและวิธีการจัดให้มีเอกสารกำกับการขนส่ง และการจัดทำมาตรการและ แผนความ ปลอดภัยของเรือและท่าเรือที่บรรทุกหรือขนถ่ายสิ่งของที่อาจทำให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้การปฏิบัติเป็นไปตามข้อกาหนดของอนุสัญญาระหว่างประเทศว่าด้วยความปลอดภัยแห่งชีวิตในทะเล ค.ศ. 1974 และที่แก้ไขเพิ่มเติม ( International Convention for the Safety of Life At Sea, 1974 ( SOLAS ) , as amended ) และประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้ เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code )) ตามท้ายอนุสัญญาและภาคผนวก และที่แก้ไขเพิ่มเติม ซึ่งกำห นดโดยองค์การ ทางทะเลระหว่างประเทศ เป็นไปอย่างมีประสิทธิภาพและเหมาะสม อธิบดีกรมเจ้าท่า จึงออกประกาศไว้ ดังต่อไปนี้ ข้อ 1 ประกาศนี้ให้ใช้บังคับตั้งแต่วันถัดจากวันประกาศในราชกิจจานุเบกษาเป็นต้นไป ข้อ 2 ระบบคุณภาพในการผลิตและมาตรฐานของภาชนะที่ใช้บรรจุสิ่งของที่อาจทำให้ เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ให้เป็นไปตามมาตรฐาน ดังนี้ (1) การบรรจุหีบห่อและการบรรจุสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ในถังหรือเรือลาเลียง ให้เป็นไปตามประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 4 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 4 Packing and Tank Provision ) ้ หนา 1 ่ เลม 140 ตอนพิเศษ 26 ง ราชกิจจานุเบกษา 6 กุมภาพันธ์ 2566

(2) คุณภาพในการผลิตและมาตรฐานของภาชนะที่ใช้บรรจุที่เหมาะสมกับวิธีการและขั้นตอน ในการส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตามประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจ ทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 5 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 5 Consignment Procedures ) (3) การจัดทาและการทดสอบในการบรรจุหีบห่อ การขนถ่ายในระวาง การบรรจุหีบห่อ ขนาดใหญ่ การบรรจุในถังขนาดพกพาได้ การขนส่งแก๊สหลายรูปแบบ และการขนส่งในถังโดยพาหนะ ทางถนนที่เชื่อมโยงกับทางน้า ให้เป็นไปตามประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิด อันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 6 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 6 Construction And Testing of Packings, Intermediate Bulk Containers ( IBCs ) , Large Packings, Portable Tanks , Multiple - Element GAS Containers ( MEGCs ) And Road Tank Vehicles ) ข้อ 3 หลักเกณฑ์ในการขนถ่ายเคลื่อนย้าย การจัดเก็บและการจัดแยกสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้ เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ให้เป็นไปตามมาตรฐาน ดังนี้ (1) การขนถ่ายเคลื่อนย้าย การจัดเก็บและการจัดแยกที่เหมาะสมกับวิธีการและขั้นตอน ในการส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตามประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่ งของ ที่อาจทำให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้ำระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 5 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 5 Consignment Procedures ) (2) การขนถ่ายเคลื่อนย้าย การจัดเก็บและการจัดแยกตามข้อพึงระวังในการปฏิบัติการ เพื่อขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตามประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของ ที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 7 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 7 Provision Concerning Transport Operations ) ข้อ 4 หลักเกณฑ์วิธีการจัดทาและขอความเห็นชอบหรือรับรองคู่มือกาหนดความปลอดภัย ในการบรรทุกสินค้าและขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทำให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ให้เป็นไปตามมาตรฐาน ดังนี้ (1) การจัดทาคู่มือสาหรับวิธีการและขั้นตอนในการส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตามประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ส่ วนที่ 5 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 5 Consignment Procedures ) (2) การจัดทำคู่มือสำหรับข้อพึงระวังในการปฏิบัติการเพื่อขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทำให้เกิด อันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตามประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 7 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 7 Provision Concerning Transport Operations ) ้ หนา 2 ่ เลม 140 ตอนพิเศษ 26 ง ราชกิจจานุเบกษา 6 กุมภาพันธ์ 2566

ข้อ 5 หลักเกณฑ์การจัดให้มีเอกสารกากับการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ซึ่งให้ใช้เอกสารข้อมูลความปลอดภัย ( Material Safety Data Sheet ) ให้เป็นไปตามมาตรฐาน ดังนี้ (1) ข้อกำหนดทั่วไป คำนิยาม และการฝึกอบรมเกี่ยวกับเอกสารกำกับการขนส่งและ เอกสารข้อมูลความปลอดภัยสาหรับสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตามประมวล ข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 1 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 1 General Provisions, Definitions And Training ) (2) เอกสารกา กับการขนส่งตามวิธีการและขั้นตอนในการส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตราย ขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตามประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้ำ ระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 5 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 5 Consignment Procedures Chapter 5.4 Documentation ) ข้อ 6 หลักเกณฑ์การกาหนดรายละเอียดและวิธีการจัดให้มีเอกสารกากับการขนส่งสิ่งของ ที่อาจทำให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ให้เป็นไปตามมาตรฐาน ดังนี้ (1) ข้อกาหนดทั่วไป คำนิยาม และการฝึกอบรมเกี่ยวกับรายละเอียดและวิธีการในการจัดทา เอกสารกากับการขนส่งสาหรับสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตามประมวลข้อบังคับ ว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทำให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 1 ( International Maritime Dan gerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 1 General Provisions, Definitions And Training ) (2) รายละเอียดและวิธีการในการจัดทำเอกสารกากับการขนส่งสำหรับสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิด อันตรายขึ้นได้ตามวิธีการและขั้นตอนในการส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตาม ประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทำให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 5 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 5 Consignment Procedures Chapter 5.4 Documentation ) ข้อ 7 หลักเกณฑ์การจัดทามาตรการและแผนความปลอดภัยของเรือและท่าเรือที่บรรทุก หรือขนถ่ายสิ่งของที่อาจทำให้เกิดอั นตรายขึ้นได้ให้เป็นไปตามมาตรฐาน ดังนี้ (1) ข้อกาหนดทั่วไป คานิยาม และการฝึกอบรมเกี่ยวกับมาตรการและแผนความปลอดภัย ของเรือและท่าเรือที่บรรทุกหรือขนถ่ายสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตามประมวล ข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 1 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 1 General Provisions, Definitions And Training ) ้ หนา 3 ่ เลม 140 ตอนพิเศษ 26 ง ราชกิจจานุเบกษา 6 กุมภาพันธ์ 2566

(2) มาตรกำรและแผนความปลอดภัยของเรือและท่าเรือที่เหมาะสมกับวิธีการและขั้นตอน ในการส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตามประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วยการขนส่งสิ่งของ ที่อาจทำให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้ำระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 5 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 5 Consignment Procedures ) (3) มาตรการและแผนความปลอดภัยของเรือและท่าเรือตามข้อกาหนดเกี่ยวกับข้อพึงระวัง ในการปฏิบัติการเพื่อขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ให้เป็นไปตามประมวลข้อบังคับว่าด้วย การขนส่งสิ่งของที่อาจทาให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ทางน้าระหว่างประเทศ ส่วนที่ 7 ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) Volume 1 PART 7 Provision Concerning Transport Operations ) ข้อ 8 รายละเอียดของมาตรฐานข้างต้นให้เป็นไปตามภาคผนวกที่แนบท้ายประกาศนี้ ประกาศ ณ วันที่ 3 มกราคม พ.ศ. 256 6 สรพงศ์ ไพฑูรย์พงษ์ รองปลัดกระทรวงคมนาคม รักษาราชการแทน อธิบดีกรมเจ้าท่า ้ หนา 4 ่ เลม 140 ตอนพิเศษ 26 ง ราชกิจจานุเบกษา 6 กุมภาพันธ์ 2566

ภาคผนวก ประมวลข้อ บังคับว่าด้วยมาตรฐานการดำเนินการสำหรับสิ่งของที่อาจทำให้เกิดอันตรายขึ้นได้ ระหว่างประเทศ ( International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ( IMDG Code ) )

MSC 102 / 24 / Add.2 Annex 4 , p age 1 I: \ MSC \ 102 \ MSC 102 - 24 - Add.2.docx ANNEX 4 RESOLUTION MSC.477(102) (adopted on 11 November 20 20 ) AMENDMENTS TO THE INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE THE MARITIME SAFETY COMMITTEE, RECALLING Article 28(b) of the Convention on the International Maritime Organization concerning the functions of the Committee, NOTING resolution MSC.1 22(75) by which it adopted the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (hereinafter referred to as “the IMDG Code”), which has become mandatory under chapter VII of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea ( SOLAS), 1974, as amended (h ereinafter referred to as “the Convention”), NOTING ALSO article VIII(b) and regulation VII/1.1 of the Convention concerning the procedure for amending the IMDG Code, HAVING CONSIDERED, at its 102nd session, amendments to the IMDG Code, proposed and circulated in accordance with article VIII(b)( i ) of the Convention, 1 ADOPTS, in accordance with article VIII(b)(iv) of the Convention, amendments to the IMDG Code, the text of which is set out in the annexes to the present resolution; 2 DETERMINES, in a ccordance with article VIII(b)(vi)(2)(bb) of the Convention, that the amendments shall be deemed to have been accepted on 1 December 2021, unless prior to that date more than one third of the Contracting Governments to the Convention or Contracting Governm ents the combined merchant fleets of which constitute not less than 50% of the gross tonnage of the world’s merchant fleet, have notified their objections to the amendments; 3 INVITES Contracting Governments to the Convention to note that, in accordance w ith article VIII(b)(vii)(2) of the Convention, the amendments shall enter into force on 1 June 2022 upon their acceptance in accordance with paragraph 2 above; 4 AGREES that Contracting Governments to the Convention may apply the aforementioned amendments in whole or in part on a voluntary basis from 1 January 2021; 5 REQUESTS the Secretary - General, for the purposes of article VIII(b)(v) of the Convention, to transmit certified copies of the present resolution and the text of the amendments contained in t he annexes to all Contracting Governments to the Convention; 6 REQUESTS ALSO the Secretary - General to transmit copies of this resolution and its annexes to Members of the Organization which are not Contracting Governments to the Convention.

MSC 102 / 24 / Add.2 Annex 4 , p age 2 I: \ MSC \ 102 \ MSC 102 - 24 - Add.2.docx ANNEX 1 AMENDMENTS TO THE INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE AMENDMENT 40 - 20 The complete text of the IMDG Code is replaced with the following: 1 Th is annex is presented as follows: .1 a ppendix 1 contains p art s 1 to 2 and 4 to 7 of the IMDG Code ; and .2 a ppendix 2 contains p art 3 , appendices and index of the IMDG Code .

1 1 PART 1 G ENERAL PROVISIO NS, DEFINITIONS AND TRAINING Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 12

1 1 1 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 13

3 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Chapter 1.1 General provisions 1.1.0 Introductory note It should be noted that other international and national modal regulations exist and that those regulations may recognize all or part of the provisions of this Code . In addition, port authorities and other b odies and organizations should recognize the Code and may use it as a basis for their storage and handling bye-laws within loading and discharge areas . 1.1.1 Application and implementation of the Code 1.1.1.1 The provisions contained in this Code are ap plicable to all ships to which the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS), as amended, applies and which are carrying dangerous goods as defined in regulation 1 of part A of chapter VII of that Convention . 1.1.1.2 The provisions of regulation II-2/19 of th at Convention apply to passenger ships and to cargo ships constructed on or after 1 July 2002 . For: .1 a passenger ship constructed on or after 1 Sep tember 1984 but before 1 July 2002; or .2 a cargo ship of 500 gross tons or over construct ed on or after 1 September 1984 but before 1 July 2002; or .3 a cargo ship of less than 500 gross tons constru cted on or after 1 February 1992 but before 1 July 2002, the requirements of regulation II-2/54 of SOLAS, as amended by resolutions MSC . 1(XLV), MSC . 6(48), MSC . 13(57), MSC . 22(59), MSC . 24(60), MSC . 27(61), MSC . 31(63) and MSC . 57(67), apply (see II-2/1 . 2) . For cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons cons tructed on or after 1 September 1984 and before 1 February 1992, it is recommended that Contracting Governments extend such application to these cargo ships as far as possible . 1.1.1.3 All ships, irrespective of type and size, ca rrying substances, materials or articles identified in this Code as marine pollutants are subject to the provisions of this Code . 1.1.1.4 In certain parts of this Code, a particular ac tion is prescribed, but the responsibility for carrying out the action is not specifically assigned to any particular person . Such responsibility may vary acco rding to the laws and customs of different countries and the international conventions into which these countries have entered . For the purpose of this Code, it is not necessa ry to make this assignment, but only to identify the action itself . It remains the prerogative of each Govern ment to assign this responsibility . 1.1.1.5 Although this Code is legally treated as a man datory instrument under chapter VII of SOLAS, as amended, the following provisions of the Code remain recommendatory: .1 paragraph 1 . 1 . 1 . 8 (Notification of infringements); .2 paragraphs 1 . 3 . 1 . 4 to 1 . 3 . 1 . 7 (Training); .3 chapter 1 . 4 (Security provisions) except 1 . 4 . 1 . 1, which is mandatory; .4 section 2 . 1 . 0 of chapter 2 . 1 (Class 1 – Explosives, Introductory note s); .5 section 2 . 3 . 3 of chapter 2 . 3 (Determination of flashpoint); .6 columns 15 and 17 of the Dangerous Goods List in c hapter 3 . 2; .7 the segregation flow chart and example in the a nnex to chapter 7 . 2; .8 section 5 . 4 . 5 of chapter 5 . 4 (Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form), ins ofar as the layout of the form is concerned; Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 14

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 4 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 .9 chapter 7 . 8 (Special requirements in the event of an inc ident and fire precautions involving dangerous goods); .10 section 7 . 9 . 3 (Contact information for the main desig nated national competent authorities); and .11 appendix B . 1.1.1.6 Application of standards Where the application of a standard is required and there is any conflict between the standard and the provisions of this Code, the provisions of this Code take precedence . The requirements of the standard that do no t conflict with the provisions of this Code shall be applied as specified, including the requirements of any other standard, or part of a standard, referenced within that standard as normative . 1.1.1.7 Transport of dangerous goods used as a coola nt or conditioner Dangerous goods, that are only asphyxiant (which dilute or replace the oxygen normally in the atmosphere), when used in cargo transport units for cooling or conditioning purposes are only subject to the provisions of section 5 . 5 . 3 . Note: When carried on board as ship’s stores or e quipment, these coolants and conditioners are not subject to the provisions of this Code . 1.1.1.8 Notification of infringements When a competent authority has reasons to believe that the safety of the transport of dangerous goods is compromised as a result of serious or repeated infringements of this Code by an enterprise which has its headquarters on the territory of another competent authority, it should if necessary notify that competent authority of such infringements . 1.1.1.9 Lamps containing dangerous goods The following lamps are not subject to this Code provided that they do not contain radioactive material and do not contain mercury in quantities above those specified in special provision 366 of chapter 3 . 3: .1 lamps that are collected directly from ind ividuals and households when transported to a collection or recycling facility; .2 lamps each containing not more than 1 g of dange rous goods and packaged so that there is not more than 30 g of dangerous goods per package, provided that: (i) the lamps are manufactured according to a ce rtified quality management system; Note: The application of ISO 9001:2008 may be considered acceptable for this purpose . and (ii) each lamp is either individually packed in i nner packagings, separated by dividers, or surrounded with cushioning material to protect the lamps and packed into strong outer packagings meeting the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1 and capable of passing a 1 . 2 m drop test . .3 used, damaged or defective lamps each conta ining not more than 1 g of dangerous goods with not more than 30 g of dangerous goods per package when transported from a collection or recycling facility . The lamps shall be packed in strong outer pac kagings sufficient for preventing release of the contents under normal conditions of transport meeting the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1 and that are capable of passing a drop test of not l ess than 1 . 2 m . Note: Lamps containing radioactive mat erial are addressed in 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . .4 lamps containing only gases of class 2 . 2 (according to 2 . 2 . 2 . 2) provided they are packaged so that the proj ectile effects of any rupture of the bulb will be contained within the package . 1.1.1.10 Dangerous goods in equipment in use or intend ed for use during transport For dangerous goods in equipment in use or intended for use during transport, see section 5 . 5 . 4 . 1.1.2 Conventions 1.1.2.1 International Convention for the Safety o f Life at Sea, 1974 Part A of chapter VII of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS), as amended, deals with the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form, and is reproduced in full: ■ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 15

Chapter 1.1 – General provisions 5 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Chapter VII Carriage of dangerous goods Part A Carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form Regulation 1 Definitions For the purpose of this chapter, unless expressly provided otherwise: 1 IMDG Code means the International Maritime Dan gerous Goods (IMDG) Code adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee of the Organization by resolution MSC.122(75), as may be amended by the Organization, provided that such amendments are adopted, brought into force and take effect in accordance with the provisions of article VIII of the present Convention concerning the amendment procedures applicable to the annex other than chapter I. 2 Dangerous goods mean the substances, materi als and articles covered by the IMDG Code. 3 Packaged form means the form of containment spe cified in the IMDG Code. Regulation 2 Application * 1 Unless expressly provided otherwise, this part applies to the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form in all ships to which the present regulations a pply and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tonnage. 2 The provisions of this part do not apply to ships’ st ores and equipment. 3 The carriage of dangerous goods in packaged for m is prohibited except in accordance with the provisions of this chapter. 4 To supplement the provisions of this part, eac h Contracting Government shall issue, or cause to be issued, detailed instructions on emergency response and medical first aid relevant to incidents involving dangerous goods in packaged form, taking into account the guidelines developed by the Organization. † Regulation 3 Requirements for the carriage of dangerous goods The carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form shall be in compliance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code. Regulation 4 Documents 1 Transport information relating to the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form and the container/ vehicle packing certificate shall be in accor dance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code and shall be made available to the person or organization designated by the port State authority. 2 Each ship carrying dangerous goods i n packaged form shall have a special list, manifest or stowage plan setting forth, in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code, the dangerous goods on board and the location thereof. A copy of one of these documents shall be made available before departure to the person or organization designated by the port State authority. * Refer to: .1 part D which contains special requirement s for the carriage of INF cargo; and .2 regulation II-2/19, which contains specia l requirements for ships carrying dangerous goods. † Refer to: .1 the Revised Emergency Response Procedure s for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods (EmS Guide) (MSC.1/Circ.1588/Rev.1); and .2 the Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Acciden ts Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG). These Guides are reproduced in the Supplement to the IMDG Code published by the Organization. Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 16

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 6 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Regulation 5 Cargo Securing Manual Cargo, cargo units * and cargo transport units shall be loaded, stowed and secured throughout the voyage in accordance with the Cargo Securing Manual approved by the Administration. The Cargo Securing Manual shall be drawn up to a standard at least equivalent to the guidelines developed by the Organization. † Regulation 6 Reporting of incidents involving dangerous goods 1 When an incident takes place involving the loss or likely loss overboard of dangerous goods in packaged form into the sea, the master, or other person havin g charge of the ship, shall report the particulars of such an incident without delay and to the fullest extent possible to the nearest coastal State. The report shall be drawn up based on general principles and guidelines developed by the Organization. ‡ 2 In the event of the ship referred to in paragraph 1 being abandoned, or in the event of a report from such a ship being incomplete or unobtainable, the c ompany, as defined in regulation IX/1.2, shall, to the fullest extent possible, assume the obligations placed upon the master by this regulation. 1.1.2.2 International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL) 1.1.2.2.1 Annex III of the International Conventio n for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL), deals with the prevention of pollution by harmful substances carried by sea in packaged form and is reproduced in full, as revised by the Marine Environment Protection Committee . Annex III Regulations for the prevention of pollution by harmful substances carried by sea in packaged form Chapter 1 – General Regulation 1 Definitions Definitions 1 For the purposes of this Annex: Harmful substances a re those substances which are identified as marine pollutants in the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG Code) § or which meet the criteria in the appendix of this Annex. 2 Packaged form is defined as the forms of containment s pecified for harmful substances in the IMDG Code. 3 Audit means a systematic, independen t and documented process for obtaining audit evidence and evaluating it objectively to determine the extent to which audit criteria are fulfilled. 4 Audit Scheme means the IMO Member State Audit S cheme established by the Organization and taking into account the guidelines developed by the Organization.¶ 5 Code for Implementation means the IMO In struments Implementation Code (III Code) adopted by the Organization by resolution A.1070(28). 6 Audit Standard means the Code for Implementati on. * As defined in the Code of Safe Practice for Cargo Stowage and Securing (resolution A.714(17), as amended). † Refer to Revised guidelines for the preparation of the Cargo Securing Manual (MSC/Circ.1353/Rev.2). ‡ Refer to the General principles for ship reporting systems and ship reporting requirements, including Guidelines for reporting incidents involving dangerous goods, harmful substances and/or marine pollutants (resolution A.851(20), as amended). § Refer to the IMDG Code (resolution MSC.122(75), as amended). ¶ Refer to the Framework and Procedures for the IMO Member State Audit Scheme (resolution A.1067(28)). Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 17

Chapter 1.1 – General provisions 7 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Regulation 2 Application 1 The carriage of harmful substances is prohibited, except in accordance with the provisions of this Annex. 2 To supplement the provisions of this Annex, the Go vernment of each Party to the Convention shall issue, or cause to be issued, detailed requirements on packing, marking, labelling, documentation, stowage, quantity limitations and exceptions for preventing or minimizing pollution of the marine environment by harmful substances. 3 For the purposes of this Annex, empty packagings wh ich have been used previously for the carriage of harmful substances shall themselves be treated as harmful substances unless adequate precautions have been taken to ensure that they contain no residue that is harmful to the marine environment. 4 The requirements of this Annex do not apply to ship ’s stores and equipment. Regulation 3 Packing Packages shall be adequate to minimize the hazard to the marine environment, having regard to their specific contents. Regulation 4 Marking and labelling 1 Packages containing a harmful substance shall be durably marked or labelled to indicate that the substance is a harmful substance in accordance with the r elevant provisions of the IMDG Code. 2 The method of affixing marks or labels on packages co ntaining a harmful substance shall be in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code. Regulation 5 * Documentation 1 Transport information relating to the carriage of harmful substances shall be in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code and shall be made av ailable to the person or organization designated by the port State authority. 2 Each ship carrying harmful substances sh all have a special list, manifest or stowage plan setting forth, in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code, the harmful substances on board and the location thereof. A copy of one of these documents shall be made available before departure to the person or organization designated by the port State authority. Regulation 6 Stowage Harmful substances shall be properly stowed and secured so as to minimize the hazards to the marine environment without impairing the safety of the ship and persons on board. Regulation 7 Quantity limitations Certain harmful substances may, for sound scientific and technical reasons, need to be prohibited for carriage or be limited as to the quantity which may be carried aboard any one ship. In limiting the quantity, due consideration shall be given to size, construction and equipment of the ship, as well as the packaging and the inherent nature of the substances. Regulation 8 Exceptions 1 Jettisoning of harmful substances carried in packaged form shall be prohibited, except where necessary for the purpose of securing the safety of the ship or sav ing life at sea. 2 Subject to the provisions of the present Conve ntion, appropriate measures based on the physical, chemical and biological properties of harmful substances shall be taken to regulate the washing of leakages overboard, provided that compliance with such measures would not impair the safety of the ship and persons on board. * Reference to “documents” in this regulation does not preclude the use of electronic data processing (EDP) and electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission techniques as an aid to paper documentation. Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 18

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 8 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Regulation 9 Port State control on operational requirements * 1 A ship when in a port or an offshore terminal of another Party is subject to inspection by officers duly authorized by such Party concerning opera tional requirements under this Annex. 2 Where there are clear grounds for believing that t he master or crew are not familiar with essential shipboard procedures relating to the prevention of pollution by harmful substances, the Party shall take such steps, including carrying out detailed inspection and, if required, will ensure that the ship shall not sail until the situation has been brought to order in accordance with the requirements of this Annex. 3 Procedures relating to the port State control p rescribed in article 5 of the present Convention shall apply to this regulation. 4 Nothing in this regulation shall be constru ed to limit the rights and obligations of a Party carrying out control over operational requirements specifically provided for in the present Convention. Chapter 2 – Verification of compliance with the provisions of this Annex Regulation 10 Application Parties shall use the provisions of the Code for Implementation in the execution of their obligations and respon- sibilities contained in this Annex. Regulation 11 Verification of compliance 1 Every Party shall be subject to periodic audits by the Organization in accordance with the audit standard to verify compliance with and implementa tion of this annex. 2 The Secretary-General of the Organization sh all have responsibility for administering the Audit Scheme, based on the guidelines developed by the Organization. 3 Every Party shall have responsibility for f acilitating the conduct of the audit and implementation of a programme of actions to address the findings, based on the guidelines developed by the Organization. † 4 Audit of all Parties shall be: .1 based on an overall schedule developed by the Se cretary-General of the Organization, taking into account the guidelines developed by the Organization; and .2 conducted at periodic intervals, takin g into account the guidelines developed by the Organization. * Refer to the Procedures for port State control, 2019 (resolution A.1138(31)). † Refer to the Framework and Procedures for the IMO Member State Audit Scheme (resolution A.1067(28)). Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 19

Chapter 1.1 – General provisions 9 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Appendix to Annex III Criteria for the identification of harmful substances in packaged form For the purpose of this Annex, substances, other than radioactive materials, * identified by any one of the following criteria are harmful substances: † (a) Acute (short-term) aquatic hazard Category: Acute 1 96 hr LC 50 (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or 48 hr EC 50 (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or 72 or 96 hr ErC 50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/L (b) Long-term aquatic hazard (i) Non-rapidly degradable substances for w hich there are adequate chronic toxicity data available Category: Chronic 1 Chronic NOEC or EC x (for fish) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for crustacea) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.1 mg/L Category: Chronic 2 Chronic NOEC or EC x (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/L (ii) Rapidly degradable substances for which there are adequate chronic toxicity data available Category: Chronic 1 Chronic NOEC or EC x (for fish) ≤ 0.01 mg/L and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for crustacea) ≤ 0.01 mg/L and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.01 mg/L Category: Chronic 2 Chronic NOEC or EC x (for fish) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for crustacea) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.1 mg/L * Refer to class 7, as defined in chapter 2.7 of the IMDG Code. † The criteria are based on those developed by the United Nations Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals (GHS), as amended. For definitions of acronyms or terms used in this appendix, refer to the relevant paragraphs of the IMDG Code. Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 20

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 10 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 (iii) Substances for which adequate chronic toxicity data are not available Category: Chronic 1 96 hr LC 50 (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or 48 hr EC 50 (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or 72 or 96 hr ErC 50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/L and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is ≥ 500 (or, if absent, the log K ow ≥ 4). Category: Chronic 2 96 hr LC 50 (for fish) > 1 mg/L but ≤ 10 mg/L and/or 48 hr EC 50 (for crustacea) > 1 mg/L but ≤ 10 mg/L and/or 72 or 96 hr ErC 50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) > 1 mg/L but ≤ 10 mg/L and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is ≥ 500 (or, if absent, the log K ow ≥ 4). Additional guidance on the classification process for substances and mixtures is included in the IMDG Code. 1.1.2.3 International Convention for Safe Conta iners, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended 1.1.2.3.1 Regulations 1 and 2 of annex I to the Internation al Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended, deal with safety approval plates and maintenance and examination of containers, and are reproduced in full . Annex I Regulations for the testing, inspection, approval and maintenance of containers Chapter I Regulations common to all systems of approval Regulation 1 Safety Approval Plate 1 (a) A Safety Approval Plate conforming t o the specifications set out in the appendix to this annex shall be permanently affixed to every approved container at a readily visible place, adjacent to any other approval plate issued for official purposes, where it would not be easily damaged. (b) On each container, all maximum operating gro ss mass markings shall be consistent with the maximum operating gross mass information on the Safety Approval Plate. (c) The owner of the container shall remove the Safety Ap proval Plate on the container if: (i) the container has been modified in a man ner which would void the original approval and the information found on the Safety Approval Plate, or (ii) the container is removed from service and is not be ing maintained in accordance with the Convention, or (iii) the approval has been withdrawn by the Adminis tration. 2 (a) The plate shall contain the following informa tion in at least the English or French language: CSC SAFETY APPROVAL Country of approval and approval referenc e Date (month and year) of manufacture Manufacturer’s identification number of t he container or, in the case of existing containers for which that number is unknown, the number allotted by the Administration Maximum operating gross mass (kg and lb) Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 21

Chapter 1.1 – General provisions 11 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Allowable stacking load for 1.8 g (kg and lb) Transverse racking test force (newtons). ( b) A blank space should be reserved on the plate for inser tion of end-wall and/or side-wall strength values (factors) in accordance with paragraph 3 of this regulation and annex II, tests 6 and 7. A blank space should also be reserved on the plate for the first and subsequent maintenance examination dates (month and year) when used. 3 Where the Administration considers that a new co ntainer satisfies the requirements of the present Convention in respect of safety and if, for such container, the end-wall and/or side-wall strength values (factors) are designed to be greater or less than those stipulated in annex II, such values shall be indicated on the Safety Approval Plate. Where the stacking or racking values are less than 192,000 kg or 150 kN, respectively, the container shall be considered as having limited stacking or racking capacity and shall be conspicuously marked, as required under the relevant standards, * at or before their next scheduled examination or before any other date approved by the Administration, provided this is not later than 1 July 2015. 4 The presence of the Safety Approval Plate does no t remove the necessity of displaying such labels or other information as may be required by other regulations which may be in force. 5 A container, the construction of which was comp leted prior to 1 July 2014, may retain the Safety Approval Plate as permitted by the Convention prior to that date as long as no structural modifications occur to that container. Regulation 2 Maintenance and examination 1 The owner of the container shall be responsible for maintaining it in safe condition. 2 (a) The owner of an approved container shall examine t he container or have it examined in accordance with the procedure either prescribed or approved by the Contracting Party concerned, at intervals appropriate to operating conditions. (b) The date (month and year) before which a new contai ner shall undergo its first examination shall be marked on the Safety Approval Plate. (c) The date (month and year) before which the contai ner shall be re-examined shall be clearly marked on the container on or as close as practicable to the Safety Approval Plate and in a manner acceptable to that Contracting Party which prescribed or approved the particular examination procedure involved. (d) The interval from the date of manufacture to the da te of the first examination shall not exceed five years. Subsequent examination of new containers and re-examination of existing containers shall be at intervals of not more than 30 months. All examinations shall determine whether the container has any defects which could place any person in danger. 3 (a) As an alternative to paragraph 2, the Co ntracting Party concerned may approve a continuous examination programme if satisfied, on evidence submitted by the owner, that such a programme provides a standard of safety not inferior to the one set out in paragraph 2 above. (b) To indicate that the container is oper ated under an approved continuous examination programme, a mark showing the letters ACEP and the identification of the Contracting Party which has granted approval of the programme shall be displayed on the container on or as close as practicable to the Safety Approval Plate. (c) All examinations performed under such a prog ramme shall determine whether a container has any defects which could place any person in danger. They shall be performed in connection with a major repair, refurbishment, or on-hire/off-hire interchange and in no case less than once every 30 months. 4 As a minimum, approved programmes should be re viewed once every 10 years to ensure their continued viability. In order to ensure uniformity by all involved in the inspection of containers and their ongoing operational safety, the Contracting Party concerned shall ensure the following elements are covered in each prescribed periodic or approved continuous examination programme: (a) methods, scope and criteria to be used during e xaminations; (b) frequency of examinations; (c) qualifications of personnel to carry out exami nations; (d) system of keeping records and documents tha t will capture: (i) the owner’s unique serial number of the containe r; (ii) the date on which the examination was carried out; ( iii) identification of the competent person who carr ied out the examination; (iv) the name and location of the organization where the exa mination was carried out; * Refer to current standard ISO 6346, Freight containers – Coding, identification and marking. Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 22

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 12 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 (v) the results of the examination; and (vi) in the case of a periodic examination scheme (PES ), the next examination date (NED); (e) a system for recording and updating the identifica tion numbers of all containers covered by the appropriate examination scheme; (f) methods and systems for maintenance criteri a that addresses the design characteristics of the specific containers; (g) provisions for maintaining leased conta iners if different than those used for owned containers; and (h) conditions and procedures for adding conta iners into an already approved programme. 5 The Contracting Party shall carry out periodi c audits of approved programmes to ensure compliance with the provisions approved by the Contracting Party. The Contracting Party shall withdraw any approval when the conditions of approval are no longer complied with. 6 For the purpose of this regulation, the Contrac ting Party concerned is the Contracting Party of the territory in which the owner is domiciled or has his head office. However, in the event that the owner is domiciled or has his head office in a country the government of which has not yet made arrangements for prescribing or approving an examination scheme and until such time as the arrangements have been made, the owner may use the procedure prescribed or approved by the Administration of a Contracting Party which is prepared to act as the Contracting Party concerned. The owner shall comply with the conditions for the use of such procedures set by the Administration in question. 7 Administrations shall make information on a pproved continuous examination programmes publicly available. 1.1.3 Dangerous goods forbidden from transport 1.1.3.1 Unless provided otherwise by this Code, th e following are forbidden from transport: Any substance or article which, as presente d for transport, is liable to explode, dangerously react, produce a flame or dangerous evolution of heat or dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of transport . In chapter 3 . 3, special provisions 349, 350, 351, 352, 353 a nd 900 list certain substances, which are forbidden for transport . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 23

13 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Chapter 1.2 Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations 1.2.1 Definitions The following is a list of definitions of general applicability that are used throughout this Code . Additional definitions of a highly speci fic nature are presented in the relevant chapters . For the purposes of this Code: Aerosols or aerosol dispensers means an article consisting of non-refillable receptacles meeting the provisions of 6 . 2 . 4, made of metal, glass or plastics and contai ning a gas compressed, liquefied or dissolved under pressure, with or without a liquid, paste or powder, and fitted with a release device allowing the contents to be ejected as solid or liquid particles in suspension in a gas, as a foam, paste or powder or in a liquid state or in a gaseous state . Alternative arrangement means an approval gran ted by the competent authority for a portable tank or MEGC that has been designed, constructed or tested to technical requirements or testing methods other than those specified in this Code (see, for instance, 6 . 7 . 5 . 11 . 1) . Animal material means animal carcasses, anima l body parts, foodstuffs or feedstuffs derived from animals . Approval Multilateral approval , for the tran sport of radioactive material, means approval by the relevant competent authority of the country of origin of the design or shipment, as applicable, and also, where the consignment is to be transported through or into any other country, approval by the competent authority of that country . Unilateral approval , for the transpo rt of radioactive material, means an approval of a design which is required to be given by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design only . Bags means flexible packagings made of paper, plas tic film, textiles, woven material, or other suitable materials . Barge-carrying ship means a ship specially des igned and equipped to transport shipborne barges . Barge feeder vessel means a vessel spe cially designed and equipped to transport shipborne barges to or from a barge-carrying ship . Boxes means packagings with complet e rectangular or polygonal faces, made of metal, wood, plywood, reconstituted wood, fibreboard, plastics, or other suitable material . Small holes for purposes such as ease of the ha ndling or opening of the box or to meet classification provisions are permitted as long as they do not compromise the integrity of the packaging during transport . Bulk containers are containment systems (in cluding any liner or coating) intended for the transport of solid substances which are in direct contact with the containment system . Packagings, intermediate bulk co ntainers (IBCs), large packagings and portable tanks are not included . Bulk containers: – are of a permanent character and according ly strong enough to be suitable for repeated use; – are specially designed to facilitate the t ransport of goods by one or more means of transport without intermediate reloading; – are fitted with devices permitting ready ha ndling; and – have a capacity of not less than 1 cubic metre . Examples of bulk containers are freight co ntainers, offshore bulk containers, skips, bulk bins, swap bodies, trough-shaped containers, roller containers, load compartments of vehicles or flexible bulk containers . Bundles of cylinders are assemblies of cyli nders that are fastened together and which are interconnected by a manifold and transported as a unit . The total water capacity shall not exceed 3, 000 L except that bundles intended for the transport of gases of class 2 . 3 shall be limited to 1,000 L water capacity . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 24

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 14 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Cargo transport unit means a road transport tank or freight vehicle, a railway transport tank or freight wagon, a multimodal freight container or portable tank, or an MEGC . Carrier means any person, organization or Gov ernment undertaking the transport of dangerous goods by any means of transport . The term includes both carriers for hire or r eward (known as common or contract carriers in some countries) and carriers on own account (known as private carriers in some countries) . Cellular ship means a ship in which containers ar e loaded under deck into specially designed slots giving a permanent stowage of the container during sea transport . Containers loaded on deck in such a ship are sp ecially stacked and secured on fittings . Closed cargo transport unit , with the except ion of class 1, means a cargo transport unit which totally encloses the contents by permanent structures with complete and rigid surfaces . Cargo transport units with fabric sides o r tops are not considered closed cargo transport units; for definition of closed cargo transport unit for class 1, see 7 . 1 . 2 . Closed ro-ro cargo space means a ro-ro cargo sp ace which is neither an open ro-ro cargo space nor a weather deck . Closure means a device which closes an opening i n a receptacle . Combination packagings means a combination o f packagings for transport purposes, consisting of one or more inner packagings secured in an outer packaging in accordance with 4 . 1 . 1 . 5 . Competent authority means any body or author ity designated or otherwise recognized as such for any purpose in connection with this Code . Compliance assurance means a systematic pr ogramme of measures applied by a competent authority which is aimed at ensuring that the provisions of this Code are met in practice . Composite packagings means packagings cons isting of an outer packaging and an inner receptacle so constructed that the inner receptacle and the outer packaging form an integral packaging . Once assembled, it remains thereafter an i ntegrated single unit; it is filled, stored, transported and emptied as such . Confinement system, for the transport of ra dioactive material, means the assembly of fissile material and packaging components specified by the designer and agreed to by the competent authority as intended to preserve criticality safety . Consignee means any person, organization o r Government which is entitled to take delivery of a consignment . Consignment means any package or packages, o r load of dangerous goods, presented by a consignor for transport . Consignor means any person, organization or G overnment which prepares a consignment for transport . Containment system , for the transport of radi oactive material, means the assembly of components of the packaging specified by the designer as intended to retain the radioactive material during transport . Control temperature means the maximum tem perature at which certain substances (such as organic peroxides and self-reactive and related substances) can be safely transported during a prolonged period of time . Conveyance means: . 1 for transport by road or rail: any vehicle, . 2 for transport by water: any ship, or any cargo s pace or defined deck area of a ship, . 3 for transport by air: any aircraft . Crates are outer packagings with incomplete s urfaces . Criticality safety index (CSI) assigne d to a package, overpack or freight container containing fissile material , for the transport of radioactive material, means a number which is used to provide control over the accumulation of packages, overpacks or freight containers containing fissile material . Critical temperature is the temperature abov e which the substance cannot exist in the liquid state . Cryogenic receptacles are transportabl e thermally insulated receptacles for refrigerated liquefied gases, of a water capacity of not more than 1,000 L . CTU Code means the IMO/ILO/UNECE Code of Pr actice for Packing of Cargo Transport Units (MSC . 1/Circ . 1497) . * * Further practical guidance and background information related to the CTU Code are available as informative material (MSC . 1/Circ . 1498) . The CTU Code and the Informative Material may be found at www . unece . org/trans/wp24/guidelinespackingctus/in tro . html . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 25

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations 15 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Cylinders are transportable pressure receptacles of a water capacity not exceeding 150 L . Defined deck area means the area, of the weath er deck of a ship, or of a vehicle deck of a roll-on/roll-off ship, which is allocated for the stowage of dangerous goods . Design , for the transport of radioactive mat erial, means the description of fissile material excepted under 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6, special form radioactive material, low d ispersible radioactive material, package or packaging which enables such an item to be fully identified . The description may include specificat ions, engineering drawings, reports demonstrating compliance with regulatory requirements, and other relevant documentation . Design life , for composite cylinders and tu bes, means the maximum life (in number of years) to which the cylinder or tube is designed and approved in accordance with the applicable standard . Dose rate means the ambient dose equ ivalent or the directional dose equivalent, as appropriate, per unit time, measured at the point of interest . Drums means flat-ended or convex-ended cy lindrical packagings made of metal, fibreboard, plastics, plywood or other suitable materials . This definition also includes packagin gs of other shapes, such as round taper-necked packagings, or pail-shaped packagings . Wooden barrels and jerricans are not co vered by this definition . Elevated temperature substance means a substance which is transported or offered for transport: – in the liquid state at a temperature at or above 1 00 ° C – in the liquid state with a flashpoint above 60 ° C th at is intentionally heated to a temperature above its flashpoint; or – in the solid state at a temperature at or above 24 0 ° C . Emergency temperature means the temperatu re at which emergency procedures shall be implemented . Exclusive use , for the transport of radioact ive material, means the sole use, by a single consignor, of a conveyance or of a large freight container, in respect of which all initial, intermediate and final loading and unloading and shipment are carried out in accordance with the directions of the consignor or consignee, where so required by the provisions of this Code . Filling ratio means the ratio of the mass of gas to the m ass of water at 15 ° C that would fill completely a pressure receptacle fitted ready for use . Flashpoint means the lowest temperature of a l iquid at which its vapour forms an ignitable mixture with air . Foodstuff includes foodstuffs, feeds or ot her edible substances intended for consumption by humans or animals . Freight container means an article of transport equipment that is of a permanent character and accordingly strong enough to be suitable for repeated use; specially designed to facilitate the transport of goods, by one or more modes of transport, without intermediate reloading; designed to be secured and/or readily handled, having fittings for these purposes, and approved in accordance with the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended . In addition: Small freight container mean s a freight container that has an internal volume of not more than 3 m 3 . Large freight container means a freight container that has an inter nal volume of more than 3 m 3 . For freight containers for the trans port of radioactive material, a freight container may be used as a packaging . A small freight container is that which has e ither any overall outer dimension less than 1 . 5 m, or an internal volume of not more than 3 m 3 . Any other freight container is considered to be a large freight container . Fuel cell means an electrochemical devi ce that converts the chemical energy of a fuel to electrical energy, heat and reaction products . Fuel cell engine means a device used t o power equipment and which consists of a fuel cell and its fuel supply, whether integrated with or separate from the fuel cell, and includes all appurtenances necessary to fulfil its function . GHS means the eighth revised edition of the G lobally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals , published by the United Nations as document ST/SG/AC . 10/30/Rev . 8 . IMO type 4 tank means a road tank vehicle for the t ransport of dangerous goods of classes 3 to 9 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis, with at least four twist locks that take account of ISO standards (e . g . ISO 1161:1984) . IMO type 6 tank means a road tank veh icle for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis which is fitted with items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases . ■ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 26

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 16 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 IMO type 8 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached thermally insulated tank fitted with items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases . IMO type 9 tank means a road gas elem ents vehicle for the transport of compressed gases of class 2 with elements linked to each other by a manifold, permanently attached to a chassis, which is fitted with items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases . Elements are cylinders, tubes and bundl es of cylinders, intended for the transport of gases as defined in 2 . 2 . 1 . 1 . Inner packagings means packagings for whic h an outer packaging is required for transport . Inner receptacles means receptacles whi ch require an outer packaging in order to perform their containment function . Inspection body means an independent inspe ction and testing body approved by the competent authority . Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) mea ns rigid or flexible portable packagings, other than specified in chapter 6 . 1, that: . 1 have a capacity of: . 1 not more than 3 . 0 m 3 (3,000 L) for solids and liquids of packing groups II and III; . 2 not more than 1 . 5 m 3 for solids of packing group I when packed in flexible, rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard or wooden IBCs; . 3 not more than 3 . 0 m 3 for solids of packing group I when packed in metal IBCs; . 4 not more than 3 . 0 m 3 for radioactive material of class 7; . 2 are designed for mechanical handling; an d . 3 are resistant to the stresses produced in ha ndling and transport, as determined by tests . Remanufactured IBCs are metal, rigid plas tics or composite IBCs that: . 1 are produced as a UN type from a non-UN type; or . 2 are converted from one UN design type to anoth er UN design type . Remanufactured IBCs are subject to t he same provisions of this Code that apply to new IBCs of the same type (see also design type definition in 6 . 5 . 6 . 1 . 1) . Repaired IBCs are metal, rigid plastics or co mposite IBCs that, as a result of impact or for any other cause (e . g . corrosion, embrittlement or other evi dence of reduced strength as compared to the design type) are restored so as to conform to the design type and to be able to withstand the design type tests . For the purposes of this Code, the replacem ent of the rigid inner receptacle of a composite IBC with a receptacle conforming to the original design type from the same manufacturer is considered repair . However, routine maintenance of rigid I BCs (see definition below) is not considered repair . The bodies of rigid plastics IBCs and the inn er receptacles of composite IBCs are not repairable . Flexible IBCs are not repairable, unles s approved by the competent authority . Routine maintenance of flexible IBCs is the routine performance on plastics or textile flexible IBCs of operations, such as: . 1 cleaning; or . 2 replacement of non-integral componen ts, such as non-integral liners and closure ties, with components conforming to the original manufacturer’s specification; provided that these operations do not adversely affect the containment function of the flexible IBC or alter the design type . Note: For rigid IBCs, see “Routine mainten ance of rigid IBCs” . Routine maintenance of rigid IBCs is the routine performance on metal, rigid plastics or composite IBCs of operations such as: . 1 cleaning; . 2 removal and reinstallation or replacem ent of body closures (including associated gaskets), or of service equipment, conforming to the original manufacturer’s specifications, provided that the leaktightness of the IBC is verified; or . 3 restoration of structural equipment no t directly performing a dangerous goods containment or discharge pressure retention function so as to conform to the design type (e . g . the straightening of legs or lifting atta chments) provided that the containment function of the IBC is not affected . Note: For flexible IBCs, see “Routine maint enance of flexible IBCs” . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 27

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations 17 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Intermediate packagings means packagings placed between inner packagings, or articles, and an outer packaging . Jerricans means metal or plastics packagings of rectangular or polygonal cross-section . Large packagings means packagings consi sting of an outer packaging which contains articles or inner packagings and which: . 1 are designed for mechanical handling; an d . 2 exceed 400 kg net mass or 450 L capacity but have a vo lume of not more than 3 m 3 . Large salvage packaging means a special packag ing which: . 1 is designed for mechanical handling; and . 2 exceeds 400 kg net mass or 450 L capacity but has a vo lume of not more than 3 m ³ ; into which damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming dangerous goods packages, or dangerous goods that have spilled or leaked are placed for purposes of transport for recovery or disposal . Liner means a separate tube or bag inserted int o a packaging (including IBCs and large packagings) but not forming an integral part of it, including the closures of its openings . Liquids are dangerous goods which at 50 ° C have a vap our pressure of not more than 300 kPa (3 bar), which are not completely gaseous at 20 ° C and at a pressure of 101 . 3 kPa, and which have a melting point or initial m elting point of 20 ° C or less at a pressure of 101 . 3 kPa . A viscous substance for which a specific mel ting point cannot be determined shall be subjected to the ASTM D 4359-90 test; or to the test for determining fluidity (penetrometer test) prescribed in section 2 . 3 . 4 of Annex A of the European Agreement concern ing the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) . * Long international voyage means an international voyage that is not a short international voyage . Management system , for the transport of radioactive material, means a set of interrelated or interacting elements (system) for establishing policies and objectives and enabling the objectives to be achieved in an efficient and effective manner . Manual of Tests and Criteria means the sixth rev ised edition of the United Nations publication entitled Manual of Tests and Criteria (ST/SG/AC . 10/11/Rev . 7) . Maximum capacity as used in 6 . 1 . 4 means the maximum inner volume of receptac les or packagings expressed in litres . Maximum net mass as used in 6 . 1 . 4 means the maximum net mass of conte nts in a single packaging or maximum combined mass of inner packagings and the contents thereof and is expressed in kilograms . Maximum normal operating pressure , fo r the transport of radioactive material, means the maximum pressure above atmospheric pressure at mean sea-level that would develop in the containment system in a period of one year under the conditions of temperature and solar radiation corresponding to environmental conditions in the absence of venting, external cooling by an ancillary system, or operational controls during transport . Metal hydride storage system means a singl e complete hydrogen storage system, including a receptacle, metal hydride, pressure relief device, shut-off valve, service equipment and internal components used for the transport of hydrogen only . Multiple-element gas containers (MEGC s) are multimodal assemblies of cylinders, tubes or bundles of cylinders which are interconnected by a manifold and which are assembled within a framework . The MEGC includes service equipment and s tructural equipment necessary for the transport of gases . Net explosive mass (NEM) means the total ma ss of the explosive substances, without the packagings, casings, etc . ( Net explosive quantity (NEQ), net explos ive contents (NEC), or net explosive weight (NEW) are often used to convey the same meaning . ) Neutron radiation detector is a device tha t detects neutron radiation . In such a device, a gas may be contained in a herme tically-sealed electron tube transducer that converts neutron radiation into a measureable electric signal . Offshore bulk container means a bulk contain er specially designed for repeated use for the transport of dangerous goods to, from and between offshore facilities . An offshore bulk container is designed an d constructed in accordance with Guidelines for the approval of offshore containers handled in open seas (MSC/Circ . 860) . Open cargo transport unit means a unit which is no t a closed cargo transport unit . * United Nations Publication: ECE/TRANS/275 (Sales No . E . 20 . VIII . 1) . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 28

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 18 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Open cryogenic receptacle means a transportable thermally insulated receptacle for refrigerated liquefied gases maintained at atmospheric pressure by continuous venting of the refrigerated liquefied gas . Open ro-ro cargo space means a ro-ro c argo space either open at both ends, or open at one end and provided with adequate natural ventilation effective over its entire length through permanent openings in the side plating or deckhead to the satisfaction of the Administration . Outer packaging means the outer protectio n of a composite or combination packaging together with any absorbent materials, cushioning and any other components necessary to contain and protect inner receptacles or inner packagings . Overpack means an enclosure used by a single con signor to contain one or more packages and to form one unit for the convenience of handling and stowage during transport . Examples of overpacks are a numbe r of packages either: . 1 placed or stacked on to a load board, suc h as a pallet, and secured by strapping, shrink-wrapping, stretch-wrapping, or other suitable means; or . 2 placed in a protective outer packaging suc h as a box or crate . Overstowed means that a package or container i s directly stowed on top of another . Package means the complete product of the pac king operation, consisting of the packaging and its contents prepared for transport . Packaging means one or more receptacles and an y other components or materials necessary for the receptacles to perform their containment and other safety functions . Pressure drums are welded transportable p ressure receptacles of a water capacity exceeding 150 L and of not more than 1,000 L (e . g . cylindrical receptacles equipped wi th rolling hoops, spheres on skids) . Pressure receptacles is a collective t erm that includes cylinders, tubes, pressure drums, closed cryogenic receptacles, metal hydride storage systems, bundles of cylinders and salvage pressure receptacles . Quality assurance means a systematic prog ramme of controls and inspections applied by any organization or body which is aimed at providing adequate confidence that the standard of safety prescribed in this Code is achieved in practice . Radiation detection system is an appa ratus that contains radiation detectors as components . Radioactive contents , for the transpor t of radioactive material, mean the radioactive material together with any contaminated or activated solids, liquids, and gases within the packaging . Receptacles means containment vessel s for receiving and holding substances or articles, including any means of closing . Reconditioned packagings include: . 1 metal drums that: . 1 are cleaned to original materials of const ruction, with all former contents, internal and external corrosion, and external coatings and lab els removed; . 2 are restored to original shape and contour , with chimes (if any) straightened and sealed, and all non-integral gaskets replaced; and . 3 are inspected after cleaning, but before p ainting, with rejection of packagings with visible pitting, significant reduction in material thickness, metal fatigue, damaged threads or closures, or other significant defects; . 2 plastic drums and jerricans that: . 1 are cleaned to original materials of const ruction, with all former contents, external coatings and labels removed; . 2 have all non-integral gaskets replaced ; and . 3 are inspected after cleaning, with rejec tion of packagings with visible damage such as tears, creases or cracks, or damaged threads or closures, or other significant defects . Recycled plastics material means mate rial recovered from used industrial packagings that has been cleaned and prepared for processing into new packagings . The specific properties of the rec ycled material used for production of new packagings shall be assured and documented regularly as part of a quality assurance programme recognized by the competent authority . The quality assurance programme shall i nclude a record of proper pre-sorting and verification that each batch of recycled plastics material has the proper melt flow rate, density, and tensile yield strength, consistent with that of the design type manufactured from such recycled material . This necessarily includes knowledge ab out the packaging material from which the ⊗ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 29

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations 19 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 recycled plastics have been derived, as well as awareness of the prior contents of those packagings if those prior contents might reduce the capability of new packagings produced using that material . In addition, the packaging manufactur er’s quality assurance programme under 6 . 1 . 1 . 3 shall include performance of the mechani cal design type test in 6 . 1 . 5 on packagings manufactured from each bat ch of recycled plastics material . In this testing, stacking performance m ay be verified by appropriate dynamic compression testing rather than static load testing . Note: ISO 16103:2005, Packaging – Tr ansport packages for dangerous goods – Recycled plastics material , provides additional guidance on procedures to be followed in approving the use of recycled plastics material . Remanufactured IBCs (see Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)) . Remanufactured large packaging means a metal or rigid plastics large packaging that: . 1 is produced as a UN type from a non-UN type; or . 2 is converted from one UN design type to anothe r UN design type . Remanufactured large packagings a re subject to the same provisions of this Code that apply to new large packagings of the same type (see also design type definition in 6 . 6 . 5 . 1 . 2) . Remanufactured packagings include: . 1 metal drums that: . 1 are produced as a UN type from a non-UN type; . 2 are converted from one UN type to another UN typ e; or . 3 undergo the replacement of integral stru ctural components (such as non-removable heads); or . 2 plastic drums that: . 1 are converted from one UN type to another UN typ e (such as 1H1 to 1H2); or . 2 undergo the replacement of integral stru ctural components . Remanufactured drums are subject to the s ame provisions of this Code that apply to a new drum of the same type . Repaired IBCs (see Intermediate bulk co ntainers (IBCs)) . Re-used large packaging means a large pack aging to be refilled which has been examined and found free of defects affecting the ability to withstand the performance tests: the term includes those which are refilled with the same or similar compatible contents and are transported within distribution chains controlled by the consignor of the product . Re-used packagings means packagings to be r efilled which have been examined and found free of defects affecting the ability to withstand the performance tests; the term includes those which are refilled with the same or similar compatible contents and are transported within distribution chains controlled by the consignor of the product . Road tank vehicle means a vehicle equipped wi th a tank with a capacity of more than 450 L, fitted with pressure-relief devices . Ro-ro cargo space means spaces not normally s ubdivided in any way and extending to either a substantial length or the entire length of the ship in which goods (packaged or in bulk, in or on rail or road cars, vehicles (including road or rail tankers), trailers, containers, pallets, demountable tanks or in or on similar stowage units or other receptacles) can be loaded and unloaded normally in a horizontal direction . Ro-ro ship (roll-on/roll-off ship) means a s hip which has one or more decks, either closed or open, not normally subdivided in any way and generally running the entire length of the ship, carrying goods which are normally loaded and unloaded in a horizontal direction . Routine maintenance of IBCs (see Interme diate bulk containers (IBCs)) . Salvage packagings are special packagings i nto which damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming dangerous goods packages, or dangerous goods that have spilled or leaked, are placed for purposes of transport for recovery or disposal . Salvage pressure receptacle means a p ressure receptacle with a water capacity not exceeding 3,000 L into which are placed damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming pressure receptacle(s) for the purpose of transport, e . g . for recovery or disposal . Self-accelerating decomposition temper ature (SADT) means the lowest temperature at which self-accelerating decomposition may occur in a substance in the packaging, IBC or portable tank as offered for transport . The SADT shall be determined in accordanc e with the test procedures given in Part II, Section 28 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 30

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 20 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Self-accelerating polymerization temperature (SAPT) means the lowest temperature at which self-accelerating polymerization may occur with a substance in the packaging, IBC or portable tank as offered for transport . The SAPT shall be determined in acc ordance with the test procedures established for the self-accelerating decomposition temperature for self-reactive substances in accordance with part II, Section 28 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria . Semi-trailer means any trailer designed to be c oupled to a motor vehicle in such a way that part of it rests on the motor vehicle and a substantial part of its mass and of the mass of its load is borne by the motor vehicle . Service life , for composite cylinders and t ubes, means the number of years the cylinder or tube is permitted to be in service . Settled pressure means the pressure of the con tents of a pressure receptacle in thermal and diffusive equilibrium . Shipborne barge or barge means an independent, non-self-propelled vessel, specially designed and equipped to be lifted in a loaded condition and stowed aboard a barge-carrying ship or barge feeder vessel . Shipment means the specific movement of a consi gnment from origin to destination . Shipper , for the purpose of this Code, has the same m eaning as consignor . Short international voyage means an inter national voyage in the course of which a ship is not more than 200 miles from a port or place in which the passengers and crew could be placed in safety . Neither the distance between the las t port of call in the country in which the voyage begins and the final port of destination nor the return voyage shall exceed 600 miles . The final port of destination is the last port o f call in the scheduled voyage at which the ship commences its return voyage to the country in which the voyage began . Sift-proof packagings are packagings imp ermeable to dry contents, including fine solid material produced during transport . Solid bulk cargo means any material, other th an liquid or gas, consisting of a combination of particles, granules or any larger pieces of material, generally uniform in composition, which is loaded directly into the cargo spaces of a ship without any intermediate form of containment (this includes a material loaded in a barge on a barge-carrying ship) . Solids are dangerous goods, other than gases , that do not meet the definition of liquids in this chapter . Special category space means an encl osed space, above or below deck, intended for the transport of motor vehicles with fuel in their tanks for their own propulsion, into and from which such vehicles can be driven and to which passengers have access . Tank means a portable tank (including a tank- container), a road tank-vehicle, a rail tank-wagon or a receptacle to contain solids, liquids, or liquefied gases and has a capacity of not less than 450 L when used for the transport of gases as defined in 2 . 2 . 1 . 1 . Test pressure means the required pressure ap plied during a pressure test for qualification or requalification (for portable tanks, see 6 . 7 . 2 . 1) . Through or into means through or into the coun tries in which a consignment is transported but specifically excludes countries “over” which a consignment is carried by air, provided that there are no scheduled stops in those countries . Transboundary movement of wastes means any s hipment of wastes from an area under the national jurisdiction of one country to or through an area under the national jurisdiction of another country, or to or through an area not under the national jurisdiction of any country, provided at least two countries are concerned by the movement . Transport index (TI) assigned to a package, ove rpack or freight container, or to unpackaged LSA-I or SCO-I or SCO-III , for the transport of radioactive material, means a number which is used to provide control over radiation exposure . Tube means a transportable pressure recep tacle of seamless or composite construction having a water capacity exceeding 150 L and of not more than 3,000 L . Unit load means that a number of packages are ei ther: . 1 placed or stacked on and secured by strappin g, shrink-wrapping, or other suitable means to a load board, such as a pallet; . 2 placed in a protective outer enclosure, su ch as a pallet box; . 3 permanently secured together in a sling . Vehicle means a road vehicle (including an ar ticulated vehicle, i . e . a tractor and semi-trailer combinatio n) or railroad car or railway wagon . Each trailer shall be considered as a separ ate vehicle . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 31

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations 21 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Wastes means substances, solutions, mixtures, or articles containing or contaminated with one or more constituents which are subject to the provisions of this Code and for which no direct use is envisaged but which are transported for dumping, incineration, or other methods of disposal . Water-reactive means a substance which, i n contact with water, emits flammable gas . Weather deck means a deck which is completely e xposed to the weather from above and from at least two sides . Wooden barrels means packagings made of natur al wood, of round cross-section, having convex walls, consisting of staves and heads and fitted with hoops . Working pressure means the settled pressur e of a compressed gas at a reference temperature of 15 ° C in a full pressure receptacle . 1.2.1.1 Clarifying examples for certain defined te rms The following explanations and examples are meant to assist in clarifying the use of some of the packaging terms defined in this chapter . The definitions in this chapter are consist ent with the use of the defined terms throughout the Code . However, some of the defined terms are commo nly used in other ways . This is particularly evident in respect o f the term “inner receptacle” which has often been used to describe the “inners” of a combination packaging . The “inners” of “combination packagings” are a lways termed “inner packagings”, not “inner receptacles” . A glass bottle is an example of such an “inner pac kaging” . The “inners” of “composite packagings” are no rmally termed “inner receptacles” . For example, the “inner” of a 6HA1 composite p ackaging (plastics material) is such an “inner receptacle” since it is normally not designed to perform a containment function without its “outer packaging” and is not, therefore, an “inner packaging” . 1.2.2 Units of measurement 1.2.2.1 The following units of measurement * are applicable in this Code: Measurement of: SI unit a Acceptable alternative unit Relationship between units Length m (metre) – – Area m 2 (square metre) – – Volume m 3 (cubic metre) L b (litre) 1 L = 10 - 3 m 3 Time s (second) min (minute) h (hour) d (day) 1 min = 60 s 1 h = 3,600 s 1 d = 86,400 s Mass kg (kilogram) g (gram) t (ton) 1 g = 10 - 3 kg 1 t = 10 3 kg Mass density kg / m 3 kg/L 1 kg/L = 10 3 kg/m 3 Temperature K (kelvin) ° C (degree Celsius) 0 ° C = 273 . 15 K Difference of temperature K (kelvin) ° C (degree Celsius) 1 ° C = 1 K Force N (newton) – 1 N = 1 kg · m/s 2 Pressure Pa (pascal) bar (bar) 1 bar = 10 5 Pa 1 Pa = 1 N/m 2 Stress N/m 2 N/mm 2 1 N/mm 2 = 1 MPa Work Energy Quantity of heat } J (joule) kWh (kilowatt hour) eV (electronvolt) 1 kWh = 3 . 6 MJ 1 J = 1 N · m = 1 W · s 1 eV = 0 . 1602 × 10 - 18 J Power W (watt) – 1 W = 1 J/s = 1 N · m/s Kinematic viscosity m 2 / s mm 2 / s 1 mm 2 /s = 10 - 6 m 2 /s Dynamic viscosity Pa · s mPa · s 1 mPa · s = 10 - 3 Pa · s * The following round figures are applicable for the conversion of the units hitherto used into SI units . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 32

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 22 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Measurement of: SI unit a Acceptable alternative unit Relationship between units Activity Bq (becquerel) – – Dose equivalent Sv (sievert) – – Conductivity S / m (siemens / metre) – – a The International System of Units (SI) is the result of decisions taken at the General Conference on Weights and Measures (Address: Pavillon de Breteuil, Parc de St-Cloud, F-92312 Sèvres) . b The abbreviation “ ℓ ” for litre may also be used in place of the abbreviation “L” . Force Stress 1 kg = 9 . 807 N 1 kg/mm 2 = 9 . 807 N/mm 2 1 N = 0 . 102 kg 1 N/mm 2 = 0 . 102 kg/mm 2 Pressure 1 Pa = 1 N/m 2 = 10 - 5 bar = 1 . 02 × 10 - 5 kg/cm 2 = 0 . 75 × 10 - 2 torr 1 bar = 10 5 Pa = 1 . 02 kg/cm 2 = 750 torr 1 kg/cm 2 = 9 . 807 × 10 4 Pa = 0 . 9807 bar = 736 torr 1 torr = 1 . 33 × 10 2 Pa = 1 . 33 × 10 - 3 bar = 1 . 36 × 10 - 3 kg/cm 2 Energy, work, quantity of heat 1 J = 1 N · m = 0 . 278 × 10 - 6 kWh = 0 . 102 kg · m = 0 . 239 × 10 - 3 kcal 1 kWh = 3 . 6 × 10 6 J = 367 × 10 3 kg · m = 860 kcal 1 kg · m = 9 . 807 J = 2 . 72 × 10 - 6 kWh = 2 . 34 × 10 - 3 kcal 1 kcal = 4 . 19 × 10 3 J = 1 . 16 × 10 - 3 kWh = 427 kg · m Power Kinematic viscosity 1 W = 0 . 102 kg · m/s = 0 . 86 kcal/h 1 m 2 /s = 10 4 St (stokes) 1 kg · m/s = 9 . 807 W = 8 . 43 kcal/h 1 St = 10 - 4 m 2 /s 1 kcal/h = 1 . 16 W = 0 . 119 kg · m/s Dynamic viscosity 1 Pa · s = 1 N · s/m 2 = 10 P (poise) = 0 . 102 kg · s/m 2 1 P = 0 . 1 Pa · s = 0 . 1 N · s/m 2 = 1 . 02 × 10 - 2 kg · s/m 2 1 kg · s/m 2 = 9 . 807 Pa · s = 9 . 807 N · s/m 2 = 98 . 07 P The decimal multiples and sub-multiples of a unit may be formed by prefixes or symbols, having the following meanings, placed before the name or symbol of the unit: Multiplying factor Prefix Symbol 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 = 10 18 quintillion exa E 1 000 000 000 000 000 = 10 15 quadrillion peta P 1 000 000 000 000 = 10 12 trillion tera T 1 000 000 000 = 10 9 billion giga G 1 000 000 = 10 6 million mega M 1 000 = 10 3 thousand kilo k 100 = 10 2 hundred hecto h 10 = 10 1 ten deca da 0 . 1 = 10 - 1 tenth deci d 0 . 01 = 10 - 2 hundredth centi c 0 . 001 = 10 - 3 thousandth milli m 0 . 000 001 = 10 - 6 millionth micro μ 0 . 000 000 001 = 10 - 9 billionth nano n 0 . 000 000 000 001 = 10 - 12 trillionth pico p 0 . 000 000 000 000 001 = 10 - 15 quadrillionth femto f 0 . 000 000 000 000 000 001 = 10 - 18 quintillionth atto a Note: 10 9 = 1 billion is United Nations usage in English . By analogy, so is 10 - 9 = 1 billionth . 1.2.2.2 [Reserved] 1.2.2.3 Whenever the mass of a package is mentioned, th e gross mass is meant unless otherwise stated . The mass of containers or tanks used for the tr ansport of goods is not included in the gross mass . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 33

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations 23 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 1.2.2.4 Unless expressly stated otherwise, the s ign “%” represents: .1 in the case of mixtures of solids or of liquids, a nd also in the case of solutions and of solids wetted by a liquid: a percentage mass based on the total mass of the mixture, the solution or the wetted solid; .2 in the case of mixtures of compresse d gases: when filled by pressure, the proportion of the volume indicated as a percentage of the total volume of the gaseous mixture, or, when filled by mass, the proportion of the mass indicated as a percentage of the total mass of the mixture; .3 in the case of mixtures of liquefied gases and ga ses dissolved under pressure: the proportion of the mass indicated as a percentage of the total mass of the mixture . 1.2.2.5 Pressures of all kinds relating to recepta cles (such as test pressure, internal pressure, safety-valve opening pressure) are always indicated in gauge pressure (pressure in excess of atmospheric pressure); however, the vapour pressure of substances is always expressed in absolute pressure . 1.2.2.6 Tables of equivalence 1.2.2.6.1 Mass conversion tables 1.2.2.6.1.1 Conversion factors Multiply by to obtain Grams 0 . 03527 Ounces Grams 0 . 002205 Pounds Kilograms 35 . 2736 Ounces Kilograms 2 . 2046 Pounds Ounces 28 . 3495 Grams Pounds 16 Ounces Pounds 453 . 59 Grams Pounds 0 . 45359 Kilograms Hundredweight 112 Pounds Hundre dweight 50 . 802 Kilograms 1.2.2.6.1.2 Pounds to kilograms and vice versa When the central value in any row of these mass conversion tables is taken to be in pounds, its equivalent value in kilograms is shown on the left; when the central value is in kilograms, its equivalent in pounds is shown on the right . ← → ← → ← → kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb 0 . 227 0 . 5 1 . 10 22 . 7 50 110 90 . 7 200 441 0 . 454 1 2 . 20 24 . 9 55 121 95 . 3 210 463 0 . 907 2 4 . 41 27 . 2 60 132 99 . 8 220 485 1 . 36 3 6 . 61 29 . 5 65 143 102 225 496 1 . 81 4 8 . 82 31 . 8 70 154 104 230 507 2 . 27 5 11 . 0 34 . 0 75 165 109 240 529 2 . 72 6 13 . 2 36 . 3 80 176 113 250 551 3 . 18 7 15 . 4 38 . 6 85 187 118 260 573 3 . 63 8 17 . 6 40 . 8 90 198 122 270 595 4 . 08 9 19 . 8 43 . 1 95 209 125 275 606 4 . 54 10 22 . 0 45 . 4 100 220 127 280 617 4 . 99 11 24 . 3 47 . 6 105 231 132 290 639 5 . 44 12 26 . 5 49 . 9 110 243 136 300 661 5 . 90 13 28 . 7 52 . 2 115 254 159 350 772 6 . 35 14 30 . 9 54 . 4 120 265 181 400 882 6 . 80 15 33 . 1 56 . 7 125 276 204 450 992 7 . 26 16 35 . 3 59 . 0 130 287 227 500 1,102 7 . 71 17 37 . 5 61 . 2 135 298 247 545 1,202 8 . 16 18 39 . 7 63 . 5 140 309 249 550 1,213 8 . 62 19 41 . 9 65 . 8 145 320 272 600 1,323 9 . 07 20 44 . 1 68 . 0 150 331 318 700 1,543 11 . 3 25 55 . 1 72 . 6 160 353 363 800 1,764 13 . 6 30 66 . 1 77 . 1 170 375 408 900 1,984 15 . 9 35 77 . 2 79 . 4 175 386 454 1,000 2,205 18 . 1 40 88 . 2 81 . 6 180 397 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 34

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 24 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 ← → ← → ← → kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb 20 . 4 45 99 . 2 86 . 2 190 419 1.2.2.6.2 Liquid measure conversion tables 1.2.2. 6.2.1 Conversion factors Multiply by to obtain Litres 0 . 2199 Imperial gallons Litres 1 . 759 Imperial pints Litres 0 . 2643 US gallons Litres 2 . 113 US pints Gallons 8 Pints Imperial gallons 4 . 546 Litres Imperial gallons } 1 . 20095 { US gallons Imperial pints US pints Imperial pints 0 . 568 Litres US gallons 3 . 7853 Litres US gallons } 0 . 83268 { Imperial gallons US pints Imperial pints US pints 0 . 473 Litres 1.2.2.6.2.2 Imperial pints to litres and vice versa When the central value in any row of these liquid measure conversion tables is taken to be in pints, its equivalent value in litres is shown on the left; when the central value is in litres, its equivalent in pints is shown on the right . ← → L pt L pt 0 . 28 0 . 5 0 . 88 0 . 57 1 1 . 76 0 . 85 1 . 5 2 . 64 1 . 14 2 3 . 52 1 . 42 2 . 5 4 . 40 1 . 70 3 5 . 28 1 . 99 3 . 5 6 . 16 2 . 27 4 7 . 04 2 . 56 4 . 5 7 . 92 2 . 84 5 8 . 80 3 . 12 5 . 5 9 . 68 3 . 41 6 10 . 56 3 . 69 6 . 5 11 . 44 3 . 98 7 12 . 32 4 . 26 7 . 5 13 . 20 4 . 55 8 14 . 08 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 35

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations 25 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 1.2.2.6.2.3 Imperial gallons to litres and vice versa When the central value in any row of these liquid measure conversion tables is taken to be in gallons, its equivalent value in litres is shown on the lef t; when the central value is in litres, its equivalent in gallons is shown on the right . ← → ← → L gal L gal L gal L gal 2 . 27 0 . 5 0 . 11 159 . 11 35 7 . 70 4 . 55 1 0 . 22 163 . 65 36 7 . 92 9 . 09 2 0 . 44 168 . 20 37 8 . 14 13 . 64 3 0 . 66 172 . 75 38 8 . 36 18 . 18 4 0 . 88 177 . 29 39 8 . 58 22 . 73 5 1 . 10 181 . 84 40 8 . 80 27 . 28 6 1 . 32 186 . 38 41 9 . 02 31 . 82 7 1 . 54 190 . 93 42 9 . 24 36 . 37 8 1 . 76 195 . 48 43 9 . 46 40 . 91 9 1 . 98 200 . 02 44 9 . 68 45 . 46 10 2 . 20 204 . 57 45 9 . 90 50 . 01 11 2 . 42 209 . 11 46 10 . 12 54 . 55 12 2 . 64 213 . 66 47 10 . 34 59 . 10 13 2 . 86 218 . 21 48 10 . 56 63 . 64 14 3 . 08 222 . 75 49 10 . 78 68 . 19 15 3 . 30 227 . 30 50 11 . 00 72 . 74 16 3 . 52 250 . 03 55 12 . 09 77 . 28 17 3 . 74 272 . 76 60 13 . 20 81 . 83 18 3 . 96 295 . 49 65 14 . 29 86 . 37 19 4 . 18 318 . 22 70 15 . 40 90 . 92 20 4 . 40 340 . 95 75 16 . 49 95 . 47 21 4 . 62 363 . 68 80 17 . 60 100 . 01 22 4 . 84 386 . 41 85 18 . 69 104 . 56 23 5 . 06 409 . 14 90 19 . 80 109 . 10 24 5 . 28 431 . 87 95 20 . 89 113 . 65 25 5 . 50 454 . 60 100 22 . 00 118 . 19 26 5 . 72 613 . 71 135 29 . 69 122 . 74 27 5 . 94 681 . 90 150 32 . 98 127 . 29 28 6 . 16 909 . 20 200 43 . 99 131 . 83 29 6 . 38 1,022 . 85 225 49 . 48 136 . 38 30 6 . 60 1,136 . 50 250 54 . 97 140 . 92 31 6 . 82 1,363 . 80 300 65 . 99 145 . 47 32 7 . 04 1,591 . 10 350 76 . 96 150 . 02 33 7 . 26 1,818 . 40 400 87 . 99 154 . 56 34 7 . 48 2,045 . 70 450 98 . 95 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 36

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 26 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 1.2.2.6.3 Temperature conversion tables Degrees F ahrenheit to degrees Celsius and vice versa When the central value in any row of these temperature conversion tables is taken to be in ° F, its equivalent value in ° C is shown on the left; when the central value is in ° C, its equivalent in ° F is shown on the right . General formula: ° F = ( ° C × 9 _ 5 ) + 32; ° C = ( ° F – 32) × 5 _ 9 ← → ← → ← → ° C ° F ° C ° F ° C ° F ° C ° F ° C ° F ° C ° F - 73 . 3 - 100 - 148 - 21 . 1 - 6 21 . 2 1 . 1 34 93 . 2 - 67 . 8 - 90 - 130 - 20 . 6 - 5 23 . 0 1 . 7 35 95 - 62 . 2 - 80 - 112 - 20 . 0 - 4 24 . 8 2 . 2 36 96 . 8 - 56 . 7 - 70 - 94 - 19 . 4 - 3 26 . 6 2 . 8 37 98 . 6 - 51 . 1 - 60 - 76 - 18 . 9 - 2 28 . 4 3 . 3 38 100 . 4 - 45 . 6 - 50 - 58 - 18 . 3 - 1 30 . 2 3 . 9 39 102 . 2 - 40 - 40 - 40 - 17 . 8 0 32 . 0 4 . 4 40 104 - 39 . 4 - 39 - 38 . 2 - 17 . 2 1 33 . 8 5 41 105 . 8 - 38 . 9 - 38 - 36 . 4 - 16 . 7 2 35 . 6 5 . 6 42 107 . 6 - 38 . 3 - 37 - 34 . 6 - 16 . 1 3 37 . 4 6 . 1 43 109 . 4 - 37 . 8 - 36 - 32 . 8 - 15 . 6 4 39 . 2 6 . 7 44 111 . 2 - 37 . 2 - 35 - 31 - 15 . 0 5 41 . 0 7 . 2 45 113 - 36 . 7 - 34 - 29 . 2 - 14 . 4 6 42 . 8 7 . 8 46 114 . 8 - 36 . 1 - 33 - 27 . 4 - 13 . 9 7 44 . 6 8 . 3 47 116 . 6 - 35 . 6 - 32 - 25 . 6 - 13 . 3 8 46 . 4 8 . 9 48 118 . 4 - 35 - 31 - 23 . 8 - 12 . 8 9 48 . 2 9 . 4 49 120 . 2 - 34 . 4 - 30 - 22 - 12 . 2 10 50 . 0 10 . 0 50 122 . 0 - 33 . 9 - 29 - 20 . 2 - 11 . 7 11 51 . 8 10 . 6 51 123 . 8 - 33 . 3 - 28 - 18 . 4 - 11 . 1 12 53 . 6 11 . 1 52 125 . 6 - 32 . 8 - 27 - 16 . 6 - 10 . 6 13 55 . 4 11 . 7 53 127 . 4 - 32 . 2 - 26 - 14 . 8 - 10 . 0 14 57 . 2 12 . 2 54 129 . 2 - 31 . 7 - 25 - 13 - 9 . 4 15 59 . 0 12 . 8 55 131 . 0 - 31 . 1 - 24 - 11 . 2 - 8 . 9 16 60 . 8 13 . 3 56 132 . 8 - 30 . 6 - 23 - 9 . 4 - 8 . 3 17 62 . 6 13 . 9 57 134 . 6 - 30 - 22 - 7 . 6 - 7 . 8 18 64 . 4 14 . 4 58 136 . 4 - 29 . 4 - 21 - 5 . 8 - 7 . 2 19 66 . 2 15 . 0 59 138 . 2 - 28 . 9 - 20 - 4 - 6 . 7 20 68 15 . 6 60 140 . 0 - 28 . 3 - 19 - 2 . 2 - 6 . 1 21 69 . 8 16 . 1 61 141 . 8 - 27 . 8 - 18 - 0 . 4 - 5 . 6 22 71 . 6 16 . 7 62 143 . 6 - 27 . 2 - 17 1 . 4 - 5 23 73 . 4 17 . 2 63 145 . 4 - 26 . 7 - 16 3 . 2 - 4 . 4 24 75 . 2 17 . 8 64 147 . 2 - 26 . 1 - 15 5 - 3 . 9 25 77 18 . 3 65 149 . 0 - 25 . 6 - 14 6 . 8 - 3 . 3 26 78 . 8 18 . 9 66 150 . 8 - 25 . 0 - 13 8 . 6 - 2 . 8 27 80 . 6 19 . 4 67 152 . 6 - 24 . 4 - 12 10 . 4 - 2 . 2 28 82 . 4 20 . 0 68 154 . 4 - 23 . 9 - 11 12 . 2 - 1 . 7 29 84 . 2 20 . 6 69 156 . 2 - 23 . 3 - 10 14 . 0 - 1 . 1 30 86 21 . 1 70 158 . 0 - 22 . 8 - 9 15 . 8 - 0 . 6 31 87 . 8 21 . 7 71 159 . 8 - 22 . 2 - 8 17 . 6 0 32 89 . 6 22 . 2 72 161 . 6 - 21 . 7 - 7 19 . 4 0 . 6 33 91 . 4 22 . 8 73 163 . 4 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 37

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations 27 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 ← → ← → ← → ° C ° F ° C ° F ° C ° F ° C ° F ° C ° F ° C ° F 23 . 3 74 165 . 2 37 . 8 100 212 52 . 2 126 258 . 8 23 . 9 75 167 . 0 38 . 3 101 213 . 8 52 . 8 127 260 . 6 24 . 4 76 168 . 8 38 . 9 102 215 . 6 53 . 3 128 262 . 4 25 . 0 77 170 . 6 39 . 4 103 217 . 4 53 . 9 129 264 . 2 25 . 6 78 172 . 4 40 104 219 . 2 54 . 4 130 266 . 0 26 . 1 79 174 . 2 40 . 6 105 221 55 . 0 131 267 . 8 26 . 7 80 176 . 0 41 . 1 106 222 . 8 55 . 6 132 269 . 6 27 . 2 81 177 . 8 41 . 7 107 224 . 6 56 . 1 133 271 . 4 27 . 8 82 179 . 6 42 . 2 108 226 . 4 56 . 7 134 273 . 2 28 . 3 83 181 . 4 42 . 8 109 228 . 2 57 . 2 135 275 . 0 28 . 9 84 183 . 2 43 . 3 110 230 57 . 8 136 276 . 8 29 . 4 85 185 43 . 9 111 231 . 8 58 . 3 137 278 . 6 30 86 186 . 8 44 . 4 112 233 . 6 58 . 9 138 280 . 4 30 . 6 87 188 . 6 45 113 235 . 4 59 . 4 139 282 . 2 31 . 1 88 190 . 4 45 . 6 114 237 . 2 60 . 0 140 284 . 0 31 . 7 89 192 . 2 46 . 1 115 239 . 0 65 . 6 150 302 . 0 32 . 2 90 194 46 . 7 116 240 . 8 71 . 1 160 320 . 0 32 . 8 91 195 . 8 47 . 2 117 242 . 6 76 . 7 170 338 . 0 33 . 3 92 197 . 6 47 . 8 118 244 . 4 82 . 2 180 356 . 0 33 . 9 93 199 . 4 48 . 3 119 246 . 2 87 . 8 190 374 . 0 34 . 4 94 201 . 2 48 . 9 120 248 . 0 93 . 3 200 392 . 0 35 95 203 49 . 4 121 249 . 8 98 . 9 210 410 . 0 35 . 6 96 204 . 8 50 . 0 122 251 . 6 104 . 4 220 428 . 0 36 . 1 97 206 . 6 50 . 6 123 253 . 4 110 . 0 230 446 . 0 36 . 7 98 208 . 4 51 . 1 124 255 . 2 115 . 6 240 464 . 0 37 . 2 99 210 . 2 51 . 7 125 257 . 0 121 . 1 250 482 . 0 1.2.3 List of abbreviations ASTM American Society for Testing and Materia ls (ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P . O . Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA, 19428- 2959, United States of America) CGA Compressed Gas Association (CGA, 14501 Ge orge Carter Way, Suite 103, Chantilly, VA 20151, United States of America) CCC IMO Sub-Committee on Carriage of Cargoes and Containers CSC International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended ECOSOC Economic and Social Council (UN) EmS The EmS Guide: Revised Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods EN (standard) European standard published by the Europ ean Committee for Standardization (CEN) (CEN, 36 rue de Stassart, B-1050 Brussels, Belgium) FAO Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO, Viale delle Terme di Caracalla, 00100 Rome, Italy) HNS Convention International Convention on Liabilit y and Compensation for Damage in Connection with the Carriage of Hazardous and Noxious Substances by Sea (IMO) IAEA International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA, P . O . Box 100, A – 1400 Vienna, Austria) ICAO International Civil Aviation Organiz ation (ICAO, 999 University Street, Montreal, Quebec H3C 5H7, Canada) IEC International Electrotechnical Com mission (IEC, 3 rue de Varembé, P . O . Box 131, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland) ⊗ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 38

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 28 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 ILO International Labour Organization/ Office (ILO, 4 route des Morillons, CH-1211 Geneva 22, Switzerland) IMGS International Medical Guide for Ships IMO International Maritime Organizatio n (IMO, 4 Albert Embankment, London SE1 7SR, United Kingdom) IMDG Code International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code IMSBC Code International Maritime Solid Bulk Cargoes Code INF Code International Code for the Safe Carriage o f Packaged Irradiated Nuclear Fuel, Plutonium and High-Level Radioactive Wastes on board Ships ISO (standard) An international standard published by t he International Organization for Standardization (ISO, 1, ch . de la Voie-Creuse, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Swi tzerland) MARPOL International Convention for the Preve ntion of Pollution from Ships, 1973 , as amended by the 1978 and 1997 Protocols relating thereto MAWP Maximum allowable working pressure MEPC Marine Environment Protection Committee (IMO) MFAG Medical First Aid Guide for use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods MSC Maritime Safety Committee (IMO) N . O . S . not otherwise specified SADT self-accelerating d ecomposition temperature SAPT self-accelerating polymerization temperature SOLAS International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 , as amended UNECE United Nations Economic Commission for E urope (UNECE, Palais des Nations, 8–14 avenue de la Paix, CH-1211 Geneva 10, Switzerland) UN number four-digit United Nations number is assi gned to dangerous, hazardous and harmful substances, materials and articles most commonly transported UNEP United Nations Environment Programme ( United Nations Avenue, Gigiri, PO Box 30552, 00100, Nairobi, Kenya) UNESCO/IOC UN Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization/Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission (UNESCO/IOC, 1 rue Miollis, 75732 Paris Cedex 15, France) WHO World Health Organization (Avenue Appia 20, CH-1211 Geneva 27, Switzerland) WMO World Meteorological Organization (W MO, 7bis, avenue de la Paix, Case postale No . 2300, CH-1211 Geneva 2, Switzerland) Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 39

29 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Chapter 1.3 Training 1.3.0 Introductory note The successful application of regulations concerning the transport of dangerous goods and the achievement of their objectives are greatly dependent on the appreciation by all persons concerned of the risks involved and on a detailed understanding of the regulations . This can only be achieved by properly plann ed and maintained initial and retraining programmes for all persons concerned with the transport of dangerous goods . The provisions of paragraphs 1 . 3 . 1 . 4 to 1 . 3 . 1 . 7 remain recommendatory (see 1 . 1 . 1 . 5) . 1.3.1 Training of shore-side personnel 1.3.1.1 Shore-based personnel * engaged in the transport of dangerous goods intended to be transported by sea shall be trained in the contents of dangerous goods provisions commensurate with their responsibilities . Employees shall be trained in accordanc e with the provisions of 1 . 3 . 1 before assuming responsibilities and s hall only perform functions, for which required training has not yet been provided, under the direct supervision of a trained person . Training requirements specific to sec urity of dangerous goods in chapter 1 . 4 shall also be addressed . Entities engaging shore-based person nel in such activities shall determine which staff will be trained, what levels of training they require and the training methods used to enable them to comply with the provisions of the IMDG Code . This training shall be provided or verifie d upon employment in a position involving dangerous goods transport . For personnel who have not yet received the r equired training, the entities shall ensure that those personnel may only perform functions under the direct supervision of a trained person . The training shall be periodically s upplemented with refresher training to take account of changes in regulations and practice . The competent authority, or its authori zed body, may audit the entity to verify the effectiveness of the system in place, in providing training of staff commensurate with their role and responsibilities in the transport chain . 1.3.1.2 Shore-based personnel such as those who: – classify dangerous goods and identify pr oper shipping names of dangerous goods; – pack dangerous goods; – mark, label or placard dangerous goods; – load/unload cargo transport units; – prepare transport documents for danger ous goods; – offer dangerous goods for transport; – accept dangerous goods for transport; – handle dangerous goods in transport; – prepare dangerous goods loading/stowage p lans; – load/unload dangerous goods into/from ship s; – carry dangerous goods in transport; – enforce or survey or inspect for complianc e with applicable rules and regulations; or – are otherwise involved in the transport of d angerous goods as determined by the competent authority shall be trained in the following: 1.3.1.2.1 General awareness/familiarization training : .1 each person shall be trained in order to be familiar with the general provisions of dangerous goods transport provisions; * For the training of officers and ratings responsible for cargo handling on ships carrying dangerous and hazardous substances in solid form in bulk, or in packaged form, see the STCW Code, as amended . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 40

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 30 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 .2 such training shall include a description of the classes of dangerous goods; labelling, marking, placarding, packing, stowage, segregation and compat ibility provisions; a description of the purpose and content of the dangerous goods transport documents (such as the Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form and the Container/Vehicle Packing Certificate); and a description of available emergency response documents . 1.3.1.2.2 Function-specific training: Each person shall be trained in specific dangerous goods transport provisions which are applicable to the function that person performs . An indicative list, for guidance purpos es only, of some of the functions typically found in dangerous goods transport operations by sea and training requirements is given in paragraph 1 . 3 . 1 . 6 . 1.3.1.3 Records of training received according t o this chapter shall be kept by the employer and made available to the employee or competent authority, upon request . Records shall be kept by the employer for a per iod of time established by the competent authority . 1.3.1.4 Safety training : Commensurate with the ris k of exposure in the event of a release and the functions performed, each person should be trained in: .1 methods and procedures for accident avoi dance, such as proper use of package-handling equipment and appropriate methods of stowage of dangerous goods; .2 available emergency response informa tion and how to use it; .3 general dangers presented by the various c lasses of dangerous goods and how to prevent exposure to those hazards, including, if appropriate, the use of personal protective clothing and equipment; and .4 immediate procedures to be followed in the e vent of an unintentional release of dangerous goods, including any emergency response procedures for which the person is responsible and personal protection procedures to be followed . 1.3.1.5 Recommended training needs for shore-si de personnel involved in the transport of dangerous goods under the IMDG Code The following indicative table is for information purposes only as every entity is arranged differently and may have varied roles and responsibilities within that entity . Function Specific training requirements Numbers in this column refer to the list of related codes and publications in 1.3.1.7 1 Classify dangerous goods and identify pr oper shipping name Classification requirements, in particular – the structure of the description of substa nces – the classes of dangerous goods and the princ iples of their classification – the nature of the dangerous substances and a rticles transported (their physical, chemical and toxicological properties) – the procedure for classifying solutions and mixtures – identification by proper shipping name – use of Dangerous Goods List . 1, . 4, . 5 and . 12 2 Pack dangerous goods Classes Packaging re quirements – type of packages (IBC, large packaging, tank co ntainer and bulk container) – UN marking for approved packagings – segregation requirements – limited quantities and excepted quantit ies Marking and labelling First aid measures Emergency response procedures Safe handling procedures . 1 and . 4 3 Mark, label or placard dangerous goods Classe s Marking, labelling and placarding requirements – primary and subsidiary hazard labels – marine pollutants – limited quantities and excepted quantit ies . 1 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 41

Chapter 1.3 – Training 31 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Function Specific training requirements Numbers in this column refer to the list of related codes and publications in 1.3.1.7 4 Load/unload cargo transport units Documenta tion Classes Marking, labelling and placarding Stowage requirements, where applicable Segregation requirements Cargo securing requirements (as contained in the CTU Code) Emergency response procedures First aid measures CSC requirements Safe handling procedures . 1, . 6, . 7 and . 8 5 Prepare transport documents for dangerous go ods Documentation requirements – transport document – container/vehicle packing certificate – competent authorities’ approval – waste transport documentation – special documentation, where appropriate . 1 6 Offer dangerous goods for transport Thor ough knowledge of the IMDG Code Local requirements at loading and discharge ports – port byelaws – national transport regulations . 1 to . 10 and . 12 7 Accept dangerous goods for transport Tho rough knowledge of the IMDG Code Local requirements at loading, transiting and discharge ports – port byelaws, in particular quantity lim itations – national transport regulations . 1 to . 12 8 Handle dangerous goods in transport Cla sses and their hazards Marking, labelling and placarding Emergency response procedures First aid measures Safe handling procedures such as – use of equipment – appropriate tools – safe working loads CSC requirements, local r equirements at loading, transit and discharge ports Port byelaws, in particular, quantity limitation National transport regulations . 1, . 2, . 3, . 6, . 7, . 8 and . 10 9 Prepare dangerous goods loading/ stowage p lans Documentation Classes Stowage requirements Segregation requirements Document of compliance Relevant IMDG Code parts, local requirements at loading, transit and discharge ports Port byelaws, in particular, quantity limitations . 1, . 10, . 11 and . 12 10 Load/unload dangerous goods into/ from ships Cl asses and their hazards Marking, labelling and placarding Emergency response procedures First aid measures Safe handling procedures such as – use of equipment – appropriate tools – safe working loads Cargo securing requirem ents CSC requirements, local requirements at loading, transit and discharge ports Port byelaws, in particular, quantity limitation National transport regulations . 1, . 2, . 3, . 7, . 9, . 10 and . 12 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 42

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 32 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Function Specific training requirements Numbers in this column refer to the list of related codes and publications in 1.3.1.7 11 Carry dangerous goods Documentation Clas ses Marking, labelling and placarding Stowage requirements, where applicable Segregation requirements Local requirements at loading, transit and discharge ports – port byelaws, in particular, quantity li mitations – national transport regulations Cargo secur ing requirements (as contained in the CTU Code) Emergency response procedures First aid measures CSC requirements Safe handling procedures . 1, . 2, . 3, . 6, . 7, . 10, . 11 and . 12 12 Enforce or survey or inspect for compliance w ith applicable rules and regulations Knowledge of IMDG Code and relevant guidelines and safety procedures . 1 to . 13 13 Are otherwise involved in the transport of d angerous goods, as determined by the competent authority As required by the competent authority commensurate with the task assigned – 1.3.1.6 Indicative table describing sections of the IM DG Code or other relevant instruments that may be appropriate to be considered in any training for the transport of dangerous goods Function IMDG Code part/section SOLAS chapter II-2/19 Port byelaws National transport regulations CSC CTU Code Emergency response procedures First aid measures Safe handling procedures 1 2 2.0 3 4 5 6 6 * 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 1 Classify X X X X X 2 Pack X X X X X X X X X X X X 3 Mark, label, placard X X X 4 Load/unload cargo transport units X X X X X X X X X X X X X 5 Prepare transport documents X X X X X X X 6 Offer for transport X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 7 Accept for transport X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 Handle in transport X X X X X X X X X X X X 9 Prepare loading/ stowage plans X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10 Load/unload from ships X X X X X X X X X X X X X 11 Carry X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X * Only sections 6 . 1 . 2, 6 . 1 . 3, 6 . 5 . 2, 6 . 6 . 3, 6 . 7 . 2 . 20, 6 . 7 . 3 . 16 and 6 . 7 . 4 . 15 apply . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 43

Chapter 1.3 – Training 33 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 1.3.1.7 Related Codes and publications which may be ap propriate for function-specific training .1 International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG Code), as amended .2 The EmS Guide: Revised Emergency Respons e Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods (EmS) .3 Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents I nvolving Dangerous Goods (MFAG), as amended .4 United Nations Recommendations on the Trans port of Dangerous Goods – Model Regulations , as amended .5 United Nations Recommendations on the Tr ansport of Dangerous Goods – Manual of Tests and Criteria , as amended .6 IMO/ILO/UNECE Code of Practice for Pack ing of Cargo Transport Units (CTU Code) .7 Recommendations on the Safe Transport of D angerous Cargoes and Related Activities in Port Areas .8 International Convention for Safe Cont ainers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended .9 Code of Safe Practice for Cargo Stowage and Sec uring (CSS Code), as amended .10 Revised Recommendations on the safe use of p esticides in ships applicable to the fumigation of cargo transport units (MSC . 1/Circ . 1361) .11 International Convention for the Safet y of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS), as amended .12 International Convention for the Preve ntion of Pollution from Ships, 1973 as modified by the Protocol of 1978 (MARPOL), as amended . .13 Inspection programmes for cargo transport units carrying dangerous goods (MSC . 1/Circ . 1442, as amended by MSC . 1/Circ . 1521) . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 44

1 34 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Chapter 1.4 Security provisions 1.4.0 Scope 1.4.0.1 The provisions of this chapter addre ss the security of dangerous goods in transport by sea . National competent authorities ma y apply additional security provisions, which should be considered when offering or transporting dangerous goods . The provisions of this chapter remain rec ommendatory except 1 . 4 . 1 . 1 (see 1 . 1 . 1 . 5) . 1.4.0.2 The provisions of 1 . 4 . 2 and 1 . 4 . 3 do not apply to: .1 UN 2908 and UN 2909 excepted packages; .2 UN 2910 and UN 2911 excepted packages with an ac tivity level not exceeding the A 2 value; and .3 UN 2912 LSA-I and UN 2913 SCO-I . 1.4.1 General provisions for companies, ships and port facilities * 1.4.1.1 The relevant provisions of chapter XI-2 of S OLAS, as amended, and of part A of the International Ship and Port Facility Security Code (ISPS Code) apply to companies, ships and port facilities engaged in the transport of dangerous goods and to which regulation XI-2 of SOLAS, as amended, apply taking into account the guidance given in part B of the ISPS Code . 1.4.1.2 For cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons enga ged in the transport of dangerous goods, it is recommended that Contracting Governments to SOLAS, as amended, consider security provisions for these cargo ships . 1.4.1.3 Any shore-based company personnel, ship- based personnel and port facility personnel engaged in the transport of dangerous goods should be aware of the security requirements for such goods, in addition to those specified in the ISPS Code, and commensurate with their responsibilities . 1.4.1.4 The training of the company security office r, shore-based company personnel having specific security duties, port facility security officer and port facility personnel having specific duties, engaged in the transport of dangerous goods, should also include elements of security awareness related to those goods . 1.4.1.5 All shipboard personnel and port facilit y personnel who are not mentioned in 1 . 4 . 1 . 4 and are engaged in the transport of dangerou s goods should be familiar with the provisions of the relevant security plans related to those goods, commensurate with their responsibilities . 1.4.2 General provisions for shore-side personne l 1.4.2.1 For the purpose of this subsection, shore- side personnel covers individuals mentioned in 1 . 3 . 1 . 2 . However, the provisions of 1 . 4 . 2 do not apply to: – the company security officer and appropr iate shore-based company personnel mentioned in 13 . 1 of part A of the ISPS Code, – the ship security officer and the shipboard p ersonnel mentioned in 13 . 2 and 13 . 3 of part A of the ISPS Code, – the port facility security officer, the app ropriate port facility security personnel and the port facility personnel having specific security duties mentioned in 18 . 1 and 18 . 2 of part A of the ISPS Code . For the training of those officers and person nel, refer to the International Ship and Port Facility Security Code (ISPS Code) . * Refer to the Guidelines on security-related training and familiarization for port facility personnel (MSC . 1/Circ . 1341) and to the Guidelines on training and ce rtification for port facility security officers (MSC . 1/Circ . 1188) . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 45

Chapter 1.4 – Security provisions 35 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 1.4.2.2 Shore-side personnel engaged in transp ort by sea of dangerous goods should consider security provisions for the transport of dangerous goods commensurate with their responsibilities . 1.4.2.3 Security training 1.4.2.3.1 The training of shore-side personnel, as s pecified in chapter 1 . 3, shall also include elements of security aw areness . 1.4.2.3.2 Security awareness training should ad dress the nature of security risks, recognizing security risks, methods to address and reduce risks and actions to be taken in the event of a security breach . It should include awareness of security p lans (if appropriate, refer to 1 . 4 . 3) commensurate with the responsibilit ies of individuals and their part in implementing security plans . 1.4.2.3.3 Such training should be provided or verifie d upon employment in a position involving dangerous goods transport and should be periodically supplemented with retraining . 1.4.2.3.4 Records of all security training receive d should be kept by the employer and made available to the employee or competent authority, upon request . Records should be kept by the employer for a pe riod of time established by the competent authority . 1.4.3 Provisions for high consequence dangerous go ods 1.4.3.1 Definition of high consequence dangerous go ods 1.4.3.1.1 High consequence dangerous goods are tho se which have the potential for misuse in a terrorist event and which may, as a result, produce serious consequences such as mass casualties, mass destruction or, particularly for class 7, mass socio-economic disruption . 1.4.3.1.2 An indicative list of high consequence dan gerous goods in classes and divisions other than class 7 is given in table 1 . 4 . 1 below . Table 1.4.1 – Indicative list of high conse quence dangerous goods Class 1, Division 1 . 1 explosives Class 1, Division 1 . 2 explosives Class 1, Division 1 . 3 compatibility group C explosives Class 1, D ivision 1 . 4 UN Nos . 0104, 0237, 0255, 0267, 0289, 0361, 0365, 0 366, 0440, 0441, 0455, 0456, 0500, 0512 and 0513 Class 1, Division 1 . 5 explosives Class 1, Division 1 . 6 explosives Class 2 . 1 flammable gases in quantities great er than 3,000 L in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon or a portable tank Class 2 . 3 toxic gases Class 3 flammable liquids of packing groups I and II in q uantities greater than 3,000 L in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon or a portable tank Class 3 liquid desensitized explosives Cl ass 4 . 1 solid desensitized explosives Cla ss 4 . 2 goods of packing group I in quantities great er than 3,000 kg or 3,000 L in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container Class 4 . 3 goods of packing group I in quantities great er than 3,000 kg or 3,000 L in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container Class 5 . 1 oxidizing liquids of packing group I in quan tities greater than 3,000 L in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon or a portable tank Class 5 . 1 perchlorates, ammonium nitrate, ammo nium nitrate fertilizers and ammonium nitrate emulsions or suspensions or gels in quantities greater than 3,000 kg or 3,000 L in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container △ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 46

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 36 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Class 6 . 1 toxic substances of packing group I Class 6 . 2 infectious substances of Category A (UN 28 14 and UN 2900) and medical waste of Category A (UN 3549) Class 8 corrosive substances of packing group I in q uantities greater than 3,000 kg or 3,000 L in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container 1.4.3.1.3 For dangerous goods of class 7, high consequ ence radioactive material is that with an activity equal to or greater than a transport security threshold of 3,000 A 2 per single package (see also 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 1) except for the following radionuclide s where the transport security threshold is given in table 1 . 4 . 2 below . Table 1.4.2 – Transport security threshol ds for specific radionuclides Element Radionuclide Transport security threshold (TBq) Americium Am-241 0 . 6 Gold Au-198 2 Cadmium Cd-109 200 Californium Cf-252 0 . 2 Curium Cm-244 0 . 5 Cobalt Co-57 7 Cobalt Co-60 0 . 3 Caesium Cs-137 1 Iron Fe-55 8,000 Germanium Ge-68 7 Gadol inium Gd-153 10 Iridium Ir-192 0 . 8 Nickel Ni-63 600 Palladium Pd-103 900 Promethium Pm-1 47 400 Polonium Po-210 0 . 6 Plutonium Pu-238 0 . 6 Plutonium Pu-239 0 . 6 Radium Ra-226 0 . 4 Ruthenium Ru-106 3 Selenium Se-75 2 Strontium Sr-90 10 T hallium Tl-204 200 Thulium Tm-170 200 Ytterbium Yb-169 3 1.4.3.1.4 For mixtures of radionuclides, determi nation of whether or not the transport security threshold has been met or exceeded can be calculated by summing the ratios of activity present for each radionuclide divided by the transport security threshold for that radionuclide . If the sum of the fractions is less than 1, then th e radioactivity threshold for the mixture has not been met nor exceeded . This calculation can be made with the formul a: ∑ i A i __ T i < 1 where: A i = activity of radionuclide i that is present in a package (TBq) T i = transport security threshold for radionuclide i (TBq) . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 47

Chapter 1.4 – Security provisions 37 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 1.4.3.1.5 When radioactive materials possess sub sidiary hazards of other classes or divisions, the criteria of table 1 . 4 . 1 should also be taken into account (see also 1 . 5 . 5 . 1) . 1.4.3.2 Specific security provisions for high consequence dangerous goods 1.4.3.2.1 The provisions of this section do not apply to s hips and to port facilities (see the ISPS Code for ship security plan and for port facility security plan) . Note: In addition to the security provision s of this Code, competent authorities may implement further security provisions for reasons other than safety of dangerous goods during transport . In order to not impede international and mu ltimodal transport by different explosives security marks, it is recommended that such marks be formatted consistent with an internationally harmonized standard (e . g . European Union Commission Directive 2008/43/EC) . 1.4.3.2.2 Security plans 1.4.3.2.2.1 Consignors and others engaged in th e transport of high consequence dangerous goods (see 1 . 4 . 3 . 1) should adopt, implement and comply wit h a security plan that addresses at least the elements specified in 1 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 1.4.3.2.2.2 The security plan should comprise at least the following elements: .1 specific allocation of responsibili ties for security to competent and qualified persons with appropriate authority to carry out their responsibilities; .2 records of dangerous goods or types of dange rous goods transported; .3 review of current operations and assessm ent of vulnerabilities, including intermodal transfer, temporary transit storage, handling and distribution, as appropriate; .4 clear statements of measures, includin g training, policies (including response to higher threat conditions, new employee/employment verification, etc . ), operating practices (e . g . choice/use of routes where known, access t o dangerous goods in temporary storage, proximity to vulnerable infrastructure, etc . ), equipment and resources that are to be used t o reduce security risks; .5 effective and up-to-date procedures fo r reporting and dealing with security threats, breaches of security or security-related incidents; .6 procedures for the evaluation and testin g of security plans and procedures for periodic review and update of the plans; .7 measures to ensure the security of transpo rt information contained in the plan; and .8 measures to ensure that the distribution o f transport information is limited as far as possible . (Such measures shall not preclude provi sion of transport documentation required by chapter 5 . 4 of this Code . ) 1.4.3.2.3 For radioactive material, the provisio ns of this chapter are deemed to be complied with when the provisions of the Convention on Physical Protection of Nuclear Material * and the IAEA circular on Nuclear Security Recommendations on Physical Protection of Nuclear Material and Nuclear Facilities † are applied . * INFCIRC/274/Rev . 1, IAEA, Vienna (1980) . † INFCIRC/225/Rev . 5, IAEA, Vienna (2011) . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 48

1 38 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 Chapter 1.5 General provisions concerning radioactive material 1.5.1 Scope and application 1.5.1.1 The provisions of this Code establish stan dards of safety which provide an acceptable level of control of the radiation, criticality and thermal hazards to people, property and the environment that are associated with the transport of radioactive material . These provisions are based on the IAEA Reg ulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material, 2018 Edition, IAEA Safety Standards Series No. SSR–6 (Rev.1), IAEA, Vienna (2018) . Explanatory material can be found in Adv isory Material for the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material (2018 Edition), Safety Standard Series No. SSG-26 (Rev.1), IAEA, Vienna (2019) . 1.5.1.2 The objective of this Code is to establis h provisions that shall be satisfied to ensure safety and to protect people, property and the environment from harmful effects of ionizing radiation during the transport of radioactive material . This protection is achieved by requiri ng: .1 containment of the radioactive contents; . 2 control of external dose rate ; .3 prevention of criticality; and .4 prevention of damage caused by heat . These provisions are satisfied firstly by ap plying a graded approach to contents limits for packages and conveyances and to performance standards applied to package designs depending upon the hazard of the radioactive contents . Secondly, they are satisfied by imposing c onditions on the design and operation of packages and on the maintenance of packagings, including a consideration of the nature of the radioactive contents . Thirdly, they are satisfied by requiring ad ministrative controls including, where appropriate, approval by competent authorities . Finally, further protection is provid ed by making arrangements for planning and preparing emergency response to protect people, property and the environment . 1.5.1.3 The provisions of this Code apply to the trans port of radioactive material by sea, including transport which is incidental to the use of the radioactive material . Transport comprises all operations an d conditions associated with and involved in the movement of radioactive material; these include the design, manufacture, maintenance and repair of packaging, and the preparation, consigning, loading, transport including in-transit storage, unloading and receipt at the final destination of loads of radioactive material and packages . A graded approach is applied to the performa nce standards in the provisions of this Code that are characterized by three general severity levels: .1 routine conditions of transport (inciden t-free); .2 normal conditions of transport (minor m ishaps); and .3 accident conditions of transport . 1.5.1.4 The provisions of this Code do not apply to any of t he following: .1 radioactive material that is an integral p art of the means of transport; .2 radioactive material moved within an est ablishment which is subject to appropriate safety regulations in force in the establishment and where the movement does not involve public roads or railways; .3 radioactive material implanted or inco rporated into a person or live animal for diagnosis or treatment; .4 radioactive material in or on a person who is to b e transported for medical treatment because the person has been subject to accidental or deliberate intake of radioactive material or to contamination; .5 radioactive material in consumer produc ts which have received regulatory approval, following their sale to the end user; .6 natural material and ores containing nat urally occurring radionuclides (which may have been processed), provided the activity concentration of the material does not exceed 10 times the values specified in table 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 1, or calculated in accordance with 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 and 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 3 to 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 6 . For natural materials △ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 49

Chapter 1.5 – General provisions concerning radioactive material 39 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 and ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides that are not in secular equilibrium the calculation of the activity concentration shall be performed in accordance with 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 4; and .7 non-radioactive solid objects with ra dioactive substances present on any surfaces in quantities not in excess of the limit set out in the definition for “contamination” in 2 . 7 . 1 . 2 . 1.5.1.5 Specific provisions for the transport of ex cepted packages 1.5.1.5.1 Excepted packages which may contain radi oactive material in limited quantities, instruments, manufactured articles or empty packagings as specified in 2 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 1 shall be subject only to the following provi sions of parts 5 to 7: .1 the applicable provisions specified in 5 . 1 . 1 . 2, 5 . 1 . 2, 5 . 1 . 3 . 2, 5 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 2, 5 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 3, 5 . 1 . 5 . 4, 5 . 1 . 5 . 5, 5 . 2 . 1 . 7, 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 7 . 1 . 6 . 1 and . 2, 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 7 . 1 . 9, 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 9, 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 10, 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 12, 7 . 8 . 4 . 1 to 7 . 8 . 4 . 6 and 7 . 8 . 9 . 1, .2 the requirements for excepted packages s pecified in 6 . 4 . 4; except when the radioactive material poss esses other hazardous properties and has to be classified in a class other than class 7 in accordance with special provision 290 or 369 of chapter 3 . 3, where the provisions listed in . 1 and . 2 above apply only as relevant and in addition t o those relating to the main class or division . 1.5.1.5.2 Excepted packages shall be subject to the re levant provisions of all other parts of this Code . 1.5.2 Radiation protection programme 1.5.2.1 The transport of radioactive material sh all be subject to a radiation protection programme which shall consist of systematic arrangements aimed at providing adequate consideration of radiation protection measures . 1.5.2.2 Doses to persons shall be below the relevant d ose limits . Protection and safety shall be optimize d in order that the magnitude of individual doses, the number of persons exposed, and the likelihood of incurring exposure shall be kept as low as reasonably achievable, economic and social factors being taken into account, within the restrictions that the doses to individuals be subject to dose constraints . A structured and systematic approach sh all be adopted and shall include consideration of the interfaces between transport and other activities . 1.5.2.3 The nature and extent of the measures to be employed in the programme shall be related to the magnitude and likelihood of radiation exposures . The programme shall incorporate the pro visions in 1 . 5 . 2 . 2, 1 . 5 . 2 . 4 and 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 13 to 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 18 . Programme documents shall be avai lable, on request, for inspection by the relevant competent authority . 1.5.2.4 For occupational exposures arising fro m transport activities, where it is assessed that the effective dose either: .1 is likely to be between 1 and 6 mSv in a ye ar, a dose assessment programme via workplace monitoring or individual monitoring shall be conducted; or .2 is likely to exceed 6 mSv in a year, individual mo nitoring shall be conducted . When workplace monitoring or individua l monitoring is conducted, appropriate records shall be kept . Note: For occupational exposures aris ing from transport activities, where it is assessed that the effective dose is most unlikely to exceed 1 mSv in a year, no special work patterns, detailed monitoring, dose assessment programmes or individual record keeping need be required . 1.5.3 Management system 1.5.3.1 A management system based on inte rnational, national or other standards acceptable to the competent authority shall be established and implemented for all activities within the scope of this Code, as identified in 1 . 5 . 1 . 3, to ensure compliance with the relevant provisions of this Code . Certification that the design specifi cation has been fully implemented shall be available to the competent authority . The manufacturer, consignor or user sha ll be prepared: .1 to provide facilities for inspection dur ing manufacture and use; and .2 to demonstrate compliance with this Code t o the competent authority . Where competent authority approval is r equired, such approval shall take into account and be contingent upon the adequacy of the management system . △ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 50

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training 40 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 1 1.5.4 Special arrangement 1.5.4.1 Special arrangement shall mean those provision s, approved by the competent authority, under which consignments which do not satisfy all the provisions of this Code applicable to radioactive material may be transported . 1.5.4.2 Consignments for which conformity with a ny provision applicable to radioactive material is impracticable shall not be transported except under special arrangement . Provided the competent authority is sat isfied that conformity with the radioactive material provisions of this Code is impracticable and that the requisite standards of safety established by this Code have been demonstrated through means alternative to the other provisions of this Code, the competent authority may approve special arrangement transport operations for a single consignment or a planned series of multiple consignments . The overall level of safety in trans port shall be at least equivalent to that which would be provided if all the applicable provisions in this Code had been met . For international consignments of thi s type, multilateral approval shall be required . 1.5.5 Radioactive material possessing other dan gerous properties 1.5.5.1 In addition to the radioactive and fissile pr operties, any subsidiary hazard of the contents of a package, such as explosiveness, flammability, pyrophoricity, chemical toxicity and corrosiveness, shall also be taken into account in the documentation, packing, labelling, marking, placarding, stowage, segregation and transport, in order to be in compliance with all relevant provisions for dangerous goods . (See also special provision 172 and, for exc epted packages, special provision 290 . ) 1.5.6 Non-compliance 1.5.6.1 In the event of non-compliance with any limi t in the provisions of this Code applicable to dose rate or contamination, .1 the consignor, carrier , consignee and any o rganization involved during transport who may be affected, as appropriate, shall be informed of the non-compliance: .1 by the carrier if the non-compliance is iden tified during transport; or .2 by the consignee if the non-compliance is ide ntified at receipt; .2 the consignor, carrier, or consignee, as a ppropriate, shall: .1 take immediate steps to mitigate the conse quences of the non - compliance; .2 investigate the non-compliance and its ca uses, circumstances and consequences; .3 take appropriate action to remedy the caus es and circumstances that led to the non-compliance and to prevent a recurrence of the causes and circumstances similar to those that led to the non-compliance; and .4 communicate to the relevant competent au thority(ies) on the causes of the non-compliance and the corrective or protective actions taken or to be taken; .3 The communication of the non-compliance t o the consignor and relevant competent authority(ies), respectively, shall be made as soon as practicable and it shall be immediate whenever an emergency exposure situation has developed or is developing . △ △ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 51

4 PART 4 P ACKING AND TANK PROVISIONS Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 158

4 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 159

149 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 Chapter 4.1 Use of packagings, including intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings 4.1.0 Definitions Effectively closed: liquid-tight closure . Hermetically sealed: vapour-tight closure . Securely closed: so closed that dry c ontents cannot escape during normal handling; the minimum provisions for any closure . 4.1.1 General provisions for the packing of dange rous goods in packagings, including IBCs and large packagings Note: For the packing of goods of classes 2, 6 . 2 and 7, the general provisions of this sectio n only apply as indicated in 4 . 1 . 8 . 2 (class 6 . 2, UN 2814 and UN 2900), 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 5 (class 7) and in the applicable packing inst ructions of 4 . 1 . 4 (P201 and LP02 for class 2 and P620, P621, P622, I BC620, LP621 and LP622 for class 6 . 2) . 4.1.1.1 Dangerous goods shall be packed in good qual ity packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, which shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport, including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical handling . Packagings, including IBCs and large pa ckagings, shall be constructed and closed so as to prevent any loss of contents when prepared for transport which may be caused under normal conditions of transport, by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure (resulting from altitude, for example) . Packagings, including IBCs and large p ackagings, shall be closed in accordance with the information provided by the manufacturer . No dangerous residue shall adhere to the ou tside of packages, IBCs and large packagings during transport . These provisions apply, as appropr iate, to new, reused, reconditioned or remanufactured packagings, and to new, reused, repaired or remanufactured IBCs, and to new, reused or remanufactured large packagings . 4.1.1.2 Parts of packagings, including IBCs an d large packagings, which are in direct contact with dangerous goods: .1 shall not be affected or significantly weak ened by those dangerous goods; and .2 shall not cause a dangerous effect, such as ca talysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods; .3 shall not allow permeation of the dangerou s goods that could constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport . Where necessary, they shall be provided wi th a suitable inner coating or treatment . 4.1.1.3 Unless otherwise provided elsewhere in t his Code, each packaging, including IBCs and large packagings, except inner packagings, shall conform to a design type successfully tested in accordance with the provisions of 6 . 1 . 5, 6 . 3 . 5, 6 . 5 . 6 or 6 . 6 . 5, as applicable . However, IBCs manufactured before 1 Jan uary 2011 and conforming to a design type which has not passed the vibration test of 6 . 5 . 6 . 13 or which was not required to meet the criteri a of 6 . 5 . 6 . 9 . 5 . 4 at the time it was subjected to the drop test may st ill be used . 4.1.1.3.1 Packagings, including IBCs and large pac kagings, may conform to one or more than one successfully tested design type and may bear more than one mark . 4.1.1.4 When filling packagings, including IBCs a nd large packagings, with liquids, * sufficient ullage (outage) shall be left to ensure that neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the packaging occurs as a result of an expansion of the liquid caused by temperatures likely to occur during transport . Unless specific provisions * With respect to ullage limits only, the provisions applicable for packagings for solid substances may be used if the viscous substance has an outflow time via a DIN-cup with a 4 mm diameter outlet exceeding 10 minutes at 20 ° C (corresponding to an outflow time via a Ford cup 4 of more than 690 seconds at 20 ° C, or to a viscosity of more than 2680 centistokes at 20 ° C) . △ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 160

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 150 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 are prescribed, liquids shall not completely fill a packaging at a temperature of 55 ° C . However, sufficient ullage shall be left i n an IBC to ensure that at the mean bulk temperature of 50 ° C it is not filled to more than 98% of its water capacity . * 4.1.1.4.1 For air transport, packagings intended t o contain liquids shall also be capable of withstanding a pressure differential without leakage as specified in the international regulations for air transport . 4.1.1.5 Inner packagings shall be packed in an outer packagin g in such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the outer packaging . Inner packagings containing liquids shall be p ackaged with their closures upward and placed within outer packagings consistent with the orientation marks prescribed in 5 . 2 . 1 . 7 . 1 of this Code . Inner packagings that are liable to break o r be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or stoneware or of certain plastics materials, etc . , shall be secured in outer packagings with su itable cushioning material . Any leakage of the contents shall not subst antially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging . 4.1.1.5.1 Where an outer packaging of a combination packagin g or a large packaging has been successfully tested with different types of inner packagings, a variety of such different inner packagings may also be assembled in this outer packaging or large packagings . In addition, provided an equivalent lev el of performance is maintained, the following variations in inner packagings are allowed without further testing of the package: .1 Inner packagings of equivalent or smalle r size may be used provided: – the inner packagings are of similar design t o the tested inner packagings (such as shape – round, rectangular, etc . ); – the material of construction of inner pack agings (glass, plastics, metal, etc . ) offers resistance to impact and stacking for ces equal to or greater than that of the originally tested inner packaging; – the inner packagings have the same or smalle r openings and the closure is of similar design (such as screw cap, friction lid, etc . ); – sufficient additional cushioning mate rial is used to take up void spaces and to prevent significant movement of the inner packagings; – inner packagings are oriented within the o uter packaging in the same manner as in the tested package; and .2 A lesser number of the tested inner packagings or of the alternative types of inner packagings identified in . 1 above may be used, provided sufficient cushi oning is added to fill the void space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the inner packagings . 4.1.1.5.2 Use of supplementary packagings within a n outer packaging (e . g . an intermediate packaging or a receptacle i nside a required inner packaging) additional to what is required by the packing instructions is authorized provided all relevant requirements are met, including those of 4 . 1 . 1 . 3, and, if appropriate, suitable cushionin g is used to prevent movement within the packaging . 4.1.1.5.3 Cushioning and absorbent material shal l be inert and suited to the nature of the contents . 4.1.1.5.4 The nature and the thickness of the outer pack agings shall be such that friction during transport does not generate any heating likely to alter dangerously the chemical stability of the contents . 4.1.1.6 Dangerous goods shall not be packed togethe r in the same outer packaging, or in large packagings, with dangerous or other goods if they react dangerously with each other and cause: .1 combustion and/or evolution of consider able heat; .2 evolution of flammable, toxic or asphyxia nt gases; .3 the formation of corrosive substances; or .4 the formation of unstable substances . 4.1.1.7 The closures of packagings containing we tted or diluted substances shall be such that the percentage of liquid (water, solvent or phlegmatizer) does not fall below the prescribed limits during transport . 4.1.1.7.1 Where two or more closure systems are fitted in s eries on an IBC, that nearest to the substance being transported shall be closed first . * For a differing temperature, the maximum degree of filling may be determined as follows: Degree of filling = 98 ___________ 1 + α ( 50 - t F ) per cent of the capacity of the IBC In this formula α represents the mean coefficient of cubic expansion of the liquid substance between 15 ° C and 50 ° C; that is to say, for a maximum rise in the temperature of 35 ° C, “ α ” is calculated according to the formula: α = d 15 - d 50 _______ 35 × d 50 where d 15 and d 50 are the relative densities of the liquid at 15 ° C and 50 ° C and t F is the mean temperature of the liquid at the time of filling . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 161

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 151 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.1.1.7.2 Unless otherwise specified in the Dangero us Goods List, packages containing substances which: .1 evolve flammable gases or vapour; .2 may become explosive if allowed to dry; .3 evolve toxic gases or vapour; .4 evolve corrosive gases or vapour; or .5 may react dangerously with the atmospher e should be hermetically sealed . 4.1.1.8 Where pressure may develop in a package by the e mission of gas from the contents (as a result of temperature increase or other causes), the packaging or IBC may be fitted with a vent provided that the gas emitted will not cause danger on account of its toxicity, its flammability, the quantity released, etc . A venting device shall be fitted if dangerous o verpressure may develop due to normal decomposition of substances . The vent shall be so designed that, when the pa ckaging or IBC is in the attitude in which it is intended to be transported, leakages of liquid and the penetration of foreign substances are prevented under normal conditions of transport . 4.1.1.8.1 Liquids may only be filled into inner packagi ngs which have an appropriate resistance to internal pressure that may be developed under normal conditions of transport . 4.1.1.9 New, remanufactured or re-used packagi ngs, including IBCs and large packagings, or reconditioned packagings and repaired or routinely maintained IBCs shall be capable of passing the tests prescribed in 6 . 1 . 5, 6 . 3 . 5, 6 . 5 . 6 or 6 . 6 . 5, as applicable . Before being filled and handed over for tran sport, every packaging, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from corrosion, contamination or other damage and every IBC shall be inspected with regard to the proper functioning of any service equipment . Any packaging which shows signs of reduce d strength as compared with the approved design type shall no longer be used or shall be so reconditioned that it is able to withstand the design type tests . Any IBC which shows signs of reduced streng th as compared with the tested design type shall no longer be used or shall be so repaired or routinely maintained that it is able to withstand the design type tests . 4.1.1.10 Liquids shall be filled only into packaging s, including IBCs, which have an appropriate resistance to the internal pressure that may develop unde r normal conditions of transport . As the vapour pressure of low-boiling-po int liquids is usually high, the strength of receptacles for these liquids shall be sufficient to withstand, with an ample factor of safety, the internal pressure likely to be generated . Packagings and IBCs marked with the hydra ulic test pressure prescribed in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1(d) and 6 . 5 . 2 . 2 . 1, respectively, shall be filled only with a li quid having a vapour pressure: .1 such that the total gauge pressure in the pack aging or IBC (i . e . the vapour pressure of the filling substan ce plus the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa) at 55 ° C, determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4 . 1 . 1 . 4 and a filling temperature of 15 ° C, wil l not exceed two thirds of the marked test pressure; or .2 at 50 ° C, less than four sevenths of the sum of the mar ked test pressure plus 100 kPa; or .3 at 55 ° C, less than two thirds of the sum of the marked t est pressure plus 100 kPa . IBCs intended for the transport of liquids s hall not be used to carry liquids having a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa (1 . 1 bar) at 50 ° C or 130 kPa (1 . 3 bar) at 55 ° C . Examples of required marked test pressur es for packagings, including IBCs, calculated as in 4.1.1.10.3 UN No. Name Class Packing group V p 55 (kPa) V p 55 × 1.5 (kPa) ( V p 55 × 1.5) minus 100 (kPa) Required minimum test pressure (gauge) under 6.1.5.5.4.3 (kPa) Minimum test pressure (gauge) to be marked on the packaging (kPa) 2056 Tetrahydrofuran 3 II 70 105 5 100 100 2247 n -Decane 3 III 1 . 4 2 . 1 - 97 . 9 100 100 1593 Dichloromethane 6 . 1 III 164 246 146 146 150 1155 Diethyl ether 3 I 199 299 199 199 250 Note 1: For pure liquids, the vapour pressure at 55 ° C ( Vp 55 ) can often be obtained from scientific tables . Note 2: The table refers to the use of 4 . 1 . 1 . 10 . 3 only, which means that the marked t est pressure shall exceed 1 . 5 times the vapour pressure at 55 ° C less 1 00 kPa . When, for example, the test pressu re for n -decane is determined according to 6 . 1 . 5 . 5 . 4 . 1, the minimum marked test pressure may be lowe r . Note 3 : For diethyl ether, the required mini mum test pressure under 6 . 1 . 5 . 5 . 5 is 250 kPa . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 162

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 152 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.1.1.11 Empty packagings, including IBCs and larg e packagings, that have contained a dangerous substance shall be treated in the same manner as is required by this Code for a filled packaging, unless adequate measures have been taken to nullify any hazard . 4.1.1.12 Every packaging as specified in chapter 6 . 1 intended to contain liquids shall succes sfully undergo a suitable leakproofness test . This test is part of a quality assurance prog ramme as stipulated in 6 . 1 . 1 . 3 which shows the capability of meeting the ap propriate test level indicated in 6 . 1 . 5 . 4 . 4: .1 before it is first used for transport; .2 after remanufacturing or recondition ing of any packaging, before it is re-used for transport . For this test, the packaging need not have its closures fitted . The inner receptacle of a composite packaging may be tested without the outer packaging, provided the test results are not affected . This test is not necessary for inner pack agings of combination packagings or large packagings . 4.1.1.13 Packagings, including IBCs, used for so lids which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during transport shall also be capable of containing the substance in the liquid state . 4.1.1.14 Packagings, including IBCs, used for pow dery or granular substances shall be sift-proof or shall be provided with a liner . 4.1.1.15 For plastics drums and jerricans, rigid pl astics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles, unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, the period of use permitted for the transport of dangerous substances shall be five years from the date of manufacture of the receptacles, except where a shorter period of use is prescribed because of the nature of the substance to be transported . 4.1.1.16 Where ice is used as a coolant it shall not affect t he integrity of the packaging . 4.1.1.17 Explosives, self-reactive substances and o rganic peroxides Unless specific provision to the contrary is made in this Code, the packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, used for goods of class 1, self-reactive substances of class 4 . 1 and organic peroxides of class 5 . 2 shall comply with the provisions for the med ium danger group (packing group II) . 4.1.1.18 Use of salvage packagings and large salvag e packagings 4.1.1.18.1 Damaged, defective, leaking or non-conf orming packages, or dangerous goods that have spilled or leaked may be transported in salvage packagings mentioned in 6 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 11 and 6 . 6 . 5 . 1 . 9 . This does not prevent the use of a larger size pa ckaging or large packaging of appropriate type and performance level and under the conditions of 4 . 1 . 1 . 18 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 1 . 18 . 3 . 4.1.1.18.2 Appropriate measures shall be taken to pre vent excessive movement of the damaged or leaking packages within a salvage packaging . When the salvage packaging contains liquid s, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to eliminate the presence of free liquid . 4.1.1.18.3 Appropriate measures shall be taken to ens ure there is no dangerous build-up of pressure . 4.1.1.19 Use of salvage pressure receptacles 4.1.1.19.1 In the case of damaged, defective, leaki ng or non-conforming pressure receptacles, salvage pressure receptacles according to 6 . 2 . 3 may be used . Note: A salvage pressure receptacle may be us ed as an overpack in accordance with 5 . 1 . 2 . When used as an overpack, marks shall be in acc ordance with 5 . 1 . 2 . 1 instead of 5 . 2 . 1 . 3 . 4.1.1.19.2 Pressure receptacles shall be placed in sa lvage pressure receptacles of suitable size . The maximum size of the placed pressure rec eptacle is limited to a water capacity of 1,000 L . More than one pressure receptacle may be placed in the same salvage pressure receptacle only if the contents are known and do not react dangerously with each other (see 4 . 1 . 1 . 6) . In this case the total sum of water capacitie s of the placed pressure receptacles shall not exceed 1,000 L . Measures shall be taken to prevent moveme nt of the pressure receptacles within the salvage pressure receptacle, e . g . by partitioning, securing or cushioni ng . 4.1.1.19.3 A pressure receptacle may only be placed in a sa lvage pressure receptacle if: .1 the salvage pressure receptacle is in acco rdance with 6 . 2 . 3 . 5 and a copy of the approval certificate is availab le; .2 parts of the salvage pressure receptacle w hich are, or are likely to be in direct contact with the dangerous goods will not be affected or weakened by those dangerous goods and will not cause a dangerous effect (e . g . catalysing reaction or reacting with th e dangerous goods); and .3 the contents of the contained pressure rec eptacle(s) is limited in pressure and volume so that if totally discharged into the salvage pressure receptacle, the pressure in the salvage pressure receptacle at 65 ° C will not exceed the test pressure of the salvage pressure receptacle (for gases, see packing instruction Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 163

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 153 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 in P200 (3) 4 . 1 . 4 . 1) . The reduction of the useable wat er capacity of the salvage pressure receptacle, e . g . by any contained equipment and cushioning, shall be taken into account . 4.1.1.19.4 The proper shipping name, the UN number prec eded by the letters “UN” and label(s) as required for packages in chapter 5 . 2 applicable to the dangerous goods inside t he contained pressure receptacle(s) shall be applied to the salvage pressure receptacle for transport . 4.1.1.19.5 Salvage pressure receptacles shall be cl eaned, purged and visually inspected internally and externally after each use . They shall be periodically inspected an d tested in accordance with 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 at least once every five years . 4.1.1.20 During transport, packagings, includ ing IBCs and large packagings, shall be securely fastened to or contained within the cargo transport unit, so that lateral or longitudinal movement or impact is prevented and adequate external support is provided . 4.1.1.21 Except as provided in 4 . 1 . 1 . 18 and 4 . 1 . 1 . 19, packagings including large packagi ngs and IBCs shall not be filled or discharged while they remain on board . 4.1.2 Additional general provisions for the use o f IBCs 4.1.2.1 When IBCs are used for the transport of liquid s with a flashpoint of 60 ° C (closed cup) or lower, or of powders liable to dust explosion, measures shall be taken to prevent a dangerous electrostatic discharge . 4.1.2.2.1 Every metal, rigid plastics and composit e IBC shall be inspected and tested, as relevant, in accordance with 6 . 5 . 4 . 4 or 6 . 5 . 4 . 5: .1 before it is put into service; .2 thereafter at intervals not exceeding tw o and a half and five years, as appropriate; and .3 after the repair or remanufacture, befor e it is re-used for transport . 4.1.2.2.2 An IBC shall not be filled and offered for transp ort after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection . However, an IBC filled prior to the date of expi ry of the last periodic test or inspection may be transported for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection . In addition, an IBC may be transported afte r the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection: .1 after emptying but before cleaning, for pu rposes of performing the required test or inspection prior to refilling; and .2 unless otherwise approved by the compete nt authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection in order to allow the return of dangerous goods or residues for proper disposal or recycling . Reference to this exemption shall be ente red in the transport document . 4.1.2.3 IBCs of type 31HZ2 when transporting liqui ds shall be filled to at least 80% of the volume of the outer casing and shall be transported in closed cargo transport units . 4.1.2.4 Except for routine maintenance of metal, r igid plastics, composite and flexible IBCs performed by the owner of the IBC, whose State and name or authorized symbol is durably marked on the IBC, the party performing routine maintenance shall durably mark the IBC near the manufacturer’s UN design type mark to show: .1 the State in which the routine maintenance w as carried out; and .2 the name or authorized symbol of the party per forming the routine maintenance . 4.1.3 General provisions concerning packing inst ructions 4.1.3.1 Packing instructions applicable to dan gerous goods of classes 1 to 9 are specified in 4 . 1 . 4 . They are subdivided in three subsections depend ing on the type of packagings to which they apply: subsection 4 . 1 . 4 . 1 for packagings other than IBCs and large packagi ngs; these packing instructions are designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the letter “P”; subsection 4 . 1 . 4 . 2 for IBCs; these are designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the letters “IBC”; subsection 4 . 1 . 4 . 3 for large packagings; these are designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the letters “LP” . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 164

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 154 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 Generally, packing instructions specify that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 2 and/or 4 . 1 . 3, as appropriate, are applicable . They may also require compliance with the s pecial provisions of 4 . 1 . 5, 4 . 1 . 6, 4 . 1 . 7, 4 . 1 . 8 or 4 . 1 . 9 when appropriate . Special packing provisions may also be sp ecified in the packing instruction for individual substances or articles . They are also designated by an alphanumer ic code comprising the letters: “PP” for packagings other than IBCs and large packagi ngs “B” for IBCs “L” for large packagings . Unless otherwise specified, each packag ing shall conform to the applicable provisions of part 6 . Generally, packing instructions do not pr ovide guidance on compatibility and the user shall not select a packaging without checking that the substance is compatible with the packaging material selected (such as, most fluorides are unsuitable for glass receptacles) . Where glass receptacles are permitted i n the packing instructions, porcelain, earthenware and stoneware packagings are also allowed . 4.1.3.2 Column 8 of the Dangerous Goods List shows for e ach article or substance the packing instruction(s) that shall be used . Column 9 indicates the special packing pr ovisions applicable to specific substances or articles . 4.1.3.3 Each packing instruction shows, where appl icable, the acceptable single and combination packagings . For combination packagings, the acceptable out er packagings, inner packagings and, when applicable, the maximum quantity permitted in each inner or outer packaging are shown . Maximum net mass and maximum capacity are a s defined in 1 . 2 . 1 . 4.1.3.4 The following packagings shall not be used w hen the substances being transported are liable to become liquid during transport: Packagings Drums: 1D and 1G Boxes: 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G and 4H1 Bags: 5L1, 5L2, 5L3, 5H1, 5H2, 5H3, 5H4, 5M1 and 5M2 Composite: 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6PC, 6PD1, 6PD2, 6PG1, 6PG2 and 6PH1 Large packagings Flexible plastics: 51H (outer packaging) IBCs For substances of packing group I: All types of IBCs For substances of packing gr oups II and III: Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F Fibreboard: 11G Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L 3, 13L4, 13M1 and 13M2 Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2 4.1.3.5 Where the packing instructions in th is chapter authorize the use of a particular type of packaging (such as 4G; 1A2), packagings bearing the same packaging identification code followed by the letters “V”, “U” or “W” marked in accordance with the provisions of part 6 (such as “4GV”, “4GU” or “4GW”; “1A2V”, “1A2U” or “1A2W”) may also be used under the same conditions and limitations applicable to the use of that type of packaging according to the relevant packing instructions . For example, a combination packaging marked w ith the packaging code “4GV” may be used whenever a combination packaging marked “4G” is authorized, provided the provisions in the relevant packing instruction regarding types of inner packagings and quantity limitations are respected . 4.1.3.6 Pressure receptacles for liquids and solids 4.1.3.6.1 Unless otherwise indicated in this Code, p ressure receptacles conforming to: .1 the applicable requirements of chapter 6 . 2; or .2 the National or International standards on t he design, construction, testing, manufacturing and inspection, as applied by the country in which the pressure receptacles are manufactured, provided that the provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 and 6 . 2 . 3 . 3 are met, Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 165

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 155 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 are authorized for the transport of any liquid or solid substance other than explosives, thermally unstable substances, organic peroxides, self-reactive substances, substances where significant pressure may develop by evolution of chemical reaction and radioactive material (unless permitted in 4 . 1 . 9) . This subsection is not applicable to the sub stances mentioned in 4 . 1 . 4 . 1, packing instruction P200, table 3 . 4.1.3.6.2 Every design type of pressure receptacle s hall be approved by the competent authority of the country of manufacture or as indicated in chapter 6 . 2 . 4.1.3.6.3 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure re ceptacles having a minimum test pressure of 0 . 6 MPa shall be used . 4.1.3.6.4 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure re ceptacles may be provided with an emergency pressure relief device designed to avoid bursting in case of overfill or fire accidents . Pressure receptacle valves shall be desi gned and constructed in such a way that they are inherently able to withstand damage without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could cause inadvertent release of the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the methods as given in 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 8 . 1 to 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 8 . 5 . 4.1.3.6.5 The level of filling shall not exceed 95% of the ca pacity of the pressure receptacle at 50 ° C . Sufficient ullage (outage) shall be left to ens ure that the pressure receptacle will not be liquid-full at a temperature of 55 ° C . 4.1.3.6.6 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure re ceptacles shall be subjected to a periodic inspection and test every five years . The periodic inspection shall include an external examination, an internal examination or alternative method as approved by the competent authority, a pressure test or equivalent effective non-destructive testing with the agreement of the competent authority, including an inspection of all accessories (e . g . tightness of valves, emergency re lief valves or fusible elements) . Pressure receptacles shall not b e filled after they become due for periodic inspection and test but may be transported after the expiry of the time limit . Pressure receptacle repairs shall mee t the requirements of 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 11 . 4.1.3.6.7 Prior to filling, the filler shall perform an in spection of the pressure receptacle and ensure that the pressure receptacle is authorized for the substances to be transported and that the provisions of this Code have been met . Shut-off valves shall be closed after fill ing and remain closed during transport . The consignor shall verify that the closu res and equipment are not leaking . 4.1.3.6.8 Refillable pressure receptacles shall n ot be filled with a substance different from that previously contained unless the necessary operations for change of service have been performed . 4.1.3.6.9 Marking of pressure receptacles for liqu ids and solids according to 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 (not conforming to the requirements of cha pter 6 . 2) shall be in accordance with the requireme nts of the competent authority of the country of manufacturing . 4.1.3.7 Packagings, including IBCs and large packag ings, not specifically authorized in the applicable packing instruction shall not be used for the transport of a substance or article unless specifically approved by the competent authority and provided: .1 the alternative packaging complies with the g eneral provisions of this chapter; .2 when the packing instruction indicated i n the Dangerous Goods List so specifies, the alternative packaging meets the provisions of part 6; .3 the competent authority determines that t he alternative packaging provides at least the same level of safety as if the substance were packed in accordance with a method specified in the particular packing instruction indicated in the Dangerous Goods List; and .4 a copy of the competent authority approval a ccompanies each consignment or the transport document includes an indication that alternative packaging was approved by the competent authority . Note: The competent authorities gran ting such approvals shall take action to amend the Code to include the provisions covered by the approval as appropriate . 4.1.3.8 Unpackaged articles other than class 1 articles 4.1.3.8.1 Where large and robust articles cannot be pa ckaged in accordance with the requirements of chapter 6 . 1 or 6 . 6 and they have to be transported empty, uncle aned and unpackaged, the competent authority may approve such transport . In doing so, the competent authority shal l take into account that: .1 Large and robust articles shall be strong en ough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport, including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and warehouses, as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual or mechanical handling . .2 All closures and openings shall be sealed so t hat there can be no loss of contents which might be caused under normal conditions of transport, by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 166

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 156 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 (resulting from altitude, for example) . No dangerous residue shall adhere to the ou tside of the large and robust articles . .3 Parts of large and robust articles, which ar e in direct contact with dangerous goods: .1 shall not be affected or significantly weak ened by those dangerous goods; and .2 shall not cause a dangerous effect, e . g . catalysing a reaction or reacting with th e dangerous goods . .4 Large and robust articles containing liq uids shall be stowed and secured to ensure that neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the article occurs during transport . .5 They shall be fixed in cradles or crates or other h andling devices in such a way that they will not become loose during normal conditions of transport . 4.1.3.8.2 Unpackaged articles approved by th e competent authority in accordance with the provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 8 . 1 shall be subject to the consignment proce dures of part 5 . In addition the consignor of such article s shall ensure that a copy of any such approval is transported with the large and robust articles . Note: A large and robust article may include fle xible fuel containment systems, military equipment, machinery or equipment containing dangerous goods above the limited quantity thresholds . 4.1.3.9 Where, in 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 and in the individual packing instructio ns, cylinders and other pressure receptacles for gases are authorized for the transport of any liquid or solid substance, use is also authorized of cylinders and pressure receptacles of a kind normally used for gases which conform to the requirements of the competent authority of the country in which the cylinder or pressure receptacle is filled . Valves shall be suitably protected . Pressure receptacles with capacitie s of 1 L or less shall be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable material of adequate strength and design in relation to the capacity of the packaging and its intended use and secured or cushioned so as to prevent significant movement within the outer packaging during normal conditions of transport . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 167

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 157 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.1.4 List of packing instructions 4.1.4.1 P acking instructions concerning the use of pa ckagings (except IBCs and large packagings) P001 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) P001 The following packagings are author ized provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Combination packagings Maximum capacity/net ma ss (see 4.1.3.3) Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 L Drums Plastics 30 L steel (1A1, 1A2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg Metal 40 L aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg other me tal (1N1, 1N2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg plywood (1D) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg fibre (1G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg aluminium (4B) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg other metal (4N) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg natural wood (4C1, 4C2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg plywood (4D) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg fibreboard (4G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 40 kg 60 kg 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) 60 kg 120 kg 120 kg aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 60 kg 120 kg 120 kg plastics (3H1, 3H2) 30 kg 120 kg 120 kg Single packagings Drums steel, non-removable head (1A1) 250 L 450 L 450 L steel, removable head (1A2) prohibited 250 L 250 L aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) 250 L 450 L 450 L aluminium, removable head (1B2) prohibited 250 L 250 L other metal, non-removable head (1N1) 250 L 450 L 450 L other metal, removable head (1N2) prohibited 250 L 250 L plastics, non-removable head (1H1) 250 L* 450 L 450 L plastics, removable head (1H2) prohibited 250 L 250 L Jerricans steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 L 60 L 60 L steel, removable head (3A2) prohibited 60 L 60 L aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) 60 L 60 L 60 L aluminium, removable head (3B2) prohibited 60 L 60 L plastics, non-removable head (3H1) 60 L* 60 L 60 L plastics, removable head (3H2) prohibited 60 L 60 L Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium or plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HH1) 250 L 250 L 250 L Plastics receptacle in fibre or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HD1) 120 L* 250 L 250 L Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle in wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) 60 L* 60 L 60 L Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre, plywood, expanded or solid plastics drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1 or 6PH2) or in a steel, aluminium, wood or fibreboard box or in a wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) 60 L 60 L 60 L Pressure receptacles , provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met * Not permitted for class 3, packing group I . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 168

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 158 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P001 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) (continued) P001 Special packing provisions: PP1 For UN Nos . 1133, 1210, 1263 and 1866 and for adhesives, p rinting inks, printing ink related materials, paints, paint related materials and resin solutions which are assigned to UN 3082, metal or plastics packagings for substances of packing groups II and III in quantities of 5 L or less per packaging are not required to meet the performance tests in chapter 6 . 1 when transported: (a) in palletized loads, a pallet box or a unit load d evice, such as individual packagings placed or stacked and secured by strapping, shrink- or stretch-wrapping or other suitable means to a pallet . For sea transport, the palletized loads , pallet boxes or unit load devices shall be firmly packed and secured in closed cargo transport units . On roll-on/roll-off ships the unit load s may be carried in vehicles other than closed vehicles provided they are securely fenced to the full height of the cargo carried; or (b) as an inner packaging of a combination packa ging with a maximum net mass of 40 kg . PP2 For UN 3065, wooden barrels with a maximum capac ity of 250 L and which do not meet the provisions of chapter 6 . 1 may be used . PP4 For UN 1774, packagings shall meet the packi ng group II performance level . PP5 For UN 1204, packagings shall be so construc ted that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure . Gas cylinders and gas receptacles shall n ot be used for these substances . PP10 For UN 1791, for packing group II, the packagi ng shall be vented . PP31 For UN Nos . 1131, 1553, 1693, 1694, 1699, 1701, 2478, 26 04, 2785, 3148, 3183, 3184, 3185, 3186, 3187, 3188, 3398 (PG II and III), 3399 (PG II and III), 3413 and 3414, packagings shall be hermetically sealed . PP33 For UN 1308, for packing groups I and II, only com bination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg are allowed . PP81 For UN 1790 with more than 60% but not more than 85% h ydrogen fluoride and UN 2031 with more than 55% nitric acid, the permitted use of plastics drums and jerricans as single packagings shall be two years from their date of manufacture PP93 For UN Nos . 3532 and 3534, packagings shall be design ed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings in the event of loss of stabilization . P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) P002 The following packagings are authori zed provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Combination packagings Maximum net mass (see 4. 1.3.3) Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 kg Drums Plastics 1 30 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg Metal 40 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg Paper 1, 2, 3 50 kg other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg Fibre 1, 2, 3 50 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg 1 These inner packagings shall be sift-proof . 2 These inner packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport (see 4 . 1 . 3 . 4) . 3 Paper and fibre inner packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I . plywood (1D) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg fibre (1G) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg aluminium (4B) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg other metal (4N) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg natural wood (4C1) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg plywood (4D) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg fibreboard (4G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 40 kg 60 kg 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) 75 kg 120 kg 120 kg aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 75 kg 120 kg 120 kg plastics (3H1, 3H2) 75 kg 120 kg 120 kg Single packagings Drums steel (1A1 or 1A2 4 ) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg aluminium (1B1 or 1B2 4 ) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N2 4 ) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg plastics (1H1 or 1H2 4 ) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg fibre (1G 5 ) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg plywood (1D 5 ) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 4 These packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I that may become liquid during transport (see 4 . 1 . 3 . 4) . 5 These packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport (see 4 . 1 . 3 . 4) . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 169

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 159 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) (continued ) P002 The following packagings are author ized provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3) Single packag ings (continued) Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Jerricans steel (3A1 or 3A2 4 ) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg aluminium (3B1 or 3B2 4 ) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg plastics (3H1 or 3H2 4 ) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg Boxes steel (4A) 5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg aluminium (4B) 5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg other metal (4N) 5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg natural wood (4C1) 5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg plywood (4D) 5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg fibreboard (4G) 5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg solid plastics (4H2) 5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg Bags bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2) 5 Not allowed 50 kg 50 kg Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood, fibre or plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1 5 , 6HD1 5 , or 6HH1) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box, wooden box, plywood box, fibreboard box or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 5 , 6HG2 5 or 6HH2) 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood or fibre drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 5 or 6PG1 5 ) or in steel, aluminium, wood, or fibreboard box or in wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 5 or 6PD2 5 ) or in expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH2 or 6PH1 5 ) 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg 4 These packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I that may become liquid during transport (see 4 . 1 . 3 . 4) . 5 These packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport (see 4 . 1 . 3 . 4) . Pressure receptacles , provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met . Special packing provisions: PP7 For UN 2000, celluloid may be transported un packed on pallets, wrapped in plastic film and secured by appropriate means, such as steel bands, as a single commodity in closed cargo transport units . Each pallet shall not exceed 1,000 kg . PP8 For UN 2002, packagings shall be so construc ted that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure . Gas cylinders and gas receptacles shall n ot be used for these substances . PP9 For UN Nos . 3175, 3243 and 3244, packagings shall conf orm to a design type that has passed a leakproofness test at the packing group II performance level . For UN 3175 the leakproofness test is not req uired when the liquids are fully absorbed in solid material contained in sealed bags . PP11 For UN 1309, packing group III, and UN 1362, 5H1 , 5L1 and 5M1 bags are allowed if they are overpacked in plastic bags and are wrapped in shrink or stretch wrap on pallets . PP12 For UN Nos . 1361, 2213 and 3077, 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are al lowed when transported in closed cargo transport units . PP13 For articles classified under UN 2870, only c ombination packagings meeting the packing group I performance level are authorized . PP14 For UN Nos . 2211, 2698 and 3314, packagings are not requ ired to meet the performance tests in chapter 6 . 1 . PP15 For UN Nos . 1324 and 2623, packagings shall meet the pac king group III performance level . PP20 For UN 2217, any sift-proof, tearproof rec eptacle may be used . PP30 For UN 2471, paper or fibre inner packagings ar e not permitted . PP31 For UN Nos . 1362, 1463, 1565, 1575, 1626, 1680, 1689, 1698 , 1868, 1889, 1932, 2471, 2545, 2546, 2881, 3048, 3088, 3170, 3174, 3181, 3182, 3189, 3190, 3205, 3206, 3341, 3342, 3448, 3449 and 3450, packagings shall be hermetically sealed . PP34 For UN 2969 (as whole beans), 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bag s are permitted . PP37 For UN Nos . 2590 and 2212, 5M1 bags are permitted . All bags of any type shall be transported in cl osed cargo transport units or be placed in closed rigid overpacks . PP38 For UN 1309, bags are permitted only in closed c argo transport units or as unit loads . PP84 For UN 1057, rigid outer packagings meetin g the packing group II performance level shall be used . The packagings shall be designed and cons tructed and arranged to prevent movement, inadvertent ignition of the devices or inadvertent release of flammable gas or liquid . PP85 For UN Nos . 1748, 2208, 2880, 3485, 3486 and 3487, bags ar e not allowed . PP92 For UN Nos . 3531 and 3533, packagings shall be design ed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings in the event of loss of stabilization . PP100 For UN numbers 1309, 1323, 1333, 1376, 1435, 1449, 1457, 1472, 1476, 1483, 1509, 1516, 1567, 1869, 2210, 2858, 2878, 2968, 3089, 3096 and 3125, flexibl e, fibreboard or wooden packagings shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 170

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 160 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P003 PACKING INSTRUCTION P003 Dangerous goods shall be placed in sui table outer packagings . The packagings shall meet the provision s of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 1 . 2, 4 . 1 . 1 . 4, 4 . 1 . 1 . 8 and 4 . 1 . 3 and be so designed that they meet the construc tion provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . Outer packagings constructed of suita ble material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, shall be used . Where this packing instruction is used fo r the transport of articles or inner packagings of combination packagings, the packaging shall be designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge of articles during normal conditions of transport . Special packing provisions: PP16 For UN 2800, batteries shall be protected fr om short circuit within the packagings . PP17 For UN 2037, packages shall not exceed 55 kg net ma ss for fibreboard packagings or 125 kg net mass for other packagings . PP18 For UN 1845, packagings shall be designed and c onstructed to permit the release of carbon dioxide gas to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings . PP19 For UN Nos . 1327, 1364, 1365, 1856 and 3360, transport a s bales is authorized . PP20 For UN Nos . 1363, 1386, 1408 and 2793, any sift-proof , tearproof receptacle may be used . PP32 UN Nos . 2857 and 3358 and robust articles consign ed under UN 3164 may be transported unpackaged, in crates or in appropriate overpacks . PP90 For UN 3506, sealed inner liners or bags of stro ng leakproof and puncture resistant material impervious to mercury which will prevent escape of the substance from the package irrespective of the position of the package shall be used . PP91 For UN 1044, large fire extinguishers may also b e transported unpackaged provided that the requirements of 4 . 1 . 3 . 8 . 1 . 1 to 4 . 1 . 3 . 8 . 1 . 5 are met, the valves are protected by one of the me thods in accordance with 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 8 . 1 to 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 8 . 4 and other equipment mounted on the fire exting uisher is protected to prevent accidental activation . For the purpose of this special packing pro vision, “large fire extinguishers” means fire extinguishers as described in subparagraphs . 3 to . 5 of special provision 225 of chapter 3 . 3 . PP96 For UN 2037 waste gas cartridges transport ed in accordance with special provision 327, the packagings shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of pressure . PP100 For UN Nos . 1408 and 2793 flexible, fibreboard or wooden pa ckagings shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner . P004 PACKING INSTRUCTION P004 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 3473, 3476, 3477, 3478 and 3479 . The following packagings are authorized : (1) For fuel cell cartridges, provided that th e general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 1 . 2, 4 . 1 . 1 . 3, 4 . 1 . 1 . 6 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II performance level . (2) For fuel cell cartridges packed with equip ment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 1 . 2, 4 . 1 . 1 . 6 and 4 . 1 . 3 . When fuel cell cartridges are packed with eq uipment, they shall be packed in inner packagings or placed in the outer packaging with cushioning material or divider(s) so that the fuel cell cartridges are protected against damage that may be caused by the movement or placement of the contents within the outer packaging . The equipment shall be secured against mov ement within the outer packaging . For the purpose of this packing instructio n, “equipment” means apparatus requiring the fuel cell cartridges with which it is packed for its operation . (3) For fuel cell cartridges contained in equi pment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 1 . 2, 4 . 1 . 1 . 6 and 4 . 1 . 3 . Large robust equipment (see 4 . 1 . 3 . 8) containing fuel cell cartridges may be tr ansported unpackaged . For fuel cell cartridges contained in equ ipment, the entire system shall be protected against short circuit and inadvertent operation . △ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 171

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 161 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P005 PACKING INSTRUCTION P005 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 3528, 3529 and 3530 . If the engine or machinery is constructed an d designed so that the means of containment containing the dangerous goods affords adequate protection, an outer packaging is not required . Dangerous goods in engines or machinery s hall otherwise be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, and meeting the applicable requirements of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1, or they shall be fixed in such a way that they will no t become loose during normal conditions of transport, e . g . in cradles or crates or other handling devi ces . In addition, the manner in which means of cont ainment are contained within the engine or machinery, shall be such that under normal conditions of transport, damage to the means of containment containing the dangerous goods is prevented; and in the event of damage to the means of containment containing liquid dangerous goods, no leakage of the dangerous goods from the engine or machinery is possible (a leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this requirement) . Means of containment containing danger ous goods shall be so installed, secured or cushioned as to prevent their breakage or leakage and so as to control their movement within the engine or machinery during normal conditions of transport . Cushioning material shall not react dan gerously with the content of the means of containment . Any leakage of the contents shall not subst antially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material . Additional requirement: Other dangerou s goods (e . g . batteries, fire extinguishers, compre ssed gas accumulators or safety devices) required for the functioning or safe operation of the engine or machinery shall be securely mounted in the engine or machine . P006 PACKING INSTRUCTION P006 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 3537, 3538, 3540, 3541, 3546, 3547 and 3548 . (1) The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II performance level . (2) In addition, for robust articles the follo wing packagings are authorized: Strong outer packagings constructed of s uitable material and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use . The packagings shall meet the provision s of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 1 . 2, 4 . 1 . 1 . 8 and 4 . 1 . 3 in order to achieve a level of protection that i s at least equivalent to that provided by chapter 6 . 1 . Articles may be transported unpackage d or on pallets when the dangerous goods are afforded equivalent protection by the article in which they are contained . (3) Additionally, the following conditio ns shall be met: (a) Receptacles within articles containi ng liquids or solids shall be constructed of suitable materials and secured in the article in such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the article itself or the outer packaging; (b) Receptacles containing liquids with cl osures shall be packed with their closures correctly oriented . The receptacles shall in addition confo rm to the internal pressure test provisions of 6 . 1 . 5 . 5; (c) Receptacles that are liable to break or be pun ctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or stoneware or of certain plastics materials shall be properly secured . Any leakage of the contents shall not subst antially impair the protective properties of the article or of the outer packaging; (d) Receptacles within articles containi ng gases shall meet the requirements of section 4 . 1 . 6 and chapter 6 . 2 as appropriate or be capable of providing an e quivalent level of protection to packing instructions P200 or P208; (e) Where there is no receptacle within the arti cle, the article shall fully enclose the dangerous substances and prevent their release under normal conditions of transport . (4) Articles shall be packed to prevent moveme nt and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of transport . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 172

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 162 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P010 PACKING INSTRUCTION P010 The following packagings are author ized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Combination packagings Maximum net mass (see 4. 1.3.3) Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 1 L Drums Steel 40 L steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg plywood (1D) 400 kg fibre (1G) 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) 400 kg natural wood (4C1, 4C2) 400 kg plywood (4D) 400 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 400 kg fibreboard (4G) 400 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity (see 4.1.3.3) Drums steel, non-removable head (1A1) 450 L Jerricans steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 L Composite packagings plastics receptacle in steel drums (6HA1) 250 L Steel pressure receptacles provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met . P099 PACKING INSTRUCTION P099 Only packagings which are approved fo r these goods by the competent authority may be used (see 4 . 1 . 3 . 7) . A copy of the competent authority approva l shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority . P101 PACKING INSTRUCTION P101 Only packagings which are approved by t he competent authority may be used . The distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic * of the country for which the authority acts shall be marked on the transport documents as follows: “Packaging approved by the competent authority of …” * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . P110(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P110(a) The following packagings are auth orized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags plastics textile, plastic coated or lined rubber textile, rubberized textile Receptacles wood Bags plastics textile, plastic coated or lined rubber textile, rubberized Receptacles plastics metal wood Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional provisions: 1 The intermediate packagings shall be fill ed with water-saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution or wetted cushioning . 2 Outer packagings shall be filled with water -saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution or wetted cushioning . Outer packagings shall be constructed a nd sealed to prevent evaporation of the wetting solution, except for UN 0224 when transported dry . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 173

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 163 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P110(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P110(b) The following packagings are aut horized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Receptacles metal wood rubber, conductive plastics, conductive Bags rubber, conductive plastics, conductive Dividing partitions metal wood plastics fibreboard Boxes natural wood, sift-proof wall (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) Special packing provision: PP42 For UN Nos . 0074, 0113, 0114, 0129, 0130, 0135 and 0224 , the following conditions shall be met: . 1 inner packagings shall not contain more th an 50 g of explosive substance (quantity corresponding to dry substance); . 2 compartments between dividing partiti ons shall not contain more than one inner packaging, firmly fitted; and . 3 the outer packaging may be partitioned int o up to 25 compartments . P111 PACKING INSTRUCTION P111 The following packagings are authoriz ed, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags paper, waterproofed plastics textile, rubberized Sheets plastics textile, rubberized Receptacles wood Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provision: PP43 For UN 0159, inner packagings are not requir ed when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics (1H1 or 1H2) drums are used as outer packagings . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 174

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 164 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P112(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P112(a) (Solid wetted, 1.1D) The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags paper, multiwall, water-resistant plastics textile textile, rubberized woven plastics Receptacles metal plastics wood Bags plastics textile, plastic coated or lined Receptacles metal plastics wood Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional provision: Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging . Special packing provisions: PP26 For UN Nos . 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0219 and 0394, pack agings shall be lead-free . PP45 For UN Nos . 0072 and 0226, intermediate packagings a re not required . P112(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P112(b) (Solid dry, other than powder 1.1D) The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags paper, kraft paper, multiwall, water-resistant plastics textile textile, rubberized woven plastics Bags (for UN 0150 only) plastics textile, plastic coated or lined Bags woven plastics, sift-proof (5H2) woven plastics, water-resistant (5H3) plastics, film (5H4) textile, sift-proof (5L2) textile, water-resistant (5L3) paper, multiwall, water-resistant (5M2) Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provisions: PP26 For UN Nos . 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386 , packagings shall be lead-free . PP46 For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are reco mmended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a maximum net mass of 30 kg . PP47 For UN 0222, inner packagings are not requir ed when the outer packaging is a bag . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 175

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 165 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P112(c) PACKING INSTRUCTION P112(c) (Solid dry powder 1.1D) The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags paper, multiwall, water-resistant plastics woven plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Bags paper, multiwall, water-resistant with inner lining plastics Receptacles metal plastics wood Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional provisions: 1 Inner packagings are not required if drums a re used as the outer packaging . 2 The packaging shall be sift-proof . Special packing provisions: PP26 For UN Nos . 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386 , packagings shall be lead-free . PP46 For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are reco mmended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a maximum net mass of 30 kg . PP48 For UN 0504, metal packagings shall not be use d . Packagings of other material with a small am ount of metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6 . 1 . 4, are not considered metal packagings . P113 PACKING INSTRUCTION P113 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags paper plastics textile, rubberized Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional provision: The packaging shall be sift-proof . Special packing provisions: PP49 For UN Nos . 0094 and 0305, no more than 50 g of substance shal l be packed in an inner packaging . PP50 For UN 0027, inner packagings are not necess ary when drums are used as the outer packaging . PP51 For UN 0028, paper kraft or waxed paper sheets m ay be used as inner packagings . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 176

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 166 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P114(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P114(a) (Solid wetted) The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags plastics textile woven plastics Receptacles metal plastics wood Bags plastics textile, plastic coated or lined Receptacles metal plastics Dividing partitions wood Boxes steel (4A) metal, other than steel or aluminium (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional provision: Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging . Special packing provisions: PP26 For UN Nos . 0077, 0132 , 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagin gs shall be lead-free . PP43 For UN 0342, inner packagings are not requir ed when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics (1H1 or 1H2) drums are used as outer packagings . P114(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P114(b) (Solid dry) The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags paper, kraft plastics textile, sift-proof woven plastics, sift-proof Receptacles fibreboard metal paper plastics woven plastics, sift-proof wood Not necessary Boxes natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provisions: PP26 For UN Nos . 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagin gs shall be lead-free . PP48 For UN Nos . 0508 and 0509, metal packagings shall not b e used . Packagings of other material with a small am ount of metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6 . 1 . 4, are not considered metal packagings . PP50 For UN Nos . 0160, 0161 and 0508, inner packagings are n ot necessary when drums are used as the outer packaging . PP52 For UN Nos . 0160 and 0161, when metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B 1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) are used as the outer packaging, metal packagings shall be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal pressure from internal or external causes, is prevented . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 177

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 167 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P115 PACKING INSTRUCTION P115 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Receptacles plastics wood Bags plastics in metal receptacles Drums metal Receptacles wood Boxes natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provisions: PP45 For UN 0144, intermediate packagings are n ot required . PP53 For UN Nos . 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when boxes are used a s the outer packaging, inner packagings shall have taped screw-cap closures and be not more than 5 L capacity each . Inner packagings shall be surrounded wi th non-combustible absorbent cushioning materials . The amount of absorbent cushioning mate rial shall be sufficient to absorb the liquid contents . Metal receptacles shall be cushioned fr om each other . Net mass of propellant is limited to 30 kg for ea ch package when outer packagings are boxes . PP54 For UN Nos . 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when drums are used a s the outer packaging and when intermediate packagings are drums, they shall be surrounded with non-combustible cushioning material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the liquid contents . A composite packaging consisting of a pla stics receptacle in a metal drum may be used instead of the inner and intermediate packagings . The net volume of propellent in each packag e shall not exceed 120 L . PP55 For UN 0144, absorbent cushioning materi al shall be inserted . PP56 For UN 0144, metal receptacles may be used as in ner packagings . PP57 For UN Nos . 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, bags shall be used as i ntermediate packagings when boxes are used as outer packagings . PP58 For UN Nos . 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, drums shall be used a s intermediate packagings when drums are used as outer packagings . PP59 For UN 0144, fibreboard boxes (4G) may be used as o uter packagings . PP60 For UN 0144, aluminium drums (1B1 or 1B2) and me tal, other than steel or aluminium, drums (1N1 or 1N2) shall not be used . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 178

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 168 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P116 PACKING INSTRUCTION P116 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags paper, water- and oil-resistant plastics textile, plastic coated or lined woven plastics, sift-proof Receptacles fibreboard, water-resistant metal plastics wood, sift-proof Sheets paper, water-resistant paper, waxed plastics Not necessary Bags woven plastics (5H1, 5H2, 5H3) paper, multiwall, water-resistant (5M2) plastics, film (5H4) textile, sift-proof (5L2) textile, water-resistant (5L3) Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) plywood (1D) Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) plastics (3H1, 3H2) Special packing provisions: PP61 For UN Nos . 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagin gs are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging . PP62 For UN Nos . 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagin gs are not required when the explosive is contained in a material impervious to liquid . PP63 For UN 0081, inner packagings are not requir ed when contained in rigid plastic which is impervious to nitric esters . PP64 For UN 0331, inner packagings are not requir ed when bags (5H2, 5H3 or 5H4) are used as outer packagings . PP65 [Deleted] PP66 For UN 0081, bags shall not be used as outer packa gings . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 179

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 169 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P130 PACKING INSTRUCTION P130 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Not necessary Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provision: PP67 The following applies to UN Nos . 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 00 34, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488, 0502 and 0510: large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be transported unpackaged . When such articles have propelling char ges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of transport . A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpack aged article indicates that the article can be considered for transport unpackaged . Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cra dles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices . P131 PACKING INSTRUCTION P131 The following packagings are authori zed, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags paper plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Reels Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provision: PP68 For UN Nos . 0029, 0267 and 0455, bags and reels shall not be us ed as inner packagings . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 180

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 170 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P132(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P132(a) (Articles consisting of closed metal, plasti cs or fibreboard casings that contain a detonating explosive, or consisting o f plastics-bonded detonating explosives) The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Not necessary Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) P132(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P132(b) (Articles without closed casings) The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets paper plastics Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) P133 PACKING INSTRUCTION P133 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Trays, fitted with dividing partitions fibreboard plastics wood Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Additional provision: Receptacles are only required as intermediate packagings when the inner packagings are trays . Special packing provision: PP69 For UN Nos . 0043, 0212, 0225, 0268 and 0306, trays shall no t be used as inner packagings . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 181

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 171 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P134 PACKING INSTRUCTION P134 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags water-resistant Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets fibreboard, corrugated Tubes fibreboard Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) P135 PACKING INSTRUCTION P135 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags paper plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets paper plastics Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) P136 PACKING INSTRUCTION P136 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags plastics textile Boxes fibreboard plastics wood Dividing partitions in the outer packagings Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 182

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 172 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P137 PACKING INSTRUCTION P137 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags plastics Boxes fibreboard wood Tubes fibreboard metal plastics Dividing partitions in the outer packagings Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provision: PP70 For UN Nos . 0059, 0439, 0440 and 0441, when the shaped ch arges are packed singly, the conical cavity shall face downwards and the package shall be marked in accordance with 5 . 2 . 1 . 7 . 1 . When the shaped charges are packed in pairs , the conical cavities shall face inwards to minimize the jetting effect in the event of accidental initiation . P138 PACKING INSTRUCTION P138 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags plastics Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional provision: If the ends of the articles are sealed, inner packagings are not necessary . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 183

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 173 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P139 PACKING INSTRUCTION P139 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Reels Sheets paper plastics Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provisions: PP71 For UN Nos . 0065, 0102, 0104, 0289 and 0290, the ends of the d etonating cord shall be sealed; for example, by a plug firmly fixed so that the explosive cannot escape . The ends of flexible detonating cord shall be f astened securely . PP72 For UN Nos . 0065 and 0289, inner packagings are not req uired when they are in coils . P140 PACKING INSTRUCTION P140 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags plastics Reels Sheets paper, kraft plastics Receptacles wood Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provisions: PP73 For UN 0105, no inner packagings are required i f the ends are sealed . PP74 For UN 0101, the packaging shall be sift-pro of except when the fuse is covered by a paper tube and both ends of the tube are covered with removable caps . PP75 For UN 0101, steel, aluminium or other metal b oxes or drums shall not be used . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 184

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 174 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P141 PACKING INSTRUCTION P141 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plastics wood Dividing partitions in the outer packagings Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) P142 PACKING INSTRUCTION P142 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags paper plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets paper Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plastics Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 185

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 175 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P143 PACKING INSTRUCTION P143 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags paper, kraft plastics textile textile, rubberized Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plastics wood Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional provision: Instead of the above inner and outer packagings, composite packagings (6HH2) (plastics receptacle with outer solid box) may be used . Special packing provision: PP76 For UN Nos . 0271, 0272, 0415 and 0491, when metal packa gings are used, metal packagings shall be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal pressure from internal or external causes, is prevented . P144 PACKING INSTRUCTION P144 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 3 and special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Dividing partitions in the outer packagings Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary with metal liner (4C1) plywood (4D) with metal liner reconstituted wood with metal liner (4F) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provision: PP77 For UN Nos . 0248 and 0249, packagings shall be protec ted against the ingress of water . When water-activated contrivances a re transported unpackaged, they shall be provided with at least two independent protective features which prevent the ingress of water . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 186

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 176 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION P200 For pressure receptacles, the gener al packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 shall be met . In addition, for MEGCs, the general requi rements of 4 . 2 . 4 shall be met . Cylinders, tubes, pressure drums, bund les of cylinders constructed as specified in 6 . 2 and MEGCs constructed as specified in 6 . 7 . 5 are authorized for the transport of a specifi c substance when specified in the following tables . For some substances, the special packin g provisions may prohibit a particular type of cylinder, tube, pressure drum or bundle of cylinders . (1) Pressure receptacles containing toxic subs tances with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 mL / m 3 (ppm) as specified in the table shall not be equipped with any pressure relief device . Pressure relief devices shall be fitted on p ressure receptacles used for the transport of UN 1013 carbon dioxide and UN 1070 nitrous oxide . Other pressure receptacles shall be fitt ed with a pressure relief device if specified by the competent authority of the country of use . The type of pressure relief device, the set -to-discharge pressure and relief capacity of pressure relief devices, if required, shall be specified by the competent authority of the country of use . (2) The following three tables cover compres sed gases (Table 1), liquefied and dissolved gases (Table 2) and substances not in Class 2 (Table 3) . They provide: (a) The UN number, proper shipping name and clas sification of the substance; (b) The LC 50 for toxic substances; (c) The types of pressure receptacles author ized for the substance, shown by the letter “X”; (d) The maximum test period for periodic inspe ction of the pressure receptacles . Note: For pressure receptacles which mak e use of composite materials, the maximum test period shall be 5 years . The test period may be extended to that specifi ed in Tables 1 and 2 (i . e . up to 10 years), if approved by the competent a uthority of the country of use . (e) The minimum test pressure of the pressure re ceptacles; (f) The maximum working pressure of the pressur e receptacles for compressed gases (where no value is given, the working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure) or the maximum filling ratio(s) dependent on the test pressure(s) for liquefied and dissolved gases; (g) Special packing provisions that are spec ific to a substance . (3) In no case shall pressure receptacles be fill ed in excess of the limit permitted in the following requirements . (a) For compressed gases, the working pressur e shall be not more than two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacles . Restrictions to this upper limit on workin g pressure are imposed by special packing provision “o” in (5) below . In no case shall the internal pressure at 65 ° C exc eed the test pressure . (b) For high pressure liquefied gases, the filli ng ratio shall be such that the settled pressure at 65 ° C does not exceed the test pressure of the pressure receptacles . The use of test pressures and filling ratios ot her than those in the table is permitted, except where (5), special packing provision “o” applies, provided that: (i) the criterion of (5), special packing prov ision “r” is met when applicable; or (ii) the above criterion is met in all other cases . For high pressure liquefied gases and gas mix tures for which relevant data are not available, the maximum filling ratio ( FR ) shall be determined as follows: FR = 8 . 5 × 10 - 4 × d g × P h where FR = maximum filling ratio d g = gas density (at 15 ° C, 1 bar) (in g / L) P h = minimum test pressure (in bar) If the density of the gas is unknown, the maxi mum filling ratio shall be determined as follows: FR = P h × MM × 10 - 3 _____________ R × 338 where FR = maximum filling ratio P h = minimum test pressure (in bar) MM = molecular mass (in g / mol) R = 8 . 31451 × 10 - 2 bar · L / mol · K (gas constant) For gas mixtures, the average molecular ma ss is to be taken, taking into account the volumetric concentrations of the various components . (c) For low pressure liquefied gases, the maxim um mass of contents per litre of water capacity shall equal 0 . 95 times the density of the liquid phase at 50 ° C; in a ddition, the liquid phase shall not fill the pressure receptacle at any temperature up to 60 ° C . The test pressure of the pressure recepta cle shall be at least equal to the vapour pressure (absolute) of the liquid at 65 ° C, minus 100 kPa (1 bar) . For low pressure liquefied gases and gas mixt ures for which relevant data are not available, the maximum filling ratio shall be determined as follows: FR = (0 . 0032 × BP – 0 . 24) × d l where FR = maximum filling ratio BP = boiling point (in kelvin) d l = density of the liquid at boiling point (in kg/L) (d) For UN 1001, acetylene, dissolved, and UN 33 74 acetylene, solvent free, see (5), special packing provision “p” . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 187

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 177 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 (e) For liquefied gases charged with compress ed gases, both components – the liquefied gas and the compressed gas – have to be taken into consideration in the calculation of the internal pressure in the pressure receptacle . The maximum mass of contents per litre of wate r capacity shall not exceed 0 . 95 times the density of the liquid phase at 50°C ; in addition, the liquid phase shall not completely fill the pressure receptacle at any temperature up to 60°C . When filled, the internal pressure at 65°C sh all not exceed the test pressure of the pressure receptacles . The vapour pressures and volumetric expa nsions of all substances in the pressure receptacles shall be considered . When experimental data is not available, t he following steps shall be carried out: (i) calculation of the vapour pressure of the li quefied gas and of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 15°C (filling temperature); (ii) calculation of the volumetric expansion o f the liquid phase resulting from the heating from 15°C to 65°C and calculation of the remaining volume for the gaseous phase; (iii) calculation of the partial pressure of the c ompressed gas at 65°C considering the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase; Note: The compressibility factor of the co mpressed gas at 15°C and 65°C shall be considered . (iv) calculation of the vapour pressure of the li quefied gas at 65°C; (v) the total pressure is the sum of the vapour pres sure of the liquefied gas and the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65°C; (vi) consideration of the solubility of the com pressed gas at 65°C in the liquid phase . The test pressure of the pressure receptac le shall not be less than the calculated total pressure minus 100 kPa (1bar) . If the solubility of the compressed gas in the l iquid phase is not known for the calculation, the test pressure can be calculated without taking the gas solubility (subparagraph (vi)) into account . (4) The filling of pressure receptacles shall b e carried out by qualified staff using appropriate equipment and procedures . The procedures should include checks of: – the conformity of receptacles and access ories with the provisions of this Code; – their compatibility with the product to be t ransported; – the absence of damage which might affect saf ety; – compliance with the degree or pressure of fil ling, as appropriate; – marks and identification . These requirements are deemed to be met if the f ollowing standards are applied: ISO 10691:2004 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Procedures for checking before, during and after filling . ISO 11372:2011 Gas cylinders – Acetylene c ylinders – Filling conditions and filling inspection ISO 11755:2005 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles for compressed and liquefied gases (excluding acetylene) – Inspection at time of filling ISO 13088:2011 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinder bundles – Filling conditions and filling inspection ISO 24431:2016 Gas cylinders – Seamless, welded and composite cylinders for compressed and liquefied gases (excluding acetylene) – Inspection at time of filling (5) Special packing provisions: Material compatibility a: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles s hall not be used . b: Copper valves shall not be used . c: Metal parts in contact with the contents sha ll not contain more than 65% copper . d: When steel pressure receptacles are used , only those bearing the “H” mark in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 4 (p) are permitted . Requirements for toxic substances with a n LC 50 less than or equal to 200 mL / m 3 (ppm) k: Valve outlets shall be fitted with pressure -retaining gas-tight plugs or caps having threads that match those of the valve outlets . Each cylinder within a bundle shall be fitted w ith an individual valve that shall be closed during transport . After filling, the manifold shall be ev acuated, purged and plugged . Bundles containing UN 1045 fluorine, comp ressed, may be constructed with isolation valves on groups of cylinders not exceeding 150 L total water capacity instead of isolation valves on every cylinder . Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bu ndle shall have a test pressure greater than or equal to 200 bar and a minimum wall thickness of 3 . 5 mm for aluminium alloy or 2 mm for steel . Individual cylinders not complying wi th this requirement shall be transported in a rigid outer packaging that will adequately protect the cylinder and its fittings and meeting the packing group I performance level . Pressure drums shall have a minimum wall th ickness as specified by the competent authority . Pressure receptacles shall not be fitted wi th a pressure relief device . Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bu ndle shall be limited to a maximum water capacity of 85 L . Each valve shall be capable of withstandin g the test pressure of the pressure receptacle and be connected directly to the pressure receptacle by either a taper thread or other means which meets the requirements of ISO 10692-2:2001 . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 188

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 178 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Each valve shall either be of the packless typ e with non-perforated diaphragm, or be of a type which prevents leakage through or past the packing . Each pressure receptacle shall be tested f or leakage after filling . Gas specific provisions l: UN 1040 ethylene oxide may also be packed in her metically sealed glass or metal inner packagings suitably cushioned in fibreboard, wooden or metal boxes meeting the packing group I performance level . The maximum quantity permitted in any gla ss inner packaging is 30 g, and the maximum quantity permitted in any metal inner packaging is 200 g . After filling, each inner packaging shal l be determined to be leaktight by placing the inner packaging in a hot water bath at a temperature, and for a period of time, sufficient to ensure that an internal pressure equal to the vapour pressure of ethylene oxide at 55 ° C is achieved . The maximum net mass in any outer packaging s hall not exceed 2 . 5 kg . m: Pressure receptacles shall be filled to a work ing pressure not exceeding 5 bar . n: Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bu ndle shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas . When bundles containing UN 1045 fluorine , compressed are divided into groups of cylinders in accordance with special packing provision “k” each group shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas . o: In no case shall the working pressure or filling r atio shown in the table be exceeded . p: For UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 a cetylene, solvent free: cylinders shall be filled with a homogeneous monolithic porous material; the working pressure and the quantity of acetylene shall not exceed the values prescribed in the approval or in ISO 3807-1:2000, ISO 3807-2:2000 or ISO 3807:2013, as applicable . For UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved: cylind ers shall contain a quantity of acetone or suitable solvent as specified in the approval (see ISO 3807-1:2000, ISO 3807-2:2000 or ISO 3807:2013, as applicable); cylinders fitted with pressure relief devices or manifolded together shall be transported vertically . The test pressure of 52 bar applies only to cyli nders fitted with a fusible plug . q: Valve outlets of pressure receptacles fo r pyrophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing more than 1% of pyrophoric compounds shall be fitted with gas-tight plugs or caps . When these pressure receptacles are man ifolded in a bundle, each of the pressure receptacles shall be fitted with an individual valve that shall be closed during transport, and the outlet of the manifold valve shall be fitted with a pressure-retaining gas-tight plug or cap . Gas-tight plugs or caps shall have thread s that match those of the valve outlets . r: The filling ratio of this gas shall be limited su ch that, if complete decomposition occurs, the pressure does not exceed two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle . ra: This gas may also be packed in capsules under th e following conditions: (i) The mass of gas shall not exceed 150 g per capsule; (ii) The capsules shall be free from faults liabl e to impair the strength; (iii) The leakproofness of the closure shall be en sured by an additional device (cap, crown, seal, binding, etc . ) capable of preventing any leakage of the clo sure during transport; (iv) The capsules shall be placed in an outer packa ging of sufficient strength . A package shall not weigh more than 75 kg . s: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles s hall be: – equipped only with brass or stainless stee l valves; and – cleaned in accordance with ISO 11621:199 7 and not contaminated with oil . t: (i) The wall thickness of pressure receptacl es shall be not less than 3 mm . (ii) Prior to transport, it shall be ensured that t he pressure has not risen due to potential hydrogen generation . Periodic inspection u: The interval between periodic tests may be ext ended to 10 years for aluminium alloy pressure receptacles when the alloy of the pressure receptacle has been subjected to stress corrosion testing as specified in ISO 7866:2012 + Cor 1:2014 . v: The interval between periodic inspectio ns for steel cylinders may be extended to 15 years if approved by the competent authority of the country of use . Requirements for N.O.S. descriptions an d for mixtures z: The construction materials of the pressu re receptacles and their accessories shall be compatible with the contents and shall not react to form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith . The test pressure and filling ratio shall be ca lculated in accordance with the relevant requirements of (3) . Toxic substances with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 mL / m 3 shall not be transported in tubes, pressure drums or MEGCs and shall meet the requirements of special packing provision “k” . However, UN 1975 nitric oxide and dinitrog en tetroxide mixtures may be transported in pressure drums . For pressure receptacles containing py rophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing more than 1% pyrophoric compounds, the requirements of special packing provision “q” shall be met . The necessary steps shall be taken to preven t dangerous reactions (i . e . polymerization or decomposition) du ring transport . If necessary, stabilization or additi on of an inhibitor shall be required . Mixtures containing UN 1911 diborane sha ll be filled to a pressure such that, if complete decomposition of the diborane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded . Mixtures containing UN 2192 germane, ot her than mixtures of up to 35% germane in hydrogen or nitrogen or up to 28% germane in helium or argon, shall be filled to a pressure such that, if complete decomposition of the germane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 189

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 179 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 1: COMPRESSED GASES UN No. Proper shi pping name Class Subsidiary hazard LC 50 , mL / m 3 Cylinders Tubes Pressure drums Bundles of cylinders MEGCs Test period, years Test pressure, bar * Maximum working pressure, bar * Special packing provisions 1002 AIR, COMPRESSED 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 1006 ARGON, COMPRESSED 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 1016 CARBON MONOXIDE, COMPRESSED 2 . 3 2 . 1 3,760 X X X X X 5 u 1023 COAL GAS, COMPRESSED 2 . 3 2 . 1 X X X X X 5 1045 FLUORINE, COMPRESSED 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 185 X X 5 200 30 a, k, n, o 1046 HELIUM, COMPRESSED 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 1049 HYDROGEN, COMPRESSED 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 d 1056 KRYPTON, COMPRESSED 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 1065 NEON, COMPRESSED 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 1066 NITROGEN, COMPRESSED 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 1071 OIL GAS, COMPRESSED 2 . 3 2 . 1 X X X X X 5 1072 OXYGEN, COMPRESSED 2 . 2 5 . 1 X X X X 10 s 1612 HEXAETHYL TETRAPHOSPHATE AND COM PRESSED GAS MIXTURE 2 . 3 X X X X 5 z 1660 NITRIC OXIDE, COMPRESSED 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 115 X X 5 225 33 k, o 1953 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMM ABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z 1954 COMPRESSED GAS, FLAMMAB LE, N . O . S 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 z 1955 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, N . O . S . 2 . 3 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z 1956 COMPRESSED GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 z 1957 DEUTERIUM, COMPRESSED 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 d 1964 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, COMPRE SSED, N . O . S . 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 z 1971 METHANE, COMPRESSED or NATURA L GAS, COMPRESSED with high methane content 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 2034 HYDROGEN AND METHANE MIXTURE, CO MPRESSED 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 d 2190 OXYGEN DIFLUORIDE, COMPRESSED 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 2 . 6 X X 5 200 30 a, k, n, o 3156 COMPRESSED GAS, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . 2 . 2 5 . 1 X X X X X 10 z 3303 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZ ING, N . O . S . 2 . 3 5 . 1 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z 3304 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, COR ROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 8 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z 3305 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLA MMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1, 8 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z 3306 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC , OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z * Where the entries are blank, the maximum working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 190

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 180 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVE D GASES UN No. Proper shipping name Class Subsidiary hazard LC 50 , mL / m 3 Cylinders Tubes Pressure drums Bundles of cylinders MEGCs Test period, years Test pressure, bar Filling ratio Special packing provisions 1001 ACETYLENE, DISSOLVED 2 . 1 X X 10 60 52 c, p 1005 AMMONIA, ANHYDROUS 2 . 3 8 4,000 X X X X X 5 29 0 . 54 b 1008 BORON TRIFLUORIDE 2 . 3 8 387 X X X X X 5 225 300 0 . 715 0 . 86 a 1009 BROMOTRIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGER ANT GAS R 13B1) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 42 120 250 1 . 13 1 . 44 1 . 60 1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED (1,2-butad iene), or 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 59 1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED (1,3-butad iene), or 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 55 1010 BUTADIENES AND HYDROCARBON MIXTURE, S TABILIZED with more than 40% butadienes 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 v, z 1011 BUTANE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 52 v 1012 BUTYLENE (butylenes mixture) or 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 50 z 1012 BUTYLENE (1-butylene) or 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 53 1012 BUTYLENE ( cis -2-butylene) or 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 55 1012 BUTYLENE ( trans -2-butylene) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 54 1013 CARBON DIOXIDE 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 190 250 0 . 68 0 . 76 1017 CHLORINE 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 293 X X X X X 5 22 1 . 25 a 1018 CHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGER ANT GAS R 22) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 27 1 . 03 1020 CHLOROPENTAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIG ERANT GAS R 115) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 25 1 . 05 1021 1-CHLORO-1,2,2,2-TETRAFLUOROET HANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 124) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 11 1 . 20 1022 CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGE RANT GAS R 13) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 100 120 190 250 0 . 83 0 . 90 1 . 04 1 . 11 1026 CYANOGEN 2 . 3 2 . 1 350 X X X X X 5 100 0 . 70 u 1027 CYCLOPROPANE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 18 0 . 55 1028 DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGE RANT GAS R 12) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 16 1 . 15 1029 DICHLOROFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGE RANT GAS R 21) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 10 1 . 23 1030 1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERA NT GAS R 152a) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 16 0 . 79 1032 DIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 59 b 1033 DIMETHYL ETHER 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 18 0 . 58 1035 ETHANE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 95 120 300 0 . 25 0 . 30 0 . 40 1036 ETHYLAMINE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 61 b 1037 ETHYL CHLORIDE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 80 a, ra 1039 ETHYL METHYL ETHER 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 64 1040 ETHYLENE OXIDE or ETHYLENE OXIDE WITH N ITROGEN up to a total pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar) at 5 0 ° C 2 . 3 2 . 1 2,900 X X X X X 5 15 0 . 78 l △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 191

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 181 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVE D GASES (continued) UN No. Proper shipping name Class Subsidiary hazard LC 50 , mL / m 3 Cylinders Tubes Pressure drums Bundles of cylinders MEGCs Test period, years Test pressure, bar Filling ratio Special packing provisions 1041 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE MIXTURE with more than 9% ethylene oxide but not more than 87% 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 190 250 0 . 66 0 . 75 1043 FERTILIZER AMMONIATING SOLUTION wit h free ammonia 2 . 2 X X X 5 b, z 1048 HYDROGEN BROMIDE, ANHYDROUS 2 . 3 8 2,860 X X X X X 5 60 1 . 51 a, d 1050 HYDROGEN CHLORIDE, ANHYDROUS 2 . 3 8 2,810 X X X X X 5 100 120 150 200 0 . 30 0 . 56 0 . 67 0 . 74 a, d a, d a, d a, d 1053 HYDROGEN SULPHIDE 2 . 3 2 . 1 712 X X X X X 5 48 0 . 67 d, u 1055 ISOBUTYLENE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 52 1058 LIQUEFIED GASES, non-flammable, ch arged with nitrogen, carbon dioxide or air 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 z 1060 METHYLACETYLENE AND PROPADIENE MIX TURE, STABILIZED or 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 c, z 1060 METHYLACETYLENE AND PROPAD IENE MIXTURE, STABILIZED (Propadiene with 1% to 4% methylacetylene) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 22 0 . 52 c 1061 METHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 13 0 . 58 b 1062 METHYL BROMIDE with not more than 2% chlo ropicrin 2 . 3 850 X X X X X 5 10 1 . 51 a 1063 METHYL CHLORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 40 ) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 17 0 . 81 a 1064 METHYL MERCAPTAN 2 . 3 2 . 1 1,350 X X X X X 5 10 0 . 78 d, u 1067 DINITROGEN TETROXIDE (NITROGEN DIOX IDE) 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 115 X X X 5 10 1 . 30 k 1069 NITROSYL CHLORIDE 2 . 3 8 35 X X 5 13 1 . 10 k 1070 NITROUS OXIDE 2 . 2 5 . 1 X X X X X 10 180 225 250 0 . 68 0 . 74 0 . 75 1075 PETROLEUM GASES, LIQUEFIED 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 v, z 1076 PHOSGENE 2 . 3 8 5 X X X 5 20 1 . 23 k, a 1077 PROPYLENE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 27 0 . 43 1078 REFRIGERANT GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 z 1079 SULPHUR DIOXIDE 2 . 3 8 2,520 X X X X X 5 12 1 . 23 1080 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 70 140 160 1 . 06 1 . 34 1 . 38 1081 TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE, STABILIZED 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 200 m, o 1082 TRIFLUOROCHLOROETHYLENE, STABILIZED (REFRIGERANT GAS R 1113) 2 . 3 2 . 1 2,000 X X X X X 5 19 1 . 13 u 1083 TRIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 56 b 1085 VINYL BROMIDE, STABILIZED 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 1 . 37 a 1086 VINYL CHLORIDE, STABILIZED 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 12 0 . 81 a 1087 VINYL METHYL ETHER, STABILIZED 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 67 1581 CHLOROPICRIN AND METHYL BROMIDE MIXT URE with more than 2% chloropicrin 2 . 3 850 X X X X X 5 10 1 . 51 a 1582 CHLOROPICRIN AND METHYL CHLORIDE MIXT URE 2 . 3 X X X X X 5 17 0 . 81 a 1589 CYANOGEN CHLORIDE, STABILIZED 2 . 3 8 80 X X 5 20 1 . 03 k 1741 BORON TRICHLORIDE 2 . 3 8 2,541 X X X X X 5 10 1 . 19 a △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 192

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 182 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVE D GASES (continued) UN No. Proper shipping name Class Subsidiary hazard LC 50 , mL / m 3 Cylinders Tubes Pressure drums Bundles of cylinders MEGCs Test period, years Test pressure, bar Filling ratio Special packing provisions 1749 CHLORINE TRIFLUORIDE 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 299 X X X X X 5 30 1 . 40 a 1858 HEXAFLUOROPROPYLENE (REFRIGERA NT GAS R 1216) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 22 1 . 11 1859 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE 2 . 3 8 922 X X X X X 5 200 300 0 . 74 1 . 10 a 1860 VINYL FLUORIDE, STABILIZED 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 250 0 . 64 a 1911 DIBORANE 2 . 3 2 . 1 80 X X 5 250 0 . 07 d, k, o 1912 METHYL CHLORIDE AND METHYLENE CHLOR IDE MIXTURE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 17 0 . 81 a 1952 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE MIXTU RE with not more than 9% ethylene oxide 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 190 250 0 . 66 0 . 75 1958 1,2-DICHLORO-1,1,2,2-TETRAFL UOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 114) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 10 1 . 30 1959 1,1-DIFLUOROETHYLENE (REFRIGE RANT GAS R 1132a) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 250 0 . 77 1962 ETHYLENE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 225 300 0 . 34 0 . 38 1965 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, LIQUEFIED , N . O . S . 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 v, z 1967 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, N . O . S . 2 . 3 X X X X X 5 z 1968 INSECTICIDE GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 z 1969 ISOBUTANE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 49 v 1973 CHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE AND CHLOROPEN TAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with fixed boiling point, with approximately 49% chlorodifluoromethane (REFRIGERANT GAS R 502) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 31 1 . 01 1974 CHLORODIFLUOROBROMOMETHANE (REFRI GERANT GAS R 12B1) 2 . 2 X X X X 10 10 1 . 61 1975 NITRIC OXIDE AND DINITROGEN TETROXI DE MIXTURE (NITRIC OXIDE AND NITROGEN DIOXIDE MIXTURE) 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 115 X X X 5 k, z 1976 OCTAFLUOROCYCLOBUTANE (R EFRIGERANT GAS RC 318) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 11 1 . 32 1978 PROPANE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 23 0 . 43 v 1982 TETRAFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERAN T GAS R 14) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 200 300 0 . 71 0 . 90 1983 1-CHLORO-2,2,2-TRIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 133a) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 10 1 . 18 1984 TRIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GA S R 23) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 190 250 0 . 88 0 . 96 2035 1,1,1-TRIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIG ERANT GAS R 143a) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 35 0 . 73 2036 XENON 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 130 1 . 28 2044 2,2-DIMETHYLPROPANE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 53 2073 AMMONIA SOLUTION, relative density les s than 0 . 880 at 15 ° C in water, with more than 35% but not more th an 40% ammonia with more than 40% but not more than 50% ammonia 2 . 2 X X X X X X X X X X 5 5 10 12 0 . 80 0 . 77 b b 2188 ARSINE 2 . 3 2 . 1 178 X X 5 42 1 . 10 d, k △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 193

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 183 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVE D GASES (continued) UN No. Proper shipping name Class Subsidiary hazard LC 50 , mL / m 3 Cylinders Tubes Pressure drums Bundles of cylinders MEGCs Test period, years Test pressure, bar Filling ratio Special packing provisions 2189 DICHLOROSILANE 2 . 3 2 . 1, 8 314 X X X X X 5 10 200 0 . 90 1 . 08 a 2191 SULPHURYL FLUORIDE 2 . 3 3,020 X X X X X 5 50 1 . 10 u 2192 GERMANE 2 . 3 2 . 1 620 X X X X X 5 250 0 . 064 d, q, r 2193 HEXAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGER ANT GAS R 116) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 200 1 . 13 2194 SELENIUM HEXAFLUORIDE 2 . 3 8 50 X X 5 36 1 . 46 k 2195 TELLURIUM HEXAFLUORIDE 2 . 3 8 25 X X 5 20 1 . 00 k 2196 TUNGSTEN HEXAFLUORIDE 2 . 3 8 160 X X 5 10 3 . 08 a, k 2197 HYDROGEN IODIDE, ANHYDROUS 2 . 3 8 2,860 X X X X X 5 23 2 . 25 a, d 2198 PHOSPHORUS PENTAFLUORIDE 2 . 3 8 190 X X 5 200 300 0 . 90 1 . 25 k k 2199 PHOSPHINE 2 . 3 2 . 1 20 X X 5 225 250 0 . 30 0 . 45 d, k, q d, k, q 2200 PROPADIENE, STABILIZED 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 22 0 . 50 2202 HYDROGEN SELENIDE, ANHYDROUS 2 . 3 2 . 1 51 X X 5 31 1 . 60 k 2203 SILANE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 225 250 0 . 32 0 . 36 q q 2204 CARBONYL SULPHIDE 2 . 3 2 . 1 1,700 X X X X X 5 30 0 . 87 u 2417 CARBONYL FLUORIDE 2 . 3 8 360 X X X X X 5 200 300 0 . 47 0 . 70 2418 SULPHUR TETRAFLUORIDE 2 . 3 8 40 X X 5 30 0 . 91 k, a 2419 BROMOTRIFLUOROETHYLENE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 1 . 19 2420 HEXAFLUOROACETONE 2 . 3 8 470 X X X X X 5 22 1 . 08 2421 NITROGEN TRIOXIDE 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 57 X X 5 k 2422 OCTAFLUOROBUT-2-ENE (REFR IGERANT GAS R 1318) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 12 1 . 34 2424 OCTAFLUOROPROPANE (REFRIGERA NT GAS R 218) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 25 1 . 04 2451 NITROGEN TRIFLUORIDE 2 . 2 5 . 1 X X X X X 10 200 0 . 50 2452 ETHYLACETYLENE, STABILIZED 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 57 c 2453 ETHYL FLUORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 161 ) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 30 0 . 57 2454 METHYL FLUORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 41) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 300 0 . 63 2455 METHYL NITRITE 2 . 2 (see special provision 900) 2517 1-CHLORO-1 ,1-DIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 142b) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 99 2534 METHYLCHLOROSILANE 2 . 3 2 . 1, 8 2,810 X X X X X 5 z 2548 CHLORINE PENTAFLUORID E 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 122 X X 5 13 1 . 49 a, k 2599 CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETHANE AND TRIFL UOROMETHANE AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE with approximately 60% chlorotrifluoromethane (REFRIGERANT GAS R 503) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 31 42 100 0 . 12 0 . 17 0 . 64 2601 CYCLOBUTANE 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 63 2602 DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE AND DIFLUOR OETHANE AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE with approximately 74% dichlorodifluoromethane (REFRIGERANT GAS R 500) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 22 1 . 01 2676 STIBINE 2 . 3 2 . 1 178 X X 5 200 0 . 49 k, r △ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 194

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 184 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVE D GASES (continued) UN No. Proper shipping name Class Subsidiary hazard LC 50 , mL / m 3 Cylinders Tubes Pressure drums Bundles of cylinders MEGCs Test period, years Test pressure, bar Filling ratio Special packing provisions 2901 BROMINE CHLORIDE 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 290 X X X X X 5 10 1 . 50 a 3057 TRIFLUOROACETYL CHLORIDE 2 . 3 8 10 X X X 5 17 1 . 17 k 3070 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND DICHLORODIFLUOR O- METHANE MIXTURE with not more than 12 . 5% ethylene oxide 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 18 1 . 09 3083 PERCHLORYL FLUORIDE 2 . 3 5 . 1 770 X X X X X 5 33 1 . 21 u 3153 PERFLUORO(METHYL VINYL ETHER) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 20 0 . 75 3154 PERFLUORO(ETHYL VINYL ETHER) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 10 0 . 98 3157 LIQUEFIED GAS, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . 2 . 2 5 . 1 X X X X X 10 z 3159 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 134a) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 18 1 . 05 3160 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z 3161 LIQUEFIED GAS, FLAMMABL E, N . O . S . 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 z 3162 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, N . O . S . 2 . 3 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z 3163 LIQUEFIED GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 z 3220 PENTAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GA S R 125) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 49 35 0 . 95 0 . 87 3252 DIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 3 2) 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 48 0 . 78 3296 HEPTAFLUOROPROPANE (REFRIGERA NT GAS R 227) 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 13 1 . 21 3297 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CHLOROTETRA- FLU OROETHANE MIXTURE with not more than 8 . 8% ethylene oxide 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 10 1 . 16 3298 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND PENTAFLUOROET HANE MIXTURE with not more than 7 . 9% ethylene oxide 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 26 1 . 02 3299 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND TETRAFLUOROETH ANE MIXTURE with not more than 5 . 6% ethylene oxide 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 17 1 . 03 3300 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE MIXT URE with more than 87% ethylene oxide 2 . 3 2 . 1 More than 2,900 X X X X X 5 28 0 . 73 3307 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . 2 . 3 5 . 1 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z 3308 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, CO RROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 8 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z 3309 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAM MABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1, 8 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z 3310 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, O XIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z 3318 AMMONIA SOLUTION, relati ve density less than 0 . 880 at 15 ° C in water, with more than 50% ammonia 2 . 3 8 X X X X 5 b 3337 REFRIGERANT GAS R 404A 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 36 0 . 82 3338 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407A 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 32 0 . 94 3339 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407B 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 33 0 . 93 3340 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407C 2 . 2 X X X X X 10 30 0 . 95 3354 INSECTICIDE GAS, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 1 X X X X X 10 z 3355 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMA BLE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 X X X X X 5 z 3374 ACETYLENE, SOLVENT FREE 2 . 1 X X 5 60 52 c, p △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 195

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 185 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 3: SUBSTANCES NOT IN CLASS 2 UN No. Prope r shipping name Class Subsidiary hazard LC 50 , mL / m 3 Cylinders Tubes Pressure drums Bundles of cylinders MEGCs Test period, years Test pressure, bar Filling ratio Special packing provisions 1051 HYDROGEN CYANIDE, STABILIZED containing less than 3% water 6 . 1 3 40 X X 5 100 0 . 55 k 1052 HYDROGEN FLUORIDE, ANHYDROUS 8 6 . 1 966 X X X 5 10 0 . 84 t, a 1745 BROMINE PENTAFLUORIDE 5 . 1 6 . 1, 8 25 X X X 5 10 * k 1746 BROMINE TRIFLUORIDE 5 . 1 6 . 1, 8 50 X X X 5 10 * k 2495 IODINE PENTAFLUORIDE 5 . 1 6 . 1, 8 120 X X X 5 10 * k * A minimum ullage of 8% by volume is required . P201 PACKING INSTRUCTION P201 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 3167, 3168 and 3169 . The following packagings are authorized : (1) Cylinders and gas receptacles conformi ng to the construction, testing and filling requirements approved by the competent authority . (2) The following combination packagings p rovided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1 D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) . Inner packagings: (a) For non-toxic gases, hermetically seal ed inner packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of 5 L per package; (b) For toxic gases, hermetically sealed inn er packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of 1 L per package . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up III performance level . P202 PACKING INSTRUCTION P202 [Reserved] △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 196

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 186 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P203 PACKING INSTRUCTION P203 This instruction applies to class 2 ref rigerated liquefied gases . Requirements for closed cryogenic re ceptacles: (1) The general requirements of 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 shall be met . (2) The requirements of chapter 6 . 2 shall be met . (3) The closed cryogenic receptacles shall b e so insulated that they do not become coated with frost . (4) Test pressure Refrigerated liquids shall be filled in clo sed cryogenic receptacles with the following minimum test pressures: (a) For closed cryogenic receptacles with va cuum insulation, the test pressure shall not be less than 1 . 3 times the sum of the maximum internal pressu re of the filled receptacle, including during filling and discharge, plus 100 kPa (1 bar); (b) For other closed cryogenic receptacles , the test pressure shall be not less than 1 . 3 times the maximum internal pressure of the fi lled receptacle, taking into account the pressure developed during filling and discharge . (5) Degree of filling For non-flammable, non-toxic refriger ated liquefied gases the volume of liquid phase at the filling temperature and at a pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar) shall not exceed 98% of the water capacity of the pressure receptacle . For flammable refrigerated liquefied gas es the degree of filling shall remain below the level at which, if the contents were raised to the temperature at which the vapour pressure equalled the opening pressure of the relief valve, the volume of the liquid phase would reach 98% of the water capacity at that temperature . (6) Pressure-relief devices Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be fit ted with at least one pressure-relief device . (7) Compatibility Materials used to ensure the leakproofne ss of the joints or for the maintenance of the closures shall be compatible with the contents . In the case of receptacles intended for the t ransport of oxidizing gases (i . e . with a subsidiary hazard of 5 . 1), these materials shall not react with the se gases in a dangerous manner . (8) Periodic inspection The periodic insp ection and test frequencies of pressure relief valves in accordance with 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 3 shall not exceed five years . Requirements for open cryogenic recept acles: Only the following non-oxidizing refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 . 2 may be transported in open cryogenic recep tacles: UN Nos . 1913, 1951, 1963, 1970, 1977, 2591, 3136 an d 3158 . Open cryogenic receptacles shall be cons tructed to meet the following requirements: (1) The receptacles shall be designed, manuf actured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand all conditions, including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during their normal use and during normal conditions of transport . (2) The capacity shall be not more than 450 L . (3) The receptacle shall have a double wall cons truction with the space between the inner and outer wall being evacuated (vacuum insulation) . The insulation shall prevent the format ion of hoar frost on the exterior of the receptacle . (4) The materials of construction shall have s uitable mechanical properties at the service temperature . (5) Materials which are in direct contact with t he dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by the dangerous goods intended to be transported and shall not cause a dangerous effect, e . g . catalysing a reaction or reacting with th e dangerous goods . (6) Receptacles of glass double wall constru ction shall have an outer packaging with suitable cushioning or absorbent materials which withstand the pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of transport . (7) The receptacle shall be designed to remain i n an upright position during transport, e . g . have a base whose smaller horizontal dime nsion is greater than the height of the centre of gravity when filled to capacity or be mounted on gimbals . (8) The openings of the receptacles shall be fitt ed with devices allowing gases to escape, preventing any splashing out of liquid, and so configured that they remain in place during transport . (9) Open cryogenic receptacles shall bear th e following marks permanently affixed, e . g . by stamping, engraving or etching: – The manufacturer’s name and address; – The model number or name; – The serial or batch number; – The UN number and proper shipping name of gase s for which the receptacle is intended; – The capacity of the receptacle in litres . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 197

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 187 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P205 PACKING INSTRUCTION P205 This instruction applies to UN 3468 . (1) For metal hydride storage systems, the gene ral packing requirements of 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 shall be met . (2) Only pressure receptacles not exceeding 1 50 L in water capacity and having a maximum developed pressure not exceeding 25 MPa are covered by this packing instruction . (3) Metal hydride storage systems meeting the a pplicable requirements for the construction and testing of pressure receptacles containing gas of chapter 6 . 2 are authorized for the transport of hydroge n only . (4) When steel pressure receptacles or compo site pressure receptacles with steel liners are used, only those bearing the “H” mark, in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 9 . 2(j), shall be used . (5) Metal hydride storage systems shall meet th e service conditions, design criteria, rated capacity, type tests, batch tests, routine tests, test pressure, rated charging pressure and provisions for pressure relief devices for transportable metal hydride storage systems specified in ISO 16111:2008 and their conformity and approval shall be assessed in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . (6) Metal hydride storage systems shall be fille d with hydrogen at a pressure not exceeding the rated charging pressure shown in the permanent mark on the system as specified by ISO 16111:2008 . (7) The periodic test requirements for a metal h ydride storage system shall be in accordance with ISO 16111:2008 and carried out in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 6, and the interval between periodic inspec tions shall not exceed five years . P206 PACKING INSTRUCTION P206 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505 . Unless otherwise indicated in these p rovisions, cylinders and pressure drums conforming to the applicable requirements of Chapter 6 . 2 are authorized . (1) The general packing requirements of 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 shall be met . (2) The maximum test period for periodic inspe ction shall be 5 years . (3) Cylinders and pressure drums shall be so fill ed that at 50 ° C the non-gaseous phase does not exceed 95% of their water capacity and they are not completely filled at 60 ° C . When filled, the internal pressure at 65 ° C sha ll not exceed the test pressure of the cylinders and pressure drums . The vapour pressures and volumetric expa nsion of all substances in the cylinders and pressure drums shall be taken into account . For liquids charged with a compressed gas b oth components – the liquid and the compressed gas – have to be taken into consideration in the calculation of the internal pressure in the pressure receptacle . When experimental data is not available, t he following steps shall be carried out: (a) calculation of the vapour pressure of the li quid and of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 15°C (filling temperature); (b) calculation of the volumetric expansion o f the liquid phase resulting from the heating from 15°C to 65°C and calculation of the remaining volume for the gaseous phase; (c) calculation of the partial pressure of the c ompressed gas at 65°C considering the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase; Note: The compressibility factor of the co mpressed gas at 15°C and 65°C shall be considered . (d) calculation of the vapour pressure of the li quid at 65°C; (e) the total pressure is the sum of the vapour pres sure of the liquid and the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65°C; (f) consideration of the solubility of the com pressed gas at 65°C in the liquid phase . The test pressure of the cylinders or pressu re drums shall not be less than the calculated total pressure minus 100 kPa (1bar) . If the solubility of the compressed gas in the l iquid phase is not known for the calculation, the test pressure can be calculated without taking the gas solubility (subparagraph (f)) into account . (4) The minimum test pressure shall be in accord ance with P200 for the propellant but shall not be less than 20 bar . Additional requirement: Cylinders and pr essure drums shall not be offered for transport when connected with spray application equipment such as a hose and wand assembly . Special packing provisions: PP89 For UN Nos . 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, notwithst anding 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 9 . 2, non-refillable cylinders used may have a w ater capacity in L not exceeding 1 000L divided by the test pressure expressed in bars provided capacity and pressure restrictions of the construction standard comply with ISO 11118:1999, which limits the maximum capacity to 50L . PP97 For fire-extinguishing agents assigned t o UN 3500 the maximum test period for periodic inspection shall be 10 years . They may be transported in tubes of a maximum w ater capacity of 450 L conforming to the applicable requirements of chapter 6 . 2 . △ △ △ △ △ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 198

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 188 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P207 PACKING INSTRUCTION P207 This instruction applies to UN 1950 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (a) Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1 D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II performance level . (b) Rigid outer packagings with a maximum net ma ss as follows: Fibreboard 55 kg Other than fibreboard 125 kg The provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 . 3 need not be met . The packagings shall be designed and const ructed to prevent excessive movement of the aerosols and inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport . Special packing provision: PP87 For UN 1950, waste aerosols transported in a ccordance with special provision 327, the packagings shall have a means of retaining any free liquid that might escape during transport, e . g . absorbent material . The packaging shall be adequately venti lated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of pressure . P208 PACKING INSTRUCTION P208 This instruction applies to class 2 ads orbed gases . (1) The following packagings are authorize d provided the general packing requirements of 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 are met: (a) cylinders constructed as specified in 6 . 2 . 2 and in accordance with ISO 11513:2011 or ISO 9 809-1:2010; and (b) cylinders constructed before 1 January 2 016 in accordance with 6 . 2 . 3 and a specification approved by the compete nt authorities of the countries of transport and use . (2) The pressure of each filled cylinder shall be l ess than 101 . 3 kPa at 20 ° C and less than 300 kPa at 50 ° C . (3) The minimum test pressure of the cylinder sh all be 21 bar . (4) The minimum burst pressure of the cylinder s hall be 94 . 5 bar . (5) The internal pressure at 65 ° C of the filled cylin der shall not exceed the test pressure of the cylinder . (6) The adsorbent material shall be compatib le with the cylinder and shall not form harmful or dangerous compounds with the gas to be adsorbed . The gas in combination with the adsorbent m aterial shall not affect or weaken the cylinder or cause a dangerous reaction (e . g . a catalyzing reaction) . (7) The quality of the adsorbent material shal l be verified at the time of each fill to assure the pressure and chemical stability requirements of this packing instruction are met each time an adsorbed gas package is offered for transport . (8) The adsorbent material shall not meet the cr iteria of any of the classes or divisions in this Code . (9) Requirements for cylinders and closures con taining toxic gases with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 (ppm) (see table 1) shall be as follows: (a) Valve outlets shall be fitted with pressure r etaining gas-tight plugs or caps having threads matching those of the valve outlets . (b) Each valve shall either be of the packless typ e with non-perforated diaphragm, or be of a type which prevents leakage through or past the packing . (c) Each cylinder and closure shall be tested fo r leakage after filling . (d) Each valve shall be capable of withstandin g the test pressure of the cylinder and be directly connected to the cylinder by either a taper-thread or other means which meets the requirements of ISO 10692-2:2001 . (e) Cylinders and valves shall not be fitted with a p ressure relief device . (10) Valve outlets for cylinders containing p yrophoric gases shall be fitted with gas-tight plugs or caps having threads matching those of the valve outlets . (11) The filling procedure shall be in accordanc e with annex A of ISO 11513:2011 . (12) The maximum period for periodic inspecti ons shall be 5 years . (13) Special packing provisions that are spec ific to a substance (see table 1) . Material compatibility a: Aluminium alloy cylinders shall not be use d . d: When steel cylinders are used, only those be aring the “H” mark in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 4 (p) are permitted . Gas specific provisions r: The filling ratio of this gas shall be limited su ch that, if complete decomposition occurs, the pressure does not exceed two thirds of the test pressure of the cylinder . Material compatibility for N.O.S. adsor bed gas entries z: The construction materials of the cylind ers and their accessories shall be compatible with the contents and shall not react to form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 199

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 189 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P208 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P208 Table 1: ADSORBED GASES UN No. Proper shippi ng name Class or Division Subsidiary hazard LC 50 mL/m 3 Special packing provisions (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 3510 ADSORBED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 1 z 3511 ADSORBED GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 2 z 3512 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, N . O . S . 2 . 3 ≤ 5,000 z 3513 ADSORBED GAS, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . 2 . 2 5 . 1 z 3514 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 ≤ 5,000 z 3515 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING , N . O . S . 2 . 3 5 . 1 ≤ 5,000 z 3516 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE , N . O . S . 2 . 3 8 ≤ 5,000 z 3517 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, C ORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 8 ≤ 5,000 z 3518 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING , CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 5 . 1 8 ≤ 5,000 z 3519 BORON TRIFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 2 . 3 8 387 a 3520 CHLORINE, ADSORBED 2 . 3 5 . 1 8 293 a 3521 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 2 . 3 8 450 a 3522 ARSINE, ADSORBED 2 . 3 2 . 1 20 d 3523 GERMANE, ADSORBED 2 . 3 2 . 1 620 d, r 3524 PHOSPHORUS PENTAFLUORIDE, AD SORBED 2 . 3 8 190 3525 PHOSPHINE, ADSORBED 2 . 3 2 . 1 20 d 3526 HYDROGEN SELENIDE, ADSORBED 2 . 3 2 . 1 2 P300 PACKING INSTRUCTION P300 This instruction applies to UN 3064 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Combination packagings consisting of i nner metal cans of not more than 1 L capacity each and outer wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F) containing not more than 5 L of solution . Additional provisions: 1 Metal cans shall be completely surrounde d with absorbent cushioning material . 2 Wooden boxes shall be completely lined wit h suitable material impervious to water and nitroglycerin . P301 PACKING INSTRUCTION P301 This instruction applies to UN 3165 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Aluminium pressure receptacle made fro m tubing and having welded heads Primary containment of the fuel within thi s receptacle shall consist of a welded aluminium bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 L . The outer receptacle shall have a minimum d esign gauge pressure of 1,275 kPa and a minimum burst gauge pressure of 2,755 kPa . Each receptacle shall be leak-checked d uring manufacture and before shipment and shall be found leakproof . The complete inner unit shall be securely p acked in non-combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately protect all fittings . Maximum quantity of fuel per primary cont ainment and package is 42 L . (2) Aluminium pressure receptacle Primary containment of the fuel within thi s receptacle shall consist of a welded vapourtight fuel compartment with an elastomeric bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 L . The pressure receptacle shall have a mini mum design gauge pressure of 2,680 kPa and a minimum burst pressure of 5,170 kPa . Each receptacle shall be leak-checked d uring manufacture and before shipment and shall be securely packed in non-combustible cushioning material such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately protect all fittings . Maximum quantity of fuel per primary cont ainment and package is 42 L . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 200

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 190 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P302 PACKING INSTRUCTION P302 This instruction applies to UN 3269 . The following combination packagings a re authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1 D, 1G) . Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) . Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) . Inner packagings: The activator (organic peroxide) shall h ave a maximum quantity of 125 ml per inner packaging if liquid, and 500 g per inner packaging if solid . The base material and the activator shall be e ach separately packed in inner packagings . The components may be placed in the same outer p ackaging provided that they will not interact dangerously in the event of a leakage . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II or III performance level according to the criteria for Class 3 applied to the base material . P400 PACKING INSTRUCTION P400 The following packagings are author ized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that th e general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met . They shall be made of steel and shall be subjec ted to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar, gauge pressure) . During carriage, the liquid shall be unde r a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0 . 2 bar) . (2) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G), drums (1 A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1D or 1G) or jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2) enclosing hermetically sealed metal cans with inner packagings of glass or metal, with a capacity of not more than 1 L each, having closures with gaskets . Inner packagings shall have threaded cl osures or closures physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport . Inner packagings shall be cushioned on al l sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents . Inner packagings shall not be filled to more t han 90% of their capacity . Outer packagings shall have a maximum net m ass of 125 kg . (3) Steel, aluminium or metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1 B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2), jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2) or boxes (4A, 4B or 4N) with a maximum net mass of 150 kg each with hermetically sealed inner metal cans of not more than 4 L capacity each, with closures fitted with gaskets . Inner packagings shall have threaded cl osures or closures physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport . Inner packagings shall be cushioned on al l sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents . Each layer of inner packagings shall be sep arated by a dividing partition in addition to cushioning material . Inner packagings shall not be filled to more t han 90% of their capacity . Special packing provision: PP86 For UN Nos . 3392 and 3394, air shall be eliminated from t he vapour space by nitrogen or other means . P401 PACKING INSTRUCTION P401 The following packagings are author ized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that th e general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met . They shall be made of steel and subjected to an i nitial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0 . 6 MPa (6 bar, gauge pressure) . During carriage, the liquid shall be unde r a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0 . 2 bar) . (2) Combination packagings Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1 D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1,4H2 ); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) . Inner packagings: Glass, metal or plastics which have thread ed closures with a maximum capacity of 1 L . Each inner packaging shall be surrounded b y inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents . The maximum net mass per outer packaging sha ll not exceed 30 kg . Special packing provision: PP31 For UN Nos . 1183, 1242, 1295, 2965 and 2988, packaging s shall be hermetically sealed . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 201

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 191 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P402 PACKING INSTRUCTION P402 The following packagings are author ized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that th e general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met . They shall be made of steel and subjected to an i nitial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0 . 6 MPa (6 bar, gauge pressure) . During carriage, the liquid shall be unde r a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0 . 2 bar) . (2) Combination packagings Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1 D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) . Inner packagings with a maximum net mass as fol lows: Glass 10 kg Metal or plastics 15 kg Each inner packaging shall be fitted with thr eaded closures . Each inner packaging shall be surrounded b y inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents . The maximum net mass per outer packaging sha ll not exceed 125 kg . (3) Steel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 2 50 L . (4) Composite packagings consisting of pla stics receptacle in a steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) with a maximum capacity of 250 L . Special packing provision: PP31 For UN Nos . 1389, 1391, 1392, 1420, 1421, 1422, 3148, 3 184 (PG II), 3185 (PG II), 3187 (PG II), 3188 (PG II), 3398 (PG I), 3399 (PG I) and 3482, packagings shall be hermetically sealed . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 202

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 192 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P403 PACKING INSTRUCTION P403 The following packagings are author ized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 2 kg Drums Plastic 15 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg Metal 20 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 400 kg other metal (1 N1, 1N2) 400 kg Inner packagings shall be hermetically sealed (e . g . by taping or by threaded closures) . plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg plywood (1D) 400 kg fib re (1G) 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) 400 kg aluminium (4B) 400 kg other metal (4N) 400 kg natural wood (4C1) 250 kg natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 250 kg plywood (4D) 250 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg fibreboard (4G) 125 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 250 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg Single packagings Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) 250 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 250 kg metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) 250 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) 250 kg Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1) 75 kg Plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) 75 kg Pressure receptacles , provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met Special packing provisions: PP31 For UN Nos . 1360, 1397, 1402, 1404, 1407, 1409, 1410, 1 413, 1414, 1415, 1418, 1419, 1423, 1426, 1427, 1428, 1432, 1433, 1436, 1714, 1870, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2257, 2463, 2806, 2813, 3131, 3132, 3134, 3135, 3208, 3209, 3395, 3396, 3397, 3401, 3402, 3403 and 3404, packagings shall be hermetically sealed . PP83 Deleted Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 203

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 193 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P404 PACKING INSTRUCTION P404 This instruction applies to pyropho ric solids: UN Nos . 1383, 1854, 1855, 2008, 2441, 2545, 2546, 284 6, 2881, 3200, 3391 and 3393 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Combination packagings Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 , 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2) Inner packagings: Metal packagings wit h a maximum net mass of 15 kg each . Inner packagings shall be hermeticall y sealed . Glass receptacles, with a maximum net mas s of 1 kg each, having closures with gaskets, cushioned on all sides and contained in hermetically sealed metal cans . Outer packagings shall have a maximum net ma ss of 125 kg . Inner packagings shall have threaded clo sures or closures physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport . (2) Metal packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 , 1N2, 3A1, 3A2, 3B1 and 3B2) Maximum gross mass: 150 kg (3) Composite packagings: Plastics recep tacle in a steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) Maximum gross mass: 150 kg Pressure recept acles may be used provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met . Special packing provisions: PP31 For UN Nos . 1383, 1854, 1855, 2008, 2441, 2545, 2546, 284 6, 2881 and 3200, packagings shall be hermetically sealed . PP86 For UN Nos . 3391 and 3393, air shall be eliminated from t he vapour space by nitrogen or other means . P405 PACKING INSTRUCTION P405 This instruction applies to UN 1381 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) For UN 1381, wet phosphorus: . 1 Combination packagings Outer packagings: (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4 F); maximum net mass: 75 kg Inner packagings: (i) hermetically sealed metal cans, with a max imum net mass of 15 kg; or (ii) glass inner packagings cushioned on all si des with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents with a maximum net mass of 2 kg; or . 2 Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2); maximu m net mass: 400 kg Jerricans (3A1 or 3B1); maximum net mass: 12 0 kg . These packagings shall be capable of passi ng the leakproofness test specified in 6 . 1 . 5 . 4 at the packing group II performance level . (2) For UN 1381, dry phosphorus: . 1 When fused, drums (1A2, 1B2 or 1N2) with a maxim um net mass of 400 kg; or . 2 In projectiles or hard-cased articles wh en transported without class 1 components, as specified by the competent authority . Special packing provision: PP31 For UN 1381, packagings shall be hermetica lly sealed . △ ■ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 204

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 194 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P406 PACKING INSTRUCTION P406 The following packagings are author ized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Combination packagings Outer packagings: (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 , 4H2, 1G, 1D, 1H1, 1H2, 3H1 or 3H2) Inner packagings shall be water-resistan t . (2) Plastics, plywood or fibreboard drums (1H2 , 1D or 1G) or boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4D, 4F, 4C2, 4G and 4H2) with a water-resistant inner bag, plastics film lining or water-resistant coating . (3) Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2), pl astics drums (1H1 or 1H2), metal jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2), plastics jerricans (3H1 or 3H2), plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drums (6HA1 or 6HB1), plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drums (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1), plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics boxes (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) . Additional provisions: 1 Packagings shall be designed and construc ted to prevent the loss of water or alcohol content or the content of the phlegmatizer . 2 Packagings shall be so constructed and clos ed as to avoid an explosive overpressure or pressure build-up of more than 300 kPa (3 bar) . 3 The type of packaging and maximum permitte d quantity per packaging are limited by the provisions of 2 . 1 . 3 . 4 . Special packing provisions: PP24 UN Nos . 2852, 3364, 3365, 3366, 3367, 3368 and 3369 sh all not be transported in quantities of more than 500 g per package . PP25 UN 1347 shall not be transported in quantiti es of more than 15 kg per package . PP26 For UN Nos . 1310, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1 349, 1517, 2907, 3317, 3344 and 3376, packagings shall be lead-free . PP31 For UN Nos . 1310, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1336, 1337, 1344, 1 347, 1348, 1349, 1354, 1355, 1356, 1357, 1517, 1571, 2555, 2556, 2557, 2852, 3317, 3364, 3365, 3366, 3367, 3368, 3369, 3370 and 3376, packagings shall be hermetically sealed . PP48 For UN 3474, metal packagings shall not be use d . Packagings of other material with a small am ount of metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6 . 1 . 4, are not considered metal packagings . PP78 UN 3370 shall not be transported in quantiti es of more than 11 . 5 kg per package . PP80 For UN Nos . 2907 and 3344, packagings shall meet the pa cking group II performance level . Packagings meeting the test criteria of pa cking group I shall not be used . P407 PACKING INSTRUCTION P407 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 1331, 1944, 1945 and 2254 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1 D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) . Inner packagings: Matches shall be tightly packed in securel y closed inner packagings to prevent accidental ignition under normal conditions of transport . The maximum gross mass of the package shall no t exceed 45 kg except for fibreboard boxes which shall not exceed 30 kg . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up III performance level . Special packing provision: PP27 UN 1331, Strike-anywhere matches, shal l not be packed in the same outer packaging with any other dangerous goods other than safety matches or wax Vesta matches, which shall be packed in separate inner packagings . Inner packagings shall not contain more t han 700 strike-anywhere matches . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 205

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 195 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P408 PACKING INSTRUCTION P408 This instruction applies to UN 3292 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) For cells: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . There shall be sufficient cushioning mate rial to prevent contact between cells and between cells and the internal surfaces of the outer packaging and to ensure that no dangerous movement of the cells within the outer packaging occurs in transport . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II performance level . (2) Batteries may be transported unpacked or i n protective enclosures (e . g . fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates) . The terminals shall not support the weight o f other batteries or materials packed with the batteries . Packagings need not meet the requirements o f 4 . 1 . 1 . 3 . Additional requirement: Cells and batter ies shall be protected against short circuit and shall be isolated in such a manner as to prevent short circuits . P409 PACKING INSTRUCTION P409 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 2956, 3242 and 3251 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Fibre drum (1G) which may be fitted with a liner or c oating; maximum net mass: 50 kg . (2) Combination packagings: Fibreboard b ox (4G) with a single inner plastic bag; maximum net mass: 50 kg . (3) Combination packagings: Fibreboard b ox (4G) or fibre drum (1G) with inner plastic packagings each containing a maximum of 5 kg; maximum net mass: 25 kg . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 206

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 196 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P410 PACKING INSTRUCTION P410 The following packagings are author ized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 kg Plastics 1 30 kg Metal 40 kg Paper 1, 2 10 kg Fibre 1, 2 10 kg 1 Packagings shall be sift-proof . 2 These inner packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport (see 4 . 1 . 3 . 4) . Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) 1 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood (4C1) natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) 1 expanded plastics (4H1) solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 60 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 60 kg 400 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) aluminium (3B1, 3B2) plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg Single packagings Drums steel (1A1 or 1A2) aluminium (1B1 or 1B2) metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N2) plastics (1H1 or 1H2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Jerricans steel (3A1 or 3A2) aluminium (3B1 or 3B2) plastics (3H1 or 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg Boxes steel (4A) 3 aluminium (4B) 3 other metal (4N) 3 natural wood (4C1) 3 natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 3 plywood (4D) 3 reconstituted wood (4F) 3 fibreboard (4G) 3 solid plastics (4H2) 3 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Bags Bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2) 3, 4 50 kg 50 kg Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood, fibre or plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HD1 or 6HH1) 400 kg 400 kg Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box, wooden box, plywood box, fibreboard box or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) 75 kg 75 kg Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood or fibre drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or in steel, aluminium, wooden, wickerwork hamper or fibreboard box (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PD2 or 6PG2) or in expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2) 3 These packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport (see 4 . 1 . 3 . 4) . 4 For packing group II substances, these packagings may only be used when transported in a closed cargo transport unit . 75 kg 75 kg Pressure receptacles , provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 207

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 197 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P410 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P410 Special packing provisions: PP31 For UN Nos . 1326, 1339, 1340, 1341, 1343, 1352, 1358, 13 73, 1374, 1378, 1379, 1382, 1384, 1385, 1390, 1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1398, 1400, 1401, 1402, 1405, 1409, 1417, 1418, 1431, 1436, 1437, 1871, 1923, 1929, 2004, 2008, 2318, 2545, 2546, 2624, 2805, 2813, 2830, 2835, 2844, 2881, 2940, 3078, 3088, 3131, 3132, 3134, 3135, 3170, 3182, 3189, 3190, 3205, 3206, 3208, 3209, 3395, 3396 and 3397, packagings shall be hermetically sealed . PP39 For UN 1378, for metal packagings a venting de vice is required . PP40 For the following UN Nos . , falling in PG II, bags are not allowed: 1326, 1340 , 1352, 1358, 1374, 1378, 1382, 1390, 1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1400, 1401, 1402, 1405, 1409, 1417, 1418, 1436, 1437, 1871, 2624, 2805, 2813, 2830, 2835, 3078, 3131, 3132, 3134, 3170, 3182, 3208 and 3209 . PP83 Deleted PP100 For UN 2950 flexible, fibreboard or wooden packagings shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant l iner . P411 PACKING INSTRUCTION P411 This instruction applies to UN 3270 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2), provided that ex plosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure . The maximum net mass shall not exceed 30 kg . P412 PACKING INSTRUCTION P412 This instruction applies to UN No . 3527 . The following combination packagings a re authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1 N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2); (2) Inner packagings: (a) The activator (organic peroxide) shall h ave a maximum quantity of 125 ml per inner packaging if liquid, and 500 g per inner packaging if solid . (b) The base material and the activator shall be e ach separately packed in inner packagings . The components may be placed in the same outer p ackaging provided that they will not interact dangerously in the event of a leakage . Packagings shall conform to the packing gr oup II or III performance level according to the criteria for class 4 . 1 applied to the base material . P500 PACKING INSTRUCTION P500 This instruction applies to UN 3356 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II performance level . The generator(s) shall be transported in a p ackage which meets the following requirements when one generator in the package is actuated: (1) Other generators in the package will not be ac tuated; (2) Packaging material will not ignite; and (3) The outside surface temperature of the com pleted package shall not exceed 100 ° C . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 208

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 198 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P501 PACKING INSTRUCTION P501 This instruction applies to UN 2015 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Combination packagings Inner packagings max imum capacity Outer packagings maximum net mass (1) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4H2) or drums (1A 1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D) or jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) with glass, plastics or metal inner packagings 5 L 125 kg (2) Fibreboard box (4G) or fibre drum (1G), with pl astics or metal inner packagings each in a plastics bag 2 L 50 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity Drums steel (1A1) aluminium (1B1) metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1) plastics (1H1) 250 L 250 L 250 L 250 L Jerricans steel (3A1) aluminium (3B1) plastics (3H1) 60 L 60 L 60 L Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 L Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 250 L Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle in wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) 60 L Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or in a steel, aluminium, wood or fibreboard box or in wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or in expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2) 60 L Additional provisions: 1 Packagings shall have a minimum ullage of 10% . 2 Packagings shall be vented . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 209

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 199 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P502 PACKING INSTRUCTION P502 The following packagings are author ized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 5 L Metal 5 L Plastic 5 L Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) o ther metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg Boxes steel (4A) 125 kg aluminium (4B) 125 kg other metal (4N) 125 kg natural wood (4C1) 125 kg natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 125 kg plywood (4D) 125 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg fibreboard (4G) 125 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity Drums steel (1A1) aluminium (1B1) plastics (1H1) 250 L 250 L 250 L Jerricans steel (3A1) aluminium (3B1) plastics (3H1) 60 L 60 L 60 L Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 L Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 250 L Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle in wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) 60 L Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or in a steel, aluminium, wood or fibreboard box or in wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or in expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2) 60 L Special packing provision: PP28 For UN No . 1873, parts of packagings which are in dire ct contact with perchloric acid shall be constructed of glass or plastics . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 210

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 200 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P503 PACKING INSTRUCTION P503 The following packagings are author ized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 5 kg Metal 5 kg Plastic 5 kg Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg fibre (1G) 125 kg plywood (1D) 125 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg Boxes steel (4A) 125 kg aluminium (4B) 125 kg other metal (4N) 125 kg natural wood (4C1) 125 kg natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 125 kg plywood (4D) 125 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg fibreboard (4G) 40 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg Single packagings Maximum net mass Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) Fibreboard (1G) or plywood drums (1D) fitted with inner liners 250 kg 200 kg P504 PACKING INSTRUCTION P504 The following packagings are author ized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Combination packagings Maximum net mass (1) Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 , 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2) Inner packagings: Glass receptacles wi th a maximum capacity of 5 L 75 kg (2) Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 , 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2) Inner packagings: Plastics receptacl es with a maximum capacity of 30 L 75 kg (3) Outer packagings: (1G, 4F or 4G) Inner packagings: Metal receptacles wi th a maximum capacity of 40 L 125 kg (4) Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4H2) Inner packagings: Metal receptacles with a maximum capacity of 40 L 225 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity Drums s teel, non-removable head (1A1) 250 L aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) 250 L metal, other than steel or aluminium, non-removable head (1N1) 250 L plastics, non-removable head (1H1) 250 L Jerricans steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 L aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) 60 L plastics, non-removable head (3H1) 60 L Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 L Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 120 L Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle in wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) 60 L Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or in a steel, aluminium, wood or fibreboard box or in wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or in expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2) 60 L Special packing provisions: PP10 For UN Nos . 2014 and 3149, the packaging shall be vente d . PP31 For UN 2626, packagings shall be hermeticall y sealed . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 211

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 201 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P505 PACKING INSTRUCTION P505 This instruction applies to UN 3375 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Combination packagings Inner packagings max imum capacity Outer packagings maximum net mass Boxes (4B, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4G, 4H2) or drums (1B2, 1G, 1N2, 1H2, 1D) or jerricans (3B2, 3H2) with glass, plastics or metal inner packagings 5 L 125 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity Drums aluminium (1B1, 1B2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 L 250 L Jerricans aluminium (3B1, 3B2), plastics (3H1, 3H2) 60 L 60 L Composite packagings plastics receptacle with outer aluminium drum (6HB1) 250 L plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 250 L plastics receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2) 60 L glass receptacle with outer aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1) or with outer expanded plastics or solid plastics receptacles (6PH1, 6PH2) or with outer aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2, 6PD2) 60 L Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 212

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 202 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P520 PACKING INSTRUCTION P520 This instruction applies to organic p eroxides of class 5 . 2 and self-reactive substances of class 4 . 1 . The packagings listed below are authoriz ed provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 and special provisions of 4 . 1 . 7 are met . The packing methods are designated OP1 to OP 8 . The packing methods appropriate for the i ndividual currently assigned organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 2 . 3 and 2 . 5 . 3 . 2 . 4 . The quantities specified for each packin g method are the maximum quantities authorized per package . The following packagings are authorize d: (1) Combination packagings with outer pack agings comprising boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2), drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D), jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1 and 3H2); (2) Single packagings consisting of drums (1 A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D) and jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1 and 3H2); (3) Composite packagings with plastics inn er receptacles (6HA1, 6HA2, 6HB1, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6HH1 and 6HH2) . Maximum quantity per packaging/package 1 for packing methods OP1 to OP8 Packing method Maximum quantity OP1 OP2 1 OP3 OP4 1 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8 Maximum mass (kg) for solids and for combination packagings (liquid and solid) 0 . 5 0 . 5/10 5 5/25 25 50 50 400 2 Maximum contents in litres for liquids 3 0 . 5 – 5 – 30 60 60 225 4 1 If two values are given, the first applies to the maximum net mass per inner packaging and the second to the maximum net mass of the complete package . 2 60 kg for jerricans/200 kg for boxes and, for solids, 400 kg in combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2) and with inner packagings of plastics or fibre with a maximum net mass of 25 kg . 3 Viscous liquids shall be treated as solids when they do not meet the criteria provided in the definition for liquids presented in 1 . 2 . 1 . 4 60 L for jerricans . Additional provisions: 1 Metal packagings, including inner packag ings of combination packagings and outer packagings of combination or composite packagings, may only be used for packing methods OP7 and OP8 . 2 In combination packagings, glass recep tacles may only be used as inner packagings with a maximum content of 0 . 5 kg for solids or 0 . 5 L for liquids . 3 In combination packagings, cushioning mate rials shall not be readily combustible . 4 The packaging of an organic peroxide or self -reactive substance required to bear an EXPLOSIVE subsidiary hazard label (Model No . 1, see 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2) shall also comply with the provisions giv en in 4 . 1 . 5 . 10 and 4 . 1 . 5 . 11 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 213

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 203 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P520 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P520 Special packing provisions: PP21 For certain self-reactive substances o f types B or C, UN Nos . 3221, 3222, 3223, 3224, 3231, 3232, 3233 an d 3234, a smaller packaging than that allowed by packing methods OP5 or OP6 respectively shall be used (see 4 . 1 . 7 and 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 2 . 3) . PP22 UN 3241, 2-bromo-2-nitropropane-1,3- diol, shall be packed in accordance with packing method OP6 . PP94 Very small amounts of energetic samples of s ection 2 . 0 . 4 . 3 may be carried under UN 3223 or UN 3224, as appropr iate, provided that: . 1 only combination packaging with outer pa ckaging comprising boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2) are used; . 2 the samples are carried in microtiter plat es or multi-titer plates made of plastics, glass, porcelain or stoneware as inner packaging; . 3 the maximum amount per individual inner ca vity does not exceed 0 . 01 g for solids or 0 . 01 mL for liquids; . 4 the maximum net quantity per outer packagi ng is 20 g for solids or 20 mL for liquids, or in the case of mixed packing the sum of grams and millilitres does not exceed 20; and . 5 when dry ice or liquid nitrogen is optionall y used as a coolant for quality control measures, the requirements of 5 . 5 . 3 are complied with . Interior supports shall be provided to se cure the inner packagings in their original position . The inner and outer packagings shall main tain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost . PP95 Small amounts of energetic samples of sect ion 2 . 0 . 4 . 3 may be carried under UN 3223 or UN 3224, as appropr iate, provided that: . 1 the outer packaging consist only of corrug ated fibreboard of type 4G having minimum dimensions of 60 cm (length) by 40 . 5 cm (width) by 30 cm (height) and minimum wall th ickness of 1 . 3 cm; . 2 the individual substance is contained in a n inner packaging of glass or plastics of maximum capacity 30 mL placed in an expandable polyethylene foam matrix of at least 130 mm thickness having a density of 18 ± 1 g/L; . 3 within the foam carrier, inner packaging s are segregated from each other by a minimum distance of 40 mm and from the wall of the outer packaging by a minimum distance of 70 mm . The package may contain up to two layers of such f oam matrices, each carrying up to 28 inner packagings; . 4 the maximum content of each inner packagin g does not exceed 1 g for solids or 1 mL for liquids; . 5 the maximum net quantity per outer packagi ng is 56 g for solids or 56 mL for liquids, or in the case of mixed packing the sum of grams and millilitres does not exceed 56; and . 6 when dry ice or liquid nitrogen is optionall y used as a coolant for quality control measures, the requirements of 5 . 5 . 3 are complied with . Interior supports shall be provided to se cure the inner packagings in their original position . The inner and outer packagings shall main tain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost . P600 PACKING INSTRUCTION P600 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 1700, 2016 and 2017 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 , 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2) meeting the packing group II performance level . The articles shall be individually pack aged and separated from each other using partitions, dividers, inner packagings or cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport . Maximum net mass: 75 kg Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 214

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 204 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P601 PACKING INSTRUCTION P601 The following packagings are author ized provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met and the packagings are hermetically sealed: (1) Combination packagings with a maximum gr oss mass of 15 kg, consisting of: – one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a ma ximum net quantity of 1 L each and filled to not more than 90% of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during transport, individually placed in – metal receptacles together with cushio ning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in – 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A , 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings . (2) Combination packagings consisting of m etal or plastics inner packagings not exceeding 5 L in capacity individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg . Inner packagings shall not be filled to more t han 90% of their capacity . The closure of each inner packaging shall b e physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport . (3) Packagings consisting of: Outer packagings: Steel or plastics drum s, (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2), tested in accordance with the test provisions in 6 . 1 . 5 at a mass corresponding to the mass of the assem bled package either as a packaging intended to contain inner packagings, or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked accordingly . Inner packagings: Drums and composite pa ckagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1), meeting the provisions of chapter 6 . 1 for single packagings, subject to the foll owing conditions: . 1 the hydraulic pressure test shall be conduc ted at a pressure of at least 3 bar (gauge pressure); . 2 the design and production leakproofnes s tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 0 . 30 bar; . 3 they shall be isolated from the outer drum by th e use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which surrounds the inner packaging on all sides; . 4 their capacity shall not exceed 125 L; . 5 closures shall be of a screw-cap type that are : (i) physically held in place by any means capabl e of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport; and (ii) provided with a cap seal . . 6 The outer and inner packagings shall be subj ected periodically to a leakproofness test according to . 2 at intervals of not more than two and a half years; a nd . 7 The outer and inner packagings shall bear in c learly legible and durable characters: (i) the date (month, year) of the initial testin g and the latest periodic test; (ii) the name or authorized symbol of the party per forming the tests and inspections . (4) Pressure receptacles, provided that th e general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met . They shall be subjected to an initial test an d periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure) . Pressure receptacles may not be equippe d with any pressure relief device . Each pressure receptacle containing a t oxic by inhalation liquid with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 mL / m 3 (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve conforming to the following: (a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-thread ed connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage; (b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with no n-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive materials, a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap with gasket joint attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of material through or past the packing; (c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threade d cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material; (d) The materials of construction for the pres sure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall be compatible with each other and with the lading . Each pressure receptacle with a wall thick ness at any point of less than 2 . 0 mm and each pressure receptacle that does no t have fitted valve protection shall be transported in an outer packaging . Pressure receptacles shall not be manif olded or interconnected . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 215

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 205 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P602 PACKING INSTRUCTION P602 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met and the packagings are hermetically sealed: (1) Combination packagings with a maximum gr oss mass of 15 kg, consisting of: – one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a ma ximum net quantity of 1 L each and filled to not more than 90% of their capacity, the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during transport, individually placed in – metal receptacles together with cushio ning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in – 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A , 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings . (2) Combination packagings consisting of meta l or plastics inner packagings individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg . Inner packagings shall not be filled to more t han 90% of their capacity . The closure of each inner packaging shall b e physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport . Inner packagings shall not exceed 5 L in capac ity . (3) Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1 , 1N1, 1H1, 6HA1 or 6HH1), subject to the following conditions: . 1 the hydraulic pressure test shall be conduc ted at a pressure of at least 3 bar (gauge pressure); . 2 the design and production leakproofnes s tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 0 . 30 bar; and . 3 closures shall be of a screw-cap type that are : (i) physically held in place by any means capabl e of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport; and (ii) provided with a cap seal . (4) Pressure receptacles, provided that th e general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met . They shall be subjected to an initial test an d periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure) . Pressure receptacles may not be equippe d with any pressure relief device . Each pressure receptacle containing a t oxic by inhalation liquid with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 mL / m 3 (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve conforming to the following: (a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-thread ed connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage; (b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with no n-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive materials, a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap with gasket joint attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of material through or past the packing; (c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threade d cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material; (d) The materials of construction for the pres sure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall be compatible with each other and with the lading . Each pressure receptacle with a wall thick ness at any point of less than 2 . 0 mm and each pressure receptacle that does no t have fitted valve protection shall be transported in an outer packaging . Pressure receptacles shall not be manif olded or interconnected . P603 PACKING INSTRUCTION P603 This instruction applies to UN 3507 . The following packagings are authorize d provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 and the special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 2, 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 4 and 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 7 are met: Packagings consisting of: (a) Metal or plastics primary receptacle(s ); in (b) Leakproof rigid secondary packaging( s); in (c) A rigid outer packaging: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . Additional requirements: 1 Primary inner receptacles shall be packe d in secondary packagings in a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the secondary packaging . Secondary packagings shall be secured i n outer packagings with suitable cushioning material to prevent movement . If multiple primary receptacles are pla ced in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or separated so as to prevent contact between them . 2 The contents shall comply with the provisi ons of 2 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 5 . 2 . 3 The provisions of 6 . 4 . 4 shall be met . Special packing provision: In the case of fissi le-excepted material, limits specified in 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 shall be met . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 216

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 206 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P620 PACKING INSTRUCTION P620 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 2814 and 2900 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided the special packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 8 are met: Packagings meeting the provisions of chap ter 6 . 3 and approved accordingly consisting of : . 1 Inner packagings comprising: (i) leakproof primary receptacle(s); (ii) a leakproof secondary packaging; (iii) other than for solid infectious substanc es, an absorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire contents placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging; if multiple primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or separated so as to prevent contact between them; . 2 A rigid outer packaging: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B 1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) . The smallest external dimension shall be no t less than 100 mm . Additional provisions: 1 Inner packagings containing infectio us substances shall not be consolidated with inner packagings containing unrelated types of goods . Complete packages may be overpacked in ac cordance with the provisions of 1 . 2 . 1 and 5 . 1 . 2: such an overpack may contain dry ice . 2 Other than for exceptional consignments , such as whole organs which require special packaging, the following additional provisions shall apply: (a) Substances consigned at ambient temper atures or at a higher temperature. Primary receptacles shall be of glass, metal or plastics . Positive means of ensuring a leakproof se al shall be provided, e . g . a heat seal, a skirted stopper or a metal crimp s eal . If screw caps are used, they shall be secured b y positive means, e . g . tape, paraffin sealing tape or a manufactu red locking closure; (b) Substances consigned refrigerated or f rozen. Ice, dry ice or other refrigerant shall be placed around the secondary packaging(s) or alternatively in an overpack with one or more complete packages marked in accordance with 6 . 3 . 3 . Interior supports shall be provided to se cure secondary packaging(s) or packages in position after the ice or dry ice has dissipated . If ice is used, the outer packaging or overpa ck shall be leakproof . If dry ice is used, the outer packaging or over pack shall permit the release of carbon dioxide gas . The primary receptacle and the secondar y packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used; (c) Substances consigned in liquid nitroge n. Plastics primary receptacles capable of withstanding very low temperature shall be used . The secondary packaging shall also be cap able of withstanding very low temperatures, and in most cases will need to be fitted over the primary receptacle individually . Provisions for the consignment of liqui d nitrogen shall also be fulfilled . The primary receptacle and the secondar y packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the liquid nitrogen . (d) Lyophilized substances may also be trans ported in primary receptacles that are flame-sealed glass ampoules or rubber-stoppered glass vials fitted with metal seals . 3 Whatever the intended temperature of the c onsignment, the primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure producing a pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa . This primary receptacle or secondary pa ckaging shall also be capable of withstanding temperatures in the range - 40 ° C to + 55 ° C . 4 Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in t he same packaging as class 6 . 2 infectious substances unless they are ne cessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards of the infectious substances . A quantity of 30 mL or less of dangerous goods in cluded in classes 3, 8 or 9 may be packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances . These small quantities of dangerous goo ds of classes 3, 8 or 9 are not subject to any additional provisions of this Code when packed in accordance with this packing instruction . 5 Alternative packagings for the transpo rt of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 7 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 217

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 207 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P621 PACKING INSTRUCTION P621 This instruction applies to UN 3291 . The following packagings are authorize d provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 except 4 . 1 . 1 . 15 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Provided that there is sufficient absorbe nt material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the packaging is capable of retaining liquids: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II performance level for solids . (2) For packages containing larger quantit ies of liquid: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1 D, 1G); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2); Composite packagings (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1 , 6HH1, 6HD1, 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2, 6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1, 6PH2, 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II performance level for liquids . Additional requirement: Packagings inte nded to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture and retain liquids under the performance test conditions in Chapter 6 . 1 . P622 PACKING INSTRUCTION P622 This instruction applies to waste of UN 35 49 transported for disposal . The following packagings are authorize d provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagi ngs Outer packagings metal plastics metal plastics Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) plywood (4D) fibreboard (4G) other metal (4N) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A2) aluminium (1B2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) other metal (1N2) plastics (1H2) Jerricans steel (3A2) aluminium (3B2) plastics (3H2) The outer packaging shall conform to the packing group I performance level for solids . Additional requirements: 1 . Fragile articles shall be contained in eit her a rigid inner packaging or a rigid intermediate packaging . 2 . Inner packagings containing sharp obje cts such as broken glass and needles shall be rigid and resistant to puncture . 3 . The inner packaging, the intermediate pa ckaging and the outer packaging shall be capable of retaining liquids . Outer packagings that are not capable of re taining liquids by design shall be fitted with a liner or suitable measure of retaining liquids . 4 . The inner packaging and/or the intermedi ate packaging may be flexible . When flexible packagings are used, they sha ll be capable of passing the impact resistance test of at least 165 g according to ISO 7765-1:1988 Plastics film and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1: Staircase methods and the tear resistance test of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the bag in accordance with ISO 6383-2:1983 Plastics – Film and sheeting – Determination of tear resistance – Part 2: Elmendorf method . The maximum net mass of each flexible inner pac kaging shall be 30 kg . 5 . Each flexible intermediate packaging sha ll contain only one inner packaging . 6 . Inner packagings containing a small amou nt of free liquid may be included in intermediate packaging provided that there is sufficient absorbent or solidifying material in the inner or intermediate packaging to absorb or solidify all the liquid content present . Suitable absorbent material which may w ithstand the temperatures and vibrations liable to occur under normal conditions of transport shall be used . 7 . Intermediate packagings shall be secur ed in outer packagings with suitable cushioning and/or absorbent material . ■ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 218

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 208 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P650 PACKING INSTRUCTION P650 This instruction applies to UN 3373 . (1) The packaging shall be of good quality, stro ng enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport, including transhipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical handling . Packagings shall be constructed and clos ed to prevent any loss of contents that might be caused under normal conditions of transport by vibration or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure . (2) The packaging shall consist of at least thre e components: (a) a primary receptacle; (b) a secondary packaging; and (c) an outer packaging of which either the secondary or the outer pac kaging shall be rigid . (3) Primary receptacles shall be packed in sec ondary packagings in such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the secondary packaging . Secondary packagings shall be secured i n outer packagings with suitable cushioning material . Any leakage of the contents shall not compr omise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging . (4) For transport, the mark illustrated belo w shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on a background of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible . The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an ang le of 45 ° (diamond-shaped) with each side having a length of at least 50 mm, the width of the line shall be at least 2 mm and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high . The proper shipping name “BIOLOGICAL SUB STANCE, CATEGORY B” in letters at least 6 mm high shall be marked on the outer packaging adjacent to the diamond-shaped mark . UN 3373 Minimum dimension 50 mm Minimum dimension 50 mm (5) At least one surface of the outer packaging shall have a minimum dimension of 100 mm × 100 mm . (6) The completed package shall be capable of su ccessfully passing the drop test in 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 as specified in 6 . 3 . 5 . 2 of this Code at a height of 1 . 2 m . Following the appropriate drop sequen ce, there shall be no leakage from the primary receptacle(s) which shall remain protected by absorbent material, when required, in the secondary packaging . (7) For liquid substances (a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be leak proof; (b) The secondary packaging shall be leakpro of; (c) If multiple fragile primary receptacle s are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall either be individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them; (d) Absorbent material shall be placed betwee n the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging . The absorbent material shall be in a quanti ty sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacle(s) so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging; (e) The primary receptacle or the secondary pa ckaging shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure of 95 kPa (0 . 95 bar) . (8) For solid substances (a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be sift proof; (b) The secondary packaging shall be siftpro of; (c) If multiple fragile primary receptacle s are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall either be individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them . (d) If there is any doubt as to whether or not residua l liquid may be present in the primary receptacle during transport then a packaging suitable for liquids, including absorbent materials, shall be used . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 219

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 209 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P650 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P650 (9) Refrigerated or frozen specimens: ice, d ry ice and liquid nitrogen (a) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coola nt, the requirements of 5 . 5 . 3 shall apply . When used, ice shall be placed outside the se condary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack . Interior supports shall be provided to se cure the secondary packagings in the original position . If ice is used, the outside packaging or overpac k shall be leakproof . (b) The primary receptacle and the secondary p ackaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost . (10) When packages are placed in an overpack, the p ackage marks required by this packing instruction shall either be clearly visible or be reproduced on the outside of the overpack . (11) Infectious substances assigned to UN 337 3 which are packed and marked in accordance with this packing instruction are not subject to any other provisions of this Code . (12) Clear instructions on filling and closing s uch packages shall be provided by packaging manufacturers and subsequent distributors to the consignor or to the person who prepares the package (e . g . patient) to enable the package to be corr ectly prepared for transport . (13) Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in t he same packaging as class 6 . 2 infectious substances unless they are ne cessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards of the infectious substances . A quantity of 30 mL or less of dangerous goods in cluded in classes 3, 8 or 9 may be packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances . When these small quantities of dangerou s goods are packed with infectious substances in accordance with this packing instruction, no other provisions of the Code need be met . Additional provision: Alternative pack agings for the transport of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 7 . P800 PACKING INSTRUCTION P800 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 2803 and 2809 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that th e general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met . (2) Steel flasks or bottles with threaded closu res with a capacity not exceeding 3 . 0 L; or (3) Combination packagings which conform t o the following provisions: (a) Inner packagings shall comprise glass, m etal or rigid plastics intended to contain liquids with a maximum net mass of 15 kg each . (b) The inner packagings shall be packed with su fficient cushioning material to prevent breakage . (c) Either the inner packagings or the outer pac kagings shall have inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and puncture-resistant material impervious to the contents and completely surrounding the contents to prevent it from escaping from the package irrespective of its position or orientation . (d) The following outer packagings and maxim um net masses are authorized: Outer packaging Maximum net mass Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg plywood (1D) 400 kg fibre (1G) 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) 400 kg metal, other than steel or aluminium (4N) 400 kg natural wood (4C1) 250 kg natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 250 kg plywood (4D) 250 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg fibreboard (4G) 125 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg Special packing provision: PP41 For UN 2803, when it is necessary to transport g allium at low temperatures in order to maintain it in a completely solid state, the above packagings may be overpacked in a strong, water-resistant outer packaging which contains dry ice or other means of refrigeration . If a refrigerant is used, all of the above mate rials used in the packaging of gallium shall be chemically and physically resistant to the refrigerant and shall have impact resistance at the low temperatures of the refrigerant employed . If dry ice is used, the outer packaging shall p ermit the release of carbon dioxide gas . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 220

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 210 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P801 PACKING INSTRUCTION P801 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 2794, 2795 and 3028 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 1 . 2, 4 . 1 . 1 . 6, and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Rigid outer packagings, wooden slatted cr ates or pallets . Additionally, the following conditions sh all be met: (a) Batteries’ stacks shall be in tiers separa ted by a layer of electrically non-conductive material; (b) Battery terminals shall not support the wei ght of other superimposed elements; (c) Batteries shall be packaged or secured to pr event inadvertent movement; (d) Batteries shall not leak under normal cond itions of transport or appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent the release of electrolyte from the package (e . g . individually packaging batteries or o ther equally effective methods); and (e) Batteries shall be protected against sho rt circuits . (2) Stainless steel or plastics bins may also be u sed to transport used batteries . Additionally, the following conditions sh all be met: (a) The bins shall be resistant to the electroly te that was contained in the batteries; (b) The bins shall not be filled to a height greater th an the height of their sides; (c) The outside of the bins shall be free of residue s of electrolyte contained in the batteries; (d) Under normal conditions of transport, no e lectrolyte shall leak from the bins; (e) Measures shall be taken to ensure that filled b ins cannot lose their content; and (f) Measures shall be taken to prevent short cir cuits (e . g . batteries are discharged, individua l protection of the battery terminals, etc . ) . P802 PACKING INSTRUCTION P802 The following packagings are author ized, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Combination packagings Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1 N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2; maximum net mass: 75 kg . Inner packagings: glass or plastics; max imum capacity: 10 L . (2) Combination packagings Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1 N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2; maximum net mass: 125 kg Inner packagings: metal; maximum capaci ty: 40 L (3) Composite packagings: Glass receptac le in steel, aluminium or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1 or 6PD1) or in a steel, aluminium or wood box or in wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PD2) or in solid plastics packaging (6PH2); maximum capacity: 60 L . (4) Steel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 2 50 L . (5) Pressure receptacles may be used provide d that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met . Special packing provisions: PP79 For UN 1790 with more than 60% but not more than 85% h ydrofluoric acid, see P001 . PP81 For UN 1790 with not more than 85% hydrogen fluori de and UN 2031 with more than 55% nitric acid, the permitted use of plastics drums and jerricans as single packagings shall be two years from their date of manufacture . P803 PACKING INSTRUCTION P803 This instruction applies to UN 2028 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); (2) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2); Max imum net mass: 75 kg . The articles shall be individually packa ged and separated from each other, using partitions, dividers, inner packagings or cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport . △ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 221

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 211 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P804 PACKING INSTRUCTION P804 This instruction applies to UN 1744 . The following packagings are authorize d provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met and the packagings are hermetically sealed: (1) Combination packagings with a maximum gr oss mass of 25 kg, consisting of one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum capacity of 1 . 3 L each and filled to no more than 90% of their capaci ty; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during transport, individually placed in: – metal or rigid plastics receptacles toge ther with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in: – 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A , 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings . (2) Combination packagings consisting of meta l or polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) inner packagings, not exceeding 5 L in capacity individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg . Inner packagings shall not be filled to more t han 90% of their capacity . The closure of each inner packaging shall b e physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport . (3) Packagings consisting of: Outer packagings: Steel or plastics drums (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2) t ested in accordance with the test requirements in 6 . 1 . 5 at a mass corresponding to the mass of the assem bled package either as a packaging intended to contain inner packagings, or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked accordingly; Inner packagings: Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1 , 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1) meeting the requirements of chapter 6 . 1 for single packagings, subject to the follo wing conditions: (a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conduc ted at a pressure of at least 300 kPa (3 bar) (gauge pressure); (b) The design and production leakproofnes s tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa (0 . 3 bar); (c) They shall be isolated from the outer drum by th e use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which surrounds the inner packaging on all sides; (d) Their capacity shall not exceed 125 L; (e) Closures shall be of a screw type that are: (i) Physically held in place by any means capabl e of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport; (ii) Provided with a cap seal; (f) The outer and inner packagings shall be subj ected periodically to an internal inspection and leakproofness test according to (b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years; and (g) The outer and inner packagings shall bear in c learly legible and durable characters: (i) the date (month, year) of the initial test and t he latest periodic test and inspection of the inner packaging; and (ii) the name or authorized symbol of the expert per forming the tests and inspections . (4) Pressure receptacles, provided that th e general provisions of 4 . 1 . 3 . 6 are met . (a) They shall be subjected to an initial test and p eriodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure); (b) They shall be subjected periodically to an i nternal inspection and leakproofness test at intervals of not more than two and a half years; (c) They may not be equipped with any pressure rel ief device; (d) Each pressure receptacle shall be closed w ith a plug or valve(s) fitted with a secondary closure device; and (e) The materials of construction for the pres sure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall be compatible with each other and with the contents . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 222

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 212 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P900 PACKING INSTRUCTION P900 This instruction applies to UN 2216 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Packagings according to P002; or (2) Bags (5H1, 5H2, 5H3, 5H4, 5L1, 5L2, 5L3, 5M1 or 5M 2) with a maximum net mass of 50 kg . Fish meal may also be transported unpackag ed when it is packed in closed cargo transport units and the free air space has been restricted to a minimum . P901 PACKING INSTRUCTION P901 This instruction applies to UN 3316 . The following combination packagings a re authorized provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1 D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) . Packagings shall conform to the performan ce level consistent with the packing group assigned to the kit as a whole (see 3 . 3 . 1, special provision 251) . Where the kit contains only dangerous goo ds to which no packing group is assigned, packagings shall meet Packing Group II performance level . Maximum quantity of dangerous goods per ou ter packaging: 10 kg excluding the mass of any carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice) used as a refrigerant . Additional requirement: Dangerous good s in kits shall be packed in inner packagings which shall be protected from other materials in the kit . P902 PACKING INSTRUCTION P902 This instruction applies to UN 3268 . Packaged articles: The following packagi ngs are authorized provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up III performance level . The packagings shall be designed and const ructed so as to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of transport . Unpackaged articles: The articles may also be tr ansported unpackaged in dedicated handling devices, vehicles or containers when moved to, from, or between where they are manufactured and an assembly plant including intermediate handling locations . Additional requirement: Any pressure rec eptacle shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s) contained therein . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 223

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 213 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P903 PACKING INSTRUCTION P903 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 . For the purpose of this packing instructio n, “equipment” means apparatus for which the lithium cells or batteries will provide electrical power for its operation . The following packagings are aut horized provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) For cells and batteries: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . Cells or batteries shall be packed in packag ings so that the cells or batteries are protected against damage that may be caused by the movement or placement of the cells or batteries within the packaging . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II performance level . (2) In addition for cells or batteries with a gros s mass of 12 kg or more employing a strong, impact resistant outer casing, and assemblies of such cells or batteries: (a) Strong outer packagings; (b) Protective enclosures (e . g . fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates) ; or (c) Pallets or other handling devices . Cells or batteries shall be secured to preve nt inadvertent movement, and the terminals shall not support the weight of other superimposed elements . Packagings need not meet the requirements o f 4 . 1 . 1 . 3 . (3) For cells or batteries packed with equipme nt: Packagings conforming to the requiremen ts in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction, then placed with the equipment in an outer packaging; or Packagings that completely enclose the ce lls or batteries, then placed with equipment in a packaging conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction . The equipment shall be secured against mov ement within the outer packaging . (4) For cells or batteries contained in equipm ent: Strong outer packagings constructed of s uitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use . They shall be constructed in such a manner as t o prevent accidental operation during transport . Packagings need not meet the requirement s of 4 . 1 . 1 . 3 . Large equipment can be offered for transpo rt unpackaged or on pallets when the cells or batteries are afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained . Devices such as radio frequency identific ation (RFID) tags, watches and temperature loggers, which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat, may be transported when intentionally active in strong outer packagings . (5) For packaging containing both cells or bat teries packed with equipment and contained in equipment: (a) For cells and batteries, packagings that c ompletely enclose the cells or batteries, then placed with equipment in a packaging conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction; or (b) Packagings conforming to the requiremen ts in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction, then placed with the equipment in a strong outer packaging constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use . The outer packaging shall be constructe d in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during transport and need not meet the requirements of 4 . 1 . 1 . 3 . The equipment shall be secured against mov ement within the outer packaging . Devices such as radio frequency identific ation (RFID) tags, watches and temperature loggers, which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat, may be transported when intentionally active in strong outer packagings . When active, these devices shall meet defined standards for electromagnetic radiation to ensure that the operation of the devices does not interfere with aircraft systems . Additional requirement: Cells or batteri es shall be protected against short circuit . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 224

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 214 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P904 PACKING INSTRUCTION P904 This instruction applies to UN 3245 . The following packagings are authorized : (1) Packagings meeting the provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 1 . 2, 4 . 1 . 1 . 4, 4 . 1 . 1 . 8 and 4 . 1 . 3 and so designed that they meet the construct ion requirements of 6 . 1 . 4 . Outer packagings constructed of suita ble material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, shall be used . Where this packing instruction is used fo r the transport of inner packagings of combination packagings the packaging shall be designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport . (2) Packagings, which need not conform to the pac kaging test requirements of part 6, but conforming to the following: (a) An inner packaging comprising: (i) primary receptacle(s) and a secondary pa ckaging, the primary receptacle(s) or the secondary packaging shall be leakproof for liquids or siftproof for solids; (ii) for liquids, absorbent material placed b etween the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging . The absorbent material shall be in a quanti ty sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacle(s) so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging; (iii) if multiple fragile primary receptacle s are placed in a single secondary packaging they shall be individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them; (b) An outer packaging shall be strong enough fo r its capacity, mass and intended use, and with a smallest external dimension of at least 100 mm . For transport, the mark illustrated belo w shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on a background of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible . The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an ang le of 45 ° (diamond-shaped) with each side having a length of at least 50 mm; the width of the line shall be at least 2 mm and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high . UN 3245 Minimum dimension 50 mm Minimum dimension 50 mm Additional requirement: Ice, dry ice and liquid nitrogen When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5 . 5 . 3 shall apply . When used, ice shall be placed outside the se condary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack . Interior supports shall be provided to se cure the secondary packaging in the original position . If ice is used, the outside packaging or over pack shall be leakproof . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 225

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 215 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P905 PACKING INSTRUCTION P905 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 2990 and 3072 . Any suitable packaging is authorized, pr ovided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met, except that packagings need not conf orm to the provisions of part 6 . When the life-saving appliances are cons tructed to incorporate or are contained in rigid outer weatherproof casings (such as for lifeboats), they may be transported unpackaged . Additional provisions: 1 All dangerous substances and articles co ntained as equipment within the appliances shall be secured to prevent inadvertent movement and in addition: (a) signal devices of class 1 shall be packed in pla stics or fibreboard inner packagings; (b) gases (class 2 . 2) shall be contained in cylinders as specifi ed by the competent authority, which may be connected to the appliance; (c) electric storage batteries (class 8) and l ithium batteries (class 9) shall be disconnected or electrically isolated and secured to prevent any spillage of liquid; and (d) small quantities of other dangerous subs tances (for example in classes 3, 4 . 1 and 5 . 2) shall be packed in strong inner packagings . 2 Preparation for transport and packagin g shall include provisions to prevent any accidental inflation of the appliance . P906 PACKING INSTRUCTION P906 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 2315, 3151, 3152 and 3432 . The following packagings are authorize d, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) For liquids and solids containing or conta minated with PCBs, polyhalogenated biphenyls, polyhalogenated terphenyls or halogenated monomethyldiphenylmethanes: Packagings in accordance with P001 or P002, as appropriate . (2) For transformers and condensers and othe r articles: (a) Packagings in accordance with packing ins tructions P001 or P002 . The articles shall be secured with suitab le cushioning material to prevent inadvertent movement during normal conditions of transport; or (b) Leakproof packagings which are capable o f containing, in addition to the articles, at least 1 . 25 times the volume of the liquid PCBs, polyhal ogenated biphenyls, polyhalogenated terphenyls or halogenated monomethyldiphenylmethanes present in them . There shall be sufficient absorbent mate rial in the packagings to absorb at least 1 . 1 times the volume of liquid which is containe d in the articles . In general, transformers and condense rs shall be carried in leakproof metal packagings which are capable of holding, in addition to the transformers and condensers, at least 1 . 25 times the volume of the liquid present in the m . Notwithstanding the above, liquids and s olids not packaged in accordance with P001 and P002 and unpackaged transformers and condensers may be transported in cargo transport units fitted with a leakproof metal tray to a height of at least 800 mm, containing sufficient inert absorbent material to absorb at least 1 . 1 times the volume of any free liquid . Additional provision: Adequate provisi ons shall be taken to seal the transformers and condensers to prevent leakage during normal conditions of transport . P907 PACKING INSTRUCTION P907 This packing instruction applies to a rticles, such as machinery, apparatus or devices of UN No . 3363 . If the article is constructed and designed s o that the receptacles containing the dangerous goods are afforded adequate protection, an outer packaging is not required . Dangerous goods in an article shall other wise be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, and meeting the applicable requirements of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1 . Receptacles containing dangerous goo ds shall conform to the general provisions in 4 . 1 . 1, except that 4 . 1 . 1 . 3, 4 . 1 . 1 . 4, 4 . 1 . 1 . 12 and 4 . 1 . 1 . 14 do not apply . For class 2 . 2 gases, the inner cylinder or receptacle, i ts contents and filling ratio shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority of the country in which the cylinder or receptacle is filled . In addition, the manner in which receptacl es are contained within the article shall be such that, under normal conditions of transport, damage to receptacles containing the dangerous goods is unlikely; and in the event of damage to the receptacles containing solid or liquid dangerous goods, no leakage of the dangerous goods from the article is possible (a leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this requirement) . Receptacles containing dangerous go ods shall be so installed, secured or cushioned as to prevent their breakage or leakage and so as to control their movement within the article during normal conditions of transport . Cushioning material shall not react dan gerously with the content of the receptacles . Any leakage of the contents shall not subst antially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material . △ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 226

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 216 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P908 PACKING INSTRUCTION P908 This instruction applies to damaged o r defective lithium ion cells and batteries and damaged or defective lithium metal cells and batteries, including those contained in equipment, of UN Nos . 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 . The following packagings are authorize d provided the general provisions for 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: For cells and batteries and equipme nt containing cells and batteries: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level . (1) Each damaged or defective cell or battery or e quipment containing such cells or batteries shall be individually packed in inner packaging and placed inside of an outer packaging . The inner packaging or outer packaging sh all be leakproof to prevent the potential release of electrolyte . (2) Each inner packaging shall be surrounde d by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat . (3) Sealed packagings shall be fitted with a vent ing device when appropriate . (4) Appropriate measures shall be taken to min imize the effects of vibrations and shocks, prevent movement of the cells or batteries within the package that may lead to further damage and a dangerous condition during transport . Cushioning material that is non-combu stible and electrically non-conductive may also be used to meet this requirement . (5) Non combustibility shall be assessed acc ording to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured . For leaking cells or batteries, sufficien t inert absorbent material shall be added to the inner or outer packaging to absorb any release of electrolyte . A cell or battery with a net mass of more than 30 kg sha ll be limited to one cell or battery per outer packaging . Additional requirement: Cells or batteri es shall be protected against short circuit . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 227

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 217 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P909 PACKING INSTRUCTION P909 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 transported for d isposal or recycling, either packed together with or packed without non-lithium batteries . (1) Cells and batteries shall be packed in accor dance with the following: (a) The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3, are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Bo xes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2); and Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . (b) Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II performance level . (c) Metal packagings shall be fitted with an elec trically non-conductive lining material (e . g . plastics) of adequate strength for the in tended use . (2) However, lithium ion cells with a Watt-hour r ating of not more than 20 Wh, lithium ion batteries with a Watt-hour rating of not more than 100 Wh, lithium metal cells with a lithium content of not more than 1 g and lithium metal batteries with an aggregate lithium content of not more than 2 g may be packed in accordance with the following: (a) In strong outer packaging up to 30 kg gross mass m eeting the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, except 4 . 1 . 1 . 3, and 4 . 1 . 3 . (b) Metal packagings shall be fitted with an elec trically non-conductive lining material (e . g . plastics) of adequate strength for the in tended use . (3) For cells or batteries contained in equipm ent, strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, may be used . Packagings need not meet the requirement s of 4 . 1 . 1 . 3 . Equipment may also be offered for transpo rt unpackaged or on pallets when the cells or batteries are afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained . (4) In addition, for cells or batteries with a gro ss mass of 12 kg or more employing a strong, impact resistant outer casing, strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packagings capacity and its intended use, may be used . Packagings need not meet the requirements o f 4 . 1 . 1 . 3 . Additional requirements: 1 Cells and batteries shall be designed or pac ked to prevent short circuits and the dangerous evolution of heat . 2 Protection against short circuits and th e dangerous evolution of heat includes, but is not limited to: – individual protection of the battery ter minals, – inner packaging to prevent contact betwee n cells and batteries, – batteries with recessed terminals desi gned to protect against short circuits, or – the use of an electrically non-conductiv e and non-combustible cushioning material to fill empty space between the cells or batteries in the packaging . 3 Cells and batteries shall be secured withi n the outer packaging to prevent excessive movement during transport (e . g . by using an electrically non-conducti ve and non-combustible cushioning material or through the use of a tightly closed plastics bag) . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 228

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 218 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P910 PACKING INSTRUCTION P910 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 production runs c onsisting of not more than 100 cells or batteries and to pre-production prototypes of cells or batteries when these prototypes are transported for testing . The following packagings are authoriz ed provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) For cells and batteries, including when pa cked with equipment: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II performance level and shall meet the following requirements: (a) Batteries and cells, including equipme nt, of different sizes, shapes or masses shall be packaged in an outer packaging of a tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the design type has been tested; (b) Each cell or battery shall be individually p acked in an inner packaging and placed inside an outer packaging; (c) Each inner packaging shall be complete ly surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat; (d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to min imize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement of the cells or batteries within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during transport . Cushioning material that is non-comb ustible and electrically non-conductive may be used to meet this requirement; (e) Non-combustibility shall be assessed a ccording to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured; (f) A cell or battery with a net mass of more than 30 kg sha ll be limited to one cell or battery per outer packaging . (2) For cells and batteries contained in equip ment: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2) ; Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . Packagings shall conform to the packing gro up II performance level and shall meet the following requirements: (a) Equipment of different sizes, shapes or ma sses shall be packaged in an outer packaging of a tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the design type has been tested; (b) The equipment shall be constructed or pack aged in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during transport; (c) Appropriate measures shall be taken to min imize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement of the equipment within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during transport . When cushioning material is used to meet th is requirement it shall be non-combustible and electrically non-conductive; and (d) Non-combustibility shall be assessed a ccording to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured . (3) The equipment or the batteries may be transp orted unpackaged under conditions specified by the competent authority . Additional conditions that may be consi dered in the approval process include, but are not limited to: (a) The equipment or the battery shall be strong e nough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport, including transshipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual or mechanical handling; and (b) The equipment or the battery shall be fixed in cr adles or crates or other handling devices in such a way that it will not become loose during normal conditions of transport . Additional requirements: The cells and bat teries shall be protected against short circuit; Protection against short circuits includes, but is not limited to, – individual protection of the battery ter minals, – inner packaging to prevent contact betwee n cells and batteries, – batteries with recessed terminals desi gned to protect against short circuits, or – the use of an electrically non-conductiv e and non-combustible cushioning material to fill empty space between the cells or batteries in the packaging . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 229

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 219 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 P911 PACKING INSTRUCTION P911 This instruction applies to damaged o r defective cells and batteries of UN Nos . 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 liable to rapidly d isassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of transport . The following packagings are authorize d, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: For cells and batteries and equipme nt containing cells and batteries: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2) . The packagings shall conform to the packin g group I performance level . (1) The packaging shall be capable of meeting th e following additional performance requirements in case of rapid disassembly, dangerous reaction, production of a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours of the cells or batteries: (a) The outside surface temperature of the com pleted package shall not have a temperature of more than 100°C . A momentary spike in temperature up to 200° C is acceptable; (b) No flame shall occur outside the package; (c) No projectiles shall exit the package; (d) The structural integrity of the package sh all be maintained; (e) The packagings shall have a gas management s ystem (e . g . filter system, air circulation, contai nment for gas, gas tight packaging, etc . ), as appropriate . (2) The additional packaging performance r equirements shall be verified by a test as specified by the competent authority . * A verification report shall be available on request . As a minimum requirement, the cell or batte ry name, the cell or battery number, the mass, type, energy content of the cells or batteries, the packaging identification and the test data according to the verification method as specified by the competent authority shall be listed in the verification report . (3) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coola nt, the requirements of section 5 . 5 . 3 shall apply . The inner packaging and outer packaging s hall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost . Additional requirement: Cells or batteri es shall be protected against short circuit . * The following criteria, as relevant, may be considered to assess the performance of the packaging: (a) The assessment shall be done under a quality management system (as described e . g . in section 2 . 9 . 4 . 5) allowing for the traceability of test s results, reference data and characterization models used; (b) The list of hazards expected in case of thermal runaway for the cell or battery type, in the condition it is transported (e . g . usage of an inner packaging, state of charg e (SOC), use of sufficient non-combustible, electrically non-conductive and absorbent cushioning material, etc . ), shall be clearly identified and quanti fied; the reference list of possible hazards for lithium cells or batteries (rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours) can be used for this purpose . The quantification of these hazards sha ll rely on available scientific literature; (c) The mitigating effects of the packaging shall be identified and characterized, based on the nature of the protections provided and the construction material properties . A list of technical characteristics and d rawings shall be used to support this assessment (density [kg·m -3 ], specific heat capacity [J·kg -1 ·K -1 ], heating value [kJ·kg -1 ], thermal conductivity [W·m -1 ·K -1 ], melting temperature and flammability temperature [K], heat transfer coefficient of the outer packaging [W·m -2 ·K -1 ], …); (d) The test and any supporting calculations shall assess the result of a thermal runaway of the cell or battery inside the packaging in the normal conditions of transport; (e) In case the SOC of the cell or battery is not known, the assessment used shall be done with the highest possible SOC corresponding to the cell or battery use conditions; (f) The surrounding conditions in which the packaging may be used and transported shall be described (including for possible consequences of gas or smoke emissions on the environment, such as ventilation or other methods) according to the gas management system of the packaging; (g) The tests or the model calculation shall consider the worst case scenario for the thermal runaway triggering and propagation inside the cell or battery: this scenario includes the worst possible failure in the normal transport condition, the maximum heat and flame emissions for the possible propagation of the reaction; (h) These scenarios shall be assessed over a period long enough to allow all the possible consequences to occur (e . g . 24 hours) . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 230

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 220 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.1.4.2 P acking instructions concerning the use of I BCs IBC01 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC01 The following IBCs are authorized, pr ovided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Metal (31A, 31B and 31N) . IBC02 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC02 The following IBCs are authorized, pr ovided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Metal (31A, 31B and 31N); (2) Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2); (3) Composite (31HZ1) . Special packing provisions: B5 For UN Nos . 1791, 2014, 2984 and 3149, IBCs shall be prov ided with a device to allow venting during transport . The inlet to the venting device shall be site d in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions during transport . B8 The pure form of this substance shall not be tra nsported in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa at 50 ° C or 130 kPa at 55 ° C . B15 For UN 2031 with more than 55% nitric acid, the pe rmitted use of rigid plastics IBCs and of composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle shall be two years from their date of manufacture . B16 For UN 3375, IBCs of type 31A and 31N are not allowed wi thout competent authority approval . B20 For UN Nos . 1716, 1717, 1736, 1737, 1738, 1742, 1743, 1 755, 1764, 1768, 1776, 1778, 1782, 1789, 1790, 1796, 1826, 1830, 1832, 2031, 2308, 2353, 2513, 2584, 2796 and 2817 coming under PG II, IBCs shall be fitted with two shut-off devices . IBC03 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC03 The following IBCs are authorized, pr ovided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Metal (31A, 31B and 31N); (2) Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2); (3) Composite (31HZ1 and 31HA2, 31HB2, 31HN2 , 31HD2 and 31HH2) . Special packing provisions: B8 The pure form of this substance shall not be tra nsported in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa at 50 ° C or 130 kPa at 55 ° C . B11 Notwithstanding the provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 . 10, UN 2672 ammonia solution in concentrati ons not exceeding 25% may be transported in rigid or composite plastics IBCs (31H1, 31H2 and 31HZ1) . B19 For UN Nos . 3532 and 3534, IBCs shall be designed and con structed to permit the release of gas or vapour to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the IBCs in the event of loss of stabilization . IBC04 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC04 The following IBCs are authorized, pr ovided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B an d 31N) . Special packing provision: B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall b e carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/ vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC . IBC05 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC05 The following IBCs are authorized, pr ovided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B an d 31N); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31 H1 and 31H2); (3) Composite (11HZ1, 21HZ1 and 31HZ1) . Special packing provisions: B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall b e carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/ vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC . B21 For solid substances in IBCs other than meta l or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 231

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 221 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 IBC06 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC06 The following IBCs are authorized, pr ovided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B an d 31N); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31 H1 and 31H2); (3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 an d 31HZ1) . Additional provision: Where the solid may be come liquid during transport see 4 . 1 . 3 . 4 . Special packing provisions: B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall b e carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/ vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC . B12 For UN 2907, IBCs shall meet the packing group I I performance level . IBCs meeting the test criteria of packing g roup I shall not be used . B21 For solid substances in IBCs other than meta l or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC . IBC07 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC07 The following IBCs are authorized, pr ovided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B an d 31N); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31 H1 and 31H2); (3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 an d 31HZ1); (4) Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F) . Additional provisions: 1 Where the solid may become liquid during tra nsport see 4 . 1 . 3 . 4 . 2 Liners of wooden IBCs shall be sift-proof . Special packing provisions: B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall b e carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/ vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC . B4 Flexible, fibreboard or wooden IBCs shall be si ft-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner . B18 For UN Nos . 3531 and 3533, IBCs shall be designed and con structed to permit the release of gas or vapour to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the IBCs in the event of loss of stabilization . B21 For solid substances in IBCs other than meta l or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC . IBC08 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC08 The following IBCs are authorized, pr ovided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B an d 31N); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31 H1 and 31H2); (3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ, 21HZ2 and 3 1HZ1); (4) Fibreboard (11G); (5) Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F); (6) Flexible (13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1 , 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 or 13M2) . Additional provisions: Where the solid may b ecome liquid during transport see 4 . 1 . 3 . 4 . Special packing provisions: B3 Flexible IBCs shall be sift-proof and water -resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner . B4 Flexible, fibreboard or wooden IBCs shall be si ft-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner . B6 For UN Nos . 1327, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1386, 1408, 1841, 22 11, 2217, 2793 and 3314, IBCs are not required to meet the IBC testing provisions of chapter 6 . 5 . B21 For solid substances in IBCs other than meta l or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC . IBC99 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC99 Only IBCs which are approved for these go ods by the competent authority may be used (see 4 . 1 . 3 . 7) . A copy of the competent authority approva l shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 232

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 222 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 IBC100 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC100 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 0082, 0222, 0241, 0331 and 0332 . The following IBCs are authorized, provi ded the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 3 and special provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B an d 31N); (2) Flexible (13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13L2, 13L3, 13L 4 and 13M2); (3) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31 H1 and 31H2); (4) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 3 1HZ1 and 31HZ2) . Additional provisions: 1 IBCs shall only be used for free-flowing subs tances . 2 Flexible IBCs shall only be used for solids . Special packing provisions: B2 For UN 0222 in IBCs other than metal or rigid plas tics IBCs, the IBCs shall be transported in closed cargo transport units . B3 For UN 0222, flexible IBCs shall be sift-proof a nd water resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water resistant liner . B9 For UN 0082, this packing instruction may only be used when the substances are mixtures of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients . Such explosives shall not contain nitrog lycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates . Metal IBCs are not authorized . B10 For UN 0241, this packing instruction may only be used for substances which consist of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammo nium nitrate or other oxidizing substances, some or all of which are in solution . The other constituents may include hydro carbons or aluminium powder, but shall not include nitro- derivatives such as trinitrotoluene . Metal IBCs are not authorized . B17 For UN 0222, metal IBCs are not authorized . IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC520 This instruction applies to organi c peroxides and self-reactive substances of type F . The IBCs listed below are authorized for the formulations listed, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, 4 . 1 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 3 and special provisions of 4 . 1 . 7 . 2 are met . The formulations listed below may also be t ransported packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P520 of 4 . 1 . 4 . 1, with the same control and emergency tempe ratures, if applicable . For formulations not listed below, only IBCs which are approved by the competent authority may be used (see 4 . 1 . 7 . 2 . 2) . UN No. Organic peroxide Type of IBC Maximum quantity (litres) Control temper- ature Emergency temper- ature 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID tert -Butyl cumyl peroxide 31HA1 1,000 tert -Butyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% with water 31A 31HA1 1,250 1,000 tert -Butyl peroxyacetate, not more than 32% in diluent type A 31A 31HA1 1,250 1,000 tert -Butyl peroxybenzoate, not more than 32% in diluent type A 31A 1,250 tert -Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate, not more than 37% in diluent type A 31A 31HA1 1,250 1,000 Cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 90% in diluent type A 31HA1 1,250 Dibenzoyl peroxide, not more than 42% as a stable dispersion 31H1 1,000 Di- tert -butyl peroxide, not more than 52% in diluent type A 31A 31HA1 1,250 1,000 1,1-Di-( tert -butylperoxy)cyclohexane, not more than 37% in diluent type A 31A 1,250 1,1-Di-( tert -butylperoxy)cyclohexane, not more than 42% in diluent type A 31H1 1,000 Dilauroyl peroxide, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water 31HA1 1,000 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di(tert-butylperoxy)hexane, not more than 52% in diluent type A 31HA1 1,000 Isopropylcumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent type A 31HA1 1,250 p -Menthyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent type A 31HA1 1,250 Peroxyacetic acid, stabilized, not more than 17% 31H1 31H2 31HA1 31A 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 3,6,9-Triethyl-3,6,9-trimethyl-1,4,7-triperoxonane, not more than 27% in diluent type A 31HA1 1,000 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 233

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 223 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) IBC520 UN No. Organic peroxide Type of IBC Maximum qu antity (litres) Control temper- ature Emergency temper- ature 3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID Dicumyl peroxide 31A 31H1 31HA1 2,000 3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED tert -Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not more than 62% in diluent type A 31HA1 1,000 + 15 ° C + 20 ° C tert -Amyl peroxypivalate, not more than 32% in diluent type A 31A 1,250 + 10 ° C + 15 ° C tert -Amyl peroxypivalate, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water 31HA1 1,000 0 ° C + 10 ° C tert -Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not more than 32% in diluent type B 31HA1 31A 1,000 1,250 + 30 ° C + 30 ° C + 35 ° C + 35 ° C tert -Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 32% in diluent type A 31A 1,250 0 ° C + 10 ° C tert -Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water 31A 1,250 - 5 ° C + 5 ° C tert -Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 52%, stable dispersion, in water 31A 1,250 - 5 ° C + 5 ° C tert -Butyl peroxypivalate, not more than 27% in diluent type B 31HA1 31A 1,000 1,250 + 10 ° C + 10 ° C + 15 ° C + 15 ° C tert- Butyl peroxypivalate, not more than 42% in diluent type A 31HA1 31A 1,000 1,250 + 10 ° C + 10 ° C + 15 ° C + 15 ° C Di-(2-neodecanoylperoxyisopropyl)benzene, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water 31A 1,250 - 15 ° C - 5 ° C 3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl peroxy neodecanoate, not more than 52%, stable dis persion, in water 31A 1,250 - 15 ° C - 5 ° C Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 52%, stable dispersion, in water 31A 1,250 - 15 ° C - 5 ° C Di-(4- tert -butylcyclohexyl) peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water 31HA1 1,000 + 30 ° C + 35 ° C Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water 31HA1 1,000 + 30 ° C + 35 ° C Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42% as a stable dispersion, in water 31A 1,250 + 10 ° C + 15 ° C Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate, not more than 62%, stable dispersion, in water 31A 31HA1 1,250 1,000 - 20 ° C - 20 ° C - 10 ° C - 10 ° C Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water 31HA1 1,000 + 15 ° C + 20 ° C Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide, not more than 52% in diluent type A 31HA1 31A 1,000 1,250 + 10 ° C + 10 ° C + 15 ° C + 15 ° C Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide, not more than 52%, stable dispersion, in water 31A 1,250 + 10 ° C + 15 ° C Diisobutyryl peroxide, not more than 28%, stable dispersion, in water 31HA1 31A 1,000 1,250 - 20 ° C - 20 ° C - 10 ° C - 10 ° C Diisobutyryl peroxide, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water 31HA1 31A 1,000 1,250 - 25 ° C - 25 ° C - 15 ° C - 15 ° C 1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not more than 67%, in diluent type A 31HA1 1,000 + 15 ° C + 20 ° C 1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 52%, stable dispersion, in water 31A 31HA1 1,250 1,000 - 5 ° C - 5 ° C + 5 ° C + 5 ° C 3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, SOLID, TEMPE RATURE CONTROLLED Additional provisions: 1 IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow ve nting during transport . The inlet to the pressure relief device sha ll be sited in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions during transport . 2 To prevent explosive rupture of metal IBCs or c omposite IBCs with complete metal casing, the emergency relief devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-accelerating decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of fire-engulfment as calculated by the formula in 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 8 . The control and emergency temperature s specified in this packing instruction are based on a non-insulated IBC . When consigning an organic peroxide in an I BC in accordance with this instruction, it is the responsibility of the consignor to ensure that: (a) the pressure and emergency relief device s installed on the IBC are designed to take appropriate account of the self-accelerating decomposition of the organic peroxide and of fire engulfment; and (b) when applicable, the control and emergen cy temperatures indicated are appropriate, taking into account the design (such as insulation) of the IBC to be used . ■ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 234

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 224 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 IBC620 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC620 This instruction applies to UN 3291 . The following IBCs are authorized, provi ded that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1, except 4 . 1 . 1 . 15, 4 . 1 . 2 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Rigid, leakproof IBCs conforming to the pa cking group II performance level . Additional provisions: 1 There shall be sufficient absorbent mater ial to absorb the entire amount of liquid present in the IBC . 2 IBCs shall be capable of retaining liquids . 3 IBCs intended to contain sharp objects suc h as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture . 4.1.4.3 P acking instructions concerning the use of l arge packagings LP01 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) LP01 The following large packagings are au thorized, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Inner packagings Large outer packagings P acking group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 L Plastics 30 L Metal 40 L Steel (50A) Aluminium (50B) Metal other tha n steel or aluminium (50N) Rigid plastics (50H) Natural wood (50C) Plywood (50D) Reconstituted wood (50F) Rigid fibreboard (50G) Not allowed Not allowed 3 m 3 LP02 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) LP02 The following large packagings are auth orized, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . Inner packagings Large outer packagings P acking group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 kg Plastics b 50 kg Metal 50 kg Paper a, b 50 kg Fibre a, b 50 kg Steel (50A) Aluminium (50B) Metal other than st eel or aluminium (50N) Rigid plastics (50H) Natural wood (50C) Plywood (50D) Reconstituted wood (50F) Rigid fibreboard (50G) Flexible plastics (51H) c Not allowed Not allowed 3 m 3 a These packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport . b Packagings shall be sift-proof . c To be used with flexible inner packagings only . Special packing provision: L2 Deleted L3 For UN Nos . 1309, 1376, 1483, 1869, 2793, 2858 and 2878, fl exible or fibre inner packagings shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner . L4 For UN Nos . 1932, 2008, 2009, 2545, 2546, 2881 and 3189 flexi ble or fibre inner packagings shall be hermetically sealed . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 235

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 225 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 LP03 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP03 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 3537, 3538, 3540, 3541, 3546, 3547 and 3548 . (1) The following large packagings are autho rized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Rigid large packagings conforming to the p acking group II performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G) . (2) Additionally, the following conditions sh all be met: (a) Receptacles within articles containi ng liquids or solids shall be constructed of suitable materials and secured in the article in such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the article itself or the outer packaging; (b) Receptacles containing liquids with cl osures shall be packed with their closures correctly oriented . The receptacles shall in addition confo rm to the internal pressure test provisions of 6 . 1 . 5 . 5; (c) Receptacles that are liable to break or be pun ctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or stoneware or of certain plastics materials shall be properly secured . Any leakage of the contents shall not subst antially impair the protective properties of the article or of the outer packaging; (d) Receptacles within articles containi ng gases shall meet the requirements of section 4 . 1 . 6 and chapter 6 . 2 as appropriate or be capable of providing an e quivalent level of protection as packing instructions P200 or P208; and (e) Where there is no receptacle within the arti cle, the article shall fully enclose the dangerous substances and prevent their release under normal conditions of transport . (3) Articles shall be packed to prevent moveme nt and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of transport . LP99 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP99 Only packagings which are approved fo r these goods by the competent authority may be used (see 4 . 1 . 3 . 7) . A copy of the competent authority approva l shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority . LP101 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP101 The following packagings are autho rized, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 and special provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Lar ge packagings Not necessary Not necessary Steel (50A) Aluminium (50B) Metal other than steel or aluminium (50N) Rigid plastics (50H) Natural wood (50C) Plywood (50D) Reconstituted wood (50F) Rigid fibreboard (50G) Special packing provision: L1 For UN Nos . 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 00 34, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488, 0502 and 0510: Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be transported unpackaged . When such articles have propelling char ges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of transport . A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpack aged article indicates that the article can be considered for transport unpackaged . Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cra dles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 236

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 226 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 LP102 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP102 The following packagings are authoriz ed, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 and special provisions of 4 . 1 . 5 are met . Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Out er packagings Bags water-resistant Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets fibreboard, corrugated Tubes fibreboard Not necessary Steel (50A) Aluminium (50B) Metal other than steel or aluminium (50N) Rigid plastics (50H) Natural wood (50C) Plywood (50D) Reconstituted wood (50F) Rigid fibreboard (50G) LP200 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP200 This instruction applies to UN 1950 an d UN 2037 . The following large packagings are autho rized for aerosols and gas cartridges, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Rigid large packagings conformi ng to the packing group II performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than s teel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G) . Special packing provision: L2 The large packagings shall be designed and c onstructed to prevent dangerous movement and inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport . For waste aerosols transported in accor dance with special provision 327, the large packagings shall have a means of retaining any free liquid that might escape during transport, e . g . absorbent material . For waste aerosols and waste gas cartridg es carried in accordance with special provision 327, the large packagings shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of pressure . LP621 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP621 This instruction applies to UN 3291 . The following large packagings are autho rized, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) For clinical waste placed in inner packagi ngs: Rigid, leakproof large packagings conforming to the provisions of chapter 6 . 6 for solids, at the packing group II performa nce level, provided there is sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the large packaging is capable of retaining liquids . (2) For packages containing larger quantit ies of liquid: Large rigid packagings conforming to the provisions of chapter 6 . 6, at the packing group II performance level , for liquids . Additional provision: Large packagings i ntended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture and retain liquids under the performance test conditions in chapter 6 . 6 . △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 237

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 227 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 LP622 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP622 This instruction applies to waste of UN 3 549 transported for disposal . The following packagings are authorize d provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagi ngs Outer packagings metal plastics metal plastics Metal other than steel or aluminium (50N) Plywood (50D) Rigid fibreboard (50G) Other metal (50N) Rigid plastics (50H) The outer packaging shall conform to the packing group I performance level for solids . Additional requirement: 1 . Fragile articles shall be contained in eit her a rigid inner packaging or a rigid intermediate packaging . 2 . Inner packagings containing sharp obje cts such as broken glass and needles shall be rigid and resistant to puncture . 3 . The inner packaging, the intermediate pa ckaging and the outer packaging shall be capable of retaining liquids . Outer packagings that are not capable of re taining liquids by design shall be fitted with a liner or suitable measure of retaining liquids . 4 . The inner packaging and/or the intermedi ate packaging may be flexible . When flexible packagings are used, they sha ll be capable of passing the impact resistance test of at least 165 g according to ISO 7765-1:1988 “Plastics film and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1: Staircase methods” and the tear resistance test of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the bag in accordance with ISO 6383-2:1983 Plastics – Film and sheeting – Determination of tear resistance – Part 2: Elmendorf method. The maximum net mass of each flexible inner packaging shall be 30 kg . 5 . Each flexible intermediate packaging sha ll contain only one inner packaging . 6 . Inner packagings containing a small amou nt of free liquid may be included in intermediate packaging provided that there is sufficient absorbent or solidifying material in the inner or intermediate packaging to absorb or solidify all the liquid content present . Suitable absorbent material which wit hstands the temperatures and vibrations liable to occur under normal conditions of transport shall be used . 7 . Intermediate packagings shall be secur ed in outer packagings with suitable cushioning and/or absorbent material . LP902 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP902 This instruction applies to UN 3268 . Packaged articles: The following packagi ngs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Rigid large packagings conformi ng to the packing group III performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G) . The packagings shall be designed and const ructed to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of transport . Unpackaged articles: The articles may also be transported unpac kaged in dedicated handling devices, vehicles, containers or wagons when moved to, from, or between where they are manufactured and an assembly plant including intermediate handling locations . Additional provision: Any pressure recep tacle shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s) contained in the pressure receptacle(s) . ■ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 238

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 228 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 LP903 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP903 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 . The following large packagings are autho rized for a single battery and for a single item of equipment containing batteries, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: Rigid large packagings conformi ng to the packing group II performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G) . The battery shall be packed so that the batter y is protected against damage that may be caused by its movement or placement within the large packaging . Additional requirement: Batteries shal l be protected against short circuit . LP904 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP904 This instruction applies to single d amaged or defective batteries and to single items of equipment containing damaged or defective cells or batteries of UN Nos . 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 . The following large packagings are autho rized for a single damaged or defective battery and for a single item of equipment containing damaged or defective cells or batteries, provided the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met . For batteries and equipment containing c ells and batteries: Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of: steel (50A) aluminium (50B) metal other than steel or aluminium (50N) rigid plastics (50H) plywood (50D) 1 . The damaged or defective battery or equipm ent containing such cells or batteries shall be individually packed in an inner packaging and placed inside of an outer packaging . The inner packaging or outer packaging sh all be leakproof to prevent the potential release of electrolyte . 2 . The inner packaging shall be surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat . 3 . Sealed packagings shall be fitted with a vent ing device when appropriate . 4 . Appropriate measures shall be taken to min imize the effects of vibrations and shocks, prevent movement of the battery or the equipment within the package that may lead to further damage and a dangerous condition during transport . Cushioning material that is non-combu stible and electrically non-conductive may also be used to meet this requirement . 5 . Non combustibility shall be assessed acc ording to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured . For leaking batteries and cells, sufficie nt inert absorbent material shall be added to the inner or outer packaging to absorb any release of electrolyte . Additional requirement: Batteries and ce lls shall be protected against short circuit . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 239

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 229 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 LP905 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP905 This instruction applies to UN Nos . 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 production runs c onsisting of not more than 100 cells or batteries and to pre-production prototypes of cells or batteries when these prototypes are transported for testing . The following large packagings are autho rized for a single battery and for a single item of equipment containing cells or batteries, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: (1) For a single battery: Rigid large packagings conforming to the p acking group II performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G) . Large packagings shall also meet the follo wing requirements: (a) A battery of different size, shape or mass may b e packed in an outer packaging of a tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the design type has been tested; (b) The battery shall be packed in an inner packag ing and placed inside the outer packaging; (c) The inner packaging shall be completely surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat; (d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to min imize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement of the battery within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during transport . When cushioning material is used to meet th is requirement it shall be non-combustible and electrically non-conductive; and (e) Non-combustibility shall be assessed a ccording to a standard recognized in the country where the large packaging is designed or manufactured . (2) For a single item of equipment containing ce lls or batteries: Rigid large packagings conforming to the p acking group II performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G) . Large packagings shall also meet the follo wing requirements: (a) A single item of equipment of different size , shape or mass may be packed in an outer packaging of a tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the design type has been tested; (b) The equipment shall be constructed or pack ed in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during transport; (c) Appropriate measures shall be taken to min imize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement of the equipment within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during transport . When cushioning material is used to meet th is requirement, it shall be non-combustible and electrically non-conductive; and (d) Non-combustibility shall be assessed a ccording to a standard recognized in the country where the large packaging is designed or manufactured . Additional requirement: Cells and batter ies shall be protected against short circuit . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 240

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 230 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 LP906 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP906 This instruction applies to damage d or defective batteries of UN Nos . 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 liable to rapidly d isassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of transport . The following large packagings are autho rized, provided that the general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 and 4 . 1 . 3 are met: For a single battery and for a single ite m of equipment containing batteries: Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group I performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); plywood (50D); rigid fibreboard (50G) . (1) The large packaging shall be capable of meet ing the following additional performance requirements in case of rapid disassembly, dangerous reaction, production of a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours of the battery: (a) The outside surface temperature of the com pleted package shall not have a temperature of more than 100°C . A momentary spike in temperature up to 200° C is acceptable; (b) No flame shall occur outside the package; (c) No projectiles shall exit the package; (d) The structural integrity of the package sh all be maintained; and (e) The large packagings shall have a gas manage ment system (e . g . filter system, air circulation, contai nment for gas, gas tight packaging etc . ), as appropriate . (2) The additional large packaging perform ance requirements shall be verified by a test as specified by the competent authority . * A verification report shall be available on request . As a minimum requirement, the battery nam e, the battery number, the mass, type, energy content of the batteries, the large packaging identification and the test data according to the verification method as specified by the competent authority shall be listed in the verification report . (3) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coola nt, the requirements of section 5 . 5 . 3 shall apply . The inner packaging and outer packaging s hall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost . Additional requirement: Batteries shal l be protected against short circuit . * The following criteria, as relevant, may be considered to assess the performance of the large packaging: (a) The assessment shall be done under a quality management system (as described e . g . in section 2 . 9 . 4 . 5) allowing for the traceability of test s results, reference data and characterization models used; (b) The list of hazards expected in case of thermal runaway for the battery type, in the condition it is transported (e . g . usage of an inner packaging, state of c harge (SOC), use of sufficient non-combustible, electrically non-conductive and absorbent cushioning material etc . ), shall be clearly identified and quantif ied; the reference list of possible hazards for lithium batteries (rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours) can be used for this purpose . The quantification of these hazards sha ll rely on available scientific literature; (c) The mitigating effects of the large packaging shall be identified and characterized, based on the nature of the protections provided and the construction material properties . A list of technical characteristics and d rawings shall be used to support this assessment (density [kg·m 3 ], specific heat capacity [J·kg -1 ·K -1 ], heating value [kJ·kg -1 ], thermal conductivity [W·m 1 ·K 1 ], melting temperature and flammability temperature [K], heat transfer coefficient of the outer packaging [W·m -2 ·K -1 ], …); (d) The test and any supporting calculations shall assess the result of a thermal run-away of the battery inside the large packaging in the normal conditions of transport; (e) In case the SOC of the battery is not known, the assessment used shall be done with the highest possible SOC corresponding to the battery use conditions; (f) The surrounding conditions in which the large packaging may be used and transported shall be described (including for possible consequences of gas or smoke emissions on the environment, such as ventilation or other methods) according to the gas management system of the large packaging; (g) The tests or the model calculation shall consider the worst case scenario for the thermal runaway triggering and propagation inside the battery: this scenario includes the worst possible failure in the normal transport condition, the maximum heat and flame emissions for the possible propagation of the reaction; (h) These scenarios shall be assessed over a period long enough to allow all the possible consequences to occur (e . g . 24 hours) . 4.1.5 Special packing provisions for goods of cla ss 1 4.1.5.1 The general provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 shall be met . 4.1.5.2 All packagings for class 1 goods shall be so des igned and constructed that: .1 they will protect the explosives, preven t them escaping and cause no increase in the risk of unintended ignition or initiation when subjected to normal conditions of transport, including foreseeable changes in temperature, humidity and pressure; .2 the complete package can be handled safely i n normal conditions of transport; and 4 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 241

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 231 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 .3 the packages will withstand any loading imposed on them by foreseeable stacking to which they will be subject during transport so that they do no t add to the risk presented by the explosives, the containment function of the packagings is not harmed, and they are not distorted in a way or to an extent which will reduce their strength or cause instability of a stack . 4.1.5.3 All explosive substances and articles, a s prepared for transport, shall have been classified in accordance with the procedures detailed in 2 . 1 . 3 . 4.1.5.4 Class 1 goods shall be packed in accordance wi th the appropriate packing instruction shown in columns 8 and 9 of the Dangerous Goods List, as detailed in 4 . 1 . 4 . 4.1.5.5 Unless otherwise specified in this Code, pa ckagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall conform to the requirements of chapters 6 . 1, 6 . 5 or 6 . 6, as appropriate, and shall meet their test p rovisions for packing group II . 4.1.5.6 The closure device of packagings contain ing liquid explosives shall ensure a double protection against leakage . 4.1.5.7 The closure device of metal drums shall incl ude a suitable gasket; if a closure device includes a screw-thread, the ingress of explosive substances into the screw-thread shall be prevented . 4.1.5.8 Packagings for water-soluble substance s shall be water-resistant . Packagings for desensitized or phlegma tized substances shall be closed to prevent changes in concentration during transport . 4.1.5.9 When the packaging includes a double envel ope filled with water which may freeze during transport, a sufficient quantity of an anti-freeze agent shall be added to the water to prevent freezing . Anti-freeze that could create a fire hazar d because of its inherent flammability shall not be used . 4.1.5.10 Nails, staples and other closure devices m ade of metal without protective covering shall not penetrate to the inside of the outer packaging unless the inner packaging adequately protects the explosives against contact with the metal . 4.1.5.11 Inner packagings, fittings and cushioni ng materials and the placing of explosive substances or articles in packages shall be accomplished in a manner which prevents the explosive substances or articles from becoming loose in the outer packaging under normal conditions of transport . Metallic components of articles shall b e prevented from making contact with metal packagings . Articles containing explosive subst ances not enclosed in an outer casing shall be separated from each other in order to prevent friction and impact . Padding, trays, partitioning in the inn er or outer packaging, mouldings or receptacles may be used for this purpose . 4.1.5.12 Packagings shall be made of materials compati ble with, and impermeable to, the explosives contained in the package, so that neither interaction between the explosives and the packaging materials nor leakage causes the explosive to become unsafe to transport, or the hazard division or compatibility group to change . 4.1.5.13 The ingress of explosive substances into t he recesses of seamed metal packagings shall be prevented . 4.1.5.14 Plastics packagings shall not be liable to generate or accumulate sufficient static electricity so that a discharge could cause the packaged explosive substances or articles to initiate, ignite or function . 4.1.5.15 Large and robust explosives articl es, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features may be transported unpackaged . When such articles have propelling charg es or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of transport . A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpa ckaged article indicates that the article can be considered for transport unpackaged . Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cra dles or contained in crates or other suitable handling, storage or launching devices in such a way that they will not become loose during normal conditions of transport . Where such large explosive articles are , as part of their operational safety and suitability tests, subjected to test regimes that meet the provisions of this Code and such tests have been successfully undertaken, the competent authority may approve such articles to be transported under this Code . 4.1.5.16 Explosive substances shall not be packed i n inner or outer packagings where the differences in internal and external pressures, due to thermal or other effects, could cause an explosion or rupture of the package . 4.1.5.17 Whenever loose explosive substances or t he explosive substance of an uncased or partly cased article may come into contact with the inner surface of metal packagings (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 4A, 4B and metal receptacles), the metal packaging shall be provided with an inner liner or coating (see 4 . 1 . 1 . 2) . 4.1.5.18 Packing instruction P101 may be used for any e xplosive provided the package has been approved by a competent authority regardless of whether the packaging complies with the packing instruction assignment in the Dangerous Goods List . 4.1.5.19 Government-owned military dangerou s goods, packaged prior to 1 January 1990 in accordance with the provisions of the IMDG Code in effect at that time, may be transported provided the packagings maintain their integrity and the goods are declared as government-owned goods packaged prior to 1 January 1990 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 242

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 232 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.1.6 Special packing provisions for goods of cla ss 2 4.1.6.1 General provisions 4.1.6.1.1 This section provides general requirem ents applicable to the use of pressure receptacles for the transport of class 2 gases and other dangerous goods in pressure receptacles (e . g . UN 1051 Hydrogen cyanide, stabilized) . Pressure receptacles shall be co nstructed and closed so as to prevent any loss of contents which might be caused under normal conditions of transport, including by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure (resulting from change in altitude, for example) . 4.1.6.1.2 Parts of pressure receptacles which are in d irect contact with dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by those dangerous goods and shall not cause a dangerous effect (e . g . catalysing a reaction or reacting with th e dangerous goods) . The provisions of ISO 11114-1:2012 + Amd 1:2017 and ISO 11114-2:2013 shall be met as applicable . 4.1.6.1.3 Pressure receptacles, including th eir closures, shall be selected to contain a gas or a mixture of gases according to the requirements of 6 . 2 . 1 . 2 and the requirements of the specific packin g instructions of 4 . 1 . 4 . 1 . This section also applies to pressure rec eptacles which are elements of MEGCs . 4.1.6.1.4 Refillable pressure receptacles shall n ot be filled with a gas or gas mixture different from that previously contained unless the necessary operations for change of gas service have been performed . The change of service for compressed and li quefied gases shall be in accordance with ISO 11621:1997, as applicable . In addition, a pressure receptacle that p reviously contained a class 8 corrosive substance or a substance of another class with a corrosive subsidiary hazard shall not be authorized for the transport of a class 2 substance unless the necessary inspection and testing as specified in 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 have been performed . 4.1.6.1.5 Prior to filling, the filler shall perform an in spection of the pressure receptacle and ensure that the pressure receptacle is authorized for the gas and, in case of a chemical under pressure, for the propellant to be transported and that the provisions of this Code have been met . Shut-off valves shall be closed after fill ing and remain closed during transport . The consignor shall verify that the closu res and equipment are not leaking . 4.1.6.1.6 Pressure receptacles shall be filled acco rding to the working pressures, filling ratios and provisions specified in the appropriate packing instruction for the specific substance being filled . Reactive gases and gas mixtures shall be fil led to a pressure such that if complete decomposition of the gas occurs, the working pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded . Bundles of cylinders shall not be filled in ex cess of the lowest working pressure of any given cylinder in the bundle . 4.1.6.1.7 Pressure receptacles, including thei r closures, shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in chapter 6 . 2 . When outer packagings are prescribed, th e pressure receptacles shall be firmly secured therein . Unless otherwise specified in the detail ed packing instructions, one or more inner packagings may be enclosed in an outer packaging . 4.1.6.1.8 Valves shall be designed and constructed i n such a way that they are inherently able to withstand damage without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could cause inadvertent release of the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the following methods: .1 Valves are placed inside the neck of the press ure receptacle and protected by a threaded plug or cap; .2 Valves are protected by caps . Caps shall possess vent-holes of suffici ent cross-sectional area to evacuate the gas if leakage occurs at the valves; .3 Valves are protected by shrouds or guards; . 4 Pressure receptacles are transported i n frames (e . g . bundles); or .5 Pressure receptacles are transported i n an outer packaging . The packaging as prepared for transport s hall be capable of meeting the drop test specified in 6 . 1 . 5 . 3 at the packing group I performance level . For pressure receptacles with valves as de scribed in . 2 and . 3, the requirements of either ISO 11117:199 8 or ISO 11117:2008 + Cor 1:2009 shall be met; for valves with inherent protection, the provisions of annex A of ISO 10297:2006, annex A of ISO 10297:2014 or annex A of ISO 10297 + Amd 1:2017 . For pressure receptacles with self-c losing valves with inherent protection, the requirements of annex A of ISO 17879:2017 shall be met . For metal hydride storage systems, the v alve protection requirements specified in ISO 16111:2008 shall be met . 4.1.6.1.9 Non-refillable pressure receptacles shal l: .1 be transported in an outer packaging, s uch as a box, or crate, or in shrink-wrapped trays or stretch- wrapped trays; .2 be of a water capacity less than or equal to 1 . 25 L when filled with flammable or toxic gas; .3 not be used for toxic gases with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 mL / m 3 ; and .4 not be repaired after being put into service . △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 243

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 233 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.1.6.1.10 Refillable pressure receptacles, othe r than cryogenic receptacles, shall be periodically inspected in accordance with 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 and packing instruction P200, P205 or P206 , as applicable . Pressure relief valves for closed cryo genic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests according to the provisions of 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 3 and packing instruction P203 . Pressure receptacles shall not be filled a fter they become due for periodic inspection but may be transported after the expiry of the time limit . 4.1.6.1.11 Repairs shall be consistent with the manuf acture and testing requirements of the applicable design and construction standards and are only permitted as indicated in the relevant periodic inspection standards specified in 6 . 2 . 2 . 4 . Pressure receptacles, other than the ja cket of closed cryogenic receptacles, shall not be subjected to repairs of any of the following: .1 weld cracks or other weld defects; .2 cracks in walls; .3 leaks or defects in the material of the wall, he ad or bottom . 4.1.6.1.12 Pressure receptacles shall not be offere d for filling: .1 when damaged to such an extent that the i ntegrity of the pressure receptacle or its service equipment may be affected; .2 unless the pressure receptacle and its ser vice equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order; or .3 unless the required certification, rete st, and filling marks are legible . 4.1.6.1.13 Filled pressure receptacles shall not be o ffered for transport: .1 when leaking; .2 when damaged to such an extent that the i ntegrity of the pressure receptacle or its service equipment may be affected; .3 unless the pressure receptacle and its ser vice equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order; or .4 unless the required certification, rete st, and filling marks are legible . 4.1.6.1.14 Where in packing instruction P200 cylind ers and other pressure receptacles for gases conforming to the requirements of this subsection and chapter 6 . 2 are authorized, use is also authorized of cyl inders and pressure receptacles which conform to the requirements of the competent authority of the country in which the cylinder or pressure receptacle is filled . Valves shall be suitably protected . Pressure receptacles with capacities of 1 L or less shall be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable material of adequate strength and design in relation to the capacity of the packaging and its intended use and secured or cushioned so as to prevent significant movement within the outer packaging during normal conditions of transport . 4.1.7 Special packing provisions for organic pero xides (class 5.2) and self-reactive substances of class 4.1 4.1.7.0 General 4.1.7.0.1 For organic peroxides, all receptacl es shall be “effectively closed” . Where significant internal pressure m ay develop in a package by the evolution of gas, a vent may be fitted, provided the gas emitted will not cause danger, otherwise the degree of filling shall be limited . Any venting device shall be so constructe d that liquid will not escape when the package is in an upright position and it shall be able to prevent ingress of impurities . The outer packaging, if any, shall be so desi gned as not to interfere with the operation of the venting device . 4.1.7.1 Use of packagings (except IBCs) 4.1.7.1.1 Packagings for organic peroxides and sel f-reactive substances shall conform to the provisions of chapter 6 . 1 and shall meet its test provisions for packi ng group II . 4.1.7.1.2 The packing methods for organic peroxide s and self-reactive substances are listed in packing instruction P520 and are designated OP1 to OP8 . The quantities specified for each packin g method are the maximum quantities authorized per package . 4.1.7.1.3 The packing methods appropriate for the in dividual currently assigned self-reactive substances and organic peroxides are listed in 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 2 . 3 and 2 . 5 . 3 . 2 . 4 . 4.1.7.1.4 For new organic peroxides, new self-reac tive substances or new formulations of currently assigned organic peroxides or self-reactive substances, the following procedure shall be used to assign the appropriate packing method: .1 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B or SELF-REACTIVE S UBSTANCE TYPE B: Packing method OP5 shall be assigned, prov ided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) satisfies the criteria of 2 . 5 . 3 . 3 . 2 . 2 (resp . 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 3 . 2 . 2) in a packaging authorized by the packing me thod . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 244

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 234 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 If the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those authorized by packing method OP5 (viz . one of the packagings listed for OP 1 to OP4), then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number is assigned; .2 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C or SELF-REACTIVE S UBSTANCE TYPE C: Packing method OP6 shall be assigned, prov ided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) satisfies the criteria of 2 . 5 . 3 . 3 . 2 . 3 (resp . 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 3 . 2 . 3) in packaging authorized by the packin g method . If the organic peroxide (or self-reacti ve substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those authorized by packing method OP6, then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number is assigned; .3 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D or SELF-REACTIVE S UBSTANCE TYPE D: Packing method OP7 shall be assigned to this ty pe of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance; .4 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E or SELF-REACTIVE S UBSTANCE TYPE E: Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this typ e of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance; .5 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F or SELF-REACTIVE S UBSTANCE TYPE F: Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this typ e of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance . 4.1.7.2 Use of intermediate bulk containers 4.1.7.2.1 The currently assigned organic peroxid es specifically listed in packing instruction IBC520 may be transported in IBCs in accordance with this packing instruction . IBCs shall conform to the requirements of c hapter 6 . 5 and shall meet its test provisions for packi ng group II . 4.1.7.2.2 Other organic peroxides and self-react ive substances of type F may be transported in IBCs under conditions established by the competent authority of the country of origin when, on the basis of the appropriate tests, that competent authority is satisfied that such transport may be safely conducted . The tests undertaken shall include those necessary: .1 to prove that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) complies with the principles for classification; .2 to prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance during the transport; .3 to determine, when applicable, the control and emergency temperatures associated with the transport of the product in the IBC concerned as derived from the SADT; .4 to design, when applicable, pressure and e mergency relief devices; and .5 to determine if any special provisions are n ecessary for safe transport of the substance . 4.1.7.2.3 For self-reactive substances, temper ature control is required according to 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 4 . For organic peroxides, temperature co ntrol is required according to 2 . 5 . 3 . 4 . 1 . Temperature control provisions are give n in 7 . 3 . 7 . 4.1.7.2.4 Emergencies to be taken into account are sel f-accelerating decomposition and fire engulfment . To prevent explosive rupture of metal or co mposite IBCs with a complete metal casing, the emergency relief devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-accelerating decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of complete fire engulfment calculated by the equations given in 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 8 . 4.1.8 Special packing provisions for infectiou s substances of category A (class 6.2, UN 2814 and UN 2900) 4.1.8.1 Consignors of infectious substances shal l ensure that packages are prepared in such a manner that they arrive at their destination in good condition and present no hazard to persons or animals during transport . 4.1.8.2 The definitions in 1 . 2 . 1 and the general packing provisions of 4 . 1 . 1 . 1 to 4 . 1 . 1 . 14, except 4 . 1 . 1 . 10 to 4 . 1 . 1 . 12, apply to infectious substances packa ges . However, liquids shall only be filled into p ackagings which have an appropriate resistance to the internal pressure that may develop under normal conditions of transport . 4.1.8.3 An itemized list of contents shall be enclos ed between the secondary packaging and the outer packaging . When the infectious substances to be tran sported are unknown, but suspected of meeting the criteria for inclusion in category A, the words “suspected category A infectious substance” shall be shown, in parentheses, following the proper shipping name on the document inside the outer packaging . 4.1.8.4 Before an empty packaging is returned to t he consignor, or sent elsewhere, it shall be disinfected or sterilized to nullify any hazard and any label or mark indicating that it had contained an infectious substance shall be removed or obliterated . 4.1.8.5 Provided an equivalent level of performa nce is maintained, the following variations in the primary receptacles placed within an intermediate packaging are allowed without further testing of the completed package: .1 Primary receptacles of equivalent or s maller size as compared to the tested primary receptacles may be used provided: (a) the primary receptacles are of similar des ign to the tested primary receptacle (such as shape: round, rectangular, etc . ); Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 245

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 235 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 (b) the material of construction of the primary receptacle (glass, plastics, metal, etc . ) offers resistance to impact and stacking f orces equal to or greater than that of the originally tested primary receptacle; (c) the primary receptacles have the same or sma ller openings and the closure is of similar design (such as screw cap, friction lid, etc . ); (d) sufficient additional cushioning mate rial is used to take up void spaces and to prevent significant movement of the primary receptacles; and (e) primary receptacles are oriented withi n the intermediate packaging in the same manner as in the tested package . .2 A lesser number of the tested primary recept acles, or of the alternative types of primary receptacles identified in . 1 above, may be used provided sufficient cush ioning is added to fill the void space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the primary receptacles . 4.1.9 Special packing provisions for radioactive m aterial 4.1.9.1 General 4.1.9.1.1 Radioactive material, packagings and packages sha ll meet the provisions of chapter 6 . 4 . The quantity of radioactive material i n a package shall not exceed the limits specified in 2 . 7 . 2 . 2, 2 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 1, 2 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 4, 2 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 5, 2 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 6 and 4 . 1 . 9 . 3 . The types of packages for radioactive mate rials covered by the provisions of this Code are: .1 Excepted package (see 1 . 5 . 1 . 5); .2 Industrial package Type 1 (Type IP-1 package) ; .3 Industrial package Type 2 (Type IP-2 package) ; .4 Industrial package Type 3 (Type IP-3 package) ; .5 Type A package; .6 Type B(U) package; .7 Type B(M) package; .8 Type C package . Packages containing fissile material or uranium hexafluoride are subject to additional requirements . 4.1.9.1.2 The non-fixed contamination on the extern al surfaces of any package shall be kept as low as practicable and, under routine conditions of transport, shall not exceed the following limits: (a) 4 Bq / cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters, and (b) 0 . 4 Bq / cm 2 for all other alpha emitters . These limits are applicable when average d over any area of 300 cm 2 of any part of the surface . 4.1.9.1.3 A package shall not contain any item s other than those that are necessary for the use of the radioactive material . The interaction between these items and t he package under the conditions of transport applicable to the design shall not reduce the safety of the package . 4.1.9.1.4 Except as provided in 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 11, the level of non-fixed contamination o n the external and internal surfaces of overpacks, cargo transport units, tanks, IBCs and conveyances shall not exceed the limits specified in 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 2 . This requirement does not apply t o the internal surfaces of freight containers being used as packagings, either loaded or empty . 4.1.9.1.5 For radioactive material having other dange rous properties the package design shall take into account those properties . Radioactive material with a subsidiary haz ard, packaged in packages that do not require competent authority approval, shall be transported in packagings, IBCs, tanks or bulk containers fully complying with the provisions of the relevant chapters of part 6 as appropriate, as well as applicable provisions of chapters 4 . 1, 4 . 2 or 4 . 3 for that subsidiary hazard . 4.1.9.1.6 Before a packaging is first used to transport r adioactive material, it shall be confirmed that it has been manufactured in conformity with the design specifications to ensure compliance with the relevant provisions of this Code and any applicable certificate of approval . The following requirements shall also b e fulfilled, if applicable: .1 if the design pressure of the containment sy stem exceeds 35 kPa (gauge), it shall be ensured that the containment system of each packaging conforms to the approved design requirements relating to the capability of that system to maintain its integrity under that pressure; .2 for each packaging intended for use a s a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package and for each packaging intended to contain fissile material, it shall be ensured that the effectiveness of its shielding △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 246

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 236 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 and containment and, where necessary, the heat transfer characteristics and the effectiveness of the confinement system are within the limits applicable to or specified for the approved design; .3 for each packaging intended to contain fiss ile material, it shall be ensured that the effectiveness of the criticality safety features is within the limits applicable to or specified for the design and in particular where, in order to comply with the requirements of 6 . 4 . 11 . 1 neutron poisons are specifically includ ed, checks shall be performed to confirm the presence and distribution of those neutron poisons . 4.1.9.1.7 Before each shipment of any package, it sha ll be ensured that the package contains neither: .1 radionuclides different from those spe cified for the package design; nor .2 contents in a form, or physical or chemical st ate different from those specified for the package design . 4.1.9.1.8 Before each shipment of any package, it shal l be ensured that all the requirements specified in the relevant provisions of this Code and in the applicable certificates of approval have been fulfilled . The following requirements shall also b e fulfilled, if applicable: .1 it shall be ensured that lifting attachmen ts which do not meet the requirements of 6 . 4 . 2 . 2 have been removed or otherwise rendered incapable of being used for lifting the package, in accordance with 6 . 4 . 2 . 3; .2 each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package sha ll be held until equilibrium conditions have been approached closely enough to demonstrate compliance with the requirements for temperature and pressure unless an exemption from these requirements has received unilateral approval; .3 for each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package , it shall be ensured by inspection and/or appropriate tests that all closures, valves and other openings of the containment system through which the radioactive contents might escape are properly closed and, where appropriate, sealed in the manner for which the demonstrations of compliance with the requirements of 6 . 4 . 8 . 8 and 6 . 4 . 10 . 3 were made; .4 for packages containing fissile mat erial the measurement specified in 6 . 4 . 11 . 5 (b) and the tests to demonstrate clos ure of each package as specified in 6 . 4 . 11 . 8 shall be performed . .5 for packages intended to be used for shipmen t after storage, it shall be ensured that all packaging components and radioactive contents have been maintained during storage in a manner such that all the requirements specified in the relevant provisions of this Code and in the applicable certificates of approval have been fulfilled . 4.1.9.1.9 The consignor shall also have a copy of any inst ructions with regard to the proper closing of the package and any preparation for shipment before making any shipment under the terms of the certificates . 4.1.9.1.10 Except for consignments under exclusiv e use, the transport index of any package or overpack shall not exceed 10, nor shall the criticality safety index of any package or overpack exceed 50 . 4.1.9.1.11 Except for packages or overpacks transpo rted under exclusive use by rail or by road under the conditions specified in 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 5 . 1, or under exclusive use and special arrang ement by ship under the conditions specified in 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 7, the maximum dose rate at any point on any exter nal surface of a package or overpack shall not exceed 2 mSv/h . 4.1.9.1.12 The maximum dose rate at any point on any extern al surface of a package or overpack under exclusive use shall not exceed 10 mSv/h . 4.1.9.1.13 Pyrophoric radioactive material sha ll be packaged in Type A, Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C packages and shall also be suitably inerted . 4.1.9.2 Provisions and controls for transport of L SA material and SCO 4.1.9.2.1 The quantity of LSA material or SCO in a single T ype IP-1 package, Type IP-2 package, Type IP-3 package, or object or collection of objects, whichever is appropriate, shall be so restricted that the external dose rate at 3 m from the unshielded material or object or collection of objects does not exceed 10 mSv/h . 4.1.9.2.2 For LSA material and SCO which are or contain fissile material, which is not excepted under 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5, the applicable requirements of 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 15 and 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 16 shall be met . 4.1.9.2.3 For LSA material and SCO which are or contain fis sile material, the applicable requirements of 6 . 4 . 11 . 1 shall be met . 4.1.9.2.4 LSA material and SCO in groups LSA-I, SCO-I a nd SCO-III may be transported unpackaged under the following conditions: .1 all unpackaged material other than ores con taining only naturally occurring radionuclides shall be transported in such a manner that, under routine conditions of transport, there will be no escape of the radioactive contents from the conveyance nor will there be any loss of shielding; .2 each conveyance shall be under exclusive u se, except when only transporting SCO-I on which the contamination on the accessible and the inaccessible surfaces is not greater than ten times the applicable level specified in 2 . 7 . 1 . 2; ■ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 247

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings 237 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 .3 for SCO-I where it is suspected that non-fixed contamination exists on inaccessible surfaces in excess of the values specified in 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 2 . 1 . 1, measures shall be taken to ensure that the ra dioactive material is not released into the conveyance; and .4 unpackaged fissile material shall meet the re quirements of 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 5 . .5 for SCO-III; .1 transport shall be under exclusive use by ro ad, rail, inland waterway or sea; .2 stacking shall not be permitted; .3 all activities associated with the shipm ent, including radiation protection, emergency response and any special precautions or special administrative or operational controls that are to be employed during transport shall be described in a transport plan . The transport plan shall demonstrate th at the overall level of safety in transport is at least equivalent to that which would be provided if the requirements of 6 . 4 . 7 . 14 (only for the test specified in 6 . 4 . 15 . 6, preceded by the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 15 . 2 and 6 . 4 . 15 . 3) had been met . .4 the requirements of 6 . 4 . 5 . 1 and 6 . 4 . 5 . 2 for a Type IP-2 package shall be satisfied, exc ept that the maximum damage referred to in 6 . 4 . 15 . 4 may be determined based on provisions in the t ransport plan, and the requirements of 6 . 4 . 15 . 5 are not applicable . .5 the object and any shielding are secured to th e conveyance in accordance with 6 . 4 . 2 . 1 . .6 the shipment shall be subject to multilate ral approval . 4.1.9.2.5 LSA material and SCO, except as othe rwise specified in 4 . 1 . 9 . 2 . 4, shall be packaged in accordance w ith table 4 . 1 . 9 . 2 . 5 . Table 4.1.9.2.5 – Industrial package pr ovisions for LSA material and SCO Radioactive contents Industrial package type Exclusive use Not under exclusive use LSA-I Solid a Liquid Type IP-1 Type IP-1 Type IP-1 Type IP-2 LSA-II Solid Liquid and gas Type IP-2 Type IP-2 Type IP-2 Type IP-3 LSA-III Type IP-2 Type IP-3 SCO-I a Type IP-1 Type IP-1 SCO-II Type IP-2 Type IP-2 a Under the conditions specified in 4 . 1 . 9 . 2 . 4, LSA-I material and SCO-I may be transport ed unpackaged . 4.1.9.3 Packages containing fissile material The contents of packages containing fissile material shall be as specified for the package design either directly in the provisions of this Code or in the certificate of approval . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 248

238 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 Chapter 4.2 Use of portable tanks and multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) The provisions of this chapter also apply to road tank vehicles to the extent indicated in chapter 6 . 8 . 4.2.0 Transitional provisions 4.2.0.1 The provisions for the use and constructio n of portable tanks in this chapter and chapter 6 . 7 are based on the United Nations Recommendat ions on the Transport of Dangerous Goods . IMO type portable tanks and road tank vehic les certified and approved prior to 1 January 2003 in accordance with the provisions of the IMDG Code in force on 1 July 1999 (amendment 29) may continue to be used provided that they are found to meet the applicable periodic inspections and test provisions . They shall meet the provisions set out in col umns (13) and (14) of chapter 3 . 2 . Detailed explanation and constructi on provisions may be found in CCC . 1/Circ . 3 Revised guidance on the continued use of exi sting IMO type portable tanks and road tank vehicles for the transport of dangerous goods . Note: For ease of reference, the following d escriptions of existing IMO type tanks are included: IMO type 1 tank means a portable tank for the transport of substances of classes 3 to 9 fitted with pressure- relief devices, having a maximum allowable working pressure of 1 . 75 bar and above . IMO type 2 tank means a portable tan k fitted with pressure-relief devices, having a maximum allowable working pressure equal to or above 1 . 0 bar but below 1 . 75 bar, intended for the transport of certai n dangerous liquids of low hazard and certain solids . IMO type 4 tank means a road tank vehicle for the t ransport of dangerous goods of classes 3 to 9 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis, with at least four twist locks which comply with ISO standards, (e . g . ISO 1161:1984) . IMO type 5 tank means a portable tank fitted wit h pressure-relief devices which is used for non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 . IMO type 6 tank means a road tank vehi cle for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis which is fitted with items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases . IMO type 7 tank means a thermally insulated p ortable tank fitted with items of service and structural equipment necessary for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases . The portable tank shall be capable of being t ransported, loaded and discharged without the need of removal of its structural equipment, and shall be capable of being lifted when full . It shall not be permanently secured on boar d the ship . IMO type 8 tank means a road tank vehicle for the t ransport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached thermally insulated tank fitted with items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases . IMO type 9 tank means a road gas elem ents vehicle for the transport of compressed gases of class 2 with elements linked to each other by a manifold, permanently attached to a chassis, which is fitted with items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases . Elements are cylinders, tubes and bundl es of cylinders, intended for the transport of gases as defined in 2 . 2 . 1 . 1 . Note: IMO type 4, 6 and 8 road tank vehicl es may be constructed after 1 January 2003 in accordance with the provisions of chapter 6 . 8 . 4.2.0.2 UN portable tanks and MEGCs constructed ac cording to a design approval certificate which has been issued before 1 January 2008 may continue to be used provided that they are found to meet the applicable periodic inspection and test provisions . 4.2.0.3 Portable tanks and MEGCs manufactu red before 1 January 2012, that conform to the marking provisions of 6 . 7 . 2 . 20 . 1, 6 . 7 . 3 . 16 . 1, 6 . 7 . 4 . 15 . 1 or 6 . 7 . 5 . 13 . 1 of the IMDG Code in force on 1 January 2 010 (amendment 34-08), as relevant, may continue to be used if they comply with all other relevant provisions of the current edition of the Code including, when applicable, the requirement of 6 . 7 . 2 . 20 . 1 (g) for marking the symbol “S” on the plate when th e shell or the compartment is divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7,500 L capacity . When the shell, or the compartment, was alr eady divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7,500 L capacity before 1 January 2012, the capacity of the shell, or respectively of the compartment, need Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 249

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs 239 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 not be supplemented with the symbol “S” until the next periodic inspection or test according to 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 5 is performed . Portable tanks manufactured before 1 Jan uary 2014 need not be marked with the portable tank instruction as required in 6 . 7 . 2 . 20 . 2, 6 . 7 . 3 . 16 . 2 and 6 . 7 . 4 . 15 . 2 until the next periodic inspection and tes t . Portable tanks and MECGs manufactured be fore 1 January 2014 need not comply with the requirements of 6 . 7 . 2 . 13 . 1 . 6, 6 . 7 . 3 . 9 . 1 . 5, 6 . 7 . 4 . 8 . 1 . 5 and 6 . 7 . 5 . 6 . 1 (d) concerning the marking of the pressure r elief devices . IMO portable tanks manufactured before 1 J anuary 2003 shall be marked with an indication of the portable tank instruction for which it meets the minimum test pressure, minimum shell thickness, pressure relief requirements and bottom opening requirements as shown in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 as required in 6 . 7 . 2 . 20 . 2, 6 . 7 . 3 . 16 . 2 and 6 . 7 . 4 . 15 . 2 . These portable tanks need not be marked wit h the portable tank instruction until the next periodic inspection and test . 4.2.1 General provisions for the use of portable t anks for the transport of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9 4.2.1.1 This section provides general provisio ns applicable to the use of portable tanks for the transport of substances of classes 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 . In addition to these general provisions , portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing provisions detailed in 6 . 7 . 2 . Substances shall be transported i n portable tanks conforming to the applicable portable tank instruction and the portable tank special provisions assigned to each substance in the Dangerous Goods List . 4.2.1.2 During transport, portable tanks shall b e adequately protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning . If the shell and service equipment are so con structed as to withstand impact or overturning, it need not be protected in this way . Examples of such protection are given in 6 . 7 . 2 . 17 . 5 . 4.2.1.3 Certain substances are chemically unst able . They are accepted for transport only when t he necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or polymerization during transport . To this end, care shall in particular be take n to ensure that shells do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions . 4.2.1.4 The temperature of the outer surface of the sh ell, excluding openings and their closures, or of the thermal insulation shall not exceed 70 ° C during transport . When necessary, the shell shall be therma lly insulated . 4.2.1.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas -free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks filled with the previous substance . 4.2.1.6 Substances shall not be transported in adj oining compartments of shells when they may react dangerously with each other and cause: .1 combustion and/or evolution of consider able heat; .2 evolution of flammable, toxic or asphyxia nt gases; .3 the formation of corrosive substances; .4 the formation of unstable substances; .5 dangerous rise in pressure . 4.2.1.7 The design approval certificate, the test r eport and the certificate showing the results of the initial inspection and test for each portable tank issued by the competent authority or its authorized body shall be retained by the authority or body and the owner . Owners shall be able to provide this docume ntation upon the request of any competent authority . 4.2.1.8 Unless the name of the substance(s) being transported appears on the metal plate described in 6 . 7 . 2 . 20 . 2, a copy of the certificate specified in 6 . 7 . 2 . 18 . 1 shall be made available upon the request of a co mpetent authority or its authorized body and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate . 4.2.1.9 Degree of filling 4.2.1.9.1 Prior to filling, the shipper shall ensure th at the appropriate portable tank is used and that the portable tank is not loaded with substances which, in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets, service equipment and any protective linings, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials . The shipper may need to consult the manufac turer of the substance in conjunction with the competent authority for guidance on the compatibility of the substance with the portable tank materials . 4.2.1.9.1.1 Portable tanks shall not be filled in e xcess of the maximum degree of filling specified in 4 . 2 . 1 . 9 . 2 to 4 . 2 . 1 . 9 . 6 . The applicability of 4 . 2 . 1 . 9 . 2, 4 . 2 . 1 . 9 . 3 or 4 . 2 . 1 . 9 . 5 . 1 to individual substances is specified in th e applicable Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 250

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 240 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 portable tank instructions or special provisions in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 or 4 . 2 . 5 . 3 and columns 13 and 14 of the Dangerou s Goods List . 4.2.1.9.2 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for genera l use is determined by the formula: Degree of filling = 97 _________ 1 + α ( t r - t f ) 4.2.1.9.3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for liquid s of class 6 . 1 and class 8, in packing groups I and II, and liqui ds with an absolute vapour pressure of more than 175 kPa (1 . 75 bar) at 65 ° C, or for liquids identified as marin e pollutants is determined by the formula: Degree of filling = 95 _________ 1 + α ( t r - t f ) 4.2.1.9.4 In these formulae, α is the mean coefficien t of cubical expansion of the liquid between the mean temperature of the liquid during filling ( t f ) and the maximum mean bulk temperature during transport ( t r ) (both in ° C) . For liquids transported under ambient c onditions, α could be calculated by the formula: α = d 15 – d 50 _______ 35 d 50 in which d 15 and d 50 are the densities of the liquid at 15 ° C and 50 ° C, respectively . 4.2.1.9.4.1 The maximum mean bulk temperature ( t r ) shall be taken as 50 ° C except that, for journeys under temperate or extreme climatic conditions, the competent authorities concerned may agree to a lower or require a higher temperature, as appropriate . 4.2.1.9.5 The provisions of 4 . 2 . 1 . 9 . 2 to 4 . 2 . 1 . 9 . 4 . 1 do not apply to portable tanks which contain s ubstances maintained at a temperature above 50 ° C during transport (such as by means of a heating device) . For portable tanks equipped with a heatin g device, a temperature regulator shall be used to ensure the maximum degree of filling is not more than 95% full at any time during transport . 4.2.1.9.5.1 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids transported above their melt ing points and for elevated temperature liquids shall be determined by the following formula: Degree of filling = 95 d r __ d f in which d f and d r are the densities of the liquid at the mean temperature of the liquid during filling and the maximum mean bulk temperature during transport respectively . 4.2.1.9.6 Portable tanks shall not be offered for tran sport: .1 with a degree of filling, for liquids having a vi scosity less than 2,680 mm 2 / s at 20 ° C or at the maximum temperature of the substance during transport in the case of a heated substance, of more than 20% but less than 80% unless the shells of portable tanks are divided, by partitions or surge plates, into sections of not more than 7,500 L capacity; .2 with residue of substances previously tr ansported adhering to the outside of the shell or service equipment; .3 when leaking or damaged to such an extent that t he integrity of the portable tank or its lifting or securing arrangements may be affected; and .4 unless the service equipment has been exam ined and found to be in good working order . For certain dangerous substances, a lowe r degree of filling may be required . 4.2.1.9.7 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall b e closed off where the tank is filled . This provision does not apply to portable t anks which, according to 6 . 7 . 2 . 17 . 4, need not be provided with a means of closing of f the forklift pockets . 4.2.1.9.8 Portable tanks shall not be filled or dischar ged while they remain on board . 4.2.1.10 Additional provisions applicable to th e transport of class 3 substances in portable tanks All portable tanks intended for the transport of flammable liquids shall be closed and be fitted with relief devices in accordance with 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 to 6 . 7 . 2 . 15 . 4.2.1.11 Additional provisions applicable to th e transport of class 4 substances (other than class 4.1 self-reactive substances) in portable tanks [Reserved] Note: For class 4 . 1 self-reactive substances, see 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 251

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs 241 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.2.1.12 Additional provisions applicable to th e transport of class 5.1 substances in portable tanks [Reserved] 4.2.1.13 Additional provisions applicable to th e transport of class 5.2 substances and class 4.1 self-reactive substances in portable tanks 4.2.1.13.1 Each substance shall have been tested and a re port submitted to the competent authority of the country of origin for approval . Notification thereof shall be sent to the co mpetent authority of the country of destin - ation . The notification shall contain relevan t transport information and the report with test results . The tests undertaken shall include those necessary: .1 to prove the compatibility of all material s normally in contact with the substance during transport; .2 to provide data for the design of the pressure a nd emergency relief devices, taking into account the design characteristics of the portable tank . Any additional provisions necessary fo r safe transport of the substance shall be clearly described in the report . 4.2.1.13.2 The following provisions apply to portab le tanks intended for the transport of type F organic peroxides or type F self-reactive substances with a self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) of 55 ° C or more . In case of conflict, these provisions prev ail over those specified in 6 . 7 . 2 . Emergencies to be taken into account are se lf-accelerating decomposition of the substance and fire-engulfment as described in 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 8 . 4.2.1.13.3 The additional provisions for transpo rt of organic peroxides or self-reactive substances with an SADT less than 55 ° C in portable tanks shall be specified by the competent authority of the country of origin . Notification thereof shall be sent to the c ompetent authority of the country of destination . 4.2.1.13.4 The portable tank shall be designed for a test p ressure of at least 0 . 4 MPa (4 bar) . 4.2.1.13.5 Portable tanks shall be fitted with tempera ture-sensing devices . 4.2.1.13.6 Portable tanks shall be fitted with p ressure-relief devices and emergency relief devices . Vacuum-relief devices may also be used . Pressure-relief devices shall opera te at pressures determined according to both the properties of the substance and the construction characteristics of the portable tank . Fusible elements are not allowed in the s hell . 4.2.1.13.7 The pressure-relief devices shall cons ist of spring-loaded valves fitted to prevent significant build-up within the portable tank of the decomposition products and vapours released at a temperature of 50 ° C . The cap acity and start-to-discharge pressu re of the relief valves shall be based on the results of the tests specified in 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 1 . The start-to-discharge pressure sha ll, however, in no case be such that liquid would escape from the valve(s) if the portable tank were overturned . 4.2.1.13.8 The emergency relief devices may be of the spr ing-loaded or frangible types, or a combination of the two, designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during a period of not less than one hour of complete fire-engulfment as calculated by the following formula: q = 70961 FA 0 . 82 where: q = heat absorption (W) A = wetted area (m 2 ) F = insulation factor; F = 1 for non-insulated vessels, or F = U (923 - T ) _________ 47032 for insulated shells where: K = heat conductivity of insulation layer (W · m - 1 · K - 1 ) L = thickness of insulation layer (m) U = K / L = heat transfer coefficient of the ins ulation (W · m - 2 · K - 1 ) T = temperature of substance at relieving co nditions (K) The start-to-discharge pressure of t he emergency relief device(s) shall be higher than that specified in 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 7 and based on the results of the tests referred t o in 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 1 . The emergency relief devices shall be dim ensioned in such a way that the maximum pressure in the tank never exceeds the test pressure of the portable tank . Note: An example of a method to determine the siz e of emergency relief devices is given in appendix 5 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 252

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 242 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.2.1.13.9 For insulated portable tanks, the capaci ty and setting of emergency relief device(s) shall be determined assuming a loss of insulation from 1% of the surface area . 4.2.1.13.10 Vacuum-relief devices and spring-loa ded valves shall be provided with flame arresters . Due attention shall be paid to the reductio n of the relief capacity caused by the flame arrester . 4.2.1.13.11 Service equipment such as valves an d external piping shall be so arranged that no substance remains in them after filling the portable tank . 4.2.1.13.12 Portable tanks may be either insulated or pr otected by a sunshield . If the SADT of the substance in the portable ta nk is 55 ° C or less, or the portable tank is constructed of aluminium, the portable tank shall be completely insulated . The outer surface shall be finished in white o r bright metal . 4.2.1.13.13 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90% at 15 ° C . 4.2.1.13.14 The mark as required in 6 . 7 . 2 . 20 . 2 shall include the UN number and the technica l name with the approved concentration of the substance concerned . 4.2.1.13.15 Organic peroxides and self-reactive su bstances specifically listed in portable tank instruction T23 in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 may be transported in portable tanks . 4.2.1.14 Additional provisions applicable to th e transport of class 6.1 substances in portable tanks [Reserved] 4.2.1.15 Additional provisions applicable to th e transport of class 6.2 substances in portable tanks [Reserved] 4.2.1.16 Additional provisions applicable to th e transport of class 7 substances in portable tanks 4.2.1.16.1 Portable tanks used for the transport of rad ioactive material shall not be used for the transport of other goods . 4.2.1.16.2 The degree of filling for portable tanks shal l not exceed 90% or, alternatively, any other value approved by the competent authority . 4.2.1.17 Additional provisions applicable to th e transport of class 8 substances in portable tanks 4.2.1.17.1 Pressure-relief devices of portable ta nks used for the transport of class 8 substances shall be inspected at intervals not exceeding one year . 4.2.1.18 Additional provisions applicable to th e transport of class 9 substances in portable tanks [Reserved] 4.2.1.19 Additional provisions applicable to th e transport of solid substances transported above their melting point 4.2.1.19.1 Solid substances transported or offere d for transport above their melting point which are not assigned a portable tank instruction in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List of chapter 3 . 2 or when the assigned portable tank instruc tion does not apply to transport at temperatures above their melting point may be transported in portable tanks provided that the solid substances are classified in classes 4 . 1, 4 . 2, 4 . 3, 5 . 1, 6 . 1, 8 or 9 and have no subsidiary hazard other than t hat of class 6 . 1 or class 8 and are in packing group II or III . 4.2.1.19.2 Unless otherwise indicated in the Danger ous Goods List, portable tanks used for the transport of these solid substances above their melting point shall conform to the provisions of portable tank instruction T4 for solid substances of packing group III or T7 for solid substances of packing group II . A portable tank that affords an equivalen t or greater level of safety may be selected in accordance with 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 5 . The maximum degree of filling (in %) shall be de termined according to 4 . 2 . 1 . 9 . 5 (TP3) . 4.2.2 General provisions for the use of portable t anks for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure 4.2.2.1 This section provides general provisio ns applicable to the use of portable tanks for the transport of non- refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and chemicals under pressure . 4.2.2.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design , construction, inspection and testing provisions detailed in 6 . 7 . 3 . Non-refrigerated liquefied gases and c hemicals under pressure shall be transported in portable tanks Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 253

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs 243 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 conforming to portable tank instruction T50 as described in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 and any portable tank special provisions a ssigned to specific non-refrigerated liquefied gases in the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4 . 2 . 5 . 3 . 4.2.2.3 During transport, portable tanks shall b e adequately protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning . If the shell and service equipment are so con structed as to withstand impact or overturning, it need not be protected in this way . Examples of such protection are given in 6 . 7 . 3 . 13 . 5 . 4.2.2.4 Certain non-refrigerated liquefied ga ses are chemically unstable . They are accepted for transport only when t he necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or poly merization during transport . To this end, care shall be taken to ensure that po rtable tanks do not contain any non-refrigerated liquefied gases liable to promote these reactions . 4.2.2.5 Unless the name of the gas(es) being transpo rted appears on the metal plate described in 6 . 7 . 3 . 16 . 2, a copy of the certificate specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 14 . 1 shall be made available upon a competent aut hority request and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate . 4.2.2.6 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas -free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks filled with the previous non-refrigerated liquefied gas . 4.2.2.7 Filling 4.2.2.7.1 Prior to filling, the shipper shall ensure th at the portable tank is approved for the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or the propellant of the chemical under pressure to be transported and that the portable tank is not loaded with non-refrigerated liquefied gases, or with chemicals under pressure which, in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets and service equipment, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials . During filling, the temperature of the non -refrigerated liquefied gas or propellant of chemicals under pressure shall fall within the limits of the design temperature range . 4.2.2.7.2 The maximum mass of non-refrigerated liq uefied gas per litre of shell capacity (kg/L) shall not exceed the density of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas at 50 ° C multiplied by 0 . 95 . Furthermore, the shell shall not be liquid- full at 60 ° C . 4.2.2.7.3 Portable tanks shall not be filled above thei r maximum permissible gross mass and the maximum permissible load mass specified for each gas to be transported . 4.2.2.7.4 Portable tanks shall not be filled or dischar ged while they remain on board . 4.2.2.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for tran sport: .1 in an ullage condition liable to produce an un acceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the portable tank; .2 when leaking; .3 when damaged to such an extent that the integr ity of the tank or its lifting or securing arrangements may be affected; and .4 unless the service equipment has been exam ined and found to be in good working order . 4.2.2.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall b e closed off when the tank is filled . This provision does not apply to portable t anks which, according to 6 . 7 . 3 . 13 . 4, need not be provided with a means of closing of f the forklift pockets . 4.2.3 General provisions for the use of portable t anks for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 4.2.3.1 This section provides general provisio ns applicable to the use of portable tanks for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases . 4.2.3.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design , construction, inspection and testing provisions detailed in 6 . 7 . 4 . Refrigerated liquefied gases shal l be transported in portable tanks conforming to portable tank instruction T75 as described in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 and the portable tank special provisions a ssigned to each substance in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4 . 2 . 5 . 3 . 4.2.3.3 During transport, portable tanks shall b e adequately protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning . If the shell and service equipment are so con structed as to withstand impact or overturning, it need not be protected in this way . Examples of such protection are provide d in 6 . 7 . 4 . 12 . 5 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 254

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 244 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.2.3.4 Unless the name of the gas(es) being transpo rted appears on the metal plate described in 6 . 7 . 4 . 15 . 2, a copy of the certificate specified in 6 . 7 . 4 . 13 . 1 shall be made available upon a competent aut hority request and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate . 4.2.3.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas -free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks filled with the previous substance . 4.2.3.6 Filling 4.2.3.6.1 Prior to filling, the shipper shall ensure th at the portable tank is approved for the refrigerated liquefied gas to be transported and that the portable tank is not loaded with refrigerated liquefied gases which, in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets and service equipment, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials . During filling, the temperature of the ref rigerated liquefied gas shall be within the limits of the design temperature range . 4.2.3.6.2 In estimating the initial degree of filling, the necessary holding time for the intended journey, including any delays which might be encountered, shall be taken into consideration . The initial degree of filling of the shell, ex cept as provided for in 4 . 2 . 3 . 6 . 3 and 4 . 2 . 3 . 6 . 4, shall be such that if the contents, except he lium, were to be raised to a temperature at which the vapour pressure is equal to the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) the volume occupied by liquid would not exceed 98% . 4.2.3.6.3 Shells intended for the transport of helium can be filled up to but not above the inlet of the pressure-relief device . 4.2.3.6.4 A higher initial degree of filling may be allow ed, subject to approval by the competent authority, when the intended duration of transport is considerably shorter than the holding time . 4.2.3.6.5 Portable tanks shall not be filled or dischar ged while they remain on board . 4.2.3.7 Actual holding time 4.2.3.7.1 The actual holding time shall be cal culated for each journey in accordance with a procedure recognized by the competent authority, on the basis of the following: .1 the reference holding time for the refrige rated liquefied gas to be transported (see 6 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 8 . 1) (as indicated on the plate referred to in 6 . 7 . 4 . 15 . 1); .2 the actual filling density; .3 the actual filling pressure; .4 the lowest set pressure of the pressure-li miting device(s) . 4.2.3.7.2 The actual holding time shall be marked eith er on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank, in accordance with 6 . 7 . 4 . 15 . 2 . 4.2.3.7.3 The date at which the actual holding time ends s hall be entered in the transport document (see 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 13) . 4.2.3.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for tran sport: .1 in an ullage condition liable to produce an un acceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the shell; .2 when leaking; .3 when damaged to such an extent that the integr ity of the portable tank or its lifting or securing arrangements may be affected; .4 unless the service equipment has been exam ined and found to be in good working order; .5 unless the actual holding time for the refri gerated liquefied gas being transported has been determined in accordance with 4 . 2 . 3 . 7 and the portable tank is marked in accordanc e with 6 . 7 . 4 . 15 . 2; and .6 unless the duration of transport, after ta king into consideration any delays which might be encountered, does not exceed the actual holding time . 4.2.3.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall b e closed off when the tank is filled . This provision does not apply to portable t anks which, according to 6 . 7 . 4 . 12 . 4, need not be provided with a means of closing of f the forklift pockets . 4.2.4 General provisions for the use of multiple -element gas containers (MEGCs) 4.2.4.1 This section provides general requirem ents applicable to the use of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) for the transport of non-refrigerated gases . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 255

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs 245 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.2.4.2 MEGCs shall conform to the design, const ruction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in 6 . 7 . 5 . The elements of MEGCs shall be periodica lly inspected according to the provisions set out in packing instruction P200 and in 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 4.2.4.3 During transport, MEGCs shall be pr otected against damage to the elements and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning . If the elements and service equipment a re so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning, they need not be protected in this way . Examples of such protection are given in 6 . 7 . 5 . 10 . 4 . 4.2.4.4 The periodic testing and inspection requ irements for MEGCs are specified in 6 . 7 . 5 . 12 . MEGCs or their elements shall not be charge d or filled after they become due for periodic inspection but may be transported after the expiry of the time limit . 4.2.4.5 Filling 4.2.4.5.1 Prior to filling, the MEGC shall be inspected t o ensure that it is authorized for the gas to be transported and that the applicable provisions of this Code have been met . 4.2.4.5.2 Elements of MEGCs shall be filled according t o the working pressures, filling ratios and filling provisions specified in packing instruction P200 for the specific gas being filled into each element . In no case shall an MEGC or group of elements be fil led as a unit in excess of the lowest working pressure of any given element . 4.2.4.5.3 MEGCs shall not be filled above their maximum p ermissible gross mass . 4.2.4.5.4 Isolation valves shall be closed after fill ing and remain closed during transport . Toxic gases of class 2 . 3 shall only be transported in MEGCs where eac h element is equipped with an isolation valve . 4.2.4.5.5 The opening(s) for filling shall be closed by c aps or plugs . The leakproofness of the closures and equ ipment shall be verified by the shipper after filling . 4.2.4.5.6 MEGCs shall not be offered for filling: .1 when damaged to such an extent that the integr ity of the pressure receptacles or their structural or service equipment may be affected; .2 unless the pressure receptacles and thei r structural and service equipment have been examined and found to be in good working order; and .3 unless the required certification, rete st, and filling marks are legible . 4.2.4.5.7 Multiple-element gas containers (MEG Cs) shall not be filled or discharged while they remain on board . 4.2.4.6 Filled MEGCs shall not be offered for transp ort; .1 when leaking; .2 when damaged to such an extent that the integr ity of the pressure receptacles or their structural or service equipment may be affected; .3 unless the pressure receptacles and thei r structural and service equipment have been examined and found to be in good working order; and .4 unless the required certification, rete st, and filling marks are legible . 4.2.4.7 Empty MEGCs that have not been cleaned and pur ged shall comply with the same requirements as MEGCs filled with the previous substance . 4.2.5 Portable tank instructions and special provi sions 4.2.5.1 General 4.2.5.1.1 This section includes the portable tank instructions and special provisions applicable to dangerous goods authorized to be transported in portable tanks . Each portable tank instruction is ident ified by an alpha-numeric designation (T1 to T75) . The Dangerous Goods List in chapt er 3 . 2 indicates the portable tank instr uction that shall be used for each substance permitted for transport in a portable tank . When no portable tank instruction app ears in the Dangerous Goods List, transport of the substance in portable tanks is not permitted unless a competent authority approval is granted as set out in 6 . 7 . 1 . 3 . Portable tank special provisions are as signed to specific dangerous goods in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3 . 2 . Each portable tank special provisi on is identified by an alpha-numeric designation (such as TP1) . A listing of the portable tank special prov isions is provided in 4 . 2 . 5 . 3 . Note: The gases authorized for transport in M EGCs are indicated in the column “MEGC” in Tables 1 and 2 of packing instruction P200 in 4 . 1 . 4 . 1 . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 256

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 246 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.2.5.2 P ortable tank instructions 4.2.5.2.1 Portable tank instructions apply to dang erous goods of classes 1 to 9 . Portable tank instructions provide sp ecific information relevant to portable tank provisions applicable to specific substances . These provisions shall be met in addition t o the general provisions in this chapter and chapter 6 . 7 . 4.2.5.2.2 For substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9, the po rtable tank instructions indicate the applicable minimum test pressure, the minimum shell thickness (in reference steel), bottom opening provisions and pressure-relief provisions . In T23, self-reactive substances of class 4 . 1 and class 5 . 2 organic peroxides permitted to be t ransported in portable tanks are listed along with applicable control and emergency temperatures . 4.2.5.2.3 Non-refrigerated liquefied gases are as signed to portable tank instruction T50 . T50 provides the maximum allowable work ing pressures, bottom opening provisions, pressure-relief provisions and degree of filling provisions for non-refrigerated liquefied gases permitted for transport in portable tanks . 4.2.5.2.4 Refrigerated liquefied gases are assign ed to portable tank instruction T75 . 4.2.5.2.5 Determination of the appropriate portab le tank instructions When a specific portable tank instruction is specified in the Dangerous Goods List, additional portable tanks which possess higher test pressures, greater shell thicknesses, more stringent bottom opening and pressure- relief device arrangements may be used . The following guidelines apply to deter mining the appropriate portable tanks which may be used for transport of particular substances: Portable tank instruction specified Portable tank instructions also permitted T1 T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T2 T4, T5, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T3 T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T4 T5, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T5 T10, T14, T19, T20, T22 T6 T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T7 T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T8 T9, T10, T13, T14, T19, T20, T21, T22 T9 T10, T13, T14, T19, T20, T21, T22 T10 T14, T19, T20, T22 T11 T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T12 T14, T16, T18, T19, T20, T22 T13 T14, T19, T20, T21, T22 T14 T19, T20, T22 T15 T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T16 T18, T19, T20, T22 T17 T18 , T19, T20, T21, T22 T18 T19, T20, T22 T19 T20, T22 T20 T22 T21 T22 T22 None T23 None T50 None Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 257

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs 247 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.2.5.2.6 Portable tank instructions Portable tank instructions specify the provisions applicable to a portable tank when used for the transport of specific substances . Portable tank instructions T1 to T22 spec ify the applicable minimum test pressure, the minimum shell thickness (in millimetres of reference steel), and the pressure relief and bottom-opening provisions . T1 – T22 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTIONS T1 – T22 These portable tank instructions ap ply to liquid and solid substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9 . The general provisions of section 4 . 2 . 1 and the requirements of section 6 . 7 . 2 shall be met . Portable tank instruction Minimum test pressur e (bar) Minimum shell thickness (in mm – reference steel) (see 6.7.2.4) Pressure rel ief provisions a (see 6.7.2.8) Bottom opening provisions b (see 6.7.2.6) T1 1 . 5 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 Normal See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 2 T2 1 . 5 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 Normal See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 T3 2 . 65 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 Normal See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 2 T4 2 . 65 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 Normal See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 T5 2 . 65 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 Not allowed T6 4 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 Normal See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 2 T7 4 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 Normal See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 T8 4 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 Normal Not allowed T9 4 6 mm Normal Not allowed T10 4 6 mm See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 Not allowed T11 6 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 Normal See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 T12 6 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 T13 6 6 mm Normal Not allowed T14 6 6 mm See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 Not allowed T15 10 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 Normal See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 T16 10 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 T17 10 6 mm Normal See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 T18 10 6 mm See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 T19 10 6 mm See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 Not allowed T20 10 8 mm See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 Not allowed T21 10 10 mm Normal Not allowed T22 10 10 mm See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 Not allowed a When the word “Normal” is indicated, all the provisions of 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 apply except for 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 . b When this column indicates “not allowed”, bottom openings are not permitted when the substance to be transported is a liquid (see 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 1) . When the substance to be transported is a sol id at all temperatures encountered under normal conditions of transport, bottom openings conforming to the provisions of 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 2 are authorized . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 258

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 248 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 T23 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T23 This portable tank instruction applie s to self-reactive substances of class 4 . 1 and organic peroxides of class 5 . 2 . The general provisions of 4 . 2 . 1 and the provisions of 6 . 7 . 2 shall be met . The provisions specific to self-reacti ve substances of class 4 . 1 and organic peroxides of class 5 . 2 in 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 shall also be met . The formulations listed below may also be t ransported packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P520 of 4 . 1 . 4 . 1, with the same control and emergency tempe ratures, if applicable . UN No. Substance Minimum test pressure (bar) Minim um shell thickness (mm – reference steel) Bottom opening require- ments Pressure relief require- ments Degree of filling Control temper - ature Emergency temperature 3109 ORGANIC PERO XIDE TYPE F, LIQUID tert -Butyl hydroperoxide,* not more than 72% with water Cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 90% in diluent type A Di- tert -butyl peroxide, not more than 32% in diluent type A Isopropyl cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent type A p -Menthyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent type A Pinanyl hydroperoxide, not more than 56% in diluent type A 4 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 2, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 6, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 7, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 8 See 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 13 3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID Dicumyl peroxide † 4 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 2, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 6, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 7, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 8 See 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 13 3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID, TEM PERATURE CONTROLLED 4 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 2, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 6, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 7, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 8 See 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 13 ‡ ‡ tert -Amyl peroxyneodecan oate, not more than 47% in diluent type A - 10 ° C - 5 ° C tert -B utyl peroxyacetate, not more than 32% in diluent type B + 30 ° C + 35 ° C tert -Butyl peroxy-2-ethyl- hexanoate, not more than 32% in diluent type B + 15 ° C + 20 ° C tert -Butyl peroxypivalate, not more than 27% in diluent type B + 5 ° C + 10 ° C tert -Butyl peroxy-3,5,5- trimethylhexanoate, not more than 32% in diluent type B + 35 ° C + 40 ° C Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide, not more than 38% in diluent type A or type B 0 ° C + 5 ° C Peroxyacetic acid, distilled, stabilized § + 30 ° C + 35 ° C 3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 2, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 6, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 7, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 8 See 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 13 ‡ ‡ * Provided that steps have been taken to achieve the safety equivalence of 65% tert -butyl hydroperoxide and 35% water . † Maximum quantity per portable tank: 2,000 kg . ‡ As approved by the competent authority . § Formulation derived from distillation of peroxyacetic acid originating from peroxyacetic acid in concentration of not more than 41% with water, total active oxygen (peroxyacetic acid + H 2 O 2 ) ≤ 9 . 5%, which fulfils the criteria of 2 . 5 . 3 . 3 . 2 . 6 . “CORROSIVE” subsidiary hazard placa rd required (Model No . 8, see 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2) . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 259

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs 249 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 T23 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T23 UN No. Substance Minimum test pressure (bar) M inimum shell thickness (mm – reference steel) Bottom opening require- ments Pressure relief require- ments Degree of filling Control temper - ature Emergency temperature 3229 SELF-REACTI VE LIQUID TYPE F 4 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 2, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 6, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 7, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 8 See 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 13 3230 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE F 4 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 2, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 6, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 7, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 8 See 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 13 3239 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE F, TEMPER ATURE CONTROLLED 4 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 2, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 6, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 7, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 8 See 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 13 * * 3240 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 See 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 2, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 6, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 7, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 8 See 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 13 * * * As approved by the competent authority . T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T50 This portable tank instruction applie s to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos . 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505) . The general provisions of 4 . 2 . 2 and the provisions of 6 . 7 . 3 shall be met . UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied gases Maxim um allowable working pressure (bar) Small; Bare; Sunshield; Insulated respectively a Openings below liquid level Pressure relief provisions b (see 6.7.3.7) Maximum filling ratio (kg/L) 1005 Ammonia, anhydrous 29 . 0 25 . 7 22 . 0 19 . 7 Allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 0 . 53 1009 Bromotrifluoromethane (Refriger ant gas R 13B1) 38 . 0 34 . 0 30 . 0 27 . 5 Allowed Normal 1 . 13 1010 Butadienes, stabilized 7 . 5 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 55 1010 Butadienes and hydrocarbon mixtur e, stabilized with more than 40% butadienes See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed Normal See 4 . 2 . 2 . 7 1011 Butane 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 51 1012 Butylene 8 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 53 a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1 . 5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a she ll with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre without insulation or sun shield ( see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with sun shield (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with insulation (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); (see definition of “Design referenc e temperature” in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1) . b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 is not required . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 260

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 250 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50 UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied gases Max imum allowable working pressure (bar) Small; Bare; Sunshield; Insulated respectively a Openings below liquid level Pressure relief provisions b (see 6.7.3.7) Maximum filling ratio (kg/L) 1017 Chlorine 19 . 0 17 . 0 15 . 0 13 . 5 Not allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 1 . 25 1018 Chlorodifluoromethane (Refrigera nt gas R 22) 26 . 0 24 . 0 21 . 0 19 . 0 Allowed Normal 1 . 03 1020 Chloropentafluoroethane (Refriger ant gas R 115) 23 . 0 20 . 0 18 . 0 16 . 0 Allowed Normal 1 . 06 1021 1-Chloro-1,2,2,2- tetrafluoroethane ( Refrigerant gas R 124) 10 . 3 9 . 8 7 . 9 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 1 . 20 1027 Cyclopropane 18 . 0 16 . 0 14 . 5 13 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 53 1028 Dichlorodifluoromethane (Refrig erant gas R 12) 16 . 0 15 . 0 13 . 0 11 . 5 Allowed Normal 1 . 15 1029 Dichlorofluoromethane (Refrige rant gas R 21) 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 1 . 23 1030 1,1-Difluoroethane (Refrigerant g as R 152a) 16 . 0 14 . 0 12 . 4 11 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 79 1032 Dimethylamine, anhydrous 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 59 1033 Dimethyl ether 15 . 5 13 . 8 12 . 0 10 . 6 Allowed Normal 0 . 58 1036 Ethylamine 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 61 1037 Ethyl chloride 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 80 1040 Ethylene oxide with nitrogen up to a tota l pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar) at 50 ° C – – – 10 . 0 Not allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 0 . 78 1041 Ethylene oxide and carbon dioxide mix ture with more than 9% but not more than 87% ethylene oxide See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed Normal See 4 . 2 . 2 . 7 a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1 . 5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a she ll with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre without insulation or sun shield ( see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with sun shield (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with insulation (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); (see definition of “Design referenc e temperature” in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1) . b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 is not required . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 261

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs 251 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50 UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied gases Max imum allowable working pressure (bar) Small; Bare; Sunshield; Insulated respectively a Openings below liquid level Pressure relief provisions b (see 6.7.3.7) Maximum filling ratio (kg/L) 1055 Isobutylene 8 . 1 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 52 1060 Methylacetylene and propadiene mixtu re, stabilized 28 . 0 24 . 5 22 . 0 20 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 43 1061 Methylamine, anhydrous 10 . 8 9 . 6 7 . 8 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 58 1062 Methyl bromide with not more than 2% chlo ropicrin 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Not allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 1 . 51 1063 Methyl chloride (Refrigerant gas R4 0) 14 . 5 12 . 7 11 . 3 10 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 81 1064 Methyl mercaptan 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Not allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 0 . 78 1067 Dinitrogen tetroxide 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Not allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 1 . 30 1075 Petroleum gas, liquefied See MAWP defin ition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed Normal See 4 . 2 . 2 . 7 1077 Propylene 28 . 0 24 . 5 22 . 0 20 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 43 1078 Refrigerant gas, N . O . S . See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed Normal See 4 . 2 . 2 . 7 1079 Sulphur dioxide 11 . 6 10 . 3 8 . 5 7 . 6 Not allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 1 . 23 1082 Trifluorochloroethylene, stabilize d (Refrigerant gas R 1113) 17 . 0 15 . 0 13 . 1 11 . 6 Not allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 1 . 13 1083 Trimethylamine, anhydrous 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 56 1085 Vinyl bromide, stabilized 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 1 . 37 1086 Vinyl chloride, stabilized 10 . 6 9 . 3 8 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 81 a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1 . 5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a she ll with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre without insulation or sun shield ( see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with sun shield (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with insulation (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); (see definition of “Design referenc e temperature” in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1) . b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 is not required . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 262

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 252 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50 UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied gases Max imum allowable working pressure (bar) Small; Bare; Sunshield; Insulated respectively a Openings below liquid level Pressure relief provisions b (see 6.7.3.7) Maximum filling ratio (kg/L) 1087 Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 67 1581 Chloropicrin and methyl bromide mixtur e with more than 2% chloropicrin 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Not allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 1 . 51 1582 Chloropicrin and methyl chloride mixtu re 19 . 2 16 . 9 15 . 1 13 . 1 Not allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 0 . 81 1858 Hexafluoropropylene (Refrigerant ga s R 1216) 19 . 2 16 . 9 15 . 1 13 . 1 Allowed Normal 1 . 11 1912 Methyl chloride and methylene chlori de mixture 15 . 2 13 . 0 11 . 6 10 . 1 Allowed Normal 0 . 81 1958 1,2-Dichloro-1,1,2,2- tetrafluoroetha ne (Refrigerant gas R 114) 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 1 . 30 1965 Hydrocarbon gas, mixture liquefied, N . O . S . See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed Normal See 4 . 2 . 2 . 7 1969 Isobutane 8 . 5 7 . 5 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 49 1973 Chlorodifluoromethane and chloropen tafluoroethane mixture with fixed boiling point, with approximately 49% chlorodifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas R 502) 28 . 3 25 . 3 22 . 8 20 . 3 Allowed Normal 1 . 05 1974 Chlorodifluorobromomethane (Refri gerant gas R 12B1) 7 . 4 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 1 . 61 1976 Octafluorocyclobutane (Refrige rant gas RC 318) 8 . 8 7 . 8 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 1 . 34 1978 Propane 22 . 5 20 . 4 18 . 0 16 . 5 Allowed Normal 0 . 42 1983 1-Chloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane (R efrigerant gas R 133a) 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 1 . 18 2035 1,1,1-Trifluoroethane (Refrige rant gas R 143a) 31 . 0 27 . 5 24 . 2 21 . 8 Allowed Normal 0 . 76 a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1 . 5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a she ll with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre without insulation or sun shield ( see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with sun shield (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with insulation (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); (see definition of “Design referenc e temperature” in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1) . b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 is not required . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 263

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs 253 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50 UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied gases Max imum allowable working pressure (bar) Small; Bare; Sunshield; Insulated respectively a Openings below liquid level Pressure relief provisions b (see 6.7.3.7) Maximum filling ratio (kg/L) 2424 Octafluoropropane (Refrigerant gas R 218) 23 . 1 20 . 8 18 . 6 16 . 6 Allowed Normal 1 . 07 2517 1-Chloro-1,1-difluoroethane (Ref rigerant gas R 142b) 8 . 9 7 . 8 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 0 . 99 2602 Dichlorodifluoromethane and difluor oethane azeotropic mixture with approximately 74% dichlorodifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas R 500) 20 . 0 18 . 0 16 . 0 14 . 5 Allowed Normal 1 . 01 3057 Trifluoroacetyl chloride 14 . 6 12 . 9 11 . 3 9 . 9 Not allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 1 . 17 3070 Ethylene oxide and dichlorodifluorome thane mixture, with not more than 12 . 5% ethylene oxide 14 . 0 12 . 0 11 . 0 9 . 0 Allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 1 . 09 3153 Perfluoro(methyl vinyl ether) 14 . 3 13 . 4 11 . 2 10 . 2 Allowed Normal 1 . 14 3159 1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane (Refr igerant gas R 134a) 17 . 7 15 . 7 13 . 8 12 . 1 Allowed Normal 1 . 04 3161 Liquefied gas, flammable, N . O . S . See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed Normal See 4 . 2 . 2 . 7 3163 Liquefied gas, N . O . S . See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed Normal See 4 . 2 . 2 . 7 3220 Pentafluoroethane (Refrigerant gas R 1 25) 34 . 4 30 . 8 27 . 5 24 . 5 Allowed Normal 0 . 87 3252 Difluoromethane (Refrigerant gas R 32) 43 . 0 39 . 0 34 . 4 30 . 5 Allowed Normal 0 . 78 3296 Heptafluoropropane (Refrigerant g as R 227) 16 . 0 14 . 0 12 . 5 11 . 0 Allowed Normal 1 . 20 3297 Ethylene oxide and chlorotetrafluoroeth ane mixture, with not more than 8 . 8% ethylene oxide 8 . 1 7 . 0 7 . 0 7 . 0 Allowed Normal 1 . 16 3298 Ethylene oxide and pentafluoroethane mi xture, with not more than 7 . 9% ethylene oxide 25 . 9 23 . 4 20 . 9 18 . 6 Allowed Normal 1 . 02 3299 Ethylene oxide and tetrafluoroethane mix ture, with not more than 5 . 6% ethylene oxide 16 . 7 14 . 7 12 . 9 11 . 2 Allowed Normal 1 . 03 a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1 . 5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a she ll with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre without insulation or sun shield ( see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with sun shield (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with insulation (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); (see definition of “Design referenc e temperature” in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1) . b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 is not required . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 264

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 254 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50 UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied gases Max imum allowable working pressure (bar) Small; Bare; Sunshield; Insulated respectively a Openings below liquid level Pressure relief provisions b (see 6.7.3.7) Maximum filling ratio (kg/L) 3318 Ammonia solution, relative density less than 0 . 880 at 15 ° C in water, with more than 50% ammonia See MA WP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 See 4 . 2 . 2 . 7 3337 Refrigerant gas R 404A 31 . 6 28 . 3 25 . 3 22 . 5 Allowed Normal 0 . 82 3338 Refrigerant gas R 407A 31 . 3 28 . 1 25 . 1 22 . 4 Allowed Normal 0 . 94 3339 Refrigerant gas R 407B 33 . 0 29 . 6 26 . 5 23 . 6 Allowed Normal 0 . 93 3340 Refrigerant gas R 407C 29 . 9 26 . 8 23 . 9 21 . 3 Allowed Normal 0 . 95 3500 Chemical under pressure, n . o . s . See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 TP4 c 3501 Chemical under pressure, flammable, n . o . s . See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 TP4 c 3502 Chemical under pressure, toxic, n . o . s . See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 TP4 c 3503 Chemical under pressure, corrosive, n . o . s . See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 TP4 c 3504 Chemical under pressure, flammable, toxic, n . o . s . See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 TP4 c 3505 Chemical under pressure, flammable, corrosive, n . o . s . See MAWP definition in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 Allowed See 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 TP4 c a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1 . 5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a she ll with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre without insulation or sun shield ( see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with sun shield (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shel l with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 metre with insulation (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12); (see definition of “Design referenc e temperature” in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1) . b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 3 is not required . c For UN Nos . 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, the deg ree of filling shall be considered instead of the maximum filling ratio . T75 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T75 This portable tank instruction appli es to refrigerated liquefied gases . The general provisions of 4 . 2 . 3 and 6 . 7 . 4 shall be met . 4.2.5.3 P ortable tank special provisions Portable tank special provisions are assigned to certain substances to indicate provisions which are in addition to or in lieu of those provided by the portable tank instructions or the provisions in chapter 6 . 7 . Portable tank special provisions are identified by an alpha-numeric designation beginning with the letters “TP” (tank provision) and are assigned to specific substances in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3 . 2 . The following is a list of the portable tank sp ecial provisions: TP1 The degree of filling prescribed in 4 . 2 . 1 . 9 . 2 shall not be exceeded . TP2 The degree of filling prescribed in 4 . 2 . 1 . 9 . 3 shall not be exceeded . TP3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids t ransported above their melting points and for elevated temperature liquids shall be determined in accordance with 4 . 2 . 1 . 9 . 5 . TP4 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90% or, al ternatively, any other value approved by the competent authority (see 4 . 2 . 1 . 16 . 2) . TP5 The degree of filling prescribed in 4 . 2 . 3 . 6 shall be met . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 265

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs 255 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 TP6 To prevent the tank bursting in any event, including fire engulfment, it shall be provided with pressure- relief devices which are adequate in rela tion to the capacity of the tank and to the nature of the substance transported . The device shall also be compatible with th e substance . TP7 Air shall be eliminated from the vapour spac e by nitrogen or other means . TP8 The test pressure for the portable tank may be r educed to 1 . 5 bar when the flashpoint of the substances tra nsported is greater than 0 ° C . TP9 A substance under this description shal l only be transported in a portable tank under an approval granted by the competent authority . TP10 A lead lining, not less than 5 mm thick, which sha ll be tested annually, or another suitable lining material approved by the competent authority is required . A portable tank may be offered for transpor t after the date of expiry of the last lining inspection for a period not to exceed three months beyond that date, after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling . TP11 [Reserved] TP12 [Reserved] TP13 Self-contained breathing apparatus s hall be provided when this substance is transported, unless no self-contained breathing apparatus, as required by SOLAS regulation II-2/19 (II-2/54), is on board . TP14 [Reserved] TP15 [Reserved] TP16 The tank shall be fitted with a special device to p revent under-pressure and excess pressure during normal transport conditions . This device shall be approved by the compet ent authority . Pressure- relief provisions are as indi cated in 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 to prevent crystallization of the produc t in the pressure- relief valve . TP17 Only inorganic non-combustible mater ials shall be used for thermal insulation of the tank . TP18 Temperature shall be maintained between 18 ° C an d 40 ° C . Portable tanks containing solidified m ethacrylic acid shall not be reheated during transport . TP19 At the time of construction, the minimum she ll thickness determined according to 6 . 7 . 3 . 4 shall be increased by 3 mm as a corrosion allowa nce . Shell thickness shall be verified ultras onically at intervals midway between periodic hydraulic tests and shall never be lower than the minimum shell thickness determined according to 6 . 7 . 3 . 4 . TP20 This substance shall only be transported i n insulated tanks under a nitrogen blanket . TP21 The shell thickness shall be not les s than 8 mm . Tanks shall be hydraulically tes ted and internally inspected at intervals not exceeding 2 . 5 years . TP22 Lubricant for joints or other devices shal l be oxygen-compatible . TP23 [Reserved] TP24 The portable tank may be fitted with a device loc ated, under maximum filling conditions, in the vapour space of the shell to prevent the build-up of excess pressure due to the slow decom position of the substance transported . This device shall also prevent an unaccep table amount of leakage of liquid in the case of overturning or entry of foreign matter into the tank . This device shall be approved by the compet ent authority or its authorized body . TP25 Sulphur trioxide 99 . 95% pure and above may be transported in tanks w ithout an inhibitor provided that it is maintained at a temperature equal to or above 32 . 5 ° C . TP26 When transported under heated conditio ns, the heating device shall be fitted outside the shell . For UN 3176, this provision only applies wh en the substance reacts dangerously with water . TP27 A portable tank having a minimum test pressu re of 4 bar may be used if it is shown that a test pressure of 4 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition in 6 . 7 . 2 . 1 . TP28 A portable tank having a minimum test pressu re of 2 . 65 bar may be used if it is shown that a test pressure o f 2 . 65 bar or less is acceptable according to the te st pressure definition in 6 . 7 . 2 . 1 . TP29 A portable tank having a minimum test pressu re of 1 . 5 bar may be used if it is shown that a test pressure of 1 . 5 bar or less is acceptable according to the tes t pressure definition in 6 . 7 . 2 . 1 . TP30 This substance shall be transported in ins ulated tanks . TP31 This substance shall be transported in tan ks in solid state . TP32 For UN Nos . 0331, 0332 and 3375, portable tanks may be us ed subject to the following conditions: . 1 To avoid unnecessary confinement, each po rtable tank constructed of metal shall be fitted with a pressure relief device that may be of the re-closing spring-loaded type, a frangible disc or a fusible element . The set-to-discharge or burst pressur e, as applicable, shall not be greater than 2 . 65 bar for portable tanks with minimum test pr essures greater than 4 bar . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 266

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 256 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) . 2 For UN 3375 only, suitability for transpor t in tanks shall be demonstrated . One method to evaluate this suitability i s test 8 (d) in Test Series 8 (see Manual of Tests and Criteria , part 1, subsection 18 . 7) . . 3 Substances shall not be allowed to remain in t he portable tank for any period that could result in caking . Appropriate measures shall be taken to av oid accumulation and packing of substances in the tank (e . g . cleaning, etc) . TP33 The portable tank instruction assigned f or this substance applies for granular and powdered solids and for solids which are filled and discharged at temperatures above their melting point and which are cooled and transported as a solid mass . For solids which are transported above th eir melting point, see 4 . 2 . 1 . 19 . TP34 Portable tanks need not be subjected to the im pact test in 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 1 if the portable tank is marked “NOT FOR RAIL TRA NSPORT” on the plate specified in 6 . 7 . 4 . 15 . 1 and also in letters at least 10 cm high on both side s of the outer jacket . TP35 Deleted TP36 Fusible elements in the vapour space may be us ed on portable tanks . TP37 Deleted TP38 Deleted TP39 Deleted TP40 Portable tanks shall not be transported wh en connected with spray application equipment . TP41 The 2 . 5-year internal examination may be waive d or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures specified by the competent authority or its authorized body, provided that the portable tank is dedicated to the transport of the organometallic substances to which this tank special provision is assigned . However, this examination is required w hen the conditions of 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 7 are met . TP90 Tanks with bottom openings may be used on shor t international voyages . TP91 Portable tanks with bottom openings may al so be used on long international voyages . 4.2.6 Additional provisions for the use of road tan k vehicles and road gas elements vehicles 4.2.6.1 The tank of a road tank vehicle or the elements of a r oad gas elements vehicle shall be attached to the vehicle during normal operations of filling, discharge and transport . IMO type 4 tanks shall be attached to the ch assis when transported on board ships . Road tank vehicles and road gas elements ve hicles shall not be filled or discharged while they remain on board . A road tank vehicle or road gas elements vehi cle shall be driven on board on its own wheels and be fitted with permanent tie-down attachments for securing on board the ship . 4.2.6.2 Road tank vehicles and road gas elements veh icles shall comply with the provisions of chapter 6 . 8 . IMO type 4, 6, 8 and 9 tanks may be used according t o the provisions of chapter 6 . 8 for short international voyages only . 4.2.6.3 Substances permitted to be transported i n IMO type 9 tanks are assigned special provision 974 . ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 267

257 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 Chapter 4.3 Use of bulk containers Note: Sheeted bulk containers (BK1) shall not be u sed for sea transport, except as indicated in 4 . 3 . 3 . 4.3.1 General provisions 4.3.1.1 This section provides general requirem ents applicable to the use of containers for the transport of solid substances in bulk . Substances shall be transported in bulk c ontainers conforming to the applicable bulk container instruction identified by the letters BK in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List, with the following meaning: BK1: the transport in sheeted bulk containers is permitted; BK2: the transport in closed bulk containers is permitted; BK3: the transport in flexible bulk containers is permitted . The bulk container used shall conform to the p rovisions of chapter 6 . 9 . 4.3.1.2 Except as provided in 4 . 3 . 1 . 3, bulk containers shall only be used when a subs tance is assigned a bulk container code in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List . 4.3.1.3 When a substance is not assigned BK2 or BK3 in col umn 13 of the Dangerous Goods List, interim approval for transport may be issued by the competent authority of the country of origin . The approval shall be included in t he documentation of the consignment and contain, as a minimum, the information normally provided in the bulk container instruction and the conditions under which the substance shall be transported . Appropriate measures should be initia ted by the competent authority to have the assignment included in the Dangerous Goods List . When a substance is not permitted in a BK1 bulk c ontainer, an exemption may be issued in accordance with 7 . 9 . 1 . 4.3.1.4 Substances which may become liquid at temp eratures likely to be encountered during transport are not permitted in bulk containers . 4.3.1.5 Bulk containers shall be siftproof and sha ll be so closed that none of the contents can escape under normal conditions of transport, including the effect of vibration, or by changes of temperature, humidity or pressure . 4.3.1.6 Bulk solids shall be loaded into bulk contai ners and evenly distributed in a manner that minimizes movement that could result in damage to the container or leakage of the dangerous goods . 4.3.1.7 Where venting devices are fitted, they shal l be kept clear and operable . 4.3.1.8 Bulk solids shall not react dangerously wi th the material of the bulk container, gaskets, equipment including lids and tarpaulins, or with protective coatings which are in contact with the contents, or significantly weaken them . Bulk containers shall be so constructed o r adapted that the goods cannot penetrate between wooden floor coverings or come into contact with those parts of the bulk containers that may be affected by the dangerous goods or residues thereof . 4.3.1.9 Before being filled and offered for transpo rt, each bulk container shall be inspected and cleaned to ensure that it does not contain any residue on the interior or exterior that could: – cause a dangerous reaction with the substa nce intended for transport; – detrimentally affect the structural in tegrity of the bulk container; or – affect the dangerous goods retention cap abilities of the bulk container . 4.3.1.10 During transport, no dangerous residue s shall adhere to the outer surfaces of a bulk container . 4.3.1.11 If several closure systems are fitted in seri es, the system which is located nearest to the dangerous goods to be transported shall be closed first before filling . 4.3.1.12 Empty bulk containers that have containe d dangerous goods shall be treated in the same manner as is prescribed in this Code for a filled bulk container, unless adequate measures have been taken to nullify any hazard . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 268

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions 258 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.3.1.13 If bulk containers are used for the carriage o f bulk goods liable to cause a dust explosion, or evolve flammable vapours (e . g . for certain wastes), measures shall be ta ken to exclude sources of ignition and to prevent dangerous electrostatic discharge during transport, loading or unloading of the goods . 4.3.1.14 Substances, for example wastes, which ma y react dangerously with one another and substances of different classes and goods not subject to this Code, which are liable to react dangerously with one another, shall not be mixed together in the same bulk container . Dangerous reactions are: .1 combustion and/or evolution of consider able heat; .2 emission of flammable and/or toxic gases; . 3 formation of corrosive liquids; or .4 formation of unstable substances . 4.3.1.15 Before a bulk container is filled, it shall be vis ually examined to ensure it is structurally serviceable, its interior walls, ceiling and floors are free from protrusions or damage and that any inner liners or substance retaining equipment are free from rips, tears or any damage that would compromise its cargo retention capabilities . “Structurally serviceable” means th e bulk container does not have major defects in its structural components, such as top and bottom side rails, top and bottom end rails, door sill and header, floor cross members, corner posts, and corner fittings in a freight container . Major defects include: .1 bends, cracks or breaks in the structural or s upporting members that affect the integrity of the container; .2 more than one splice or an improper sp lice (such as a lapped splice) in top or bottom end rails or door headers; .3 more than two splices in any one top or bottom sid e rail; .4 any splice in a door sill or corner post; .5 door hinges and hardware that are seized, twi sted, broken, missing, or otherwise inoperative; .6 gaskets and seals that do not seal; .7 any distortion of the overall configurati on great enough to prevent proper alignment of handling equipment, mounting and securing chassis or vehicle, or insertion into ships’ cargo spaces; .8 any damage to lifting attachments or handl ing equipment interface features; or .9 any damage to service or operational equip ment . 4.3.1.16 Before a flexible bulk container is filled it sh all be visually examined to ensure it is structurally serviceable, its textile slings, load-bearing structure straps, body fabric, lock device parts including metal and textile parts are free from protrusions or damage and that inner liners are free from rips, tears or any damage . 4.3.1.16.1 For flexible bulk containers, the period of u se permitted for the transport of dangerous goods shall be two years from the date of manufacture of the flexible bulk container . 4.3.1.16.2 A venting device shall be fitted if a dangerous a ccumulation of gases may develop within the flexible bulk container . The vent shall be so designed that the penetr ation of foreign substances or the ingress of water is prevented under normal conditions of transport . 4.3.2 Additional provisions applicable to bulk goo ds of classes 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.2, 7 and 8 4.3.2.1 Bulk goods of class 4.2 Only closed bulk containers (BK2) may be used . The total mass carried in a bulk container sh all be such that its spontaneous ignition temperature is greater than 55 ° C . 4.3.2.2 Bulk goods of class 4.3 Only closed bulk containers (BK2) may be used . These goods shall be transported in bulk co ntainers which are waterproof . 4.3.2.3 Bulk goods of class 5.1 Bulk containers shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any other incompatible material . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 269

Chapter 4.3 – Use of bulk containers 259 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 4 4.3.2.4 Bulk goods of class 6.2 4.3.2.4.1 Transport in bulk containers of animal mat erial of class 6.2 Animal material containing infectious substances (UN Nos . 2814, 2900 and 3373) is authorized for t ransport in bulk containers provided the following conditions are met: .1 Closed bulk containers, and their openings, shall be leakproof by design or by the fitting of a suitable liner . .2 The animal material shall be thoroughly treated with an appropriate disinfectant before loading prior to transport . .3 Closed bulk containers shall not be re-use d until they have been thoroughly cleaned and disinfected . Note: Additional provisions may be requ ired by appropriate national health authorities . 4.3.2.4.2 Bulk wastes of class 6.2 (UN 3291) .1 only closed bulk containers (BK2) shall be permitted; .2 closed bulk containers, and their openin gs, shall be leakproof by design . These bulk containers shall have non-p orous interior surfaces and shall be free from cracks or other features that could damage packagings inside, impede disinfection or permit inadvertent release; .3 wastes of UN 3291 shall be contained within th e closed bulk container in UN type tested and approved sealed leakproof plastics bags tested for solids of packing group II and marked in accordance with 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 . Such plastics bags shall be capable of pass ing the tests for tear and impact resistance according to ISO 7765-1:1988, Plastics film and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1: Staircase methods, and ISO 6383-2:1983, Plastics – Film and sheeting – Determination of tear resistance – Part 2 : Elmendorf method . Each bag shall have an impact resistance of a t least 165 g and a tear resistance of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the bag . The maximum net mass of each plastics bag sha ll be 30 kg; .4 single articles exceeding 30 kg such as soi led mattresses may be transported without the need for a plastics bag when authorized by the competent authority; .5 wastes of UN 3291 which contain liquids shal l only be transported in plastics bags containing sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid without it spilling in the bulk container; .6 wastes of UN 3291 containing sharp objects s hall only be transported in UN type tested and approved rigid packagings meeting the provisions of packing instructions P621, IBC620 or LP621; .7 rigid packagings specified in packing ins tructions P621, IBC620 or LP621 may also be used . They shall be properly secured to prevent d amage during normal conditions of transport . Wastes transported in rigid packaging s and plastics bags together in the same closed bulk container shall be adequately segregated from each other, e . g . by suitable rigid barriers or div iders, mesh nets or otherwise securing the packagings, such that they prevent damage to the packagings during normal conditions of transport; .8 wastes of UN 3291 in plastics bags shall not be co mpressed in a closed bulk container in such a way that bags may be rendered no longer leakproof; .9 the closed bulk container shall be inspected for leakage or spillage after each journey . If any wastes of UN 3291 have leaked or been spi lled in the closed bulk container, it shall not be re-used until after it has been thoroughly cleaned and, if necessary, disinfected or decontaminated with an appropriate agent . No other goods shall be transported toget her with UN 3291 other than medical or veterinary wastes . Any such other wastes transported in the sa me closed bulk container shall be inspected for possible contamination . 4.3.2.5 Bulk material of class 7 For the transport of unpackaged radioactive material, see 4 . 1 . 9 . 2 . 4 . 4.3.2.6 Bulk goods of class 8 Only closed bulk containers (BK2) may be used . These goods shall be transported in bulk co ntainers which are watertight . 4.3.3 Additional provisions for the use of sheete d bulk containers (BK1) 4.3.3.1 Sheeted bulk containers (BK1) shall not be u sed for sea transport, except for UN 3077 not meeting the criteria of 2 . 9 . 3 transported on short international voy ages . 4.3.4 Additional provisions for the use of flexibl e bulk containers (BK3) 4.3.4.1 Flexible bulk containers are only allowe d in the holds of general cargo ships . They are not allowed to be transported in car go transport units . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 270

4 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 271

5 PART 5 C ONSIGNMENT PROCEDURES Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 272

5 5 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 273

263 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 5 Chapter 5.1 General provisions 5.1.1 Application and general provisions 5.1.1.1 This part sets forth the provisions for dang erous goods consignments relative to authorization of consignments and advance notifications, marking, labelling, documentation (by manual, electronic data processing (EDP) or electronic data interchange (EDI) techniques) and placarding . 5.1.1.2 Except as otherwise provided in this Code, n o person may offer dangerous goods for transport unless those goods are properly marked, labelled, placarded, described and certified on a transport document, and otherwise in a condition for transport as required by this part . Note: In accordance with the GHS, a GHS pictogr am not required by this Code should only appear in trans - port as part of a complete GHS label and not independently (see GHS 1 . 4 . 10 . 4 . 4) . 5.1.1.3 A carrier shall not accept dangerous goods f or transport unless: .1 A copy of the dangerous goods transport docu ment and other documents or information as required by the provisions of this Code are provided; or .2 The information applicable to the danger ous goods is provided in electronic form . 5.1.1.4 The information applicable to the danger ous goods shall accompany the dangerous goods to final destination . This information may be on the dangerous goo ds transport document or may be on another document . This information shall be given to the cons ignee when the dangerous goods are delivered . 5.1.1.5 When the information applicable to the dan gerous goods is given to the carrier in electronic form, the information shall be available to the carrier at all times during transport to final destination . The information shall be able to be produce d without delay as a paper document . 5.1.1.6 The purpose of indicating the proper shipp ing name (see 3 . 1 . 2 . 1 and 3 . 1 . 2 . 2) and the UN number of a substance, material or a rticle offered for transport and, in the case of a marine pollutant, of the addition of “marine pollutant” on documentation accompanying the consignment, and of marking the proper shipping name in accordance with 5 . 2 . 1 on the package, including IBCs containin g the goods, is to ensure that the substance, material or article can be readily identified during transport . This ready identification is particula rly important in the case of an accident involving these goods, in order to determine what emergency procedures are necessary to deal properly with the situation and, in the case of marine pollutants, for the master to comply with the reporting requirements of Protocol I of MARPOL . 5.1.2 Use of overpacks and unit loads 5.1.2.1 An overpack and unit load shall be marked with t he proper shipping name and the UN number and marked and labelled, as required for packages by chapter 5 . 2, for each item of dangerous goods containe d in the overpack or unit load unless marks and labels representative of all dangerous goods in the overpack or unit load are visible . An overpack, in addition, shall be mark ed with the word “OVERPACK” unless marks and labels representative of all dangerous goods, as required by chapter 5 . 2, in the overpack are visible, except as requ ired in 5 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 12 . The lettering of the “OVERPACK” mark shal l be at least 12 mm high . 5.1.2.2 The individual packages comprising a unit load or an overpack shall be marked and labelled in accordance with chapter 5 . 2 . Each package of dangerous goods contain ed in the unit load or overpack shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Code . The “OVERPACK” mark on an overpack is an indi cation of compliance with this provision . The intended function of each package shall not be impaired by the unit load or overpack . 5.1.2.3 Each package bearing package orientati on marks as prescribed in 5 . 2 . 1 . 7 . 1 of this Code and which is overpacked, placed in a unit load or used as an inner packaging in a large packaging shall be oriented in accordance with such marks . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 274

264 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 5.1.3 Empty uncleaned packagings or units 5.1.3.1 Other than for class 7, a packaging, includi ng an IBC, which previously contained dangerous goods shall be identified, marked, labelled and placarded as required for those dangerous goods unless steps such as cleaning, purging of vapours or refilling with a non-dangerous substance are taken to nullify any hazard . 5.1.3.2 Freight containers, tanks, IBCs, as well a s other packagings and overpacks, used for the transport of radioactive material shall not be used for the transport of other goods unless decontaminated below the level of 0 . 4 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters and 0 . 04 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters . 5.1.3.3 Empty cargo transport units still c ontaining residues of dangerous goods, or loaded with empty uncleaned packages or empty uncleaned bulk containers, shall comply with the provisions applicable to the goods last contained in the unit, packagings or bulk container . 5.1.4 Mixed packing When two or more dangerous goods are packed within the same outer packaging, the package shall be labelled and marked as required for each substance . Subsidiary hazard labels need not be appl ied if the hazard is already represented by a primary hazard label . 5.1.5 General provisions for class 7 5.1.5.1 Approval of shipments and notification 5.1.5 .1.1 General In addition to the approval of package designs described in chapter 6 . 4, multilateral shipment approval is als o required in certain circumstances (5 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 2 and 5 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 3) . In some circumstances it is also necessar y to notify competent authorities of a shipment (5 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 4) . 5.1.5.1.2 Shipment approvals Multilateral approval shall be required for: .1 the shipment of Type B(M) packages not confo rming with the provisions of 6 . 4 . 7 . 5 or designed to allow controlled intermitte nt venting; .2 the shipment of Type B(M) packages contain ing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3,000 A 1 or 3,000 A 2 , as appropriate, or 1,000 TBq, whichever is the lower; .3 the shipment of packages containing fissi le materials if the sum of the criticality safety indexes of the packages in a single freight container or in a single conveyance exceeds 50 . Excluded from this requirement shall be s hipments by seagoing vessels, if the sum of the criticality safety indexes does not exceed 50 for any hold, compartment or defined deck area and the distance of 6 m between groups of packages or overpacks as required in table 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 3 . 4 is met; .4 radiation protection programmes for s hipments by special use vessels in accordance with 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 8; and .5 the shipment of SCO-III . except that a competent authority may auth orize transport into or through its country without shipment approval, by a specific provision in its design approval (see 5 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 1) . 5.1.5.1.3 Shipment approval by special arrangeme nt Provisions may be approved by a competent authority under which a consignment which does not satisfy all of the applicable provisions of this Code may be transported under special arrangement (see 1 . 5 . 4) . 5.1.5.1.4 Notifications Notification to competent authorities is required as follows: .1 Before the first shipment of any pack age requiring competent authority approval, the consignor shall ensure that copies of each applicable competent authority certificate applying to that package design have been submitted to the competent authority of the country of origin of the shipment and to the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be transported . The consignor is not required to await an ack nowledgement from the competent authority, nor is the competent authority required to make such acknowledgement of receipt of the certificate . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 275

265 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.1 – General provisions 5 .2 For each of the following types of shipments: .1 Type C packages containing radioactive mate rial with an activity greater than 3,000 A 1 or 3,000 A 2 , as appropriate, or 1,000 TBq, whichever is the lower; .2 Type B(U) packages containing radioactive m aterial with an activity greater than 3,000 A 1 or 3,000 A 2 , as appropriate, or 1,000 TBq, whichever is the lower; .3 Type B(M) packages; .4 shipment under special arrangement; the consignor shall notify the competent a uthority of the country of origin of the shipment and the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be transported . This notification shall be in the possessi on of each competent authority prior to the commencement of the shipment, and preferably at least 7 days in advance . .3 The consignor is not required to send a separa te notification if the required information has been included in the application for approval of shipment (see 6 . 4 . 23 . 2) . .4 The consignment notification shall include: .1 sufficient information to enable the ident ification of the package or packages, including all applicable certificate numbers and identification marks; .2 information on the date of shipment, the exp ected date of arrival and proposed routeing; .3 the names of the radioactive material or nucl ides; .4 descriptions of the physical and chemica l forms of the radioactive material, or whether it is special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material; and .5 the maximum activity of the radioac tive contents during transport, expressed in units of becquerels (Bq) with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1 . 2 . 2 . 1) . For fissile material, the mass of fissile mat erial (or of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in units of grams (g), or multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity . 5.1.5.2 Certificates issued by competent auth ority 5.1.5.2.1 Certificates issued by the competent auth ority are required for the following: .1 designs for: .1 special form radioactive material; .2 low dispersible radioactive material; .3 fissile material excepted under 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6; .4 packages containing 0 . 1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride; .5 packages containing fissile material un less excepted by 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5, 6 . 4 . 11 . 2 or 6 . 4 . 11 . 3; .6 Type B(U) packages and Type B(M) packages; .7 Type C packages; .2 special arrangements; .3 certain shipments (see 5 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 2); .4 determination of the basic radionuclid e values referred to in 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 1 for individual radionuclides which are not listed in table 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 1 (see 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 1); .5 alternative activity limits for an exemp t consignment of instruments or articles (see 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2) . The certificates shall confirm that t he applicable provisions are met, and for design approvals shall attribute to the design an identification mark . The certificates of approval for the packag e design and the shipment may be combined into a single certificate . Certificates and applications for these c ertificates shall be in accordance with the provisions in 6 . 4 . 23 . 5.1.5.2.2 The consignor shall be in possession of a copy o f each applicable certificate . 5.1.5.2.3 For package designs where it is not required t hat a competent authority issue a certificate of approval, the consignor shall, on request, make available, for inspection by the relevant competent authority, documentary evidence of the compliance of the package design with all the applicable provisions . 5.1.5.3 Determination of transport index (TI) and c riticality safety index (CSI) 5.1.5.3.1 The transport index (TI) for a package, over pack or freight container, or for unpackaged LSA - I, SCO-I or SCO-III, shall be the number deriv ed in accordance with the following procedure: .1 determine the dose rate in units of millisie verts per hour (mSv/h) at a distance of 1 m from the external surfaces of the package, overpack, freight container, or unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I or SCO III . The value △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 276

266 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 determined shall be multiplied by 100 and the resulting number is the transport index . For uranium and thorium ores and their con centrates, the maximum dose rate at any point 1 m from the external surface of the load may be taken as: 0 . 4 mSv/h for ores and physical concentrates of uran ium and thorium; 0 . 3 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of thorium; 0 . 02 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of uranium, ot her than uranium hexafluoride; .2 for tanks, freight containers and u npackaged LSA - I, SCO-I and SCO-III, the value dete rmined in 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . 1 above shall be multiplied by the appropria te factor from table 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 1; .3 the value obtained in 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . 1 and 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . 2 above shall be rounded up to the first decimal pl ace (e . g . 1 . 13 becomes 1 . 2), except that a value of 0 . 05 or less may be considered as zero and the resul ting number is the TI value (without unit) . Table 5.1.5.3.1 – Multiplication facto rs for tanks, freight containers and unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I and SCO-III Size of load a Multiplication factor size of load ≤ 1 m 2 1 1 m 2 < size of load ≤ 5 m 2 2 5 m 2 < size of load ≤ 20 m 2 3 20 m 2 < size of load 10 a Largest cross-sectional area of the load being measured . 5.1.5.3.2 The TI for each rigid overpack, freight cont ainer or conveyance shall be determined as the sum of the TIs of all the packages contained therein . For a shipment from a single consi gnor, the consignor may determine the TI by direct measurement of dose rate . The TI for a non-rigid overpack shall be deter mined only as the sum of the TIs of all the packages within the overpack . 5.1.5.3.3 The criticality safety index for each over pack or freight container shall be determined as the sum of the CSIs of all the packages contained . The same procedure shall be followed for de termining the total sum of the CSIs in a consignment or aboard a conveyance . 5.1.5.3.4 Packages, overpacks and freight contai ners shall be assigned to either category I – WHITE, II – YELLOW or III – YELLOW in accordance with the conditions specified in table 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 4 and with the following requirements: .1 for a package, overpack or freight contain er, both the transport index and the surface dose rate conditions shall be taken into account in determining which is the appropriate category . Where the transport index satisfies the co ndition for one category but the surface dose rate satisfies the condition for a different category, the package, overpack or freight container shall be assigned to the higher category . For this purpose, category I – WHITE shall b e regarded as the lowest category; .2 the TI shall be determined following the pro cedures specified in 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 and 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 2; .3 if the surface dose rate is greater than 2 mSv/ h, the package or overpack shall be transported under exclusive use and under the provisions of 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 6 or 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 7, as appropriate; .4 a package transported under a special arra ngement shall be assigned to category III – YELLOW except under the provisions of 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 5; .5 an overpack or freight container which con tains packages transported under special arrangement shall be assigned to category III – YELLOW except under the provisions of 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 5 . △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 277

267 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.1 – General provisions 5 Table 5.1.5.3.4 – Categories of packages, overpacks and freight containers Conditions Transport index Maximum dose rate at any point on external surface Category 0 a Not more than 0 . 005 mSv/h I – WHITE More than 0 but not more than 1 a More than 0 . 005 mSv/h but not more than 0 . 5 mSv/h II – YELLOW More than 1 but not more than 10 M ore than 0 . 5 mSv/h but not more than 2 mSv/h III – YELLOW More t han 10 More than 2 mSv/h but not more than 10 mSv/h III – YELLOW b a If the measured TI is not greater than 0 . 05, the value quoted may be zero in accordance wi th 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . 3 . b Shall also be transported under “exclusive use” except for freight containers (see table 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 3 . 1) . 5.1.5.3.5 In all cases of international transport of p ackages requiring competent authority approval of design or shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, the categorization shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design . 5.1.5.4 Specific provisions for excepted package s of radioactive material of class 7 5.1.5.4.1 Excepted packages of radioactive mater ial of class 7 shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with: .1 the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”; .2 an identification of either the consignor o r consignee, or both; and .3 the permissible gross mass if this exceeds 5 0 kg . 5.1.5.4.2 The documentation requirements of 5 . 4 . 1 and 5 . 4 . 5 do not apply to excepted packages of radioac tive material of class 7, except that: .1 the UN number preceded by the letters “UN” and t he name and address of the consignor and the consignee and, if relevant, the identification mark for each competent authority certificate of approval (see 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 7 . 1 . 7) shall be shown on a special transport docum ent such as a bill of lading, air waybill or other similar document complying with the requirements of 5 . 4 . 1 . 2 . 1 to 5 . 4 . 1 . 2 . 4; and .2 the requirements of 5 . 4 . 1 . 6 . 2 and, if relevant, those of 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 7 . 1 . 7, 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 7 . 3 and 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 7 . 4 shall apply . 5.1.5.4.3 The requirements of 5 . 2 . 1 . 5 . 8 and 5 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 12 . 5 shall apply if relevant . 5.1.5.5 Specific provisions for the consignment o f fissile material Fissile material meeting one of the provisions of 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 1 to 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6 shall meet the following requirements: .1 only one of the provisions of 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 1 to 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6 is allowed per consignment; .2 only one approved fissile material in packa ges classified in accordance with 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6 is allowed per consignment unless multip le materials are authorized in the certificate of approval; .3 fissile material in packages classified in accorda nce with 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 3 shall be transported in a consignment with no more than 45 g of fissile nuclides; .4 fissile material in packages classified in accorda nce with 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 4 shall be transported in a consignment with no more than 15 g of fissile nuclides; .5 unpackaged or packaged fissile material classified in accordance with 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 5 shall be transported under exclusiv e use on a conveyance with no more than 45 g of fissile nuclides . 5.1.6 Packages packed into a cargo transport unit 5.1.6.1 Regardless of the placarding and marking p rovisions for cargo transport units, each package containing dangerous goods packed into a cargo transport unit shall be marked and labelled in accordance with the requirements of chapter 5 . 2 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 278

5 5 268 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.2 Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs Note: These provisions relate essentially to t he marking and labelling of dangerous goods according to their properties . However, additional marks or symbols in dicating precautions to be taken in handling or storing a package (such as a symbol representing an umbrella, indicating that a package shall be kept dry) may be displayed on a package if appropriate . 5.2.1 Marking of packages including IBCs 5.2.1.1 Unless provided otherwise in this Code, th e proper shipping name for the dangerous goods as determined in accordance with 3 . 1 . 2 and the corresponding UN number, precede d by the letters “UN”, shall be displayed on each package . The UN number and the letters “UN” shall be at le ast 12 mm high, except for packages of 30 L capacity or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass or less and for cylinders of 60 L water capacity or less when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and except for packages of 5 L capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall be of an appropriate size . In the case of unpackaged article s, the mark shall be displayed on the article, on its cradle or on its handling, storage or launching device . For goods of division 1 . 4, compatibility group S, the division and c ompatibility group letter shall also be marked unless the label for 1 . 4S is displayed . A typical package mark is: CORROSIVE LIQU ID, ACIDIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . (caprylyl chloride) UN 3265 . Note: Cylinders of 60 L water capacity or less marked with a UN number in accordance with the provisions of the IMDG Code up to 31 December 2013 and which do not conform to the provisions of 5 . 2 . 1 . 1 regarding the size of the UN number and of the let ters “UN” applicable as from 1 January 2014 may continue to be used until the next periodic inspection but no later than 1 July 2018 . 5.2.1.2 All package marks required by 5 . 2 . 1 . 1: .1 shall be readily visible and legible; .2 shall be such that this information will sti ll be identifiable on packages surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea . In considering suitable marking metho ds, account shall be taken of the durability of the packaging materials used and the surface of the package; .3 shall be displayed on a background of contr asting colour on the external surface of the package; and .4 shall not be located with other package marks that could substantially reduce their effectiveness . 5.2.1.3 Salvage packagings including large salvag e packagings and salvage pressure receptacles shall additionally be marked with the word “SALVAGE” . The lettering of the “SALVAGE” mark shall b e at least 12 mm high . 5.2.1.4 Intermediate bulk containers of more tha n 450 L capacity and large packagings shall be marked on two opposing sides . 5.2.1.5 Special marking provisions for radioac tive material 5.2.1.5.1 Each package shall be legibly and durably ma rked on the outside of the packaging with an identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both . Each overpack shall be legibly and durabl y marked on the outside of the overpack with an identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both unless these marks of all packages within the overpack are clearly visible . 5.2.1.5.2 The marking of excepted packages of radioa ctive material of class 7 shall be as required by 5 . 1 . 5 . 4 . 1 . 5.2.1.5.3 Each package of gross mass exceeding 50 kg sha ll have its permissible gross mass legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging . 5.2.1.5.4 Each package which conforms to: .1 a Type IP-1 package, a Type IP-2 package or a Type I P-3 package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with “TYPE IP-1”, “TYPE IP-2” or “TYPE IP-3” as appropriate; △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 279

269 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs 5 .2 a Type A package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with “TYPE A”; .3 a Type IP-2 package, a Type IP-3 package or a Type A p ackage design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with the international vehicle registration code (VRI code) of the country of origin of design and either the name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority of the country of origin of design . 5.2.1.5.5 Each package which conforms to a design appr oved under one or more of paragraphs 5 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 1, 6 . 4 . 22 . 1 to 6 . 4 . 22 . 4, 6 . 4 . 23 . 4 to 6 . 4 . 23 . 7 and 6 . 4 . 24 . 2 shall be legibly and durably marked on the out side of the package with the following information: .1 the identification mark allocated to that de sign by the competent authority; .2 a serial number to uniquely identify eac h packaging which conforms to that design; .3 “Type B(U)”, “Type B(M)” or “Type C”, in the cas e of a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package design . 5.2.1.5.6 Each package which conforms to a Type B(U), Ty pe B(M) or Type C package design shall have the outside of the outermost receptacle which is resistant to the effects of fire and water plainly marked by embossing, stamping or other means resistant to the effects of fire and water with the trefoil symbol shown below . 60 ̊ 60 ̊ 5 X X X / 2 60 ̊ 60 ̊ 5 X X X / 2 Basic trefoil symbol with proportions based on a central circle of radius X . The minimum allowable size of X shall be 4 mm. Any mark on the package made in accordance wit h the requirements of 5 . 2 . 1 . 5 . 4 . 1 and . 2 and 5 . 2 . 1 . 5 . 5 . 3 relating to the package type that does not rel ate to the UN number and proper shipping name assigned to the consignment shall be removed or covered . 5.2.1.5.7 Where LSA-I or SCO-I material is contained i n receptacles or wrapping materials and is transported under exclusive use as permitted by 4 . 1 . 9 . 2 . 4, the outer surface of these receptacles or w rapping materials may bear the mark ”RADIOACTIVE LSA-I” or ”RADIOACTIVE SCO-I”, as appropriate . 5.2.1.5.8 In all cases of international transport of p ackages requiring competent authority approval of design or shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, marking shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of the design . 5.2.1.6 Special marking provisions for marine pollutants 5.2.1.6.1 Except as provided in 2 . 10 . 2 . 7, packages containing marine pollutan ts meeting the criteria of 2 . 9 . 3 shall be durably marked with the marine poll utant mark . 5.2.1.6.2 The marine pollutant mark shall be lo cated adjacent to the marks required by 5 . 2 . 1 . 1 . The provisions of 5 . 2 . 1 . 2 and 5 . 2 . 1 . 4 shall be met . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 280

270 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 5.2.1.6.3 The marine pollutant mark shall be as shown in t he figure below . Minimum dimension 100 mm Minimum dimension 100 mm Marine pollutant mark The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angl e of 45 ° (diamond-shaped) . The symbol (fish and tree) shall be black on whi te or a suitable contrasting background . The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm × 10 0 mm and the minimum width of line forming the diamond shall be 2 mm . If the size of the package so requires, the d imensions/line thickness may be reduced, provided the mark remains clearly visible . Where dimensions are not specified, all fe atures shall be in approximate proportion to those shown . Note: The labelling provisions of 5 . 2 . 2 apply in addition to any requirement for pac kages to bear the marine pollutant mark . 5.2.1.7 Orientation arrows 5.2.1.7.1 Except as provided in 5 . 2 . 1 . 7 . 2: – combination packagings having inner packagings co ntaining liquid dangerous goods; – single packagings fitted with vents; – cryogenic receptacles intended for the t ransport of refrigerated liquefied gases; and – machinery or apparatus containing liqu id dangerous goods when it is required to ensure the liquid dangerous goods remain in their intended orientation (see special provision 301 of chapter 3 . 3), shall be legibly marked with package ori entation arrows which are similar to the illustration shown below or with those meeting the specifications of ISO 780:1997 . The orientation arrows shall appear on two opposite vertical sides of the package with the arrows pointing in the correct upright direction . They shall be rectangular and of a size that is c learly visible commensurate with the size of the package . Depicting a rectangular border around t he arrows is optional . or Two black or red arrows on white or suitable contrasting background. The rectangular border is optional. All features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. 5.2.1.7.2 Orientation arrows are not required on: .1 outer packagings containing pressure recept acles except cryogenic receptacles; .2 outer packagings containing dangerous goo ds in inner packagings each containing not more than 120 mL, with sufficient absorbent material between the inner and outer packagings to completely absorb the liquid contents; .3 outer packagings containing Division 6 . 2 infectious substances in primary rece ptacles each containing not more than 50 mL; .4 type IP-2, type IP-3, type A, type B(U), type B(M) or type C packages containing class 7 radioactive material; .5 outer packagings containing articles which are leak-tight in all orientations (e . g . alcohol or mercury in thermometers, aero sols, etc . ); or Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 281

271 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs 5 .6 outer packagings containing dangerous goods in hermetically sealed inner packagings each containing not more than 500 mL . 5.2.1.7.3 Arrows for purposes other than in dicating proper package orientation shall not be displayed on a package marked in accordance with this subsection . 5.2.1.8 Excepted quantity mark 5.2.1.8.1 Packages containing excepted quantit ies of dangerous goods shall be marked according to 3 . 5 . 4 . 5.2.1.9 Limited quantity mark 5.2.1.9.1 Packages containing dangerous goods pa cked in limited quantities shall be marked according to 3 . 4 . 5 . 5.2.1.10 Lithium battery mark 5.2.1.10.1 Packages containing lithium cells or bat teries prepared in accordance with special provision 188 shall be marked as shown in figure below . 5.2.1.10.2 The mark shall indicate the UN number, prece ded by the letters “UN”, i . e . ‘UN 3090’ for lithium metal cells or batteri es or ‘UN 3480’ for lithium ion cells or batteries . Where the lithium cells or batteries are co ntained in, or packed with, equipment, the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”, i . e . ‘UN 3091’ or ‘UN 3481’ as appropriate shall b e indicated . Where a package contains lithium cells or b atteries assigned to different UN numbers, all applicable UN numbers shall be indicated on one or more marks . * * * Lithium battery mark Minimum dimension 100 mm Minimum dimension 100 mm * Place for UN number(s) ** Place for telephone number for additional i nformation The mark shall be in the form of a a rectangle or a squa re with hatched edging . The dimensions shall be a minimum of 100 mm wid e × 100 mm high and the minimum width of the hatching shall be 5 mm . The symbol (group of batteries, one damag ed and emitting flame, above the UN number for lithium ion or lithium metal batteries or cells) shall be black on white or suitable contrasting background . The hatching shall be red . If the size of the package so requires, the dim ensions may be reduced to not less than 100 mm wide × 70 mm high . Where dimensions are not specified, all fea tures shall be in approximate proportion to those shown . 5.2.2 Labelling of packages including IBCs 5.2.2.1 Labelling provisions These provisions are related essentially to danger labels . However, additional marks or symbols in dicating precautions to be taken in handling or storing a package (such as a symbol representing an umbrella, indicating that a package shall be kept dry) may be displayed on a package if appropriate . 5.2.2.1.1 Labels identifying primary and subsidi ary hazards shall conform to models Nos . 1 to 9 illustrated in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . The “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard lab el is model No . 1 . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 282

272 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 5.2.2.1.2 Where articles or substances are specific ally listed in the Dangerous Goods List, a danger class label shall be affixed for the hazard shown in column 3 . A subsidiary hazard label shall also be affi xed for any hazard indicated by a class or division number in column 4 of the Dangerous Goods List . However, special provisions indicat ed in column 6 may also require a subsidiary hazard label where no subsidiary hazard is indicated in column 4 or may be exempt from the requirement for a subsidiary hazard label where such a hazard is indicated in the Dangerous Goods List . 5.2.2.1.2.1 A package containing a dangerous substan ce which has a low degree of danger may be exempt from these labelling requirements . In this case, a special provision specify ing that no hazard label is required appears in column 6 of the Dangerous Goods List for the relevant substance . However, for certain substances the pac kage shall be marked with the appropriate text as it appears in the special provision, for example: Substance UN No. Class Mark required on bales Baled hay in cargo transport unit 1327 4 . 1 None Baled hay not in cargo transport unit 1327 4 . 1 Class 4 . 1 Baled dry vegetable fibres in cargo transp ort unit 3360 4 . 1 None Substance UN No. Class Mark required on p ackages in addition to the proper shipping name and UN number Fish meal * 1374 4 . 2 Class 4 . 2 † * Only applicable to fish meal in packing group III . † Exempt from class marking when loaded in a cargo transport unit containing only fish meal under UN 1374 . 5.2.2.1.3 Except as provided in 5 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 3 . 1, if a substance which meets the definition of m ore than one class is not specifically listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3 . 2, the provisions in chapter 2 . 0 shall be used to determine the primary hazar d class of the goods . In addition to the label required for that pr imary hazard class, subsidiary hazard labels shall also be applied as specified in the Dangerous Goods List . 5.2.2.1.3.1 Packagings containing substances of cl ass 8 need not bear subsidiary hazard label model No . 6 . 1 if the toxicity arises solely from the destr uctive effect on tissue . Substances of class 4 . 2 need not bear subsidiary hazard label mode l No . 4 . 1 . 5.2.2.1.4 Labels for class 2 gases with subsidiary haz ard(s) Class Subsidiary hazard(s) shown in chapter 2.2 Primary hazard label Subsidiary hazard label(s) 2 . 1 None 2 . 1 None 2 . 2 None 2 . 2 None 5 . 1 2 . 2 5 . 1 2 . 3 None 2 . 3 None 2 . 1 2 . 3 2 . 1 5 . 1 2 . 3 5 . 1 5 . 1, 8 2 . 3 5 . 1, 8 8 2 . 3 8 2 . 1, 8 2 . 3 2 . 1, 8 5.2.2.1.5 Three separate labels have been provided f or class 2, one for flammable gases of class 2 . 1 (red), one for non-flammable, non-toxic g ases of class 2 . 2 (green) and one for toxic gases of class 2 . 3 (white) . Where the Dangerous Goods List indicate s that a class 2 gas possesses single or multiple subsidiary hazards, labels shall be used in accordance with the table in 5 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 4 . 5.2.2.1.6 Except as provided in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 2, each label shall: .1 be located on the same surface of the package ne ar the proper shipping name mark, if the package dimensions are adequate; Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 283

273 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs 5 .2 be so placed on the packaging that it is not covered or obscured by any part or attachment to the packaging or any other label or mark; and .3 when primary and subsidiary hazard label s are required, be displayed next to each other . Where a package is of such an irregular shape or s mall size that a label cannot be satisfactorily affixed, the label may be attached to the package by a securely affixed tag or other suitable means . 5.2.2.1.7 Intermediate bulk containers of more tha n 450 L capacity and large packagings shall be labelled on two opposing sides . 5.2.2.1.8 Labels shall be affixed on a surface of contras ting colour . 5.2.2.1.9 Special provisions for the labelling of se lf-reactive substances An “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label (No . 1) shall be applied for type B self-reactiv e substances, unless the competent authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because test data have proved that the self-reactive substance in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour . 5.2.2.1.10 Special provisions for the labelling of or ganic peroxides The class 5 . 2 label (model No . 5 . 2) shall be affixed to packages containing or ganic peroxides classified as types B, C, D, E or F . This label also implies that the product ma y be flammable and hence no “FLAMMABLE LIQUID” subsidiary hazard label (model No . 3) is required . In addition, the following subsidiary h azard labels shall be applied: .1 An “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label ( model No . 1) for organic peroxides type B, unless the c ompetent authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because test data have proved that the organic peroxide in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour . .2 A “CORROSIVE” subsidiary hazard label (m odel No . 8) is required when packing group I or II crite ria of class 8 are met . 5.2.2.1.11 Special provisions for the labelling of in fectious substances packages In addition to the primary hazard label (model No . 6 . 2), infectious substances packages sha ll bear any other label required by the nature of the contents . 5.2.2.1.12 Special provisions for the labelling of ra dioactive material 5.2.2.1.12.1 Except when enlarged labels are used in acco rdance with 5 . 3 . 1 . 1 . 5 . 1, each package, overpack and freight cont ainer containing radioactive material shall bear the labels conforming to the applicable model Nos . 7A, 7B or 7C, according to the appropr iate category . Labels shall be affixed to two opposit e sides on the outside of the package or overpack or on the outside of all four sides of a freight container or tank . In addition, each package, overpack and freigh t container containing fissile material, other than fissile material excepted under the provisions of 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5, shall bear labels conforming to model No . 7E; such labels, where applicable, shal l be affixed adjacent to the labels conforming to the applicable model Nos . 7A, 7B or 7C . Labels shall not cover the marks specified i n this chapter . Any labels which do not relate to the content s shall be removed or covered . 5.2.2.1.12.2 Each label conforming to the applicable mo del No . 7A, 7B or 7C shall be completed with the follow ing information: .1 Contents: .1 Except for LSA-I material, the name(s) of th e radionuclide(s) as taken from the table under 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 1, using the symbols prescribed therein . For mixtures of radionuclides, the most r estrictive nuclides must be listed to the extent the space on the line permits . The group of LSA or SCO shall be shown followin g the name(s) of the radionuclide(s) . The terms “LSA-II”, “LSA-III”, “SCO-I ” and “SCO-II” shall be used for this purpose . .2 For LSA-I material, the term “LSA-I” is all th at is necessary; the name of the radionuclide is not necessary . .2 Activity: The maximum activity of the radioa ctive contents during transport, expressed in units of becquerels (Bq) with the appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1 . 2 . 2 . 1) . For fissile material, the total mass of fissi le nuclides in units of grams (g), or multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity . .3 For overpacks and freight containers, th e “contents” and “activity” entries on the label shall bear the information required in 5 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 12 . 2 . 1 and 5 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 12 . 2 . 2, respectively, totalled together for t he entire contents of the overpack or freight container except that, on labels for overpacks or freight containers containing mixed loads of packages containing different radionuclides, such entries may read “See transport documents” . .4 Transport index: The number determined in a ccordance with 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 and 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 2 (except for category I-WHITE) △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 284

274 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 5.2.2.1.12.3 Each label conforming to the model No . 7E shall be completed with the criticalit y safety index (CSI) as stated in the certificate of approval applicable in the countries through or into which the consignment is transported and issued by the competent authority or as specified in 6 . 4 . 11 . 2 or 6 . 4 . 11 . 3 . 5.2.2.1.12.4 For overpacks and freight containers, th e label conforming to model No . 7E shall bear the sum of the criticality safe ty indexes of all the packages contained therein . 5.2.2.1.12.5 In all cases of international transport of p ackages requiring competent authority approval of design or shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, labelling shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design . 5.2.2.1.13 Labels for articles containing dangero us goods transported as UN Nos. 3537, 3538, 3539, 3540, 3541, 3542, 3543, 3544, 3545, 3546, 3547 and 3548 . 1 Packages containing articles or articles transported unpackaged shall bear labels according to 5 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 2 reflecting the hazards established acco rding to 2 . 0 . 6 . If the article contains one or more lithium b atteries with, for lithium metal batteries, an aggregate lithium content of 2 g or less, and for lithium ion batteries, a Watt-hour rating of 100 Wh or less, the lithium battery mark (5 . 2 . 1 . 10 . 2) shall be affixed to the package or unpackage d article . If the article contains one or more lithium b atteries with, for lithium metal batteries, an aggregate lithium content of more than 2 g and for lithium ion batteries, a Watt-hour rating of more than 100 Wh, the lithium battery label (5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 No . 9A) shall be affixed to the package or unpacka ged article . . 2 When it is required to ensure articles conta ining liquid dangerous goods remain in their intended orientation, orientation marks meeting 5 . 2 . 1 . 7 . 1 shall be affixed and visible on at least two oppo site vertical sides of the package or of the unpackaged article where possible, with the arrows pointing in the correct upright direction . 5.2.2.2 Provisions for labels 5.2.2.2.1 Labels shall satisfy the provisions of thi s section and conform, in terms of colour, symbols, numbers and general format, to the specimen labels shown in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . Note: Where appropriate, labels in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 are shown with a dotted outer boundary as prov ided for in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 1 . This is not required when the label is applie d on a background of contrasting colour . 5.2.2.2.1.1 Labels shall be configured as shown in the figur e below: * * * * * * 5 mm Minimum dimension 100 mm Minimum dimension 100 mm Class/division label * The class or, for divisions 5 . 1 and 5 . 2, the division number shall be shown in the bot tom corner . ** Additional text/numbers/symbol/letters shall (if mandatory) or may (if optional) be shown in this bottom half . *** The class or division symbol or, for divis ions 1 . 4, 1 . 5 and 1 . 6, the division number, and for model No . 7E, the word “FISSILE” shall be shown in this t op half . 5.2.2.2.1.1.1 Labels shall be displayed on a background of c ontrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer boundary line . 5.2.2.2.1.1.2 The label shall be in the form of a square set at an ang le of 45 degrees (diamond-shaped) . The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm × 10 0 mm . There shall be a line inside the edge forming t he diamond which shall be parallel and approximately 5 mm from the outside of that line to the edge of the label . Where dimensions are not specified, all fea tures shall be in approximate proportion to those shown . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 285

275 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs 5 5.2.2.2.1.1.3 If the size of the package so requires the dimen sions may be reduced proportionally, provided the symbols and other elements of the label remain clearly visible . Dimensions for cylinders shall comply w ith 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 2 . 5.2.2.2.1.2 Cylinders for class 2 may, on account of their s hape, orientation and securing mechanisms for transport, bear labels representative of those specified in this section, which have been reduced in size, according to ISO 7225:2005, Gas cylinders – Precautionary labels , for display on the non-cylindrical part (shoulder) of such cylinders . Labels may overlap to the extent provided f or by ISO 7225:2005; however, in all cases, the labels representing the primary hazard and the numbers appearing on any label shall remain fully visible and the symbols recognizable . Note: When the diameter of the cylinder is too s mall to permit the display of the reduced size labels on the non-cylindrical upper part of the cylinder, the reduced sized labels may be displayed on the cylindrical part . 5.2.2.2.1.3 With the exception of labels for divisio ns 1 . 4, 1 . 5 and 1 . 6 of class 1, the upper half of the label shall co ntain the pictorial symbol and the lower half shall contain the class number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 . 1, 5 . 2, 6, 7, 8 or 9 as appropriate . However, for label model No . 9A, the upper half of the label sha ll only contain the seven vertical stripes of the symbol and the lower half shall contain the group of batteries of the symbol and the class number . Except for label model No . 9A, the label may include such text as the UN num ber, or words describing the hazard class (e . g . “flammable”) in accordance with 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 5 provided that the text does not obscure or det ract from the other required label elements . 5.2.2.2.1.4 In addition, except for divisions 1 . 4, 1 . 5 and 1 . 6, labels for class 1 shall show in the lower half , above the class number, the division number and compatibility group letter for the substance or article . Labels for divisions 1 . 4, 1 . 5 and 1 . 6 shall show in the upper half the division numb er and in the lower half the class number and the compatibility group letter . For division 1 . 4, compatibility group S, no label is genera lly required . However, in cases where a label is consider ed necessary for such goods, it shall be based on model No . 1 . 4 . 5.2.2.2.1.5 On labels other than those for material of cla ss 7, the insertion of any text (other than the class or division number) in the space below the symbol shall be confined to particulars indicating the nature of the hazard and precautions to be taken in handling . For label No . 9A, no text other than the class mark shall be in cluded in the bottom part of the label . 5.2.2.2.1.6 The symbols, text and numbers shall be shown i n black on all labels except for: .1 the class 8 label, where the text (if any) and cla ss number shall appear in white; .2 labels with entirely green, red or blue back grounds, where they may be shown in white; .3 the class 5 . 2 label, where the symbol may be shown in white; a nd .4 class 2 . 1 labels displayed on cylinders and gas cart ridges for liquefied petroleum gases, where they may be shown in the background colour of the receptacle if adequate contrast is provided . 5.2.2.2.1.7 The method of affixing the label(s) o r applying stencil(s) of label(s) on packages containing dangerous goods shall be such that the label(s) or stencil(s) will still be identifiable on packages surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea . In considering suitable labelling met hods, account shall be taken of the durability of the packaging materials used and the surface of the package . 5.2.2.2.2 Specimen labels Note: Labels shall satisfy the provisions belo w and conform, in terms of colour, symbols and general format, to the models shown in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . Corresponding models required for oth er modes of transport, with minor variations which do not affect the obvious meaning of the label, are also acceptable . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 286

276 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 Class 1: Explosives Label model no. Class, Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note 1 Divisions 1 . 1, 1 . 2, 1 . 3 Exploding bomb: black Orange 1 (black) 1 ** * ** Place for division – to be left blank if explosive is the subsidiary hazard * Place for compatibility group – to be left blank if explosive is the subsidiary hazard 1 . 4 Division 1 . 4 1 . 4: black Numerals shall be about 30 mm in height and b e about 5 mm thick (for a label measuring 100 mm × 100 mm) Orange 1 (black) 1.4 1 * * Place for compatibility group 1 . 5 Division 1 . 5 1 . 5: black Numerals shall be about 30 mm in height and b e about 5 mm thick (for a label measuring 100 mm × 100 mm) Orange 1 (black) 1.5 1 * * Place for compatibility group 1 . 6 Division 1 . 6 1 . 6: black Numerals shall be about 30 mm in height and b e about 5 mm thick (for a label measuring 100 mm × 100 mm) Orange 1 (black) 1.6 1 * * Place for compatibility group Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 287

277 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs 5 Class 2: Gases Label model no. Class, Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note 2 . 1 Class 2 . 1: Flammable gases Flame: black or white (exce pt as provided for in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 4) Red 2 (black or white) (except as provided for in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 4) 2 2 – 2 . 2 Class 2 . 2: Non-flammable, non-toxic gases Gas cylind er: black or white Green 2 (black or white) 2 2 – 2 . 3 Class 2 . 3: Toxic gases Skull and crossbones: black White 2 ( black) 2 – Class 3: Flammable liquids Label model no. Class, Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note 3 – Flame: black or white Red 3 (black or white) 3 3 – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 288

278 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 Class 4: Flammable solids; substances liable to spontaneous combustion; substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases Label model no. Class, Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note 4 . 1 Class 4 . 1: Flammable solids, self-reactive subs tances, polymerizing substances and solid desensitized explosives Flame: black White with 7 vertical red stripes 4 (black) 4 – 4 . 2 Class 4 . 2: Substances liable to spontaneous combustion F lame: black Upper half white, lower half red 4 (black) 4 – 4 . 3 Class 4 . 3: Substances which, in contact with wate r, emit flammable gases Flame: black or white Blue 4 (black or white) 4 4 – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 289

279 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs 5 Class 5: Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides Label model no. Class, Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note 5 . 1 Class 5 . 1: Oxidizing substances Flame over circle : black Yellow 5 . 1 (black) 5.1 – 5 . 2 Class 5 . 2: Organic peroxides Flame: black or white Upper h alf red, lower half yellow 5 . 2 (black) 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2 – Class 6: Toxic and infectious substances Label model no. Class, Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note 6 . 1 Class 6 . 1: Toxic substances Skull and crossbones: b lack White 6 (black) 6 – 6 . 2 Class 6 . 2: Infectious substances Three crescents su perimposed on a circle: black White 6 (black) 6 The lower half of the label may bear the inscriptions: “INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE” and “In the case of damage or leakage immediately notify Public Health Authority” in black colour Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 290

280 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 Class 7: Radioactive material Label model no. Class, Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note 7A Category I – WHITE Trefoil: black White 7 (black) 7 RADIOACTIVE I CONTENTS … ACTIVITY … Text (mandatory), black in lower half of label: “RADIOACTIVE” “CONTENTS … ” “ACTIVITY … ” One red vertical bar shall follow the word: “RA DIOACTIVE” 7B Category II – YELLOW Trefoil: black Upper half yellow with white border, lower half white 7 (black) 7 RADIOACTIVE II CONTENTS … ACTIVITY … TRANSPORT INDEX … . . Text (mandatory), black in lower half of label: “RADIOACTIVE” “CONTENTS … ” “ACTIVITY … ” In a black outlined box: “TRANSPORT INDEX”; T wo red vertical bars shall follow the word: “RADIOACTIVE” 7C Category III – YELLOW Trefoil: black Upper half yellow with white border, lower half white 7 (black) 7 TRANSPORT INDEX … . . RADIOACTIVE III CONTENTS … ACTIVITY … Text (mandatory), black in lower half of label: “RADIOACTIVE” “CONTENTS … ” “ACTIVITY … ” In a black outlined box: “TRANSPORT INDEX”; Th ree red vertical bars shall follow the word: “RADIOACTIVE” 7E Fissile material – White 7 (black) 7 CRITICALITY SAFETY INDEX … … … . FISSILE Text (mandatory): black in upper half of label: “FISSILE”; In a black outlined box in the lower half of label: “CRITICALITY SAFETY INDEX” Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 291

281 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs 5 Class 8: Corrosive substances Label model no. Class, Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note 8 – Liquids, spilling from two glass vessels and attacking a hand and a metal: black Upper half white, lower half black with white border 8 (white) 8 – Class 9: Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles, including environmentally hazardous substances Label model no. Class, Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note 9 – 7 vertical stripes in upper half: black White 9 underlined (black) 9 – 9A – 7 vertical stripes in upper half: black; battery group, one broken and emitting flame in lower half: black White 9 underlined (black) 9 – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 292

5 5 282 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.3 Placarding and marking of cargo transport units and bulk containers 5.3.1 Placarding 5.3.1.1 Placarding provisions 5.3.1.1.1 General provisions .1 Enlarged labels (placards) and marks and signs shall be affixed to the exterior surfaces of a cargo transport unit or bulk container to provi de a warning that the contents of the unit or bulk container are dangerous goods and present hazards, unless the labels and/or marks affixed to the packages are clearly visible from the exterior of the cargo transport unit or bulk container . .2 The methods of placarding and marking as req uired in 5 . 3 . 1 . 1 . 4 and 5 . 3 . 2 on cargo transport units and bulk containe rs shall be such that this information will still be identifiable on cargo transport units and bulk containers surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea . In considering suitable marking metho ds, account shall be taken of the ease with which the surface of the cargo transport unit or bulk container can be marked . .3 All placards, orange panels, marks and sig ns shall be removed from cargo transport units and bulk containers or masked as soon as both the dangerous goods or their residues which led to the application of those placards, orange panels, marks or signs are discharged . 5.3.1.1.2 Placards shall be affixed to the exterior sur face of cargo transport units and bulk containers to provide a warning that the contents of the unit are dangerous goods and present hazards . Placards shall correspond to the primar y hazard of the goods contained in the cargo transport unit and bulk container except that: .1 placards are not required on cargo t ransport units carrying any quantity of explosives of division 1 . 4, compatibility group S; and .2 placards indicating the highest hazard o nly need be affixed on cargo transport units carrying substances and articles of more than one division in class 1 . Placards shall be displayed on a bac kground of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer boundary line . For dangerous goods of class 9 the placar d shall correspond to the label model No . 9 as in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2; label model No . 9A shall not be used for placarding purpose s . 5.3.1.1.3 Placards shall also be displayed for those s ubsidiary hazards for which a subsidiary hazard label is required according to 5 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 2 . However, cargo transport units a nd bulk containers containing goods of more than one class need not bear a subsidiary hazard placard if the hazard represented by that placard is already indicated by a primary hazard placard . 5.3.1.1.4 Placarding requirements 5.3.1.1.4.1 A cargo transport unit or bulk container con taining dangerous goods or residues of dangerous goods shall clearly display placards as follows: .1 a freight container, semi-trailer, a clo sed or sheeted bulk container or portable tank: one on each side and one on each end of the unit . Portable tanks having a capacity of not mor e than 3,000 L may be placarded or, alternatively, may be labelled instead, on only two opposite sides; .2 a railway wagon: at least on each side; .3 a multiple-compartment tank containi ng more than one dangerous substance or their residues: along each side at the positions of the relevant compartments . If all compartments are required to displ ay the same placards, these placards need to be displayed only once along each side of the cargo transport unit; .4 a flexible bulk container: in at least two opposing p ositions; and .5 any other cargo transport unit: at least on both s ides and on the back of the unit . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 293

283 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.3 – Placarding and marking of cargo transport units and bulk containers 5 5.3.1.1.5 Special provisions for class 7 5.3.1.1.5.1 Large freight containers carrying un packaged LSA-I material or SCO-I or packages other than excepted packages, and tanks, shall bear four placards which conform with the model No . 7D given in the figure . The placards shall be affixed in a vertical or ientation to each side wall and each end wall of the large freight container or tank . Any placards which do not relate to the conte nts shall be removed . Instead of using both labels and placard s, it is permitted as an alternative to use enlarged labels only, as shown in label model Nos . 7A, 7B and 7C, except having the minimum size s hown in the figure under 5 . 3 . 1 . 2 . 2 . 5.3.1.1.5.2 Rail and road vehicles carrying packages , overpacks or freight containers labelled with any of the labels shown in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 as model Nos . 7A, 7B, 7C and 7E, or carrying consignments u nder exclusive use, shall display the placard shown in the figure (model No . 7D) on each of: .1 the two external lateral walls, in the case of a r ail vehicle; .2 the two external lateral walls and the exter nal rear wall, in the case of a road vehicle . In the case of a vehicle without sides, the plac ards may be affixed directly on the cargo-carrying unit provided that they are readily visible; in the case of physically large tanks or freight containers, the placards on the tanks or freight containers shall suffice . In the case of vehicles which have insuffici ent area to allow the fixing of larger placards, the dimensions of the placard as described in the figure may be reduced to 100 mm . Any placards which do not relate to the conte nts shall be removed . 5.3.1.2 Specifications for placards 5.3.1.2.1 Except as provided in 5 . 3 . 1 . 2 . 2 for the class 7 placard, and in 5 . 3 . 2 . 3 . 2 for the marine pollutant mark, a placard sha ll be configured as shown in the figure below . Minimum dimension 250 mm Minimum dimension 250 mm 12.5 mm Placard (except for class 7) The placard shall be in the form of a square set at an a ngle of 45 ° (diamond-shaped) . The minimum dimensions shall be 250 mm × 250 mm (to the edge of the placard) . The line inside the edge shall be parallel an d 12 . 5 mm from the outside of that line to the edge of the pl acard . The symbol and line inside the edge shall cor respond in colour to the label for the class or division of the dangerous goods in question . The class or division symbol/ numeral sha ll be positioned and sized in proportion to those prescribed in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 for the corresponding class or division of t he dangerous goods in question . The placard shall display the number of the c lass or division (and for goods in class 1, the compatibility group letter) of the dangerous goods in question in the manner prescribed in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 for the corresponding label, in digits not l ess than 25 mm high . Where dimensions are not specified, all fea tures shall be in approximate proportion to those shown . 5.3.1.2.2 For class 7, the placard shall have minimum ov erall dimensions of 250 mm by 250 mm (except as permitted by 5 . 3 . 1 . 1 . 5 . 2) with a black line running 5 mm inside t he edge and parallel with it, and shall be otherwise as shown in the figure below . When different dimensions are used, the r elative proportions shall be maintained . The number “7” shall not be less than 25 mm high . The background colour of the upper half of the plac ard shall be yellow and of the lower half white; the colour of the trefoil and the printing shall be black . The use of the word “RADIOACTIVE” in the bott om half is optional to allow the use of this placard to display the appropriate United Nations Number for the consignment . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 294

284 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 7 5 mm RADIOACTIVE Minimum dimension 250 mm Minimum dimension 250 mm 10 mm minimum Placard for radioactive material of class 7 (No . 7D) Symbol (trefoil): black . Background: upper half yellow with white border, lower half white . The lower half shall show the word RADIOACTI VE or alternatively, when required (see 5 . 3 . 2 . 1), the appropriate UN number and the figure ‘ 7 ’ in t he bottom corner . 5.3.2 Marking 5.3.2.0 Display of proper shipping name 5.3.2.0.1 The proper shipping name of the contents sha ll be durably marked on at least both sides of: .1 tank cargo transport units containing da ngerous goods; .2 bulk containers containing dangerous good s; or .3 any other cargo transport unit contai ning packaged dangerous goods of a single commodity for which no placard, UN number or marine pollutant mark is required . Alternatively, the UN number may be displ ayed . 5.3.2.0.2 The proper shipping name for the good s shall be displayed in characters not less than 65 mm high . The proper shipping name shall be of contr asting colour with the background . This may be reduced to 12 mm for portable tank co ntainers with a capacity of not more than 3,000 L . 5.3.2.1 Display of UN numbers 5.3.2.1.1 Except for goods of class 1, the UN nu mber shall be displayed as required by this chapter on consignments of: .1 solids, liquids or gases transported in ta nk cargo transport units, including on each compartment of a multi-compartment tank cargo transport unit; .2 packaged dangerous goods loaded in exces s of 4000 kg gross mass, to which only one UN number has been assigned and which are the only dangerous goods in the cargo transport unit; .3 unpackaged LSA-I material, SCO-I or SCO- III material of class 7 in or on a vehicle, or in a freight container, or in a tank; .4 packaged radioactive material with a sin gle UN number in or on a vehicle, or in a freight container, when required to be transported under exclusive use; .5 solid dangerous goods in bulk containers . 5.3.2.1.2 The UN number for the goods shall be displayed i n black digits not less than 65 mm high, either: .1 against a white background in the area below t he pictorial symbol and above the class number and the compatibility group letter in a manner that does not obscure or detract from the other required placard elements (see 5 . 3 . 2 . 1 . 3); or .2 on an orange rectangular panel not less than 1 20 mm high and 300 mm wide, with a 10 mm black border, to be placed immediately adjacent to each placard or marine pollutant mark (see 5 . 3 . 2 . 1 . 3) . For portable tanks with a capacity of not mor e than 3,000 L, the UN number may be displayed on an orange rectangular panel of appropriately reduced size on the external surface of the tank in characters not less than 25 mm high . When no placard or marine pollutant mark is r equired, the UN number shall be displayed immediately adjacent to the proper shipping name . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 295

285 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.3 – Placarding and marking of cargo transport units and bulk containers 5 5.3.2.1.3 Examples of display of UN numbers ** * or * ** or or ** * or * ** * location of class or division number ** location of UN number 5.3.2.2 Elevated temperature substance mark 5.3.2.2.1 Cargo transport units containing a subst ance that is transported or offered for transport in a liquid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 100 ° C or in a solid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 240 ° C shall bear on each side and on each end the mark shown in the figure below . Minimum dimension 250 mm Minimum dimension 250 mm Minimum dimension 250 mm Mark for transport at elevated temperature The mark shall be an equilateral tri angle . The colour of the mark shall be red . The minimum dimension of the sides s hall be 250 mm except for portable tanks with a capacity of not more than 3,000 L where the sides may be reduced to 100 mm . Where dimensions are not specified, all fea tures shall be in approximate proportion to those shown . 5.3.2.2.2 In addition to the elevated temperature ma rk, the maximum temperature of the substance expected to be reached during transport shall be durably marked on both sides of the portable tank or insulation jacket, immediately adjacent to the elevated temperature mark, in characters at least 100 mm high . 5.3.2.3 Marine pollutant mark 5.3.2.3.1 Except as provided in 2 . 10 . 2 . 7, cargo transport units or bulk container s containing marine pollutants shall clearly display the marine pollutant mark in locations indicated in 5 . 3 . 1 . 1 . 4 . 1 . 5.3.2.3.2 The marine pollutant mark for cargo transp ort units and bulk containers shall be as described in 5 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 3, except that the minimum dimensions sh all be 250 mm × 250 mm . For portable tanks with a capacity of no t more than 3,000 L, the dimensions may be reduced to 100 mm × 100 mm . 5.3.2.4 Limited quantities Cargo transport units containing dangerous goods packed in limited quantities shall be placarded and marked according to 3 . 4 . 5 . 5 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 296

5 5 286 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.4 Documentation Note 1 The provisions of this Code do not preclude th e use of electronic data processing (EDP) and electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission techniques as an alternative to paper documentation . All references to “dangerous goods tran sport document” in this chapter also include provision of the required information by use of EDP and EDI transmission techniques . Note 2 When dangerous goods are offered for trans port, similar documents to those required for other categories of goods have to be prepared . The form of these documents, the particul ars to be entered on them and the obligations they entail may be fixed by international conventions applying to certain modes of transport and by national legislation . Note 3 One of the primary requirements of a t ransport document for dangerous goods is to convey the fundamental information relative to the hazards of the goods . It is, therefore, necessary to include ce rtain basic information on the document for a consignment of dangerous goods unless otherwise exempted or required in this Code . Note 4 In addition to the provisions of this chapte r, other elements of information may be required by the competent authority . Note 5 In addition to the provisions of this chapte r other additional information may be included . However, this information shall not: .1 divert attention from the safety informa tion required by this chapter or by the competent authority; .2 contradict the safety information requ ired by this chapter or by the competent authority; or .3 duplicate information already provi ded . 5.4.1 Dangerous goods transport information 5.4.1.1 General 5.4.1.1.1 Except as otherwise provided, the co nsignor who offers dangerous goods for transport shall give to the carrier the information applicable to those dangerous goods, including any additional information and documentation as specified in this Code . This information may be provided on a dange rous goods transport document or, with the agreement of the carrier, by EDP or EDI techniques . 5.4.1.1.2 When the dangerous goods transport infor mation is given to the carrier by EDP or EDI techniques, the consignor shall be able to produce the information without delay as a paper document, with the information in the sequence required by this chapter . 5.4.1.2 Form of the transport document 5.4.1.2.1 A dangerous goods transport documen t may be in any form, provided it contains all of the information required by the provisions of this Code . 5.4.1.2.2 If both dangerous and non-dangerous good s are listed in one document, the dangerous goods shall be listed first, or otherwise be emphasized . 5.4.1.2.3 Continuation page A dangerous goods transport document may consist of more than one page, provided pages are consecutively numbered . 5.4.1.2.4 The information on a dangerous goods trans port document shall be easy to identify, legible and durable . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 297

287 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.4 – Documentation 5 5.4.1.2.5 Example of a dangerous goods transport doc ument The form shown in figure 5 . 4 . 5 is an example of a dangerous goods transport d ocument . * 5.4.1.3 Consignor, consignee and date The name and address of the consignor and the consignee of the dangerous goods shall be included on the dangerous goods transport document . The date the dangerous goods transport do cument or an electronic copy of it was prepared or given to the initial carrier shall be included . 5.4.1.4 Information required on the dangerous good s transport document 5.4.1.4.1 Dangerous goods description The dangerous goods transport document shall contain the following information for each dangerous substance, material or article offered for transport: .1 the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”; .2 the proper shipping name, as determined ac cording to 3 . 1 . 2, including the technical name enclosed i n parenthesis, as applicable (see 3 . 1 . 2 . 8); .3 the primary hazard class or, when assigned, t he division of the goods, including, for class 1, the compatibility group letter . The words “Class” or “Division” may be incl uded preceding the primary hazard class or division numbers; .4 subsidiary hazard class or division numb er(s) corresponding to the subsidiary hazard label(s) required to be applied, when assigned, shall be entered following the primary hazard class or division and shall be enclosed in parenthesis . The words “Class” or “Division” may be incl uded preceding the subsidiary hazard class or division numbers; .5 where assigned, the packing group for the sub stance or article, which may be preceded by “PG” (e . g . “PG II”) . 5.4.1.4.2 Sequence of the dangerous goods descript ion The five elements of the dangerous goods description specified in 5 . 4 . 1 . 4 . 1 shall be shown in the order listed above (i . e . . 1, . 2, . 3, . 4, and . 5) with no information interspersed, exc ept as provided in this Code . Unless permitted or required by this Code , additional information shall be placed after the dangerous goods description . 5.4.1.4.3 Information which supplements the prop er shipping name in the dangerous goods description The proper shipping name (see 3 . 1 . 2) in the dangerous goods description shal l be supplemented as follows: .1 Technical names for “n.o.s.” and other generi c descriptions : proper shipping names that are assigned special provision 274 or 318 in column 6 of the Dangerous Goods List shall be supplemented with their technical or chemical group names as described in 3 . 1 . 2 . 8 . .2 Empty uncleaned packagings, bulk container s and tanks : Empty means of containment (including packagings, IBCs, bulk containers, portable tanks, road tank vehicles and railway tank wagons) which contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes other than class 7 shall be described as such by, for example, placing the words “EMPTY UNCLEANED” or “RESIDUE LAST CONTAINED” before or after the dangerous goods description specified in 5 . 4 . 1 . 4 . 1 . 1 to . 5 . .3 Wastes : For waste dangerous goods (other th an radioactive wastes) which are being transported for disposal, or for processing for disposal, the proper shipping name shall be preceded by the word “WASTE”, unless this is already a part of the proper shipping name . .4 Elevated temperature substances : If the proper shipping name of a substance which is transported or offered for transport in a liquid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 100 ° C, or in a solid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 240 ° C, does not convey the elevated temperature condition (for example, by using the term “MOLTEN” or “ELEVATED TEMPERATURE” as part of the proper shipping name), the word “HOT” shall immediately precede the proper shipping name . * For standardized formats, see also the relevant recommendations of the UNECE United Nations Centre for Trade Facilitation and Electronic Business (UN/CEFACT), in particular Recommendation No . 1 (United Nations Layout Key for Trade Docum ents) (ECE/TRADE/137, edition 81 . 3), UN Layout Key for Trade Documents – Guideli nes for Applications (ECE/TRADE/270, edition 2002), Revised Recommendation No . 11 (Documentary Aspects of the Internat ional Transport of Dangerous Goods) (ECE/TRADE/C/CEFACT/2008/8) and Recommendation No . 22 (Layout Key for Standard Consig nment Instructions) (ECE/TRADE/168, edition 1989) . Refer also to the UN/CEFACT Summary o f Trade Facilitation Recommendations (ECE/TRADE/346, edition 2006) and the United Nations Trade Data Elements Directory (UNTDED) (ECE/TRADE/362, edition 2005) . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 298

288 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 .5 Marine pollutants: Except as provided in 2 . 10 . 2 . 7, if the goods to be transported are marine pol lutants, the goods shall be identified as “MARINE POLLUTANT”, and for “not otherwise specified” (N . O . S . ) entries the proper shipping name shall be su pplemented with the recognized chemical name of the marine pollutant (see 3 . 1 . 2 . 9) . The term “MARINE POLLUTANT” may b e supplemented with the term “ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS” . .6 Flashpoint: If the liquid dangerous goods to be transpo rted have a primary or subsidiary hazard of class 3 and a flashpoint of 60°C or below (in °C closed-cup (c . c . )), the minimum flashpoint shall be indicat ed . Because of the presence of impurities, th e flashpoint may be lower or higher than the reference temperature indicated in the Dangerous Goods List for the substance . .7 Damaged/defective lithium cells or batteries and lithium cells or batteries for disposal or recycling: When lithium cells or batteries are offer ed for transport under special provision 376 or special provision 377, “DAMAGED/DEFECTIVE”, “LITHIUM BATTERIES FOR DISPOSAL” or “LITHIUM BATTERIES FOR RECYCLING” shall be indicated, as appropriate . 5.4.1.4.4 Examples of dangerous goods descriptio ns: UN 1098, ALLYL ALCOHOL 6 . 1 (3) I (21 ° C c . c . ) UN 1098, ALLYL ALCOHOL, class 6 . 1, (class 3), PG I, (21 ° C c . c . ) UN 1092, Acrolein, stabilized, class 6 . 1 (3), PG I, ( - 24 ° C c . c . ), MARINE POLLUTANT/ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS UN 2761, Organochlorine pest icide, solid, toxic, (Aldrin 19%), class 6 . 1, PG III, MARINE POLLUTANT 5.4.1.5 Information required in addition to the da ngerous goods description In addition to the dangerous goods description, the following information shall be included after the dangerous goods description on the dangerous goods transport document . 5.4.1.5.1 Total quantity of dangerous goods Except for empty uncleaned packagings, the total quantity of dangerous goods covered by the description (by volume or mass as appropriate) of each item of dangerous goods bearing a different proper shipping name, UN number or packing group shall be included . For class 1 dangerous goods, the quantity s hall be the net explosive mass . For dangerous goods transported in salv age packagings, an estimate of the quantity of dangerous goods shall be given . The number and kind (e . g . drum, box, etc . ) of packages shall also be indicated . UN packaging codes may only be used to sup plement the description of the kind of package (e . g . one box (4G)) . Abbreviations may be used to specify the un it of measurement for the total quantity . Note: The number, type and capacity of each i nner packaging within the outer packaging of a combination packaging is not required to be indicated . 5.4.1.5.2 Limited quantities 5.4.1.5.2.1 When dangerous goods are transported acc ording to the exceptions for dangerous goods packed in limited quantities provided for in column 7a of the Dangerous Goods List and chapter 3 . 4, the words “limited quantity” or “LTD QTY” s hall be included . 5.4.1.5.2.2 Where a shipment is offered in accordance wi th 3 . 4 . 4 . 1 . 2, the following statement shall be includ ed in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 3 . 4 . 4 . 1 . 2 of the IMDG Code” . 5.4.1.5.3 Salvage packagings including large salva ge packagings and salvage pressure receptacles For dangerous goods transported in salvage packagings including large salvage packagings or salvage pressure receptacles, the words “SALVAGE PACKAGING” or “SALVAGE PRESSURE RECEPTACLE” shall be included . 5.4.1.5.4 Substances stabilized by temperature c ontrol If the word “STABILIZED” is part of the proper shipping name (see also 3 . 1 . 2 . 6), when stabilization is by means of temper ature control, the control and emergency temperatures (see 7 . 3 . 7 . 2) shall be indicated in the transport docum ent, as follows: “Control temperature: … ° C Emergency temperature: … ° C” . 5.4.1.5.5 Self-reactive substances, polymeriz ing substances and organic peroxides For self-reactive substances, organic peroxides and polymerizing substances which require temperature control during transport, the control and emergency temperatures (see 7 . 3 . 7 . 2) shall be indicated on the dangerous goods tra nsport document, as follows: “Control temperature: … ° C Emergency temperature: … ° C” . △ △ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 299

289 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.4 – Documentation 5 5.4.1.5.5.1 When, for certain self-reactive substa nces and polymerizing substances of class 4 . 1 and organic peroxides of class 5 . 2, the competent authority has permitted t he “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label (model No . 1) to be dispensed with for the specific packa ge, a statement to this effect shall be included . 5.4.1.5.5.2 When organic peroxides and self-reacti ve substances are transported under conditions where approval is required (for organic peroxides, see 2 . 5 . 3 . 2 . 5, 4 . 1 . 7 . 2 . 2, 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 1 and 4 . 2 . 1 . 13 . 3; for self-reactive substances, see 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 2 . 4 and 4 . 1 . 7 . 2 . 2), a statement to this effect shall be includ ed in the dangerous goods transport document . A copy of the classification approval and co nditions of transport for non-listed organic peroxides and self-reactive substances shall be attached to the dangerous goods transport document . 5.4.1.5.5.3 When a sample of an organic peroxide (see 2 . 5 . 3 . 2 . 5 . 1) or a self-reactive substance (see 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 2 . 4 . 2) is transported, a statement to this effect s hall be included in the dangerous goods transport document . 5.4.1.5.6 Infectious substances The full address of the consignee shall be shown on the document, together with the name of a responsible person and his telephone number . 5.4.1.5.7 Radioactive material 5.4.1.5.7.1 The following information shall be inclu ded for each consignment of class 7 material, as applicable, in the order given: .1 the name or symbol of each radionuclide or, fo r mixtures of radionuclides, an appropriate general description or a list of the most restrictive nuclides; .2 a description of the physical and chemical f orm of the material, or a notation that the material is special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material . A generic chemical description is acce ptable for chemical form; .3 the maximum activity of the radioactive co ntents during transport expressed in units of becquerels (Bq) with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1 . 2 . 2 . 1) . For fissile material, the mass of fissile mat erial (or mass of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in units of grams (g), or appropriate multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity; .4 the category of the package, overpack or fre ight container, as assigned per paragraph 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 4, i . e . I-WHITE, II-YELLOW, III-YELLOW; . 5 the TI as determined per paragraphs 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 and 5 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 2 (except for category I-WHITE); .6 for fissile material: .1 shipped under one exception of 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 1 to 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6, reference to that paragraph; .2 shipped under 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 1 to 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 5, the total mass of fissile nuclides; .3 contained in a package for which one of 6 . 4 . 11 . 2 (a) to (c) or 6 . 4 . 11 . 3 is applied, reference to that paragraph; .4 the criticality safety index, where appl icable . .7 the identification mark for each competent authority certificate of approval (special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material, fissile material excepted under 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6, special arrangement, package design, or shipment) applicable to the consignment; .8 for consignments of more than one package, t he information contained in 5 . 4 . 1 . 4 . 1 . 1 to . 3 and 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 7 . 1 . 1 to . 7 shall be given for each package . For packages in an overpack, freight cont ainer, or conveyance, a detailed statement of the contents of each package within the overpack, freight container, or conveyance and, where appropriate, of eac h overpack, freight container, or conveyance shall be included . If packages are to be removed from the overpack, freight container, or conveyance at a point of intermediate unloading, appropriate transport documents shall be made available; .9 where a consignment is required to be shippe d under exclusive use, the statement “EXCLUSIVE USE SHIPMENT”; and .10 for LSA-II, LSA-III, SCO-I, SCO-II and SCO -III, the total activity of the consignment as a multiple of A 2 . For radioactive material for which the A 2 value is unlimited, the multiple of A 2 shall be zero . 5.4.1.5.7.2 The transport document shall include a sta tement regarding actions, if any, that are required to be taken by the carrier . The statement shall be in the languages dee med necessary by the carrier or the authorities concerned, and shall include at least the following points: .1 supplementary requirements for loadi ng, stowage, transport, handling and unloading of the package, overpack or freight container, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat (see 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 2), or a statement that no such requirements a re necessary; .2 restrictions on the mode of transport or con veyance and any necessary routeing instructions; .3 emergency arrangements appropriate to t he consignment . △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 300

290 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 5.4.1.5.7.3 In all cases of international transport of p ackages requiring competent authority approval of design or shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, the UN number and proper shipping name required in 5 . 4 . 1 . 4 . 1 shall be in accordance with the certificate o f the country of origin of design . 5.4.1.5.7.4 The applicable competent authority certificates need not necessarily accompany the consignment . The consignor shall make them available to t he carrier(s) before loading and unloading . 5.4.1.5.8 Aerosols If the capacity of an aerosol is above 1000 mL, this shall be declared in the transport document . 5.4.1.5.9 Explosives The following information shall be included for each consignment of class 1 goods, as applicable: .1 Entries have been included for “SUBST ANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N . O . S . ”, “ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N . O . S . ”, and “COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N . O . S . ” . When a specific entry does not exist, the comp etent authority of the country of origin shall use the entry appropriate to the hazard division and compatibility group . The transport document shall contain th e statement: “Transport under this entry approved by the competent authority of …” followed by the State’s distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic * of the country of the competent authority . .2 The transport of explosive substances fo r which a minimum water or phlegmatizer content is specified in the individual entry is prohibited when containing less water or phlegmatizer than the specified minimum . Such substances shall only be transport ed with special authorization granted by the competent authority of the country of origin . The transport document shall contain th e statement “Transport under this entry approved by the competent authority of …” followed by the State’s distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic * of the country of the competent authority . .3 When explosive substances or articles ar e packaged “as approved by the competent authority”, the transport document shall contain the statement “Packaging approved by the competent authority of …” followed by the State’s distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic * of the country of the competent authority . .4 There are some hazards which are not indicated by the hazard division and compatibility group of a substance . The shipper shall provide an indication o f any such hazards on the dangerous goods documentation . 5.4.1.5.10 Viscous substances When viscous substances are transported in accordance with 2 . 3 . 2 . 5, the following statement shall be includ ed in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 2 . 3 . 2 . 5 of the IMDG Code . ” . 5.4.1.5.11 Special provisions for segregation 5.4.1.5.11.1 For substances, mixtures, solutions or p reparations classified under N . O . S . entries not included in the segregation g roups listed in 3 . 1 . 4 . 4 but belonging, in the opinion of the consign or, to one of these groups (see 3 . 1 . 4 . 2), the appropriate segregation grou p name or segregation group code (SGG) listed in 7 . 2 . 5 . 2 preceded by the phrase “IMDG Code segregat ion group” shall be included in the transport document after the dangerous goods description . For example: “UN 1760 CORROSIVE LIQUID, N . O . S . (phosphoric acid, acetic acid) 8 III IMDG Co de segregation group 1 – Acids”; or “UN 1760 CORROSIVE LIQUID, N . O . S . (phosphoric acid, acetic acid) 8 III IMDG Co de segregation group SGG1 . 5.4.1.5.11.2 When substances are loaded together in a car go transport unit in accordance with 7 . 2 . 6 . 3, the following statement shall be include d in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 of the IMDG Code” . 5.4.1.5.11.3 When acid and alkali substances of class 8 are t ransported in the same cargo transport unit, whether in the same packaging or not, in accordance with 7 . 2 . 6 . 5, the following statement shall be i ncluded in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 7 . 2 . 6 . 5 of the IMDG Code” . 5.4.1.5.12 Transport of solid dangerous goods in bulk c ontainers For bulk containers other than freight containers, the following statement shall be included on the transport document (see 6 . 9 . 4 . 6): “Bulk container BK( x ) approved by the compet ent authority of …” Note: “( x )” shall be replaced with “1” or “2”, as app ropriate . * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 301

291 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.4 – Documentation 5 5.4.1.5.13 Transport of IBCs or portable tanks after th e date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection For transport in accordance with 4 . 1 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2, 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 6 . 2, 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 6 . 2 or 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 6 . 2, a statement to this effect shall be inclu ded in the transport document, as follows: “Transport in accordance with 4 . 1 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2”, “Transport in accordance with 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 6 . 2”, “Transport in accordance with 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 6 . 2” or “Transport in accordance with 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 6 . 2” as appropriate . 5.4.1.5.14 Dangerous goods in excepted quantities 5.4.1.5.14.1 When dangerous goods are transported acc ording to the exceptions for dangerous goods packed in excepted quantities provided for in column 7b of the Dangerous Goods List and chapter 3 . 5, the words “dangerous goods in except ed quantities” shall be included . 5.4.1.5.15 Firework classification reference When fireworks of UN Nos . 0333, 0334, 0335, 0336 and 0337 are transpor ted, the dangerous goods transport document shall include a classification reference(s) issued by the competent authority . The classification reference(s) shall c onsist of the competent authority’s state, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic, * the competent authority identification and a unique serial reference . Examples of such classification referenc es are: – GB/HSE123456 – D/BAM1234 – USA EX20091234 . 5.4.1.5.16 Classification where new data is availabl e (see 2.0.0.2) For transport in accordance with 2 . 0 . 0 . 2, a statement to this effect shall be include d in the transport document, as follows “Classified in accordance with 2 . 0 . 0 . 2” . 5.4.1.5.17 Transport of UN Nos. 3528, 3529 and 3530 For transport of UN Nos . 3528, 3529 and 3530, the transport docume nt shall contain the following additional statement “Transport in accordance with special provision 363” . 5.4.1.5.18 Actual holding time In the case of portable tanks carrying refrigerated liquefied gases the consignor shall enter in the transport document the date at which the actual holding time ends, in the following format: “END OF HOLDING TIME:… .. (DD/MM/YYYY)” 5.4.1.6 Certification 5.4.1.6.1 The dangerous goods transport document shall include a certification or declaration that the consignment is acceptable for transport and that the goods are properly packaged, marked and labelled, and in proper condition for transport in accordance with the applicable regulations . The text for this certification is: “I hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described above/below † by the proper shipping name, and are classified, packaged, marked and labelled/placarded, and are in all respects in proper condition for transport according to applicable international and national government regulations . ” The certification shall be signed and dated b y the consignor . Facsimile signatures are acceptable where applicable laws and regulations recognize the legal validity of facsimile signatures . 5.4.1.6.2 If the dangerous goods documentation is pr esented to the carrier by means of EDP or EDI transmission techniques, the signature(s) may be electronic signature(s) or may be replaced by the name(s) (in capitals) of the person authorized to sign . 5.4.1.6.3 When the dangerous goods transport infor mation is given to a carrier by EDP or EDI techniques and subsequently the dangerous goods are transferred to a carrier that requires a paper dangerous goods transport document, the carrier shall ensure that the paper document indicates “Original received electronically” and the name of the signatory shall be shown in capital letters . * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . † As appropriate . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 302

292 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate 5.4.2.1 When dangerous goods are packed or loaded into a ny container * or vehicle, those responsible for packing the container or vehicle shall provide a “container/vehicle packing certificate” specifying the container/ vehicle identification number(s) and certifying that the operation has been carried out in accordance with the following conditions: .1 The container/vehicle was clean, dry and a pparently fit to receive the goods; .2 Packages which need to be segregated in acc ordance with applicable segregation requirements have not been packed together onto or in the container/vehicle (unless approved by the competent authority concerned in accordance with 7 . 3 . 4 . 1); .3 All packages have been externally inspect ed for damage, and only sound packages have been loaded; .4 Drums have been stowed in an upright positio n, unless otherwise authorized by the competent authority, and all goods have been properly loaded and, where necessary, adequately braced with securing material to suit the mode(s) † of transport for the intended journey; .5 Goods loaded in bulk have been evenly distri buted within the container/vehicle; .6 For consignments including goods of clas s 1 other than division 1 . 4, the container/vehicle is structural ly serviceable in accordance with 7 . 1 . 2; .7 The container/vehicle and packages are prop erly marked, labelled and placarded, as appropriate; .8 When substances presenting a risk of asphy xiation are used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951)), the container/vehicle is externally marked in accordance with 5 . 5 . 3 . 6; and .9 A dangerous goods transport document, as i ndicated in 5 . 4 . 1, has been received for each dangerous good s consignment loaded in the container/vehicle . Note: The container/vehicle packing cer tificate is not required for portable tanks . 5.4.2.2 The information required in the dangerou s goods transport document and the container/vehicle packing certificate may be incorporated into a single document; if not, these documents shall be attached . If the information is incorporated into a s ingle document, the document shall include a signed declaration such as “It is declared that the packing of the goods into the container/vehicle has been carried out in accordance with the applicable provisions” . This declaration shall be dated and the per son signing this declaration shall be identified on the document . Facsimile signatures are acceptable where applicable laws and regulations recognize the legal validity of facsimile signatures . 5.4.2.3 If the container/vehicle packing certi ficate is presented to the carrier by means of EDP or EDI transmission techniques, the signature(s) may be electronic signature(s) or may be replaced by the name(s) (in capitals) of the person authorized to sign . 5.4.2.4 When the container/vehicle packing cer tificate is given to a carrier by EDP or EDI techniques and subsequently the dangerous goods are transferred to a carrier that requires a paper container/vehicle packing certificate, the carrier shall ensure that the paper document indicates “Original received electronically” and the name of the signatory shall be shown in capital letters . 5.4.3 Documentation required aboard the ship 5.4.3.1 Each ship carrying dangerous goods and mar ine pollutants shall have a special list, manifest ‡ or stowage plan setting out, in accordance with regulation VII/4 . 2 of SOLAS, as amended, and with regulation 4 . 2 of Annex III of MARPOL, the dangerous goods ( except dangerous goods in excepted packages of class 7) and marine pollutants and the location thereof . This special list or manifest sha ll be based on the documentation and certification required in this Code . It shall contain in addition to the informa tion in 5 . 4 . 1 . 4, 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 and, for UN 3359, in 5 . 5 . 2 . 4 . 1 . 1, the stowage location and the total quanti ty of dangerous goods and marine pollutants . A detailed stowage plan, which identifie s by class and sets out the location of all dangerous goods and marine pollutants, may be used in place of such special list or manifest . 5.4.3.2 Each ship carrying excepted packages of cl ass 7 shall have a special list, manifest or stowage plan setting out these excepted packages and the location thereof . This special list or manifest shall be base d upon the documents listed in 5 . 1 . 5 . 4 . 2 . 1 . * See definition of ‘‘freight container” in 1 . 2 . 1 . † See CTU Code . ‡ Refer to Amendments to the Annex to the Convention on Facilitation of International Maritime Traffic, 1965 (resolution FAL . 12(40), adopted on 8 April 2016) . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 303

293 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.4 – Documentation 5 5.4.3.3 A copy of the documents according to 5 . 4 . 3 . 1 and, if applicable, 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 shall be made available before departure to the person or organization designated by the port State authority . 5.4.3.4 Emergency response information 5.4.3.4.1 For consignments of dangerous goods, ap propriate information shall be immediately available at all times for use in emergency response to accidents and incidents involving dangerous goods in transport . The information shall be available away from packages containing the dangerous goods and immediately accessible in the event of an incident . Methods of compliance include: .1 appropriate entries in the special list, m anifest or dangerous goods transport document; or .2 provision of a separate document such as a saf ety data sheet; or .3 provision of separate documentation, s uch as the Revised Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods (EmS Guide) for use in conjunction with the transport document and the Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG) . 5.4.4 Other required information and documenta tion 5.4.4.1 In certain circumstances, special cert ificates or other documents are required such as: .1 a weathering certificate; as required in th e individual entries of the Dangerous Goods List; .2 a certificate exempting a substance , material or article from the provisions of the IMDG Code (such as, see individual entries for charcoal, fish meal, seed cake); .3 for new self-reactive substances an d organic peroxides or new formulation of currently assigned self-reactive substances and organic peroxides, a statement by the competent authority of the country of origin of the approved classification and conditions of transport . 5.4.5 Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form 5.4.5.1 This form meets the requirements of SOLAS, c hapter VII, regulation 4, MARPOL, Annex III, regulation 4 and the provisions of this chapter . The information required by the provisi ons of this chapter is mandatory; however, the layout of this form is not mandatory . This form may be used as a combined dangerous go ods transport document and container/vehicle packing certificate for multimodal carriage of dangerous goods . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 304

294 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 MULTIMODAL DANGEROUS GOODS FORM 1 Shipper/Consignor/Sender 2 Transport document number 3 Page 1 of pages 4 Shipper’s reference 5 Freight forwarder’s reference 6 Consignee 7 Carrier (to be completed by the carrier) SHI PPER’S DECLARATION I hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described below by the proper shipping name, and are classified, packaged, marked and labelled/placarded and are in all respects in proper condition for transport according to the applicable international and national governmental regulations . 8 This shipment is within the limitations pr escribed for: (Delete non-applicable) 9 Additional handling information PASSENG ER AND CARGO AIRCRAFT CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY 10 Vessel/flight No . and date 11 Port/place of loading 12 Port/place of discharge 13 Destination 14 Shipping marks Number and kind of packages; description o f goods * Gross mass (kg) Net mass (kg) Cube (m 3 ) 15 Container identification No . / vehicle registration No . 16 Seal number(s) 17 Container/vehicle size and type 18 Tare mass (kg) 19 Total gross mass (including tare) (kg) CONT AINER/VEHICLE PACKING CERTIFICATE I hereby declare that the goods described above have been packed/ loaded into the container/vehicle identified above in accordance with the applicable provisions . † MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED FOR ALL CONTAINER/ VEHICLE LOADS BY PERSON RESPONSIBLE FOR PACKING/ LOADING 21 RECEIVING ORGANISATION RECEIPT Received t he above number of packages/containers/trailers in apparent good order and condition, unless stated hereon: RECEIVING ORGANISATION REMARKS: 20 Name of company Haulier’s name Vehicle regist ration No . Signature and date 22 Name of company (OF SHIPPER PREPARING THIS NOTE) Name/status of declarant Name/status of declarant Place and date Place and date Signature of declarant DRIVER’S SIGNATURE Signature of declarant * DANGEROUS GOODS: You must specify: UN No . , proper shipping name, hazard class, pac king group (where assigned), marine pollutant and observe the mandatory requirements under applicable national and international governmental regulations . For the purposes of the IMDG Code, see 5 . 4 . 1 . 4 . † For the purposes of the IMDG Code, see 5 . 4 . 2 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 305

295 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.4 – Documentation 5 Documentary Aspects of the International Transport of Dangerous Goods Container/Vehicle Packing Certificate The signature given overleaf in box 20 must be that of the person controlling the container/vehicle operation . It is certified that: The container/vehic le was clean, dry and apparently fit to receive the goods . If the consignments include goods of class 1 , other than division 1 . 4, the container/vehicle is structural ly serviceable . No incompatible goods have been packe d into the container/vehicle unless specially authorized by the competent authority . All packages have been externally inspec ted for damage and only sound packages packed . Drums have been stowed in an upright positio n unless otherwise authorized by the competent authority . All packages have been properly packed and sec ured in the container/vehicle . When materials are transported in bulk packagings, the cargo has been evenly dist ributed in the container/vehicle . The packages and the container/vehicle have b een properly marked, labelled and placarded . Any irrelevant mark, labels and placards hav e been removed . When substances presenting a risk of asphy xiation are used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951)), the container/vehicle is externally marked in accordance with 5 . 5 . 3 . 6 . When this Dangerous Goods Form is used as a c ontainer/vehicle packing certificate only, not a combined document, a dangerous goods Declaration signed by the shipper or s upplier must have been issued/received to cover each dangerous goods consignment packed in the container/vehicle . Note: The container/vehicle packing certific ate is not required for tanks . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 306

296 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 MULTIMODAL DANGEROUS GOODS FORM Continuation sheet 1 Shipper/Consignor/Sender 2 Transport document number 3 Page of pages 4 Shipper’s reference 5 Freight forwarder’s reference 14 Shipping marks Number and kind of packages; description o f goods * Gross mass (kg) Net mass (kg) Cube (m 3 ) * DANGEROUS GOODS: You must specify: UN No . , proper shipping name, hazard class, pac king group (where assigned), marine pollutant and observe the mandatory requirements under applicable national and international governmental regulations . For the purposes of the IMDG Code, see 5 . 4 . 1 . 4 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 307

297 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.4 – Documentation 5 5.4.6 Retention of dangerous goods transport in formation 5.4.6.1 The consignor and the carrier shall retain a c opy of the dangerous goods transport document and additional information and documentation as specified in this Code, for a minimum period of three months . 5.4.6.2 When the documents are kept electronical ly or in a computer system, the consignor and the carrier shall be able to reproduce them in a printed form . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 308

5 5 298 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.5 Special provisions 5.5.1 [Reserved] 5.5.2 Special provisions applicable to fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359) * 5.5.2.1 General 5.5.2.1.1 Fumigated cargo transport units (UN 33 59) containing no other dangerous goods are not subject to any provisions of this Code other than those of this section . 5.5.2.1.2 When the fumigated cargo transport unit is l oaded with dangerous goods in addition to the fumigant, any provision of this Code relevant to these goods (including placarding, marking and documentation) applies in addition to the provisions of this section . 5.5.2.1.3 Only cargo transport units that can be close d in such a way that the escape of gas is reduced to a minimum shall be used for the transport of cargo under fumigation . 5.5.2.1.4 The provisions of 3 . 2 and 5 . 4 . 3 apply to all fumigated cargo transport uni ts (UN 3359) . 5.5.2.2 Training Persons engaged in the handling of fumigated cargo transport units shall be trained commensurate with their responsibilities . 5.5.2.3 Marking and placarding 5.5.2.3.1 A fumigated cargo transport unit shall be ma rked with a warning mark, as specified in 5 . 5 . 2 . 3 . 2, affixed at each access point in a location whe re it will be easily seen by persons opening or entering the cargo transport unit . This mark shall remain on the cargo transpo rt unit until the following provisions are met: .1 the fumigated cargo transport unit has bee n ventilated to remove harmful concentrations of fumigant gas; and .2 the fumigated goods or materials have be en unloaded . 5.5.2.3.2 The fumigation warning mark shall be as show n in the figure below . THIS UNIT IS UNDER FUMIGATION WITH ( fumigant name * ) APPLIED ON ( date * ) ( time * ) VENTILATED ON ( date * ) DANGER DO NOT ENTER * Insert details as appropriate. Minimum dimension 300 mm Minimum dimension 400 mm Fumigation warning mark * Refer to the Revised Recommendations on the safe use of pesticides in ships applicable to the fumigation of cargo transport units (MSC . 1/Circ . 1361) . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 309

299 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.5 – Special provisions 5 The mark shall be a rectangle . The minimum dimensions shall be 400 mm wide × 300 mm high and the minimum width of the outer line shall be 2 mm . The mark shall be in black print on a white ba ckground with lettering not less than 25 mm high . Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown . The method of marking shall be such that this in formation will still be identifiable on cargo transport units surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea . In considering suitable marking metho ds, account shall be taken of the ease with which the surface of the cargo transport unit can be marked . 5.5.2.3.3 If the fumigated cargo transport unit has be en completely ventilated either by opening the doors of the unit or by mechanical ventilation after fumigation, the date of ventilation shall be marked on the fumigation warning mark . 5.5.2.3.4 When the fumigated cargo transport unit ha s been ventilated and unloaded, the fumigation warning mark shall be removed . 5.5.2.3.5 Class 9 placards (Model No . 9, see 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2) shall not be affixed to a fumigated cargo tr ansport unit except as required for other class 9 substances or articles packed therein . 5.5.2.4 Documentation 5.5.2.4.1 Documents associated with the transpor t of cargo transport units that have been fumigated and have not been completely ventilated before transport shall include the following information: .1 UN 3359, fumigated cargo transport unit, 9 , or UN 3359, fumigated cargo transport unit, class 9; .2 The date and time of fumigation; and .3 The type and amount of the fumigant used . 5.5.2.4.2 The transport document may be in any form, pro vided it contains the information required in 5 . 5 . 2 . 4 . 1 . This information shall be easy to identif y, legible and durable . 5.5.2.4.3 Instructions for disposal of any residua l fumigant including fumigation devices (if used) shall be provided . 5.5.2.4.4 A document is not required when the fumigate d cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated and the date of ventilation has been marked on the warning mark (see 5 . 5 . 2 . 3 . 3 and 5 . 5 . 2 . 3 . 4) . 5.5.2.5 Additional provisions 5.5.2.5.1 Fumigants shall not be applied to the conten ts of a cargo transport unit once it has been loaded aboard the ship . 5.5.2.5.2 Cargo transport units shall be fumigated i n accordance with the requirements determined by the competent authority, to ensure a sufficient period has elapsed to attain a reasonable uniform gas concentration throughout the cargo in it . Twenty-four hours is normally sufficie nt for this purpose . 5.5.2.5.3 The master shall be informed prior to the load ing of a fumigated cargo transport unit . 5.5.3 Special provisions applicable to packages and cargo transport units containing substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation when used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951) or nitrogen) Note 1: See also 1 . 1 . 1 . 7 . Note 2: In the context of this section the term “ conditioning” may be used in a broader scope and includes protection . 5.5.3.1 Scope 5.5.3.1.1 This section is not applicable to substanc es which may be used for cooling or conditioning purposes when transported as a consignment of dangerous goods . When they are transported as a consignmen t, these substances shall be transported under the relevant entry of the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3 . 2 in accordance with the associated conditio ns of transport . 5.5.3.1.2 This section is not applicable to gases in coo ling cycles . 5.5.3.1.3 Dangerous goods used for cooling or condit ioning portable tanks or MEGCs during transport are not subject to this section . 5.5.3.1.4 Cargo transport units containing subst ances used for cooling or conditioning purposes include cargo transport units containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes inside packages as well as cargo transport units with unpackaged substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes . ⊗ △ △ △ △ △ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 310

300 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 5.5.3.2 General 5.5.3.2.1 Cargo transport units containing s ubstances used for cooling or conditioning purposes (other than fumigation) during transport are not subject to any provisions of this Code other than those of this section . 5.5.3.2.2 When dangerous goods are loaded in cargo tra nsport units containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes, any provisions of this Code relevant to these dangerous goods apply in addition to the provisions of this section . For dangerous goods for which temperatu re control is required see also 7 . 3 . 7 . 5.5.3.2.3 [Reserved] 5.5.3.2.4 Persons engaged in the handling or transpo rt of cargo transport units containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes shall be trained commensurate with their responsibilities . 5.5.3.3 Packages containing a coolant or condit ioner 5.5.3.3.1 Packaged dangerous goods requiring coo ling or conditioning assigned to packing instructions P203, P620, P650, P800, P901 or P904 of 4 . 1 . 4 . 1 shall meet the appropriate requirement s of that packing instruction . 5.5.3.3.2 For packaged dangerous goods requiring co oling or conditioning assigned to other packing instructions, the packages shall be capable of withstanding very low temperatures and shall not be affected or significantly weakened by the coolant or conditioner . Packages shall be designed and co nstructed to permit the release of gas to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packaging . The dangerous goods shall be pack ed in such a way to prevent movement after the dissipation of any coolant or conditioner . 5.5.3.3.3 Packages containing a coolant or conditi oner shall be transported in well-ventilated cargo transport units . 5.5.3.4 Marking of packages containing a coola nt or conditioner 5.5.3.4.1 Packages containing dangerous goods u sed for cooling or conditioning shall be marked with the proper shipping name of these dangerous goods followed by the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” as appropriate . 5.5.3.4.2 The marks shall be durable, legible and plac ed in such a location and of such a size relative to the package as to be readily visible . 5.5.3.5 Cargo transport units containing unpackag ed dry ice 5.5.3.5.1 If dry ice in unpackaged form is used, it shal l not come into direct contact with the metal structure of a cargo transport unit to avoid embrittlement of the metal . Measures shall be taken to provide adeq uate insulation between the dry ice and the cargo transport unit by providing a minimum of 30 mm separation (e . g . by using suitable low heat conducting mat erials such as timber planks, pallets, etc . ) . 5.5.3.5.2 Where dry ice is placed around packages, mea sures shall be taken to ensure that packages remain in the original position during transport after the dry ice has dissipated . 5.5.3.6 Marking of cargo transport units 5.5.3.6.1 Cargo transport units containing dange rous goods used for cooling or conditioning purposes shall be marked with a warning mark, as specified in 5 . 5 . 3 . 6 . 2 affixed at each access point in a location wher e it will be easily seen by persons opening or entering the cargo transport unit . This mark shall remain on the cargo transpo rt unit until the following provisions are met: .1 the cargo transport unit has been ventilat ed to remove harmful concentrations of coolant or conditioner; and .2 the cooled or conditioned goods have been un loaded . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 311

301 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 5.5 – Special provisions 5 5.5.3.6.2 The warning mark shall be as shown in the figure be low . * WARNING Minimum dimension 150 mm Minimum dimension 250 mm Asphyxiation warning mark for cargo transport units * Insert proper shipping name or the name of the a sphyxiant gas used as the coolant/conditioner . The lettering shall be in capitals, all be on o ne line and shall be at least 25 mm high . If the length of the proper shipping name is to o long to fit in the space provided, the lettering may be reduced to the maximum size possible to fit . For example: CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID . Additional information such as “AS COOL ANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” may be added . The mark shall be a rectangle . The minimum dimensions shall be 150 mm wide × 250 mm high . The word “WARNING” shall be in red or white and b e at least 25 mm high . Where dimensions are not specified, all fea tures shall be in approximate proportion to those shown . The method of marking shall be such that this in formation will still be identifiable on cargo transport units surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea . In considering suitable marking metho ds, account shall be taken of the ease with which the surface of the cargo transport unit can be marked . 5.5.3.7 Documentation 5.5.3.7.1 Documents associated with the transpor t of cargo transport units containing or having contained substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes and have not been completely ventilated before transport shall include the following information: .1 the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”; an d .2 the proper shipping name followed by the wor ds “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER”, as appropriate . For example: UN 1845, CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLI D, AS COOLANT . 5.5.3.7.2 The transport document may be in any form, pro vided it contains the information required in 5 . 5 . 3 . 7 . 1 . This information shall be easy to identif y, legible and durable . △ △ △ ⊗ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 312

302 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Part 5 – Consignment procedures 5 5.5.4 Dangerous goods in equipment in use or intended f or use during transport 5.5.4.1 Dangerous goods (e . g . lithium batteries, fuel cell cartridg es) contained in equipment such as data loggers and cargo tracking devices, attached to or placed in packages, overpacks, containers or load compartments are not subject to any provisions of this Code other than 7 . 3 . 5 and the following: .1 the equipment shall be in use or intended for us e during transport; .2 the contained dangerous goods (e . g . lithium batteries, fuel cell cartridg es) shall meet the applicable construction and test requirements specified in this Code; and .3 the equipment shall be capable of withstan ding the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport and shall be safe for use in the dangerous environments to which it may be exposed . 5.5.4.2 When such equipment containing dangero us goods is transported as a consignment, the relevant entry of the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3 . 2 shall be used and all applicable provision s of this Code shall apply . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 313

6 PART 6 CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING OF PACKAGINGS, INTERMEDIATE BULK CONTAINERS (IBCs), LARGE PACKAGINGS, PORTABLE TANKS, MULTIPLE-ELEMENT GAS CONTAINERS (MEGCs) AND ROAD TANK VEHICLES Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 314

6 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 315

305 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Chapter 6.1 P rovisions for the construction and testing of packagings 6.1.1 Applicability and general provisions 6.1.1.1 Applicability The provisions in this chapter do not apply to: .1 pressure receptacles; .2 packages containing radioactive material, w hich shall comply with the Regulations of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), except that: (i) radioactive material possessing other dan gerous properties (subsidiary hazards) shall also comply with special provision 172 in chapter 3 . 3; and (ii) low specific activity (LSA) material and su rface contaminated objects (SCO) may be carried in certain packagings defined in this Code provided that the supplementary provisions set out in the IAEA Regulations are also met; .3 packages whose net mass exceeds 400 kg; .4 packagings for liquids, other than combinat ion packagings, with capacity exceeding 450 L; and .5 packagings for class 6 . 2 infectious substances of Category A exce pt for UN 3549 . 6.1.1.2 General provisions 6.1.1.2.1 The provisions for packagings in 6 . 1 . 4 are based on packagings currently used . In order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of packagings having specifications different from those in 6 . 1 . 4, provided that they are equally effectiv e, acceptable to the competent authority and able successfully to withstand the tests described in 6 . 1 . 1 . 2 and 6 . 1 . 5 . Methods of testing other than those descr ibed in this chapter are acceptable, provided that they are equivalent . 6.1.1.2.2 Every packaging intended to contain liqu ids shall successfully undergo a suitable leakproofness test . This test is part of a quality assurance prog ramme as stipulated in 6 . 1 . 1 . 3 which shows the capability of meeting the a ppropriate test level indicated in 6 . 1 . 5 . 4 . 4: .1 before it is first used for transport; .2 after remanufacturing or reconditioning, b efore it is re-used for transport . For this test, packagings need not have thei r own closures fitted . The inner receptacle of a composite packaging m ay be tested without the outer packaging provided the test results are not affected . This test is not necessary for an inner packag ing of a combination packaging . 6.1.1.2.3 Receptacles, parts of receptacles and cl osures (stoppers) made of plastics which may be directly in contact with a dangerous substance shall be resistant to it and shall not incorporate materials which may react dangerously or form hazardous compounds or lead to softening, weakening or failure of the receptacle or closure . 6.1.1.2.4 Plastics packagings shall be adequately res istant to ageing and to degradation caused either by the substance contained or by ultraviolet radiation . Any permeation of the substance contain ed shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport . 6.1.1.3 Packagings shall be manufactured, recon ditioned and tested under a quality-assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each packaging meets the provisions of this chapter . Note: ISO 16106:2006, Packaging – Trans port packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001, provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed . 6.1.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distrib utors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this chapter . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 316

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 306 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.1.2 Code for designating types of packagings 6.1.2.1 The code consists of: .1 an Arabic numeral indicating the kind of pac kaging, such as drum, jerrican, etc . , followed by .2 one or more capital letters in Latin charact ers indicating the nature of the material, such as steel, wood, etc . , followed where necessary by .3 an Arabic numeral indicating the categor y of packaging within the type to which the packaging belongs . 6.1.2.2 In the case of composite packagings, two cap ital letters in Latin characters shall be used in sequence in the second position of the code . The first indicates the material of the inne r receptacle and the second that of the outer packaging . 6.1.2.3 In the case of combination packagings, only t he code number for the outer packaging shall be used . 6.1.2.4 The letters ‘T’, ‘V’ or ‘W’ may follow the packag ing code . The letter ‘T’ signifies a salvage packaging conf orming to the provisions of 6 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 11 . The letter ‘V’ signifies a special packagi ng conforming to the provisions of 6 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 7 . The letter ‘W’ signifies that the packagin g, although of the same type as that indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different to that in 6 . 1 . 4 but is considered equivalent under the pro visions of 6 . 1 . 1 . 2 . 6.1.2.5 The following numerals shall be used for the k inds of packaging: 1 Drum 2 [Reserved] 3 Jerrican 4 Box 5 Bag 6 Composite packaging 6.1.2.6 The following capital letters shall be use d for the types of material: A Steel (all types and surface treatments) B Aluminium C Natural wood D Plywood F Reconstituted wood G Fibreboard H Plastics material L Textile M Paper, multiwall N Metal (other than steel or aluminium) P Glass, porcelain or stoneware Note: “Plast ics material” is taken to include other polymeric materials such as rubber . 6.1.2.7 The following table indicates the codes to b e used for designating types of packagings depending on the kind of packagings, the material used for their construction and their category; it also refers to the paragraphs to be consulted for the appropriate provisions: Kind Material Category Code Paragraph 1 Drums A Steel non-removable head 1A1 6 . 1 . 4 . 1 removable head 1A2 B Aluminium non-removable head 1B1 6 . 1 . 4 . 2 removable head 1B2 D Plywood – 1D 6 . 1 . 4 . 5 G Fibre – 1G 6 . 1 . 4 . 7 H Plastics non-removable head 1H1 6 . 1 . 4 . 8 removable head 1H2 N Metal, other than steel or aluminium non-rem ovable head 1N1 6 . 1 . 4 . 3 removable head 1N2 2 [Reserved] Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 317

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings 307 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Kind Material Category Code Paragraph 3 Jerricans A Steel non-removable head 3A1 6 . 1 . 4 . 4 removable head 3A2 B Aluminium non-removable head 3B1 6 . 1 . 4 . 4 removable head 3B2 H Plastics non-removable head 3H1 6 . 1 . 4 . 8 removable head 3H2 4 Boxes A Steel – 4A 6 . 1 . 4 . 14 B Aluminium – 4B 6 . 1 . 4 . 14 C Natural wood ordinary 4C1 6 . 1 . 4 . 9 with sift-proof walls 4C2 D Plywood – 4D 6 . 1 . 4 . 10 F Reconstituted wood – 4F 6 . 1 . 4 . 11 G Fibreboard – 4G 6 . 1 . 4 . 12 H Plastics expanded 4H1 6 . 1 . 4 . 13 solid 4H2 N Metal, other than steel or aluminium – 4N 6 . 1 . 4 . 14 5 Bags H Woven plastics without inner lining or coatin g 5H1 6 . 1 . 4 . 16 sift-proof 5H2 water-resistant 5H3 H Plastics film – 5H4 6 . 1 . 4 . 17 L Textile without inner lining or coating 5L1 6 . 1 . 4 . 15 sift-proof 5L2 water-resistant 5L3 M Paper multiwall 5M1 6 . 1 . 4 . 18 multiwall, water-resistant 5M2 6 Composite packagings H Plastics receptacle in steel drum 6HA1 6 . 1 . 4 . 19 in steel crate or box 6HA2 6 . 1 . 4 . 19 in aluminium drum 6HB1 6 . 1 . 4 . 19 in aluminium crate or box 6HB2 6 . 1 . 4 . 19 in wooden box 6HC 6 . 1 . 4 . 19 in plywood drum 6HD1 6 . 1 . 4 . 19 in plywood box 6HD2 6 . 1 . 4 . 19 in fibre drum 6HG1 6 . 1 . 4 . 19 in fibreboard box 6HG2 6 . 1 . 4 . 19 in plastics drum 6HH1 6 . 1 . 4 . 19 in solid plastics box 6HH2 6 . 1 . 4 . 19 P Glass, porcelain or stoneware receptacle i n steel drum 6PA1 6 . 1 . 4 . 20 in steel crate or box 6PA2 6 . 1 . 4 . 20 in aluminium drum 6PB1 6 . 1 . 4 . 20 in aluminium crate or box 6PB2 6 . 1 . 4 . 20 in wooden box 6PC 6 . 1 . 4 . 20 in plywood drum 6PD1 6 . 1 . 4 . 20 in wickerwork hamper 6PD2 6 . 1 . 4 . 20 in fibre drum 6PG1 6 . 1 . 4 . 20 in fibreboard box 6PG2 6 . 1 . 4 . 20 in expanded plastics packaging 6PH1 6 . 1 . 4 . 20 in solid plastics packaging 6PH2 6 . 1 . 4 . 20 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 318

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 308 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.1.3 Marking Note 1: The marks indicate that the packaging which bears them correspond to a successfully tested design type and that it complies with the provisions of this chapter which are related to the manufacture, but not to the use, of the packaging . In itself, therefore, the marks do not nece ssarily confirm that the packaging may be used for any substance . The type of packaging (such as steel drum), i ts maximum capacity or mass, and any special provisions are specified for each substance or article in part 3 of this Code . Note 2: The marks are intended to be of assista nce to packaging manufacturers, reconditioners, packaging users, carriers and regulatory authorities . In relation to the use of a new pack aging, the original marks are a means for its manufacturer to identify the type and to indicate those performance test provisions that have been met . Note 3 : The marks do not always provid e full details of the test levels, etc . , and these may need to be taken furthe r into account, such as by reference to a test certificate, test reports or register of successfully tested packagings . For example, a packaging having an X or Y mark ma y be used for substances to which a packing group having a lesser degree of danger has been assigned, with the relevant maximum permissible value of the relative density * determined by taking into account the factor 1 . 5 or 2 . 25 indicated in the packaging test provis ions in 6 . 1 . 5 as appropriate, i . e . packing group I packaging tested f or products of relative density 1 . 2 could be used as a packing group II packaging fo r products of relative density 1 . 8 or packing group III packaging of relative d ensity 2 . 7, provided, of course, that all the performa nce criteria can still be met with the product having the higher relative density . 6.1.3.1 Each packaging intended for use accordin g to this Code shall bear marks which are durable, legible and placed in such a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible . For packages with a gross mass of more than 30 kg , the marks or a duplicate thereof shall appear on the top or on a side of the packaging . Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at l east 12 mm high, except for packagings of 30 L capacity or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and except for packagings of 5 L capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall be of an appropriate size . The marks shall show: (a) The United Nations packaging symbol: This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 6 . 3, 6 . 5, 6 . 6, 6 . 7 or 6 . 9 . For embossed metal packagings the capit al letters “UN” may be applied as the symbol . (b) The code designating the type of packaging according to 6 . 1 . 2 . (c) A code in two parts: (i) a letter designating the packing group or gr oups for which the design type has been successfully tested: “X” for packing groups I, II and III “Y” for packing groups II and III “Z” for packing group III only; (ii) the relative density, rounded off to the firs t decimal, for which the design type has been tested for packagings, without inner packagings, intended to contain liquids; this may be omitted when the relative density does not exceed 1 . 2 . For packagings intended to contain solids or inner packagings, the maximum gross mass in kilograms . (d) Either a letter “S”, denoting that the packag ing is intended for the transport of solids or inner packagings, or, for packagings (other than combination packagings) intended to contain liquids, the hydraulic test pressure which the packaging was shown to withstand in kilopascals, rounded down to the nearest 10 kPa . * Relative density ( d ) is considered to be synonymous with speci fic gravity (SG) and will be used throughout this text . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 319

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings 309 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (e) The last two digits of the year during which the packaging was manufactured . Packagings of types 1H and 3H shall also b e appropriately marked with the month of manufacture; this may be marked on the packaging in a different place from the remainder of the marks . An appropriate method is: * * The last two digits of the year of manufacture may be displayed at that place . In such a case and when the clock is placed adjac ent to the UN design type mark, the indication of the year in the mark may be waived . However, when the clock is not placed adjac ent to the UN design type mark, the two digits of the year in the mark and in the clock shall be identical . Note: Other methods that provide the m inimum required information in a durable, visible and legible form are also acceptable . (f) The State authorizing the allocation of th e mark, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic . * (g) The name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority . 6.1.3.2 In addition to the durable marks prescribe d in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1, every new metal drum of a capacity greater th an 100 L shall bear the marks described in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a) to (e) on the bottom, with an indication of th e nominal thickness of at least the metal used in the body (in millimetres, to 0 . 1 mm), in permanent form (such as embossed) . When the nominal thickness of either head o f a metal drum is thinner than that of the body, the nominal thickness of the top head, body and bottom head shall be marked on the bottom in permanent form (such as embossed), for example ‘1 . 0 – 1 . 2 – 1 . 0’ or ‘0 . 9 – 1 . 0 – 1 . 0’ . Nominal thicknesses of metal shall be det ermined according to the appropriate ISO standard, e . g . ISO 3574:1999 for steel . The marks indicated in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (f) and (g) shall not be applied in a permanent f orm (such as embossed) except as provided in 6 . 1 . 3 . 5 . 6.1.3.3 Every packaging other than those referre d to in 6 . 1 . 3 . 2 liable to undergo a reconditioning proce ss shall bear the marks indicated in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form . Marks are permanent if they are able to withs tand the reconditioning process (e . g . embossed) . For packagings other than metal drums of a ca pacity greater than 100 L, these permanent marks may replace the corresponding durable markings prescribed in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 . 6.1.3.4 For remanufactured metal drums, if there i s no change to the packaging type and no replacement or removal of integral structural components, the required marks need not be permanent (such as embossed) . Every other remanufactured metal dr um shall bear the marks in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form (such as embosse d) on the top head or side . 6.1.3.5 Metal drums made from materials (such as sta inless steel) designed to be re-used repeatedly may bear the marks indicated in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (f) and (g) in a permanent (such as embossed) fo rm . 6.1.3.6 Packagings manufactured with recycle d plastics material as defined in 1 . 2 . 1 shall be marked “REC” . This mark shall be placed near the marks pres cribed in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 . 6.1.3.7 Marks shall be applied in the sequen ce of the subparagraphs in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1; each mark required in these subpar agraphs and when appropriate subparagraphs (h) to (j) of 6 . 1 . 3 . 8 shall be clearly separated, e . g . by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiab le . For examples, see 6 . 1 . 3 . 10 . Any additional marks authorized by a comp etent authority shall still enable the other marks required in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 to be correctly identified . 6.1.3.8 After reconditioning a packaging, the re conditioner shall apply to it, in sequence, durable marks showing: (h) the State in which the reconditioning was ca rried out, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic; * (i) the name of the reconditioner or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority; (j) the year of reconditioning; the letter “R” ; and, for every packaging successfully passing the leakproofness test in 6 . 1 . 1 . 2 . 2, the additional letter “L” . 6.1.3.9 When, after reconditioning, the marks re quired by 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a) to (d) no longer appear on the top head or the sid e of a metal drum, the reconditioner shall apply them in a durable form followed by those required by 6 . 1 . 3 . 8 (h), (i) and (j) . These marks shall not identify a greater pe rformance capability than that for which the original design type has been tested and marked . * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 320

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 310 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.1.3.10 Examples for marking for NEW packagings 4G/Y145/S/02 NL/VL823 as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (f) and (g ) For a new fibreboard box 1A1/Y1.4/150/98 NL/VL824 as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (f) and (g ) For a new steel drum to contain liquids 1A2/Y150/S/01 NL/VL825 as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (f) and (g ) For a new steel drum to contain solids or inner packagings 4HW/Y136/S/98 NL/VL826 as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (f) and (g ) For a new plastics box of a specification e quivalent to that indicated by the packaging code 1A2/Y/100/01 USA/MM5 as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (f) and (g ) For a remanufactured steel drum to co ntain liquids of relative density not exceeding 1 . 2 Note: For liquids, the marking of relative d ensity not exceeding 1 . 2 is optional; see 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (c)(ii) 6.1.3.11 Examples for marking for RECONDITIONED pa ckagings 1A1/Y1.4/150/97 NL/RB/01 RL as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 8 (h), (i) and (j) 1A2/Y150/S/99 USA/RB/00 R as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 8 (h), (i) and (j) 6.1.3.12 Examples for marking for SALVAGE packagi ngs 1A2T/Y300/S/01 USA/abc as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6 . 1 . 3 . 1 (f) and (g ) Note: The marking, for which example s are given in 6 . 1 . 3 . 10, 6 . 1 . 3 . 11 and 6 . 1 . 3 . 12, may be applied in a single line or in multiple l ines provided the correct sequence is respected . 6.1.3.13 Where a packaging conforms to one or more than o ne tested packaging design type, including one or more than one tested IBC or large packaging design type, the packaging may bear more than one mark to indicate the relevant performance test requirements that have been met . Where more than one mark appears on a packagi ng, the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall appear in its entirety . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 321

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings 311 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.1.4 Provisions for packagings 6.1.4.0 General provisions Any permeation of the substance contained in the packaging shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport . 6.1.4.1 Steel drums 1A1 non-removable head 1A2 removable head 6.1.4.1.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel s heet of suitable type and adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and the intended use . Note: For carbon steel drums, “suitable” st eels are identified in ISO 3573:1999, Hot rolled carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities, and ISO 3574:1999, Cold-reduced carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities . For carbon steel drums below 100 L, “suitabl e” steels in addition to the above standards are also identified in ISO 11949:1995, Cold-reduced electrolytic tinplate , ISO 11950:1995, Cold-reduced electrolytic chromium/ chromium oxide-coated steel , and ISO 11951:1995, Cold-reduced blackplate in coil form for the production of tinplate or electrolytic chromium/chromium oxide-coated steel. 6.1.4.1.2 Body seams of drums intended to contain more t han 40 L of liquid shall be welded . Body seams of drums intended to contain sol ids or 40 L or less of liquids shall be mechanically seamed or welded . 6.1.4.1.3 Chimes shall be mechanically seamed or wel ded . Separate reinforcing rings may be appli ed . 6.1.4.1.4 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 L sha ll, in general, have at least two expanded rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops . If there are separate rolling hoops, they s hall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift . Rolling hoops shall not be spot-welded . 6.1.4.1.5 Openings for filling, emptying and ventin g in the bodies or heads of drums with a non-removable head (1A1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter . Drums with larger openings are consider ed to be of the removable-head type (1A2) . Closures for openings in the bodies and hea ds of drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport . Closure flanges may be mechanically seam ed or welded in place . Gaskets or other sealing elements shall b e used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof . 6.1.4.1.6 Closure devices for removable-head dru ms shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of transport . Gaskets or other sealing elements shall b e used with all removable heads . 6.1.4.1.7 If materials used for body, heads, closure s and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents to be transported, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied . These coatings or treatments shall reta in their properties under normal conditions of transport . 6.1.4.1.8 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L . 6.1.4.1.9 Maximum net mass: 400 kg . 6.1.4.2 Aluminium drums 1B1 non-removable head 1B2 removable head 6.1.4.2.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of alumi nium at least 99% pure or of an aluminium-based alloy . Material shall be of a suitable type and of ade quate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and the intended use . 6.1.4.2.2 All seams shall be welded . Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by t he application of separate reinforcing rings . 6.1.4.2.3 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 L sha ll, in general, have at least two expanded rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops . If there are separate rolling hoops, they s hall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift . Rolling hoops shall not be spot-welded . 6.1.4.2.4 Openings for filling, emptying and ventin g in the bodies or heads of drums with a non-removable head (1B1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter . Drums with larger openings are consider ed to be of the removable-head type (1B2) . Closures for openings in the bodies and hea ds of drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport . Closure flanges shall be welded in place so th at the weld provides a leakproof seam . Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 322

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 312 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.1.4.2.5 Closure devices for removable-head dru ms shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of transport . Gaskets or other sealing elements shall b e used with all removable heads . 6.1.4.2.6 If materials used for body, heads, closure s and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents to be transported, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied . These coatings or treatments shall reta in their protective properties under normal conditions of transport . 6.1.4.2.7 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L . 6.1.4.2.8 Maximum net mass: 400 kg . 6.1.4.3 Drums of metal other than aluminium or steel 1N1 non-removable head 1N2 removable head 6.1.4.3.1 The body and heads shall be constructed of met al or metal alloy other than steel or aluminium . Material shall be of a suitable type and of ade quate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and to its intended use . 6.1.4.3.2 Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by th e application of separate reinforcing rings . All seams, if any, shall be joined (welded, so ldered, etc . ) in accordance with the technical state of th e art for the used metal or metal alloy . 6.1.4.3.3 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 L sha ll, in general, have at least two expanded rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops . If there are separate rolling hoops, they s hall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift . Rolling hoops shall not be spot-welded . 6.1.4.3.4 Openings for filling, emptying and ventin g in the bodies or heads of non-removable-head (1N1) drums shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter . Drums with larger openings are co nsidered to be of the removable-head type (1N2) . Closures for openings in the bodies and hea ds of drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport . Closure flanges shall be joined in place (we lded, soldered, etc . ) in accordance with the technical state of th e art for the used metal or metal alloy so that the seam join is leakproof . Gaskets or other sealing elements shal l be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof . 6.1.4.3.5 Closure devices for removable-head dru ms shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of transport . Gaskets or other sealing elements shall b e used with all removable heads . 6.1.4.3.6 If materials used for body, heads, closure s and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents to be transported, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied . These coatings or treatments shall reta in their protective properties under normal conditions of transport . 6.1.4.3.7 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L . 6.1.4.3.8 Maximum net mass: 400 kg . 6.1.4.4 Steel or aluminium jerricans 3A1 steel, non-removable head 3A2 steel, removable head 3B1 aluminium, non-removable head 3B2 aluminium, removable head 6.1.4.4.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel s heet, of aluminium at least 99% pure or of an aluminium-based alloy . Material shall be of a suitable type and of ade quate thickness in relation to the capacity of the jerrican and to its intended use . 6.1.4.4.2 Chimes of steel jerricans shall be mechani cally seamed or welded . Body seams of steel jerricans intended to c ontain more than 40 L of liquid shall be welded . Body seams of steel jerricans intended to c ontain 40 L or less shall be mechanically seamed or welded . For aluminium jerricans, all seams shal l be welded . Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by t he application of a separate reinforcing ring . 6.1.4.4.3 Openings in jerricans (3A1 and 3B1) shall no t exceed 7 cm in diameter . Jerricans with larger openings are cons idered to be of the removable-head type (3A2 and 3B2) . Closures shall be so designed that they wil l remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport . Gaskets or other sealing elements shall b e used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof . 6.1.4.4.4 If materials used for body, heads, closure s and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents to be transported, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied . These coatings or treatments shall reta in their protective properties under normal conditions of transport . ■ △ △ ■ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 323

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings 313 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.1.4.4.5 Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60 L . 6.1.4.4.6 Maximum net mass: 120 kg . 6.1.4.5 Plywood drums 1D 6.1.4.5.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commer cially dry and free from any defect likely to lessen the effectiveness of the drum for the purpose intended . If a material other than plywood is used for th e manufacture of the heads, it shall be of a quality equivalent to the plywood . 6.1.4.5.2 At least two-ply plywood shall be used for the b ody and at least three-ply plywood for the heads; the plies shall be firmly glued together by a water-resistant adhesive with their grain crosswise . 6.1.4.5.3 The body and heads of the drum and their jo ins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the drum and its intended use . 6.1.4.5.4 In order to prevent sifting of the contents, l ids shall be lined with kraft paper or some other equivalent material, which shall be securely fastened to the lid and extend to the outside along its full circumference . 6.1.4.5.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 250 L . 6.1.4.5.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg . 6.1.4.6 [ Reserved ] 6.1.4.7 Fibre drums 1G 6.1.4.7.1 The body of the drum shall consist of multiple p lies of heavy paper or fibreboard (without corrugations) firmly glued or laminated together and may include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc . 6.1.4.7.2 Heads shall be of natural wood, fibreboard, met al, plywood, plastics or other suitable material and may include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc . 6.1.4.7.3 The body and heads of the drum and their jo ins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the drum and its intended use . 6.1.4.7.4 The assembled packaging shall be sufficiently water-resistant so as not to delaminate under normal conditions of transport . 6.1.4.7.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L . 6.1.4.7.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg . 6.1.4.8 Plastics drums and jerricans 1H1 drums, non-removable head 1H2 drums, removable head 3H1 jerricans, non-removable head 3H2 jerricans, removable head 6.1.4.8.1 The packaging shall be manufactured fr om suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and intended use . Except for recycled plastics material as defi ned in 1 . 2 . 1, no used material other than production re sidues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used . The packaging shall be adequately resis tant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained or by ultraviolet radiation . 6.1.4.8.2 If protection against ultraviolet radi ation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors . These additives shall be compatible wit h the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the packaging . Where use is made of carbon black, pigments o r inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if the carbon black content does not exceed 2% by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3% by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultraviolet radiation is not limited . 6.1.4.8.3 Additives serving purposes other than pr otection against ultraviolet radiation may be included in the composition of the plastics material, provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical properties of the material of the packaging . In such circumstances, retesting may be w aived . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 324

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 314 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.1.4.8.4 The wall thickness at every point of the packa ging shall be appropriate to its capacity and intended use, taking into account the stresses to which each point is liable to be exposed . 6.1.4.8.5 Openings for filling, emptying and ventin g in the bodies or heads of non-removable-head drums (1H1) and jerricans (3H1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter . Drums and jerricans with larger opening s are considered to be of the removable-head type (1H2 and 3H2) . Closures for openings in the bodies or head s of drums and jerricans shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport . Gaskets or other sealing elements shall b e used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof . 6.1.4.8.6 Closure devices for removable-head dru ms and jerricans shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport . Gaskets shall be used with all removable he ads unless the drum or jerrican design is such that, where the removable head is properly secured, the drum or jerrican is inherently leakproof . 6.1.4.8.7 Maximum capacity of drums and jerricans: 1H1, 1H2: 450 L 3H1, 3H2: 60 L 6.1.4.8.8 Maximum net mass: 1H1, 1H2: 400 kg 3H1, 3H2: 120 kg 6.1.4.9 Boxes of natural wood 4C1 ordinary 4C2 with sift-proof walls 6.1.4.9.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commer cially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the box . The strength of the material used and the met hod of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box . The tops and bottoms may be made of water- resi stant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type . 6.1.4.9.2 Fastenings shall be resistant to vibrati on experienced under normal conditions of transport . Nailing into the end shall be avoided whene ver practicable . Joins which are likely to be highly stresse d shall be made using clenched or annular ring nails or equivalent fastenings . 6.1.4.9.3 Box 4C2: each part shall consist of one piece or b e equivalent thereto . Parts are considered equivalent to one pi ece when one of the following methods of glued assembly is used: Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint or butt joint, all with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint . 6.1.4.9.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg . 6.1.4.10 Plywood boxes 4D 6.1.4.10.1 Plywood used shall be at least three-ply . It shall be made from well-seasoned rotar y-cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the box . The strength of the material used and the met hod of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box . All adjacent plies shall be glued w ith water-resistant adhesive . Other suitable materials may be used t ogether with plywood in the construction of boxes . Boxes shall be firmly nailed or secured to cor ner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices . 6.1.4.10.2 Maximum net mass: 400 kg . 6.1.4.11 Reconstituted wood boxes 4F 6.1.4.11.1 The walls of boxes shall be made of water-resi stant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type . The strength of the material used and the met hod of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity of the boxes and their intended use . 6.1.4.11.2 Other parts of the boxes may be made of other suit able material . 6.1.4.11.3 Boxes shall be securely assembled by means o f suitable devices . 6.1.4.11.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg . 6.1.4.12 Fibreboard boxes 4G 6.1.4.12.1 Strong and good-quality solid or double- faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used, appropriate to the capacity of the box and to its intended use . The water resistance of the outer surface s hall Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 325

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings 315 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m 2 – see ISO 535:1991 . It shall have proper bending qualities . Fibreboard shall be cut, creased withou t scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending . The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shal l be firmly glued to the facings . 6.1.4.12.2 The ends of boxes may have a wooden frame or be enti rely of wood or other suitable material . Reinforcements of wooden battens or oth er suitable material may be used . 6.1.4.12.3 Manufacturing joins in the body of boxes sha ll be taped, lapped and glued or lapped and stitched with metal staples . Lapped joins shall have an appropriate ov erlap . 6.1.4.12.4 Where closing is effected by gluing or tapin g, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used . 6.1.4.12.5 Boxes shall be designed so as to provide a good fit t o the contents . 6.1.4.12.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg . 6.1.4.13 Plastics boxes 4H1 expanded plastics boxes 4H2 solid plastics boxes 6.1.4.13.1 The box shall be manufactured from suitabl e plastics material and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and intended use . The box shall be adequately resistant to ag eing and to degradation caused either by the substance contained or by ultraviolet radiation . 6.1.4.13.2 An expanded plastics box shall comprise tw o parts made of a moulded expanded plastics material, a bottom section containing cavities for the inner packagings and a top section covering and interlocking with the bottom section . The top and bottom sections shall be design ed so that the inner packagings fit snugly . The closure cap for any inner packaging sha ll not be in contact with the inside of the top section of this box . 6.1.4.13.3 For dispatch, an expanded plastics box shall be closed with a self-adhesive tape having sufficient tensile strength to prevent the box from opening . The adhesive tape shall be weather-resi stant and its adhesive compatible with the expanded plastics material of the box . Other closing devices at least equally e ffective may be used . 6.1.4.13.4 For solid plastics boxes, protection aga inst ultraviolet radiation, if required, shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors . These additives shall be compati ble with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the box . Where use is made of carbon black, pigments o r inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if the carbon black content does not exceed 2% by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3% by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultraviolet radiation is not limited . 6.1.4.13.5 Additives serving purposes other than pr otection against ultraviolet radiation may be included in the composition of the plastics material provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical properties of the material of the box . In such circumstances, retesting may be w aived . 6.1.4.13.6 Solid plastics boxes shall have closure de vices made of a suitable material of adequate strength and be so designed as to prevent the box from unintentional opening . 6.1.4.13.7 Maximum net mass: 4H1: 60 kg 4H2: 400 kg 6.1.4.14 Steel, aluminium or other metal boxes 4A steel boxes 4B aluminium boxes 4N metal, other than steel or aluminium, boxes 6.1.4.14.1 The strength of the metal and the constructi on of the box shall be appropriate to the capacity of the box and to its intended use . 6.1.4.14.2 Boxes shall be lined with fibreboard or felt pa cking pieces or shall have an inner liner or coating of suitable material, as required . If a double-seamed metal liner is used, step s shall be taken to prevent the ingress of substances, particularly explosives, into the recesses of the seams . 6.1.4.14.3 Closures may be of any suitable type; they sha ll remain secured under normal conditions of transport . 6.1.4.14.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 326

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 316 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.1.4.15 Textile bags 5L1 without inner lining or coating 5L2 sift-proof 5L3 water-resistant 6.1.4.15.1 The textiles used shall be of good qu ality . The strength of the fabric and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use . 6.1.4.15.2 Bags, sift-proof, 5L2: the bag shall be made si ft-proof, for example by the use of: .1 paper bonded to the inner surface of the bag by a wa ter-resistant adhesive such as bitumen; or .2 plastics film bonded to the inner surface of th e bag; or .3 one or more inner liners made of paper or plasti cs material . 6.1.4.15.3 Bags, water-resistant, 5L3: to prevent th e entry of moisture, the bag shall be made waterproof, for example by the use of: .1 separate inner liners of water-resista nt paper (such as waxed kraft paper, tarred paper or plastics-coated kraft paper); or .2 plastics film bonded to the inner surface of th e bag; or .3 one or more inner liners made of plastics mat erial . 6.1.4.15.4 Maximum net mass: 50 kg . 6.1.4.16 Woven plastics bags 5H1 without inner liner or coating 5H2 sift-proof 5H3 water-resistant 6.1.4.16.1 Bags shall be made from stretched tapes or monofilaments of a suitable plastics material . The strength of the material used and the con struction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use . 6.1.4.16.2 If the fabric is woven flat, the bags shall be made b y sewing or some other method ensuring closure of the bottom and one side . If the fabric is tubular, the bag shall be c losed by sewing, weaving or some other equally strong method of closure . 6.1.4.16.3 Bags, sift-proof, 5H2: the bag shall be made si ft-proof, for example by means of: .1 paper or a plastics film bonded to the inner surf ace of the bag; or .2 one or more separate inner liners made of pape r or plastics material . 6.1.4.16.4 Bags, water-resistant, 5H3: to prevent th e entry of moisture, the bag shall be made waterproof, for example by means of: .1 separate inner liners of water-resista nt paper (such as waxed kraft paper, double-tarred kraft paper or plastics-coated kraft paper); or .2 plastics film bonded to the inner or outer surf ace of the bag; or .3 one or more inner plastics liners . 6.1.4.16.5 Maximum net mass: 50 kg . 6.1.4.17 Plastics film bags 5H4 6.1.4.17.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable plastics mate rial . The strength of the material used and the con struction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use . Joins and closures shall withstand pres sures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of transport . 6.1.4.17.2 Maximum net mass: 50 kg . 6.1.4.18 Paper bags 5M1 multiwall 5M2 multiwall, water-resistant 6.1.4.18.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable kraft paper or of a n equivalent paper with at least three plies, the middle ply of which may be net-cloth with adhesive bonding to the outermost ply . The strength of the paper and the construct ion of the bags shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use . Joins and closures shall be sift-proof . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 327

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings 317 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.1.4.18.2 Bags 5M2: to prevent the entry of moisture, a ba g of four plies or more shall be made waterproof by the use of either a water-resistant ply as one of the two outermost plies or a water-resistant barrier made of a suitable protective material between the two outermost plies; a bag of three plies shall be made waterproof by the use of a water-resistant ply as the outermost ply . Where there is a danger of the substance cont ained reacting with moisture or where it is packed damp, a waterproof ply or barrier, such as double-tarred kraft paper, plastics-coated kraft paper, plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag, or one or more inner plastics liners, shall also be placed next to the substance . Joins and closures shall be waterproof . 6.1.4.18.3 Maximum net mass: 50 kg . 6.1.4.19 Composite packagings (plastics material) 6HA1 plastics receptacle with outer steel drum 6HA2 plastics receptacle with outer steel cra te or box 6HB1 plastics receptacle with outer alumini um drum 6HB2 plastics receptacle with outer alumini um crate or box 6HC plastics receptacle with outer wooden bo x 6HD1 plastics receptacle with outer plywood d rum 6HD2 plastics receptacle with outer plywood b ox 6HG1 plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum 6 HG2 plastics receptacle with outer fibreboa rd box 6HH1 plastics receptacle with outer plastic s drum 6HH2 plastics receptacle with outer solid pla stics box 6.1.4.19.1 Inner receptacle .1 The provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 8 . 1 and 6 . 1 . 4 . 8 . 3 to 6 . 1 . 4 . 8 . 6 shall apply to inner plastics receptacle s . .2 The inner plastics receptacle shall fit snu gly inside the outer packaging, which shall be free of any projection that might abrade the plastics material . .3 Maximum capacity of inner receptacle: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1 250 L 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2 60 L .4 Maximum net mass: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1 400 kg 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2 75 kg 6.1.4.19.2 Outer packaging .1 Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1): the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 1 or 6 . 1 . 4 . 2, as appropriate, shall apply to the constr uction of the outer packaging . .2 Plastics receptacle with outer steel o r aluminium crate or box (6HA2 or 6HB2): the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 14 shall apply to the construction of the oute r packaging . .3 Plastics receptacle with outer wooden bo x 6HC: the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 9 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging . .4 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood d rum 6HD1: the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 5 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging . .5 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood b ox 6HD2: the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 10 shall apply to the construction of the oute r packaging . .6 Plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum 6 HG1: the provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 7 . 1 to 6 . 1 . 4 . 7 . 4 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging . .7 Plastics receptacle with outer fibreboa rd box 6HG2: the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 12 shall apply to the construction of the oute r packaging . .8 Plastics receptacle with outer plas tics drum 6HH1: the provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 8 . 1 and 6 . 1 . 4 . 8 . 2 to 6 . 1 . 4 . 8 . 6 shall apply to the construction of the out er packaging . .9 Plastics receptacle with outer solid pla stics box (including corrugated plastics material) 6HH2: the provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 13 . 1 and 6 . 1 . 4 . 13 . 4 to 6 . 1 . 4 . 13 . 6 shall apply to the construction of the outer p ackaging . 6.1.4.20 Composite packagings (glass, porcelain o r stoneware) 6PA1 receptacle with outer steel drum 6PA2 receptacle with outer steel crate or box Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 328

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 318 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6PB1 receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6PB2 receptacle with outer aluminium crate or b ox 6PC receptacle with outer wooden box 6PD1 receptacle with outer plywood drum 6PD2 receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper 6P G1 receptacle with outer fibre drum 6PG2 receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6PH1 receptacle with outer expanded plastics pack aging 6PH2 receptacle with outer solid plastics packagi ng 6.1.4.20.1 Inner receptacle .1 Receptacles shall be of a suitable form (cylindrical or pear-shaped) and be made of good-quality material free from any defect that could impair thei r strength . The walls shall be sufficiently thick at eve ry point . .2 Screw-threaded plastics closures, gro und glass stoppers or closures at least equally effective shall be used as closures for receptacles . Any part of the closure likely to come into con tact with the contents of the receptacle shall be resistant to those contents . Care shall be taken to ensure that the closur es are so fitted as to be leakproof and are suitably secured to prevent any loosening during transport . If vented closures are necessary, they sh all comply with 4 . 1 . 1 . 8 . .3 The receptacle shall be firmly secured in the o uter packaging by means of cushioning and/or absorbent materials . .4 Maximum capacity of receptacle: 60 L . .5 Maximum net mass: 75 kg . 6.1.4.20.2 Outer packaging .1 Receptacle with outer steel drum 6PA1: the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 1 shall apply to the construction of the out er packaging . The removable lid required for thi s type of packaging may nevertheless be in the form of a cap . .2 Receptacle with outer steel crate or box 6PA 2: the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 14 shall apply to the construction of the oute r packaging . For cylindrical receptacles, the outer pack aging shall, when upright, rise above the receptacle and its closure . If the crate surrounds a pear-shaped receptacle and is of matching shape, the outer packaging shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap) . .3 Receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6PB 1: the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 2 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging . .4 Receptacle with outer aluminium crate or b ox 6PB2: the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 14 shall apply to the construction of the oute r packaging . .5 Receptacle with outer wooden box 6PC: the re levant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 9 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging . .6 Receptacle with outer plywood drum 6PD1: the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 5 shall apply to the construction of t he outer packaging . .7 Receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper 6PD2: the wickerwork hamper shall be properly made with material of good quality . It shall be fitted with a protective cover (ca p) so as to prevent damage to the receptacle . .8 Receptacle with outer fibre drum 6PG1: the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 7 . 1 to 6 . 1 . 4 . 7 . 4 shall apply to the body of the outer packaging . .9 Receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6PG2 : the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 12 shall apply to the construction of the oute r packaging . .10 Receptacle with outer expanded plastics o r solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2): the materials of both outer packagings shall meet the relevant provisions of 6 . 1 . 4 . 13 . Solid plastics packaging shall be manufact ured from high-density polyethylene or some other comparable plastics material . The removable lid for this type of packagin g may nevertheless be in the form of a cap . 6.1.5 Test provisions for packagings 6.1.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests 6.1.5.1.1 The design type of each packaging shall be tes ted as provided in this section, in accordance with procedures established by the competent authority . 6.1.5.1.2 Each packaging design type shall su ccessfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used . A packaging design type is defined by the design, s ize, material and thickness, manner of construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments . It also includes packagings which differ from the design type only in their lesser design height . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 329

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings 319 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.1.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samp les at intervals established by the competent authority . For such tests on paper or fibreboard packagin gs, preparation at ambient conditions is considered equivalent to the provisions of 6 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 3 . 6.1.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modi fication which alters the design, material or manner of construction of a packaging . 6.1.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the sel ective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects from a tested type, such as smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass; and packagings such as drums, bags and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external dimensions . 6.1.5.1.6 [Reserved] Note: For the conditions for us ing different inner packagings in an outer packaging and permissible variations in inner packagings, see 4 . 1 . 1 . 5 . 1 . These conditions do not limit the use of inne r packagings when applying 6 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 7 . 6.1.5.1.7 Articles or inner packagings of any type for s olids or liquids may be assembled and transported without testing in an outer packaging under the following conditions: .1 The outer packaging shall have been succes sfully tested in accordance with 6 . 1 . 5 . 3 with fragile (such as glass) inner packagings co ntaining liquids, using the drop height for packing group I . .2 The total combined gross mass of inner packa gings shall not exceed one half the gross mass of inner packagings used for the drop test in . 1 above . .3 The thickness of the cushioning material b etween inner packagings and between inner packagings and the outside of the packaging shall not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses in the originally tested packaging; and when a single inner packaging was used in the original test, the thicknesses of the cushioning between inner packagings shall not be less than the thickness of cushioning between the outside of the packaging and the inner packaging in the original test . When either fewer or smaller inner packagings are used (as compared to the inner packagings used in the drop test), sufficient additional cushioning material shall be used to take up void spaces . .4 The outer packaging shall have successfu lly passed the stacking test in 6 . 1 . 5 . 6 while empty . The total mass of identical packages shal l be based on the combined mass of inner packagings used in the drop test in . 1 above . .5 Inner packagings containing liquids sh all be completely surrounded with a sufficient quantity of absorbent material to absorb the entire liquid contents of the inner packagings . .6 When the outer packaging is intended to cont ain inner packagings for liquids and is not leakproof, or is intended to contain inner packagings for solids and is not sift-proof, a means of containing any liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form of a leakproof liner, plastics bag or other equally efficient means of containment . For packagings containing liquids, the abso rbent material required in . 5 above shall be placed inside the me ans of containing the liquid contents . .7 Packagings shall be marked in accordance w ith section 6 . 1 . 3 as having been tested to packing group I perfo rmance for combination packagings . The marked gross mass, in kilograms, shal l be the sum of the mass of the outer packaging plus one half of the mass of the inner packaging(s) as used for the drop test referred to in . 1 above . Such a packaging mark shall also contain th e letter ‘V’ as described in 6 . 1 . 2 . 4 . 6.1.5.1.8 The competent authority may at any time requ ire proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially produced packagings meet the provisions of the design type tests . 6.1.5.1.9 If an inner treatment or coating is requi red for safety reasons, it shall retain its protective properties after the tests . 6.1.5.1.10 Provided the validity of the test results is n ot affected, and with the approval of the competent authority, several tests may be made on one sample . 6.1.5.1.11 Salvage packagings 6.1.5.1.11.1 Salvage packagings (see 1 . 2 . 1) shall be tested and marked in accordance wi th the provisions applicable to packing group II packagings intended for the transport of solids or inner packagings, except as follows: .1 The test substance used in performi ng the tests shall be water and the packagings shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity . It is permissible to use additive s, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass so long as they are placed in such a way that the test results are not affected . Alternatively, in performing the drop t est, the drop height may be varied in accordance with 6 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 5(b); .2 Packagings shall, in addition, have been s uccessfully subjected to the leakproofness test at 30 kPa, with the results of this test reflected in the test report required by 6 . 1 . 5 . 7; and .3 Packagings shall be marked with the letter ‘ T’ as described in 6 . 1 . 2 . 4 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 330

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 320 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.1.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing 6.1.5.2.1 Tests shall be carried out on packagings pre pared as for transport, including, with respect to combination packagings, the inner packagings used . Inner or single receptacles or packagings, ot her than bags, shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity for liquids or 95% for solids . Bags shall be filled to the maximum mass at which they may be used . For combination packagings where the inner packagin g is designed to carry liquids and solids, separate testing is required for both solid and liquid contents . The substances or articles to be transpo rted in the packagings may be replaced by other substances or articles except where this would invalidate the results of the tests . For solids, when another substance is use d, it shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc . ) as the substance to be carried . It is permissible to use additives, such as b ags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected . 6.1.5.2.2 In the drop tests for liquids, when a nother substance is used, it shall be of similar relative density and viscosity to those of the substance being transported . Water may also be used for the liquid drop test u nder the conditions in 6 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 5 . 6.1.5.2.3 Paper or fibreboard packagings shall be cond itioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having controlled temperature and relative humidity (r . h . ) . There are three options, one of which shall b e chosen . The preferred atmosphere is 23 ° C ± 2 ° C and 50% ± 2% r . h . The two other options are 20 ° C ± 2 ° C and 65% ± 2% r . h . or 27 ° C ± 2 ° C and 65% ± 2% r . h . Note: Average values shall fall within the se limits . Short-term fluctuations and measurem ent limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ± 5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test reproducibility . 6.1.5.2.4 Additional steps shall be taken to ascerta in that the plastics material used in the manufacture of plastics drums, plastics jerricans and composite packagings (plastics material) intended to contain liquids complies with the provisions in 6 . 1 . 1 . 2, 6 . 1 . 4 . 8 . 1 and 6 . 1 . 4 . 8 . 3 . This may be done, for example, by submittin g sample receptacles or packagings to a preliminary test extending over a long period, for example six months, during which the samples would remain filled with the substances they are intended to contain and after which the samples shall be submitted to the applicable tests listed in 6 . 1 . 5 . 3, 6 . 1 . 5 . 4, 6 . 1 . 5 . 5, and 6 . 1 . 5 . 6 . For substances which may cause stress cra cking or weakening in plastics drums or jerricans, the sample, filled with the substance or another substance that is known to have at least as severe stress cracking influence on the plastics materials in question, shall be subjected to a superimposed load equivalent to the total mass of identical packages which might be stacked on it during transport . The minimum height of the stack including t he test sample shall be 3 m . 6.1.5.3 Drop test 6.1.5.3.1 Number of test samples (per design type and ma nufacturer) and drop orientation For other than flat drops, the centre of gravity shall be vertically over the point of impact . Packaging Number of test samples Drop orientation Steel drums Aluminium drums Metal drums, other than steel or aluminium drums Steel jerricans Aluminium je rricans Plywood drums Fibre drums Plastics drums and jerricans Composite packagings which are in the shape of a drum Six (three for each drop) First d rop (using three samples): the packaging shall strike the target diagonally on the chime or, if the packaging has no chime, on a circumferential seam or an edge Second drop (using the other three samples): the packaging shall strike the target on the weakest part not tested by the first drop, for example a closure or, for some cylindrical drums, the welded longitudinal seam of the body Boxes of natural wood Plywood boxes Reconstituted wood boxes Fibreboard boxes Plastics boxes Steel or aluminium boxes Composite packagings which are in the shape of a box Five (one for each drop) First drop : flat on the bottom Second drop: flat on the top Third drop: flat on the long side Fourth drop: flat on the short side Fifth drop: on a corner Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 331

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings 321 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Packaging Number of test samples Drop orientation Bags – single-ply with a side seam Three (three drops per bag) First drop : flat on a wide face Second drop : flat on a narrow face Third drop : on the end of the bag Bags – single-ply without a side seam or multi-ply Three (two drops per bag) First drop : flat on a wide face Second drop : on an end of the bag Where more than one orientation is possible for a given drop test, the orientation most likely to result in failure of the packaging shall be used . 6.1.5.3.2 Special preparation of test samples for th e drop test The temperature of the test sample and its contents shall be reduced to - 18 ° C or lower for the following packagings: .1 plastics drums (see 6 . 1 . 4 . 8); .2 plastics jerricans (see 6 . 1 . 4 . 8); .3 plastics boxes other than expanded plast ics boxes (see 6 . 1 . 4 . 13); .4 composite packagings (plastics material) (see 6 . 1 . 4 . 19); and .5 combination packagings with plastics inner packag ings, other than plastics bags intended to contain solids or articles . Where the test samples are prepared in this wa y, the conditioning in 6 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 3 may be waived . Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid stat e by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary . 6.1.5.3.3 Removable head packagings for liquids sh all not be dropped until at least 24 h after filling and closing to allow for any possible gasket relaxation . 6.1.5.3.4 Target The target shall be a non-resilient and horizontal surface and shall be: .1 integral and massive enough to be immovabl e; .2 flat with a surface kept free from local defect s capable of influencing the test results; .3 rigid enough to be non-deformable under te st conditions and not liable to become damaged by the tests; and .4 sufficiently large to ensure that the test pa ckage falls entirely upon the surface . 6.1.5.3.5 Drop height For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid or liquid to be carried or with another substance having essentially the same physical characteristics: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1 . 8 m 1 . 2 m 0 . 8 m For liquids in single packagings and for inner packagings of combination packagings, if the test is performed with water: Note: The term “water” includes water/antifreeze solutions with a minimum specific gravity of 0 . 95 for testing at - 18 ° C . (a) where the substances to be transported hav e a relative density not exceeding 1 . 2: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1 . 8 m 1 . 2 m 0 . 8 m Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 332

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 322 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (b) where the substances to be transported have a relative density exceeding 1 . 2, the drop height shall be calculated on th e basis of the relative density ( d ) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to the first decimal, as follows: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III d × 1 . 5 m d × 1 . 0 m d × 0 . 67 m 6.1.5.3.6 Criteria for passing the test .1 Each packaging containing liquid shall be leakproof when equilibrium has been reached between the internal and external pressures, ex cept for inner packagings of combination packagings, when it is not necessary that the pressures be equalized . .2 Where a packaging for solids underg oes a drop test and its upper face strikes the target, the test sample passes the test if the entire contents are retained by an inner packaging or inner receptacle (such as a plastics bag), even if the closure, while retaining its containment function, is no longer sift-proof . .3 The packaging or outer packaging of a co mposite or combination packaging shall not exhibit any damage liable to affect safety during transport . Inner receptacles, inner packagings, or artic les shall remain completely within the outer packaging and there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from the inner receptacles or inner packaging(s) . .4 Neither the outermost ply of a bag no r an outer packaging shall exhibit any damage liable to affect safety during transport . .5 A slight discharge from the closures upon i mpact shall not be considered to be a failure of the packaging provided that no further leakage occurs . .6 No rupture is permitted in packagings for go ods of class 1 which would permit the spillage of loose explosive substances or articles from the outer packaging . 6.1.5.4 Leakproofness test 6.1.5.4.1 The leakproofness test shall be performe d on all design types of packagings intended to contain liquids; however, this test is not required for the inner packagings of combination packagings . 6.1.5.4.2 Number of test samples: three test samples p er design type and manufacturer . 6.1.5.4.3 Special preparation of test samples for th e test: vented closures shall either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed . 6.1.5.4.4 Test method and pressure to be applied: the pa ckagings, including their closures, shall be restrained under water for 5 minutes while an internal air pressure is applied . The method of restraint shall not affect th e results of the test . The air pressure (gauge) to be applied shall b e: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Not less than 30 kPa (0 . 3 bar) Not less than 20 kPa (0 . 2 bar) Not less than 20 kPa (0 . 2 bar) Other methods at least equally as effective may be used . 6.1.5.4.5 Criterion for passing the test: there shal l be no leakage . 6.1.5.5 Internal pressure (hydraulic) test 6.1.5.5.1 Packagings to be tested: the internal pres sure (hydraulic) test shall be carried out on all design types of metal, plastics and composite packagings intended to contain liquids . This test is not required for inner packaging s of combination packagings . 6.1.5.5.2 Number of test samples: three test samples p er design type and manufacture . 6.1.5.5.3 Special preparation of packagings for testing: vented closures shall either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed . 6.1.5.5.4 Test method and pressure to be applied: meta l packagings and composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), including their closures, shall be subjected to the test pressure for 5 minutes . Plastics packagings and composite pac kagings (plastics material), including their closures, shall be subjected to the test pressure for 30 minutes . This pressure is the one to be included in the ma rk required by 6 . 1 . 3 . 1(d) . The manner in which the packagings are supp orted shall not invalidate the test . The test pressure shall be applied contin uously Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 333

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings 323 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 and evenly; it shall be kept constant throughout the test period . The hydraulic pressure (gauge) applie d, as determined by any one of the following methods, shall be: .1 not less than the total gauge pressure measu red in the packaging (i . e . the vapour pressure of the filling liquid an d the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55 ° C, multiplied by a safety factor of 1 . 5; this total gauge pressure shall be determ ined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4 . 1 . 1 . 4 and a filling temperature of 15 ° C; .2 not less than 1 . 75 times the vapour pressure at 50 ° C of the liquid t o be transported, minus 100 kPa, but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; .3 not less than 1 . 5 times the vapour pressure at 55 ° C of the liquid to b e transported minus 100 kPa, but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa . 6.1.5.5.5 In addition, packagings intended to cont ain liquids of packing group I shall be tested to a minimum test pressure of 250 kPa (gauge) for a test period of 5 or 30 minutes, depending upon the material of construction of the packaging . 6.1.5.5.6 Criterion for passing the test: no packaging s hall leak . 6.1.5.6 Stacking test All design types of packagings other than bags shall be subjected to a stacking test . 6.1.5.6.1 Number of test samples: three test samples p er design type and manufacturer . 6.1.5.6.2 Test method: the test sample shall be subjec ted to a force applied to the top surface of the test sample equivalent to the total mass of identical packages which might be stacked on it during transport: where the contents of the test sample are liquids with relative density different from that of the liquid to be transported, the force shall be calculated in relation to the latter . The minimum height of the stack including t he test sample shall be 3 m . The duration of the test shall be 24 hours exce pt that plastics drums, jerricans, and composite packagings 6HH1 and 6HH2 intended for liquids shall be subjected to the stacking test for a period of 28 days at a temperature of not less than 40 ° C . 6.1.5.6.3 Criteria for passing the test: no test samp le shall leak . In composite packagings or combination packagin gs, there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from the inner receptacle or inner packaging . No test sample shall show any deteriorati on which could adversely affect transport safety or any distortion liable to reduce its strength or cause instability in stacks of packages . Plastics packagings shall be cooled to am bient temperature before the assessment . 6.1.5.7 Test report 6.1.5.7.1 A test report containing at least the follow ing particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the packaging: .1 name and address of the test facility; .2 name and address of applicant (where appli cable); .3 a unique test report identification; .4 date of the test report; .5 manufacturer of the packaging; .6 description of the packaging design type (suc h as dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc . ), including method of manufacture (suc h as blow-moulding), and which may include drawing(s) and/or photograph(s); .7 maximum capacity; .8 characteristics of test contents, such a s viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for solids . For plastics packagings subject to the in ternal pressure test in 6 . 1 . 5 . 5, the temperature of the water used; .9 test descriptions and results; .10 signature, with the name and status of the signatory . 6.1.5.7.2 The test report shall contain statements t hat the packaging prepared as for transport was tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid . A copy of the test report shall be available to t he competent authority . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 334

6 324 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Chapter 6.2 Provisions for the construction and testing of pressure receptacles, aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas Note: Aerosol dispensers, small recept acles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas are not subject to the provisions of 6 . 2 . 1 to 6 . 2 . 3 . 6.2.1 General provisions 6.2.1.1 Design and construction 6.2.1.1.1 Pressure receptacles and their closure s shall be designed, manufactured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand all conditions, including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during normal conditions of transport . 6.2.1.1.2 In recognition of scientific and technologi cal advances, and recognizing that pressure receptacles other than those that bear “UN” certification marks may be used on a national or regional basis, pressure receptacles conforming to requirements other than those specified in this Code may be used if approved by the competent authorities in the countries of transport and use . 6.2.1.1.3 In no case shall the minimum wall thickness be l ess than that specified in the design and construction technical standards . 6.2.1.1.4 For welded pressure receptacles, only me tals of weldable quality shall be used . 6.2.1.1.5 The test pressure of cylinders, tubes, pre ssure drums and bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with packing instruction P200, or, for a chemical under pressure, with packing instruction P206 . The test pressure for closed cryogeni c receptacles shall be in accordance with packing instruction P203 . The test pressure of a metal hydride st orage system shall be in accordance with packing instruction P205 . The test pressure of a cylinder for an adsorb ed gas shall be in accordance with packing instruction P208 . 6.2.1.1.6 Pressure receptacles assembled in bund les shall be structurally supported and held together as a unit . Pressure receptacles shall be secured i n a manner that prevents movement in relation to the structural assembly and movement that would result in the concentration of harmful local stresses . Manifold assemblies (e . g . manifold, valves, and pressure ga uges) shall be designed and constructed such that they are protected from impact damage and forces normally encountered in transport . Manifolds shall have at least the same test p ressure as the cylinders . For toxic liquefied gases, each pressure r eceptacle shall have an isolation valve to ensure that each pressure receptacle can be filled separately and that no interchange of pressure receptacle contents can occur during transport . 6.2.1.1.7 Contact between dissimilar metals whic h could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided . 6.2.1.1.8 The following additional provisions a pply to the construction of closed cryogenic receptacles for refrigerated liquefied gases: .1 The mechanical properties of the metal use d shall be established for each pressure receptacle, including the impact strength and the bending coefficient; .2 The pressure receptacles shall be thermally insulated . The thermal insulation shall be protect ed against impact by means of a jacket . If the space between the pressure recepta cle and the jacket is evacuated of air (vacuum insulation), the jacket shall be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation, an external pressure of at least 100 kPa (1 bar) calculated in accordance with a recognized technical code or a calculated critical collapsing pressure of not less than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure . If the jacket is so closed as to be gas-tight (e . g . in the case of vacuum insulation), a device s hall be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in the event of inadequate gas-tightness of the pressure receptacle or its fittings . The device shall prevent moisture from pe netrating into the insulation . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 335

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases 325 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 .3 Closed cryogenic receptacles intended for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases having a boiling point below - 182 ° C at atmospheric pressure shall not include materials which may react with oxygen or oxygen-enriched atmospheres in a dangerous manner, when located in parts of the thermal insulation where there is a risk of contact with oxygen or with oxygen-enriched liquid . .4 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be de signed and constructed with suitable lifting and securing arrangements . 6.2.1.1.9 Additional requirements for the cons truction of pressure receptacle for acetylene Pressure receptacle for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, shall be filled with a porous material, uniformly distributed, of a type that conforms to the requirements and testing specified by a standard or technical code recognized by the competent authority and which: .1 is compatible with the pressure receptac le and does not form harmful or dangerous compounds either with the acetylene or with the solvent in the case of UN 1001; and .2 is capable of preventing the spread of dec omposition of the acetylene in the porous material . In the case of UN 1001, the solvent shall be compa tible with the pressure receptacle . 6.2.1.2 Materials 6.2.1.2.1 Construction materials of pressure rec eptacles and their closures which are in direct contact with dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by the dangerous goods intended to be transported and shall not cause a dangerous effect, e . g . catalysing a reaction or reacting with th e dangerous goods . 6.2.1.2.2 Pressure receptacles and their closure s shall be made of the materials specified in the design and construction technical standards and the applicable packing instruction for the substances intended for transport in the pressure receptacle . The materials shall be resistant to britt le fracture and to stress corrosion cracking as indicated in the design and construction technical standards . 6.2.1.3 Service equipment 6.2.1.3.1 Valves, piping and other fittings sub jected to pressure, excluding pressure relief devices, shall be designed and constructed so that the burst pressure is at least 1 . 5 times the test pressure of the pressure rece ptacle . 6.2.1.3.2 Service equipment shall be configured or de signed to prevent damage that could result in the release of the pressure receptacle contents during normal conditions of handling and transport . Manifold piping leading to shut-off valv es shall be sufficiently flexible to protect the valves and the piping from shearing or releasing the pressure receptacle contents . The filling and discharge valves and any pro tective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening . Valves shall be protected as specified in 4 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 8 . 6.2.1.3.3 Pressure receptacles which are not capab le of being handled manually or rolled shall be fitted with devices (skids, rings, straps) ensuring that they can be safely handled by mechanical means and so arranged as not to impair the strength of, nor cause undue stresses in, the pressure receptacle . 6.2.1.3.4 Individual pressure receptacles shal l be equipped with pressure relief devices as specified in packing instruction P200(1), P205 or in 6 . 2 . 1 . 3 . 6 . 4 and 6 . 2 . 1 . 3 . 6 . 5 . Pressure relief devices shall be design ed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure . When fitted, pressure relief device s on manifolded horizontal pressure receptacles filled with flammable gas shall be arranged to discharge freely to the open air in such a manner as to prevent any impingement of escaping gas upon the pressure receptacle itself under normal conditions of transport . 6.2.1.3.5 Pressure receptacles where filling is mea sured by volume shall be provided with a level indicator . 6.2.1.3.6 Additional provisions for closed cryog enic receptacles 6.2.1.3.6.1 Each filling and discharge opening i n a closed cryogenic receptacle used for the transport of flammable refrigerated liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least two mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first being a stop-valve, the second being a cap or equivalent device . 6.2.1.3.6.2 For sections of piping which can be c losed at both ends and where liquid product can be trapped, a method of automatic pressure relief shall be provided to prevent excess pressure build-up within the piping . 6.2.1.3.6.3 Each connection on a closed cryogenic rece ptacle shall be clearly marked to indicate its function (e . g . vapour or liquid phase) . 6.2.1.3.6.4 Pressure relief devices 6.2.1.3.6.4.1 Each closed cryogenic receptacle shall b e provided with at least one pressure relief device . The pressure relief device shall be of the ty pe that will resist dynamic forces, including surge . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 336

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 326 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.1.3.6.4.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles may, in addition, have a frangible disc in parallel with the spring-loaded device(s) in order to meet the provisions of 6 . 2 . 1 . 3 . 6 . 5 . 6.2.1.3.6.4.3 Connections to pressure relief devices s hall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the pressure relief device . 6.2.1.3.6.4.4 All pressure relief device inlets shall, u nder maximum filling conditions, be situated in the vapour space of the closed cryogenic receptacle and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly . 6.2.1.3.6.5 Capacity and setting of pressure relief de vices Note: In relation to pressure relief device s of closed cryogenic receptacles, “MAWP” means the maximum effective gauge pressure permissible at the top of a loaded closed cryogenic receptacle in its operating position, including the highest effective pressure during filling and discharge . 6.2.1.3.6.5.1 The pressure relief device shall open auto matically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully open at a pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP . It shall, after discharge, close at a press ure not lower than 10% below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower pressures . 6.2.1.3.6.5.2 Frangible discs shall be set to rupture at a nom inal pressure which is the lower of either the test pressure or 150% of the MAWP . 6.2.1.3.6.5.3 In the case of the loss of vacuum in a vacuum-insu lated closed cryogenic receptacle, the combined capacity of all pressure relief devices installed shall be sufficient so that the pressure (including accumulation) inside the closed cryogenic receptacle does not exceed 120% of the MAWP . 6.2.1.3.6.5.4 The required capacity of the pressure reli ef devices shall be calculated in accordance with an established technical code recognized by the competent authority . * 6.2.1.4 Approval of pressure receptacles 6.2.1.4.1 The conformity of pressure receptacles s hall be assessed at time of manufacture as required by the competent authority . Pressure receptacles shall be in spected, tested and approved by an inspection body . The technical documentation shall in clude full specifications on design and construction, and full documentation on the manufacturing and testing . 6.2.1.4.2 Quality assurance systems shall confor m to the requirements of the competent authority . 6.2.1.5 Initial inspection and test 6.2.1.5.1 New pressure receptacles, other than clo sed cryogenic receptacles and metal hydride storage systems, shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture in accordance with the applicable design standards including the following: On an adequate sample of pressure receptacles: .1 testing of the mechanical characterist ics of the material of construction; .2 verification of the minimum wall thicknes s; .3 verification of the homogeneity of the mate rial for each manufacturing batch; .4 inspection of the external and internal co nditions of the pressure receptacles; .5 inspection of the neck threads; .6 verification of the conformance with the design standard; For all pressure receptacles: .7 a hydraulic pressure test . Pressure receptacles shall meet the acc eptance criteria specified in the design and construction technical standard or technical code; Note: With the agreement of the competent aut hority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger . .8 inspection and assessment of manufa cturing defects and either repairing them or rendering the pressure receptacles unserviceable . In the case of welded pressure receptacle s, particular attention shall be paid to the quality of the welds; .9 an inspection of the marks on the pressure rec eptacles; * See, for example, CGA S-1 . 2-2003 – Pressure Relief Device Standard s – Part 2 – Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases and S-1 . 1-2003 – Pressure Relief Device Standard s – Part 1 – Cylinders for Compressed Gases . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 337

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases 327 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 .10 in addition, pressure receptacles intended for the transport of UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free shall b e inspected to ensure proper installation and condition of the porous material and, if applicable, the quantity of solvent . 6.2.1.5.2 On an adequate sample of closed cryogenic re ceptacles, the inspections and tests specified in 6 . 2 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 1, . 2, . 4, and . 6 shall be performed . In addition, welds shall be inspected by ra diographic, ultrasonic or another suitable non-destructive test method on a sample of closed cryogenic receptacles, according to the applicable design and construction standard . This weld inspection does not apply to the ja cket . Additionally, all closed cryogenic rec eptacles shall undergo the inspections and tests specified in 6 . 2 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 7, . 8, and . 9, as well as a leakproofness test and a test of the s atisfactory operation of the service equipment after assembly . 6.2.1.5.3 For metal hydride storage systems, it shall be verified that the inspections and tests specified in 6 . 2 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 1, . 2, . 3, . 4, . 5 if applicable, . 6, . 7, . 8 and . 9 have been performed on an adequate sample of t he receptacles used in the metal hydride storage system . In addition, on an adequate sample of metal h ydride storage systems, the inspections and tests specified in 6 . 2 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 3 and . 6 shall be performed, as well as 6 . 2 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 5, if applicable, and inspection of the exte rnal conditions of the metal hydride storage system . Additionally, all metal hydride storag e systems shall undergo the initial inspections and tests specified in 6 . 2 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 8 and . 9, as well as a leakproofness test and a test of the s atisfactory operation of the service equipment . 6.2.1.6 Periodic inspection and test 6.2.1.6.1 Refillable pressure receptacles, othe r than cryogenic receptacles, shall be subjected to periodic inspections and tests, by a body authorized by the competent authority, in accordance with the following: .1 Check of the external conditions of the pres sure receptacle and verification of the equipment and the external marks; .2 Check of the internal conditions of the pres sure receptacle (e . g . internal inspection, verification of m inimum wall thickness); .3 Check of the threads if there is evidence of cor rosion or if the fittings are removed; .4 A hydraulic pressure test and, if necessary , verification of the characteristics of the material by suitable tests; Note 1: With the agreement of the competent author ity, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger . Note 2: For seamless steel cylinders and tubes the c heck of 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 2 and hydraulic pressure test of 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 4 may be replaced by a procedure conforming to I SO 16148:2016 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Acoustic emission examination (AT) and follow-up ultrasonic examination (UT) for periodic inspection and testing . Note 3: The check of 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 2 and the hydraulic pressure test of 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 4 may be replaced by ultrasonic examinati on carried out in accordance with ISO 10461:2005+A1:2006 for seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders and in accordance with ISO 6406:2005 for seamless steel gas cylinders . .5 Check of service equipment, other access ories and pressure-relief devices, if to be reintroduced into service . Note: For the periodic inspection and test fr equencies, see packing instruction P200 or, for a chemical under pressure, packing instruction P206 of 4 . 1 . 4 . 1 . 6.2.1.6.2 Pressure receptacles intended for the tr ansport of UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free shall be examined only as specified in 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 1, 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 3 and 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 5 . In addition, the condition of the porous ma terial (e . g . cracks, top clearance, loosening, or se ttlement) shall be examined . 6.2.1.6.3 Pressure relief valves for closed cryoge nic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests . 6.2.1.7 Requirements for manufacturers 6.2.1.7.1 The manufacturer shall be technically ab le and shall possess all resources required for the satisfactory manufacture of pressure receptacles; this relates in particular to qualified personnel: .1 to supervise the entire manufacturing pr ocess; .2 to carry out joining of materials; and .3 to carry out the relevant tests . 6.2.1.7.2 The proficiency test of a manufacturer shal l in all instances be carried out by an inspection body approved by the competent authority of the country of approval . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 338

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 328 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.1.8 Requirements for inspection bodies 6.2.1.8.1 Inspection bodies shall be indepen dent from manufacturing enterprises and competent to perform the tests, inspections and approvals required . 6.2.2 Provisions for UN pressure receptacles In addition to the general requirements of 6 . 2 . 1, UN pressure receptacles shall comply wi th the provisions of this section, including the standards, as applicable . Manufacture of new pressure rece ptacles or service equipment according to any particular standard in 6 . 2 . 2 . 1 and 6 . 2 . 2 . 3 is not permitted after the date shown in the rig ht hand column of the tables . Note 1: With the agreement of the competent a uthority, more recently published versions of the standards, if available, may be used . Note 2: UN pressure receptacles and ser vice equipment constructed according to standards applicable at the date of manufacture may continue in use subject to the periodic inspection provisions of this Code . 6.2.2.1 Design, construction and initial inspe ction and test 6.2.2.1.1 The following standards apply for t he design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN cylinders, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa . Note: The note concerning the F factor in s ection 7 . 3 of this standard shall not be applied for UN cyl inders . Until 31 December 2018 ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cyli nders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa Until further notice ISO 9809-2:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa Until 31 December 2018 ISO 9809-2:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa Until further notice ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders Until 31 December 2018 ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders Until further notice ISO 9809-4:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 4: Stainless steel cylinders with an Rm value of less than 1 100 MPa Until further notice ISO 7866:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing Note: The note concerning the F factor in section 7 . 2 of this standard shall not be applied for UN cyl inders . Aluminium alloy 6351A-T6 or equivalent s hall not be authorized . Until 31 December 2020 ISO 7866:2012+ Cor 1:2014 Gas cy linders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing Note: Aluminium alloy 6351A or equivalent shall not be used . Until further notice ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinde rs – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test pressure 60 bar and below Until further notice ISO 18172-1:2007 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel cylinders – Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below Until further notice ISO 20703:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded aluminium-alloy cylinders – Design, construction and testing Until further notice ISO 11118:1999 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test methods Until 31 December 2020 ISO 11118:2015 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test methods Until further notice Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 339

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases 329 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 11119-1:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Part 1: Hoop wrapped composite gas cylinders Until 31 December 2020 ISO 11119-1:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Hoop wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l Until further notice ISO 11119-2:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with load-sharing metal liners Until 31 December 2020 ISO 11119-2:2012 + Amd 1:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners Until further notice ISO 11119-3:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with non-load- sharing metallic or non-metallic liners Note: This standard shall not be used for linerless cylinders manufactured from two parts joined together . Until 31 December 2020 ISO 11119-3:2013 Gas cyli nders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or non-metallic liners Note: This standard shall not be used for linerless cylinders manufactured from two parts joined together . Until further notice ISO 11119-4:2016 Gas cyl inders – Refillable composite gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 4: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders up to 150 l with load-sharing welded metallic liners Until further notice Note 1: In the above referenced standards, composite cylinders shall be designed for a design life of not less than 15 years . Note 2: Composite cylinders with a design l ife longer than 15 years shall not be filled after 15 years from the date of manufacture, unless the design has successfully passed a service life test programme . The programme shall be part of the in itial design type approval and shall specify inspections and tests to demonstrate that cylinders manufactured accordingly remain safe to the end of their design life . The service life test programme and th e results shall be approved by the competent authority of the country of approval that is responsible for the initial approval of the cylinder design . The service life of a composite cylinder sh all not be extended beyond its initial approved design life . 6.2.2.1.2 The following standards apply for the desi gn, construction and initial inspection and test of UN tubes, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 11120:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes for compressed gas transport, of water capacity between 150 l and 3,000 l – Design, construction and testing Note: The note concerning the F factor in section 7 . 1 of this standard shall not be applied for UN tub es . Until 31 December 2022 ISO 11120:2015 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes of water capacity between 150 l and 3 000 l – Design, construction and testing Until further notice ISO 11119-1:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Hoop wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l Until further notice ISO 11119-2:2012 + Amd 1:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners Until further notice ISO 11119-3:2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or non-metallic liners Note: This standard shall not be used for linerless tubes manufactured from two parts joined together . Until further notice ISO 11515: 2013 Gas cyli nders – Refillable composite reinforced tubes of water capacity between 450 l and 3 000 l – Design, construction and testing Until further notice △ △ ■ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 340

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 330 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Note 1: In the above referenced standards composite tubes shall be designed for a design life of not less than 15 years . Note 2: Composite tubes with a design life lo nger than 15 years shall not be filled after 15 years from the date of manufacture, unless the design has successfully passed a service life test programme . The programme shall be part of the initial de sign type approval and shall specify inspections and tests to demonstrate that tubes manufactured accordingly remain safe to the end of their design life . The service life test programme and the res ults shall be approved by the competent authority of the country of approval that is responsible for the initial approval of the tube design . The service life of a composite tube shall no t be extended beyond its initial approved design life . 6.2.2.1.3 The following standards apply for the desi gn, construction and initial inspection and test of UN acetylene cylinders, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5: For the cylinder shell: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa Note: The note concerning the F factor in section 7 . 3 of this standard shall not be applied for UN cyl inders . Until 31 December 2018 ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa Until further notice ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders Until 31 December 2018 ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders Until further notice ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test pressure 60 bar and below Until further notice ISO 7866:2012 + Cor 1:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminum alloy gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing Note: Aluminum alloy 6351A or equivalent shall not be used . Until further notice For the acetylene cylinder including the porous material: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 3807-1:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 1: Cylinders without fusible plugs Until 31 December 2020 ISO 3807-2:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 2: Cylinders with fusible plugs Until 31 December 2020 ISO 3807-2:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Basic requirements and type testing Until further notice 6.2.2.1.4 The following standard applies for the des ign, construction and initial inspection and test of UN cryogenic receptacles, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 21029-1:2004 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated vessels of not more than 1 000 l volume – Part 1: Design, fabrication, inspection and tests Until further notice 6.2.2.1.5 The following standard applies for the des ign, construction and initial inspection and test of UN metal hydride storage systems, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride Until further notice ■ ■ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 341

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases 331 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.2.1.6 The standard shown below applies for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN bundles of cylinders . Each cylinder in a UN bundle of cylinders sha ll be a UN cylinder complying with the requirements of 6 . 2 . 2 . The inspection requirements related t o the conformity assessment system and approval for UN bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 10961:2010 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design, manufacture, testing and inspection Until further notice Note: Changing one or more cylinders of the sam e design type, including the same test pressure, in an existing UN bundle of cylinders does not require recertification of the existing bundle . 6.2.2.1.7 The following standards apply for the desi gn, construction and initial inspection and test of UN cylinders for adsorbed gases except that the inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 11513:2011 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design, construction, testing, use and periodic inspection Until further notice ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa Until further notice 6.2.2.1.8 The following standards apply for the desi gn, construction and initial inspection and test of UN pressure drums, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 21172-1:2015 Gas cylinders – Welded steel pressure drums up to 3 000 l capacity for the transport of gases – Design and construction – Part 1: Capacities up to 1 000 l Note: Irrespective of section 6 . 3 . 3 . 4 of this standard, welded steel gas pressur e drums with dished ends convex to pressure may be used for the transport of corrosive substances provided all applicable requirements of this Code are met . Until further notice ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylind ers – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test pressure 60 bar and below Until further notice ISO 18172-1:2007 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel cylinders – Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below Until further notice 6.2.2.2 Materials In addition to the material requirements specified in the pressure receptacle design and construction standards, and any restrictions specified in the applicable packing instruction for the gas(es) to be transported (e . g . packing instruction P200 or P205), the fol lowing standards apply to material compatibility: Reference Title ISO 11114-1:2012 + Amd 1:2017 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas contents – Part 1: Metallic materials ISO 11114-2:2013 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas contents – Part 2: Non-metallic materials 6.2.2.3 Service equipment The following standards apply to closures and their protection: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 11117:1998 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards for industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design, construction and tests Until 31 December 2014 ISO 11117:2008 + Cor 1:2009 Gas cylinders − Valve protection caps and valve guards − Design, construction and tests Until further notice △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 342

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 332 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 10297:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable gas cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until 31 December 2008 ISO 10297:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable gas cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until 31 December 2020 ISO 10297:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until 31 December 2022 ISO 10297:2014 + Amd 1:2017 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until further notice ISO 13340:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder valves for non-refillable cylinders – Specification and prototype testing Until 31 December 2020 ISO 14246:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests and examination Until 31 December 2024 ISO 14246:2014 + Amd 1:2017 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests and examinations Until further notice ISO 17871:2015 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinders valves- Specification and type testing Until further notice ISO 17879:2017 Gas cylinders – Self-closing cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Note: This standard shall not be applied to self-closing valves in acetylene cylinders . Until further notice For UN metal hydride storage systems, the requirements specified in the following standard apply to closures and their protection: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride Until further notice 6.2.2.4 Periodic inspection and test The following standards apply to the periodic inspection and testing of UN cylinders and their closures: Reference Title Applicable ISO 6406:2005 Seamless steel gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing Until further notice ISO 10460:2005 Gas cylinders – Welded carbon-steel gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing Note: The repair of welds described in clause 12 . 1 of this standard shall not be permitted . Repairs described in clause 12 . 2 require the approval of the competent auth ority which approved the periodic inspection and test body in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . Until further notice ISO 10461:2005/ Amd 1:2006 Se amless aluminium-alloy gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing Until further notice ISO 10462:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Periodic inspection and maintenance Until further notice ISO 11513:2011 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design, construction, testing, use and periodic inspection Until further notice ISO 11623:2002 Transportable gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing of composite gas cylinders Until 31 December 2020 ISO 11623:2015 Gas cylinders – Composite construction – Periodic inspection and testing Until further notice △ ■ △ ■ ■ △ ⊗ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 343

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases 333 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Reference Title Applicable ISO 22434:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Inspection and maintenance of cylinder valves Note: These requirements may be met at times other than at the periodic inspection and test of UN cylinders . Until further notice ISO 20475:2018 Gas cylinder s – Cylinder bundles – Periodic inspection and testing Until further notice The following standard applies to the periodic inspection and testing of UN metal hydride storage systems: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride Until further notice 6.2.2.5 Conformity assessment system and app roval for manufacture of pressure receptacles 6.2.2.5.1 Definitions For the purposes of this section: Conformity assessment system means a sys tem for competent authority approval of a manufacturer, by pressure receptacle design type approval, approval of manufacturer’s quality system and approval of inspection bodies; Design type means a pressure receptacle d esign as specified by a particular pressure receptacle standard; Verify means confirm by examination or provis ion of objective evidence that specified requirements have been fulfilled . 6.2.2.5.2 General requirements Competent authority 6.2.2.5.2.1 The competent authority that approve s the pressure receptacle shall approve the conformity assessment system for the purpose of ensuring that pressure receptacles conform to the provisions of this Code . In instances where the competent author ity that approves a pressure receptacle is not the competent authority in the country of manufacture, the marks of the approval country and the country of manufacture shall be indicated in the pressure receptacle marking (see 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 and 6 . 2 . 2 . 8) . The competent authority of the country of ap proval shall supply, upon request, evidence demonstrating compliance of this conformity assessment system to its counterpart in a country of use . 6.2.2.5.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its f unctions in this conformity assessment system in whole or in part . 6.2.2.5.2.3 The competent authority shall ensu re that a current list of approved inspection bodies and their identity marks and approved manufacturers and their identity marks is available . Inspection body 6.2.2.5.2.4 The inspection body shall be approved by the c ompetent authority for the inspection of pressure receptacles and shall: .1 have a staff with an organizational struct ure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, to satisfactorily perform its technical functions; .2 have access to suitable and adequate facil ities and equipment; .3 operate in an impartial manner and be free fro m any influence which could prevent it from doing so; .4 ensure commercial confidentiality of th e commercial and proprietary activities of the manufacturer and other bodies; .5 maintain clear demarcation between actual inspection body functions and unrelated functions; .6 operate a documented quality system; .7 ensure that the tests and inspections specified in the relevant pressure receptacle standard and in this Code are performed; and .8 maintain an effective and appropriate re port and record system in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 6 . ■ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 344

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 334 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.2.5.2.5 The inspection body shall perform design t ype approval, pressure receptacle production testing and inspection, and certification to verify conformity with the relevant pressure receptacle standard (see 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4 and 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 5) . Manufacturer 6.2.2.5.2.6 The manufacturer shall: .1 operate a documented quality system in acc ordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 3; .2 apply for design type approvals in accorda nce with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4; .3 select an inspection body from the list of app roved inspection bodies maintained by the competent authority in the country of approval; and .4 maintain records in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 6 . Testing laboratory 6.2.2.5.2.7 The testing laboratory shall have: .1 staff with an organizational structure , sufficient in number, competence and skill; and .2 suitable and adequate facilities a nd equipment to perform the tests required by the manufacturing standard to the satisfaction of the inspection body . 6.2.2.5.3 Manufacturer’s quality system 6.2.2.5.3.1 The quality system shall contain all the ele ments, requirements and provisions adopted by the manufacturer . It shall be documented in a systematic and or derly manner in the form of written policies, procedures and instructions . The contents shall in particular include adequate descriptions of: .1 the organizational structure and respo nsibilities of personnel with regard to design and product quality; .2 the design control and design verificatio n techniques, processes, and procedures that will be used when designing the pressure receptacles; .3 the relevant pressure receptacle manuf acturing, quality control, quality assurance and process operation instructions that will be used; .4 quality records, such as inspection repo rts, test data and calibration data; .5 management reviews to ensure the effecti ve operation of the quality system arising from the audits in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 3 . 2; .6 the process describing how customer requ irements are met; .7 the process for control of documents and the ir revision; .8 the means for control of non-conforming pr essure receptacles, purchased components, in-process and final materials; and .9 training programmes and qualification proce dures for relevant personnel . 6.2.2.5.3.2 Audit of the quality system The quality system shall be initially assessed to determine whether it meets the requirements in 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 3 . 1 to the satisfaction of the competent author ity . The manufacturer shall be notified of the res ults of the audit . The notification shall contain the concl usions of the audit and any corrective actions required . Periodic audits shall be carried ou t, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, to ensure that the manufacturer maintains and applies the quality system . Reports of the periodic audits shall be pro vided to the manufacturer . 6.2.2.5.3.3 Maintenance of the quality system The manufacturer shall maintain the quality system as approved in order that it remains adequate and efficient . The manufacturer shall notify the compet ent authority that approved the quality system of any intended changes . The proposed changes shall be evaluated i n order to determine whether the amended quality system will still satisfy the requirements in 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 3 . 1 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 345

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases 335 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.2.5.4 Approval process Initial design type approval 6.2.2.5.4.1 The initial design type approval shall con sist of approval of the manufacturer’s quality system and approval of the pressure receptacle design to be produced . An application for an initial design type a pproval shall meet the requirements of 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 3, 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4 . 2 to 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4 . 6 and 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4 . 9 . 6.2.2.5.4.2 A manufacturer desiring to produce press ure receptacles in accordance with a pressure receptacle standard and this Code shall apply for, obtain, and retain a Design Type Approval Certificate issued by the competent authority in the country of approval for at least one pressure receptacle design type in accordance with the procedure given in 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4 . 9 . This certificate shall, on request, be sub mitted to the competent authority of the country of use . 6.2.2.5.4.3 An application shall be made for each manufa cturing facility and shall include: .1 the name and registered address of the manuf acturer and in addition, if the application is submitted by an authorized representative, its name and address; .2 the address of the manufacturing facilit y (if different from the above); .3 the name and title of the person(s) responsi ble for the quality system; .4 the designation of the pressure receptacle a nd the relevant pressure receptacle standard; .5 details of any refusal of approval of a simila r application by any other competent authority; .6 the identity of the inspection body for desi gn type approval; .7 documentation on the manufacturing fac ility as specified under 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 3 . 1; and .8 the technical documentation required f or design type approval, which shall enable verification of the conformity of the pressure receptacles with the requirements of the relevant pressure receptacle design standard . The technical documentation shall cov er the design and method of manufacture and shall contain, as far as is relevant for assessment, at least the following: .1 pressure receptacle design standard, desig n and manufacturing drawings, showing components and sub-assemblies, if any; .2 descriptions and explanations neces sary for the understanding of the drawings and intended use of the pressure receptacles; .3 a list of the standards necessary to fully defi ne the manufacturing process; .4 design calculations and material specific ations; and .5 design type approval test reports, descr ibing the results of examinations and tests carried out in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4 . 9 . 6.2.2.5.4.4 An initial audit in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 3 . 2 shall be performed to the satisfaction of th e competent authority . 6.2.2.5.4.5 If the manufacturer is denied approval, th e competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons for such denial . 6.2.2.5.4.6 Following approval, changes to the infor mation submitted under 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4 . 3 relating to the initial approval shall be pr ovided to the competent authority . Subsequent design type approvals 6.2.2.5. 4.7 An application for a subsequent des ign type approval shall encompass the requirements of 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4 . 8 and 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4 . 9, provided a manufacturer is in the possess ion of an initial design type approval . In such a case, the manufacturer’s qualit y system according to 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 3 shall have been approved during the initia l design type approval and shall be applicable for the new design . 6.2.2.5.4.8 The application shall include: .1 the name and address of the manufacturer and i n addition, if the application is submitted by an authorized representative, its name and address; .2 details of any refusal of approval of a simila r application by any other competent authority; .3 evidence that initial design type approv al has been granted; and .4 the technical documentation, as descri bed in 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 8 . Procedure for design type approval 6.2.2 .5.4.9 The inspection body shall: .1 examine the technical documentation to v erify that: .1 the design is in accordance with the relevan t provisions of the standard, and .2 the prototype lot has been manufactured in c onformity with the technical documentation and is representative of the design; Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 346

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 336 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 .2 verify that the production inspections have been carried out as required in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 5; .3 select pressure receptacles from a proto type production lot and supervise the tests of these pressure receptacles as required for design type approval; .4 perform or have performed the examinatio ns and tests specified in the pressure receptacle standard to determine that: .1 the standard has been applied and fulfilled, a nd .2 the procedures adopted by the manufactur er meet the requirements of the standard; and .5 ensure that the various type approval exam inations and tests are correctly and competently carried out . After prototype testing has been carried o ut with satisfactory results and all applicable requirements of 6 . 2 . 2 . 5 . 4 have been satisfied, a Design Type Approval Ce rtificate shall be issued which shall include the name and address of the manufacturer, results and conclusions of the examination, and the necessary data for identification of the design type . If the manufacturer is denied a design type ap proval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons for such denial . 6.2.2.5.4.10 Modifications to approved design types The manufacturer shall either: (a) inform the issuing competent authority o f modifications to the approved design type, where such modifications do not constitute a new design, as specified in the pressure receptacle standard; or (b) request a subsequent design type approva l where such modifications constitute a new design according to the relevant pressure receptacle standard . This additional approval shall be given i n the form of an amendment to the original design type approval certificate . 6.2.2.5.4.11 Upon request, the competent authority sh all communicate to any other competent authority information concerning design type approval, modifications of approvals, and withdrawn approvals . 6.2.2.5.5 Production inspection and certification An inspection body, or its delegate, shall carry out the inspection and certification of each pressure receptacle . The inspection body selected by the manuf acturer for inspection and testing during production may be different from the inspection body used for the design type approval testing . Where it can be demonstrated to the satisfac tion of the inspection body that the manufacturer has trained and competent inspectors, independent of the manufacturing operations, inspection may be performed by those inspectors . In such a case, the manufacturer shall main tain training records of the inspectors . The inspection body shall verify that the in spections by the manufacturer and tests performed on those pressure receptacles fully conform to the standard and the provisions of this Code . Should non-conformance in conjunc tion with this inspection and testing be determined, the permission to have inspection performed by the manufacturer’s inspectors may be withdrawn . The manufacturer shall, after approval b y the inspection body, make a declaration of conformity with the certified design type . The application of the pressure recepta cle certification marks shall be considered a declaration that the pressure receptacle complies with the applicable pressure receptacle standards and the requirements of this conformity assessment system and with the provisions of this Code . The inspection body shall affix or deleg ate the manufacturer to affix the pressure receptacle certification marks and the registered mark of the inspection body to each approved pressure receptacle . A certificate of compliance, signed by the inspection body and the manufacturer, shall be issued before the pressure receptacles are filled . 6.2.2.5.6 Records Design type approval and certificate of compliance records shall be retained by the manufacturer and the inspection body for not less than 20 years . 6.2.2.6 Approval system for periodic inspection a nd testing of pressure receptacles 6.2.2.6.1 Definitions For the purposes of this section: Approval system means a system for competent authority approval of a body performing periodic inspection and testing of pressure receptacles (hereinafter referred to as “periodic inspection and testing body”), including approval of that body’s quality system . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 347

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases 337 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.2.6.2 General provisions Competent authority 6.2.2.6.2.1 The competent authority shall establis h an approval system for the purpose of ensuring that the periodic inspection and testing of pressure receptacles conform to the provisions of this Code . In instances where the competent author ity that approves a body performing periodic inspection and testing of a pressure receptacle is not the competent authority of the country approving the manufacture of the pressure receptacle, the marks of the approval country of periodic inspection and testing shall be indicated in the pressure receptacle mark (see 6 . 2 . 2 . 7) . The competent authority of the country of a pproval for the periodic inspection and testing shall supply, upon request, evidence demonstrating compliance with this approval system, including the records of the periodic inspection and testing, to its counterpart in a country of use . The competent authority of the country of a pproval may terminate the Approval Certificate referred to in 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 4 . 1, upon evidence demonstrating non-complia nce with the approval system . 6.2.2.6.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its f unctions in this approval system, in whole or in part . 6.2.2.6.2.3 The competent authority shall ensure tha t a current list of approved periodic inspection and testing bodies and their identity marks is available . Periodic inspection and testing body 6.2.2. 6.2.4 The periodic inspection and testing body s hall be approved by the competent authority and shall: .1 have a staff with an organizational struct ure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, to perform its technical functions satisfactorily; .2 have access to suitable and adequate facil ities and equipment; .3 operate in an impartial manner and be free fro m any influence which could prevent it from doing so; .4 ensure commercial confidentiality; .5 maintain clear demarcation between act ual periodic inspection and testing body functions and unrelated functions; .6 operate a documented quality system in acc ordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 3; .7 apply for approval in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 4; .8 ensure that the periodic inspections and t ests are performed in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 5; and .9 maintain an effective and appropriate re port and record system in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 6 . 6.2.2.6.3 Quality system and audit of the periodic ins pection and testing body 6.2.2.6.3.1 Quality system . The quality system shall contain all the el ements, requirements and provisions adopted by the periodic inspection and testing body . It shall be documented in a systematic and or derly manner in the form of written policies, procedures and instructions . The quality system shall include: .1 a description of the organizational st ructure and responsibilities; .2 the relevant inspection and test, qualit y control, quality assurance, and process operation instructions that will be used; .3 quality records, such as inspection repo rts, test data, calibration data and certificates; .4 management reviews to ensure the effecti ve operation of the quality system arising from the audits performed in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 3 . 2; .5 a process for control of documents and their r evision; .6 a means for control of non-conforming pres sure receptacles; and .7 training programmes and qualification proce dures for relevant personnel . 6.2.2.6.3.2 Audit . The periodic inspection and testing bod y and its quality system shall be audited in order to determine whether it meets the requirements of this Code to the satisfaction of the competent authority . An audit shall be conducted as part of the init ial approval process (see 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 4 . 3) . An audit may be required as part of the process t o modify an approval (see 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 4 . 6) . Periodic audits shall be conducted, to th e satisfaction of the competent authority, to ensure that the periodic inspection and testing body continues to meet the provisions of this Code . The periodic inspection and testing bod y shall be notified of the results of any audit . The notification shall contain the concl usions of the audit and any corrective actions required . 6.2.2.6.3.3 Maintenance of the quality system . The periodic inspection and testing bod y shall maintain the quality system as approved in order that it remains adequate and efficient . The periodic inspection and testing bod y shall notify the competent authority that approved the quality system of any intended changes, in accordance with the process for modification of an approval in 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 4 . 6 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 348

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 338 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.2.6.4 Approval process for periodic inspecti on and testing bodies Initial approval 6.2.2.6.4.1 A body desiring to perform periodic inspection and testing of pressure receptacles in accordance with a pressure receptacle standard and with this Code shall apply for, obtain, and retain an Approval Certificate issued by the competent authority . This written approval shall, on request , be submitted to the competent authority of a country of use . 6.2.2.6.4.2 An application shall be made for each period ic inspection and testing body and shall include: .1 the name and address of the periodic inspect ion and testing body and, if the application is submitted by an authorized representative, its name and address; .2 the address of each facility performing pe riodic inspection and testing; .3 the name and title of the person(s) responsi ble for the quality system; .4 the designation of the pressure receptac les, the periodic inspection and test methods, and the relevant pressure receptacle standards met by the quality system; .5 documentation on each facility, the equi pment, and the quality system as specified under 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 3 . 1; .6 the qualifications and training records o f the periodic inspection and test personnel; and .7 details of any refusal of approval of a simila r application by any other competent authority . 6.2.2.6.4.3 The competent authority shall: .1 examine the documentation to verify that t he procedures are in accordance with the requirements of the relevant pressure receptacle standards and of this Code; and .2 conduct an audit in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 3 . 2 to verify that the inspections and tests are c arried out as required by the relevant pressure receptacle standards and by this Code, to the satisfaction of the competent authority . 6.2.2.6.4.4 After the audit has been carried out with sati sfactory results and all applicable requirements of 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 4 have been satisfied, an Approval Certific ate shall be issued . It shall include the name of the peri odic inspection and testing body, the registered mark, the address of each facility, and the necessary data for identification of its approved activities (e . g . designation of pressure receptacles , periodic inspection and test method and pressure receptacle standards) . 6.2.2.6.4.5 If the periodic inspection and testing bod y is denied approval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons for such denial . Modifications to periodic inspection and t esting body approvals 6.2.2.6.4.6 Following approval, the periodic inspe ction and testing body shall notify the issuing competent authority of any modifications to the information submitted under 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 4 . 2 relating to the initial approval . The modifications shall be evaluated in or der to determine whether the requirements of the relevant pressure receptacle standards and of this Code will be satisfied . An audit in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 6 . 3 . 2 may be required . The competent authority shall accept or r eject these modifications in writing, and an amended Approval Certificate shall be issued as necessary . 6.2.2.6.4.7 Upon request, the competent authority sh all communicate to any other competent authority, information concerning initial approvals, modifications of approvals, and withdrawn approvals . 6.2.2.6.5 Periodic inspection and test and certific ation The application of the periodic inspection and test marks to a pressure receptacle shall be considered a declaration that the pressure receptacle complies with the applicable pressure receptacle standards and with the provisions of this Code . The periodic inspection and testing bod y shall affix the periodic inspection and test marks, including its registered mark, to each approved pressure receptacle (see 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 7) . A record certifying that a pressure recep tacle has passed the periodic inspection and test shall be issued by the periodic inspection and testing body, before the pressure receptacle is filled . 6.2.2.6.6 Records The periodic inspection and testing body shall retain records of pressure receptacle periodic inspection and tests (both passed and failed), including the location of the test facility, for not less than 15 years . The owner of the pressure receptacle shal l retain an identical record until the next periodic inspection and test unless the pressure receptacle is permanently removed from service . 6.2.2.7 Marking of refillable UN pressure recepta cles Note: Marking requirements for UN metal hydride storage systems are given in 6 . 2 . 2 . 9 and marking requirements for UN bundles of c ylinders are given in 6 . 2 . 2 . 10 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 349

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases 339 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.2.7.1 Refillable UN pressure receptacles shall b e marked clearly and legibly with certification, operational and manufacturing marks . These marks shall be permanently affixed ( e . g . stamped, engraved, or etched) on the press ure receptacle . The marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or ne ck of the pressure receptacle or on a permanently affixed component of the pressure receptacle (e . g . welded collar or corrosion-resistan t plate welded on the outer jacket of a closed cryogenic receptacle) . Except for the UN packaging symbol, the min imum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2 . 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diamete r less than 140 mm . The minimum size of the UN packaging symbol s hall be 10 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter less than 140 mm . 6.2.2.7.2 The following certification marks shall be applied: (a) The UN packaging symbol: This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEG C complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 6 . 3, 6 . 5, 6 . 6, 6 . 7 or 6 . 9 . (b) The technical standard (e . g . ISO 9809-1) used for design, constructi on and testing . (c) The character(s) identifying the count ry of approval as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic . * Note: For the purpose of this mark the country of app roval means the country of the competent authority that authorized the initial inspection and test of the individual receptacle at the time of manufacture . (d) The identity mark or stamp of the ins pection body that is registered with the competent authority of the country authorizing the marking . (e) The date of the initial inspection, the year ( four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i . e . “/” ) . 6.2.2.7.3 The following operational marks shall be ap plied: (f) The test pressure in bar, preceded by the lett ers “PH” and followed by the letters “BAR” . (g) The mass of the empty pressure receptacle in cluding all permanently attached integral parts (e . g . neck ring, foot ring, etc . ) in kilograms, followed by the letters “KG” . This mass shall not include the mass of valve , valve cap or valve guard, any coating, or porous mass for acetylene . The mass shall be expressed to three signifi cant figures rounded up to the last digit . For cylinders of less than 1 kg, the mass shall b e expressed to two significant figures rounded up to the last digit . In the case of pressure receptacl es for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, at least one decimal shall be shown after the decimal point and two digits for pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg . (h) The minimum guaranteed wall thickn ess of the pressure receptacle in millimetres followed by the letters “MM” . This mark is not required for pres sure receptacles with a water capacity less than or equal to 1 L or for composite cylinders or for closed cryogenic receptacles . (i) In the case of pressure receptacles for comp ressed gases, UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, the working pressure in bar, preceded by the letters “PW” . In the case of closed cryogenic receptacl es, the maximum allowable working pressure preceded by the letters “MAWP” . (j) In the case of pressure receptacles for liquefied gases and refrigerated liquefied gases, the water capacity in litres expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit, followed by the letter “L” . If the value of the minimum or nominal water ca pacity is an integer, the digits after the decimal point may be neglected . (k) In the case of pressure receptacles for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, the total of the mass of the empty receptacle, the fittings and accesso ries not removed during filling, any coating, the porous material, the solvent and the saturation gas expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit followed by the letters “KG” . At least one decimal shall be shown after the d ecimal point . For pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg, t he mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded down to the last digit . (l) In the case of pressure receptacles for UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, the total of the mass of the empty receptacle, the fittings and accessori es not removed during filling, any coating and the porous material expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit followed by the letters “KG” . At least one decimal shall be shown after the d ecimal point . For pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg , the mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded down to the last digit . * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 350

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 340 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.2.7.4 The following manufacturing marks shal l be applied: (m) Identification of the cylinder thread (e . g . 25E) . This mark is not required for closed cryoge nic receptacles . Note: Information on marks that may be used for i dentifying threads for cylinders is given in ISO/TR 11364, Gas cylinders – Compilation of national and international valve stem/gas cylinder neck threads and their identification and marking system. (n) The manufacturer’s mark registered by the competent authority . When the country of manufacture is not the sa me as the country of approval, then the manufacturer’s mark shall be preceded by the character(s) identifying the country of manufacture as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic . * The country mark and the manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space or slash . (o) The serial number assigned by the manufacturer . (p) In the case of steel pressure receptacles an d composite pressure receptacles with steel liner intended for the transport of gases with a risk of hydrogen embrittlement, the letter “H” showing compatibility of the steel (see ISO 11114-1:2012) . (q) For composite cylinders and tubes having a l imited design life, the letters “FINAL” followed by the design life shown as the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i . e . “/”) . (r) For composite cylinders and tubes having a l imited design life greater than 15 years and for composite cylinders and tubes having non-limited design life, the letters “SERVICE” followed by the date 15 years from the date of manufacture (initial inspection) shown as the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i . e . “/”) . Note: Once the initial design type has passed t he service life test programme requirements in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 1 Note 2 or 6 . 2 . 2 . 1 . 2 Note 2, future production no longer requir es this initial service life mark . The initial service life mark shall be made u nreadable on cylinders and tubes of a design type that has met the service life test programme requirements . 6.2.2.7.5 The above marks shall be placed in three group s . – Manufacturing marks shall be the top group ing and shall appear consecutively in the sequence given in 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 4 except for the marks described in 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 4 (q) and (r) which shall be adjacent to the perio dic inspection and test marks of 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 7 . – The operational marks in 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 3 shall be the middle grouping and th e test pressure (f) shall be immediately preceded by the working pressure (i) when the latter is required . – Certification marks shall be the bottom gro uping and shall appear in the sequence given in 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 2 . The following is an example of marking a cylin der . (m) (n) (o) (p) 25E D M F 765432 H (i) (f) (g) (j) (h) PW200 PH300BAR 62.1KG 50L 5.8MM (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) ISO 9809-1 F IB 2000/12 6.2.2.7.6 Other marks are allowed in areas other than th e side wall, provided they are made in low-stress areas and are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations . In the case of closed cryogenic receptacl es, such marks may be on a separate plate attached to the outer jacket . Such marks shall not conflict with required ma rks . * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 351

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases 341 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.2.7.7 In addition to the preceding marks, each refi llable pressure receptacle that meets the periodic and test requirements of 6 . 2 . 2 . 4 shall be marked in sequence as follows: (a) the character(s) identifying the count ry authorizing the body performing the periodic inspection and test, as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic . * This mark is not required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the country approving manufacture; (b) the registered mark of the body authorized b y the competent authority for performing periodic inspection and test; (c) the date of the periodic inspection and test , the year (two digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i . e . “/”) . Four digits may be used to indicate the year . 6.2.2.7.8 For acetylene cylinders, with the agreem ent of the competent authority, the date of the most recent periodic inspection and the stamp of the body performing the periodic inspection and test may be engraved on a ring held on the cylinder by the valve . The ring shall be configured so that it can only b e removed by disconnecting the valve from the cylinder . 6.2.2.8 Marking of non-refillable UN pressure recep tacles 6.2.2.8.1 Non-refillable UN pressure receptacle s shall be marked clearly and legibly with certification and gas or pressure receptacle specific marks . These marks shall be permanently affixed ( e . g . stencilled, stamped, engraved, or etch ed) on the pressure receptacle . Except when stencilled, the marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the pressure receptacle or on a permanently affixed component of the pressure receptacle (e . g . welded collar) . Except for the “UN” mark and the “DO NOT REFILL ” mark, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2 . 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diamete r less than 140 mm . The minimum size of the “UN” mark shall be 10 mm fo r pressure receptacles with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter less than 140 mm . The minimum size of the “DO NOT REFILL” mark sh all be 5 mm . 6.2.2.8.2 The marks listed in 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 2 to 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 4 shall be applied with the exception of (g), (h ) and (m) . The serial number (o) may be replaced by the batch number . In addition, the words “DO NOT REF ILL” in letters of at least 5 mm in height are required . 6.2.2.8.3 The requirements of 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 5 shall apply . Note: Non-refillable pressure receptac les may, on account of their size, substitute a label for these permanent marks . 6.2.2.8.4 Other marks are allowed provided they are ma de in low-stress areas other than the side wall and are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations . Such marks shall not conflict with require d marks . 6.2.2.9 Marking of UN metal hydride storage systems 6.2.2.9.1 UN metal hydride storage systems shall be ma rked clearly and legibly with the marks listed below . These marks shall be permanently affixed ( e . g . stamped, engraved, or etched) on the metal hy dride storage system . The marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or ne ck of the metal hydride storage system or on a permanently affixed component of the metal hydride storage system . Except for the United Nations packaging s ymbol, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2 . 5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a sm allest overall dimension less than 140 mm . The minimum size of the United Nations pack aging symbol shall be 10 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension less than 140 mm . 6.2.2.9.2 The following marks shall be applied: (a) The United Nations packaging symbol: This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEG C complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 6 . 3, 6 . 5, 6 . 6, 6 . 7 or 6 . 9 . (b) “ISO 16111” (the technical standard used f or design, manufacture and testing) . * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 352

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 342 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (c) The character(s) identifying the country of approval as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic . * Note: For the purpose of this mark the country of app roval means the country of the competent authority that authorized the initial inspection and test of the individual system at the time of manufacture . (d) The identity mark or stamp of the ins pection body that is registered with the competent authority of the country authorizing the marking . (e) The date of the initial inspection, the year ( four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i . e . “/”) . (f) The test pressure of the receptacle in bar, pr eceded by the letters “PH” and followed by the letters “BAR” . (g) The rated charging pressure of the metal hyd ride storage system in bar, preceded by the letters “RCP” and followed by the letters “BAR” . (h) The manufacturer’s mark registered by the competent authority . When the country of manufacture is not the sa me as the country of approval, then the manufacturer’s mark shall be preceded by the character(s) identifying the country of manufacture as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic . * The country mark and the manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space or slash . (i) The serial number assigned by the manufacturer . (j) In the case of steel receptacles and composi te receptacles with steel liner, the letter “H” showing compatibility of the steel (see ISO 11114-1:2012) . (k) In the case of metal hydride storage systems h aving limited life, the date of expiry, denoted by the letters “FINAL” followed by the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i . e . “/”) . The certification marks specified in (a) to (e ) above shall appear consecutively in the sequence given . The test pressure (f) shall be immediatel y preceded by the rated charging pressure (g) . The manufacturing marks specified in (h) t o (k) above shall appear consecutively in the sequence given . 6.2.2.9.3 Other marks are allowed in areas other than th e side wall, provided they are made in low stress areas and are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations . Such marks shall not conflict with required mar ks . 6.2.2.9.4 In addition to the preceding marks, each met al hydride storage system that meets the periodic and test requirements of 6 . 2 . 2 . 4 shall be marked indicating: (a) The character(s) identifying the count ry authorizing the body performing the periodic inspection and test, as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic . † This mark is not required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the country approving manufacture; (b) The registered mark of the body authorized b y the competent authority for performing periodic inspection and test; (c) The date of the periodic inspection and test , the year (two digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i . e . “/” ) . Four digits may be used to indicate the year . The above marks shall appear consecutive ly in the sequence given . 6.2.2.10 Marking of UN bundles of cylinders 6.2.2.10.1 Individual cylinders in a bundle of cylind ers shall be marked in accordance with 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 6.2.2.10.2 Refillable UN bundles of cylinders s hall be marked clearly and legibly with certification, operational, and manufacturing marks . These marks shall be permanently affixed ( e . g . stamped, engraved, or etched) on a plate perm anently attached to the frame of the bundle of cylinders . Except for the UN packaging symbol, the min imum size of the marks shall be 5 mm . The minimum size of the UN packaging symbol s hall be 10 mm . 6.2.2.10.3 The following marks shall be applied: (a) The certification marks specified in 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 2 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) . (b) The operational marks specified in 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 3 (f), (i), (j) and the total of the mass of the frame o f the bundle and all permanently attached parts (cylinders, manifold, fittings and valves) . Bundles intended for the carriage of UN 100 1 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free shall bear the tare mass as specified in clause B . 4 . 2 of ISO 10961:2010 . (c) The manufacturing marks specified in 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 4 (n), (o) and, where applicable, (p) . * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . † Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 353

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases 343 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.2.10.4 The marks shall be placed in three groups: (a) The manufacturing marks shall be the top gro uping and shall appear consecutively in the sequence given in 6 . 2 . 2 . 10 . 3 (c) . (b) The operational marks in 6 . 2 . 2 . 10 . 3 (b) shall be the middle grouping and the opera tional mark specified in 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 3 (f) shall be immediately preceded by the ope rational mark specified in 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 . 3 (i) when the latter is required . (c) Certification marks shall be the bottom gro uping and shall appear in the sequence given in 6 . 2 . 2 . 10 . 3 (a) . 6.2.3 Provisions for non-UN pressure receptacle s 6.2.3.1 Pressure receptacles not designed, cons tructed, inspected, tested and approved according to 6 . 2 . 2 shall be designed, constructed, inspecte d, tested and approved in accordance with a technical code recognized by the competent authority and the general provisions of 6 . 2 . 1 . 6.2.3.2 Pressure receptacles designed, constr ucted, inspected, tested and approved under the provisions of this section shall not be marked with the UN packaging symbol . 6.2.3.3 For metallic cylinders, tubes, pressur e drums, bundles of cylinders and salvage pressure receptacles, the construction shall be such that the minimum burst ratio (burst pressure divided by test pressure) is: 1 . 50 for refillable pressure receptacles; 2 . 00 for non-refillable pressure receptacles . 6.2.3.4 Marking shall be in accordance with the requ irements of the competent authority of the country of use . 6.2.3.5 Salvage pressure receptacles Note: These provisions of 6 . 2 . 3 . 5 for salvage pressure receptacles may be ap plied for new salvage pressure receptacles as from 1 January 2013, unless otherwise authorized, and shall be applied for all new salvage pressure receptacles as from 1 January 2014 . Salvage pressure receptacles approv ed in accordance with national regulations may be used with the approval of the competent authorities of the countries of use . 6.2.3.5.1 To permit the safe handling and disposal of th e pressure receptacles transported within the salvage pressure receptacle, the design may include equipment not otherwise used for cylinders or pressure drums such as flat heads, quick opening devices and openings in the cylindrical part . 6.2.3.5.2 Instructions on the safe handling and use of t he salvage pressure receptacle shall be clearly shown in the documentation for the application to the competent authority and shall form part of the approval certificate . In the approval certificate, the pressur e receptacles authorized to be transported in a salvage pressure receptacle shall be indicated . A list of the materials of construction of al l parts likely to be in contact with the dangerous goods shall also be included . 6.2.3.5.3 A copy of the approval certificate shall be del ivered by the manufacturer to the owner of a salvage pressure receptacle . 6.2.3.5.4 The marking of salvage pressure receptac les according to 6 . 2 . 3 shall be determined by the competent autho rity in taking into account suitable marking provisions of 6 . 2 . 2 . 7 as appropriate . The marking shall include the water capac ity and test pressure of the salvage pressure receptacle . 6.2.4 Provisions for aerosol dispensers, small r eceptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas Each filled aerosol dispenser or gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shall be subjected to a test in a hot water bath in accordance with 6 . 2 . 4 . 1 or an approved water bath alternative in acc ordance with 6 . 2 . 4 . 2 . 6.2.4.1 Hot water bath test 6.2.4.1.1 The temperature of the water bath and the dura tion of the test shall be such that the internal pressure reaches that which would be reached at 55 ° C (50 ° C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge at 50 ° C) . If the contents are sensitive to heat or if the a erosol dispensers, gas cartridges or fuel cell cartridges are made of plastics material which softens at this test temperature, the temperature of the bath shall be set at between 20 ° C and 30 ° C but, in addition, one aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge in 2,000 shall be tested at the higher temperature . 6.2.4.1.2 No leakage or permanent deformation of an ae rosol dispenser, receptacle or fuel cell cartridge may occur, except that a plastic aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge may be deformed through softening provided that it does not leak . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 354

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 344 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.4.2 Alternative methods With the approval of the competent authority, alternative methods which provide an equivalent level of safety may be used provided that the requirements of 6 . 2 . 4 . 2 . 1 and, as appropriate, 6 . 2 . 4 . 2 . 2 or 6 . 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 are met . 6.2.4.2.1 Quality system Aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge fillers and component manufacturers shall have a quality system . The quality system shall implement proc edures to ensure that all aerosol dispensers, gas cartridges or fuel cell cartridges that leak or that are deformed are rejected and not offered for transport . The quality system shall include: (a) a description of the organizational st ructure and responsibilities; (b) the relevant inspection and test, qualit y control, quality assurance, and process operation instructions that will be used; (c) quality records, such as inspection repo rts, test data, calibration data and certificates; (d) management reviews to ensure the effecti ve operation of the quality system; (e) a process for control of documents and their r evision; (f) a means for control of non-conforming aero sol dispensers, gas cartridges or fuel cell cartridges; (g) training programmes and qualification proce dures for relevant personnel; and (h) procedures to ensure that there is no damage t o the final product . An initial audit and periodic audits shall b e conducted to the satisfaction of the competent authority . These audits shall ensure the approved sy stem is and remains adequate and efficient . Any proposed changes to the approved syst em shall be notified to the competent authority in advance . 6.2.4.2.2 Aerosol dispensers 6.2.4.2.2.1 Pressure and leak testing of aerosol dispe nsers before filling Each empty aerosol dispenser shall be subjected to a pressure equal to or in excess of the maximum expected in the filled aerosol dispensers at 55 ° C (50 ° C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the receptacle at 50 ° C) . This shall be at least two-thirds of the desi gn pressure of the aerosol dispenser . If any aerosol dispenser shows evidence o f leakage at a rate equal to or greater than 3 . 3 × 10 - 2 mbar · L · s - 1 at the test pressure, distortion or other defect, it shall be rejected . 6.2.4.2.2.2 Testing of the aerosol dispensers after fil ling Prior to filling, the filler shall ensure that the crimping equipment is set appropriately and the specified propellant is used . Each filled aerosol dispenser shall be weig hed and leak tested . The leak detection equipment shall be suf ficiently sensitive to detect at least a leak rate of 2 . 0 × 10 - 3 mbar · L · s - 1 at 20 ° C . Any filled aerosol dispenser which shows ev idence of leakage, deformation or excessive mass shall be rejected . 6.2.4.2.3 Gas cartridges and fuel cell cartridges 6.2 .4.2.3.1 Pressure testing of gas cartridges and f uel cell cartridges Each gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shall be subjected to a test pressure equal to or in excess of the maximum expected in the filled receptacle at 55 ° C (50 ° C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the receptacle at 50 ° C) . This test pressure shall be that specified f or the gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge and shall not be less than two thirds the design pressure of the gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge . If any gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge s hows evidence of leakage at a rate equal to or greater than 3 . 3 × 10 - 2 mbar · L · s - 1 at the test pressure or distortion or any other defect, it shall be rejected . 6.2.4.2.3.2 Leak testing gas cartridges and fuel cell cart ridges Prior to filling and sealing, the filler shall ensure that the closures (if any), and the associated sealing equipment are closed appropriately and the specified gas is used . Each filled gas cartridge or fuel ce ll cartridge shall be checked for the correct mass of gas and shall be leak tested . The leak detection equipment shall be suf ficiently sensitive to detect at least a leak rate of 2 . 0 × 10 - 3 mbar · L · s - 1 at 20 ° C . Any gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge tha t has gas masses not in conformity with the declared mass limits or shows evidence of leakage or deformation, shall be rejected . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 355

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases 345 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.2.4.3 With the approval of the competent authori ty, aerosols and receptacles, small, are not subject to 6 . 2 . 4 . 1 and 6 . 2 . 4 . 2, if they are required to be sterile but may be adv ersely affected by water bath testing, provided: (a) They contain a non-flammable gas and either ( i) contain other substances that are consti tuent parts of pharmaceutical products for medical, veterinary or similar purposes; (ii) contain other substances used in the produ ction process for pharmaceutical products; or (iii) are used in medical, veterinary or similar a pplications; (b) An equivalent level of safety is achieved by t he manufacturer’s use of alternative methods for leak detection and pressure resistance, such as helium detection and water bathing a statistical sample of at least 1 in 2,000 from each production batch; and (c) For pharmaceutical products accordin g to (a)(i) and (iii) above, they are manufactured under the authority of a national health administration . If required by the competent authority, t he principles of Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP) established by the World Health Organization (WHO) * shall be followed . * Refer to WHO publication: Quality assurance of pharmaceuticals. A compendium of guidelines and related materials. Volume 2: Good manufacturing practices and inspection . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 356

6 346 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Chapter 6.3 Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings for class 6.2 infectious substances of category A (UN 2814 and UN 2900) 6.3.1 General 6.3.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to pack agings intended for the transport of infectious substances of category A, UN 2814 and UN 2900 . 6.3.2 Provisions for packagings 6.3.2.1 The provisions for packagings in this sect ion are based on packagings, as specified in 6 . 1 . 4, currently used . In order to take into account progress in sci ence and technology, there is no objection to the use of packagings having specifications different from those in this chapter provided that they are equally effective, acceptable to the competent authority and able successfully to withstand the tests described in 6 . 3 . 5 . Methods of testing other than those descr ibed in the provisions of this Code are acceptable provided they are equivalent . 6.3.2.2 Packagings shall be manufactured a nd tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each packaging meets the provisions of this chapter . Note: ISO 16106:2006, Packaging – Trans port packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001, provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed . 6.3.2.3 Manufacturers and subsequent distrib utors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this chapter . 6.3.3 Code for designating types of packagings 6.3.3.1 The codes for designating types of packagi ngs are set out in 6 . 1 . 2 . 7 . 6.3.3.2 The letters “U” or “W” may follow the packaging code . The letter “U” signifies a special packaging conf orming to the provisions of 6 . 3 . 5 . 1 . 6 . The letter “W” signifies that the packagin g, although of the same type as indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from that in 6 . 1 . 4 and is considered equivalent under the pro visions of 6 . 3 . 2 . 1 . 6.3.4 Marking Note 1: The marks indicate that the packaging which bears them correspond to a successfully tested design type and that it complies with the provisions of this chapter which are related to the manufacture, but not to the use, of the packaging . Note 2: The marks are intended to be of assista nce to packaging manufacturers, reconditioners, packaging users, carriers and regulatory authorities . Note 3: The marks do not always provide full de tails of the test levels, etc . , and these may need to be taken further into acco unt, e . g . by reference to a test certificate, to test re ports or to a register of successfully tested packagings . 6.3.4.1 Each packaging intended for use according to the provisions of this Code shall bear marks which are durable, legible and placed in a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible . For packages with a gross mass of more than 3 0 kg, the marks or a duplicate thereof shall appear on the top or on a side of the packaging . Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at l east 12 mm high, except for packagings of 30 L capacity △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 357

Chapter 6.3 – Construction and testing of packagings for class 6.2 substances 347 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and except for packagings of 5 L capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall be of an appropriate size . 6.3.4.2 A packaging that meets the provisions of thi s section and of 6 . 3 . 5 shall be marked with: (a) the United Nations packaging symbol: This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEG C complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 6 . 3, 6 . 5, 6 . 6, 6 . 7 or 6 . 9; (b) the code designating the type of packaging accord ing to the provisions of 6 . 1 . 2; (c) the text “CLASS 6 . 2”; (d) the last two digits of the year of manufacture o f the packaging; (e) the State authorizing the allocation of th e mark, the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic; * (f) the name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority; and (g) for packagings meeting the provisions of 6 . 3 . 5 . 1 . 6, the letter “U” shall be inserted immediat ely following the mark required in (b) above . 6.3.4.3 Marks shall be applied in the sequence shown i n 6 . 3 . 4 . 2 (a) to (g); each mark required in these subpa ragraphs shall be clearly separated, e . g . by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiab le . For examples, see 6 . 3 . 4 . 4 . Any additional markings authorized by a co mpetent authority shall still enable the marks required in 6 . 3 . 4 . 1 to be correctly identified . 6.3.4.4 Example of marking 4G/CLASS 6.2/06 S/SP-9989-ERIKSSON as in 6 . 3 . 4 . 2 (a), (b), (c) and (d) as in 6 . 3 . 4 . 2 (e) and (f ) 6.3.5 Test provisions for packagings 6.3.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests 6.3.5.1.1 The design type of each packaging shall be tes ted as provided in this section in accordance with procedures established by the competent authority . 6.3.5.1.2 Each packaging design type shall su ccessfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used . A packaging design type is defined by the design, s ize, material and thickness, manner of construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments . It also includes packagings which differ from the design type only in their lesser design height . 6.3.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samp les at intervals established by the competent authority . 6.3.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modi fication which alters the design, material or manner of construction of a packaging . 6.3.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the sel ective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects from a tested type, such as smaller sizes or lower net mass of primary receptacles; and packagings such as drums and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s) . 6.3.5.1.6 Primary receptacles of any type may be assembled within a secondary packaging and transported without testing in the rigid outer packaging under the following conditions: .1 the rigid outer packaging shall have been su ccessfully tested in accordance with 6 . 3 . 5 . 2 . 2 with fragile (such as glass) primary recep tacles; .2 the total combined gross mass of primary rec eptacles shall not exceed one half of the gross mass of primary receptacles used for the drop test in . 1 above; * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 358

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 348 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 .3 the thickness of cushioning between primary receptacles and between primary receptacles and the outside of the secondary packaging shal l not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses in the originally tested packaging; and if a single primary receptacle was used in the original test, the thickness of cushioning between primary receptacles shall not be less than the thickness of cushioning between the outside of the secondary packaging and the primary receptacle in the original test . When either fewer or smaller primary r eceptacles are used (as compared to the primary receptacles used in the drop test), sufficient additional cushioning material shall be used to take up the void spaces; .4 the rigid outer packaging shall have succe ssfully passed the stacking test in 6 . 1 . 5 . 6 while empty . The total mass of identical packages shal l be based on the combined mass of packagings used in the drop test in . 1 above; .5 for primary receptacles containin g liquids, an adequate quantity of absorbent material to absorb the entire liquid content of the primary receptacles shall be present; .6 if the rigid outer packaging is intended to co ntain primary receptacles for liquids and is not leakproof, or is intended to contain primary receptacles for solids and is not sift-proof, a means of containing any liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form of a leakproof liner, plastics bag or other equally effective means of containment; and .7 in addition to the marks prescribed in 6 . 3 . 4 . 2 (a) to (f), packagings shall be marked in acco rdance with 6 . 3 . 4 . 2(g) . 6.3.5.1.7 The competent authority may at any time requ ire proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially produced packagings meet the provisions of the design type tests . 6.3.5.1.8 Provided the validity of the test results is n ot affected and with the approval of the competent authority, several tests may be made on one sample . 6.3.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing 6.3.5.2.1 Samples of each packaging shall be prepare d as for transport except that a liquid or solid infectious substance shall be replaced by water or, where conditioning at - 18 ° C is specified, by water containing antifreeze . Each primary receptacle shall be filled to n ot less than 98% of its capacity . Note: The term “water” includes water/ant ifreeze solution with a minimum specific gravity of 0 . 95 for testing at - 18 ° C . 6.3.5.2.2 Tests and number of samples required Tests required for packaging types Type of packaging a Tests required Rigid outer packaging Primary receptacle Water spray 6.3.5.3.5.1 Cold conditioning 6.3.5.3.5.2 Drop 6.3.5.3 Additional drop 6.3.5.3.5.3 Puncture 6.3.5.4 Stack 6.1.5.6 Plastics Other Number of samples Number of samples Number of samples Number of samples Number of samples Number of samples Fibreboard box x 5 5 10 Required on one sample when the packaging is intended to contain dry ice . 2 Required on three samples when testing a “U”-marked pac kaging as defined in 6 . 3 . 5 . 1 . 6 for specific provisions . x 5 0 5 2 Fibreboard drum x 3 3 6 2 x 3 0 3 2 Plastics box x 0 5 5 2 x 0 5 5 2 Plastics dr um/ jerrican x 0 3 3 2 x 0 3 3 2 Boxes of other material x 0 5 5 2 x 0 0 5 2 Drums/jerricans of other material x 0 3 3 2 x 0 0 3 2 a “Type of packaging” categorizes packagings for test purposes according to the kind of packaging and its material characteristics . Note 1: In instances where a primary receptacle is made of two or more materials, the material most liable to damage determines the appropriate test . Note 2: The materials of the secondary packagi ngs are not taken into consideration when selecting the test or conditioning for the test . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 359

Chapter 6.3 – Construction and testing of packagings for class 6.2 substances 349 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Explanation for use of the table: If the packaging to be tested consists of a fibreboard outer box with a plastics primary receptacle, five samples must undergo the water spray test (see 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 . 5 . 1) prior to dropping and another five must be condi tioned to - 18 ° C (see 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 . 5 . 2) prior to dropping . If the packaging is to contain dry ice then on e further single sample shall be dropped in accordance with 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 . 5 . 3 . Packagings prepared as for transport sha ll be subjected to the tests in 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 and 6 . 3 . 5 . 4 . For outer packagings, the headings in the table relate to fibreboard or similar materials whose performance may be rapidly affected by moisture; plastics which may embrittle at low temperature; and other materials such as metal whose performance is not affected by moisture or temperature . 6.3.5.3 Drop test 6.3.5.3.1 Drop height and target Samples shall be subjected to free-fall drops from a height of 9 m onto a non - resilient, horizontal, flat, massive an d rigid surface in conformity with 6 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 4 . 6.3.5.3.2 Number of test samples and drop orientatio n 6.3.5.3.2.1 Where the samples are in the shape of a box, five shall be dropped, one in each of the following orientations: .1 flat on the base; .2 flat on the top; .3 flat on the longest side; .4 flat on the shortest side; and .5 on a corner . 6.3.5.3.2.2 Where the samples are in the shape of a drum or a jerrican, three shall be dropped, one in each of the following orientations: .1 diagonally on the top edge, with the centre of g ravity directly above the point of impact; .2 diagonally on the base edge; and .3 flat on the body or side . 6.3.5.3.3 While the sample shall be released in the requ ired orientation, it is accepted that, for aerodynamic reasons, the impact may not take place in that orientation . 6.3.5.3.4 Following the appropriate drop sequen ce, there shall be no leakage from the primary receptacle(s), which shall remain protected by cushioning/absorbent material in the secondary packaging . 6.3.5.3.5 Special preparation of test sample for the d rop test 6.3.5.3.5.1 Fibreboard – Water spray test Fibreboard outer packagings: The sample shall be subjected to a water spray that simulates exposure to rainfall of approximately 5 cm per hour for at least one hour . It shall then be subjected to the test descri bed in 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 . 1 . 6.3.5.3.5.2 Plastics material – Cold conditioning Plastics primary receptacles or outer packagings: The temperature of the test sample and its contents shall be reduced to - 18 ° C or lower for a period of at least 24 h and within 15 min of removal from that atmosphere the test sample shall be subjected to the test described in 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 . 1 . Where the sample contains dry ice, the cond itioning period shall be reduced to 4 hours . 6.3.5.3.5.3 Packagings intended to contain dry ice – Add itional drop test Where the packaging is intended to contain dry ice, a test additional to that specified in 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 . 1 and, when appropriate, in 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 . 5 . 1 or 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 . 5 . 2 shall be carried out . One sample shall be stored so that all the dry ic e dissipates and then that sample shall be dropped in one of the orientations described in 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 . 2 . 1 or in 6 . 3 . 5 . 3 . 2 . 2, as appropriate; which shall be that most li kely to result in failure of the packaging . 6.3.5.4 Puncture test 6.3.5.4.1 Packagings with a gross mass of 7 kg or less Samples shall be placed on a level hard surface . A cylindrical steel rod with a mass of a t least 7 kg, a diameter of 38 mm and the impact end edges having a radius not exceeding 6 mm (see below) shall be dropped in a vertical free fall from a height of 1 m, measured from the impact end to the impact surface of a sample . One △ △ △ △ △ △ △ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 360

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 350 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 sample shall be placed on its base . A second sample shall be placed in an orienta tion perpendicular to that used for the first . In each instance, the steel rod sha ll be aimed to impact the primary receptacle . Following each impact, penetration of the secondary packaging is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage from the primary receptacle(s) . 6.3.5.4.2 Packagings with a gross mass exceeding 7 kg Samples shall be dropped on to the end of a cylindrical steel rod . The rod shall be set vertically in a level hard s urface . It shall have a diameter of 38 mm and the edges of th e upper end a radius not exceeding 6 mm (see below) . The rod shall protrude from the surface a d istance at least equal to that between the centre of the primary receptacle(s) and the outer surface of the outer packaging with a minimum of 200 mm . One sample shall be dropped with its top face l owermost in a vertical free fall from a height of 1 m, measured from the top of the steel rod . A second sample shall be dropped from the sam e height in an orientation perpendicular to that used for the first . In each instance, the packaging shall be so o rientated that the steel rod would be capable of penetrating the primary receptacle(s) . Following each impact, penetration of the sec ondary packaging is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage from the primary receptacle(s) . 38 mm Radius ≤ 6 mm 6.3.5.5 Test report 6.3.5.5.1 A written test report containing at least th e following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the packaging: .1 Name and address of the test facility; .2 Name and address of applicant (where app ropriate); .3 A unique test report identification; .4 Date of the test and of the report; .5 Manufacturer of the packaging; .6 Description of the packaging design type (e . g . dimensions, materials, closures, thi ckness, etc . ), including method of manufacture (e . g . blow moulding) and which may include draw ing(s) and/or photograph(s); .7 Maximum capacity; .8 Test contents; .9 Test descriptions and results; .10 The test report shall be signed with the name an d status of the signatory . 6.3.5.5.2 The test report shall contain statements t hat the packaging prepared as for transport was tested in accordance with the appropriate requirements of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid . A copy of the test report shall be available to t he competent authority . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 361

351 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Chapter 6.4 Provisions for the construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material and for the approval of such material Note: This chapter includes provisions which a pply to the construction, testing and approval of certain packages and material only when transported by air . Whilst these provisions do not apply to pac kages/material transported by sea, the provisions are reproduced for information/identification purposes, since such packages/material, designed, tested and approved for air transport, may also be transported by sea . 6.4.1 [Reserved] 6.4.2 General provisions 6.4.2.1 The package shall be so designed in relation t o its mass, volume and shape that it can be easily and safely transported . In addition, the package shall be so design ed that it can be properly secured in or on the conveyance during transport . 6.4.2.2 The design shall be such that any lif ting attachments on the package will not fail when used in the intended manner and that, if failure of the attachments shall occur, the ability of the package to meet other provisions of this Code would not be impaired . The design shall take account of appropri ate safety factors to cover snatch lifting . 6.4.2.3 Attachments and any other features on the ou ter surface of the package which could be used to lift it shall be designed either to support its mass in accordance with the provisions of 6 . 4 . 2 . 2 or shall be removable or otherwise rendere d incapable of being used during transport . 6.4.2.4 As far as practicable, the packaging shall b e so designed that the external surfaces are free from protruding features and can be easily decontaminated . 6.4.2.5 As far as practicable, the outer layer of the pa ckage shall be so designed as to prevent the collection and the retention of water . 6.4.2.6 Any features added to the package at the time of t ransport which are not part of the package shall not reduce its safety . 6.4.2.7 The package shall be capable of withstanding the effects of any acceleration, vibration or vibration resonance which may arise under routine conditions of transport without any deterioration in the effectiveness of the closing devices on the various receptacles or in the integrity of the package as a whole . In particular, nuts, bolts and other secu ring devices shall be so designed as to prevent them from becoming loose or being released unintentionally, even after repeated use . 6.4.2.8 The design of the package shall take into account ageing mechanisms . 6.4.2.9 The materials of the packaging and any compo nents or structures shall be physically and chemically compatible with each other and with the radioactive contents . Account shall be taken of their behaviour u nder irradiation . 6.4.2.10 All valves through which the radioactive c ontents could escape shall be protected against unauthorized operation . 6.4.2.11 The design of the package shall take into acco unt ambient temperatures and pressures that are likely to be encountered in routine conditions of transport . 6.4.2.12 A package shall be so designed that it provides s ufficient shielding to ensure that, under routine conditions of transport and with the maximum radioactive contents that the package is designed to contain, the dose rate at any point on the external surface of the package would not exceed the values specified in 2 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 1 . 2, 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 11 and 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 12, as applicable, with account taken of 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 3 . 3 and 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 5 . △ ■ △ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 362

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 352 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.4.2.13 For radioactive material having other dan gerous properties, the package design shall take into account those properties; see 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 5, 2 . 0 . 3 . 1 and 2 . 0 . 3 . 2 . 6.4.2.14 Manufacturers and subsequent distrib utors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this chapter . 6.4.3 Additional provisions for packages transporte d by air 6.4.3.1 For packages to be transported by air, the tem perature of the accessible surfaces shall not exceed 50 ° C at an ambient temperature of 38 ° C with no account taken for insolation . 6.4.3.2 Packages to be transported by air shall be so de signed that, if they were exposed to ambient temperatures ranging from - 40 ° C to + 55 ° C, the integrity of containment would not be impaired . 6.4.3.3 Packages containing radioactive mate rial, to be transported by air, shall be capable of withstanding, without loss or dispersal of radioactive contents from the containment system, an internal pressure which produces a pressure differential of not less than maximum normal operating pressure plus 95 kPa . 6.4.4 Provisions for excepted packages An excepted package shall be designed to meet the requirements specified in 6 . 4 . 2 . 1 to 6 . 4 . 2 . 12 and, in addition, the requirements of 6 . 4 . 7 . 2 if it contains fissile material all owed by one of the provisions of sub-paragraphs . 1 to . 6 of 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5, and the requirements of 6 . 4 . 3 if transported by air . 6.4.5 Provisions for industrial packages 6.4.5.1 A Type IP-1 package shall be designed to meet th e provisions specified in 6 . 4 . 2 and 6 . 4 . 7 . 2, and, in addition, shall meet the provision s of 6 . 4 . 3 if carried by air . 6.4.5.2 A package, to be qualified as a Type IP-2 package , shall be designed to meet the provisions for Type IP-1 as specified in 6 . 4 . 5 . 1 and, in addition, if it were subjected to the tes ts specified in 6 . 4 . 15 . 4 and 6 . 4 . 15 . 5, it would prevent: .1 loss or dispersal of the radioactive conte nts, and .2 more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rat e at any external surface of the package . 6.4.5.3 A package, to be qualified as a Type IP-3 package , shall be designed to meet the provisions for Type IP-1 as specified in 6 . 4 . 5 . 1 and, in addition, the provisions specified i n 6 . 4 . 7 . 2–6 . 4 . 7 . 15 . 6.4.5.4 Alternative provisions for Type IP-2 and Ty pe IP-3 packages 6.4.5.4.1 Packages may be used as Type IP-2 package pro vided that: .1 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 sp ecified in 6 . 4 . 5 . 1; .2 they are designed to satisfy the provision s for packing group I or II in chapter 6 . 1 of this Code; and .3 when subjected to the tests for UN packing gro up I or II in chapter 6 . 1, they would prevent: (i) loss or dispersal of the radioactive conte nts; and (ii) more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rat e at any external surface of the package . 6.4.5.4.2 Portable tanks may also be used as Type IP-2 or Ty pe IP-3 packages provided that: .1 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 sp ecified in 6 . 4 . 5 . 1; .2 they are designed to satisfy the provision s of chapter 6 . 7 of this Code, and are capable of withstandin g a test pressure of 265 kPa; and .3 they are designed so that any shielding whic h is provided shall be capable of withstanding the static and dynamic stresses resulting from handling and routine conditions of transport and of preventing more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the portable tanks . 6.4.5.4.3 Tanks, other than portable tanks, may also b e used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 packages for transporting LSA-I and LSA-II as prescribed in the table under 4 . 1 . 9 . 2 . 5, provided that: .1 they satisfy the provisions of 6 . 4 . 5 . 1; .2 they are designed to satisfy the provision s prescribed in regional or national regulations for the transport of dangerous goods and are capable of withstanding a test pressure of 265 kPa; and △ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 363

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material 353 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 .3 they are designed so that any additional shielding which is provided shall be capable of withstanding the static and dynamic stresses resulting f rom handling and routine conditions of transport and of preventing more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the tanks . 6.4.5.4.4 Freight containers with the characteri stics of a permanent enclosure may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 packages provided that: .1 the radioactive contents are restricted to solid materials; .2 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 sp ecified in 6 . 4 . 5 . 1; and .3 they are designed to conform to the standard s prescribed in ISO 1496-1:1990(E), Series 1 Freight Containers – Specifications and Testing – Part 1: General Cargo Containers, and subsequent amendments 1:1993, 2:1998, 3:2005, 4:2006 and 5:2006, excluding dimensions and ratings . They shall be designed such that, if sub jected to the tests prescribed in that document and the accelerations occurring during routine conditions of transport, they would prevent: .1 loss or dispersal of the radioactive conte nts; and .2 more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rat e at any external surface of the package . 6.4.5.4.5 Metal intermediate bulk containers may a lso be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 packages provided that: .1 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 sp ecified in 6 . 4 . 5 . 1; and .2 they are designed to satisfy the provision s of chapter 6 . 5 of this Code for packing group I or II, and if they w ere subjected to the tests prescribed in that chapter, but with the drop test conducted in the most damaging orientation, they would prevent: .1 loss or dispersal of the radioactive conte nts; and .2 more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rat e at any external surface of the package . 6.4.6 Provisions for packages containing uranium he xafluoride 6.4.6.1 Packages designed to contain uranium hex afluoride shall meet the requirements which pertain to the radioactive and fissile properties of the material prescribed elsewhere in this Code . Except as allowed in 6 . 4 . 6 . 4, uranium hexafluoride in quantities of 0 . 1 kg or more shall also be packaged and transpor ted in accordance with ISO 7195:2005, Nuclear energy – Packaging of uranium hexafluoride (UF6) for transport , and the provisions of 6 . 4 . 6 . 2 to 6 . 4 . 6 . 3 . 6.4.6.2 Each package designed to contain 0 . 1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall be des igned so that the package would meet the following provisions: .1 withstand, without leakage and without un acceptable stress, as specified in ISO 7195:2005, the structural test as specified in 6 . 4 . 21 except as allowed in 6 . 4 . 6 . 4; .2 withstand, without loss or dispersal of the u ranium hexafluoride, the free drop test specified in 6 . 4 . 15 . 4; and .3 withstand, without rupture of the contain ment system, the thermal test specified in 6 . 4 . 17 . 3 except as allowed in 6 . 4 . 6 . 4 . 6.4.6.3 Packages designed to contain 0 . 1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall not be p rovided with pressure relief devices . 6.4.6.4 Subject to multilateral approval, pa ckages designed to contain 0 . 1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride may be tr ansported if the packages are designed: (a) to international or national standards o ther than ISO 7195:2005, provided an equivalent level of safety is maintained; (b) to withstand, without leakage and without u nacceptable stress, a test pressure of less than 2 . 76 MPa as specified in 6 . 4 . 21; and/or (c) to contain 9000 kg or more of uranium hexafluor ide and the packages do not meet the requirement of 6 . 4 . 6 . 2 . 3 . In all other respects, the provisions of 6 . 4 . 6 . 1 to 6 . 4 . 6 . 3 shall be satisfied . 6.4.7 Provisions for Type A packages 6.4.7.1 Type A packages shall be designed to meet the ge neral provisions of 6 . 4 . 2, shall meet the provisions of 6 . 4 . 3 if carried by air, and shall meet the provisio ns of 6 . 4 . 7 . 2–6 . 4 . 7 . 17 . 6.4.7.2 The smallest overall external dimensio n of the package shall not be less than 10 cm . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 364

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 354 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.4.7.3 The outside of the package shall incorpora te a feature, such as a seal, which is not readily breakable and which, while intact, will be evidence that it has not been opened . 6.4.7.4 Any tie-down attachments on the package shall b e so designed that, under normal and accident conditions of transport, the forces in those attachments shall not impair the ability of the package to meet the provisions of this Code . 6.4.7.5 The design of the package shall take into account temperatures ranging from - 40 ° C to + 70 ° C for the components of the packaging . Attention shall be given to freezing temp eratures for liquids and to the potential degradation of packaging materials within the given temperature range . 6.4.7.6 The design and manufacturing techniques shall be in accordance with national or international standards, or other provisions, acceptable to the competent authority . 6.4.7.7 The design shall include a containment sys tem securely closed by a positive fastening device which cannot be opened unintentionally or by a pressure which may arise within the package . 6.4.7.8 Special form radioactive material may be c onsidered as a component of the containment system . 6.4.7.9 If the containment system forms a separate u nit of the package, the containment system shall be capable of being securely closed by a positive fastening device which is independent of any other part of the packaging . 6.4.7.10 The design of any component of the containme nt system shall take into account, where applicable, the radiolytic decomposition of liquids and other vulnerable materials and the generation of gas by chemical reaction and radiolysis . 6.4.7.11 The containment system shall retain its ra dioactive contents under a reduction of ambient pressure to 60 kPa . 6.4.7.12 All valves, other than pressure relief val ves, shall be provided with an enclosure to retain any leakage from the valve . 6.4.7.13 A radiation shield which encloses a co mponent of the package specified as a part of the containment system shall be so designed as to prevent the unintentional release of that component from the shield . Where the radiation shield and such compo nent within it form a separate unit, the radiation shield shall be capable of being securely closed by a positive fastening device which is independent of any other packaging structure . 6.4.7.14 A package shall be so designed that, if it were su bjected to the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 15, it would prevent: (a) loss or dispersal of the radioactive conte nts; and (b) more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rat e at any external surface of the package . 6.4.7.15 The design of a package intended for liquid radioactive material shall make provision for ullage to accommodate variations in the temperature of the contents, dynamic effects and filling dynamics . Type A packages to contain liquids 6.4.7.16 A Type A package designed to contain liquid r adioactive material shall, in addition: .1 be adequate to meet the conditions specifie d in 6 . 4 . 7 . 14(a) above if the package is subjected to the t ests specified in 6 . 4 . 16; and .2 either (i) be provided with sufficient absorbent mat erial to absorb twice the volume of the liquid contents . Such absorbent material must be suitabl y positioned so as to contact the liquid in the event of leakage; or (ii) be provided with a containment system comp osed of primary inner and secondary outer containment components designed to enclose the liquid contents completely and ensure their retention within the secondary outer containment components even if the primary inner components leak . Type A packages to contain gas 6.4.7.17 A Type A package designed for gases shall preve nt loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents if the package were subjected to the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 16, except for a Type A package desig ned for tritium gas or for noble gases . 6.4.8 Provisions for Type B(U) packages 6.4.8.1 Type B(U) packages shall be designed to meet t he requirements specified in 6 . 4 . 2, the requirements specified in 6 . 4 . 3 if carried by air, and of 6 . 4 . 7 . 2 to 6 . 4 . 7 . 15, except as specified in 6 . 4 . 7 . 14(a), and, in addition, the requirements speci fied in 6 . 4 . 8 . 2 to 6 . 4 . 8 . 15 . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 365

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material 355 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.4.8.2 A package shall be so designed that, under the ambie nt conditions specified in 6 . 4 . 8 . 5 and 6 . 4 . 8 . 6, heat generated within the package by the rad ioactive contents shall not, under normal conditions of transport, as demonstrated by the tests in 6 . 4 . 15, adversely affect the package in such a way t hat it would fail to meet the applicable provisions for containment and shielding if left unattended for a period of one week . Particular attention shall be paid to the e ffects of heat, which may cause one or more of the following: (a) alter the arrangement, the geometrical f orm or the physical state of the radioactive contents or, if the radioactive material is enclosed in a can or receptacle (for example, clad fuel elements), cause the can, receptacle or radioactive material to deform or melt; (b) lessening of the efficiency of the pack aging through differential thermal expansion or cracking or melting of the radiation shielding material; (c) in combination with moisture, accelerate corrosion . 6.4.8.3 A package shall be so designed that, under the a mbient condition specified in 6 . 4 . 8 . 5 and in the absence of insolation, the tempera ture of the accessible surfaces of a package shall not exceed 50 ° C, unless the package is transported under exclusive use . 6.4.8.4 Except as required in 6 . 4 . 3 . 1 for a package transported by air, the maximu m temperature of any surface readily accessible during transport of a package under exclusive use shall not exceed 85 ° C in the absence of insolation under the ambient conditions specified in 6 . 4 . 8 . 5 . Account may be taken of barriers or screens i ntended to give protection to persons without the need for the barriers or screens being subject to any test . 6.4.8.5 The ambient temperature shall be assumed t o be 38 ° C . 6.4.8.6 The solar insolation conditions shall be ass umed to be as specified in the table hereunder . Insolation data Case Form and location of surface Insolation for 12 hours per day (W/m 2 ) 1 Flat surfaces transported horizontally – downward facing 0 2 Flat surfaces transported horizontally – upward facing 800 3 Surfaces transported vertically 200 * 4 Other downward-facing (not horizontal) surfaces 200 * 5 All other surfaces 400 * * Alternatively, a sine function may be used, with an absorption coefficient adopted and the effects of possible reflection from neighbouring objects neglected . 6.4.8.7 A package which includes thermal protect ion for the purpose of satisfying the provisions of the thermal test specified in 6 . 4 . 17 . 3 shall be so designed that such protection wi ll remain effective if the package is subjected to the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 15 and 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(a) and (b) or 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(b) and (c), as appropriate . Any such protection on the exterior of the pa ckage shall not be rendered ineffective by ripping, cutting, skidding, abrasion or rough handling . 6.4.8.8 A package shall be so designed that, if it were su bjected to: .1 the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 15, it would restrict the loss of radioactiv e contents to not more than 10 - 6 A 2 per hour; and .2 the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 17 . 1, 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(b), 6 . 4 . 17 . 3 and 6 . 4 . 17 . 4 and either the test in: (i) 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(c), when the package has a mass not greater th an 500 kg, an overall density not greater than 1,000 kg/m 3 based on the external dimensions, and radioactive contents greater than 1,000 A 2 not as special form radioactive material, or (ii) 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(a), for all other packages, it would meet th e following provisions: – retain sufficient shielding to ensure tha t the dose rate at 1 m from the surface of the package would not exceed 10 mSv/h with the maximum radioactive contents which the package is designed to contain; and – restrict the accumulated loss of radioac tive contents in a period of one week to not more than 10 A 2 for krypton-85 and not more than A 2 for all other radionuclides . Where mixtures of different radionucli des are present, the provisions of 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 4–2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 6 shall apply except that for krypton-85 an ef fective A 2 ( i ) value equal to 10 A 2 may be used . For case . 1 above, the assessment shall take into acco unt the external non-fixed contamination limits of 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 2 . △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 366

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 356 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.4.8.9 A package for radioactive contents with activ ity greater than 10 5 A 2 shall be so designed that, if it were subjected to the enhanced water immersion test specified in 6 . 4 . 18, there would be no rupture of the containment s ystem . 6.4.8.10 Compliance with the permitted activity r elease limits shall depend neither upon filters nor upon a mechanical cooling system . 6.4.8.11 A package shall not include a pressure relie f system from the containment system which would allow the release of radioactive material to the environment under the conditions of the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 15 and 6 . 4 . 17 . 6.4.8.12 A package shall be so designed that, if it were at t he maximum normal operating pressure and it were subjected to the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 15 and 6 . 4 . 17, the level of strains in the containment sy stem would not attain values which would adversely affect the package in such a way that it would fail to meet the applicable provisions . 6.4.8.13 A package shall not have a maximum normal oper ating pressure in excess of a gauge pressure of 700 kPa . 6.4.8.14 A package containing low dispersible radioact ive material shall be so designed that any features added to the low dispersible radioactive material that are not part of it, or any internal components of the packaging, shall not adversely affect the performance of the low dispersible radioactive material . 6.4.8.15 A package shall be designed for an ambient tempera ture range from - 40 ° C to + 38 ° C . 6.4.9 Provisions for Type B(M) packages 6.4.9.1 Type B(M) packages shall meet the pr ovisions for Type B(U) packages specified in 6 . 4 . 8 . 1, except that, for packages to be transpo rted solely within a specified country or solely between specified countries, conditions other than those given in 6 . 4 . 7 . 5, 6 . 4 . 8 . 4 to 6 . 4 . 8 . 6 and 6 . 4 . 8 . 9 to 6 . 4 . 8 . 15 above may be assumed, with the approval of the c ompetent authorities of these countries . The provisions for Type B(U) packages spe cified in 6 . 4 . 8 . 4 and 6 . 4 . 8 . 9 to 6 . 4 . 8 . 15 shall be met as far as practicable . 6.4.9.2 Intermittent venting of Type B(M) packag es may be permitted during transport, provided that the operational controls for venting are acceptable to the relevant competent authorities . 6.4.10 Provisions for Type C packages 6.4.10.1 Type C packages shall be designed to meet the pr ovisions specified in 6 . 4 . 2 and 6 . 4 . 3, and of 6 . 4 . 7 . 2 to 6 . 4 . 7 . 15, except as specified in 6 . 4 . 7 . 14, and of the provisions specified in 6 . 4 . 8 . 2 to 6 . 4 . 8 . 6, 6 . 4 . 8 . 10 to 6 . 4 . 8 . 15, and, in addition, of 6 . 4 . 10 . 2–6 . 4 . 10 . 4 . 6.4.10.2 A package shall be capable of meeting the asse ssment criteria prescribed for tests in 6 . 4 . 8 . 8 . 2 and 6 . 4 . 8 . 12 after burial in an environment defined by a th ermal conductivity of 0 . 33 W/(m · K) and a temperature of 38 ° C in the steady sta te . Initial conditions for the assessment shall assume that any thermal insulation of the package remains intact, the package is at the maximum normal operating pressure and the ambient temperature is 38 ° C . 6.4.10.3 A package shall be so designed that, if it were at t he maximum normal operating pressure and subjected to: (a) the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 15, it would restrict the loss of radioactiv e contents to not more than 10 - 6 A 2 per hour; and (b) the test sequences in 6 . 4 . 20 . 1, (i) it would retain sufficient shielding to ens ure that the dose rate at 1 m from the surface of the package would not exceed 10 mSv/h with the maximum radioactive contents which the package is designed to contain; and (ii) it would restrict the accumulated los s of radioactive contents in a period of 1 week to not more than 10 A 2 for krypton-85 and not more than A 2 for all other radionuclides . Where mixtures of different radionucli des are present, the provisions of 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 4 to 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 6 shall apply except that for krypton-85 an ef fective A 2 ( i ) value equal to 10 A 2 may be used . For case (a) above, the assessment shall ta ke into account the external contamination limits of 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 2 . 6.4.10.4 A package shall be so designed that there will b e no rupture of the containment system following performance of the enhanced water immersion test specified in 6 . 4 . 18 . 6.4.11 Provisions for packages containing fissile m aterial 6.4.11.1 Fissile material shall be transported so a s to: (a) maintain subcriticality during routi ne, normal and accident conditions of transport; in particular, the following contingencies shall be considered: (i) water leaking into or out of packages; △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 367

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material 357 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (ii) the loss of efficiency of built-in neutron absorbers or moderators; (iii) rearrangement of the contents either wit hin the package or as a result of loss from the package; (iv) reduction of spaces within or between pack ages; (v) packages becoming immersed in water or bur ied in snow; and (vi) temperature changes; and (b) meet the provisions: (i) of 6 . 4 . 7 . 2 except for unpackaged material when spec ifically allowed by 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 5; (ii) prescribed elsewhere in this Code which pe rtain to the radioactive properties of the material; (iii) of 6 . 4 . 7 . 3 unless the material is excepted by 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5; (iv) of 6 . 4 . 11 . 4 to 6 . 4 . 11 . 14, unless the material is excepted by 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5, 6 . 4 . 11 . 2 or 6 . 4 . 11 . 3 . 6.4.11.2 Packages containing fissile material th at meet the provisions of subparagraph (d) and one of the provisions of (a) to (c) below are excepted from the requirements of 6 . 4 . 11 . 4 to 6 . 4 . 11 . 14 . (a) Packages containing fissile material in a ny form provided that: (i) the smallest external dimension of the pac kage is not less than 10 cm; (ii) the criticality safety index (CSI) of the pa ckage is calculated using the following formula: CSI = 50 × 5 × ( Mass of U-235 in package (g) ______________________ Z + Mass of other fissile nuclides * in package (g) ________________________________ 280 ) * Plutonium may be of any isotopic composition provided that the amount of Pu-241 is less than that of Pu-240 in the package . where the values of Z are taken from table 6 . 4 . 11 . 2; (iii) the CSI of any package does not exceed 10 . (b) Packages containing fissile material in a ny form provided that: (i) the smallest external dimension of the pac kage is not less than 30 cm; (ii) the package, after being subjected to the te sts specified in 6 . 4 . 15 . 1 to 6 . 4 . 15 . 6: – retains its fissile material contents; – preserves the minimum overall outside di mensions of the package to at least 30 cm; – prevents the entry of a 10 cm cube; (iii) the CSI of the package is calculated using the following formula: CSI = 50 × 2 × ( Mass of U-235 in package (g) ______________________ Z + Mass of other fissile nuclides * in package (g) ________________________________ 280 ) * Plutonium may be of any isotopic compositio n provided that the amount of Pu-241 is less than that of Pu-240 in the package . where the values of Z are taken from table 6 . 4 . 11 . 2 . (iv) the CSI of any package does not exceed 10; (c) Packages containing fissile material in a ny form provided that: (i) the smallest external dimension of the pac kage is not less than 10 cm; (ii) the package, after being subjected to the te sts specified in 6 . 4 . 15 . 1 to 6 . 4 . 15 . 6: – retains its fissile material contents; – preserves the minimum overall outside di mensions of the package to at least 10 cm; – prevents the entry of a 10 cm cube . (iii) the CSI of the package is calculated using the following formula: CSI = 50 × 2 × ( Mass of U-235 in package (g) ______________________ 450 + Mass of other fissile nuclides * in package (g) ________________________________ 280 ) * Plutonium may be of any isotopic compositio n provided that the amount of Pu-241 is less than that of Pu-240 in the package . (iv) The total mass of fissile nuclides in any package does not exceed 15 g; (d) The total mass of beryllium, hydrogeno us material enriched in deuterium, graphite and other allotropic forms of carbon in an individual package shall not be greater than the mass of fissile nuclides in the package except where the total concentration of these materials does not exceed 1 g in any 1,000 g of material . Beryllium incorporated in copper allo ys up to 4% in weight of the alloy does not need to be considered . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 368

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 358 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Table 6.4.11.2 – Values of Z for calculation of criticality safety index in accordance with 6.4.11.2 Enrichment a Z Uranium enriched up to 1 . 5% 2,200 Uranium enriched up to 5% 850 Uranium en riched up to 10% 660 Uranium enriched up to 20% 580 Uranium enriched up to 100% 450 a If a package contains uranium with varying enrichments of U-235, then the value corresponding to the highest enrichment shall be used for Z . 6.4.11.3 Packages containing not more than 1,000 g of p lutonium are excepted from the application of 6 . 4 . 11 . 4 to 6 . 4 . 11 . 14 provided that: (a) not more than 20% of the plutonium by mass is fissi le nuclides; (b) the criticality safety index of the packag e is calculated using the following formula: CSI = 50 × 2 × mass of plutonium (g) ________________ 1,000 (c) if uranium is present with the plutonium, th e mass of uranium shall be no more than 1% of the mass of the plutonium . 6.4.11.4 Where the chemical or physical form, isoto pic composition, mass or concentration, moderation ratio or density, or geometric configuration is not known, the assessments of 6 . 4 . 11 . 8 to 6 . 4 . 11 . 13 shall be performed assuming that each par ameter that is not known has the value which gives the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with the known conditions and parameters in these assessments . 6.4.11.5 For irradiated nuclear fuel, the assessm ents of 6 . 4 . 11 . 8 to 6 . 4 . 11 . 13 shall be based on an isotopic composition de monstrated to provide either: (a) the maximum neutron multiplication dur ing the irradiation history; or (b) a conservative estimate of the neutro n multiplication for the package assessments . After irradiation, but prior to shipment, a m easurement shall be performed to confirm the conservatism of the isotopic composition . 6.4.11.6 The package, after being subjected to the te sts specified in 6 . 4 . 15, shall: (a) preserve the minimum overall outside dim ensions of the package to at least 10 cm; and (b) prevent the entry of a 10 cm cube . 6.4.11.7 The package shall be designed for an ambient temper ature range of - 40 ° C to + 38 ° C unless the competent authority specifies otherwise in the certificate of approval for the package design . 6.4.11.8 For a package in isolation, it shall be assume d that water can leak into or out of all void spaces of the package, including those within the containment system . However, if the design incorporates spe cial features to prevent such leakage of water into or out of certain void spaces, even as a result of error, absence of leakage may be assumed in respect of those void spaces . Special features shall include either o f the following: (a) multiple high-standard water barrier s, not less than two of which would remain watertight if the package were subject to the tests prescribed in 6 . 4 . 11 . 13(b), a high degree of quality control in the m anufacture, maintenance and repair of packagings and tests to demonstrate the closure of each package before each shipment; or (b) for packages containing uranium hexaflu oride only, with maximum enrichment of 5 mass percent uranium-235: (i) packages where, following the tests pres cribed in 6 . 4 . 11 . 13(b), there is no physical contact betwee n the valve or the plug and any other component of the packaging other than at its original point of attachment and where, in addition, following the test prescribed in 6 . 4 . 17 . 3, the valves and the plug remain leaktight; and (ii) a high degree of quality control in the manufa cture, maintenance and repair of packagings coupled with tests to demonstrate closure of each package before each shipment . 6.4.11.9 It shall be assumed that the confinement syst em is closely reflected by at least 20 cm of water or such greater reflection as may additionally be provided by the surrounding material of the packaging . However, when it can be demonstrated that t he confinement system remains within the packaging following the tests prescribed in 6 . 4 . 11 . 13(b), close reflection of the package by at le ast 20 cm of water may be assumed in 6 . 4 . 11 . 10(c) . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 369

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material 359 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.4.11.10 The package shall be subcritical under t he conditions of 6 . 4 . 11 . 8 and 6 . 4 . 11 . 9 and with the package conditions that resul t in the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with: (a) routine conditions of transport (incid ent-free); (b) the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 11 . 12(b); (c) the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 11 . 13(b) . 6.4.11.11 For packages to be transported by air: (a) the package shall be subcritical under con ditions consistent with the Type C package tests specified in 6 . 4 . 20 . 1 assuming reflection by at least 20 cm of water bu t no water in-leakage; and (b) in the assessment of 6 . 4 . 11 . 10, use of special features as specified in 6 . 4 . 11 . 8 is allowed provided that leakage of water in to or out of the void spaces is prevented when the package is submitted to the Type C package tests specified in 6 . 4 . 20 . 1 followed by the water leakage test specifie d in 6 . 4 . 19 . 3 . 6.4.11.12 A number “ N” shall be derived, such that five times “N ” p ackages shall be subcritical for the arrangement and package conditions that provide the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with the following: (a) there shall not be anything between the packages, and the package arrangement shall be reflected on all sides by at least 20 cm of water; and (b) the state of the packages shall be their asses sed or demonstrated condition if they had been subjected to the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 15 . 6.4.11.13 A number “ N” shall be derived, such that two times “N ” p ackages shall be subcritical for the arrangement and package conditions that provide the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with the following: (a) hydrogenous moderation between packages, a nd the package arrangement reflected on all sides by at least 20 cm of water; and (b) the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 15 followed by whichever of the following is t he more limiting: (i) the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(b) and either 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(c), for packages having a mass not greater t han 500 kg and an overall density not greater than 1000 kg / m 3 based on the external dimensions, or 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(a), for all other packages; followed by th e test specified in 6 . 4 . 17 . 3 and completed by the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 19 . 1–6 . 4 . 19 . 3; or (ii) the test specified in 6 . 4 . 17 . 4; and (c) where any part of the fissile material escape s from the containment system following the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 11 . 13(b), it shall be assumed that fissile mat erial escapes from each package in the array and all of the fissile material shall be arranged in the configuration and moderation that results in the maximum neutron multiplication with close reflection by at least 20 cm of water . 6.4.11.14 The criticality safety index (CSI) for pac kages containing fissile material shall be obtained by dividing the number 50 by the smaller of the two values of N derived in 6 . 4 . 11 . 12 and 6 . 4 . 11 . 13 (i . e . CSI = 50/ N ) . The value of the criticality safety index m ay be zero, provided that an unlimited number of packages is subcritical (i . e . N is effectively equal to infinity in both ca ses) . 6.4.12 Test procedures and demonstration of complia nce 6.4.12.1 Demonstration of compliance with the per formance standards required in 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 1 . 3, 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 1 . 4, 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 3 . 1, 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 3 . 2, 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 1, 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 2 and 6 . 4 . 2–6 . 4 . 11 shall be accomplished by any of the methods l isted below or by a combination thereof . (a) Performance of tests with specimens repr esenting special form radioactive material, or low dispersible radioactive material or with prototypes or samples of the packaging, where the contents of the specimen or the packaging for the tests shall simulate as closely as practicable the expected range of radioactive contents and the specimen or packaging to be tested shall be prepared as presented for transport . (b) Reference to previous satisfactory dem onstrations of a sufficiently similar nature . (c) Performance of tests with models of approp riate scale incorporating those features which are significant with respect to the item under investigation when engineering experience has shown results of such tests to be suitable for design purposes . When a scale model is used, the need for adjusti ng certain test parameters, such as penetrator diameter or compressive load, shall be taken into account . (d) Calculation, or reasoned argument, whe n the calculation procedures and parameters are generally agreed to be reliable or conservative . 6.4.12.2 After the specimen, prototype or sample ha s been subjected to the tests, appropriate methods of assessment shall be used to assure that the provisions of this chapter have been fulfilled in compliance with the performance and acceptance standards prescribed in this chapter (see 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 1 . 3, 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 1 . 4, 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 3 . 1, 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 3 . 2, 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 1, 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 2 and 6 . 4 . 2–6 . 4 . 11) . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 370

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 360 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.4.12.3 All specimens shall be inspected before te sting in order to identify and record faults or damage, including the following: (a) divergence from the design; (b) defects in manufacture; (c) corrosion or other deterioration; and (d) distortion of features . The containment system of the package shal l be clearly specified . The external features of the specimen sha ll be clearly identified so that reference may be made simply and clearly to any part of such specimen . 6.4.13 Testing the integrity of the containment syst em and shielding and evaluating criticality safety After each test or group of tests or sequence of the applicable tests, as appropriate, specified in 6 . 4 . 15 to 6 . 4 . 21: (a) faults and damage shall be identified and rec orded; (b) it shall be determined whether the integri ty of the containment system and shielding has been retained to the extent required in this chapter for the package under test; and (c) for packages containing fissile mate rial, it shall be determined whether the assumptions and conditions used in the assessments required by 6 . 4 . 11 . 1 to 6 . 4 . 11 . 14 for one or more packages are valid . 6.4.14 Target for drop tests The target for the drop tests specified in 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 3 . 5, 6 . 4 . 15 . 4, 6 . 4 . 16(a), 6 . 4 . 17 . 2 and 6 . 4 . 20 . 2 shall be a flat, horizontal surface of such a cha racter that any increase in its resistance to displacement or deformation upon impact by the specimen would not significantly increase the damage to the specimen . 6.4.15 Test for demonstrating ability to withst and normal conditions of transport 6.4.15.1 The tests are: the water spray test, the free dr op test, the stacking test and the penetration test . Specimens of the package shall be subject ed to the free drop test, the stacking test and the penetration test, preceded in each case by the water spray test . One specimen may be used for all the tests, pro vided that the provisions of 6 . 4 . 15 . 2 are fulfilled . 6.4.15.2 The time interval between the conclusion o f the water spray test and the succeeding test shall be such that the water has soaked in to the maximum extent, without appreciable drying of the exterior of the specimen . In the absence of any evidence to the contrar y, this interval shall be taken to be two hours if the water spray is applied from four directions simultaneously . No time interval shall elapse, however, i f the water spray is applied from each of the four directions consecutively . 6.4.15.3 Water spray test: The specimen shall be subj ected to a water spray test that simulates exposure to rainfall of approximately 5 cm per hour for at least one hour . 6.4.15.4 Free drop test: The specimen shall drop onto t he target so as to suffer maximum damage in respect of the safety features to be tested . (a) The height of the drop measured from the lowes t point of the specimen to the upper surface of the target, shall be not less than the distance specified in the table hereunder for the applicable mass . The target shall be as defined in 6 . 4 . 14 . (b) For rectangular fibreboard or wood packag es not exceeding a mass of 50 kg, a separate specimen shall be subjected to a free drop onto each corner from a height of 0 . 3 m . (c) For cylindrical fibreboard packages not e xceeding a mass of 100 kg, a separate specimen shall be subjected to a free drop onto each of the quarters of each rim from a height of 0 . 3 m . Free drop distance for testing packag es to normal conditions of transport Package mass (kg) Free drop distance (m) Package mass < 5,000 1 . 2 5,000 ≤ Package mass < 10,000 0 . 9 10,000 ≤ Package mass < 15,000 0 . 6 15,000 ≤ Package mass 0 . 3 △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 371

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material 361 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.4.15.5 Stacking test: Unless the shape of the packa ging effectively prevents stacking, the specimen shall be subjected, for a period of 24 hours, to a compressive load equal to the greater of the following: (a) the equivalent of 5 times the maximum weight o f the package; and (b) the equivalent of 13 kPa multiplied by the ver tically projected area of the package . The load shall be applied uniformly to two opposite sides of the specimen, one of which shall be the base on which the package would typically rest . 6.4.15.6 Penetration test: The specimen shall be pl aced on a rigid, flat, horizontal surface which will not move significantly while the test is being carried out . (a) A bar of 3 . 2 cm in diameter with a hemispherical end a nd a mass of 6 kg shall be dropped and directed to fall, with its longitudinal axis vertical, onto the centre of the weakest part of the specimen, so that, if it penetrates sufficiently far, it will hit the containment system . The bar shall not be significantly deforme d by the test performance . (b) The height of the drop of the bar, measured from i ts lower end to the intended point of impact on the upper surface of the specimen, shall be 1 m . 6.4.16 Additional tests for Type A packages designe d for liquids and gases A specimen or separate specimens shall be subjected to each of the following tests unless it can be demonstrated that one test is more severe for the specimen in question than the other, in which case one specimen shall be subjected to the more severe test . (a) Free drop test: The specimen shall drop onto t he target so as to suffer the maximum damage in respect of containment . The height of the drop measured from the lowe st part of the specimen to the upper surface of the target shall be 9 m . The target shall be as defined in 6 . 4 . 14 . (b) Penetration test: The specimen shall be su bjected to the test specified in 6 . 4 . 15 . 6 except that the height of drop shall be increa sed to 1 . 7 m from the 1 m specified in 6 . 4 . 15 . 6(b) . 6.4.17 Tests for demonstrating ability to withs tand accident conditions of transport 6.4.17.1 The specimen shall be subjected to the cumul ative effects of the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 17 . 2 and 6 . 4 . 17 . 3, in that order . Following these tests, either th is specimen or a separate specimen shall be subjected to the effect(s) of the water immersion test(s) as specified in 6 . 4 . 17 . 4 and, if applicable, 6 . 4 . 18 . 6.4.17.2 Mechanical test: The mechanical test con sists of three different drop tests . Each specimen shall be subjected to the app licable drops as specified in 6 . 4 . 8 . 8 or 6 . 4 . 11 . 13 . The order in which the specimen is subjecte d to the drops shall be such that, on completion of the mechanical test, the specimen shall have suffered such damage as will lead to the maximum damage in the thermal test which follows . (a) For drop I, the specimen shall drop onto the tar get so as to suffer the maximum damage, and the height of the drop measured from the lowest point of the specimen to the upper surface of the target shall be 9 m . The target shall be as defined in 6 . 4 . 14 . (b) For drop II, the specimen shall drop onto a bar ri gidly mounted perpendicularly on the target so as to suffer the maximum damage . The height of the drop measured from the inte nded point of impact of the specimen to the upper surface of the bar shall be 1 m . The bar shall be of solid mild steel of circular c ross-section, (15 . 0 ± 0 . 5) cm in diameter and 20 cm long unless a longer bar w ould cause greater damage, in which case a bar of sufficient length to cause maximum damage shall be used . The upper end of the bar shall be flat and horizon tal with its edge rounded off to a radius of not more than 6 mm . The target on which the bar is mounted shall be a s described in 6 . 4 . 14 . (c) For drop III, the specimen shall be subjecte d to a dynamic crush test by positioning the specimen on the target so as to suffer maximum damage by the drop of a 500 kg mass from 9 m onto the specimen . The mass shall consist of a solid mild steel pl ate 1 m by 1 m and shall fall in a horizontal attitude . The lower face of the steel plate shal l have its edges and corners rounded off to a radius of not more than 6 mm . The height of the drop shall be measured fr om the underside of the plate to the highest point of the specimen . The target on which the specimen rests shal l be as defined in 6 . 4 . 14 . 6.4.17.3 Thermal test: The specimen shall be in therm al equilibrium under conditions of an ambient temperature of 38 ° C, subject to the solar insolation conditions specified in the table under 6 . 4 . 8 . 6 and subject to the design maximum rate of i nternal heat generation within the package from the radioactive contents . Alternatively, any of these parameter s are allowed to have different values prior to and during the test, providing due account is taken of them in the subsequent assessment of package response . The thermal test shall then consist of: (a) exposure of a specimen for a period of 30 minute s to a thermal environment which provides a heat flux at least equivalent to that of a hydrocarbon fuel/air fire in sufficiently quiescent ambient conditions to give a minimum average flame emissivity coefficient of 0 . 9 and an average temperature of at least 800 ° C, fu lly △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 372

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 362 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 engulfing the specimen, with a surface absorptivity coefficient of 0 . 8 or that value which the package may be demonst rated to possess if exposed to the fire specified, followed by: (b) exposure of the specimen to an ambient tempe rature of 38 ° C, subject to the solar insolation conditions specified in the table under 6 . 4 . 8 . 6 and subject to the design maximum rat e of internal heat generation within the package by the radioactive contents, for a sufficient period to ensure that temperatures in the specimen are decreasing in all parts of the specimen and/or are approaching initial steady-state conditions . Alternatively, any of these parameters a re allowed to have different values following cessation of heating, providing due account is taken of them in the subsequent assessment of package response . During and following the test, the specime n shall not be artificially cooled and any combustion of materials of the specimen shall be permitted to proceed naturally . 6.4.17.4 Water immersion test: The specimen shall b e immersed under a head of water of at least 15 m for a period of not less than eight hours in the attitude which will lead to maximum damage . For demonstration purposes, an ex ternal gauge pressure of at least 150 kPa shall be considered to meet these conditions . 6.4.18 Enhanced water immersion test for Type B(U) a nd Type B(M) packages containing more than 10 5 A 2 and Type C packages Enhanced water immersion test: The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 200 m for a period of not less than one hour . For demonstration purposes, an extern al gauge pressure of at least 2 MPa shall be considered to meet these conditions . 6.4.19 Water leakage test for packages containing fiss ile material 6.4.19.1 Packages for which water in-leakage or out -leakage to the extent which results in greatest reactivity has been assumed for purposes of assessment under 6 . 4 . 11 . 8 to 6 . 4 . 11 . 13 shall be excepted from the test . 6.4.19.2 Before the specimen is subjected to the wate r leakage test specified below, it shall be subjected to the tests in 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(b), and either 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(a) or (c) as required by 6 . 4 . 11 . 13, and the test specified in 6 . 4 . 17 . 3 . 6.4.19.3 The specimen shall be immersed under a head of w ater of at least 0 . 9 m for a period of not less than eight hours and in the a ttitude for which maximum leakage is expected . 6.4.20 Tests for Type C packages 6.4.20.1 Specimens shall be subjected to the effect s of each of the following test sequences in the orders specified: (a) the tests specified in 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(a), 6 . 4 . 17 . 2(c), 6 . 4 . 20 . 2 and 6 . 4 . 20 . 3; and (b) the test specified in 6 . 4 . 20 . 4 . Separate specimens are allowed to be used fo r each of the sequences (a) and (b) . 6.4.20.2 Puncture/tearing test: The specimen sha ll be subjected to the damaging effects of a vertical, solid probe made of mild steel . The orientation of the package specimen and t he impact point on the package surface shall be such as to cause maximum damage at the conclusion of the test sequence specified in 6 . 4 . 20 . 1(a) . (a) The specimen, representing a package hav ing a mass less than 250 kg, shall be placed on a target and subjected to a probe having a mass of 250 kg falling from a height of 3 m above the intended impact point . For this test, the probe shall be a 20 cm diamete r cylindrical bar with the striking end forming a frustum of a right circular cone with the following dimensions: 30 cm height and 2 . 5 cm in diameter at the top with its edge rounded of f to a radius of not more than 6 mm . The target on which the specimen is placed sh all be as specified in 6 . 4 . 14 . (b) For packages having a mass of 250 kg or more, the ba se of the probe shall be placed on a target and the specimen dropped onto the probe . The height of the drop, measured f rom the point of impact with the specimen to the upper surface of the probe, shall be 3 m . For this test, the probe shall have the same pr operties and dimensions as specified in (a) above, except that the length and mass of the probe shall be such as to incur maximum damage to the specimen . The target on which the base of the probe is plac ed shall be as specified in 6 . 4 . 14 . 6.4.20.3 Enhanced thermal test: The conditions f or this test shall be as specified in 6 . 4 . 17 . 3, except that the exposure to the thermal e nvironment shall be for a period of 60 min . 6.4.20.4 Impact test: The specimen shall be subject t o an impact on a target at a velocity of not less than 90 m/s, at such an orientation as to suffer maximum damage . The target shall be as defined in 6 . 4 . 14, except that the target surface may be at any o rientation provided that the surface is normal to the specimen path . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 373

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material 363 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.4.21 Tests for packagings designed to contain uran ium hexafluoride Specimens that comprise or simulate packagings designed to contain 0 . 1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall be tes ted hydraulically at an internal pressure of at least 1 . 38 MPa but, when the test pressure is less than 2 . 76 MPa, the design will require multilater al approval . For retesting packagings, any other equ ivalent non-destructive testing may be applied, subject to multilateral approval . 6.4.22 Approvals of package designs and material s 6.4.22.1 The approval of designs for packages conta ining 0 . 1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride requires t hat: (a) Each design that meets the provisions of 6 . 4 . 6 . 4 shall require multilateral approval; ( b) Each design that meets the provisions of 6 . 4 . 6 . 1 to 6 . 4 . 6 . 3 shall require unilateral approval by the c ompetent authority of the country of origin of the design, unless multilateral approval is otherwise required by this Code . 6.4.22.2 Each Type B(U) and Type C package design will re quire unilateral approval, except that: (a) a package design for fissile material which i s also subject to 6 . 4 . 22 . 4, 6 . 4 . 23 . 7 and 5 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 1 will require multilateral approval; and (b ) a Type B(U) package design for low dispersib le radioactive material will require multilateral approval . 6.4.22.3 Each Type B(M) package design, including t hose for fissile material which are also subject to 6 . 4 . 22 . 4, 6 . 4 . 23 . 7 and 5 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 1 and those for low dispersible radioactiv e material, will require multilateral approval . 6.4.22.4 Each package design for fissile material wh ich is not excepted by any of the paragraphs 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 1 to 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6, 6 . 4 . 11 . 2 and 6 . 4 . 11 . 3 shall require multilateral approval . 6.4.22.5 The design for special form radioactive mater ial will require unilateral approval . The design for low dispersible radioacti ve material will require multilateral approval (see also 6 . 4 . 23 . 8) . 6.4.22.6 The design for a fissile material excepted from “FISSILE” classification in accordance with 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6 shall require multilateral approval . 6.4.22.7 Alternative activity limits for an exemp t consignment of instruments or articles in accordance with 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 shall require multilateral approval . 6.4.23 Applications for approval and approvals for r adioactive material transport 6.4.23.1 [Reserved] 6.4.23.2 An application for approval of shipment sh all include: (a) the period of time, related to the shipment, f or which the approval is sought; (b) the actual radioactive contents, the exp ected modes of transport, the type of conveyance, and the probable or proposed route; and (c) the details of how the precautions and admin istrative or operational controls referred to in the certificate of approval for the package design, if applicable, issued under 5 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 1 . 1 . 3, 5 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 1 . 1 . 6 or 5 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 1 . 1 . 7, are to be put into effect . 6.4.23.2.1 An application for approval of SCO-III shi pments shall include: (a) a statement of the respects in which, and of the r easons why, the consignment is considered SCO-III; (b) justification for choosing SCO-III by dem onstrating that: (i) no suitable packaging currently exists; (ii) designing and/or constructing a packag ing or segmenting the object is not practically, technically or economically feasible; (iii) no other viable alternative exists; (c) a detailed description of the proposed rad ioactive contents with reference to their physical and chemical states and the nature of the radiation emitted; (d) a detailed statement of the design of the SCO- III, including complete engineering drawings and schedules of materials and methods of manufacture; (e) all information necessary to satisfy the c ompetent authority that the requirements of 4 . 1 . 9 . 2 . 4 . 5 and the requirements of 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 1, if applicable, are satisfied; (f) a transport plan; (g) a specification of the applicable managem ent system as required in 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 374

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 364 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.4.23.3 An application for approval of shipments u nder special arrangement shall include all the information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the overall level of safety in transport is at least equivalent to that which would be provided if all the applicable provisions of this Code had been met . The application shall also include: (a) a statement of the respects in which, and of the r easons why, the shipment cannot be made in full accordance with the applicable provisions; and (b) a statement of any special precautions or sp ecial administrative or operational controls which are to be employed during transport to compensate for the failure to meet the applicable provisions . 6.4.23.4 An application for approval of Type B(U) or Ty pe C package design shall include: (a) a detailed description of the proposed rad ioactive contents with reference to their physical and chemical states and the nature of the radiation emitted; (b) a detailed statement of the design, includ ing complete engineering drawings and schedules of materials and methods of manufacture; (c) a statement of the tests which have bee n done and their results, or evidence based on calculative methods or other evidence that the design is adequate to meet the applicable provisions; (d) the proposed operating and maintenance i nstructions for the use of the packaging; (e) if the package is designed to have a maximum nor mal operating pressure in excess of 100 kPa gauge, a specification of the materials of manufacture of the containment system, the samples to be taken, and the tests to be made; (f) if the package is to be used for shipment after st orage, a justification of considerations to ageing mechanisms in the safety analysis and within the proposed operating and maintenance instructions; (g) where the proposed radioactive content s are irradiated nuclear fuel, a statement and a justification of any assumption in the safety analysis relating to the characteristics of the fuel and a description of any pre-shipment measurement required by 6 . 4 . 11 . 5(b); (h) any special stowage provisions necessa ry to ensure the safe dissipation of heat from the package, considering the various modes of transport to be used and type of conveyance or freight container; (i) a reproducible illustration, not large r than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make-up of the package; (j) a specification of the applicable managem ent system as required in 1 . 5 . 3 . 1; and (k) for packages which are to be used for shipment a fter storage, a gap analysis programme describing a systematic procedure for a periodic evaluation of changes of regulations, changes in technical knowledge and changes of the state of the package design during storage . 6.4.23.5 An application for approval of a Typ e B(M) package design shall include, in addition to the information required in 6 . 4 . 23 . 4 for Type B(U) packages: (a) a list of the provisions specified in 6 . 4 . 7 . 5, 6 . 4 . 8 . 4 to 6 . 4 . 8 . 6 and 6 . 4 . 8 . 9 to 6 . 4 . 8 . 15 with which the package does not conform; ( b) any proposed supplementary operation al controls to be applied during transport not regularly provided for in this Code, but which are necessary to ensure the safety of the package or to compensate for the deficiencies listed in (a) above; (c) a statement relative to any restrictions o n the mode of transport and to any special loading, carriage, unloading or handling procedures; and (d) a statement of the range of ambient conditio ns (temperature, solar radiation) which are expected to be encountered during transport and which have been taken into account in the design . 6.4.23.6 The application for approval of designs fo r packages containing 0 . 1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall incl ude all information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the design meets the provisions of 6 . 4 . 6 . 1, and a specification of the applicable mana gement system as required in 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . 6.4.23.7 An application for a fissile package approv al shall include all information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the design meets the provisions of 6 . 4 . 11 . 1, and a specification of the applicable mana gement system as required in 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . 6.4.23.8 An application for approval of desi gn for special form radioactive material and design for low dispersible radioactive material shall include: (a) a detailed description of the radioactiv e material or, if a capsule, the contents; particular reference shall be made to both physical and chemical states; (b) a detailed statement of the design of any caps ule to be used; (c) a statement of the tests which have been done an d their results, or evidence based on calculations to show that the radioactive material is capable of meeting the performance standards, or other evidence ■ △ △ △ △ ■ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 375

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material 365 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 that the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material meets the applicable provisions of this Code; (d) a specification of the applicable managem ent system as required in 1 . 5 . 3 . 1; and (e) any proposed pre-shipment actions for us e in the consignment of special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material . 6.4.23.9 An application for approval of design f or fissile material excepted from “FISSILE” classification in accordance with table 2 . 7 . 2 . 1 . 1, under 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6 shall include: (a) a detailed description of the material; pa rticular reference shall be made to both physical and chemical states; (b) a statement of the tests that have been carrie d out and their results, or evidence based on calculation methods to show that the material is capable of meeting the requirements specified in 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 6; (c) a specification of the applicable managem ent system as required in 1 . 5 . 3 . 1; (d) a statement of specific actions to be taken pri or to shipment . 6.4.23.10 An application for approval of alternati ve activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles shall include: (a) an identification and detailed descript ion of the instrument or article, its intended uses and the radionuclide(s) incorporated; (b) the maximum activity of the radionuclide (s) in the instrument or article; (c) maximum external dose rates arising from t he instrument or article; (d) the chemical and physical forms of the radio nuclide(s) contained in the instrument or article; (e) details of the construction and design of th e instrument or article, particularly as related to the containment and shielding of the radionuclide in routine, normal and accident conditions of transport; (f) the applicable management system, incl uding the quality testing and verification procedures to be applied to radioactive sources, components and finished products to ensure that the maximum specified activity of radioactive material or the maximum dose rates specified for the instrument or article are not exceeded, and that the instruments or articles are constructed according to the design specifications; (g) the maximum number of instruments or artic les expected to be shipped per consignment and annually; (h) dose assessments in accordance with the pr inciples and methodologies set out in the Radiation Protection and Safety of Radiation Sources: International Basic Safety Standards , IAEA Safety Standards Series No. GSR Part 3 , IAEA , Vienna (2014), including individual doses to transport workers and members of the public and, if appropriate, collective doses arising from routine, normal and accident conditions of transport, based on representative transport scenarios the consignments are subject to . 6.4.23.11 Each certificate of approval issued by a comp etent authority shall be assigned an identification mark . The mark shall be of the following generali zed type: VRI/number/type code (a) Except as provided in 6 . 4 . 23 . 12(b), “VRI” represents the distinguis hing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic * of the country issuing the certificate . (b) The number shall be assigned by the competen t authority, and shall be unique and specific with regard to the particular design or shipment or alternative activity limit for exempt consignment . The identification mark of the approval of ship ment shall be clearly related to the identification mark of the approval of design . (c) The following type codes shall be used, in the or der listed, to indicate the types of certificate of approval issued: AF Type A package design for fissile material B(U) Type B(U) package design (“B(U)F” if for fissi le material) B(M) Type B(M) package design (“B(M)F” if for fissile ma terial) C Type C package design (“CF” if for fissile mat erial) IF industrial package design for fissile materia l S special form radioactive material LD low dispersible radioactive material FE fissile material complying with the requi rements of 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 6 T shipment * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 376

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 366 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 X special arrangement AL alternative activity limits for an exempt c onsignment of instruments or articles . In the case of package designs for non-fissil e or fissile-excepted uranium hexafluoride, where none of the above codes apply, then the following type codes shall be used: H(U) unilateral approval H(M) multilateral approval . 6.4.23.12 These identification marks shall be applied as follows: (a) each certificate and each package shall bear the appropriate identification marks, comprising the symbols prescribed in 6 . 4 . 23 . 11(a), (b) and (c) above, except that, for pack ages, only the applicable design type codes shall appear following the second stroke; that is, the “T” or “X” shall not appear in the identification mark on the package . Where the approval of design and the app roval of shipment are combined, the applicable type codes do not need to be repeated . For example: A/132/B(M)F: a Type B(M) package design app roved for fissile material, requiring multilateral approval, for which the competent authority of Austria has assigned the design number 132 (to be marked on both the package and on the certificate of approval for the package design); A/132/B(M)/FT: the approval of shipment i ssued for a package bearing the identification mark elaborated above (to be marked on the certificate only); A/137/X: an approval of special arrange ment issued by the competent authority of Austria, to which the number 137 has been assigned (to be marked on the certificate only); A/139/IF: an industrial package design for fiss ile material approved by the competent authority of Austria, to which package design number 139 has been assigned (to be marked on both the package and on the certificate of approval for the package design); and A/145/H(U) : a package design for fissile-exc epted uranium hexafluoride approved by the competent authority of Austria, to which package design number 145 has been assigned (to be marked on both the package and on the certificate of approval for the package design); (b) where multilateral approval is effected b y validation in accordance with 6 . 4 . 23 . 20, only the identification mark issued by the c ountry of origin of the design or shipment shall be used . Where multilateral approval is effecte d by issue of certificates by successive countries, each certificate shall bear the appropriate identification mark and the package whose design was so approved shall bear all appropriate identification marks . For example: A/132/B(M)F CH/28/B(M)F would be the identification mark of a package wh ich was originally approved by Austria and was subsequently approved, by separate certificate, by Switzerland . Additional identification marks w ould be tabulated in a similar manner on the package; (c) the revision of a certificate shall be indicated by a parenthetical expression following the identification mark on the certificate . For example, A/132/B(M)F (Rev.2) wou ld indicate revision 2 of the Austrian certificate of approval for the package design; or A/132/B(M)/F (Rev.0) would indicate the original issuance of the Austrian certificate of approval for the package design . For original issuances, the parenthetica l entry is optional and other words such as ‘original issuance’ may also be used in place of ‘Rev . 0’ . Certificate revision numbers may only be is sued by the country issuing the original certificate of approval; (d) additional symbols (as may be necessitated by national provisions) may be added in parentheses to the end of the identification mark . For example, A/132/B(M)F (SP503) ; and (e) it is not necessary to alter the identificatio n mark on the packaging each time that a revision to the design certificate is made . Such re-marking shall be required only in th ose cases where the revision to the package design certificate involves a change in the letter type codes for the package design following the second stroke . 6.4.23.13 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority for special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate . (b) The competent authority identification mar k . (c) The issue date and an expiry date . (d) List of applicable national and internatio nal regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material is approved . (e) The identification of the special form radioacti ve material or low dispersible radioactive material . (f) A description of the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material . ⊗ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 377

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material 367 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (g) Design specifications for the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material, which may include references to drawings . (h) A specification of the radioactive con tents which includes the activities involved and which may include the physical and chemical form . (i) A specification of the applicable managem ent system as required in 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . (j) Reference to information provided by the a pplicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior to shipment . (k) If deemed appropriate by the competent aut hority, reference to the identity of the applicant . (l) Signature and identification of the certif ying official . 6.4.23.14 Each certificate of approval issued by a comp etent authority for material excepted from classification as “FISSILE” shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate . (b) The competent authority identification ma rk . (c) The issue date and an expiry date . (d) List of applicable national and internat ional regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the exception is approved . (e) A description of the excepted material . (f) Limiting specifications for the excepte d material . (g) A specification of the applicable managem ent system as required in 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . (h) Reference to information provided by the a pplicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior to shipment . (i) If deemed appropriate by the competent aut hority, reference to the identity of the applicant . (j) Signature and identification of the certif ying official . (k) Reference to documentation that demons trates compliance with 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 6 . 6.4.23.15 Each certificate of approval issued by a comp etent authority for a special arrangement shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate . (b) The competent authority identification ma rk . (c) The issue date and an expiry date . (d) Mode(s) of transport . (e) Any restrictions on the modes of transport , type of conveyance, freight container, and any necessary routeing instructions . (f) List of applicable national and internat ional regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the special arrangement is approved . (g) The following statement: “This certific ate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be transported . ” (h) References to certificates for alter native radioactive contents, other competent authority validation, or additional technical data or information, as deemed appropriate by the competent authority . (i) Description of the packaging by a referenc e to the drawings or a specification of the design . If deemed appropriate by the competent au thority, a reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make-up of the package shall also be provided, accompanied by a brief description of the packaging, including materials of manufacture, gross mass, general outside dimensions and appearance . (j) A specification of the authorized radioactiv e contents, including any restrictions on the radioactive contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging . This shall include the physical and chemi cal forms, the activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), mass in grams (for fissile material or for each fissile nuclide when appropriate), and whether special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material or fissile material excepted under 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6, if applicable . (k) Additionally, for packages containing fis sile material: (i) a detailed description of the authorized r adioactive contents; (ii) the value of the criticality safety index; ( iii) reference to the documentation that demo nstrates the criticality safety of the package; (iv) any special features, on the basis of which th e absence of water from certain void spaces has been assumed in the criticality assessment; △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 378

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 368 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (v) any allowance (based on 6 . 4 . 11 . 5(b)) for a change in neutron multiplic ation assumed in the criticality assessment as a result of actual irradiation experience; and (vi) the ambient temperature range for which the s pecial arrangement has been approved . (l) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat . (m) If deemed appropriate by the competent auth ority, reasons for the special arrangement . (n) Description of the compensatory measure s to be applied as a result of the shipment being under special arrangement . (o) Reference to information provided by the ap plicant relating to the use of the packaging or specific actions to be taken prior to the shipment . (p) A statement regarding the ambient conditi ons assumed for purposes of design if these are not in accordance with those specified in 6 . 4 . 8 . 5, 6 . 4 . 8 . 6 and 6 . 4 . 8 . 15, as applicable . (q) Any emergency arrangements deemed neces sary by the competent authority . (r) A specification of the applicable manageme nt system as required in 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . (s) If deemed appropriate by the competent auth ority, reference to the identity of the applicant and to the identity of the carrier . (t) Signature and identification of the certify ing official . 6.4.23.16 Each certificate of approval for a shipment issued by a competent authority shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate . (b) The competent authority identification mar k(s) . (c) The issue date and an expiry date . (d) List of applicable national and internatio nal regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the shipment is approved . (e) Any restrictions on the modes of transport, t ype of conveyance, freight container, and any necessary routeing instructions . (f) The following statement: “This certifica te does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be transported . ” (g) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat or maintenance of criticality safety . (h) Reference to information provided by the ap plicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior to shipment . (i) Reference to the applicable certificate( s) of approval of design . (j) A specification of the actual radioactive co ntents, including any restrictions on the radioactive contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging . This shall include the physical and chemic al forms, the total activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), mass in grams (for fissile material or for each fissile nuclide when appropriate), and whether special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material or fissile material excepted under 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6, if applicable . (k) Any emergency arrangements deemed neces sary by the competent authority . (l) A specification of the applicable manageme nt system as required in 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . (m) If deemed appropriate by the competent auth ority, reference to the identity of the applicant . (n) Signature and identification of the certify ing official . 6.4.23.17 Each certificate of approval of the de sign of a package issued by a competent authority shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate . (b) The competent authority identification mar k . (c) The issue date and an expiry date . (d) Any restriction on the modes of transport, if a ppropriate . (e) List of applicable national and internatio nal regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the design is approved . (f) The following statement: “This certifica te does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be transported . ” (g) References to certificates for alterna tive radioactive contents, other competent authority validation, or additional technical data or information, as deemed appropriate by the competent authority . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 379

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material 369 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (h) A statement authorizing shipment where approval of shipment is required under 5 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 2, if deemed appropriate . (i) Identification of the packaging . (j) Description of the packaging by a referenc e to the drawings or specification of the design . If deemed appropriate by the competent au thority, a reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make-up of the package shall also be provided, accompanied by a brief description of the packaging, including materials of manufacture, gross mass, general outside dimensions and appearance . (k) Specification of the design by reference to t he drawings . (l) A specification of the authorized radioactiv e content, including any restrictions on the radioactive contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging . This shall include the physical and chemi cal forms, the activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), mass in grams (for fissile material the total mass of fissile nuclides or the mass for each fissile nuclide, when appropriate) and whether special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material or fissile material excepted under 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 6, if applicable . (m) A description of the containment system; ( n) For package designs containing fissile mate rial which require multilateral approval of the package design in accordance with 6 . 4 . 22 . 4: (i) a detailed description of the authorized r adioactive contents; (ii) a description of the confinement system; (i ii) the value of the criticality safety index; ( iv) reference to the documentation that demo nstrates the criticality safety of the package; (v) any special features, on the basis of which th e absence of water from certain void spaces has been assumed in the criticality assessment; (vi) any allowance (based on 6 . 4 . 11 . 5(b)) for a change in neutron multiplic ation assumed in the criticality assessment as a result of actual irradiation experience; and (vii) the ambient temperature range for which th e package design has been approved . (o) For Type B(M) packages, a statement specif ying those prescriptions of 6 . 4 . 7 . 5, 6 . 4 . 8 . 4, 6 . 4 . 8 . 5, 6 . 4 . 8 . 6 and 6 . 4 . 8 . 9–6 . 4 . 8 . 15 with which the package does not conform and a ny amplifying information which may be useful to other competent authorities . (p) For package designs subject to 6 . 4 . 24 . 2, a statement specifying those requirem ents of the current regulations with which the package does not conform . (q) For packages containing more than 0 . 1 kg of uranium hexafluoride, a statement spe cifying those prescriptions of 6 . 4 . 6 . 4 that apply, if any, and any amplifying infor mation which may be useful to other competent authorities . (r) A detailed listing of any supplementar y operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat . (s) Reference to information provided by the a pplicant relating to the use of the packaging or specific actions to be taken prior to shipment . (t) A statement regarding the ambient condit ions assumed for purposes of design if these are not in accordance with those specified in 6 . 4 . 8 . 5, 6 . 4 . 8 . 6 and 6 . 4 . 8 . 15, as applicable . (u) A specification of the applicable managem ent system as required in 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . (v) Any emergency arrangements deemed nece ssary by the competent authority . (w) If deemed appropriate by the competent aut hority, reference to the identity of the applicant . (x) Signature and identification of the certif ying official . 6.4.23.18 Each certificate issued by a competent auth ority for alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles according to 5 . 1 . 5 . 2 . 1 . 4 shall include the following informatio n: (a) Type of certificate . (b) The competent authority identification ma rk . (c) The issue date and an expiry date . (d) List of applicable national and internat ional regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the exemption is approved . (e) The identification of the instrument or art icle . (f) A description of the instrument or article . (g) Design specifications for the instrumen t or article . (h) A specification of the radionuclide(s), t he approved alternative activity limit(s) for the exempt consignment(s) of the instrument(s) or article(s) . △ ■ △ △ △ △ △ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 380

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 370 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (i) Reference to documentation that demonstrates compliance with 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . (j) If deemed appropriate by the competent auth ority, reference to the identity of the applicant . (k) Signature and identification of the certify ing official . 6.4.23.19 The competent authority shall be informed o f the serial number of each packaging manufactured to a design approved under 6 . 4 . 22 . 2, 6 . 4 . 22 . 3, 6 . 4 . 22 . 4 and 6 . 4 . 24 . 2 . 6.4.23.20 Multilateral approval may be by vali dation of the original certificate issued by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design or shipment . Such validation may take the form o f an endorsement on the original certificate or the issuance of a separate endorsement, annex, supplement, etc . , by the competent authority of the country thr ough or into which the shipment is made . 6.4.24 Transitional measures for class 7 Packages not requiring competent authorit y approval of design under the 1985, 1985 (As Amended 1990), 1996 Edition, 1996 Edition (Revised), 1996 (As Amended 2003), 2005, 2009 Editions of IAEA Safety Series No. 6 and 2012 Edition of IAEA Safety Standards Series No. SSR-6 6.4.24.1 Packages not requiring competent author ity approval of design (excepted packages, Type IP-1, Type IP-2, Type IP-3 and Type A packages) shall meet the provisions of this Code in full, except that: (a) Packages that meet the requirements of the 19 85 or 1985 (As Amended 1990) Editions of IAEA Regulations: (i) may continue in transport provided that the y were prepared for transport prior to 31 December 2003 and are subject to the requirements of 6 . 4 . 24 . 4, if applicable; or (ii) may continue to be used, provided that all the fol lowing conditions are met: – they were not designed to contain uranium hex afluoride; – the applicable requirements of 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 of this Code are applied; – the activity limits and classification in ch apter 2 . 7 of this Code are applied; – the requirements and controls for transpo rt in parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 of this Code are applied; and – the packaging was not manufactured or modifi ed after 31 December 2003; (b) Packages that meet the requirements of the 19 96, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005 or 2009 Editions of IAEA Safety Series No . 6, or 2012 Edition of IAEA Safety Standards Se ries No . SSR-6: (i) may continue in transport provided that the y were prepared for transport prior to 31 December 2025 and are subject to the requirements of 6 . 4 . 24 . 4, if applicable; or (ii) may continue to be used, provided that all the fol lowing conditions are met: – The applicable requirements of 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 of this Code are applied; – The activity limits and classification in ch apter 2 . 7 of this Code are applied; – The requirements and controls for transpo rt in parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 of this Code are applied; and – The packaging was not manufactured or modifi ed after 31 December 2025 . Package designs approved under the 1985, 198 5 (As Amended 1990), 1996 Edition, 1996 Edition (Revised), 1996 (As Amended 2003), 2005, 2009 Editions of IAEA Safety Series No. 6 and 2012 Edition of IAEA Safety Standards Series No. SSR-6 6.4.24.2 Packages requiring competent authority ap proval of the design shall meet this Edition of these Regulations in full except that: (a) Packagings that were manufactured to a package design approved by the competent authority under the provisions of 1985 or 1985 (As Amended 1990) Editions of IAEA Regulations may continue to be used provided that all of the following conditions are met: (i) the package design is subject to multilateral approval; (ii) the applicable requirements of 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 of this Code are applied; (iii) the activity limits and classification in ch apter 2 . 7 of this Code are applied; (iv) the requirements and controls for transpo rt in parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 of this Code are applied; (v) for a package containing fissile material an d transported by air, the requirement of 6 . 4 . 11 . 11 is met; (b) Packagings that were manufactured to a package design approved by the competent authority under the provisions of the 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005 or 2009 Editions of IAEA Safety Series No . 6, or 2012 Edition of IAEA Safety Standards Se ries No . SSR-6 may continue to be used provided that al l of the following conditions are met: (i) the package design is subject to multilater al approval after 31 December 2025; (ii) the applicable requirements of 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 of this Code are applied; △ △ △ △ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 381

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material 371 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (iii) the activity limits and material restrictions of chapter 2 . 7 of this Code are applied; (iv) the requirements and controls for transp ort in parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 of this Code are applied . 6.4.24.3 No new manufacture of packagings to a packag e design meeting the provisions of the 1973, 1973 (as amended), 1985, and 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of IAEA Safety Series No . 6 shall be permitted to commence . 6.4.24.4 No new manufacture of packagings of a packag e design meeting the provisions of the 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005 or 2009 Editions of IAEA Safety Series No . 6, or 2012 Edition of IAEA Safety Standards S eries No . SSR-6 shall be permitted to commence afte r 31 December 2028 . Packages excepted from the requirements fo r fissile materials under the Regulations annexed to the 16th revised edition or the 17th revised edition of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods (2009 edition of IAEA Safety Standard Series No. TS-R-1) 6.4.24.5 Packages containing fissile material that is excepted from classification as “FISSILE” according to 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 . 1(i) or (iii) of the IMDG Code amendment s 35-10 or 36-12 (paragraphs 417(a)(i) or (iii) of the 2009 edition of IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material ) prepared for transport before 31 December 2014 may continue in transport and may continue to be classified as non-fissile or fissile-excepted except that the consignment limits in table 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 5 of these editions shall apply to the conveya nce . The consignment shall be transported und er exclusive use . Special form radioactive material appro ved under the 1985, 1985 (As Amended 1990), 1996 Edition, 1996 Edition (Revised), 1996 (As Amended 2003), 2005, 2009 Editions of IAEA Safety Series No. 6 and 2012 Edition of IAEA Safety Standards Series No. SSR-6 6.4.24.6 Special form radioactive material manufac tured to a design that had received unilateral approval by the competent authority under the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990), 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005 and 2009 Editions of IAEA Safety Series No . 6 and 2012 Edition of IAEA Safety Standards S eries No . SSR-6 may continue to be used when in complia nce with the mandatory management system in accordance with the applicable requirements of 1 . 5 . 3 . 1 . There shall be no new manufacture of spec ial form radioactive material to a design that had received unilateral approval by the competent authority under the 1985 or 1985 (as amended 1990) Editions of IAEA Safety Series No . 6 . No new manufacture of special form radioa ctive material to a design that had received unilateral approval by the competent authority under the 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005 and 2009 Editions of IAEA Safety Series No . 6, and 2012 Edition of IAEA Safety S tandards Series No . SSR-6 shall be permitted to commence af ter 31 December 2025 . ■ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 382

6 372 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Chapter 6.5 Provisions for the construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 6.5.1 General requirements 6.5.1.1 Scope 6.5.1.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to IBCs in tended for the transport of certain dangerous substances and materials . 6.5.1.1.2 IBCs and their service equipment not confor ming strictly to the provisions herein, but conforming to acceptable alternatives, may be considered by the competent authority concerned for approval . In order to take into account progress in sc ience and technology, the use of alternative arrangements which offer at least an equivalent degree of safety in transport in respect of compatibility with the substances to be loaded therein and an equivalent or superior resistance to handling impact, and fire, may be considered by the competent authority concerned . 6.5.1.1.3 The construction, equipment, testing, m arking and operation of IBCs shall be subject to acceptance by the competent authority of the country in which the IBCs are approved . 6.5.1.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distribu tors of IBCs shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that IBCs as presented for transport are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this chapter . 6.5.1.2 Definitions Body (for all categories of IBCs other than composite IBCs) means the receptacle proper, including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment . Handling device (for flexible IBCs) m eans any sling, loop, eye or frame attached to the body of the IBC or formed from a continuation of the IBC body material . Maximum permissible gross mass means the mas s of the IBC and any service or structural equipment together with the maximum net mass . Plastics material , when used in connection with in ner receptacles for composite IBCs, is taken to include other polymeric materials such as rubber . Protected (for metal IBCs) means the IBC being pr ovided with additional protection against impact, the protection taking the form of, for example, a multi-layer (sandwich) or double-wall construction or a frame with a metal latticework packaging . Service equipment means filling and dischar ge devices and, according to the category of IBC, pressure relief or venting, safety, heating and heat-insulating devices and measuring instruments . Structural equipment (for all categorie s of IBCs other than flexible IBCs) means the reinforcing, fastening, handling, protective or stabilizing members of the body, including the base pallet for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle, fibreboard and wooden IBCs . Woven plastics (for flexible IBCs) means a mat erial made from stretched tapes or monofilaments of a suitable plastics material . 6.5.1.3 Categories of IBCs 6.5.1.3.1 Metal IBCs consist of a metal body together with a ppropriate service and structural equipment . 6.5.1.3.2 Flexible IBCs consist of a body constituted of fil m, woven fabric or any other flexible material or combinations thereof, and if necessary an inner coating or liner, together with any appropriate service equipment and handling devices . 6.5.1.3.3 Rigid plastics IBCs consist of a rigid plastics b ody, which may have structural equipment together with appropriate service equipment . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 383

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 373 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.1.3.4 Composite IBCs consist of structural equip ment in the form of a rigid outer packaging enclosing a plastics inner receptacle together with any service or other structural equipment . The IBC is so constructed that the inner rec eptacle and outer packaging, once assembled, form, and are used as, an integrated single unit to be filled, stored, transported or emptied as such . 6.5.1.3.5 Fibreboard IBCs consist of a fibreboard body wit h or without separate top and bottom caps, if necessary, an inner liner (but no inner packagings) and appropriate service and structural equipment . 6.5.1.3.6 Wooden IBCs consist of a rigid or collapsible wo oden body together with an inner liner (but no inner packagings) and appropriate service and structural equipment . 6.5.1.4 Designatory code system for IBCs 6.5.1.4.1 The code shall consist of two Arabic numeral s as specified in . 1 followed by one or more capital letters as spe cified in . 2; followed, when specified in an individ ual section, by an Arabic numeral indicating the category of IBC . .1 For solids, filled or discharged Type by gravity under pressure of more than 10 kPa (0.1 bar) For liquids Rigid 11 21 31 Flexible 13 – – .2 Materials A Steel (all types and surface treatments) B Aluminium C Natural wood D Plywood F Reconstituted wood G Fibreboard H Plastics material L Textile M Paper, multiwall N Metal (other than steel or aluminium) 6.5.1 .4.2 For a composite IBC, two capital letters in La tin characters shall be used in sequence in the second position of the code . The first shall indicate the material of the i nner receptacle of the IBC and the second that of the outer packaging of the IBC . 6.5.1.4.3 The following types and codes of IBCs are assi gned: Material Category Code Paragraph Metal A Steel for solids, filled or discharged by gravi ty for solids, filled or discharged under pressure for liquids 11A 21A 31A 6 . 5 . 5 . 1 B Aluminium for solids, filled or discharged by gra vity for solids, filled or discharged under pressure for liquids 11B 21B 31B N Other than steel or aluminium for solids, filled o r discharged by gravity for solids, filled or discharged under pressure for liquids 11N 21N 31N Flexible H Plastics woven plastics without coating o r liner woven plastics, coated woven plastics with liner woven plastics, coated and with liner plastics film 13H1 13H2 13H3 13H4 13H5 6 . 5 . 5 . 2 L Textile without coating or liner coated with lin er coated and with liner 13L1 13L2 13L3 13L4 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 384

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 374 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Material Category Code Paragraph Flexible (continued) 6 . 5 . 5 . 2 M Paper multiwall multiwall, water-resist ant 13M1 13M2 H Rigid plastics for solids, filled or discharge d by gravity, fitted with structural equipment for solids, filled or di scharged by gravity, freestanding for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, fitted with structural equipment for solids, filled or di scharged under pressure, freestanding for liquids, fitted with structural equipment for liquids, freestanding 11H1 11H2 21H1 21H2 31H1 31H2 6 . 5 . 5 . 3 HZ Composite with plastics inner receptacle * for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with rigid plastics inner receptacle for solids, filled or discha rged by gravity, with flexible plastics inner receptacle for solids, fille d or discharged under pressure, with rigid plastics inner receptacle for solids, fille d or discharged under pressure, with flexible plastics inner receptacle for liquids, wit h rigid plastics inner receptacle for liquids, with flexible plastics inner receptacle 11HZ1 11HZ2 21HZ1 21HZ2 31HZ1 31HZ2 6 . 5 . 5 . 4 G Fibreboard for solids, filled or discharged by g ravity 11G 6 . 5 . 5 . 5 Wooden C Natural wood for solids, filled or discharged b y gravity, with inner liner 11C 6 . 5 . 5 . 6 D Plywood for solids, filled or discharged by gra vity, with inner liner 11D F Reconstituted wood for solids, filled or dis charged by gravity, with inner liner 11F * The code shall be completed by replacing the letter ‘Z’ by a capital letter in accordance with 6 . 5 . 1 . 4 . 1 . 2 to indicate the nature of the material used for t he outer packaging . 6.5.1.4.4 The letter ‘W’ may follow the IBC code . The letter ‘W’ signifies that the IBC, althou gh of the same type as indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from those in section 6 . 5 . 3 and is considered equivalent in accordanc e with the provisions in 6 . 5 . 1 . 1 . 2 . 6.5.2 Marking 6.5.2.1 Primary marking 6.5.2.1.1 Each IBC manufactured and intended for use ac cording to these provisions shall bear durable marks which are legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible . Letters, numbers and symbols shall be at lea st 12 mm high and shall show: .1 the United Nations packaging symbol: This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 6 . 3, 6 . 5, 6 . 6, 6 . 7 or 6 . 9 . For metal IBCs on which the mark is stamped or emb ossed, the capital letters “UN” may be applied instead of the symbol; .2 the code designating the type of IBC accordin g to 6 . 5 . 1 . 4; .3 a capital letter designating the packing gr oup(s) for which the design type has been approved: “X” for packing groups I, II and III (IBCs for soli ds only); “Y” for packing groups II and III; or “Z” for packing group III only; .4 the month and year (last two digits) of manufac ture; .5 the State authorizing the allocation of the m arks, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic; * * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Convention o n Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 385

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 375 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 .6 the name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identifications of the IBC as specified by the competent authority; .7 the stacking test load in kilograms . For IBCs not designed for stacking, the figu re “0” shall be shown; .8 the maximum permissible gross mass in kilo grams . The primary marks required above sh all be applied in the sequence of the subparagraphs above . The marks required by 6 . 5 . 2 . 2 and any further mark authorized by a compete nt authority shall still enable the primary marks to be correctly identified . Each mark applied in accordance with . 1 to . 8 and with 6 . 5 . 2 . 2 shall be clearly separated, e . g . by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifi able . 6.5.2.1.2 Examples of marks for various types of IBCs in a ccordance with . 1 to . 8 above: 11A/Y/02 99/ NL/…* 007/ 5500/1500 For a metal IBC for solids discharged by gravity and made from steel/ for packing groups II and III/ manufactured in February 1999/ authorized by the Netherlands/ manufactured by … (name of manufacturer) and of a design type to which the competent authority has allocated serial number 007/ the stacking test load in kilograms/ and the maximum permissible gross mass in kilograms . 13H3/Z/03 01/ F/… 1713/ 0/1500 For a flexible IBC for solids discharged by gravity and made from woven plastics with a liner/ not designed to be stacked . 31H1/Y/04 99/ GB/…* 9099/ 10800/1200 For a rigid plastics IBC for liquids made from plastics with structural equipment withstanding the stack load . 31HA1/Y/05 01/ D/…* 1683/ 10800/1200 For a composite IBC for liquids with a rigid plastics inner receptacle and steel outer packaging . 11C/X/01 02/ S/…* 9876/ 3000/910 For a wooden IBC for solids with an inner liner and authorized for packing group I solids . 11G/Z/06 02/ I/…* 962/ 0/500 For a fibreboard IBC/ not designed to be stacked . 11D/Y/07 02/ E/…* 261/ 3240/600 For a plywood IBC with inner liner . 6.5.2.1.3 Where an IBC conforms to one or more than one test ed IBC design type, including one or more than one tested packaging or large packaging design type, the IBC may bear more than one mark to indicate the relevant performance test requirements that have been met . Where more than one mark appears on an IBC, the m arks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall appear in its entirety . △ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 386

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 376 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.2.2 Additional marking 6.5.2.2.1 Each IBC shall bear the marks required in 6 . 5 . 2 . 1 and, in addition, the following informatio n, which may appear on a corrosion-resistant plate permanently attached in a place readily accessible for inspection: Note: For metal IBCs, this plate shall be a corrosion-resistant metal plate . Additional marks Category of IBC Metal Rigid plastics Composite Fibreboard Wooden Capacity in litres a at 20 ° C X X X Tare mass in kg a X X X X X Test (gauge) pressure, in kPa or bar, a if applicable X X Maximum filling/discharge pressure in kPa or bar, a if applicable X X X Body material and its minimum thickness in mm X Date of last leakproofness test, if applicable (month and year) X X X Date of last inspection (month and year) X X X Serial number of the manufacturer X a The unit used shall be indicated . 6.5.2.2.2 The maximum permitted stacking load appli cable shall be displayed on a symbol as shown in the figures below . The symbol shall be durable and clearly visi ble . Minimum dimension 100 mm Minimum dimension 100 mm … kg max Minimum dimension 100 mm Minimum dimension 100 mm IBCs capable of being stacked IBCs NOT capable of being stacked The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm x 100 mm . The letters and numbers indicating the mas s shall be at least 12 mm high . The area within the printer’s marks indica ted by the dimensional arrows shall be square . Where dimensions are not specified, all feat ures shall be in approximate proportion to those shown . The mass marked above the symbol shall not exc eed the load imposed during the design type test (see 6 . 5 . 6 . 6 . 4) divided by 1 . 8 . Note: The provisions of 6 . 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 shall apply to all IBCs manufactured, repair ed or remanufactured as from 1 January 2011 . The provisions of 6 . 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 of the IMDG Code (amendment 36-12) m ay continue to be applied to all IBCs manufactured, repaired or remanufactured between 1 January 2011 and 31 December 2016 . 6.5.2.2.3 Each flexible IBC may also bear a pictogram or pic tograms indicating the recommended lifting methods . 6.5.2.2.4 Inner receptacles that are of composite IBC d esign type shall be identified by the application of the marks indicated in 6 . 5 . 2 . 1 . 1 . 2, . 3, . 4 where this date is that of the manufacture of the p lastics inner receptacle, . 5 and . 6 . The UN packaging symbol shall not be applied . The marks shall be applied in the sequence sho wn in 6 . 5 . 2 . 1 . 1 . They shall be durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily accessible for inspection after assembling the inner receptacle in the outer casing . When the marks on the inner receptacle are not r eadily accessible for inspection due to the design of the outer casing, a duplicate of the required marks on the inner receptacle shall be placed on the outer casing preceded by the wording “Inner receptacle” . This duplicate shall be durable, legible a nd placed in a location so as to be readily accessible for inspection . ⊗ ⊗ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 387

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 377 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 The date of the manufacture of the plastics inner receptacle may alternatively be marked on the inner receptacle adjacent to the remainder of the marks . In such a case, the date may be waived from the rem ainder of the marks . An example of an appropriate marking meth od is: Note 1: Other methods that provide the mini mum required information in a durable, visible and legible form are also acceptable . Note 2: The date of manufacture of the inner re ceptacle may be different from the marked date of manufacture (see 6 . 5 . 2 . 1), repair (see 6 . 5 . 4 . 5 . 3) or remanufacture (see 6 . 5 . 2 . 4) of the composite IBC . 6.5.2.2.5 Where a composite IBC is designed in such a mann er that the outer packaging is intended to be dismantled for transport when empty (such as for return of the IBC for re-use to the original consignor), each of the parts intended to be detached when so dismantled shall be marked with the month and year of manufacture and the name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the IBC as specified by the competent authority (see 6 . 5 . 2 . 1 . 1 . 6) . 6.5.2.3 Conformity to design type The marks indicate that the IBCs correspond to a successfully tested design type and that the provisions referred to in the certificate have been met . 6.5.2.4 Marking of remanufactured composite IBC s (31HZ1) The marks specified in 6 . 5 . 2 . 1 . 1 and 6 . 5 . 2 . 2 shall be removed from the original IBC or made permanently illegible and new marks shall be applied to an IBC remanufactured in accordance with these provisions of this Code . 6.5.3 Construction requirements 6.5.3.1 General requirements 6.5.3.1.1 IBCs shall be resistant to or adequately pro tected from deterioration due to the external environment . 6.5.3.1.2 IBCs shall be so constructed and closed that n one of the contents can escape under normal conditions of transport, including the effects of vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure . 6.5.3.1.3 IBCs and their closures shall be construct ed of materials compatible with their contents, or be protected internally, so that they are not liable: .1 to be attacked by the contents so as to make their u se dangerous; .2 to cause the contents to react or decompose, o r form harmful or dangerous compounds with the IBCs . 6.5.3.1.4 Gaskets, where used, shall be made of materia ls not subject to attack by the contents of an IBC . 6.5.3.1.5 All service equipment shall be so po sitioned or protected as to minimize the risk of escape of the contents owing to damage during handling and transport . 6.5.3.1.6 IBCs, their attachments and their servic e and structural equipment shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, the internal pressure of the contents and the stresses of normal handling and transport . IBCs intended for stacking shall be desi gned for stacking . Any lifting or securing features of IBCs sh all be of sufficient strength to withstand the normal conditions of handling and transport without gross distortion or failure and shall be so positioned that no undue stress is caused in any part of the IBC . 6.5.3.1.7 Where an IBC consists of a body within a framewo rk, it shall be so constructed that: .1 the body does not chafe or rub against the frame work so as to cause material damage to the body, .2 the body is retained within the framework at a ll times, .3 the items of equipment are fixed in such a way that t hey cannot be damaged if the connections between body and frame allow relative expansion or movement . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 388

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 378 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.3.1.8 Where a bottom discharge valve is fitted, it shal l be capable of being made secure in the closed position and the whole discharge system shall be suitably protected from damage . Valves having lever closures shall be able t o be secured against accidental opening and the open or closed position shall be readily apparent . For IBCs containing liquids, a secondary m eans of sealing the discharge aperture shall also be provided, such as by a blank flange or equivalent device . 6.5.4 Testing, certification and inspection 6.5.4.1 Quality assurance IBCs shall be manufactured, remanufactured, repaired and tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority, in order to ensure that each manufactured, remanufactured or repaired IBC meets the provisions of this chapter . Note: ISO 16106:2006, Packaging – Transp ort packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001 , provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed . 6.5.4.2 Test provisions IBCs shall be subjected to design type tests and, if applicable, to initial and periodic inspections and tests in accordance with 6 . 5 . 4 . 4 . 6.5.4.3 Certification In respect of each design type of IBC, a certificate and mark (as in 6 . 5 . 2) shall be issued attesting that the design ty pe, including its equipment, meets the test provisions . 6.5.4.4 Inspection and testing Note: See also 6 . 5 . 4 . 5 for tests and inspections on repaired IBCs . 6.5.4.4.1 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite I BC shall be inspected to the satisfaction of the competent authority: .1 before it is put into service (including afte r remanufactured), and thereafter at intervals not exceeding five years, with regard to: .1 conformity to the design type, including ma rks; .2 internal and external condition; and .3 proper functioning of service equipment . Thermal insulation, if any, need be removed o nly to the extent necessary for a proper examination of the body of the IBC . .2 at intervals of not more than two and a half years wi th regard to: .1 external condition; and .2 proper functioning of service equipment . Thermal insulation, if any, need be removed o nly to the extent necessary for a proper examination of the body of the IBC . Each IBC shall correspond in all respects to i ts design type . 6.5.4.4.2 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite I BC for liquids, or for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure, shall undergo a suitable leakproofness test . This test is part of a quality assurance progr amme as stipulated in 6 . 5 . 4 . 1 which shows the capability of meeting the app ropriate test level indicated in 6 . 5 . 6 . 7 . 3: (a) before it is first used for transport; (b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years . For this test the IBC shall be fitted with the prima ry bottom closure . The inner receptacle of a composite IBC may be t ested without the outer casing, provided the test results are not affected . 6.5.4.4.3 A report of each inspection and test shall b e kept by the owner of the IBC at least until the next inspection or test . The report shall include the results of the in spection and test and shall identify the party performing the inspection and test (see also the marking requirements in 6 . 5 . 2 . 2 . 1) . 6.5.4.4.4 The competent authority may at any time requi re proof, by tests in accordance with this chapter, that the IBCs meet the provisions of the design type tests . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 389

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 379 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.4.5 Repaired IBCs 6.5.4.5.1 When an IBC is impaired as a result of impact (e . g . accident) or any other cause, it shall be repa ired or otherwise maintained (see definition of “Routine maintenance of IBCs” in 1 . 2 . 1), so as to conform to the design type . The bodies of rigid plastics IBCs and the inne r receptacles of composite IBCs that are impaired shall be replaced . 6.5.4.5.2 In addition to any other testing and inspecti on requirements in this Code, an IBC shall be subjected to the full testing and inspection requirements set out in 6 . 5 . 4 . 4, and the required reports shall be prepared, w henever it is repaired . 6.5.4.5.3 The party performing the tests and inspe ctions after the repair shall durably mark the IBC near the manufacturer’s UN design type marks to show: .1 the State in which the tests and inspections we re carried out; .2 the name or authorized symbol of the party perf orming the tests and inspections; and .3 the date (month, year) of the tests and inspect ions . 6.5.4.5.4 Tests and inspections performed in accord ance with 6 . 5 . 4 . 5 . 2 may be considered to satisfy the requiremen ts for the 2 . 5- and 5-year periodic tests and inspection s . 6.5.5 Specific provisions for IBCs 6.5.5.1 Specific provisions for metal IBCs 6.5.5.1.1 These provisions apply to metal IBCs for the tr ansport of liquids and solids . There are three categories of metal IBCs: . 1 those for solids which are filled and discharg ed by gravity (11A, 11B, 11N); . 2 those for solids which are filled and disc harged at a gauge pressure greater than 10 kPa (21A, 21B, 21N); and . 3 those for liquids (31A, 31B, 31N) . 6.5.5.1.2 Bodies shall be made of suitable ductile meta l in which the weldability has been fully demonstrated . Welds shall be skilfully made and afford com plete safety . Low-temperature performance shall be ta ken into account when appropriate . 6.5.5.1.3 Care shall be taken to avoid damage by galvanic a ction due to the juxtaposition of dissimilar metals . 6.5.5.1.4 Aluminium IBCs intended for the transport o f flammable liquids shall have no movable parts, such as covers, closures, etc . , made of unprotected steel liable to rust, whi ch might cause a dangerous reaction by coming into frictional or percussive contact with the aluminium . 6.5.5.1.5 Metal IBCs shall be made of metals which meet the f ollowing provisions: .1 For steel, the elongation at fracture, per ce nt, shall not be less than 10,000/ R m with an absolute minimum of 20%, where R m = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the reference steel to be used, in N/mm 2 . .2 For aluminium and aluminium alloys, the elo ngation at fracture, per cent, shall not be less than 10,000/6 R m with an absolute minimum of 8% . Specimens used to determine the elongatio n at fracture shall be taken transversely to the direction of rolling and be so secured that: L o = 5d , or L o = 5 . 65 √ __ A where : L o = gauge length of the specimen before the test; d = diameter; and A = cross-sectional area of the test specime n . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 390

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 380 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.5.1.6 Minimum wall thickness Metal IBCs with a capacity of more than 1,500 L shall comply with the following minimum wall thickness requirement: .1 For a reference steel having a product of R m × A o = 10,000, the wall thickness shall not be less than: Wall thickness ( T ) in mm Types 11A, 11B, 11N Types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N Unprotected Protected Unprotected Protected T = C /2,000 + 1 . 5 T = C /2,000 + 1 . 0 T = C /1,000 + 1 . 0 T = C /2,000 + 1 . 5 where: A o = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the reference steel to be used on fracture under tensile stress (see 6 . 5 . 5 . 1 . 5) . .2 For metals other than the reference steel de scribed in . 1, the minimum wall thickness is given by the fo llowing equivalence formula: e 1 = 21 . 4 × e 0 _________ 3 √ _________ R m1 × A 1 where: e 1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the metal to be used (in mm); e 0 = required minimum wall thickness for the reference steel (in mm); R m1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be used (in N/mm 2 ) (see . 3); and A 1 = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the metal to be used on fracture under tensile stress (see 6 . 5 . 5 . 1 . 5) . However, in no case shall the wall thickness b e less than 1 . 5 mm . .3 For purposes of the calculation describe d in . 2, the guaranteed minimum tensile streng th of the metal to be used ( R m1 ) shall be the minimum value according to national or international material standards . However, for austenitic steels, the spec ified minimum value for R m according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when a greater value is attested in the material inspection certificate . When no material standard exists for the ma terial in question, the value of R m shall be the minimum value attested in the material inspection certificate . 6.5.5.1.7 Pressure relief provisions IBCs for liquids shall be capable of releasing a sufficient amount of vapour in the event of fire engulfment to ensure that no rupture of the shell will occur . This can be achieved by conventional pres sure relief devices or by other constructional means . The start-to-discharge pressure sha ll not be higher than 65 kPa and no lower than the total gauge pressure experienced in the IBC (i . e . the vapour pressure of the filling substan ce plus the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55 ° C, determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling as defined in 4 . 1 . 1 . 4 . The pressure relief devices shall be fitte d in the vapour space . 6.5.5.2 Specific provisions for flexible IBCs 6.5.5.2.1 These provisions apply to flexible IBCs of th e following types: 13H1 woven plastics without coating or liner 13 H2 woven plastics, coated 13H3 woven plastics with liner 13H4 woven plastics, coated and with liner 13H5 plastics film 13L1 textile without coating or liner 13L2 textile, coated 13L3 textile with liner 13L4 textile, coated and with liner 13M1 paper, multiwall 13M2 paper, multiwall, water-resistant . Flexible IBCs are intended for the transpo rt of solids only . 6.5.5.2.2 Bodies of IBCs shall be manufactured from su itable materials . The strength of the material and the constr uction of a flexible IBC shall be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use . ■ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 391

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 381 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.5.2.3 All materials used in the construct ion of flexible IBCs of types 13M1 and 13M2 shall, after complete immersion in water for not less than 24 hours, retain at least 85% of the tensile strength as measured originally on the material conditioned to equilibrium at 67% relative humidity or less . 6.5.5.2.4 Seams of IBCs shall be formed by stitching, he at sealing, gluing or any equivalent method . All stitched seam-ends shall be secured . 6.5.5.2.5 Flexible IBCs shall provide adequate re sistance to ageing and to degradation caused by ultraviolet radiation, by climatic conditions, or by the substance contained within which would thereby render them unsuitable for their intended use . 6.5.5.2.6 For plastics flexible IBCs where protecti on against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors . These additives shall be compatible wit h the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the body of the IBC . Where use is made of carbon black, pigments o r inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction . 6.5.5.2.7 Additives may be incorporated into the mat erial of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material . 6.5.5.2.8 No material recovered from used rece ptacles shall be used in the manufacture of IBC bodies . Production residues or scrap from the sa me manufacturing process may, however, be used . Component parts such as fittings and palle t bases may also be used provided such components have not in any way been damaged in previous use . 6.5.5.2.9 When filled, the ratio of height to width shall be n ot more than 2:1 . 6.5.5.2.10 The liner shall be made of a suitable material . The strength of the material used and the con struction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and the intended use . Joints and closures shall be sift-proof a nd capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and transport . 6.5.5.3 Specific provisions for rigid plastics IB Cs 6.5.5.3.1 These provisions apply to rigid pla stics IBCs for the transport of solids or liquids . Rigid plastics IBCs are of the followi ng types: 11H1 fitted with structural equipment design ed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked, for solids which are filled or discharged by gravity 11H2 freestanding, for solids which are filled o r discharged by gravity 21H1 fitted with structural equipment design ed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked, for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure 21H2 freestanding, for solids which are filled o r discharged under pressure 31H1 fitted with structural equipment design ed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked, for liquids 31H2 freestanding, for liquids . 6.5.5.3.2 The body shall be manufactured from suitab le plastics material of known specifications and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and to the service it is required to perform . The material shall be adequately resist ant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained within or, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation . Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate . Any permeation of the substance contain ed within shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport . 6.5.5.3.3 Where protection against ultraviolet r adiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors . These additives shall be compatible wit h the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the body of the IBC . Where use is made of carbon black, pigments o r inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction . 6.5.5.3.4 Additives may be incorporated in the mater ial of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material . 6.5.5.3.5 No used material other than production res idues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used in the manufacturing of rigid plastics IBCs . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 392

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 382 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.5.4 Specific provisions for composite IBCs with plas tics inner receptacles 6.5.5.4.1 These provisions apply to composite IBCs f or the transport of solids or liquids of the following types: 11HZ1 composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner r eceptacle, for solids filled or discharged by gravity 11HZ2 composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inn er receptacle, for solids filled or discharged by gravity 21HZ1 composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner r eceptacle, for solids filled or discharged under pressure 21HZ2 composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inn er receptacle, for solids filled or discharged under pressure 31HZ1 composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner r eceptacle, for liquids 31HZ2 composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inn er receptacle, for liquids . This code shall be completed by repl acing the letter ‘Z’ by a capital letter in accordance with 6 . 5 . 1 . 4 . 1 . 2 to indicate the nature of the material us ed for the outer packaging . 6.5.5.4.2 The inner receptacle is not intended to perf orm a containment function without its outer packaging . A “rigid” inner receptacle is a receptacl e which retains its general shape when empty without closures in place and without the benefit of the outer packaging . Any inner receptacle that is not “r igid” is considered to be “flexible” . 6.5.5.4.3 The outer packaging normally consists of r igid material formed so as to protect the inner receptacle from physical damage during handling and transport, but is not intended to perform the containment function . It includes the base pallet where appropria te . 6.5.5.4.4 A composite IBC with a fully enclosing outer p ackaging shall be so designed that the integrity of the inner receptacle may be readily assessed following the leakproofness and hydraulic tests . 6.5.5.4.5 IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall be limited to a capacit y of not more than 1,250 L . 6.5.5.4.6 The inner receptacle shall be manufactur ed from suitable plastics material of known specifications and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and to the service it is required to perform . The material shall be adequately resist ant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained and, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation . Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate . Any permeation of the substance contain ed shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport . 6.5.5.4.7 Where protection against ultraviolet r adiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors . These additives shall be compatible wit h the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the inner receptacle . Where use is made of carbon black, pigments o r inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may be waived if changes in carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction . 6.5.5.4.8 Additives may be incorporated in the ma terial of the inner receptacle to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material . 6.5.5.4.9 No used material other than production res idues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used in the manufacture of inner receptacles . 6.5.5.4.10 The inner receptacle of IBCs of type 31HZ2 sha ll consist of at least three plies of film . 6.5.5.4.11 The strength of the material and the cons truction of the outer packaging shall be appropriate to the capacity of the composite IBC and its intended use . 6.5.5.4.12 The outer packaging shall be free of any proj ection that might damage the inner receptacle . 6.5.5.4.13 Outer packagings of steel or aluminium sha ll be constructed of a suitable metal of adequate thickness . 6.5.5.4.14 Outer packagings of natural wood shall be of w ell-seasoned wood, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the packaging . The tops and bottoms may be made of water-res istant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type . 6.5.5.4.15 Outer packagings of plywood shall be made of w ell-seasoned rotary-cut, sliced or sawn veneer plywood, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the packaging . All adjacent plies shall be glued with wate r-resistant adhesive . Other suitable materials may be used in con junction with plywood for the construction of packagings . Packagings shall be firmly nailed or secur ed to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices . 6.5.5.4.16 The walls of outer packagings of reconstit uted wood shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type . Other parts of the packagings may be made of ot her suitable material . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 393

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 383 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.5.4.17 For fibreboard outer packagings, strong and good-quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used appropriate to the capacity of the packaging and to its intended use . The water resistance of the outer surface s hall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m 2 – see ISO 535:1991 . It shall have proper bending qualities . Fibreboard shall be cut, creased withou t scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending . The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shal l be firmly glued by water-resistant adhesive to the facings . 6.5.5.4.18 The ends of fibreboard outer packagings may h ave a wooden frame or be entirely of wood . Reinforcements of wooden battens may be u sed . 6.5.5.4.19 Manufacturing joins in the fibreboard out er packagings shall be taped, lapped and glued, or lapped and stitched with metal staples . Lapped joins shall have an appropriate ov erlap . Where closing is effected by gluing or tapi ng, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used . 6.5.5.4.20 Where the outer packagings are of plastics m aterial, the relevant provisions of 6 . 5 . 5 . 4 . 6 to 6 . 5 . 5 . 4 . 9 shall apply . 6.5.5.4.21 The outer packagings of IBCs of type 31HZ2 sha ll enclose the inner receptacle on all sides . 6.5.5.4.22 Any integral pallet base forming part of the I BC or a detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass . 6.5.5.4.23 The pallet or integral base shall be designe d so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to damage in handling . 6.5.5.4.24 The outer packagings shall be secur ed to a detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport . Where a detachable pallet is used, its top sur face shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC . 6.5.5.4.25 Strengthening devices such as timber sup ports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the inner receptacle . 6.5.5.4.26 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the be aring surfaces shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner . Such IBCs shall be designed so that the load is no t supported by the inner receptacle . 6.5.5.5 Specific provisions for fibreboard IBCs 6.5.5.5.1 These provisions apply to fibreboard IBCs f or the transport of solids which are filled or discharged by gravity . Fibreboard IBCs are of the following type : 11G . 6.5.5.5.2 Fibreboard IBCs shall not incorporate t op lifting devices . 6.5.5.5.3 The body shall be made of strong and good-qual ity solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall), appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and to its intended use . The water resistance of the outer surface s hall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m 2 – see ISO 535:1991 . It shall have proper bending qualiti es . Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending . The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shal l be firmly glued to the facings . 6.5.5.5.4 The walls, including top and bottom, shall h ave a minimum puncture resistance of 15 J, measured according to ISO 3036:1975 . 6.5.5.5.5 Manufacturing joins in the body of IBCs shall be made with an appropriate overlap and shall be taped, glued, stitched with metal staples or fastened by other means at least equally effective . Where joins are effected by gluing or tapin g, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used . Metal staples shall pass completely thr ough all pieces to be fastened and be formed or protected so that any inner liner cannot be abraded or punctured by them . 6.5.5.5.6 The liner shall be made of suitable material . The strength of the material used and the con struction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and its intended use . Joins and closures shall be sift-proof an d capable of withstanding pressure and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and transport . 6.5.5.5.7 Any integral pallet base forming part of the I BC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass . 6.5.5.5.8 The pallet or integral base shall be designe d so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to damage in handling . 6.5.5.5.9 The body shall be secured to any detachable pa llet to ensure stability in handling and transport . Where a detachable pallet is used, its top sur face shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 394

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 384 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.5.5.10 Strengthening devices such as timber sup ports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner . 6.5.5.5.11 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the be aring surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner . 6.5.5.6 Specific provisions for wooden IBCs 6.5.5.6.1 These provisions apply to wooden IBC s for the transport of solids which are filled or discharged by gravity . Wooden IBCs are of the following types: 11C natural wood with inner liner 11D plywood with inner liner 11F reconstituted wood with inner liner . 6.5.5.6.2 Wooden IBCs shall not incorporate top lift ing devices . 6.5.5.6.3 The strength of the materials used and the met hod of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the IBC . 6.5.5.6.4 Natural wood shall be well seasoned, commer cially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the IBC . Each part of the IBC shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto . Parts are considered equivalent to one p iece, when: – a suitable method of glued assembly, as for in stance Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint is used; or – a butt joint with at least two corrugated meta l fasteners at each joint is used; or – other methods at least equally effective a re used . 6.5.5.6.5 Bodies of plywood shall be at least three-pl y . It shall be made of well-seasoned rotary- cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the body . All adjacent plies shall be glued with wate r-resistant adhesive . Other suitable materials may be used with p lywood for the construction of the body . 6.5.5.6.6 Bodies of reconstituted wood shall be made o f water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type . 6.5.5.6.7 IBCs shall be firmly nailed or secured to corne r posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices . 6.5.5.6.8 The liner shall be made of a suitable material . The strength of the material used and the con struction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and its intended use . Joins and closures shall be sift-proof an d capable of withstanding pressure and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and transport . 6.5.5.6.9 Any integral pallet base forming part of the I BC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass . 6.5.5.6.10 The pallet or integral base shall be designe d so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to damage in handling . 6.5.5.6.11 The body shall be secured to any detachable pa llet to ensure stability in handling and transport . Where a detachable pallet is used, its top sur face shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC . 6.5.5.6.12 Strengthening devices such as timber sup ports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner . 6.5.5.6.13 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the be aring surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner . 6.5.6 Test provisions for IBCs 6.5.6.1 Performance and frequency of tests 6.5.6.1.1 Each IBC design type shall successfully pa ss the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used . An IBC design type is defined by the design, siz e and material and thickness, manner of construction and means of filling and discharging, but may include various surface treatments; it also includes IBCs which differ from the design type only in their lesser external dimensions . 6.5.6.1.2 Tests shall be carried out on IBCs as prepa red for transport . IBCs shall be filled as indicated in the rel evant section . The substances to be transported in the IBC s may be replaced by other substances except where this would invalidate the results of the tests . For solids, when another substance is use d, it shall have the Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 395

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 385 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc . ) as the substance to be transported . It is permissible to use additives, such as b ags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package gross mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected . 6.5.6.2 Design type tests 6.5.6.2.1 One IBC of each design type, size, wall thickn ess and manner of construction shall be submitted to the tests in the order shown in 6 . 5 . 6 . 3 . 5 and as set out in 6 . 5 . 6 . 4 to 6 . 5 . 6 . 13 . These design type tests shall be carried ou t as required by the competent authority . 6.5.6.2.2 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of IBCs which differ only in minor respects from the tested type, such as with small reductions in external dimensions . 6.5.6.2.3 If detachable pallets are used in the tests, t he test report issued in accordance with 6 . 5 . 6 . 14 shall include a technical description o f the pallets to be used . 6.5.6.3 Preparation of IBC for testing 6.5.6.3.1 Paper and fibreboard IBCs and composite IBC s with fibreboard outer packagings shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a controlled temperature and relative humidity (r . h . ) . There are three options, one of which shall b e chosen . The preferred atmosphere is 23 ° C ± 2 ° C and 50% ± 2% r . h . The two other options are 20 ° C ± 2 ° C and 65% ± 2% r . h . or 27 ° C ± 2 ° C and 65% ± 2% r . h . Note: Average values shall fall within the se limits . Short-term fluctuations and measurem ent limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ± 5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test reproducibility . 6.5.6.3.2 Additional steps shall be taken to ascerta in that the plastics material used in the manufacture of rigid plastics IBCs of types 31H1 and 31H2 and composite IBCs of type 31HZ1 and 31HZ2 complies with the provisions of 6 . 5 . 5 . 3 . 2 to 6 . 5 . 5 . 3 . 4 and 6 . 5 . 5 . 4 . 6 to 6 . 5 . 5 . 4 . 9 . 6.5.6.3.3 This may be done, for example, by submitting s ample IBCs to a preliminary test extending over a long period, for example six months, during which the samples would remain filled with the substances they are intended to contain or with substances which are known to have at least as severe a stress-cracking, weakening or molecular degradation influence on the plastics materials in question, and after which the samples shall be submitted to the applicable tests listed in the table in 6 . 5 . 6 . 3 . 5 . 6.5.6.3.4 Where the behaviour of the plastics materi al has been established by other means, the above compatibility test may be dispensed with . 6.5.6.3.5 Design type tests required in sequential or der: Type of IBC Vibration f Bottom lift Top lift a Stacking b Leak- proofness Hydraulic pressure Drop Tear Topple Righting c Metal: 11A, 11B, 11N 21A, 21B, 21N 31A, 31B, 31N – – 1st 1st a 1st a 2nd a 2nd 2nd 3rd 3rd 3rd 4th – 4th 5th – 5th 6th 4th e 6th e 7th e – – – – – – – – – Flexible d – – x c x – – x x x x Rigid plastics: 11H1, 11H2 21H1, 21H2 31H1, 31H2 – – 1st 1st a 1st a 2nd a 2nd 2nd 3rd 3rd 3rd 4th – 4th 5th – 5th 6th 4th 6th 7th – – – – – – – – – Composite: 11HZ1, 11HZ2 21HZ1, 21HZ2 31HZ1, 31HZ2 – – 1st 1st a 1st a 2nd a 2nd 2nd 3rd 3rd 3rd 4th – 4th 5th – 5th 6th 4th e 6th e 7th e – – – – – – – – – Fibreboard – 1st – 2nd – – 3rd – – – Wooden – 1st – 2nd – – 3rd – – – a When IBCs are designed for this method of handling . b When IBCs are designed to be stacked . c When IBCs are designed to be lifted from the top or the side . d Required test indicated by “x”; an IBC which has passed one test may be used for other tests, in any order . e Another IBC of the same design may be used for the drop test . f Another IBC of the same design may be used for the vibration test . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 396

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 386 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.6.4 Bottom lift test 6.5.6.4.1 Applicability For all fibreboard and wooden IBCs and for all types of IBCs which are fitted with means for lifting from the base, as a design type test . 6.5.6.4.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The IBC shall be filled . A load shall be added and evenly distribute d . The mass of filled IBC and the load shall be 1 . 25 times its maximum permissible gross mas s . 6.5.6.4.3 Method of testing The IBC shall be raised and lowered twice by a forklift truck with the forks centrally positioned so that the space between them is three quarters of the length of the side of entry (unless the points of entry are fixed) . The forks shall penetrate to three quarte rs of the depth in the direction of entry . The test shall be repeated from each possib le direction of entry . 6.5.6.4.4 Criteria for passing the test No permanent deformation which renders the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for transport and no loss of contents . 6.5.6.5 Top lift test 6.5.6.5.1 Applicability For all types of IBCs which are designed to be lifted from the top, and for flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from the top or the side, as a design type test . 6.5.6.5.2 Preparation of the IBC for test Metal, rigid plastics and composite IBCs shall be filled . A load shall be added and evenly distribute d . The mass of filled IBC and the load sha ll be twice the maximum permissible gross mass . Flexible IBCs shall be filled with a rep resentative material and then shall be loaded to six times their maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed . 6.5.6.5.3 Method of testing Metal and flexible IBCs shall be lifted in the manner for which they are designed until clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes . Rigid plastics and composite IBCs shall be l ifted: .1 by each pair of diagonally opposite liftin g devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied vertically, for a period of five minutes; and .2 by each pair of diagonally opposite liftin g devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied towards the centre at 45 ° to the vertical, for a period of five minutes . 6.5.6.5.4 Other methods of top-lift testing and prep aration at least equally effective may be used for flexible IBCs . 6.5.6.5.5 Criteria for passing the test .1 Metal, rigid plastics and composite IBCs: the IBC remains safe for normal conditions of transport, there is no observable permanent deformatio n of the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, and no loss of contents . .2 Flexible IBCs: no damage to the IBC or its lifti ng devices which renders the IBC unsafe for transport or handling and no loss of contents . 6.5.6.6 Stacking test 6.5.6.6.1 Applicability For all types of IBCs which are designed to be stacked on each other, as a design type test . 6.5.6.6.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The IBC shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass . If the specific gravity of the product being u sed for testing makes this impracticable, the IBC shall additionally be loaded so that it is tested at its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 397

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 387 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.6.6.3 Method of testing .1 The IBC shall be placed on its base on level hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed test load (see 6 . 5 . 6 . 6 . 4) . IBCs shall be subjected to the test load for a pe riod of at least: – 5 minutes, for metal IBCs; – 28 days at 40 ° C, for rigid plastics IBCs of types 11 H2, 21H2 and 31H2 and for composite IBCs with outer packagings of plastics material which bear the stacking load (i . e . types 11HH1, 11HH2, 21HH1, 21HH2, 31HH1 a nd 31HH2); – 24 hours, for all other types of IBCs . .2 The load shall be applied by one of the following methods: – one or more IBCs of the same type, filled to the maxi mum permissible gross mass, stacked on the test IBC; – appropriate mass loaded on to either a flat pla te or a reproduction of the base of the IBC, which is stacked on the test IBC . 6.5.6.6.4 Calculation of superimposed test load The load to be placed on the IBC shall be 1 . 8 times the combined maximum permissible g ross mass of the number of similar IBCs that may be stacked on top of the IBC during transport . 6.5.6.6.5 Criteria for passing the test .1 All types of IBCs other than flexible IBCs: no permanent deformation which renders the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for transport a nd no loss of contents . .2 Flexible IBCs: no deterioration of the bod y which renders the IBC unsafe for transport and no loss of contents . 6.5.6.7 Leakproofness test 6.5.6.7.1 Applicability For those types of IBCs used for liquids, or for solids filled or discharged under pressure, as a design type test and a periodic test . 6.5.6.7.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment . Vented closures shall either be replace d by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed . 6.5.6.7.3 Method of testing and pressure to be applied The test shall be carried out for a period of at least 10 minutes, using air at a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0 . 2 bar) . The airtightness of the IBC shall be determ ined by a suitable method such as air-pressure differential test or by immersing the IBC in water, or for metal IBCs, by coating the seams and joints with a soap solution . In the latter case, a correction factor sha ll be applied for the hydrostatic pressure . 6.5.6.7.4 Criterion for passing the test No leakage of air . 6.5.6.8 Hydraulic pressure test 6.5.6.8.1 Applicability For those types of IBCs used for liquids or for solids filled or discharged under pressure, as a design type test . 6.5.6.8.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment . Pressure relief devices shall be remove d and their apertures plugged, or shall be rendered inoperative . 6.5.6.8.3 Method of testing The test shall be carried out for a period of at least ten minutes, applying a hydraulic pressure of not less than that indicated in 6 . 5 . 6 . 8 . 4 . The IBC shall not be mechanically restrai ned during the test . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 398

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 388 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.6.8.4 Pressures to be applied 6.5.6.8.4.1 Metal IBCs: .1 For IBCs of types 21A, 21B and 21N, for packing gr oup I solids, a 250 kPa (2 . 5 bar) gauge pressure; .2 For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, f or packing groups II or III substances, a 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure; .3 In addition, for IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, a 6 5 kPa (0 . 65 bar) gauge pressure . This test shall be performed before the 200 k Pa (2 bar) test . 6.5.6.8.4.2 Rigid plastics and composite IBCs: .1 For IBCs of types 21H1, 21H2, 21HZ1 and 21HZ2: 7 5 kPa (0 . 75 bar) gauge; .2 For IBCs of types 31H1, 31H2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2: w hichever is the greater of two values, the first as determined by one of the following methods: – the total gauge pressure measured in the IBC ( i . e . the vapour pressure of the filling substan ce and the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55 ° C multiplied by a safety factor of 1 . 5; this total gauge pressure shall be determ ined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4 . 1 . 1 . 4 and a filling temperature of 15 ° C; or – 1 . 75 times the vapour pressure at 50 ° C of the substa nce to be transported minus 100 kPa, but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; or – 1 . 5 times the vapour pressure at 55 ° C of the substan ce to be transported minus 100 kPa, but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; and the second as determined by the following method: – twice the static pressure of the substan ce to be transported, with a minimum of twice the static pressure of water . 6.5.6.8.5 Criteria for passing the test(s) .1 For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, when subjected to the test pressure specified in 6 . 5 . 6 . 8 . 4 . 1 . 1 or . 2: no leakage; .2 For IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, when subject ed to the test pressure specified in 6 . 5 . 6 . 8 . 4 . 1 . 3: neither permanent deformation which w ould render the IBC unsafe for transport nor leakage; and .3 For rigid plastics and composite IBCs: no pe rmanent deformation which would render the IBC unsafe for transport and no leakage . 6.5.6.9 Drop test 6.5.6.9.1 Applicability For all types of IBCs, as a design type test . 6.5.6.9.2 Preparation of the IBC for test .1 Metal IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity for solids or 98% of its maximum capacity for liquids . Pressure relief devices shall be render ed inoperative or shall be removed and their apertures sealed . .2 Flexible IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to the max imum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed . .3 Rigid plastics and composite IBCs: the IBC s hall be filled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity for solids or 98% of its maximum capacity for liquids . Arrangements provided for pressure re lief may be removed and sealed or rendered inoperative . Testing of IBCs shall be carried out when the t emperature of the test sample and its contents has been reduced to - 18 ° C or lower . Where test samples of composite IBCs are pr epared in this way, the conditioning specified in 6 . 5 . 6 . 3 . 1 may be waived . Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid stat e, if necessary by the addition of anti-freeze . This conditioning may be disregarded if t he materials in question are of sufficient ductility and tensile strength at low temperatures . .4 Fibreboard and wooden IBCs: the IBC shall be fi lled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity . 6.5.6.9.3 Method of testing The IBC shall be dropped on its base onto a non-resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in conformity with the requirements of 6 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 4, in such a manner as to ensure that the point of imp act is that part of the base of the IBC considered to be the most vulnerable . IBCs of 0 . 45 m 3 or less capacity shall also be dropped: .1 Metal IBCs: on the most vulnerable part othe r than the part of the base of the IBC tested in the first drop; .2 Flexible IBCs: on the most vulnerable side ; Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 399

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 389 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 .3 Rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard and wooden IBCs: flat on a side, flat on the top and on a corner . The same IBC or a different IBC of the same design m ay be used for each drop . 6.5.6.9.4 Drop height For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid or liquid to be transported or with another substance having essentially the same physical characteristics: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1 . 8 m 1 . 2 m 0 . 8 m For liquids, if the test is performed with water: (a) where the substances to be transported hav e a relative density not exceeding 1 . 2: Packing group II Packing group III 1 . 2 m 0 . 8 m (b) where the substances to be transported have a relative density exceeding 1 . 2, the drop heights shall be calculated on the b asis of the relative density ( d ) of the substance to be transported rounded up to the first decimal as follows: Packing group II Packing group III d × 1 . 0 m d × 0 . 67 m 6.5.6.9.5 Criteria for passing the test(s) .1 Metal IBCs: no loss of contents . .2 Flexible IBCs: no loss of contents . A slight discharge, such as from c losures or stitch holes, upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs after the IBC has been raised clear of the ground . .3 Rigid plastics, composite, fibrebo ard and wooden IBCs: no loss of contents . A slight discharge from a closure up on impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs . .4 All IBCs: no damage which renders the IBC unsa fe to be transported for salvage or for disposal, and no loss of contents . In addition, the IBC shall be capable of bein g lifted by an appropriate means until clear of the floor for five minutes . Note: The criterion in 6 . 5 . 6 . 9 . 5 . 4 applies to design types for IBCs manufactu red as from 1 January 2011 . 6.5.6.10 Tear test 6.5.6.10.1 Applicability For all types of flexible IBCs, as a design type test . 6.5.6.10.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed . 6.5.6.10.3 Method of testing Once the IBC is placed on the ground, a 100 mm knife score, completely penetrating the wall of a wide face, is made at a 45 ° angle to the principal axis of the IBC, halfway between the bottom surface and the top level of the contents . The IBC shall then be subjected to a uniforml y distributed superimposed load equivalent to twice the maximum permissible gross mass . The load shall be applied for at least five minu tes . An IBC which is designed to be lifted from the to p or the side shall then, after removal of the superimposed load, be lifted until it is clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes . 6.5.6.10.4 Criterion for passing the test The cut shall not propagate more than 25% of its original length . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 400

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 390 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.5.6.11 Topple test 6.5.6.11.1 Applicability For all types of flexible IBCs, as a design type test . 6.5.6.11.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed . 6.5.6.11.3 Method of testing The IBC shall be caused to topple onto any part of its top onto a rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat and horizontal surface . 6.5.6.11.4 Topple height Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1 . 8 m 1 . 2 m 0 . 8 m 6.5.6.11.5 Criterion for passing the test No loss of contents . A slight discharge, such as from closures o r stitch holes, upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs . 6.5.6.12 Righting test 6.5.6.12.1 Applicability For all flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from the top or side, as a design type test . 6.5.6.12.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and its maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed . 6.5.6.12.3 Method of testing The IBC, lying on its side, shall be lifted at a speed of 0 . 1 m/s to an upright position, clear o f the floor, by one lifting device or by two lifting devices when four are provided . 6.5.6.12.4 Criterion for passing the test No damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC unsafe for transport or handling . 6.5.6.13 Vibration test 6.5.6.13.1 Applicability For all IBCs used for liquids, as a design type test . Note: This test applies to design types for IB Cs manufactured as from 1 January 2011 . 6.5.6.13.2 Preparation of the IBC for test A sample IBC shall be selected at random and shall be fitted and closed as for transport . The IBC shall be filled with water to not less tha n 98% of its maximum capacity . 6.5.6.13.3 Test method and duration 6.5.6.13.3.1 The IBC shall be placed in the centre of the test machine platform with a vertical sinusoidal, double amplitude (peak-to-peak displacement) of 25 mm ± 5% . If necessary, restraining devices sha ll be attached to the platform to prevent the specimen from moving horizontally off the platform without restricting vertical movement . 6.5.6.13.3.2 The test shall be conducted for one hour at a freq uency that causes part of the base of the IBC to be momentarily raised from the vibrating platform for part of each cycle to such a degree that a metal shim can be completely inserted intermittently at, at least, one point between the base of the IBC and the test platform . The frequency may need to be adjusted after t he initial set point to prevent the packaging from going into Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 401

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 391 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 resonance . Nevertheless, the test frequency shal l continue to allow placement of the metal shim under the IBC as described in this paragraph . The continuing ability to insert th e metal shim is essential to passing the test . The metal shim used for this test s hall be at least 1 . 6 mm thick, 50 mm wide, and be of sufficie nt length to be inserted between the IBC and the test platform a minimum of 100 mm to perform the test . 6.5.6.13.4 Criteria for passing the test No leakage or rupture shall be observed . In addition, no breakage or failure of stru ctural components, such as broken welds or failed fastenings, shall be observed . 6.5.6.14 Test report 6.5.6.14.1 A test report containing at least the follow ing particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the IBC: .1 name and address of the test facility; .2 name and address of applicant (where app ropriate); .3 a unique test report identification; .4 date of the test report; .5 manufacturer of the IBC; .6 description of the IBC design type (such as di mensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc . ), including method of manufacture (such a s blow-moulding), and which may include drawing(s) and/or photograph(s); .7 maximum capacity; .8 characteristics of test contents, such a s viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for solids . For rigid plastics and composite IBCs sub ject to the hydraulic pressure test in 6 . 5 . 6 . 8, the temperature of the water used; .9 test descriptions and results; and .10 signature, with the name and status of the signatory . 6.5.6.14.2 The test report shall contain statements t hat the IBC, prepared as for transport, was tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid . A copy of the test report shall be available to t he competent authority . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 402

6 392 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Chapter 6.6 P rovisions for the construction and testing of large packagings 6.6.1 General 6.6.1.1 The provisions of this chapter do not apply to : – class 2, except articles including aeros ols; – class 6 . 2, except clinical waste of UN 3291; – class 7 packages containing radioactive mate rial . 6.6.1.2 Large packagings shall be manufactured, t ested and remanufactured under a quality-assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each manufactured or remanufactured large packaging meets the provisions of this chapter . Note: ISO 16106:2006, Packaging – Trans port packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001, provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed . 6.6.1.3 The specific requirements for large packa gings in 6 . 6 . 4 are based on large packagings currently us ed . In order to take into account progress in sci ence and technology, there is no objection to the use of large packagings having specifications different from those in 6 . 6 . 4 provided they are equally effective, acc eptable to the competent authority and able successfully to withstand the tests described in 6 . 6 . 5 . Methods of testing other than those presc ribed in this Code are acceptable provided they are equivalent . 6.6.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distrib utors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this chapter . 6.6.2 Code for designating types of large packaging s 6.6.2.1 The code used for large packagings consist s of: (a) two Arabic numerals: “50” for rigid large packag ings; or “51” for flexible large packagings; and (b) capital letters in Latin characters indi cating the nature of the material, such as wood, steel, etc . The capital letters used shall be those sho wn in 6 . 1 . 2 . 6 . 6.6.2.2 The letters “T” or “W” may follow the large pack aging code . The letter “T” signifies a large salvage packaging conforming to the requirements of 6 . 6 . 5 . 1 . 9 . The letter “W” signifies that the large pack aging, although of the same type as indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from those in 6 . 6 . 4 and is considered equivalent in accordance w ith the requirements in 6 . 6 . 1 . 3 . 6.6.3 Marking 6.6.3.1 Primary marking Each large packaging man ufactured and intended for the use according to this Code shall bear marks which are durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible . Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at l east 12 mm high and shall show: (a) The United Nations packaging symbol: This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a ME GC complies with the relevant requirements in c hapter s 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 6 . 3, 6 . 5, 6 . 6, 6 . 7 or 6 . 9 . For metal large packagings on which the mar ks are stamped or embossed, the capital letters “UN” may apply instead of the symbol . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 403

Chapter 6.6 – Construction and testing of large packagings 393 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (b) The code “50” designating a large rigid packaging or “51” for flexible large packagings, followed by the material type in accordance with 6 . 5 . 1 . 4 . 1 . 2 . (c) A capital letter designating the packing g roup(s) for which the design type has been approved: “X” for packing groups I, II and III “Y” for packing groups II and III “Z” for packing group III only . (d) The month and year (last two digits) of manufa cture . (e) The State authorizing the allocation of th e marks, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic . * (f) The name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the large packagings as specified by the competent authority . (g) The stacking test load in kilograms . For large packagings not designed for stacking, the figure “0” shall be shown . (h) The maximum permissible gross mass in kilo grams . The primary mark required above shall be app lied in the sequence of the subparagraphs . Each mark applied in accordance with subp aragraphs (a) to (h) shall be clearly separated, such as by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable . 6.6.3.2 Examples of marking 50A/X/05 01/N/PQRS 2500/1000 For a large steel packaging suitable for stacking; stacking load: 2,500 kg; maximum gross mass: 1,000 kg . 50AT/Y/05/01/B/PQRS 2500/1000 For a large steel salvage packaging suitable for stacking; stacking load: 2,500 kg; maximum gross mass: 1,000 kg . 50H/Y/04 02/D/ABCD 987 0/800 For a large plastics packaging not suitable for stacking; maximum gross mass: 800 kg . 51H/Z/06 01/S/1999 0/500 For a large flexible packaging not suitable for stacking; maximum gross mass: 500 kg . 6.6.3.3 The maximum permitted stacking load appl icable shall be displayed on a symbol as shown in the figures below . The symbol shall be durable and clearly vis ible . Minimum dimension 100 mm Minimum dimension 100 mm … kg max Minimum dimension 100 mm Minimum dimension 100 mm Large packagings capable of being stacked Large packagings NOT capable of being stacked The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm × 100 mm . The letters and numbers indicating the ma ss shall be at least 12 mm high . The area within the printer’s marks indic ated by the dimensional arrows shall be square . Where dimensions are not specified, all fe atures shall be in approximate proportion to those shown . The mass marked above the symbol shall not ex ceed the load imposed during the design type test (see 6 . 6 . 5 . 3 . 3 . 4) divided by 1 . 8 . * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 404

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 394 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Note: The provisions of 6 . 6 . 3 . 3 shall apply to all large packagings manufa ctured, repaired or remanufactured as from 1 January 2015 . The provisions of 6 . 6 . 3 . 3 of the IMDG Code (amendment 36-12) m ay continue to be applied to all large packagings manufactured, repaired or remanufactured between 1 January 2015 and 31 December 2016 . 6.6.3.4 Where a large packaging conforms to one or mor e than one tested large packaging design type, including one or more than one tested packaging or IBC design type, the large packaging may bear more than one mark to indicate the relevant performance test requirements that have been met . Where more than one mark appears on a packagi ng, the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall appear in its entirety . 6.6.4 Specific provisions for large packagings 6.6.4.1 Specific provisions for metal large packagings 50A steel 50B aluminium 50N metal (other than steel or aluminium) 6.6. 4.1.1 The large packaging shall be made of suitable ductile metal in which the weldability has been fully demonstrated . Welds shall be skillfully made and afford c omplete safety . Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate . 6.6.4.1.2 Care shall be taken to avoid damage by galvani c action due to the juxtaposition of dissimilar metals . 6.6.4.2 Specific provisions for flexible material la rge packagings 51H flexible plastics 51M flexible paper 6.6.4.2.1 The large packaging shall be manufacture d from suitable materials . The strength of the material and the constr uction of the flexible large packaging shall be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use . 6.6.4.2.2 All materials used in the construction of fle xible large packagings of types 51M shall, after complete immersion in water for not less than 24 hours, retain at least 85% of the tensile strength as measured originally on the material conditioned to equilibrium at 67% relative humidity or less . 6.6.4.2.3 Seams shall be formed by stitching, heat sea ling, gluing or any equivalent method . All stitched seam-ends shall be secured . 6.6.4.2.4 Flexible large packagings shall provide adequa te resistance to ageing and to degradation caused by ultraviolet radiation or the climatic conditions, or by the substance contained, thereby rendering them appropriate to their intended use . 6.6.4.2.5 For plastics flexible large packagings where p rotection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors . These additives shall be compatible with t he contents and remain effective throughout the life of the large packaging . Where use is made of carbon black, pigment s or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction . 6.6.4.2.6 Additives may be incorporated into the mat erial of the large packaging to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material . 6.6.4.2.7 When filled, the ratio of height to width shall be n ot more than 2:1 . 6.6.4.3 Specific provisions for plastics large packagi ngs 50H rigid plastics 6.6.4.3.1 The large packaging shall be manufactured fr om suitable plastics material of known specifications and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and its intended use . The material shall be adequately resis tant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained or, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation . Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate . Any permeation of the substance contai ned shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport . 6.6.4.3.2 Where protection against ultraviolet r adiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors . These additives shall be compatible wit h the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the outer packaging . Where use is made of carbon black, pigments o r inhibitors ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 405

Chapter 6.6 – Construction and testing of large packagings 395 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction . 6.6.4.3.3 Additives may be incorporated into the mat erial of the large packaging to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material . 6.6.4.4 Specific provisions for fibreboard large p ackagings 50G rigid fibreboard 6.6.4.4.1 Strong and good-quality solid or double- faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used, appropriate to the capacity of the large packagings and to their intended use . The water resistance of the outer surface s hall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m 2 – see ISO 535:1991 . It shall have proper bending qualiti es . Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending . The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shal l be firmly glued to the facings . 6.6.4.4.2 The walls, including top and bottom, shall h ave a minimum puncture resistance of 15 J, measured according to ISO 3036:1975 . 6.6.4.4.3 Manufacturing joins in the outer packaging of large packagings shall be made with an appropriate overlap and shall be taped, glued, stitched with metal staples or fastened by other means at least equally effective . Where joins are effected by gluing or tapin g, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used . Metal staples shall pass completely thr ough all pieces to be fastened and be formed or protected so that any inner liner cannot be abraded or punctured by them . 6.6.4.4.4 Any integral pallet base forming part of a lar ge packaging or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the large packaging filled to its maximum permissible gross mass . 6.6.4.4.5 The pallet or integral base shall be designe d so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the large packaging that might be liable to damage in handling . 6.6.4.4.6 The body shall be secured to any detachable pa llet to ensure stability in handling and transport . Where a detachable pallet is used, its top sur face shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the large packaging . 6.6.4.4.7 Strengthening devices such as timber sup ports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner . 6.6.4.4.8 Where large packagings are intended for st acking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner . 6.6.4.5 Specific provisions for wooden large packagi ngs 50C natural wood 50D plywood 50F reconstituted wood 6.6.4.5.1 The strength of the materials used and the met hod of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the large packagings . 6.6.4.5.2 Natural wood shall be well seasoned, commer cially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the large packaging . Each part of the large packaging shall cons ist of one piece or be equivalent thereto . Parts are considered equivalent to one pi ece when a suitable method of glued assembly is used, as for instance Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint, or butt joint with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint, or when other methods at least equally effective are used . 6.6.4.5.3 Large packagings of plywood shall be at leas t three-ply . They shall be made of well-seasoned rotar y-cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the large packaging . All adjacent plies shall be glued with wa ter-resistant adhesive . Other suitable materials may be used with p lywood for the construction of the large packaging . 6.6.4.5.4 Large packagings of reconstituted wood shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type . 6.6.4.5.5 Large packagings shall be firmly nailed or se cured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 406

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 396 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.6.4.5.6 Any integral pallet base forming part of a lar ge packaging or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the large packaging filled to its maximum permissible gross mass . 6.6.4.5.7 The pallet or integral base shall be designe d so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the large packaging that might be liable to damage in handling . 6.6.4.5.8 The body shall be secured to any detachable pa llet to ensure stability in handling and transport . Where a detachable pallet is used, its top sur face shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the large packaging . 6.6.4.5.9 Strengthening devices such as timber sup ports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner . 6.6.4.5.10 Where large packagings are intended for st acking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner . 6.6.5 Test provisions for large packagings 6.6.5.1 Performance and frequency of test 6.6.5.1.1 The design type of each large packaging shal l be tested as provided in 6 . 6 . 5 . 3 in accordance with procedures establis hed by the competent authority . 6.6.5.1.2 Each large packaging design type shall suc cessfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used . A large packaging design type is defined by t he design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments . It also includes large packagings that diff er from the design type only in their lesser design height . 6.6.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samp les at intervals established by the competent authority . For such tests on fibreboard large packagings , preparation at ambient conditions is considered equivalent to the provisions of 6 . 6 . 5 . 2 . 4 . 6.6.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modi fication which alters the design, material or manner of construction of large packagings . 6.6.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the sel ective testing of large packagings that differ only in minor respects from a tested type, such as smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass, and large packagings which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s) . 6.6.5.1.6 [Reserved] Note: For the conditions for as sembling different inner packagings in a large packaging and permissible variations in inner packagings, see 4 . 1 . 1 . 5 . 1 . 6.6.5.1.7 The competent authority may at any time requ ire proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially produced large packagings meet the provisions of the design type tests . 6.6.5.1.8 Provided the validity of the test results is n ot affected, and with the approval of the competent authority, several tests may be made on one sample . 6.6.5.1.9 Large salvage packagings Large salvage packagings shall be tested and marked in accordance with the provisions applicable to packing group II large packagings intended for the transport of solids or inner packagings, except as follows: (a) The test substance used in performing the te sts shall be water, and the large salvage packagings shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity . It is permissible to use additives, such as b ags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected . Alternatively, in performing the drop t est, the drop height may be varied in accordance with 6 . 6 . 5 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 2(b); (b) Large salvage packagings shall, in addit ion, have been successfully subjected to the leakproofness test at 30 kPa, with the results of this test reflected in the test report required by 6 . 6 . 5 . 4; and (c) Large salvage packagings shall be marked w ith the letter “T” as described in 6 . 6 . 2 . 2 . 6.6.5.2 Preparation for testing 6.6.5.2.1 Tests shall be carried out on large packagin gs prepared as for transport, including the inner packagings or articles used . Inner packagings shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity for liquids or 95% for solids . For large packagings where the inner packagings ar e designed to carry liquids and solids, separate testing is required for both liquid and solid contents . The substances in the inner packagings or Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 407

Chapter 6.6 – Construction and testing of large packagings 397 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 the articles to be transported in the large packagings may be replaced by other material or articles except where this would invalidate the results of the tests . When other inner packagings or artic les are used, they shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, etc . ) as the inner packagings or articles to be carr ied . It is permissible to use additives, such a s bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected . 6.6.5.2.2 In the drop tests for liquids, when a nother substance is used, it shall be of similar relative density and viscosity to those of the substance being transported . Water may also be used for the liquid drop test u nder the conditions in 6 . 6 . 5 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 6.6.5.2.3 Large packagings made of plastics materials and large packagings containing inner packagings of plastic materials – other than bags intended to contain solids or articles – shall be drop tested when the temperature of the test sample and its contents has been reduced to - 18 ° C or lower . This conditioning may be disregarded if t he materials in question are of sufficient ductility and tensile strength at low temperatures . Where test samples are prepared in this way , the conditioning in 6 . 6 . 5 . 2 . 4 may be waived . Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid stat e by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary . 6.6.5.2.4 Large packagings of fibreboard shall be con ditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a controlled temperature and relative humidity (r . h) . There are three options, one of which shall b e chosen . The preferred atmosphere is 23 ° C ± 2 ° C and 50% ± 2% r . h . The two other options are 20 ° C ± 2 ° C and 65% ± 2% r . h . or 27 ° C ± 2 ° C and 65% ± 2% r . h . Note: Average values shall fall within thes e limits . Short-term fluctuation and measureme nt limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ± 5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test reproducibility . 6.6.5.3 Test provisions 6.6.5.3.1 Bottom lift test 6.6.5.3.1.1 Applicability For all types of large packagings which are fitted with means of lifting from the base, as a design type test . 6.6.5.3.1.2 Preparation of large packaging for test The large packaging shall be filled to 1 . 25 times its maximum permissible gross mas s, the load being evenly distributed . 6.6.5.3.1.3 Method of testing The large packaging shall be raised and lowered twice by a lift truck with the forks centrally positioned and spaced at three quarters of the dimension of the side of entry (unless the points of entry are fixed) . The forks shall penetrate to three quarte rs of the depth in the direction of entry . The test shall be repeated from each possib le direction of entry . 6.6.5.3.1.4 Criteria for passing the test No permanent deformation which renders the large packaging unsafe for transport and no loss of contents . 6.6.5.3.2 Top lift test 6.6.5.3.2.1 Applicability For types of large packaging which are intended to be lifted from the top and fitted with means of lifting, as a design type test . 6.6.5.3.2.2 Preparation of large packaging for test The large packaging shall be loaded to twice its maximum permissible gross mass . A flexible large packaging shall be loaded to six ti mes its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed . 6.6.5.3.2.3 Method of testing The large packaging shall be lifted in the manner for which it is designed until clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes . 6.6.5.3.2.4 Criteria for passing the test .1 Metal, rigid plastics and composite large packagings: no permanent deformation which renders the large packaging, including the base pallet, i f any, unsafe for transport and no loss of contents . .2 Flexible large packagings: no damage to the large packaging or its lifting devices which renders the large packaging unsafe for transport or handling and no loss of contents . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 408

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 398 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.6.5.3.3 Stacking test 6.6.5.3.3.1 Applicability For all types of large packaging which are designed to be stacked on each other, as a design type test . 6.6.5.3.3.2 Preparation of large packaging for test The large packaging shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass . 6.6.5.3.3.3 Method of testing The large packaging shall be placed on its base on level hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed test load (see 6 . 6 . 5 . 3 . 3 . 4) for a period of at least five minutes: for large p ackaging of wood, fibreboard and plastics materials for a period of 24 hours . 6.6.5.3.3.4 Calculation of superimposed test load The load to be placed on the large packaging shall be 1 . 8 times the combined maximum permissible g ross mass of the number of similar large packagings that may be stacked on top of the large packaging during transport . 6.6.5.3.3.5 Criteria for passing the test .1 All types of large packagings other than flexible large packagings: no permanent deformation which renders the large packaging, includin g the base pallet, if any, unsafe for transport and no loss of contents . .2 Flexible large packagings: no deteriorat ion of the body which renders the large packaging unsafe for transport and no loss of contents . 6.6.5.3.4 Drop test 6.6.5.3.4.1 Applicability For all types of large packaging, as a design type test . 6.6.5.3.4.2 Preparation of large packaging for testi ng The large packaging shall be filled in accordance with 6 . 6 . 5 . 2 . 1 . 6.6.5.3.4.3 Method of testing The large packaging shall be dropped onto a non-resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in conformity with the requirements of 6 . 1 . 5 . 3 . 4, in such a manner as to ensure that the point of imp act is that part of the base of the large packaging considered to be the most vulnerable . 6.6.5.3.4.4 Drop height Note: Large packagings for substances and articles of class 1 shall be tested at the packing group II performance level . 6.6.5.3.4.4.1 For inner packagings containing solid or l iquid substances or articles, if the test is performed with the solid, liquid or articles to be transported, or with another substance or article having essentially the same characteristics: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1 . 8 m 1 . 2 m 0 . 8 m 6.6.5.3.4.4.2 For inner packagings containing liquid s if the test is performed with water: (a) Where the substances to be transported hav e a relative density not exceeding 1 . 2: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1 . 8 m 1 . 2 m 0 . 8 m (b) Where the substances to be transported have a relative density exceeding 1 . 2, the drop height shall be calculated on the ba sis of the relative density ( d ) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to the first decimal, as follows: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III d × 1 . 5 m d × 1 . 0 m d × 0 . 67 m Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 409

Chapter 6.6 – Construction and testing of large packagings 399 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.6.5.3.4.5 Criteria for passing the test 6.6.5.3.4.5.1 The large packaging shall not exhibit any da mage liable to affect safety during transport . There shall be no leakage of the filling subs tance from inner packaging(s) or article(s) . 6.6.5.3.4.5.2 No rupture is permitted in a large packaging f or articles of class 1 which would permit the spillage of loose explosive substances or articles from the large packaging . 6.6.5.3.4.5.3 Where a large packaging undergoes a drop tes t, the sample passes the test if the entire contents are retained even if the closure is no longer sift-proof . 6.6.5.4 Certification and test report 6.6.5.4.1 In respect of each design type of large packag ing, a certificate and mark (as in 6 . 6 . 3) shall be issued attesting that the design t ype, including its equipment, meets the test provisions . 6.6.5.4.2 A test report containing at least the follow ing particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the large packaging: .1 name and address of the test facility; .2 name and address of applicant (where app ropriate); .3 a unique test report identification; .4 date of the test report; .5 manufacturer of the large packaging; .6 description of the large packaging design type (such as dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc . ) and/or photograph(s); .7 maximum capacity/maximum permissible gro ss mass; .8 characteristics of test contents, such a s types and descriptions of inner packaging or articles used; .9 test descriptions and results; .10 the test report shall be signed with the name an d status of the signatory . 6.6.5.4.3 The test report shall contain statements t hat the large packaging prepared as for transport was tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid . A copy of the test report shall be available to t he competent authority . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 410

6 400 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Chapter 6.7 P rovisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks and multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) Note: The provisions of this chapter also apply to r oad tank vehicles to the extent indicated in chapter 6 . 8 . 6.7.1 Application and general provisions 6.7.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to port able tanks intended for the transport of dangerous goods, and to MEGCs intended for the transport of non-refrigerated gases of class 2, by all modes of transport . In addition to the provisions of this chapt er, unless otherwise specified, the applicable provisions of the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended, shall be fulfilled by any multimodal portable tank or MEGC which meets the definition of a “container” within the terms of that Convention . Additional provisions may apply to offs hore portable tanks that are handled in open seas . 6.7.1.1.1 The International Convention for Safe Co ntainers, 1972 (CSC Convention) does not apply to offshore tank- containers that are handled in open seas . The design and testing of offshore tank-c ontainers shall take into account the dynamic lifting and impact forces that may occur when a tank is handled in open seas in adverse weather and sea conditions . The provisions for such tanks shall be dete rmined by the approving competent authority (see also Guidelines for the approval of offshore containers handled in open seas (MSC/Circ . 860)) . 6.7.1.2 In recognition of scientific and technolo gical advances, the technical provisions of this chapter may be varied by alternative arrangements . These alternative arrangements shal l offer a level of safety not less than that given by the provisions of this chapter with respect to the compatibility with substances transported and the ability of the portable tank to withstand impact, loading and fire conditions . For international transport, altern ative arrangement portable tanks or MEGCs shall be approved by the applicable competent authorities . 6.7.1.3 When a substance is not assigned a portable ta nk instruction (T1 to T75) in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3 . 2, interim approval for transport may be iss ued by the competent authority of the country of origin . The approval shall be included in the docum entation of the consignment and contain, as a minimum, the information normally provided in the portable tank instructions and the conditions under which the substance shall be transported . Appropriate measures shall be initiat ed by the competent authority to include the assignment in the Dangerous Goods List . 6.7.2 Provisions for the design, construction, in spection and testing of portable tanks intended for the transport of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9 6.7.2.1 Definitions For the purposes of this section: Design pressure means the pressure to be used in calculations required by a recognized pressure-vessel code . The design pressure shall be not less than th e highest of the following pressures: .1 the maximum effective gauge pressure all owed in the shell during filling or discharge; or .2 the sum of: .1 the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the s ubstance at 65 ° C (or at the highest temperature during filling, discharge or transport for substances which are filled, discharged or transported over 65 ° C), minus 1 bar; .2 the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other ga ses in the ullage space, being determined by a maximum ullage temperature of 65 ° C and a liquid expansion due to an increase in mean bulk temperature of t r – t f (t f = filling temperature, usually 15°C; t r = 50 ° C, maximum mean bulk temperature); and .3 a head pressure determined on the basis of the s tatic forces specified in 6 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 12, but not less than 0 . 35 bar; or .3 two thirds of the minimum test pressure sp ecified in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6; Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 411

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 401 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Design temperature range for the shell shall be - 40 ° C to 50 ° C for substances transported under ambient conditions . For the other substances filled, discharg ed or transported above 50 ° C, the design temperature shall not be less than the maximum temperature of the substance during filling, discharge or transport . More severe design temperatures shall b e considered for portable tanks subjected to severe climatic conditions; Fine grain steel means steel which has a ferritic grain size of 6 or finer when determined in accordance with ASTM E 112-96 or as defined in EN 10028-3, Part 3; Fusible element means a non-reclosable pressure relief device that is thermally actuated; Leakproofness test means a test using gas, subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective internal pressure of not less than 25% of the MAWP; Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures measured at the top of the shell while in operating position: .1 the maximum effective gauge pressure all owed in the shell during filling or discharge; or .2 the maximum effective gauge pressure to wh ich the shell is designed, which shall be not less than the sum of: .1 the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the s ubstance at 65 ° C (or at the highest temperature during filling, discharge or transport for substances which are filled, discharged or transported over 65 ° C) minus 1 bar; and .2 the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other ga ses in the ullage space, being determined by a maximum ullage temperature of 65 ° C and a liquid expansion due to an increase in mean bulk temperature of t r – t f (t f = filling temperature, usually 15°C; t r = 50 ° C, maximum mean bulk temperature); Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the heaviest load authorized for transport; Mild steel means a steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 360 N/mm 2 to 440 N/mm 2 and a guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 3 . 3; Offshore portable tank means a portable ta nk specially designed for repeated use for transport of dangerous goods to, from and between offshore facilities . An offshore portable tank is designed and c onstructed in accordance with the Guidelines for the approval of offshore containers handled in open seas (MSC/Circ . 860) . Portable tank means a multimodal tank used for the transport of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9 . The portable tank includes a shell fitted wi th service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of dangerous substances . The portable tank shall be capable of bei ng filled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment . It shall possess stabilizing members ex ternal to the shell, and shall be capable of being lifted when full . It shall be designed primarily to be loaded o nto a vehicle or ship and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling . Road tank-vehicles, rail tank-wagon s, non-metallic tanks and intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) are not considered to fall within the definition for portable tanks; Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm 2 and an elongation at fracture of 27%; Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety, heating, cooling and insulating devices; Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the substance intended for transport (tank proper), including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural equipment; Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the shell; Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the hydraulic pressure test, equal to not less than 1 . 5 times the design pressure . The minimum test pressure for portable ta nks intended for specific substances is specified in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 . 6.7.2.2 General design and construction pro visions 6.7.2.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed i n accordance with the provisions of a pressure-vessel code recognized by the competent authority . Shells shall be made of metallic material s suitable for forming . The materials shall, in principle, con form to national or international material standards . For welded shells, only a material whose w eldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used . Welds shall be skillfully made and afford c omplete safety . When the manufacturing process or the mat erials make it necessary, the shells shall be suitably heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat-affected zones . In choosing the material, the design tem perature range shall be taken into account with respect to risk of Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 412

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 402 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 brittle fracture, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact . When fine grain-steel is used, the guarant eed value of the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm 2 and the guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm 2 according to the material specification . Aluminium may only be used as a construction m aterial when indicated in a portable tank special provision assigned to a specific substance in the Dangerous Goods List or when approved by the competent authority . When aluminium is authorized, it shall be in sulated to prevent significant loss of physical properties when subjected to a heat load of 110 kW/m 2 for a period of not less than 30 minutes . The insulation shall remain effective a t all temperatures less than 649 ° C and shall be jacketed with a material with a melting point of not less than 700 ° C . Portable tank materials shall be suitab le for the external environment in which they may be transported . 6.7.2.2.2 Portable tank shells, fittings, and pipew ork shall be constructed from materials which are: .1 substantially immune to attack by the subs tance(s) intended to be transported; or .2 properly passivated or neutralized by ch emical reaction; or .3 lined with corrosion-resistant mater ial directly bonded to the shell or attached by equivalent means . 6.7.2.2.3 Gaskets shall be made of materials not subje ct to attack by the substance(s) intended to be transported . 6.7.2.2.4 When shells are lined, the lining shall be subs tantially immune to attack by the substance(s) intended to be transported, homogeneous, non-porous, free from perforations, sufficiently elastic and compatible with the thermal expansion characteristics of the shell . The lining of every shell, shell fittings an d piping shall be continuous, and shall extend around the face of any flange . Where external fittings are welded to the ta nk, the lining shall be continuous through the fitting and around the face of external flanges . 6.7.2.2.5 Joints and seams in the lining shall be made by fu sing the material together or by other equally effective means . 6.7.2.2.6 Contact between dissimilar metals whic h could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided . 6.7.2.2.7 The materials of the portable tank, includ ing any devices, gaskets, linings and accessories, shall not adversely affect the substance(s) intended to be transported in the portable tank . 6.7.2.2.8 Portable tanks shall be designed and const ructed with supports to provide a secure base during transport and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments . 6.7.2.2.9 Portable tanks shall be designed to withst and, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the contents and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and transport . The design shall demonstrate that the effe cts of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account . 6.7.2.2.9.1 For portable tanks that are intended for use a s offshore tank-containers, the dynamic stresses imposed by handling in open seas shall be taken into account . 6.7.2.2.10 A shell which is to be equipped with a vacuum-re lief device shall be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation, an external pressure of not less than 0 . 21 bar above the internal pressure . The vacuum-relief device shall be set to re lieve at a vacuum setting not greater than - 0 . 21 bar unless the shell is designed for a higher external overpressure, in whic h case the vacuum-relief pressure of the device to be fitted shall be not greater than the tank design vacuum pressure . A shell used for the transport of solid subst ances of packing groups II or III only which do not liquefy during transport may be designed for a lower external pressure, subject to competent authority’s approval . In this case, the vacuum-relief device sh all be set to relieve at this lower pressure . A shell that is not to be fitted with a vacuum-rel ief device shall be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation, an external pressure of not less than 0 . 4 bar above the internal pressure . 6.7.2.2.11 Vacuum-relief devices used on port able tanks intended for the transport of substances meeting the flashpoint criteria of class 3, including elevated-temperature substances transported at or above their flashpoint, shall prevent the immediate passage of flame into the shell, or the portable tank shall have a shell capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal explosion resulting from the passage of flame into the shell . 6.7.2.2.12 Portable tanks and their fastenings shal l, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of absorbing the following separately applied static forces: .1 in the direction of travel: twice the MPGM mul tiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * .2 horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly determined, the forces shall be eq ual to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * .3 vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * and * For calculation purposes, g = 9 . 81 m/s 2 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 413

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 403 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 .4 vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ) . * 6.7.2.2.13 Under each of the forces in 6 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 12, the safety factor to be observed shall be as f ollows: .1 for metals having a clearly defined y ield point, a safety factor of 1 . 5 in relation to the guaranteed yiel d strength; or .2 for metals with no clearly defined yield p oint, a safety factor of 1 . 5 in relation to the guaranteed 0 . 2% proof strength and, for austenitic steel s, the 1% proof strength . 6.7.2.2.14 The value of yield strength or proof strengt h shall be the value according to national or international material standards . When austenitic steels are used, the speci fied minimum values of yield strength or proof strength according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate . When no material standard exists for the me tal in question, the value of yield strength or proof strength used shall be approved by the competent authority . 6.7.2.2.15 Portable tanks shall be capable of being ele ctrically earthed when intended for the transport of substances meeting the flashpoint criteria of class 3, including elevated-temperature substances transported above their flashpoint . Measures shall be taken to prevent danger ous electrostatic discharge . 6.7.2.2.16 When required for certain substances by th e applicable portable tank instruction indicated in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List, or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List, portable tanks shall be provided with additional protection, which may take the form of additional shell thickness or a higher test pressure, the additional shell thickness or higher test pressure being determined in the light of the inherent risks associated with the transport of the substances concerned . 6.7.2.2.17 Thermal insulation directly in conta ct with the shell intended for substances transported at elevated temperature shall have an ignition temperature at least 50 ° C higher than the maximum design temperature of the tank . 6.7.2.3 Design criteria 6.7.2.3.1 Shells shall be of a design capable of being str ess-analysed mathematically or experimentally by resistance strain gauges, or by other methods approved by the competent authority . 6.7.2.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed t o withstand a hydraulic test pressure not less than 1 . 5 times the design pressure . Specific provisions are laid down for cert ain substances in the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 or by a portable tank special provisio n indicated in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4 . 2 . 5 . 3 . The minimum shell thickness shall not be le ss than that specified for these tanks in 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 1 to 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 10 . 6.7.2.3.3 For metals exhibiting a clearly defined yie ld point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength (0 . 2% proof strength, generally, or 1% proof st rength for austenitic steels), the primary membrane stress σ (sigma) in the shell shall not exceed 0 . 75 R e or 0 . 50 R m , whichever is lower, at the test pressure, where: R e = yield strength in N/mm 2 , or 0 . 2% proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1% proof strength; R m = minimum tensile strength in N/mm 2 . 6.7.2.3.3.1 The values of R e and R m to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or international material standards . When austenitic steels are used, t he specified minimum values for R e and R m according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate . When no material standard exists for the me tal in question, the values of R e and R m used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body . 6.7.2.3.3.2 Steels which have a R e /R m ratio of more than 0 . 85 are not allowed for the construct ion of welded shells . The values of R e and R m to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material inspection certificate . 6.7.2.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells sh all have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/ R m with an absolute minimum of 16% for fine-grain steels and 20% for other steels . Aluminium and aluminium alloys used in th e construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/6 R m with an absolute minimum of 12% . 6.7.2.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actu al values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling . The permanent elongation at fracture sh all be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross-section in accordance with ISO 6892:1998 using a 50 mm gauge length . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 414

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 404 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.2.4 Minimum shell thickness 6.7.2.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the gre ater thickness based on: .1 the minimum thickness determined in acco rdance with the provisions of 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 to 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 10; .2 the minimum thickness determined in acco rdance with the recognized pressure-vessel code, including the provisions in 6 . 7 . 2 . 3; and .3 the minimum thickness specified in the appl icable portable tank instruction indicated in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List, or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 14 . 6.7.2.4.2 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) a nd manhole covers of shells not more than 1 . 80 m in diameter shall be not less than 5 mm th ick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used . Shells more than 1 . 80 m in diameter shall be not less than 6 mm thick in th e reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used, except that for powdered or granular solid substances of packing group II or III the minimum thickness requirement may be reduced to not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used . 6.7.2.4.3 When additional protection against shell damage is provided, portable tanks with test pressures less than 2 . 65 bar may have the minimum shell thickness r educed, in proportion to the protection provided, as approved by the competent authority . However, shells not more than 1 . 80 m in diameter shall be not less than 3 mm thick in th e reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used . Shells more than 1 . 80 m in diameter shall be not less than 4 mm thick in th e reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used . 6.7.2.4.4 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) a nd manhole covers of all shells shall be not less than 3 mm thick regardless of the material of construction . 6.7.2.4.5 The additional protection referred to in 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 3 may be provided by overall external struct ural protection, such as suitable “sandwich” construction with the outer sheathing (jacket) secured to the shell, double-wall construction or by enclosing the shell in a complete framework with longitudinal and transverse structural members . 6.7.2.4.6 The equivalent thickness of a metal other th an the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 3 shall be determined using the following eq uation: e 1 = 21 . 4 × e 0 ________ 3 √ _________ R m1 × A 1 where: e 1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be used; e 0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in the applicable portable tank instruction or by a portable tank s pecial provision indicated in column 13 or 14 of the Dangerous Goods List; R m 1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm 2 ) of the metal to be used (see 6 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 3); A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to national or international standards . 6.7.2.4.7 When, in the applicable portable tank inst ruction in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6, a minimum thickness of 8 mm, 10 mm or 12 mm is specifi ed, it shall be noted that these thicknesses are based on the properties of the reference steel and a shell diameter of 1 . 80 m . When a metal other than mild steel (see 6 . 7 . 2 . 1) is used or the shell has a diameter of more than 1 . 80 m, the thickness shall be determined usin g the following equation: e 1 = 21 . 4 × e 0 d 1 __________ 1 . 8 3 √ _________ R m1 × A 1 where: e 1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be used; e 0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in the applicable portable tank instruction or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 13 or 14 of the Dangerous Goods List; d 1 = diameter of the shell (in m), but not less than 1 . 80 m; R m 1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm 2 ) of the metal to be used (see 6 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 3); A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to national or international standards . 6.7.2.4.8 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than that prescribed in 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2, 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 3 and 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 4 . All parts of the shell shall have a minimum t hickness as determined by 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 2 to 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 4 . This thickness shall be exclusive of any co rrosion allowance . 6.7.2.4.9 When mild steel is used (see 6 . 7 . 2 . 1), calculation using the equation in 6 . 7 . 2 . 4 . 6 is not required . 6.7.2.4.10 There shall be no sudden change of plate thick ness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the cylindrical portion of the shell . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 415

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 405 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.2.5 Service equipment 6.7.2.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as t o be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or damaged during handling and transport . When the connection between the frame and t he shell allows relative movement between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without risk of damage to working parts . The external discharge fittings (pipe so ckets, shut-off devices), the internal stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by external forces (for example, by using shear sections) . The filling and discharge devices (inclu ding flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening . 6.7.2.5.1.1 For offshore tank-containers, where positioning of service equipment and the design and strength of protection for such equipment is concerned, the increased danger of impact damage when handling such tanks in open seas shall be taken into account . 6.7.2.5.2 All openings in the shell, intended for fi lling or discharging the portable tank, shall be fitted with a manually operated stop-valve located as close to the shell as reasonably practicable . Other openings, except for openings lea ding to venting or pressure relief devices, shall be equipped with either a stop-valve or another suitable means of closure located as close to the shell as reasonably practicable . 6.7.2.5.3 All portable tanks shall be fitted with a manho le or other inspection openings of a suitable size to allow for internal inspection and adequate access for maintenance and repair of the interior . Compartmented portable tanks shal l have a manhole or other inspection openings for each compartment . 6.7.2.5.4 As far as reasonably practicable, extern al fittings shall be grouped together . For insulated portable tanks, top fittin gs shall be surrounded by a spill-collection reservoir with suitable drains . 6.7.2.5.5 Each connection to a portable tank shall be cl early marked to indicate its function . 6.7.2.5.6 Each stop-valve or other means of closure sh all be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less than the MAWP of the shell, taking into account the temperatures expected during transport . All stop-valves with screwed spindles s hall close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel . For other stop-valves, the position (op en and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated . All stop-valves shall be designed to preve nt unintentional opening . 6.7.2.5.7 No moving parts, such as covers, compo nents of closures, etc . , shall be made of unprotected corrodib le steel when they are liable to come into frictional or percussive contact with aluminium portable tanks intended for the transport of substances meeting the flashpoint criteria of class 3, including elevated-temperature substances transported above their flashpoint . 6.7.2.5.8 Piping shall be designed, construct ed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration . All piping shall be of a suitable metallic ma terial . Welded pipe joints shall be used wherever p ossible . 6.7.2.5.9 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or hav e an equally strong metal union . The melting point of brazing materials sh all be no lower than 525 ° C . The joints shall not decrease the strengt h of the tubing, as may happen when cutting threads . 6.7.2.5.10 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fitti ngs shall be not less than the highest of four times the MAWP of the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a pump or other device (except pressure relief devices) . 6.7.2.5.11 Ductile metals shall be used in the construc tion of valves and accessories . 6.7.2.5.12 The heating system shall be designed or cont rolled so that a substance cannot reach a temperature at which the pressure in the tank exceeds its MAWP or causes other hazards (e . g . dangerous thermal decomposition) . 6.7.2.5.13 The heating system shall be designed or cont rolled so that power for internal heating elements is not available unless the heating elements are completely submerged . The temperature at the surface of the heati ng elements for internal heating equipment or the temperature at the shell for external heating equipment shall, in no case, exceed 80% of the auto-ignition temperature (in ° C ) of the substances carried . 6.7.2.5.14 If an electrical heating system is install ed inside the tank, it shall be equipped with an earth leakage circuit breaker with a releasing current of less than 100 mA . 6.7.2.5.15 Electrical switch cabinets mounted to ta nks shall not have a direct connection to the tank interior and shall provide protection of at least the equivalent of IP 56 according to IEC 144 or IEC 529 . 6.7.2.6 Bottom openings 6.7.2.6.1 Certain substances shall not be transpor ted in portable tanks with bottom openings . When the applicable portable tank instr uction identified in the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 indicates that bottom openings are prohi bited, there shall be no openings below the liquid level of the shell when it is filled Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 416

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 406 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 to its maximum permissible filling limit . When an existing opening is closed, it shal l be accomplished by internally and externally welding one plate to the shell . 6.7.2.6.2 Bottom discharge outlets for portable ta nks carrying certain solid, crystallizable or highly viscous substances shall be equipped with not less than two serially fitted and mutually independent shut-off devices . The design of the equipment shall be to the sat isfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body and shall include: .1 an external stop-valve, fitted as close to th e shell as reasonably practicable, and so designed as to prevent any unintended opening through impact or other inadvertent act; and .2 a liquid-tight closure at the end of the disch arge pipe, which may be a bolted blank flange or a screw cap . 6.7.2.6.3 Every bottom discharge outlet, exc ept as provided in 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 2, shall be equipped with three seri ally fitted and mutually independent shut-off devices . The design of the equipment shall be to the sat isfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body and include: .1 a self-closing internal stop-valve, th at is a stop-valve within the shell or within a welded flange or its companion flange, such that: .1 the control devices for the operation of the v alve are designed so as to prevent any unintended opening through impact or other inadvertent act; .2 the valve may be operable from above or below; . 3 if possible, the setting of the valve (open or c losed) shall be capable of being verified from the ground; .4 except for portable tanks having a capacit y of not more than 1000 L, it shall be possible to close the valve from an accessible position of the portable tank that is remote from the valve itself; and .5 the valve shall continue to be effective in th e event of damage to the external device for controlling the operation of the valve; .2 an external stop-valve fitted as close to the s hell as reasonably practicable; and .3 a liquid-tight closure at the end of the disch arge pipe, which may be a bolted blank flange or a screw cap . 6.7.2.6.4 For a lined shell, the internal stop-valve r equired by 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 . 1 may be replaced by an additional external st op-valve . The manufacturer shall satisfy the prov isions of the competent authority or its authorized body . 6.7.2.7 Safety relief devices 6.7.2.7.1 All portable tanks shall be fitted with at leas t one pressure relief device . All relief devices shall be designed, cons tructed and marked to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body . 6.7.2.8 Pressure relief devices 6.7.2.8.1 Every portable tank with a capacity not less than 1900 L and every independent compartment of a portable tank with a similar capacity shall be provided with one or more pressure relief devices of the spring-loaded type and may in addition have a frangible disc or fusible element in parallel with the spring-loaded devices except when prohibited by reference to 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 in the applicable portable tank instruct ion in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 . The pressure relief devices shall have su fficient capacity to prevent rupture of the shell due to over-pressurization or vacuum resulting from filling, from discharging, or from heating of the contents . 6.7.2.8.2 Pressure relief devices shall be designe d to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of liquid and the development of any dangerous excess pressure . 6.7.2.8.3 When required for certain substances by th e applicable portable tank instruction identified in the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6, portable tanks shall have a pressure reli ef device approved by the competent authority . Unless a portable tank in dedicated servi ce is fitted with an approved relief device constructed of materials compatible with the load, the relief device shall comprise a frangible disc preceding a spring-loaded pressure relief device . When a frangible disc is inserted in series with the required pressure relief device, the space between the frangible disc and the pressure relief device shall be provided with a pressure gauge or suitable tell-tale indicator for the detection of disc rupture, pinholing, or leakage which could cause a malfunction of the pressure relief system . The frangible disc shall rupture at a nomin al pressure 10% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the relief device . 6.7.2.8.4 Every portable tank with a capacity less tha n 1900 L shall be fitted with a pressure relief device, which may be a frangible disc when this disc complies with the provisions of 6 . 7 . 2 . 11 . 1 . When no spring-loaded pressure relief d evice is used, the frangible disc shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure equal to the test pressure . In addition, fusible elements conform ing to 6 . 7 . 2 . 10 . 1 may also be used . 6.7.2.8.5 When the shell is fitted for pressure dischar ge, the inlet line shall be provided with a suitable pressure relief device set to operate at a pressure not higher than the MAWP of the shell, and a stop-valve shall be fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 417

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 407 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.2.9 Setting of pressure relief devices 6.7.2.9.1 It shall be noted that the pressure relief dev ices shall operate only in conditions of excessive rise in temperature, since the shell shall not be subject to undue fluctuations of pressure during normal conditions of transport (see 6 . 7 . 2 . 12 . 2) . 6.7.2.9.2 The required pressure relief device shal l be set to start to discharge at a nominal pressure of five sixths of the test pressure for shells having a test pressure of not more than 4 . 5 bar and 110% of two thirds of the test pressure fo r shells having a test pressure of more than 4 . 5 bar . After discharge, the device shall close a t a pressure not more than 10% below the pressure at which the discharge starts . The device shall remain closed at all lower p ressures . This requirement does not prevent the use o f vacuum relief or combination pressure relief and vacuum relief devices . 6.7.2.10 Fusible elements 6.7.2.10.1 Fusible elements shall operate at a temper ature between 100 ° C and 149 ° C on condition that the pressure in the shell at the fusing temperature will be not more than the test pressure . They shall be placed at the top of the shell with t heir inlets in the vapour space, and when used for transport safety purposes, they shall not be shielded from external heat . Fusible elements shall not be used on porta ble tanks with a test pressure which exceeds 2 . 65 bar unless specified by special provisio n TP36 in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List of chapter 3 . 2 . Fusible elements used on portable tanks i ntended for the transport of elevated-temperature substances shall be designed to operate at a temperature higher than the maximum temperature that will be experienced during transport and shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body . 6.7.2.11 Frangible discs 6.7.2.11.1 Except as specified in 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3, frangible discs shall be set to rupture at a nom inal pressure equal to the test pressure throughout the design temperature range . Particular attention shall be gi ven to the provisions of 6 . 7 . 2 . 5 . 1 and 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 3 if frangible discs are used . 6.7.2.11.2 Frangible discs shall be appropriate for t he vacuum pressures which may be produced in the portable tank . 6.7.2.12 Capacity of pressure relief devices 6.7.2.12.1 The spring-loaded pressure relief devi ce required by 6 . 7 . 2 . 8 . 1 shall have a minimum cross-sectional flow a rea equivalent to an orifice of 31 . 75 mm diameter . Vacuum relief devices, when used, shall ha ve a cross-sectional flow area not less than 284 mm 2 . 6.7.2.12.2 The combined delivery capacity of the pres sure relief system (taking into account the reduction of the flow when the portable tank is fitted with frangible discs preceding spring-loaded pressure relief devices or when the spring-loaded pressure relief devices are provided with a device to prevent the passage of the flame), in conditions of complete fire engulfment of the portable tank shall be sufficient to limit the pressure in the shell to 20% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the pressure-limiting device . Emergency pressure relief devices may b e used to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed . These devices may be fusible, spring- loaded o r frangible disc components, or a combination of spring-loaded and frangible disc devices . The total required capacity of the relief de vices may be determined using the formula in 6 . 7 . 2 . 12 . 2 . 1 or the table in 6 . 7 . 2 . 12 . 2 . 3 . 6.7.2.12.2.1 To determine the total required capacity o f the relief devices, which shall be regarded as being the sum of the individual capacities of all the contributing devices, the following formula shall be used: Q = 12 . 4 FA ___ LC 0 . 82 √ ___ ZT ___ M where: Q = minimum required rate of discharge in cubic metres of air per second (m 3 /s) at standard conditions: 1 bar and 0 ° C (273 K); F = a coefficient with the following value: for uninsulated shells, F = 1 for insulated shells, F = U (649 – t )/13 . 6 but in no case is less than 0 . 25 where: U = heat transfer coefficient of the insula tion, in kW · m -2 · K -1 , at 38 ° C; t = actual temperature of the substance duri ng filling (in °C) (when this temperature is unknown, let t = 15 ° C); The value of F given above for insulated shel ls may be taken provided that the insulation is in conformance with 6 . 7 . 2 . 12 . 2 . 4; △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 418

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 408 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 A = total external surface area of shell in square metres; Z = the gas compressibility factor in the accu mulating condition (when this factor is unknown, let Z equal 1 . 0); T = absolute temperature in kelvin ( ° C + 273) abov e the pressure relief devices in the accumulating condition; L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liqui d, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating condition; M = molecular mass of the discharged gas; C = a constant which is derived from one of the foll owing formulae as a function of the ratio k of specific heats: k = C p __ C v where: C p = specific heat at constant pressure; and C v = specific heat at constant volume . When k > 1: C = √ __________ k ( 2 _____ k + 1 ) k + 1 _____ k - 1 When k = 1 or k is unknown: C = 1 ___ √ __ e = 0 . 607 where e is the mathematical constant 2 . 7183 . C may also be taken from the following table : k C k C k C 1 . 00 0 . 607 1 . 26 0 . 660 1 . 52 0 . 704 1 . 02 0 . 611 1 . 28 0 . 664 1 . 54 0 . 707 1 . 04 0 . 615 1 . 30 0 . 667 1 . 56 0 . 71 1 . 06 0 . 620 1 . 32 0 . 671 1 . 58 0 . 713 1 . 08 0 . 624 1 . 34 0 . 674 1 . 60 0 . 716 1 . 10 0 . 628 1 . 36 0 . 678 1 . 62 0 . 719 1 . 12 0 . 633 1 . 38 0 . 681 1 . 64 0 . 722 1 . 14 0 . 637 1 . 40 0 . 685 1 . 66 0 . 725 1 . 16 0 . 641 1 . 42 0 . 688 1 . 68 0 . 728 1 . 18 0 . 645 1 . 44 0 . 691 1 . 70 0 . 731 1 . 20 0 . 649 1 . 46 0 . 695 2 . 0 0 . 77 1 . 22 0 . 652 1 . 48 0 . 698 2 . 2 0 . 793 1 . 24 0 . 656 1 . 50 0 . 701 6.7.2.12.2.2 As an alternative to the formula above, shel ls designed for the transport of liquids may have their relief devices sized in accordance with the table in 6 . 7 . 2 . 12 . 2 . 3 . This table assumes an insulation value of F = 1 and shall be adjusted accordingly when the shell is insulated . Other values used in determining this tab le are: M = 86 . 7; T = 394 K; L = 334 . 94 kJ/kg; C = 0 . 607; Z = 1 6.7.2.12.2.3 Minimum required rate of discharge, Q , in cubi c metres of air per second at 1 bar and 0 ° C (273 K): A Exposed area (square metres) Q (cubic metres of air per second) A Exposed area (square metres) Q (cubic metres of air per second) 2 0 . 230 14 1 . 132 3 0 . 320 16 1 . 263 4 0 . 405 18 1 . 391 5 0 . 487 20 1 . 517 6 0 . 565 22 . 5 1 . 670 7 0 . 641 25 1 . 821 8 0 . 715 27 . 5 1 . 969 9 0 . 788 30 2 . 115 10 0 . 859 32 . 5 2 . 258 12 0 . 998 35 2 . 400 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 419

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 409 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 A Exposed area (square metres) Q (cubic metres of air per second) A Exposed area (square metres) Q (cubic metres of air per second) 37 . 5 2 . 539 62 . 5 3 . 860 40 2 . 677 65 3 . 987 42 . 5 2 . 814 67 . 5 4 . 112 45 2 . 949 70 4 . 236 47 . 5 3 . 082 75 4 . 483 50 3 . 215 80 4 . 726 52 . 5 3 . 346 85 4 . 967 55 3 . 476 90 5 . 206 57 . 5 3 . 605 95 5 . 442 60 3 . 733 100 5 . 676 6.7.2.12.2.4 Insulation systems, used for the purpos e of reducing venting capacity, shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body . In all cases, insulation systems approv ed for this purpose shall: (a) remain effective at all temperatures up to 6 49 ° C; and (b) be jacketed with a material having a melting p oint of 700 ° C or greater . 6.7.2.13 Marking of pressure relief devices 6.7.2.13.1 Every pressure relief device shall be clea rly and permanently marked with the following: .1 the pressure (in bar or kPa) or temperature (i n ° C) at which it is set to discharge; .2 the allowable tolerance at the discharge pr essure, for spring-loaded devices; .3 the reference temperature correspond ing to the rated pressure, for frangible discs; .4 the allowable temperature tolerance, for fusible elements; .5 the rated flow capacity of the spring-loaded pr essure relief devices, frangible discs or fusible elements in standard cubic metres of air per second (m 3 /s); and .6 the cross sectional flow areas of the spring- loaded pressure relief devices, frangible discs and fusible elements in mm 2 . When practicable, the following informat ion shall also be shown: .7 the manufacturer’s name and relevant ca talogue number . 6.7.2.13.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the spri ng-loaded pressure relief devices shall be determined according to ISO 4126-1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004 . 6.7.2.14 Connections to pressure relief devices 6.7.2.14.1 Connections to pressure relief devices s hall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the safety device . No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the pressure relief devices except where duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked so that at least one of the duplicate devices is always in use . There shall be no obstruction in an opening l eading to a vent or pressure relief device which might restrict or cut off the flow from the shell to that device . Vents or pipes from the pressure relief device outlets, when used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving devices . 6.7.2.15 Siting of pressure relief devices 6.7.2.15.1 Each pressure relief device inlet shall be s ituated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal and transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable . All pressure relief device inlets shall , under maximum filling conditions, be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly . For flammable substances, the escaping v apour shall be directed away from the shell in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the shell . Protective devices which deflect the flow o f vapour are permissible provided the required relief-device capacity is not reduced . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 420

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 410 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.2.15.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent acce ss to the pressure relief devices by unauthorized persons and to protect the devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning . 6.7.2.16 Gauging devices 6.7.2.16.1 Glass level-gauges and gauges made of othe r fragile material, which are in direct communication with the contents of the tank, shall not be used . 6.7.2.17 Portable tank supports, frameworks, l ifting and tie-down attachments 6.7.2.17.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and const ructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during transport . The forces specified in 6 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 12 and the safety factor specified in 6 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 13 shall be considered in this aspect of the des ign . Skids, frameworks, cradles or other sim ilar structures are acceptable . 6.7.2.17.2 The combined stresses caused by portable t ank mountings (such as cradles, framework, etc . ) and portable tank lifting and tie-down att achments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the shell . Permanent lifting and tie-down attach ments shall be fitted to all portable tanks . Preferably they shall be fitted to the porta ble tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the shell at the points of support . 6.7.2.17.3 In the design of supports and frameworks, th e effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into account . 6.7.2.17.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable o f being closed off . The means of closing forklift poc kets shall be a permanent part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework . Single-compartment portable ta nks with a length less than 3 . 65 m need not have closed-off forklift pocke ts provided that: .1 the shell, including all the fittings, is wel l protected from being hit by the forklift blades; and .2 the distance between the centres of the fork lift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of the portable tank . 6.7.2.17.5 When portable tanks are not protected duri ng transport, according to 4 . 2 . 1 . 2, the shells and service equipment shall b e protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral or longitudinal impact or overturning . External fittings shall be protected so as t o preclude the release of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings . Examples of protection include: .1 protection against lateral impact, whi ch may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both sides at the level of the median line; .2 protection of the portable tank aga inst overturning, which may consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the frame; .3 protection against rear impact, which ma y consist of a bumper or frame; .4 protection of the shell against damage fro m impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995 . 6.7.2.18 Design approval 6.7.2.18.1 The competent authority or its authorize d body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new design of a portable tank . This certificate shall attest that a porta ble tank has been surveyed by that authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the provisions of this chapter and, where appropriate, the provisions for substances provided in chapter 4 . 2 and in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3 . 2 . When a series of portable tanks are manufac tured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the entire series . The certificate shall refer to the prototy pe test report, the substances or group of substances allowed to be transported, the materials of construction of the shell and lining (when applicable) and an approval number . The approval number shall consist of the di stinguishing sign or mark of the State in whose territory the approval was granted, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic * and a registration number . Any alternative arrangements accord ing to 6 . 7 . 1 . 2 shall be indicated on the certificate . A design approval may serve for the approva l of smaller portable tanks made of materials of the same kind and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances . 6.7.2.18.2 The prototype test report for the design app roval shall include at least the following: .1 the results of the applicable framework te st specified in ISO 1496-3:1995; .2 the results of the initial inspection and te st in 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 3; and .3 the results of the impact test in 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 1, when applicable . 6.7.2.19 Inspection and testing 6.7.2.19.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of c ontainer in the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 421

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 411 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the Manual of Tests and Criteria , part IV, section 41 . This provision only applies to por table tanks which are constructed according to a design approval certificate which has been issued on or after 1 January 2008 . 6.7.2.19.2 The shell and items of equipment of each porta ble tank shall be inspected and tested before being put into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year intervals (5-year periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test) mid way between the 5-year periodic inspections and tests . The 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test may be p erformed within 3 months of the specified date . An exceptional inspection and test shal l be performed regardless of the date of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according to 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 7 . 6.7.2.19.3 The initial inspection and test of a portabl e tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the substances to be transported, and a pressure test . Before the portable tank is placed into ser vice, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed . When the shell and its fittings have been pres sure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test . 6.7.2.19.4 The 5-year periodic inspection and test sh all include an internal and external examination and, as a general rule, a hydraulic pressure test . For tanks only used for the transport of soli d substances other than toxic or corrosive substances, which do not liquefy during transport, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a suitable pressure test at 1 . 5 times MAWP, subject to competent authori ty approval . Sheathing, thermal insulation and the l ike shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank . When the shell and equipment have been pres sure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test . 6.7.2.19.4.1 The heating system shall be subject to insp ection and tests including pressure tests on heating coils or ducts during the 5-year periodic inspection . 6.7.2.19.5 The intermediate 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test shal l at least include an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the substances intended to be transported, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment . Sheathing, thermal insulation and the l ike shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank . For portable tanks dedicated to the trans port of a single substance, the 2 . 5-year internal examination may be waive d or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures specified by the competent authority or its authorized body . 6.7.2.19.6 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for t ransport after the date of expiry of the last 5-year or 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test as req uired by 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 2 . However, a portable tank filled prior to the d ate of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test may be transported for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection . In addition, a portable tank may be transpo rted after the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection: .1 after emptying but before cleaning, for pu rposes of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling; and .2 unless otherwise approved by the compete nt authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling . Reference to this exemption shal l be mentioned in the transport document . Except as provided for in this paragraph, p ortable tanks which have missed the timeframe for their scheduled 5-year or 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test may on ly be filled and offered for transport if a new 5-year periodic inspection and test is performed according to 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 4 . 6.7.2.19.7 The exceptional inspection and test is nec essary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or corroded areas, or leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of the portable tank . The extent of the exceptional inspectio n and test shall depend on the amount of damage or deterioration of the portable tank . It shall include at least the 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test acco rding to 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 5 . 6.7.2.19.8 The internal and external examinations s hall ensure that: .1 the shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions, including leakage, that m ight render the portable tank unsafe for transport . The wall thickness shall be verified by appr opriate measurement if this inspection indicates a reduction of wall thickness; .2 the piping, valves, heating/cooling system, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, or any other conditions, including leakage , that might render the portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or transport; .3 devices for tightening manhole covers are operative and there is no leakage at manhole covers or gaskets; .4 missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged con nection or blank flange are replaced or tightened; ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 422

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 412 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 .5 all emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation . Remote closure devices and self-closi ng stop-valves shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation; .6 linings, if any, are inspected in accordan ce with criteria outlined by the lining manufacturer; .7 required marks on the portable tank are legi ble and in accordance with the applicable provisions; and .8 the framework, supports and arrangemen ts for lifting the portable tank are in a satisfactory condition . 6.7.2.19.9 The inspections and tests in 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 1, 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 3, 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 4, 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 5 and 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 7 shall be performed or witnessed by an expert a pproved by the competent authority or its authorized body . When the pressure test is a part of the i nspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the portable tank . While under pressure, the portable tank s hall be inspected for any leaks in the shell, piping or equipment . 6.7.2.19.10 In all cases when cutting, burning or weldin g operations on the shell have been effected, that work shall be to the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body, taking into account the pressure-vessel code used for the construction of the shell . A pressure test to the original test pressu re shall be performed after the work is completed . 6.7.2.19.11 When evidence of any unsafe condition is dis covered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service until it has been corrected and the test is repeated and passed . 6.7.2.20 Marking 6.7.2.20.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corr osion-resistant metal plate permanently attached to the portable tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection . When for reasons of portable tank arrange ments the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at least the information required by the pressure-vessel code . As a minimum, at least the following inform ation shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method: (a) Owner information (i) Owner’s registration number; (b) Manufacturing information (i) Country of manufacture; (ii) Year of manufacture; (iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark; (iv) Manufacturer’s serial number; (c) Approval information (i) The United Nations packaging symbol: This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC compli es with the relevant requirements in chapters 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 6 . 3, 6 . 5, 6 . 6, 6 . 7 or 6 . 9; (ii) Approval country; (iii) Authorized body for the design approval; ( iv) Design approval number; (v) Letters “AA”, if the design was approved und er alternative arrangements (see 6 . 7 . 1 . 2); (vi) Pressure-vessel code to which the shell is d esigned; (d) Pressures (i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); * (ii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); * (iii) Initial pressure test date (month and year); (iv) Identification mark of the initial pressu re test witness; (v) External design pressure † (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); * (vi) MAWP for heating/cooling system (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) * (when applicable); (e) Temperatures (i) Design temperature range (in °C); * (f) Materials * The unit used shall be indicated . † See 6 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 10 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 423

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 413 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (i) Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s); (ii) Equivalent thickness in reference steel (in mm); * and (iii) Lining material (when applicable); (g) Capacity (i) Tank water capacity at 20°C (in litres); * This indication is to be followed by the symbol “S” when the shell is divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7,500 L capacity; ( ii) Water capacity of each compartment at 20°C (in litres) * (when applicable, for multi-compartment tanks) . This indication is to be followed by the symbo l “S” when the compartment is divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7,500 L capacity; (h) Periodic inspections and tests (i) Type of the most recent periodic test (2 . 5-year, 5-year or exceptional); (ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month a nd year); (iii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) * of the most recent periodic test (if applicable); (iv) Identification mark of the authorized bod y who performed or witnessed the most recent test . Figure 6.7.2.20.1 – Example of a plate for ma rking Owner’s registration number MANUFACTURING INFORMATION Country of manufacture Year of manufacture Manufacturer Manufacturer’s serial number APPROVAL INFORMATION Approval country Authorized body for design approval Design approval number “AA” (if applicable) Shell design code (pressure-vessel code) PRESSURES MAWP bar or kPa Test pressure bar or kPa Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp: External design pressure bar or kPa MAWP for heating/cooling system ( when applicable ) bar or kPa TEMPERATURES Design temperature range °C to °C MATERIALS Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s) Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm Lining material (when applicable) CAPACITY Tank water capacity at 20°C litres “S” (if applicable) Water capacity of compartment ⎯ ⎯ at 20°C (when applicable, for multi-compartment tanks) litres “S” (if applicable) * The unit used shall be indicated . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 424

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 414 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 PERIODIC INSPECTIONS/TESTS Test type Test date Witness stamp and test pressure a Test type Test date Witness stamp and test pressure a (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa a Test pressure if applicable . 6.7.2.20.2 The following information shall be durab ly marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank: Name of the operator Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) … … … . kg Unladen (tare) mass … … … . kg Portable tank instruction in accorda nce with 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 . 6.7.2.20.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved fo r handling in open seas, the words “OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK” shall be marked on the identification plate . 6.7.3 Provisions for the design, construction, in spection and testing of portable tanks intended for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 Note: These requirements also apply to portable tanks intended for the transport of chemicals under pressure (UN Nos . 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505) . 6.7.3.1 Definitions For the purposes of this section: Design pressure means the pressure to be used in calculations required by a recognized pressure-vessel code . The design pressure shall be not less than th e highest of the following pressures: .1 the maximum effective gauge pressure all owed in the shell during filling or discharge; or .2 the sum of: .1 the maximum effective gauge pressure to wh ich the shell is designed, as defined in . 2 of the MAWP definition (see below); and .2 a head pressure determined on the basis of the s tatic forces specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 9, but not less than 0 . 35 bar; Design reference temperature mean s the temperature at which the vapour pressure of the contents is determined for the purpose of calculating the MAWP . The design reference temperature shal l be less than the critical temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or liquefied gas propellants of chemicals under pressure intended to be transported to ensure that the gas at all times is liquefied . This value for each portable tank type is as fo llows: .1 shell with a diameter of 1 . 5 m or less: 65 ° C; .2 shell with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 m: .1 without insulation or sunshield: 60 ° C; .2 with sunshield (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12): 55 ° C; and .3 with insulation (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 12): 50 ° C; Design temperature range for the shel l shall be - 40 ° C to 50 ° C for non-refrigerated liquefied gases transported under ambient conditions . More severe design temperatures shall b e considered for portable tanks subjected to severe climatic conditions; Filling density means the average mass of non-refrigerated liquefied gas per litre of shell capacity (kg/L) . The filling density is given in portable tan k instruction T50 in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6; Leakproofness test means a test using g as subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective internal pressure of not less than 25% of the MAWP; Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 425

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 415 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures measured at the top of the shell while in operating position, but in no case less than 7 bar: .1 the maximum effective gauge pressure all owed in the shell during filling or discharge; or .2 the maximum effective gauge pressure to wh ich the shell is designed, which shall be: .1 for a non-refrigerated liquefied gas list ed in the portable tank instruction T50 in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6, the MAWP (in bar) given in portable tank inst ruction T50 for that gas; .2 for other non-refrigerated liquefied gas es, not less than the sum of: – the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the n on-refrigerated liquefied gas at the design reference temperature minus 1 bar; and – the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other ga ses in the ullage space, being determined by the design reference temperature and the liquid phase expansion due to an increase of the mean bulk temperature of t r – t f (t f = filling temperature, usually 15°C; t r = 50 ° C, maximum mean bulk temperature); .3 for chemicals under pressure, the MAWP (in b ar) given in T50 portable tank instruction for the liquefied gas portion of the propellants listed in T50 in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 . Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) m eans the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the heaviest load authorized for transport; Mild steel means a steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 360 N/mm 2 to 440 N/mm 2 and a guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6 . 7 . 3 . 3 . 3 . 3; Portable tank means a multimodal tank havi ng a capacity of more than 450 L used for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 . The portable tank includes a shell fitted wi th service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases . The portable tank shall be capable of being fi lled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment . It shall possess stabilizing members ex ternal to the shell, and shall be capable of being lifted when full . It shall be designed primarily to be loaded o nto a transport vehicle or ship and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling . Road tank-vehicles, rail tank-wagon s, non-metallic tanks, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), gas cylinders and large receptacles are not considered to fall within the definition for portable tanks; Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm 2 and an elongation at fracture of 27%; Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety and insulating devices; Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the non-refrigerated liquefied gas intended for transport (tank proper), including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural equipment; Structural equipment means reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the shell; Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the pressure test . 6.7.3.2 General design and construction pro visions 6.7.3.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed i n accordance with the provisions of a pressure-vessel code recognized by the competent authority . Shells shall be made of steel suitable for fo rming . The materials shall, in principle, con form to national or international material standards . For welded shells, only a material whose weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used . Welds shall be skilfully made and a fford complete safety . When the manufacturing process or the mat erials make it necessary, the shells shall be suitably heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat-affected zones . In choosing the material, the design temp erature range shall be taken into account with respect to risk of brittle fracture, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact . When fine-grain steel is used, the guarante ed value of the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm 2 and the guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm 2 , according to the material specification . Portable tank materials shall be suitab le for the external environment in which they may be transported . 6.7.3.2.2 Portable tank shells, fittings and pipewo rk shall be constructed of materials which are: .1 substantially immune to attack by the non- refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended to be transported; or .2 properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction . 6.7.3.2.3 Gaskets shall be made of materials compatib le with the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended to be transported . 6.7.3.2.4 Contact between dissimilar metals whic h could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided . 6.7.3.2.5 The materials of the portable tank, includ ing any devices, gaskets, and accessories, shall not adversely affect the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended for transport in the portable tank . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 426

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 416 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.3.2.6 Portable tanks shall be designed and const ructed with supports to provide a secure base during transport and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments . 6.7.3.2.7 Portable tanks shall be designed to withst and, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the contents and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and transport . The design shall demonstrate that the effe cts of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account . 6.7.3.2.7.1 For portable tanks that are intended for use a s offshore tank-containers, the dynamic stresses imposed by handling in open seas shall be taken into account . 6.7.3.2.8 Shells shall be designed to withstand an ext ernal pressure of at least 0 . 4 bar gauge above the internal pressure with out permanent deformation . When the shell is to be subjected to a significa nt vacuum before filling or during discharge, it shall be designed to withstand an external pressure of at least 0 . 9 bar gauge above the internal pressure and sh all be proven at that pressure . 6.7.3.2.9 Portable tanks and their fastenings shal l, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of absorbing the following separately applied static forces: .1 in the direction of travel: twice the MPGM mul tiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * .2 horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * .3 vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * and .4 vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (to tal loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ) . * 6.7.3.2.10 Under each of the forces in 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 9, the safety factor to be observed shall be as fo llows: .1 for steels having a clearly defined yield po int, a safety factor of 1 . 5 in relation to the guaranteed yield streng th; or .2 for steels with no clearly defined yield poin t, a safety factor of 1 . 5 in relation to the guaranteed 0 . 2% proof strength and, for austenitic steel s, the 1% proof strength . 6.7.3.2.11 The values of yield strength or proof streng th shall be the values according to national or international material standards . When austenitic steels are used, t he specified minimum values of yield strength and proof strength according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate . When no material standard exists for the st eel in question, the value of yield strength or proof strength used shall be approved by the competent authority . 6.7.3.2.12 When the shells intended for the transport o f non-refrigerated liquefied gases are equipped with thermal insulation, the thermal insulation system shall satisfy the following provisions: .1 It shall consist of a shield covering not less t han the upper third but not more than the upper half of the surface of the shell and separated from the shell by an air space about 40 mm across; or .2 It shall consist of a complete cladding of a dequate thickness of insulating materials, protected so as to prevent the ingress of moisture and damage under normal conditions of transport and so as to provide a thermal conductance of not more than 0 . 67 W/m · K; .3 When the protective covering is so closed as t o be gas-tight, a device shall be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in the event of inadequate gas-tightness of the shell or of its items of equipment; .4 The thermal insulation shall not inhibit a ccess to the fittings and discharge devices . 6.7.3.2.13 Portable tanks intended for the transpor t of flammable non-refrigerated liquefied gases shall be capable of being electrically earthed . 6.7.3.3 Design criteria 6.7.3.3.1 Shells shall be of a circular cross-secti on . 6.7.3.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed t o withstand a test pressure not less than 1 . 3 times the design pressure . The shell design shall take into account th e minimum MAWP values provided in portable tank instruction T50 in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 for each non-refrigerated liquefied gas i ntended for transport . Attention is drawn to the minimum shell thi ckness provisions for these shells specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 4 . 6.7.3.3.3 For steels exhibiting a clearly defined yie ld point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength (0 . 2% proof strength, generally, or 1% proof st rength for austenitic steels), the primary membrane stress σ (sigma) in the shell shall not exceed 0 . 75 R e or 0 . 50 R m , whichever is lower, at the test pressure, where: R e = yield strength in N/mm 2 , or 0 . 2% proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1% proof strength . R m = minimum tensile strength in N/mm 2 . * For calculation purposes, g = 9 . 81 m/s 2 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 427

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 417 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.3.3.3.1 The values of R e and R m to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or international material standards . When austenitic steels are used, these spe cified minimum values for R e and R m according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate . When no material standard exists for the st eel in question, the values of R e and R m used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body . 6.7.3.3.3.2 Steels which have a R e /R m ratio of more than 0 . 85 are not allowed for the construct ion of welded shells . The values of R e and R m to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material inspection certificate . 6.7.3.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells sh all have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/ R m with an absolute minimum of 16% for fine-grain steels and 20% for other steels . 6.7.3.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actu al values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling . The permanent elongation at fracture sh all be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross-section in accordance with ISO 6892:1998 using a 50 mm gauge length . 6.7.3.4 Minimum shell thickness 6.7.3.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the gre ater thickness based on: .1 the minimum thickness determined in acco rdance with the provisions in 6 . 7 . 3 . 4; and .2 the minimum thickness determined in acco rdance with the recognized pressure-vessel code, including the provisions in 6 . 7 . 3 . 3 . In addition, any relevant portable tank sp ecial provision indicated in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4 . 2 . 5 . 3 shall be taken into account . 6.7.3.4.2 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) a nd manhole covers of shells of not more than 1 . 80 m in diameter shall be not less than 5 mm thick in th e reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the steel to be used . Shells of more than 1 . 80 m in diameter shall be not less than 6 mm thick in th e reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the steel to be used . 6.7.3.4.3 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) a nd manhole covers of all shells shall be not less than 4 mm thick regardless of the material of construction . 6.7.3.4.4 The equivalent thickness of a steel other th an the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6 . 7 . 3 . 4 . 2 shall be determined using the following fo rmula: e 1 = 21 . 4 × e 0 ________ 3 √ _________ R m1 × A 1 where: e 1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the steel to be used; e 0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 4 . 2; R m1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm 2 ) of the steel to be used (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 3 . 3); A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the steel to be used according to national or international standards . 6.7.3.4.5 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than t hat prescribed in 6 . 7 . 3 . 4 . 1 to 6 . 7 . 3 . 4 . 3 . All parts of the shell shall have a minimum thi ckness as determined by 6 . 7 . 3 . 4 . 1 to 6 . 7 . 3 . 4 . 3 . This thickness shall be exclusive of any cor rosion allowance . 6.7.3.4.6 When mild steel is used (see 6 . 7 . 3 . 1), calculation using the equation in 6 . 7 . 3 . 4 . 4 is not required . 6.7.3.4.7 There shall be no sudden change of plate thick ness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the cylindrical portion of the shell . 6.7.3.5 Service equipment 6.7.3.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as t o be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or damaged during handling and transport . When the connection between the frame and t he shell allows relative movement between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without risk of damage to working parts . The external discharge fittings (pipe so ckets, shut-off devices), the internal stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by external forces (for example, by using shear sections) . The filling and discharge devices (inclu ding flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening . 6.7.3.5.1.1 For offshore tank-containers, where positioning of service equipment and the design and strength of protection for such equipment is concerned, the increased danger of impact damage when handling such tanks in open seas shall be taken into account . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 428

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 418 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.3.5.2 All openings with a diameter of more than 1 . 5 mm in shells of portable tanks, except openi ngs for pressure relief devices, inspection openings and closed bleed holes, shall be fitted with at least three mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first being an internal stop-valve, excess flow valve or equivalent device, the second being an external stop-valve and the third being a blank flange or equivalent device . 6.7.3.5.2.1 When a portable tank is fitted with an exces s flow valve, the excess flow valve shall be so fitted that its seating is inside the shell or inside a welded flange or, when fitted externally, its mountings shall be designed so that, in the event of impact, its effectiveness shall be maintained . The excess flow valves shall be selected and fi tted so as to close automatically when the rated flow specified by the manufacturer is reached . Connections and accessories leading t o or from such a valve shall have a capacity for a flow more than the rated flow of the excess flow valve . 6.7.3.5.3 For filling and discharge openings, the fir st shut-off device shall be an internal stop-valve and the second shall be a stop-valve placed in an accessible position on each discharge and filling pipe . 6.7.3.5.4 For filling and discharge bottom openings o f portable tanks intended for the transport of flammable and/or toxic non-refrigerated liquefied gases or chemicals under pressure, the internal stop-valve shall be a quick- closing safety device which closes automatically in the event of unintended movement of the portable tank during filling or discharge or fire engulfment . Except for portable tanks having a capaci ty of not more than 1000 L, it shall be possible to operate this device by remote control . 6.7.3.5.5 In addition to filling, discharge and gas pre ssure equalizing orifices, shells may have openings in which gauges, thermometers and manometers can be fitted . Connections for such instruments shal l be made by suitable welded nozzles or pockets and not be screwed connections through the shell . 6.7.3.5.6 All portable tanks shall be fitted with manho les or other inspection openings of suitable size to allow for internal inspection and adequate access for maintenance and repair of the interior . 6.7.3.5.7 External fittings shall be grouped togeth er so far as reasonably practicable . 6.7.3.5.8 Each connection on a portable tank shall be cl early marked to indicate its function . 6.7.3.5.9 Each stop-valve or other means of cl osure shall be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less than the MAWP of the shell, taking into account the temperatures expected during transport . All stop-valves with a screwed spindle sh all close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel . For other stop-valves, the position (op en and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated . All stop-valves shall be designed to prev ent unintentional opening . 6.7.3.5.10 Piping shall be designed, construct ed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration . All piping shall be of suitable metallic ma terial . Welded pipe joints shall be used wherever p ossible . 6.7.3.5.11 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or hav e an equally strong metal union . The melting point of brazing materials sh all be no lower than 525 ° C . The joints shall not decrease the strengt h of tubing, as may happen when cutting threads . 6.7.3.5.12 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fitti ngs shall be not less than the highest of four times the MAWP of the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a pump or other device (except pressure relief devices) . 6.7.3.5.13 Ductile metals shall be used in the construc tion of valves and accessories . 6.7.3.6 Bottom openings 6.7.3.6.1 Certain non-refrigerated liquefied ga ses shall not be transported in portable tanks with bottom openings when portable tank instruction T50 in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 indicates that bottom openings are not all owed . There shall be no openings below the liquid l evel of the shell when it is filled to its maximum permissible filling limit . 6.7.3.7 Pressure relief devices 6.7.3.7.1 Portable tanks shall be provided with one or m ore spring-loaded pressure relief devices . The pressure relief devices shall open au tomatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully open at a pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP . These devices shall, after discharge, c lose at a pressure not lower than 10% below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower pressures . The pressure relief devices shall be of a typ e that will resist dynamic forces, including liquid surge . Frangible discs not in series with a spring -loaded pressure relief device are not permitted . 6.7.3.7.2 Pressure relief devices shall be designe d to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure . 6.7.3.7.3 Portable tanks intended for the transpor t of certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases identified in portable tank instruction T50 in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 shall have a pressure relief device approv ed by the competent authority . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 429

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 419 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Unless a portable tank in dedicated service is fitted with an approved relief device constructed of materials compatible with the load, such device shall comprise a frangible disc preceding a spring-loaded device . The space between the frangible disc and the d evice shall be provided with a pressure gauge or a suitable tell-tale indicator . This arrangement permits the detectio n of disc rupture, pinholing or leakage which could cause a malfunction of the pressure relief device . The frangible discs shall rupture at a nomi nal pressure 10% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the relief device . 6.7.3.7.4 In the case of multi-purpose portable tank s, the pressure relief devices shall open at a pressure indicated in 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 1 for the gas having the highest maximum allow able pressure of the gases allowed to be transported in the portable tank . 6.7.3.8 Capacity of relief devices 6.7.3.8.1 The combined delivery capacity of the reli ef devices shall be sufficient that, in the event of total fire engulfment, the pressure (including accumulation) inside the shell does not exceed 120% of the MAWP . Spring-loaded relief devices shall be u sed to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed . In the case of multi-purpose tanks, the com bined delivery capacity of the pressure relief devices shall be taken for the gas which requires the highest delivery capacity of the gases allowed to be transported in portable tanks . 6.7.3.8.1.1 To determine the total required capacity o f the relief devices, which shall be regarded as being the sum of the individual capacities of the several devices, the following formula * shall be used: Q = 12 . 4 FA ___ LC 0 . 82 √ ___ ZT ___ M where: Q = minimum required rate of discharge in cubic metres of air per second (m 3 /s) at standard conditions: 1 bar and 0 ° C (273 K); F = a coefficient with the following value: for uninsulated shells, F = 1 for insulated shells, F = U (649 – t )/13 . 6 but in no case is less than 0 . 25 where: U = heat transfer coefficient of the insula tion, in kW ∙ m -2 ∙ K -1 , at 38 ° C; t = actual temperature of the non-refriger ated liquefied gas during filling (in °C) (when this temperature is unknown, let t = 15 ° C); The value of F given above for insulated she lls may be taken provided that the insulation is in conformance with 6 . 7 . 3 . 8 . 1 . 2; A = total external surface area of shell in squa re metres; Z = the gas compressibility factor in the accu mulating condition (when this factor is unknown, let Z equal 1 . 0); T = absolute temperature in kelvin ( ° C + 273) abov e the pressure relief devices in the accumulating condition; L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liqui d, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating condition; M = molecular mass of the discharged gas; C = a constant which is derived from one of the foll owing formulae as a function of the ratio k of specific heats: k = C p __ C v where: C p = specific heat at constant pressure; and C v = specific heat at constant volume . When k > 1: C = √ __________ k ( 2 _____ k + 1 ) k + 1 _____ k - 1 When k = 1 or k is unknown: C = 1 ___ √ __ e = 0 . 607 where e is the mathematical constant 2 . 7183 . * This formula applies only to non-refrigerated liquefied gases which have critical temperatures well above the temperature at the accumulating condition . For gases which have critical temperat ures near or below the temperature at the accumulating condition, the calculation of the pressure-relief device delivery capacity shall consider further thermodynamic properties of the gas (see, e . g . CGA S-1 . 2-2003 Pressure Relief Device Standards – P art 2 – Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases ) . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 430

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 420 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 C may also be taken from the following table: k C k C k C 1 . 00 0 . 607 1 . 26 0 . 660 1 . 52 0 . 704 1 . 02 0 . 611 1 . 28 0 . 664 1 . 54 0 . 707 1 . 04 0 . 615 1 . 30 0 . 667 1 . 56 0 . 71 1 . 06 0 . 620 1 . 32 0 . 671 1 . 58 0 . 713 1 . 08 0 . 624 1 . 34 0 . 674 1 . 60 0 . 716 1 . 10 0 . 628 1 . 36 0 . 678 1 . 62 0 . 719 1 . 12 0 . 633 1 . 38 0 . 681 1 . 64 0 . 722 1 . 14 0 . 637 1 . 40 0 . 685 1 . 66 0 . 725 1 . 16 0 . 641 1 . 42 0 . 688 1 . 68 0 . 728 1 . 18 0 . 645 1 . 44 0 . 691 1 . 70 0 . 731 1 . 20 0 . 649 1 . 46 0 . 695 2 . 0 0 . 77 1 . 22 0 . 652 1 . 48 0 . 698 2 . 2 0 . 793 1 . 24 0 . 656 1 . 50 0 . 701 6.7.3.8.1.2 Insulation systems, used for the purpose o f reducing the venting capacity, shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body . In all cases, insulation systems approv ed for this purpose shall: .1 remain effective at all temperatures up to 6 49 ° C; and .2 be jacketed with a material having a melting p oint of 700 ° C or greater . 6.7.3.9 Marking of pressure relief devices 6.7.3.9.1 Every pressure relief device shall be clea rly and permanently marked with the following: .1 the pressure (in bar or kPa) at which it is set to dis charge; .2 the allowable tolerance at the discharge pr essure, for spring-loaded devices; .3 the reference temperature correspond ing to the rated pressure, for frangible discs; .4 the rated flow capacity of the device in standa rd cubic metres of air per second (m 3 /s); and .5 the cross sectional flow areas of the spring- loaded pressure relief devices and frangible discs in mm ² . When practicable, the following informat ion shall also be shown: .6 the manufacturer’s name and relevant ca talogue number . 6.7.3.9.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the pressur e relief devices shall be determined according to ISO 4126-1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004 . 6.7.3.10 Connections to pressure relief devices 6.7.3.10.1 Connections to pressure relief devices s hall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the safety device . No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the pressure relief devices except when duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked so that at least one of the duplicate devices is always operable and capable of meeting the provisions of 6 . 7 . 3 . 8 . There shall be no obstruction in an opening l eading to a vent or pressure relief device which might restrict or cut off the flow from the shell to that device . Vents from the pressure relief devices, w hen used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving device . 6.7.3.11 Siting of pressure relief devices 6.7.3.11.1 Each pressure relief device inlet shall be s ituated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal and transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable . All pressure relief device inlets shall , under maximum filling conditions, be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly . For flammable non-refrigerated liqu efied gases, the escaping vapour shall be directed away from the shell in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the shell . Protective devices which deflect the flow of vapour are permissible provided the required relief-device capacity is not reduced . 6.7.3.11.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent acce ss to the pressure relief devices by unauthorized persons and to protect the devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 431

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 421 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.3.12 Gauging devices 6.7.3.12.1 Unless a portable tank is intended to be filled b y mass, it shall be equipped with one or more gauging devices . Glass level-gauges and gauges made of oth er fragile material, which are in direct communication with the contents of the shell, shall not be used . 6.7.3.13 Portable tank supports, frameworks, l ifting and tie-down attachments 6.7.3.13.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and const ructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during transport . The forces specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 9 and the safety factor specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 10 shall be considered in this aspect of the des ign . Skids, frameworks, cradles or other sim ilar structures are acceptable . 6.7.3.13.2 The combined stresses caused by portable t ank mountings (such as cradles, frameworks, etc . ) and portable tank lifting and tie-down att achments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the shell . Permanent lifting and tie-down attach ments shall be fitted to all portable tanks . Preferably they shall be fitted to the porta ble tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the shell at the points of support . 6.7.3.13.3 In the design of supports and frameworks, th e effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into account . 6.7.3.13.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable o f being closed off . The means of closing forklift poc kets shall be a permanent part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework . Single-compartment portable ta nks with a length less than 3 . 65 m need not have closed-off forklift pocke ts provided that: .1 the shell and all the fittings are well protect ed from being hit by the forklift blades; and .2 the distance between the centres of the fork lift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of the portable tank . 6.7.3.13.5 When portable tanks are not protected duri ng transport, according to 4 . 2 . 2 . 3, the shells and service equipment shall be protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral or longitudinal impact or overturning . External fittings shall be protected so as t o preclude the release of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings . Examples of protection include: .1 protection against lateral impact, whi ch may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both sides at the level of the median line; .2 protection of the portable tank aga inst overturning, which may consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the frame; .3 protection against rear impact, which ma y consist of a bumper or frame; .4 protection of the shell against damage fro m impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995 . 6.7.3.14 Design approval 6.7.3.14.1 The competent authority or its authorize d body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new design of a portable tank . This certificate shall attest that the p ortable tank has been surveyed by that authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the provisions of this chapter and, when appropriate, the provisions for gases provided in portable tank instruction T50 in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 . When a series of portable tanks are manufac tured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the entire series . The certificate shall refer to the prototy pe test report, the gases allowed to be transported, the materials of construction of the shell and an approval number . The approval number shall consist of the di stinguishing sign or mark of the State in whose territory the approval was granted, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic * and a registration number . Any alternative arrangements accord ing to 6 . 7 . 1 . 2 shall be indicated on the certificate . A design approval may serve for the approva l of smaller portable tanks made of materials of the same kind and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances . 6.7.3.14.2 The prototype test report for the design app roval shall include at least the following: .1 the results of the applicable framework te st specified in ISO 1496-3:1995; .2 the results of the initial inspection and te st in 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 3; and .3 the results of the impact test in 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 1, when applicable . 6.7.3.15 Inspection and testing 6.7.3.15.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of c ontainer in the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention) , as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the Manual of Tests and Criteria , part IV, section 41 . This provision only applies to po rtable tanks which are constructed according to a design approval certificate which has been issued on or after 1 January 2008 . * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 432

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 422 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.3.15.2 The shell and items of equipment of e ach portable tank shall be inspected and tested before being put into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year intervals (5-year periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test) mid way between the 5-year periodic inspections and tests . The 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test may be p erformed within 3 months of the specified date . An exceptional inspection and test shal l be performed regardless of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according to 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 7 . 6.7.3.15.3 The initial inspection and test of a portab le tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the non-refrigerated liquefied gases to be transported, and a pressure test referring to the test pressures according to 6 . 7 . 3 . 3 . 2 . The pressure test may be performed as a hydra ulic test or by using another liquid or gas with the agreement of the competent authority or its authorized body . Before the portable tank is placed into ser vice, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed . When the shell and its fittings have been pres sure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test . All welds subject to full stress level in the s hell shall be inspected during the initial test by radiographic, ultrasonic, or another suitable non-destructive test method . This does not apply to the jacket . 6.7.3.15.4 The 5-year periodic inspection and test sh all include an internal and external examination and, as a general rule, a hydraulic pressure test . Sheathing, thermal insulation and the l ike shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank . When the shell and equipment have been pres sure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test . 6.7.3.15.5 The intermediate 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test shal l at least include an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the non-refrigerated liquefied gases intended to be transported, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment . Sheathing, thermal insulation and the l ike shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank . For portable tanks intended for the trans port of a single non-refrigerated liquefied gas, the 2 . 5-year internal examination may be waive d or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures specified by the competent authority or its authorized body . 6.7.3.15.6 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for t ransport after the date of expiry of the last 5-year or 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test as req uired by 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 2 . However, a portable tank filled prior to the d ate of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test may be transported for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection . In addition, a portable tank may be transpo rted after the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection: .1 after emptying but before cleaning, for pu rposes of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling; and .2 unless otherwise approved by the compete nt authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling . Reference to this exemption shal l be mentioned in the transport document . Except as provided for in this paragraph, po rtable tanks which have missed the timeframe for their scheduled 5-year or 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test may on ly be filled and offered for transport if a new 5-year periodic inspection and test is performed according to 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 4 . 6.7.3.15.7 The exceptional inspection and test is nec essary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or corroded areas, or leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of the portable tank . The extent of the exceptional inspectio n and test shall depend on the amount of damage or deterioration of the portable tank . It shall include at least the 2 . 5-year inspection and test according to 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 5 . 6.7.3.15.8 The internal and external examinations s hall ensure that: .1 the shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions, including leakage, that m ight render the portable tank unsafe for transport . The wall thickness shall be verified by appr opriate measurement if this inspection indicates a reduction of wall thickness; .2 the piping, valves, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render th e portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or transport; .3 devices for tightening manhole covers are operative and there is no leakage at manhole covers or gaskets; .4 missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged con nection or blank flange are replaced or tightened; .5 all emergency devices and valves are free fr om corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation . Remote closure devices and self-closi ng stop-valves shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation; .6 required marks on the portable tank are legi ble and in accordance with the applicable provisions; and .7 the framework, the supports and the arrangements for lifting the portable tank are in satisfactory condition . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 433

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 423 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.3.15.9 The inspections and tests in 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 1, 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 3, 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 4, 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 5 and 6 . 7 . 3 . 15 . 7 shall be performed or witnessed by an ex pert approved by the competent authority or its authorized body . When the pressure test is a part of the i nspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the portable tank . While under pressure, the portable tank s hall be inspected for any leaks in the shell, piping or equipment . 6.7.3.15.10 In all cases when cutting, burning or weldin g operations on the shell have been effected, that work shall be to the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body, taking into account the pressure-vessel code used for the construction of the shell . A pressure test to the original test pressu re shall be performed after the work is completed . 6.7.3.15.11 When evidence of any unsafe condition is dis covered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service until it has been corrected and the pressure test is repeated and passed . 6.7.3.16 Marking 6.7.3.16.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corr osion-resistant metal plate permanently attached to the portable tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection . When for reasons of portable tank arrange ments the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at least the information required by the pressure-vessel code . As a minimum, at least the following inform ation shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method: (a) owner information (i) owner’s registration number; (b) manufacturing information (i) country of manufacture; (ii) year of manufacture; (iii) manufacturer’s name or mark; (iv) manufacturer’s serial number; (c) approval information (i) the United Nations packaging symbol: This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC compli es with the relevant requirements in chapters 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 6 . 3, 6 . 5, 6 . 6, 6 . 7 or 6 . 9; (ii) approval country; (iii) authorized body for the design approval; ( iv) design approval number; (v) letters “AA”, if the design was approved und er alternative arrangements (see 6 . 7 . 1 . 2); (vi) pressure-vessel code to which the shell is d esigned; (d) pressures (i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); * (ii) test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); * (iii) initial pressure test date (month and year); (iv) identification mark of the initial pressu re test witness; (v) external design pressure † (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); * (e) temperatures (i) design temperature range (in °C); * (ii) design reference temperature (in °C); * (f) materials (i) shell material(s) and material standard reference(s); (ii) equivalent thickness in reference steel (in m m); * (g) capacity (i) tank water capacity at 20°C (in litres); * (h) periodic inspections and tests (i) type of the most recent periodic test (2 . 5-year, 5-year or exceptional); (ii) date of the most recent periodic test (month a nd year); (iii) test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)* of th e most recent periodic test (if applicable); (iv) identification mark of the authorized bod y who performed or witnessed the most recent test . * The unit used shall be indicated . † See 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 8 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 434

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 424 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Figure 6.7.3.16.1 – Example of a plate for marking Owner’s registration number MANUFACTURING INFORMATION Country of manufacture Year of manufacture Manufacturer Manufacturer’s serial number APPROVAL INFORMATION Approval country Authorized body for design approval Design approval number “AA” (if applicable) Shell design code (pressure-vessel code) PRESSURES MAWP bar or kPa Test pressure bar or kPa Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp: External design pressure bar or kPa TEMPERATURES Design temperature range °C to °C Design reference temperature °C MATERIALS S hell material(s) and material standard reference(s) Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm CAPACITY Tank water capacity at 20°C litres PERIODIC INSPECTIONS/TESTS Test type Test date Witness stamp and test pressure a Test type Test date Witness stamp and test pressure a (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa a Test pressure if applicable . 6.7.3.16.2 The following information shall be durab ly marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank: Name of the operator Name of non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) permitted for transport Maximum permissible load mass for each non-refrigerated liquefied gas permitted … … … . kg Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM ) … … … . kg Unladen (tare) mass … … … . kg Portable tank instruction in accorda nce with 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 . 6.7.3.16.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved fo r handling in open seas, the words “OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK” shall be marked on the identification plate . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 435

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 425 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.4 Provisions for the design, construction, in spection and testing of portable tanks intended for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 6.7.4.1 Definitions For the purposes of this section: Holding time means the time that will elapse from the establishment of the initial filling condition until the pressure has risen due to heat influx to the lowest set pressure of the pressure-limiting device(s); Jacket means the outer insulation cover or cladding, which may be part of the insulation system; Leakproofness test means a test, using gas, subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective internal pressure not less than 90% of the MAWP; Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means the maximum effective gauge pressure permissible at the top of the shell of a filled portable tank in its operating position, including the highest effective pressure during filling and discharge; Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the heaviest load authorized for transport; Minimum design temperature means the temperature which is used for the design and construction of the shell, not higher than the lowest (coldest) temperature (service temperature) of the contents during normal conditions of filling, discharge and transport; Portable tank means a thermally insulated multimodal tank having a capacity of more than 450 L fitted with service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases . The portable tank shall be capable of being fi lled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment . It shall possess stabilizing members ex ternal to the tank, and shall be capable of being lifted when full . It shall be designed primarily to be loaded o nto a transport vehicle or ship and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling . Road tank-vehicles, rail tank-wagon s, non-metallic tanks, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), gas cylinders and large receptacles are not considered to fall within the definition for portable tanks; Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm 2 and an elongation at fracture of 27%; Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety, pressurizing, cooling and thermal insulation devices; Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the refrigerated liquefied gas intended for transport, including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural equipment; Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the shell; Tank means a construction which normally consists of either: (a) a jacket and one or more inner shells where the sp ace between the shell(s) and the jacket is exhausted of air (vacuum insulation) and may incorporate a thermal insulation system; or (b) a jacket and an inner shell with an intermed iate layer of solid thermally insulating material (such as solid foam); Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the pressure test . 6.7.4.2 General design and construction pro visions 6.7.4.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed i n accordance with the provisions of a pressure-vessel code recognized by the competent authority . Shells and jackets shall be made of metalli c materials suitable for forming . Jackets shall be made of steel . Non-metallic materials may be used for th e attachments and supports between the shell and jacket, provided their material properties at the minimum design temperature are proven to be sufficient . The materials shall, in principle, conf orm to national or international material standards . For welded shells and jackets, only mater ials whose weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used . Welds shall be skilfully made and afford co mplete safety . When the manufacturing process or the mat erials make it necessary, the shell shall be suitably heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat-affected zones . In choosing the material, the min imum design temperature shall be taken into account with respect to risk of brittle fracture, to hydrogen embrittlement, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact . When fine-grain steel is used, the guarante ed value of the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm 2 and the guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm 2 , in accordance with the material specifications . Portable tank materials shall be suitab le for the external environment in which they may be transported . 6.7.4.2.2 Any part of a portable tank, including fittin gs, gaskets and pipe-work, which can be expected normally to come into contact with the refrigerated liquefied gas transported shall be compatible with that refrigerated liquefied gas . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 436

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 426 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.4.2.3 Contact between dissimilar metals whic h could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided . 6.7.4.2.4 The thermal insulation system shall incl ude a complete covering of the shell(s) with effective insulating materials . External insulation shall be pro tected by a jacket so as to prevent the ingress of moisture and other damage under normal transport conditions . 6.7.4.2.5 When a jacket is so closed as to be gas-tigh t, a device shall be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulation space . 6.7.4.2.6 Portable tanks intended for the transpor t of refrigerated liquefied gases having a boiling point below - 182 ° C at atmospheric pressure shall not include materials which may react with oxygen or oxygen-enriched atmospheres in a dangerous manner when located in parts of the thermal insulation when there is a risk of contact with oxygen or with oxygen-enriched fluid . 6.7.4.2.7 Insulating materials shall not deteriora te unduly in service . 6.7.4.2.8 A reference holding time shall be determin ed for each refrigerated liquefied gas intended for transport in a portable tank . 6.7.4.2.8.1 The reference holding time shall be determ ined by a method recognized by the competent authority on the basis of the following: .1 the effectiveness of the insulation syst em, determined in accordance with 6 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 8 . 2; .2 the lowest set pressure of the pressure-li miting device(s); .3 the initial filling conditions; .4 an assumed ambient temperature of 30 ° C; .5 the physical properties of the individua l refrigerated liquefied gas intended to be transported . 6.7.4.2.8.2 The effectiveness of the insulation syst em (heat influx in watts) shall be determined by type testing the portable tank in accordance with a procedure recognized by the competent authority . This test shall consist of either: .1 a constant-pressure test (for example at a tmospheric pressure), when the loss of refrigerated liquefied gas is measured over a period of time; or .2 a closed-system test, when the rise in press ure in the shell is measured over a period of time . When performing the constant-pressur e test, variations in atmospheric pressure shall be taken into account . When performing either test, correcti ons shall be made for any variation of the ambient temperature from the assumed ambient temperature reference value of 30 ° C . Note: For the determination of the actual hold ing time before each journey, see 4 . 2 . 3 . 7 . 6.7.4.2.9 The jacket of a vacuum-insulated double-wa ll tank shall have either an external design pressure not less than 100 kPa (1 bar) gauge pressure calculated in accordance with a recognized technical code or a calculated critical collapsing pressure of not less than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure . Internal and external reinforcement s may be included in calculating the ability of the jacket to resist the external pressure . 6.7.4.2.10 Portable tanks shall be designed and const ructed with supports to provide a secure base during transport and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments . 6.7.4.2.11 Portable tanks shall be designed to withst and, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the contents and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and transport . The design shall demonstrate that the effe cts of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account . 6.7.4.2.11.1 For tanks that are intended for use as offshor e tank-containers, the dynamic stresses imposed by handling in open seas shall be taken into account . 6.7.4.2.12 Portable tanks and their fastenings unde r the maximum permissible load shall be capable of absorbing the following separately applied static forces: .1 in the direction of travel: twice the MPGM mul tiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * .2 horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * .3 vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * and .4 vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (to tal loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ) . * * For calculation purposes, g = 9 . 81 m/s 2 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 437

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 427 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.4.2.13 Under each of the forces in 6 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 12, the safety factor to be observed shall be as f ollows: .1 for materials having a clearly defined yiel d point, a safety factor of 1 . 5 in relation to the guaranteed yield strengt h; or .2 for materials with no clearly defined yield p oint, a safety factor of 1 . 5 in relation to the guaranteed 0 . 2% proof strength or, for austenitic steel s, the 1% proof strength . 6.7.4.2.14 The values of yield strength or proof streng th shall be the values according to national or international material standards . When austenitic steels are used, the speci fied minimum values according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate . When no material standard exists for the me tal in question, or when non-metallic materials are used, the values of yield strength or proof strength shall be approved by the competent authority . 6.7.4.2.15 Portable tanks intended for the tra nsport of flammable refrigerated liquefied gases shall be capable of being electrically earthed . 6.7.4.3 Design criteria 6.7.4.3.1 Shells shall be of a circular cross-secti on . 6.7.4.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed t o withstand a test pressure not less than 1 . 3 times the MAWP . For shells with vacuum insulation, the test pressure shall not be less than 1 . 3 times the sum of the MAWP and 100 kPa (1 b ar) . In no case shall the test pressure be less than 3 00 kPa (3 bar) gauge pressure . Attention is drawn to the minimum shell thi ckness provisions, specified in 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 2 to 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 7 . 6.7.4.3.3 For metals exhibiting a clearly defined yie ld point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength (0 . 2% proof strength, generally, or 1% proof st rength for austenitic steels), the primary membrane stress σ (sigma) in the shell shall not exceed 0 . 75 R e or 0 . 50 R m , whichever is lower, at the test pressure, where: R e = yield strength in N/mm 2 , or 0 . 2% proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1% proof strength; R m = minimum tensile strength in N/mm 2 . 6.7.4.3.3.1 The values of R e and R m to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or international material standards . When austenitic steels are used, t he specified minimum values for R e and R m according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate . When no material standard exists for the me tal in question, the values of R e and R m used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body . 6.7.4.3.3.2 Steels which have a R e /R m ratio of more than 0 . 85 are not allowed for the construct ion of welded shells . The values of R e and R m to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material inspection certificate . 6.7.4.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells sh all have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/ R m with an absolute minimum of 16% for fine-grain steels and 20% for other steels . Aluminium and aluminium alloys used in th e construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/6 R m with an absolute minimum of 12% . 6.7.4.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actu al values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling . The permanent elongation at fracture sh all be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross-section in accordance with ISO 6892:1998 using a 50 mm gauge length . 6.7.4.4 Minimum shell thickness 6.7.4.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the gre ater thickness based on: .1 the minimum thickness determined in acco rdance with the provisions in 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 2 to 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 7; and .2 the minimum thickness determined in acco rdance with the recognized pressure-vessel code, including the provisions in 6 . 7 . 4 . 3 . 6.7.4.4.2 Shells of not more than 1 . 80 m in diameter shall be not less than 5 mm thick in th e reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used . Shells of more than 1 . 80 m in diameter shall be not less than 6 mm thick in th e reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used . 6.7.4.4.3 Shells of vacuum-insulated tanks o f not more than 1 . 80 m in diameter shall be not less than 3 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used . Such shells of more than 1 . 80 m in diameter shall be not less than 4 mm thick in th e reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 438

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 428 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.4.4.4 For vacuum-insulated tanks, the aggreg ate thickness of the jacket and the shell shall correspond to the minimum thickness prescribed in 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 2, the thickness of the shell itself being not l ess than the minimum thickness prescribed in 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 3 . 6.7.4.4.5 Shells shall be not less than 3 mm thick regardl ess of the material of construction . 6.7.4.4.6 The equivalent thickness of a metal other th an the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 2 and 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 3 shall be determined using the following e quation: e 1 = 21 . 4 × e 0 ________ 3 √ _________ R m1 × A 1 where: e 1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the steel to be used; e 0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 2 and 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 3; R m1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm 2 ) of the metal to be used (see 6 . 7 . 4 . 3 . 3); A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to national or international standards . 6.7.4.4.7 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than t hat prescribed in 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 1 to 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 5 . All parts of the shell shall have a minimum thi ckness as determined by 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 1 to 6 . 7 . 4 . 4 . 6 . This thickness shall be exclusive of any cor rosion allowance . 6.7.4.4.8 There shall be no sudden change of plate thick ness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the cylindrical portion of the shell . 6.7.4.5 Service equipment 6.7.4.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as t o be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or damaged during handling and transport . When the connection between the frame and t he tank or the jacket and the shell allows relative movement, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without risk of damage to working parts . The external discharge fittings (pipe so ckets, shut-off devices), the stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by external forces (for example, by using shear sections) . The filling and discharge devices (inclu ding flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening . 6.7.4.5.1.1 For offshore tank-containers, where positioning of service equipment and the design and strength of protection for such equipment is concerned, the increased danger of impact damage when handling such tanks in open seas shall be taken into account . 6.7.4.5.2 Each filling and discharge opening in porta ble tanks used for the transport of flammable refrigerated liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least three mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first being a stop-valve situated as close as reasonably practicable to the jacket, the second being a stop-valve and the third being a blank flange or equivalent device . The shut-off device closest to the jack et shall be a quick- closing device, which closes automatically in the event of unintended movement of the portable tank during filling or discharge or fire engulfment . This device shall also be possible to opera te by remote control . 6.7.4.5.3 Each filling and discharge opening in porta ble tanks used for the transport of non-flammable refrigerated liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least two mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first being a stop-valve situated as close as reasonably practicable to the jacket, the second a blank flange or equivalent device . 6.7.4.5.4 For sections of piping which can be c losed at both ends and where liquid product can be trapped, a method of automatic pressure relief shall be provided to prevent excess pressure build-up within the piping . 6.7.4.5.5 Vacuum-insulated tanks need not have an ope ning for inspection . 6.7.4.5.6 External fittings shall be grouped togeth er so far as reasonably practicable . 6.7.4.5.7 Each connection on a portable tank shall be cl early marked to indicate its function . 6.7.4.5.8 Each stop-valve or other means of cl osure shall be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less than the MAWP of the shell, taking into account the temperature expected during transport . All stop-valves with a screwed spindle sh all be closed by a clockwise motion of the handwheel . In the case of other stop-valves, the posit ion (open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated . All stop-valves shall be designed to pre vent unintentional opening . 6.7.4.5.9 When pressure-building units are used, th e liquid and vapour connections to that unit shall be provided with a valve as close to the jacket as reasonably practicable to prevent the loss of contents in case of damage to the pressure-building unit . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 439

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 429 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.4.5.10 Piping shall be designed, construct ed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration . All piping shall be of a suitable material . To prevent leakage due to fire, only steel pip ing and welded joints shall be used between the jacket and the connection to the first closure of any outlet . The method of attaching the closu re to this connection shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body . Elsewhere, pipe joints shall be welded wh en necessary . 6.7.4.5.11 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or hav e an equally strong metal union . The melting point of brazing materials sh all be no lower than 525 ° C . The joints shall not decrease the strengt h of the tubing, as may happen by cutting of threads . 6.7.4.5.12 The materials of construction of valves an d accessories shall have satisfactory properties at the lowest operating temperature of the portable tank . 6.7.4.5.13 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fitti ngs shall be not less than the highest of four times the MAWP of the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a pump or other device (except pressure relief devices) . 6.7.4.6 Pressure relief devices 6.7.4.6.1 Every shell shall be provided with n ot less than two independent spring-loaded pressure relief devices . The pressure relief devices shall open a utomatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully open at a pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP . These devices shall, after discharge, c lose at a pressure not lower than 10% below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower pressures . The pressure relief devices shall be of the t ype that will resist dynamic forces, including surge . 6.7.4.6.2 Shells for non-flammable refrigerated l iquefied gases and hydrogen may in addition have frangible discs in parallel with the spring-loaded devices as specified in 6 . 7 . 4 . 7 . 2 and 6 . 7 . 4 . 7 . 3 . 6.7.4.6.3 Pressure relief devices shall be designe d to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure . 6.7.4.6.4 Pressure relief devices shall be approve d by the competent authority or its authorized body . 6.7.4.7 Capacity and setting of pressure relief de vices 6.7.4.7.1 In the case of the loss of vacuum in a vacuum-insu lated tank or of loss of 20% of the insulation of a tank insulated with solid materials, the combined capacity of all pressure relief devices installed shall be sufficient so that the pressure (including accumulation) inside the shell does not exceed 120% of the MAWP . 6.7.4.7.2 For non-flammable refrigerated liquefi ed gases (except oxygen) and hydrogen, this capacity may be achieved by the use of frangible discs in parallel with the required safety relief devices . Frangible discs shall rupture at nomin al pressure equal to the test pressure of the shell . 6.7.4.7.3 Under the circumstances described i n 6 . 7 . 4 . 7 . 1 and 6 . 7 . 4 . 7 . 2 together with complete fire engulfm ent, the combined capacity of all pressure relief devices installed shall be sufficient to limit the pressure in the shell to the test pressure . 6.7.4.7.4 The required capacity of the relief device s shall be calculated in accordance with a well-established technical code recognized by the competent authority . * 6.7.4.8 Marking of pressure relief devices 6.7.4.8.1 Every pressure relief device shall be plai nly and permanently marked with the following: .1 the pressure (in bar or kPa) at which it is set to dis charge; .2 the allowable tolerance at the discharge pr essure, for spring-loaded devices; .3 the reference temperature correspond ing to the rated pressure, for frangible discs; .4 the rated flow capacity of the device in standa rd cubic metres of air per second (m 3 /s); and .5 the cross sectional flow areas of the spring- loaded pressure relief devices and frangible discs in mm ² . When practicable, the following informat ion shall also be shown: .6 the manufacturer’s name and relevant ca talogue number . 6.7.4.8.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the pressur e relief devices shall be determined according to ISO 4126-1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004 . * See, e . g . CGA S-1 . 2-2003 Pressure Relief Device Standard s – Part 2 – Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 440

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 430 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.4.9 Connections to pressure relief devices 6.7.4.9.1 Connections to pressure relief devices s hall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the safety device . No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the pressure relief devices except when duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked so that the provisions of 6 . 7 . 4 . 7 are always fulfilled . There shall be no obstruction in a n opening leading to a vent or pressure relief device which might restrict or cut off the flow from the shell to that device . Pipework to vent the vapour or liquid from the outlet of the pressure relief devices, when used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving device . 6.7.4.10 Siting of pressure relief devices 6.7.4.10.1 Each pressure relief device inlet shall be s ituated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal and transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable . All pressure relief device inlets shall , under maximum filling conditions, be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly . For refrigerated liquefied gases, the es caping vapour shall be directed away from the tank and in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the tank . Protective devices which deflect the flow o f vapour are permissible provided the required relief-device capacity is not reduced . 6.7.4.10.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent acce ss to the devices by unauthorized persons and to protect the devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning . 6.7.4.11 Gauging devices 6.7.4.11.1 Unless a portable tank is intended to be filled b y mass, it shall be equipped with one or more gauging devices . Glass level-gauges and gauges made of oth er fragile material, which are in direct communication with the contents of the shell, shall not be used . 6.7.4.11.2 A connection for a vacuum gauge shall be provi ded in the jacket of a vacuum-insulated portable tank . 6.7.4.12 Portable tank supports, frameworks, l ifting and tie-down attachments 6.7.4.12.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and const ructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during transport . The forces specified in 6 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 12 and the safety factor specified in 6 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 13 shall be considered in this aspect of the des ign . Skids, frameworks, cradles or other sim ilar structures are acceptable . 6.7.4.12.2 The combined stresses caused by portable t ank mountings (such as cradles, frameworks, etc . ) and portable tank lifting and tie-down att achments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the tank . Permanent lifting and tie-down attach ments shall be fitted to all portable tanks . Preferably they shall be fitted to the porta ble tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the tank at the points of support . 6.7.4.12.3 In the design of supports and frameworks, th e effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into account . 6.7.4.12.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable o f being closed off . The means of closing forklift poc kets shall be a permanent part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework . Single-compartment portable ta nks with a length less than 3 . 65 m need not have closed-off forklift pocke ts provided that: .1 the tank and all the fittings are well protecte d from being hit by the forklift blades; and .2 the distance between the centres of the fork lift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of the portable tank . 6.7.4.12.5 When portable tanks are not protected duri ng transport, according to 4 . 2 . 3 . 3, the shells and service equipment shall be protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral or longitudinal impact or overturning . External fittings shall be protected so as t o preclude the release of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings . Examples of protection include: .1 protection against lateral impact, whi ch may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both sides at the level of the median line; .2 protection of the portable tank aga inst overturning, which may consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the frame; .3 protection against rear impact, which ma y consist of a bumper or frame; .4 protection of the shell against damage fro m impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995; .5 protection of the portable tank from impac t or overturning by a vacuum insulation jacket . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 441

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 431 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.4.13 Design approval 6.7.4.13.1 The competent authority or its authorize d body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new design of a portable tank . This certificate shall attest that a porta ble tank has been surveyed by that authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the provisions of this chapter . When a series of portable tanks are manufac tured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the entire series . The certificate shall refer to the prototy pe test report, the refrigerated liquefied gases allowed to be transported, the materials of construction of the shell and jacket and an approval number . The approval number shall consist of the di stinguishing sign or mark of the State in whose territory the approval was granted, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic * and a registration number . Any alternative arrangements accord ing to 6 . 7 . 1 . 2 shall be indicated on the certificate . A design approval may serve for the approva l of smaller portable tanks made of materials of the same kind and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances . 6.7.4.13.2 The prototype test report for the design app roval shall include at least the following: .1 the results of the applicable framework te st specified in ISO 1496-3:1995; .2 the results of the initial inspection and te st in 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 3; and .3 the results of the impact test in 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 1, when applicable . 6.7.4.14 Inspection and testing 6.7.4.14.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of c ontainer in the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the Manual of Tests and Criteria , part IV, section 41 . This provision only applies to po rtable tanks which are constructed according to a design approval certificate which has been issued on or after 1 January 2008 . 6.7.4.14.2 The tank and items of equipment of each portab le tank shall be inspected and tested before being put into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year intervals (5-year periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test) mid way between the 5-year periodic inspections and tests . The 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test may be p erformed within 3 months of the specified date . An exceptional inspection and test shal l be performed regardless of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according to 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 7 . 6.7.4.14.3 The initial inspection and test of a portab le tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an internal and external examination of the portable tank shell and its fittings with due regard to the refrigerated liquefied gases to be transported, and a pressure test referring to the test pressures according to 6 . 7 . 4 . 3 . 2 . The pressure test may be performed as a hydra ulic test or by using another liquid or gas, with the agreement of the competent authority or its authorized body . Before the portable tank is placed into ser vice, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed . When the shell and its fittings have been pr essure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test . All welds subject to full stress level shal l be inspected during the initial test by radiographic, ultrasonic, or another suitable non-destructive test method . This does not apply to the jacket . 6.7.4.14.4 The 5-year and 2 . 5-year periodic inspections and tests sh all include an external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the refrigerated liquefied gases transported, a leakproofness test, a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment and a vacuum reading, when applicable . In the case of non-vacuum-insulated tan ks, the jacket and insulation shall be removed during the 2 . 5-year and the 5-year periodic inspectio ns and tests, but only to the extent necessary for a reliable appraisal . 6.7.4.14.5 [Reserved] 6.7.4.14.6 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for t ransport after the date of expiry of the last 5-year or 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test as req uired by 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 2 . However, a portable tank filled prior to the d ate of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test may be transported for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection . In addition, a portable tank may be transpo rted after the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection: .1 after emptying but before cleaning, for pu rposes of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling; and .2 unless otherwise approved by the compete nt authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling . Reference to this exemption shal l be mentioned in the transport document . * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 442

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 432 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Except as provided for in this paragraph, portable tanks which have missed the timeframe for their scheduled 5-year or 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test may on ly be filled and offered for transport if a new 5-year periodic inspection and test is performed according to 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 4 . 6.7.4.14.7 The exceptional inspection and test is nec essary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or corroded areas, leakage, or any other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of the portable tank . The extent of the exceptional inspectio n and test shall depend on the amount of damage or deterioration of the portable tank . It shall include at least the 2 . 5-year periodic inspection and test acco rding to 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 4 . 6.7.4.14.8 The internal examination during the init ial inspection and test shall ensure that the shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions that might render the portable tank unsafe for transport . 6.7.4.14.9 The external examination shall ensure tha t: .1 the external piping, valves, pressuriz ing/cooling systems when applicable, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or transport; .2 there is no leakage at any manhole covers or gas kets; .3 missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged con nection or blank flange are replaced or tightened; .4 all emergency devices and valves are free fr om corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation . Remote closure devices and self-closi ng stop-valves shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation; .5 required marks on the portable tank are legi ble and in accordance with the applicable provisions; and .6 the framework, the supports and the arrangements for lifting the portable tank are in satisfactory condition . 6.7.4.14.10 The inspections and tests in 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 1, 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 3, 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 4 and 6 . 7 . 4 . 14 . 7 shall be performed or witnessed by an expert a pproved by the competent authority or its authorized body . When the pressure test is a part of the inspect ion and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the portable tank . While under pressure, the portable tan k shall be inspected for any leaks in the shell, piping or equipment . 6.7.4.14.11 In all cases when cutting, burning or weldin g operations on the shell of a portable tank have been effected, that work shall be to the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body, taking into account the pressure-vessel code used for the construction of the shell . A pressure test to the original test pressu re shall be performed after the work is completed . 6.7.4.14.12 When evidence of any unsafe condition is dis covered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service until it has been corrected and the test is repeated and passed . 6.7.4.15 Marking 6.7.4.15.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corr osion-resistant metal plate permanently attached to the portable tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection . When for reasons of portable tank arrange ments the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at least the information required by the pressure-vessel code . As a minimum, at least the following inform ation shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method: (a) owner information (i) owner’s registration number; (b) manufacturing information (i) country of manufacture; (ii) year of manufacture; (iii) manufacturer’s name or mark; (iv) manufacturer’s serial number; (c) approval information (i) the United Nations packaging symbol: This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC compli es with the relevant requirements in chapters 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 6 . 3, 6 . 5, 6 . 6, 6 . 7 or 6 . 9; (ii) approval country; (iii) authorized body for the design approval; ( iv) design approval number; ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 443

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 433 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (v) letters “AA”, if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6 . 7 . 1 . 2); (vi) pressure-vessel code to which the shell is d esigned; (d) pressures (i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); * (ii) test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); * (iii) initial pressure test date (month and year); (iv) identification mark of the initial pressu re test witness; (e) temperatures (i) minimum design temperature (in °C); * (f) materials (i) shell material(s) and material standard reference(s); (ii) equivalent thickness in reference steel (in m m); * (g) capacity (i) tank water capacity at 20°C (in litres); * (h) insulation (i) either “Thermally insulated” or “Vacuum insulated” (as applicable); (ii) effectiveness of the insulation system ( heat influx) (in Watts); * (i) holding times – for each refrigerated liquefied gas permitted to be transported in the portable tank: (i) name, in full, of the refrigerated liquefie d gas; (ii) reference holding time (in days or hours); * (iii) initial pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); * (iv) degree of filling (in kg); * (j) periodic inspections and tests (i) type of the most recent periodic test (2 . 5-year, 5-year or exceptional); (ii) date of the most recent periodic test (month a nd year); (iii) identification mark of the authorized bod y who performed or witnessed the most recent test . * The unit used shall be indicated . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 444

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 434 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Figure 6.7.4.15.1 – Example of a plate for marking Owner’s registration number MANUFACTURING INFORMATION Country of manufacture Year of manufacture Manufacturer Manufacturer’s serial number APPROVAL INFORMATION Approval country Authorized body for design approval Design approval number “AA” (if applicable) Shell design code (pressure-vessel code) PRESSURES MAWP bar or kPa Test pressure bar or kPa Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp: TEMPERATURES Minimum design temperature °C MATERIALS Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s) Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm CAPACITY Tank water capacity at 20°C litres INSULATION “Thermally insulated” or “Vacuum insulated” (as applicable) Heat influx Watts HOLDING TIMES Refrigerated liquefied gas(es) permitted Reference holding time Initial pressure Degree of filling days or hours bar or kPa kg PERIODIC INSPECTIONS/TESTS Test type Test date Witness stamp Test type Test date Witness stamp (mm/yyyy) (mm/yyyy) Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 445

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 435 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.4.15.2 The following information shall be durab ly marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank: Name of the owner and the operator Name of the refrigerated liquefied gas being transported (and minimum mean bulk temperature) Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) … … … . kg Unladen (tare) mass … … … . kg Actual holding time for gas being transp orted … … … . days (or hours) Portable tank instructi on in accordance with 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 . 6.7.4.15.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved fo r handling in open seas, the words “OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK” shall be marked on the identification plate . 6.7.5 Provisions for the design, construction, in spection and testing of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) intended for the transport of non-refrigerated gases 6.7.5.1 Definitions For the purposes of this section: Elements are cylinders, tubes or bundles of cylinders; Leakproofness test means a test, using gas, subjecting the elements and the service equipment of the MEGC to an effective internal pressure of not less than 20% of the test pressure; Manifold means an assembly of piping and valves connecting the filling and/or discharge openings of the elements; Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the MEGC and the heaviest load authorized for transport; Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting and safety devices; Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the elements . 6.7.5.2 General design and construction pro visions 6.7.5.2.1 The MEGC shall be capable of being filled and dis charged without the removal of its structural equipment . It shall possess stabilizing members ex ternal to the elements to provide structural integrity for handling and transport . MEGCs shall be designed and constructed w ith supports to provide a secure base during transport and with lifting and tie-down attachments which are adequate for lifting the MEGC, including when loaded to its maximum permissible gross mass . The MEGC shall be designed to be loaded onto or i nto a vehicle or ship and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling . 6.7.5.2.2 MEGCs shall be designed, manufactured and e quipped in such a way as to withstand all conditions to which they will be subjected during normal conditions of handling and transport . The design shall take into account the effe cts of dynamic loading and fatigue . 6.7.5.2.3 Elements of an MEGC shall be made of seamless s teel or composite construction and be constructed and tested according to chapter 6 . 2 . All of the elements in an MEGC shall be of the same d esign type . 6.7.5.2.4 Elements of MEGCs, fittings and pipework sh all be: .1 compatible with the substances intended to be transported (for gases, see ISO 11114-1:2012 + Amd 1:2017 and ISO 11114-2:2013); or .2 properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction . 6.7.5.2.5 Contact between dissimilar metals whic h could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided . 6.7.5.2.6 The materials of the MEGC, including any dev ices, gaskets, and accessories, shall not adversely affect the gases intended for transport in the MEGC . 6.7.5.2.7 MEGCs shall be designed to withstand, witho ut loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the contents, and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and transport . The design shall demonstrate that the effec ts of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads through the expected life of the multiple-element gas container, have been taken into account . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 446

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 436 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.5.2.8 MEGCs and their fastenings shall, under th e maximum permissible load, be capable of withstanding the following separately applied static forces: .1 in the direction of travel: twice the MPGM mul tiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * .2 horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * .3 vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ); * and .4 vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (to tal loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity ( g ) . * 6.7.5.2.9 Under the forces defined above, the stress at t he most severely stressed point of the elements shall not exceed the values given in either the relevant standards of 6 . 2 . 2 . 1 or, if the elements are not designed, constru cted and tested according to those standards, in the technical code or standard recognized or approved by the competent authority of the country of use (see 6 . 2 . 3 . 1) . 6.7.5.2.10 Under each of the forces in 6 . 7 . 5 . 2 . 8, the safety factor for the framework and fas tenings to be observed shall be as follows: .1 for steels having a clearly defined yield po int, a safety factor of 1 . 5 in relation to the guaranteed yield streng th; or .2 for steels with no clearly defined yield poin t, a safety factor of 1 . 5 in relation to the guaranteed 0 . 2% proof strength and, for austenitic steel s, the 1% proof strength . 6.7.5.2.11 MEGCs intended for the transport of flammab le gases shall be capable of being electrically earthed . 6.7.5.2.12 The elements shall be secured in a ma nner that prevents undesired movement in relation to the structure and the concentration of harmful localized stresses . 6.7.5.3 Service equipment 6.7.5.3.1 Service equipment shall be configured or de signed to prevent damage that could result in the release of the pressure receptacle contents during normal conditions of handling and transport . When the connection between the frame and t he elements allows relative movement between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without damage to working parts . The manifolds, the discharge fittings (p ipe sockets, shut-off devices), and the stop-valves shall be protected from being wrenched off by external forces . Manifold piping leading to shut-off val ves shall be sufficiently flexible to protect the valves and the piping from shearing, or releasing the pressure receptacle contents . The filling and discharge devices (inclu ding flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening . 6.7.5.3.2 Each element intended for the transport of g ases of class 2 . 3 shall be fitted with a valve . The manifold for liquefied gases of class 2 . 3 shall be so designed that the elements can be fil led separately and be kept isolated by a valve capable of being sealed . For the transport of gases of class 2 . 1, the elements shall be divided into groups o f not more than 3,000 L each isolated by a valve . 6.7.5.3.3 For filling and discharge openings of the MEG C, two valves in series shall be placed in an accessible position on each discharge and filling pipe . One of the valves may be a non-return valve . The filling and discharge devices may be fitt ed to a manifold . For sections of piping which can be closed at b oth ends and where a liquid product can be trapped, a pressure relief valve shall be provided to prevent excessive pressure build-up . The main isolation valves on an MEGC shall be c learly marked to indicate their directions of closure . Each stop-valve or other means of closure s hall be designed and constructed to withstand a pressure equal to or greater than 1 . 5 times the test pressure of the MEGC . All stop-valves with screwed spindles s hall close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel . For other stop-valves, the positions (o pen and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated . All stop-valves shall be designed and pos itioned to prevent unintentional opening . Ductile metals shall be used in the constru ction of valves or accessories . 6.7.5.3.4 Piping shall be designed, constructed and i nstalled so as to avoid damage due to expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration . Joints in tubing shall be brazed or have an equ ally strong metal union . The melting point of brazing materials sh all be no lower than 525 ° C . The rated pressure of the service equipme nt and of the manifold shall be not less than two thirds of the test pressure of the elements . 6.7.5.4 Pressure relief devices 6.7.5.4.1 The elements of MEGCs used for the tr ansport of UN 1013 carbon dioxide and UN 1070 nitrous oxide shall be divided into groups of not more than 3,000 L each isolated by a valve . Each group shall be fitted with one * For calculation purposes, g = 9 . 81 m/s 2 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 447

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 437 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 or more pressure relief devices . If so required by the competent authori ty of the country of use, MEGCs for other gases shall be fitted with pressure relief devices as specified by that competent authority . 6.7.5.4.2 When pressure relief devices are fitted, eve ry element or group of elements of an MEGC that can be isolated shall then be fitted with one or more pressure relief devices . Pressure relief devices shall be of a type th at will resist dynamic forces, including liquid surge, and shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure . 6.7.5.4.3 MEGCs used for the transport of certain non- refrigerated gases identified in instruction T50 in 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 . 6 may have a pressure relief device as requir ed by the competent authority of the country of use . Unless an MEGC in dedicated service is fitte d with an approved pressure relief device constructed of materials compatible with the load, such a device shall comprise a frangible disc preceding a spring-loaded device . The space between the frangible disc and th e spring-loaded device may be equipped with a pressure gauge or a suitable tell-tale indicator . This arrangement permits the detectio n of disc rupture, pinholing or leakage which could cause a malfunction of the pressure relief device . The frangible disc shall rupture at a nomin al pressure 10% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the spring-loaded device . 6.7.5.4.4 In the case of multi-purpose MEGCs used for th e transport of low-pressure liquefied gases, the pressure relief devices shall open at a pressure as specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 1 for the gas having the highest maximum allow able working pressure of the gases allowed to be transported in the MEGC . 6.7.5.5 Capacity of pressure relief devices 6.7.5.5.1 The combined delivery capacity of the pres sure relief devices when fitted shall be sufficient that, in the event of complete fire engulfment of the MEGC, the pressure (including accumulation) inside the elements does not exceed 120% of the set pressure of the pressure relief device . The formula provided in CGA S-1 . 2-2003 Pressure Relief Device Standard s, Part 2, Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases shall be used to determine the minimum total flow capacity for the system of pressure relief devices . CGA S-1 . 1-2003 Pressure Relief Device Stand ards, Part 1, Cylinders for Compressed Gases may be used to determine the relief capacity of individual elements . Spring-loaded pressure relief dev ices may be used to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed in the case of low-pressure liquefied gases . In the case of multi-purpose MEGCs, the com bined delivery capacity of the pressure relief devices shall be taken for the gas which requires the highest delivery capacity of the gases allowed to be transported in the MEGC . 6.7.5.5.2 To determine the total required capacity o f the pressure relief devices installed on the elements for the transport of liquefied gases, the thermodynamic properties of the gas shall be considered (see, for example, CGA S-1 . 2-2003 Pressure Relief Device Standard s, Part 2, Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases for low-pressure liquefied gases and CGA S-1 . 1-2003 Pressure Relief Device Standar ds, Part 1, Cylinders for Compressed Gases for high-pressure liquefied gases) . 6.7.5.6 Marking of pressure relief devices 6.7.5.6.1 Pressure relief devices shall be clearly a nd permanently marked with the following: (a) the manufacturer’s name and relevant ca talogue number; (b) the set pressure and/or the set temperatur e; (c) the date of the last test; and (d) the cross sectional flow areas of the spring- loaded pressure relief devices and frangible discs in mm ² . 6.7.5.6.2 The rated flow capacity marked on spring-lo aded pressure relief devices for low-pressure liquefied gases shall be determined according to ISO 4126-1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004 . 6.7.5.7 Connections to pressure relief devices 6.7.5.7.1 Connections to pressure relief devices s hall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the pressure relief device . No stop-valve shall be installed betwee n the element and the pressure relief devices, except when duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons, and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open, or the stop-valves are interlocked so that at least one of the duplicate devices is always operable and capable of meeting the requirements of 6 . 7 . 5 . 5 . There shall be no obstruction in an opening l eading to or leaving from a vent or pressure relief device which might restrict or cut off the flow from the element to that device . The opening through all piping and fitting s shall have at least the same flow area as the inlet of the pressure relief device to which it is connected . The nominal size of the discharge piping sh all be at least as large as that of the pressure relief device outlet . Vents from the pressure relief devices, w hen used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving device . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 448

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 438 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.5.8 Siting of pressure relief devices 6.7.5.8.1 Each pressure relief device shall, under maximum filling conditions, be in communication with the vapour space of the elements for the transport of liquefied gases . The devices, when fitted, shall be so arrange d as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged upwards and unrestrictedly so as to prevent any impingement of escaping gas or liquid upon the MEGC, its elements or personnel . For flammable, pyrophoric and oxidizin g gases, the escaping gas shall be directed away from the element in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the other elements . Heat-resistant protective devices w hich deflect the flow of gas are permissible provided the required pressure relief device capacity is not reduced . 6.7.5.8.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent acce ss to the pressure relief devices by unauthorized persons and to protect the devices from damage caused by the MEGC overturning . 6.7.5.9 Gauging devices 6.7.5.9.1 When an MEGC is intended to be filled by mass , it shall be equipped with one or more gauging devices . Level-gauges made of glass or other fragi le material shall not be used . 6.7.5.10 MEGC supports, frameworks, lifting and t ie-down attachments 6.7.5.10.1 MEGCs shall be designed and constructed wi th a support structure to provide a secure base during transport . The forces specified in 6 . 7 . 5 . 2 . 8 and the safety factor specified in 6 . 7 . 5 . 2 . 10 shall be considered in this aspect of the des ign . Skids, frameworks, cradles or other sim ilar structures are acceptable . 6.7.5.10.2 The combined stresses caused by element mo untings (e . g . cradles, frameworks, etc . ) and MEGC lifting and tie-down attachment s shall not cause excessive stress in any element . Permanent lifting and tie-down attach ments shall be fitted to all MEGCs . In no case shall mountings or attachments b e welded onto the elements . 6.7.5.10.3 In the design of supports and frameworks, th e effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into account . 6.7.5.10.4 When MEGCs are not protected during transp ort, according to 4 . 2 . 4 . 3, the elements and service equipment shall b e protected against damage resulting from lateral or longitudinal impact or overturning . External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release of the elements’ contents upon impact or overturning of the MEGC on its fittings . Particular attention shall be paid to the p rotection of the manifold . Examples of protection include: .1 protection against lateral impact, which may consist of longitudinal bars; .2 protection against overturning, whic h may consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the frame; .3 protection against rear impact, which ma y consist of a bumper or frame; .4 protection of the elements and service equ ipment against damage from impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance with the relevant provisions of ISO 1496-3:1995 . 6.7.5.11 Design approval 6.7.5.11.1 The competent authority or its authorize d body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new design of an MEGC . This certificate shall attest that the MEG C has been surveyed by that authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the requirements of this chapter, the applicable provisions for gases of chapter 4 . 1 and of packing instruction P200 . When a series of MEGCs are manufactured wit hout change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the entire series . The certificate shall refer to the proto type test report, the materials of construction of the manifold, the standards to which the elements are made and an approval number . The approval number shall consist of the di stinguishing sign or mark of the country granting the approval, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic * and a registration number . Any alternative arrangements ac cording to 6 . 7 . 1 . 2 shall be indicated on the certifica te . A design approval may serve for the appro val of smaller MEGCs made of materials of the same type and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances . 6.7.5.11.2 The prototype test report for the design app roval shall include at least the following: .1 the results of the applicable framework te st specified in ISO 1496-3:1995; .2 the results of the initial inspection and te st specified in 6 . 7 . 5 . 12 . 3; .3 the results of the impact test specified in 6 . 7 . 5 . 12 . 1; and .4 certification documents verifying that the cylinders and tubes comply with the applicable standards . * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 449

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 439 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.7.5.12 Inspection and testing 6.7.5.12.1 MEGCs meeting the definition of container i n the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the Manual of Tests and Criteria , part IV, section 41 . This provision only applies to MEGCs wh ich are constructed according to a design approval certificate which has been issued on or after 1 January 2008 . 6.7.5.12.2 The elements and items of equipment of each ME GC shall be inspected and tested before being put into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) . Thereafter, MEGCs shall be inspected at n o more than five-year intervals (5-year periodic inspection) . An exceptional inspection and test shall be performed, regardless of the last periodic inspection and test, when necessary according to 6 . 7 . 5 . 12 . 5 . 6.7.5.12.3 The initial inspection and test of an MEGC sha ll include a check of the design characteristics, an external examination of the MEGC and its fittings with due regard to the gases to be transported, and a pressure test performed at the test pressures according to packing instruction P200 . The pressure test of the manifold may be perf ormed as a hydraulic test or by using another liquid or gas with the agreement of the competent authority or its authorized body . Before the MEGC is placed into service, a lea kproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed . When the elements and their fittings have be en pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test . 6.7.5.12.4 The 5-year periodic inspection and test sh all include an external examination of the structure, the elements and the service equipment in accordance with 6 . 7 . 5 . 12 . 6 . The elements and the piping shall be tested a t the periodicity specified in packing instruction P200 and in accordance with the provisions described in 6 . 2 . 1 . 6 . When the elements and equipment ha ve been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test . 6.7.5.12.5 An exceptional inspection and test is nece ssary when the MEGC shows evidence of damaged or corroded areas, leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of the MEGC . The extent of the exceptional inspecti on and test shall depend on the amount of damage or deterioration of the MEGC . It shall include at least the examination s required under 6 . 7 . 5 . 12 . 6 . 6.7.5.12.6 The examinations shall ensure that: .1 the elements are inspected externally fo r pitting, corrosion, abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the MEGC unsafe for transport; .2 the piping, valves, and gaskets are inspec ted for corroded areas, defects, and other conditions, including leakage, that might render the MEGC unsafe for filling, discharge or transport; .3 missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged con nection or blank flange are replaced or tightened; .4 all emergency devices and valves are free fr om corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation . Remote closure devices and self-closi ng stop-valves shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation; .5 required marks on the MEGC are legible and in ac cordance with the applicable requirements; and .6 the framework, the supports and the arrang ements for lifting the MEGC are in satisfactory condition . 6.7.5.12.7 The inspections and tests in 6 . 7 . 5 . 12 . 1, 6 . 7 . 5 . 12 . 3, 6 . 7 . 5 . 12 . 4 and 6 . 7 . 5 . 12 . 5 shall be performed or witnessed by a b ody authorized by the competent authority . When the pressure test is a part of the inspect ion and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the MEGC . While under pressure, the MEGC shall be ins pected for any leaks in the elements, piping or equipment . 6.7.5.12.8 When evidence of any unsafe condition is dis covered, the MEGC shall not be returned to service until it has been corrected and the applicable tests and verifications are passed . 6.7.5.13 Marking 6.7.5.13.1 Every MEGC shall be fitted with a corrosion-r esistant metal plate permanently attached to the MEGC in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection . The metal plate shall not be affixed to the elem ents . The elements shall be marked in accordanc e with chapter 6 . 2 . As a minimum, at least the following inform ation shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method: (a) owner information (i) owner’s registration number; (b) manufacturing information (i) country of manufacture; (ii) year of manufacture; (iii) manufacturer’s name or mark; Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 450

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 440 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (iv) manufacturer’s serial number; (c) approval information (i) the United Nations packaging symbol: This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC compli es with the relevant requirements in chapters 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 6 . 3, 6 . 5, 6 . 6, 6 . 7 or 6 . 9; (ii) approval country; (iii) authorized body for the design approval; ( iv) design approval number; (v) letters “AA”, if the design was approved und er alternative arrangements (see 6 . 7 . 1 . 2); (d) pressures (i) test pressure (in bar gauge); * (ii) initial pressure test date (month and year); (iii) identification mark of the initial pressu re test witness; (e) temperatures (i) design temperature range (in °C); * (f) elements/capacity (i) number of elements; (ii) total water capacity (in litres); * (g) periodic inspections and tests (i) type of the most recent periodic test (5-yea r or exceptional); (ii) date of the most recent periodic test (month a nd year); (iii) identification mark of the authorized bod y who performed or witnessed the most recent test . * The unit used shall be indicated . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 451

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs 441 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Figure 6.7.5.13.1 – Example of a plate for marking Owner’s registration number MANUFACTURING INFORMATION Country of manufacture Year of manufacture Manufacturer Manufacturer’s serial number APPROVAL INFORMATION Approval country Authorized body for design approval Design approval number “AA” (if applicable) PRESSURES Test pressure bar Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp: TEMPERATURES Design temperature range °C to °C ELEMENTS/CAPACITY Number of elements T otal water capacity litres PERIODIC INSPECTIONS/TESTS Test type Test date Witness stamp Test type Test date Witness stamp (mm/yyyy) (mm/yyyy) 6.7.5.13.2 The following information shall be durab ly marked on a metal plate firmly secured to the MEGC: Name of the operator Maximum permissible load mass … … … . kg Working pressure at 15 ° C: … … … . bar gauge Maximum permissible gross mas s (MPGM) … … … . kg Unladen (tare) mass … … … . kg Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 452

6 442 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Chapter 6.8 Provisions for road tank vehicles and road gas elements vehicles 6.8.1 General 6.8.1.1 Tank and elements support frameworks, fit ting and tie-down attachments * 6.8.1.1.1 Road tank vehicles and road gas elements veh icles shall be designed and manufactured with supports to provide a secure base during transport and with suitable tie-down attachments . The tie-down attachments shall be loca ted on the tank or elements support, or vehicle structure in such a manner that the suspension system is not left in free play . 6.8.1.1.2 Tanks shall be carried only on vehicles whos e fastenings are capable, in conditions of maximum permissible loading of the tanks, of absorbing the forces specified in 6 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 12, 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 9 and 6 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 12 . 6.8.2 Road tank vehicles for long international v oyages for substances of classes 3 to 9 6.8.2.1 Design and construction 6.8.2.1.1 A road tank vehicle for long international v oyages shall be fitted with a tank complying with the provisions of chapters 4 . 2 and 6 . 7 and shall comply with the relevant provisi ons for tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments, * except for the provisions for forklift pockets, and in addition comply with the provisions of 6 . 8 . 1 . 1 . 1 . 6.8.2.2 Approval, testing and marking 6.8.2.2.1 For approval, testing and marking of the tan k, see 6 . 7 . 2 . 6.8.2.2.2 The tank supports and tie-down attachmen ts * of vehicles for long international voyages shall be included in the visual external inspection provided for in 6 . 7 . 2 . 19 . 6.8.2.2.3 The vehicle of a road tank vehicle shall be test ed and inspected in accordance with the road transport provisions of the competent authority of the country in which the vehicle is operated . 6.8.3 Road tank vehicles and road gas elements veh icles for short international voyages 6.8.3.1 Road tank vehicles for substances of class es 3 to 9 (IMO type 4) 6.8.3.1.1 General provisions 6.8.3.1.1.1 An IMO type 4 tank shall comply with either: .1 the provisions of 6 . 8 . 2; or .2 the provisions of 6 . 8 . 3 . 1 . 2 and 6 . 8 . 3 . 1 . 3 . 6.8.3.1.2 Design and construction 6.8.3.1.2.1 An IMO type 4 tank shall comply with the provisi ons of 6 . 7 . 2, with the exception of: .1 6 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 2; however, they shall have been subjected t o a test pressure not less than that specified according to the appropriate tank instruction assigned to the substance; * See also IMO Assembly resolution A . 581(14) of 20 November 1985, Guidelines fo r securing arrangements for the transport of road vehicles on ro-ro ships , as amended by MSC/Circ . 812 and MSC . 1/Circ . 1355 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 453

Chapter 6.8 – Provisions for road tank vehicles and road gas elements vehicles 443 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 .2 6 . 7 . 2 . 4; however, the thickness of cylindrical portions and ends in reference steel shall be: .1 not more than 2 mm thinner than the thickness s pecified according to the appropriate tank instruction assigned to the substance; .2 subject to an absolute minimum thickness o f 4 mm of reference steel; and .3 for other materials, subject to an absolut e minimum thickness of 3 mm; .3 6 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 13; however, the safety factor shall be not le ss than 1 . 3; .4 6 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 1 to 6 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 7; however, the materials of constructio n shall comply with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport; .5 6 . 7 . 2 . 5 . 1; however, the protection of valves and acc essories shall comply with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport; .6 6 . 7 . 2 . 5 . 3; however, IMO type 4 tanks shall be provided w ith manholes or other openings in the tank which comply with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport; .7 6 . 7 . 2 . 5 . 2 and 6 . 7 . 2 . 5 . 4; however, tank nozzles and extern al fittings shall comply with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport; .8 6 . 7 . 2 . 6; however, IMO type 4 tanks with bottom openi ngs shall not be used for substances for which bottom openings are not permitted in the appropriate tank instruction assigned to the substance . In addition, existing openings and hand i nspection holes shall be either closed by bolted flanges mounted both internally and externally, fitted with product-compatible gaskets, or by welding as specified in 6 . 7 . 2 . 6 . 1 . The closing of openings and hand inspecti on holes shall be approved by the competent authority for sea transport; .9 6 . 7 . 2 . 7 to 6 . 7 . 2 . 15; however, IMO type 4 tanks shall be fitted wit h pressure relief devices of the type required according to the appropriate tank instruction assigned to the substance . The devices shall be acceptable to the comp etent authority for the road transport for the substances to be transported . The start-to-discharge pressure of th e spring-loaded pressure relief devices shall in no case be less than the maximum allowable working pressure, nor greater than 25% above that pressure; and .10 6 . 7 . 2 . 17; however, tank supports on permanentl y attached IMO type 4 tanks shall comply with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport . 6.8.3.1.2.2 For IMO type 4 tanks, the maximum effective ga uge pressure developed by the substances to be transported shall not exceed the maximum allowable working pressure of the tank . 6.8.3.1.3 Approval, testing and marking 6.8.3.1.3.1 IMO type 4 tanks shall be approved for road tran sport by the competent authority . 6.8.3.1.3.2 The competent authority for sea transpor t shall issue additionally, in respect of an IMO type 4 tank, a certificate attesting compliance with the relevant design, construction and equipment provisions of this subsection and the special provisions for certain substances, as applicable . 6.8.3.1.3.3 IMO type 4 tanks shall be periodically teste d and inspected in accordance with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport . 6.8.3.1.3.4 An IMO type 4 tank shall be marked in accordance w ith 6 . 7 . 2 . 20 . However, where the marking required by th e competent authority for road transport is substantially in agreement with that of 6 . 7 . 2 . 20, it will be sufficient to endorse the metal pl ate attached to the IMO type 4 tank with “IMO 4” . 6.8.3.1.3.5 IMO type 4 tanks which are not permanently att ached to the chassis shall be marked “IMO type 4” in letters at least 32 mm high . 6.8.3.2 Road tank vehicles for non-refrigerated l iquefied gases of class 2 (IMO type 6) 6.8.3.2.1 General provisions 6.8.3.2.1.1 An IMO type 6 tank shall comply with either: .1 the provisions of 6 . 7 . 3; or .2 the provisions of 6 . 8 . 3 . 2 . 2 and 6 . 8 . 3 . 2 . 3 . 6.8.3.2.1.2 For an IMO type 6 tank, the design temperature r ange is defined in 6 . 7 . 3 . 1 . The temperature to be taken is to be agreed by th e competent authority for road transport . 6.8.3.2.2 Design and construction 6.8.3.2.2.1 An IMO type 6 tank shall comply with the provisi ons of 6 . 7 . 3, with the exception of: .1 the safety factor of 1 . 5 in 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 10; however, the safety factor shall not be le ss than 1 . 3; Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 454

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 444 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 .2 6 . 7 . 3 . 5 . 7; .3 6 . 7 . 3 . 6 . 1, if bottom openings are approved by the comp etent authority for sea transport; .4 6 . 7 . 3 . 7 . 1; however, the devices shall open at a pressu re not less than the MAWP and be fully open at a pressure not exceeding the test pressure of the tank; .5 6 . 7 . 3 . 8, if the delivery capacity of the pressure re lief devices is approved by the competent authorities for sea and road transport; .6 the location of the pressure relief device i nlets in 6 . 7 . 3 . 11 . 1, which need not be in the longitudinal centr e of the shell; .7 the provisions for forklift pockets; and . 8 6 . 7 . 3 . 13 . 5 . 6.8.3.2.2.2 If the landing legs of an IMO type 6 tank are to be use d as support structure, the loads specified in 6 . 7 . 3 . 2 . 9 shall be taken into account in their design an d method of attachment . Any bending stress induced in the shell as a re sult of this manner of support shall also be included in the design calculations . 6.8.3.2.2.3 Securing arrangements (tie-down atta chments) shall be fitted to the tank support structure and the towing vehicle of an IMO type 6 tank . Semi-trailers unaccompanied by a towi ng vehicle shall be accepted for shipment only if the trailer supports and the securing arrangements and the position of stowage are agreed by the competent authority for sea transport, unless the approved Cargo Securing Manual includes this arrangement . 6.8.3.2.3 Approval, testing and marking 6.8.3.2.3.1 IMO type 6 tanks shall be approved for road tran sport by the competent authority for road transport . 6.8.3.2.3.2 The competent authority for sea transpor t shall issue additionally, in respect of an IMO type 6 tank, a certificate attesting compliance with the relevant design, construction and equipment provisions of this chapter and, where appropriate, the special provisions for the gases listed in the Dangerous Goods List . The certificate shall list the gases allow ed to be transported . 6.8.3.2.3.3 An IMO type 6 tank shall be periodically teste d and inspected in accordance with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport . 6.8.3.2.3.4 An IMO type 6 tank shall be marked in accordance w ith 6 . 7 . 3 . 16 . However, where the marking required by th e competent authority for road transport is substantially in agreement with that of 6 . 7 . 3 . 16 . 1, it will be sufficient to endorse the metal pla te attached to the IMO type 6 tank with “IMO 6” . 6.8.3.3 Road tank vehicles for refrigerated lique fied gases of class 2 (IMO type 8) 6.8.3.3.1 General provisions 6.8.3.3.1.1 An IMO type 8 tank shall comply with either: .1 the provisions of 6 . 7 . 4; or .2 the provisions of 6 . 8 . 3 . 3 . 2 and 6 . 8 . 3 . 3 . 3 . 6.8.3.3.1.2 An IMO type 8 tank shall not be offered for transp ort by sea in a condition that would lead to venting during the voyage under normal conditions of transport . 6.8.3.3.2 Design and construction 6.8.3.3.2.1 An IMO type 8 tank shall comply with the provisi ons of 6 . 7 . 4, with the exception: .1 that aluminium jackets may be used, with the a pproval of the competent authority for sea transport; .2 that IMO type 8 tanks may have a shell thi ckness less than 3 mm, subject to the approval of the competent authority for sea transport; .3 that for IMO type 8 tanks used for non-fl ammable refrigerated gases, one of the valves may be replaced by a frangible disc . The frangible disc shall rupture at a nomin al pressure equal to the test pressure; .4 of the provisions of 6 . 7 . 4 . 7 . 3 for the combined capacity of all pressure re lief devices under complete fire-engulfment conditions; .5 of the safety factor of 1 . 5 in 6 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 13; however, the safety factor shall not be le ss than 1 . 3; .6 of 6 . 7 . 4 . 8; and .7 of the provisions for forklift pockets . 6.8.3.3.2.2 If the landing legs of an IMO type 8 tank are to be used a s support structure, the loads agreed as in 6 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 12 shall be taken into account in their design a nd method of attachment . Bending stress induced in the shell as a resu lt of this manner of support shall be included in design calculations . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 455

Chapter 6.8 – Provisions for road tank vehicles and road gas elements vehicles 445 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.8.3.3.2.3 Securing arrangements (tie-down atta chments) shall be fitted to the tank support structure and the towing vehicle of an IMO type 8 tank . Semi-trailers unaccompanied by a towi ng vehicle shall be accepted for shipment only if the trailer supports and the securing arrangements and the position of stowage are agreed by the competent authority for sea transport, unless the approved Cargo Securing Manual includes this arrangement . 6.8.3.3.3 Approval, testing and marking 6.8.3.3.3.1 IMO type 8 tanks shall be approved for road tran sport by the competent authority for road transport . 6.8.3.3.3.2 The competent authority for sea transpor t shall issue additionally, in respect of an IMO type 8 tank, a certificate attesting compliance with the relevant design, construction and equipment provisions of this subsection and, where appropriate, the special tank type provisions for the gases in the Dangerous Goods List . The certificate shall list the gases allow ed to be transported . 6.8.3.3.3.3 IMO type 8 tanks shall be periodically teste d and inspected in accordance with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport . 6.8.3.3.3.4 IMO type 8 tanks shall be marked in accordance w ith 6 . 7 . 4 . 15 . However, where the marking required by th e competent authority for road transport is substantially in agreement with that of 6 . 7 . 4 . 15 . 1, it will be sufficient to endorse the metal pla te attached to the IMO type 8 tank with “IMO 8”; the reference to holding time may be omitted . 6.8.3.4 Road gas elements vehicles for compresse d gases of class 2 (IMO Type 9) 6.8.3.4.1 General provisions 6.8.3.4.1.1 An IMO type 9 tank shall comply with the provisi ons of 6 . 8 . 3 . 4 . 2 and 6 . 8 . 3 . 4 . 3 . 6.8.3.4.1.2 An IMO type 9 tank shall not be offered for transp ort by sea in a condition that would lead to venting during the voyage under normal conditions of transport . 6.8.3.4.2 Design and construction 6.8.3.4.2.1 An IMO type 9 tank shall comply with the provisi ons of 6 . 7 . 5 with the exception that the horizontal for ces at right angles to the direction of travel shall be the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g); * and that the inspection and testing shall be in accordance with the competent authority where the road gas elements vehicle is approved . 6.8.3.4.2.2 If the landing legs of an IMO type 9 tank are to be used a s support structure, the loads specified in 6 . 7 . 5 . 2 . 8 shall be taken into account in their design an d method of attachment . Any bending stress induced in the shell or th e elements as a result of this manner of support shall also be included in the design calculations . 6.8.3.4.2.3 Securing arrangements (tie-down atta chments) shall be fitted to the road gas elements vehicle support structure and the towing vehicle of an IMO type 9 tank . Semi-trailers unaccompanied by a towing vehicle shall be accepted for shipment only if the trailer supports and the securing arrangements and the position of stowage are agreed by the competent authority for sea transport, unless the approved Cargo Securing Manual includes this arrangement . 6.8.3.4.3 Approval, testing and marking 6.8.3.4.3.1 IMO type 9 tanks shall be approved for road tran sport by the competent authority for road transport . 6.8.3.4.3.2 The competent authority for sea transpor t shall issue additionally, in respect of an IMO type 9 tank, a certificate attesting compliance with the relevant design, construction and equipment provisions of this chapter and, where appropriate, the special provisions for the gases listed in the Dangerous Goods List . The certificate shall list the gases allow ed to be transported . 6.8.3.4.3.3 An IMO type 9 tank shall be periodically teste d and inspected in accordance with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport where the road gas elements vehicle is approved . 6.8.3.4.3.4 An IMO type 9 tank shall be marked in accordance w ith 6 . 7 . 5 . 13, as applicable . However, where the marking required by th e competent authority for road transport is substantially in agreement with that of 6 . 7 . 5 . 13 . 1, it will be sufficient to endorse the metal pla te attached to the IMO type 9 tank with “IMO 9” . * For calculation purposes, g = 9 . 81 m/s 2 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 456

6 446 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 Chapter 6.9 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of bulk containers Note: Sheeted bulk containers (BK1) shall not be u sed for sea transport, except as indicated in 4 . 3 . 3 . 6.9.1 Definitions For the purposes of this section: Closed bulk container means a totally closed bulk container having a rigid roof, sidewalls, end walls and floor (including hopper-type bottoms), including bulk containers with an opening roof, or side or end wall that can be closed during transport . Closed bulk container may be equip ped with openings to allow for the exchange of vapours and gases with air and which prevent, under normal conditions of transport, the release of solid contents as well as the penetration of rain and splash water . Flexible bulk container means a flexible contai ner with a capacity not exceeding 15 m 3 and includes liners and attached handling devices and service equipment . Sheeted bulk container means an open-top bul k container with rigid bottom (including hopper-type bottom), side and end walls and a non-rigid covering . 6.9.2 Application and general provisions 6.9.2.1 Bulk containers and their service and stru ctural equipment shall be designed and constructed to withstand, without loss of contents, the internal pressure of the contents and the stresses of normal handling and transport . 6.9.2.2 Where a discharge valve is fitted, it shall be cap able of being made secure in the closed position and the whole discharge system shall be suitably protected from damage . Valves having lever closures shall be abl e to be secured against unintended opening and the open or closed position shall be readily apparent . 6.9.2.3 Code for designating types of bulk container The following table indicates the codes to be used for designating types of bulk containers: Types of bulk container Code Sheeted bulk container BK1 Closed bulk container BK2 Flexible bulk container BK3 6.9.2.4 In order to take account of progress in science and technology, the use of alternative arrangements which offer at least equivalent safety as provided by the provisions of this chapter may be considered by the competent authority . 6.9.3 Provisions for the design, construction, in spection and testing of freight containers used as BK1 or BK2 bulk containers 6.9.3.1 Design and construction provisions 6.9.3.1.1 The general design and construction prov isions in this section are deemed to be met if the bulk container complies with the requirements of ISO 1496-4:1991, Series 1 freight containers – Specification and testing – Part 4: Non-pressurized containers for dry bulk , and the container is siftproof . 6.9.3.1.2 Freight containers designed and tested i n accordance with ISO 1496-1:1990, Series 1 freight containers – Specification and testing – Part 1: General cargo containers for general purposes , shall be equipped with Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 457

Chapter 6.9 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of bulk containers 447 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 operational equipment which is, including its connection to the freight container, designed to strengthen the end walls and to improve the longitudinal restraint as necessary to comply with the test requirements of ISO 1496-4:1991, as relevant . 6.9.3.1.3 Bulk containers shall be siftproof . Where a liner is used to make the container sif tproof, it shall be made of a suitable material . The strength of the material used for, and th e construction of, the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the container and its intended use . Joins and closures of the liner shall withs tand pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and transport . For ventilated bulk containers, any liner shall not impair the operation of ventilating devices . 6.9.3.1.4 The operational equipment of bulk contai ners designed to be emptied by tilting shall be capable of withstanding the total filling mass in the tilted orientation . 6.9.3.1.5 Any movable roof or side or end wall or roof secti on shall be fitted with locking devices with securing devices designed to show the locked state to an observer at ground level . 6.9.3.2 Service equipment 6.9.3.2.1 Filling and discharge devices shall be so co nstructed and arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or damaged during transport and handling . The filling and discharge devices shall be c apable of being secured against unintended opening . The open and closed position and directio n of closure shall be clearly indicated . 6.9.3.2.2 Seals of openings shall be so arranged as to avo id any damage by the operation, filling and emptying of the bulk container . 6.9.3.2.3 Where ventilation is required, bulk conta iners shall be equipped with means of air exchange, either by natural convection, e . g . by openings, or active elements, e . g . fans . The ventilation shall be designed to prev ent negative pressures in the container at all times . Ventilating elements of bulk containe rs for the transport of flammable substances or substances emitting flammable gases or vapours shall be designed so as not to be a source of ignition . 6.9.3.3 Inspection and testing 6.9.3.3.1 Freight containers used, maintained and qua lified as bulk containers in accordance with the requirements of this section shall be tested and approved in accordance with the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention) , as amended . 6.9.3.3.2 Freight containers used and qualified as bu lk containers shall be inspected periodically according to that Convention . 6.9.3.4 Marking 6.9.3.4.1 Freight containers used as bulk containe rs shall be marked with a Safety Approval Plate in accordance with the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention) . 6.9.4 Provisions for the design, construction a nd approval of BK1 or BK2 bulk containers other than freight containers 6.9.4.1 Bulk containers covered in this section in clude skips, offshore bulk containers, bulk bins, swap bodies, trough-shaped containers, roller containers, and load compartments of vehicles . 6.9.4.2 These bulk containers shall be designed an d constructed so as to be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport, including, as applicable, transhipment between modes of transport . 6.9.4.3 Load compartments of vehicles shall comp ly with the requirements of, and be acceptable to, the competent authority responsible for land transport of the dangerous goods to be transported in bulk . 6.9.4.4 These bulk containers shall be approved by t he competent authority and the approval shall include the code for designating types of bulk containers in accordance with 6 . 9 . 2 . 3 and the provisions for inspection and test ing, as appropriate . 6.9.4.5 Where it is necessary to use a liner in order to ret ain the dangerous goods, it shall meet the provisions of 6 . 9 . 3 . 1 . 3 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 458

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 448 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.9.4.6 The following statement shall be shown on th e transport document: “Bulk container BK( x ) approved by the competent authority of …” . Note: “( x )” shall be replaced with “1” or “2”, as app ropriate . 6.9.5 Requirements for the design, constructio n, inspection and testing of flexible bulk containers BK3 6.9.5.1 Design and construction requiremen ts 6.9.5.1.1 Flexible bulk containers shall be sift-p roof . 6.9.5.1.2 Flexible bulk containers shall be comple tely closed to prevent the release of contents . 6.9.5.1.3 Flexible bulk containers shall be waterp roof . 6.9.5.1.4 Parts of the flexible bulk container which ar e in direct contact with dangerous goods: (a) shall not be affected or significantly weak ened by those dangerous goods; (b) shall not cause a dangerous effect, e . g . catalysing a reaction or reacting with th e dangerous goods; and (c) shall not allow permeation of the dangerou s goods that could constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport . 6.9.5.2 Service equipment and handling devices 6.9.5.2.1 Filling and discharge devices shall be so co nstructed as to be protected against damage during transport and handling . The filling and discharge devices shall be c apable of being secured against unintended opening . 6.9.5.2.2 Slings of the flexible bulk container, if fitt ed, shall withstand pressure and dynamic forces which can appear in normal conditions of handling and transport . 6.9.5.2.3 The handling devices shall be strong enoug h to withstand repeated use . 6.9.5.3 Inspection and testing 6.9.5.3.1 Each flexible bulk container design type sh all successfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used . 6.9.5.3.2 Tests shall also be repeated after each modi fication of design type which alters the design, material or manner of construction of a flexible bulk container . 6.9.5.3.3 Tests shall be carried out on flexible bulk con tainers prepared as for transport . Flexible bulk containers shall be filled t o the maximum mass at which they may be used and the contents shall be evenly distributed . The substances to be transported in the flexible bulk container may be replaced by other substances except where this would invalidate the results of the tests . When another substance is used it shall hav e the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc . ) as the substance to be transported . It is permissible to use additives, such as b ags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total mass of the flexible bulk container, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected . 6.9.5.3.4 Flexible bulk containers shall be manufa ctured and tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority, in order to ensure that each manufactured flexible bulk container meets the requirements of this chapter . 6.9.5.3.5 Drop test 6.9.5.3.5.1 Applicability For all types of flexible bulk containers, as a design type test . 6.9.5.3.5.2 Preparation for testing The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass . 6.9.5.3.5.3 The flexible bulk container shall be droppe d onto a target surface that is non-resilient and horizontal . The target surface shall be: (a) integral and massive enough to be immovabl e; (b) flat with a surface kept free from local defect s capable of influencing the test results; (c) rigid enough to be non-deformable under te st conditions and not liable to become damaged by the tests; and Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 459

Chapter 6.9 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of bulk containers 449 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (d) sufficiently large to ensure that the test flexible bulk container falls entirely upon the surface . Following the drop, the flexible bulk conta iner shall be restored to the upright position for observation . 6.9.5.3.5.4 Drop height shall be: Packing group III: 0 . 8 m 6.9.5.3.5.5 Criteria for passing the test: (a) there shall be no loss of contents . A slight discharge, e . g . from closures or stitch holes, upon impac t shall not be considered to be a failure of the flexible bulk container provided that no further leakage occurs after the container has been restored to the upright position; (b) there shall be no damage which rende rs the flexible bulk container unsafe to be transported for salvage or for disposal . 6.9.5.3.6 Top lift test 6.9.5.3.6.1 Applicability For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test . 6.9.5.3.6.2 Preparation for testing Flexible bulk containers shall be filled to six times the maximum net mass, the load being evenly distributed . 6.9.5.3.6.3 A flexible bulk container shall be lifted in th e manner for which it is designed until clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes . 6.9.5.3.6.4 Criteria for passing the test: there shall b e no damage to the flexible bulk container or its lifting devices which renders the flexible bulk container unsafe for transport or handling, and no loss of contents . 6.9.5.3.7 Topple test 6.9.5.3.7.1 Applicability For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test . 6.9.5.3.7.2 Preparation for testing The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass . 6.9.5.3.7.3 A flexible bulk container shall be toppled on to any part of its top by lifting the side furthest from the drop edge upon a target surface that is non-resilient and horizontal . The target surface shall be: (a) integral and massive enough to be immovabl e; (b) flat with a surface kept free from local defect s capable of influencing the test results; (c) rigid enough to be non-deformable under te st conditions and not liable to become damaged by the tests; and (d) sufficiently large to ensure that the test fle xible bulk container falls entirely upon the surface . 6.9.5.3.7.4 For all flexible bulk containers, the topp le height is specified as follows: Packing group III: 0 . 8 m 6.9.5.3.7.5 Criterion for passing the test: there shal l be no loss of contents . A slight discharge, e . g . from closures or stitch holes, upon imp act shall not be considered to be a failure of the flexible bulk container provided that no further leakage occurs . 6.9.5.3.8 Righting test 6.9.5.3.8.1 Applicability For all types of flexible bulk containers designed to be lifted from the top or side, as a design type test . 6.9.5.3.8.2 Preparation for testing The flexible bulk container shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass . 6.9.5.3.8.3 The flexible bulk container, lying o n its side, shall be lifted at a speed of at least 0 . 1 m/s to an upright position, clear of th e floor, by no more than half of the lifting devices . 6.9.5.3.8.4 Criterion for passing the test: there shal l be no damage to the flexible bulk container or its lifting devices which renders the flexible bulk container unsafe for transport or handling . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 460

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc. 450 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 6.9.5.3.9 Tear test 6.9.5.3.9.1 Applicability For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test . 6.9.5.3.9.2 Preparation for testing The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass . 6.9.5.3.9.3 With the flexible bulk container placed on th e ground, a 300 mm cut shall be made, completely penetrating all layers of the flexible bulk container on a wall of a wide face . The cut shall be made at a 45 ° angle to the princip al axis of the flexible bulk container, halfway between the bottom surface and the top level of the contents . The flexible bulk container shall then be su bjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed load equivalent to twice the maximum gross mass . The load must be applied for at least fifteen mi nutes . A flexible bulk container which is des igned to be lifted from the top or the side shall, after removal of the superimposed load, be lifted clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of fifteen minutes . 6.9.5.3.9.4 Criterion for passing the test: the cut shal l not propagate more than 25% of its original length . 6.9.5.3.10 Stacking test 6.9.5.3.10.1 Applicability For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test . 6.9.5.3.10.2 Preparation for testing The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass . 6.9.5.3.10.3 The flexible bulk container shall be subjec ted to a force applied to its top surface that is four times the design load-carrying capacity for 24 h . 6.9.5.3.10.4 Criterion for passing the test: there shal l be no loss of contents during the test or after removal of the load . 6.9.5.4 Test report 6.9.5.4.1 A test report containing at least the follow ing particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the flexible bulk container: 1. name and address of the test facility; 2. name and address of applicant (where app ropriate); 3. unique test report identification; 4. date of the test report; 5. manufacturer of the flexible bulk contain er; 6. description of the flexible bulk container design type (e . g . dimensions, materials, closures, thi ckness, etc . ) and/or photograph(s); 7. maximum capacity/maximum permissible gro ss mass; 8. characteristics of test contents, e . g . particle size for solids; 9. test descriptions and results; 10. the test report shall be signed with the name an d status of the signatory . 6.9.5.4.2 The test report shall contain statements t hat the flexible bulk container prepared as for transport was tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of this chapter and that the use of other containment methods or components may render it invalid . A copy of the test report shall be available to t he competent authority . 6.9.5.5 Marking 6.9.5.5.1 Each flexible bulk container manufactur ed and intended for use according to these provisions shall bear marks that are durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible . Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at l east 24 mm high and shall show: (a) the United Nations packaging symbol: This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEG C complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 6 . 3, 6 . 5, 6 . 6, 6 . 7 or 6 . 9; Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 461

Chapter 6.9 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of bulk containers 451 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 6 (b) the code BK3; (c) a capital letter designating the packing g roup(s) for which the design type has been approved: Z for packing group III only; (d) the month and year (last two digits) of manufa cture; (e) the character(s) identifying the count ry authorizing the allocation of the mark; as indicated by the distinguishing signs used on vehicles in international road traffic; * (f) the name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the flexible bulk container as specified by the competent authority; (g) the stacking test load in kg; (h) the maximum permissible gross mass in kg . Marks shall be applied in the sequence shown i n (a) to (h); each mark, required in these subparagraphs, shall be clearly separated, e . g . by a slash or space and presented in a way that ensures that all of the parts of the mark are easily identified . 6.9.5.5.2 Example of marking BK3/Z/11 09 RUS/NTT/MK-14-10 56000/14000 * Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e . g . in accordance with the Geneva Conventio n on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968 . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 462

6 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 463

7 PART 7 P ROVISIONS CONCERNING TRANSPORT OPERATIONS Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 464

7 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 465

455 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Chapter 7.1 General stowage provisions 7.1.1 Introduction This chapter contains the general provisions for the stowage of dangerous goods in all types of ships . Specific provisions applicable to, con tainer ships, ro-ro ships, general cargo ships and barge carrying ships, are stipulated in chapters 7 . 4 to 7 . 7 . 7.1.2 Definitions Note 1: The term “magazine” is no longer used in the context of the IMDG Code . A magazine that is not a fixed part of the ship shal l meet the provisions for a closed cargo transport unit for class 1 (see 7 . 1 . 2) . A magazine that is a fixed part of the sh ip such as compartment, below deck area or hold shall meet the provisions of 7 . 6 . 2 . 4 . Note 2: Cargo holds cannot be interpreted a s closed cargo transport units . Clear of living quarters means that packa ges or cargo transport units shall be stowed a minimum distance of 3 m from accommodation, air intakes, machinery spaces and other enclosed work areas . Closed cargo transport unit for class 1 mea ns a unit which fully encloses the contents by permanent structures, can be secured to the ship’s structure and is, except for division 1 . 4, structurally serviceable as defin ed in this section . Cargo transport units with fabric sides o r tops are not closed cargo transport units . The floor of any closed cargo transport unit s hall either be constructed of wood, close-boarded, or so arranged that goods are stowed on sparred gratings, wooden pallets or dunnage . Combustible material means material which m ay or may not be dangerous goods but which is easily ignited and supports combustion . Examples of combustible materials inc lude wood, paper, straw, vegetable fibres, products made from such materials, coal, lubricants, and oils . This definition does not apply to p ackaging material or dunnage . Potential sources of ignition means, bu t is not limited to, open fires, machinery exhausts, galley uptakes, electrical outlets and electrical equipment including those on refrigerated or heated cargo transport units unless they are of certified safe type . * Protected from sources of heat means that packages and cargo transport units shall be stowed at least 2 . 4 m from heated ship structures, where the su rface temperature is liable to exceed 55 ° C . Examples of heated structures are steam p ipes, heating coils, top or side walls of heated fuel and cargo tanks, and bulkheads of machinery spaces . In addition, packages not loaded inside a cargo tr ansport unit and stowed on deck shall be shaded from direct sunlight . The surface of a cargo transport unit can hea t rapidly when in direct sunlight in nearly windless conditions and the cargo may also become heated . Depending on the nature of the goods in the car go transport unit and the planned voyage precautions shall be taken to ensure that exposure to direct sunlight is reduced . Stowage means the proper placement of dange rous goods on board a ship in order to ensure safety and environmental protection during transport . Stowage on deck means stowage on the weather d eck . For open ro-ro cargo spaces see 7 . 5 . 2 . 6 . Stowage under deck means any stowage that is not on the weather deck . For hatchless containerships see 7 . 4 . 2 . 1 . Structurally serviceable for class 1 me ans the cargo transport unit shall not have major defects in its structural components, e . g . top and bottom rails, top and bottom end rail s, door sill and header, floor cross-members, corner posts, and corner fittings in a freight container . Major defects are: dents or bends in the stru ctural * For cargo spaces, refer to SOLAS II-2/19 . 3 . 2 and for refrigerated or heated cargo trans port units refer to Recommendations published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, in particular IEC 60079 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 466

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 456 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 members greater than 19 mm in depth, regardless of length; cracks or breaks in structural members; more than one splice (e . g . a lapped splice) in top or bottom end rails or do or headers; more than two splices in any one top or bottom side rail or any splice in a door sill or corner post; door hinges and hardware that are seized, twisted, broken, missing or otherwise inoperative; gaskets and seals that do not seal; or, for freight containers, any distortion of the overall configuration great enough to prevent proper alignment of handling equipment, mounting and securing on chassis or vehicle, or insertion into ship’s cells . In addition, deterioration in any compo nent of the cargo transport unit, regardless of the material of construction, such as rusted-out metal in sidewalls or disintegrated fibreglass, is unacceptable . Normal wear, however, including oxida tion (rust), slight dents and scratches and other damage that does not affect serviceability or the weathertight integrity of the units, is acceptable . 7.1.3 Stowage categories 7.1.3.1 Stowage categories for class 1 Dangerous goods of class 1 other than division 1 . 4, compatibility group S, packed in limite d quantities shall be stowed as indicated in column 16a of the Dangerous Goods List in accordance with one of the categories specified below . Stowage category 01 Cargo ships (up to 12 passe ngers) On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck Passenger ships On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck Stowage category 02 Cargo ships (up to 12 passengers) On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck Passenger ships On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck in closed cargo transport unit in accordance with 7 . 1 . 4 . 4 . 6 Stowage category 03 Cargo ships (up to 12 passe ngers) On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck Passenger ships Prohibited except if in accordance with 7 . 1 . 4 . 4 . 6 Stowage category 04 Cargo ships (up to 12 passe ngers) On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck in closed cargo transport unit Passenger ships Prohibited except if in accordance with 7 . 1 . 4 . 4 . 6 Stowage category 05 Cargo ships (up to 12 passe ngers) On deck only in closed cargo transport unit Passenger ships Prohibited except if in accordance with 7 . 1 . 4 . 4 . 6 7.1.3.2 Stowage categories for classes 2 to 9 Dangerous goods of classes 2 to 9 and division 1 . 4, compatibility group S, packed in limite d quantities shall be stowed as indicated in column 16a of the Dangerous Goods List in accordance with one of the categories specified below: Stowage category A Cargo ships or passenger ships carrying a number of passengers limited to not more than 25 or to 1 passenger per 3 m of overall length, whichever is the greater number } ON DECK OR UNDER DECK Other passenger ships in which the limiting number of passengers transported is exceeded } ON DECK OR UNDER DECK Stowage category B Cargo ships or passenger ships carrying a number of passengers limited to not more than 25 or to 1 passenger per 3 m of overall length, whichever is the greater number } ON DECK OR UNDER DECK Other passenger ships in which the limiting number of passengers transported is exceeded } ON DECK ONLY Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 467

Chapter 7.1 – General stowage provisions 457 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Stowage category C Cargo ships or passenger ships carrying a number of passengers limited to not more than 25 or to 1 passenger per 3 m of overall length, whichever is the greater number } ON DECK ONLY Other passenger ships in which the limiting number of passengers transported is exceeded } ON DECK ONLY Stowage category D Cargo ships or passenger ships carrying a number of passengers limited to not more than 25 or to 1 passenger per 3 m of overall length, whichever is the greater number } ON DECK ONLY Other passenger ships in which the limiting number of passengers transported is exceeded } PROHIBITED Stowage category E Cargo ships or passenger ships carrying a number of passengers limited to not more than 25 or to 1 passenger per 3 m of overall length, whichever is the greater number } ON DECK OR UNDER DECK Other passenger ships in which the limiting number of passengers transported is exceeded } PROHIBITED 7.1.4 Special stowage provisions 7.1.4.1 Stowage of empty uncleaned packagings, i ncluding IBCs and large packagings Notwithstanding the stowage provisions given in the Dangerous Goods List, empty uncleaned packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, which shall be stowed o n deck only when full may be stowed on deck or under deck in a mechanically ventilated cargo space . However, empty uncleaned pressure rec eptacles which carry a label of class 2 . 3 shall be stowed on deck only (see also 4 . 1 . 1 . 11) and waste aerosols shall only be stowed ac cording to column 16a of the Dangerous Goods List . 7.1.4.2 Stowage of marine pollutants and infecti ous substances of UN 2814, UN 2900 and UN 3549 Where stowage is permitted on deck or under deck , under deck stowage is preferred . Where stowage on deck only is required, pref erence shall be given to stowage on well-protected decks or to stowage inboard in sheltered areas of exposed decks . 7.1.4.3 Stowage of limited quantities and excepted q uantities For the stowage of limited quantities and excepted quantities see chapters 3 . 4 and 3 . 5 . 7.1.4.4 Stowage of goods of class 1 7.1.4.4.1 In cargo ships of 500 gross tons or over and passe nger ships constructed before 1 September 1984 and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed before 1 February 1992, goods of class 1 with the exception of division 1 . 4, compatibility group S, shall be stowed o n deck only , unless otherwise approved by the Administration . 7.1.4.4.2 Goods of class 1 with the exception of divisio n 1 . 4 shall be stowed not less than a horizontal dis tance of 12 m from living quarters, life-saving appliances * and areas where the ship’s passengers can access without any authorization or limitation . 7.1.4.4.3 Goods of class 1 with the exception of divisio n 1 . 4 shall not be positioned closer to the ship’s s ide than a distance equal to one eighth of the beam or 2 . 4 m, whichever is the lesser . 7.1.4.4.4 Goods of class 1 shall not be stowed within a hori zontal distance of 6 m from potential sources of ignition . 7.1.4.4.5 Transport to or from offshore oil platform s, mobile offshore drilling units and other offshore installations Notwithstanding the stowage category indicated in column 16a of the Dangerous Goods List, UN 0124 JET PERFORATING GUNS, CHARGED, and UN 0494 JET PERFORATING GUNS, CHARGED, transported to or from offshore oil platforms, mobile offshore drilling units and other offshore installations may be stowed on deck in offshore well tool pallets, cradles or baskets provided that: .1 initiation devices shall be segrega ted from each other and from any jet perforating guns in accordance with the provisions of 7 . 2 . 7, and from any other dangerous goods in accor dance with the provisions of 7 . 2 . 4 and 7 . 6 . 3 . 2, unless otherwise approved by the compet ent authority; * Refer to the Unified Interpretation on 7 . 1 . 4 . 4 . 2 of the IMDG Code on the issue of “life-saving ap pliances” (MSC . 1/Circ . 1626) . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 468

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 458 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 .2 jet perforating guns shall be securely held in place during transport; .3 each shaped charge affixed to any gun shall not c ontain more than 112 g of explosives; .4 each shaped charge, if not completely encl osed in glass or metal, shall be fully protected by a metal cover following installation in the gun; .5 both ends of jet perforating guns shall be pro tected by means of steel end caps allowing for pressure release in the event of fire; .6 the total explosive content shall not exce ed 95 kg per well tool pallet, cradle or basket; and .7 where more than one well tool pallet, cradle or basket is stowed “on deck”, a minimum horizontal distance of 3 m shall be observed between them . 7.1.4.4.6 Stowage on passenger ships 7.1.4.4.6.1 Goods in division 1 . 4, compatibility group S, may be transport ed in any amount on passenger ships . No other goods of class 1 may be transported on p assenger ships except: .1 goods in compatibility groups C, D and E and art icles in compatibility group G, if the total net explosive mass does not exceed 10 kg per ship and if they are transported in closed cargo transport units on deck or under deck ; .2 articles in compatibility group B, if the to tal net explosive mass does not exceed 10 kg per ship and if they are transported on deck only in closed cargo transport units . 7.1.4.4.7 Alternative arrangements to those pres cribed in chapter 7 . 1 for class 1 may be approved by the Administrat ion . 7.1.4.5 Stowage of goods of class 7 7.1.4.5.1 The total activity in a single cargo space of a se a going vessel for transport of LSA material or SCO in Type IP 1, Type IP 2, Type IP 3 packaging or unpackaged shall not exceed the limits shown in the table hereunder . For SCO-III, the limits in the table hereun der may be exceeded provided that the transport plan contains precautions which are to be employed during transport to obtain an overall level of safety at least equivalent to that which would be provided if the limits had been applied . Conveyance activity limits for LSA mater ial and SCO in industrial packages or unpackaged Nature of material Activity limit for a seagoing vessel LSA I No limit LSA II and LSA III non-combustible solids No limit LSA II and LSA III combustible solids, and all liquids and gases 100 A 2 SCO 100 A 2 7.1.4.5.2 Provided that its average surface heat flux d oes not exceed 15 W/m 2 and that the immediately surrounding cargo is not in sacks or bags, a package or overpack may be transported or stored among packaged general cargo without any special stowage provisions except as may be specifically required by the competent authority in an applicable certificate of approval . 7.1.4.5.3 Loading of freight containers and accumu lation of packages, overpacks and freight containers shall be controlled as follows: .1 Except under the condition of exclusive us e, the total number of packages, overpacks and freight containers aboard a single conveyance shall be so limited that the total sum of the transport indexes aboard the conveyance does not exceed the values shown in the table hereunder . For consignments of LSA I material there sh all be no limit on the sum of the transport indexes . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 469

Chapter 7.1 – General stowage provisions 459 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 TI limits for freight containers and conveyances not under exclusive use Type of freight container or conveyance Limit on total sum of transport indexes in a freight container or aboard a conveyance Freight container Small freight container Large freight container 50 50 Vehicle 50 Inland water -way vessel (barge) 50 Seagoing vessel a 1 Hold, compartment or defined deck area Packages, overpacks, small freight contai ners Large freight containers (closed contain ers) 50 200 2 Total vessel Packages, overpacks, small freight contai ners Large freight containers (closed contain ers) 200 No limit a Packages or overpacks transported in or on a vehicle which are in accordance with the provisions of 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 5 may be transported by vessels provided tha t they are not removed from the vehicle at any time while on board the ship . .2 Where a consignment is transported under exclusive use, there shall be no limit on the sum of the transport indexes aboard a single conve yance . .3 The dose rate under routine conditions of tr ansport shall not exceed 2 mSv/h at any point on the external surface of the vehicle or freight container, and 0 . 1 mSv/h at 2 m from the external surface of the vehi cle or freight container, except for consignments transported under exclusive use by road or rail for which the dose rate limits around the vehicle are set forth in 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 5 . 2 and 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 5 . 3 . .4 The total sum of the criticality safety inde xes in a freight container and aboard a conveyance shall not exceed the values shown in the table hereunder . CSI limits for freight containers and co nveyances containing fissile material Type of freight container or conveyance Limit on total sum of criticality safety indexes in a freight container or aboard a conveyance Not under exclusive use Under exclusive use Freight container Small freight container Large freight container 50 50 n . a . 100 Vehicle 50 100 Inland water-way vessel (barge ) 50 100 Seagoing vessel a 1 Hold, compartment or defined deck area Packages, overpacks, small freight contai ners Large freight containers (closed contain ers) 50 50 100 100 2 Total vessel Packages, overpacks, small freight contai ners Large freight containers (closed contain ers) 200 b No limit b 200 c No limit c a Packages or overpacks transported in or on a vehicle which are in accordance with the provisions of 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 5 may be transported by ships provided that th ey are not removed from the vehicle at any time while on board the ship . In that case, the entries under the heading “ under exclusive use” apply . b The consignment shall be so handled and stowed that the total sum of CSIs in any group does not exceed 50, and that each group is handled and stowed so as to maintain a spacing of at leas t 6 m from other groups . c The consignment shall be so handled and stowed that the total sum of CSIs in any group does not exceed 100, and that each group is handled and stowed so as to maintain a spacing of at leas t 6 m from other groups . The intervening space between groups ma y be occupied by other cargo . 7.1.4.5.4 Any package or overpack having either a tran sport index greater than 10, or any consignment having a criticality safety index greater than 50, shall be transported only under exclusive use . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 470

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 460 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.1.4.5.5 For consignments under exclusive use, th e dose rate shall not exceed: .1 10 mSv/h at any point on the external surface of a ny package or overpack, and may only exceed 2 mSv/h provided that: .1 the vehicle is equipped with an enclosure wh ich, during routine conditions of transport, prevents the access of unauthorized persons to the interior of the enclosure, and .2 provisions are made to secure the package or o verpack so that its position within the vehicle enclosure remains fixed during routine conditions of transport, and .3 there is no loading or unloading during the shi pment; .2 2 mSv/h at any point on the outer surfaces of the ve hicle, including the upper and lower surfaces, or, in the case of an open vehicle, at any point on the vertical planes projected from the outer edges of the vehicle, on the upper surface of the load, and on the lower external surface of the vehicle; and .3 0 . 1 mSv/h at any point 2 m from the vertical planes re presented by the outer lateral surfaces of the vehicle, or, if the load is transported in an open vehicle, at any point 2 m from the vertical planes projected from the outer edges of the vehicle . 7.1.4.5.6 In the case of road vehicles, no persons other t han the driver and assistants shall be permitted in vehicles carrying packages, overpacks or freight containers bearing category II-YELLOW or III-YELLOW labels . 7.1.4.5.7 Packages or overpacks having a surface dos e rate greater than 2 mSv/h, unless being transported in or on a vehicle under exclusive use in accordance with the table under 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 3, footnote (a), shall not be transported by sh ip except under special arrangement . 7.1.4.5.8 The transport of consignments by means of a sp ecial use ship which, by virtue of its design or by reason of its being chartered, is dedicated to the purpose of carrying radioactive material shall be excepted from the provisions specified in 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 3 provided that the following conditions a re met: .1 a radiation protection programme for the s hipment shall be approved by the Administration and, when requested, by the competent authority at each port of call; .2 stowage arrangements shall be predeter mined for the whole voyage, including any consignments to be loaded at ports of call en route; and .3 the loading, transport and unloading of th e consignments shall be supervised by persons qualified in the transport of radioactive material . 7.1.4.5.9 Any conveyance and equipment used regula rly for the transport of radioactive material shall be periodically checked to determine the level of contamination . The frequency of such checks shall be relat ed to the likelihood of contamination and the extent to which radioactive material is transported . 7.1.4.5.10 Except as provided in 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 11, any conveyance, or equipment or part the reof, which has become contaminated above the limits specified in 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 2 in the course of the transport of radioactiv e material, or which shows a dose rate in excess of 5 ’ Sv/h at the surface, shall be decontaminated as soon as possible by a qualified person and shall not be re-used unless the following conditions are fulfilled: .1 the non-fixed contamination shall not exc eed the limits specified in 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 2; .2 the dose rate resulting from the fixed contam ination shall not exceed 5 ’ Sv/h at the surface . 7.1.4.5.11 A freight container or conveyance dedi cated to the transport of unpackaged radioactive material under exclusive use shall be excepted from the provisions of 4 . 1 . 9 . 1 . 4 and 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 10 solely with regard to its internal surfac es and only for as long as it remains under that specific exclusive use . 7.1.4.5.12 Where a consignment is undeliverable, th e consignment shall be placed in a safe location and the appropriate competent authority shall be informed as soon as possible and a request made for instructions on further action . 7.1.4.5.13 Radioactive material shall be segregat ed sufficiently from crew and passengers . The following values for dose shall be used f or the purpose of calculating segregation distances or dose rates: .1 for crew in regularly occupied working are as, a dose of 5 mSv in a year; .2 for passengers, in areas where the passeng ers have regular access, a dose of 1 mSv in a year, taking account of the exposures expected to be delivered by all other relevant sources and practices under control . 7.1.4.5.14 Category II-YELLOW or III-YELLOW package s or overpacks shall not be transported in spaces occupied by passengers, except those exclusively reserved for couriers specially authorized to accompany such packages or overpacks . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 471

Chapter 7.1 – General stowage provisions 461 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.1.4.5.15 Any group of packages, overpacks and freig ht containers containing fissile material stored in transit in any one storage area shall be so limited that the total sum of the criticality safety indexes in the group does not exceed 50 . Each group shall be stored so as to maintain a sp acing of at least 6 m from other such groups . 7.1.4.5.16 Where the total sum of the criticality safet y indexes on board a conveyance or in a freight container exceeds 50, as permitted in the table under 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 3 . 4, storage shall be such as to maintain a spacin g of at least 6 m from other groups of packages, overpacks or freight containers containing fissile material or other conveyances carrying radioactive material . 7.1.4.5.17 Any departure from the provisions in 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 15 and 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 16 shall be approved by the Administration a nd, when requested, by the competent authority at each port of call . 7.1.4.5.18 The segregation requirements specifie d in 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 13 may be established in one of the following tw o ways: – by following the segregation table for per sons (table 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 18) in respect of living quarters or spaces re gularly occupied by persons . – by demonstration that, for the following i ndicated exposure times, the direct measurement of the dose rate in regularly occupied spaces and living quarters is less than: for the crew: 0 . 0070 mSv/h up to 700 h in a year, or 0 . 0018 mSv/h up to 2750 h in a year; and for the passengers: 0 . 0018 mSv/h up to 550 h in a year, taking into account any relocation o f cargo during the voyage . In all cases, the measurements of do se rate must be made and documented by a suitably qualified person . 7.1.4.6 Stowage of dangerous goods under temperat ure control 7.1.4.6.1 When stowage arrangements are made, it sha ll be borne in mind that it may become necessary to take the appropriate emergency action, such as jettisoning or flooding of the container with water, and the temperature needs to be monitored in accordance to 7 . 3 . 7 . If, during transport, the control tempe rature is exceeded, an alerting procedure shall be initiated involving either repair of the refrigeration machinery or an increase in the cooling capacity (such as by adding liquid or solid refrigerants) . If an adequate cooling capacity is not rest ored, emergency procedures shall be started . 7.1.4.7 Stowage of stabilized dangerous goods For substances, for which the word “STABIL IZED” is added as part of the proper shipping name of the substances in accordance with 3 . 1 . 2 . 6, Stowage Category D and SW1 shall apply . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 472

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 462 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Table 7.1.4.5.18 – CLASS 7 – Radioactive material Segregation table for persons Sum of transport indices (TI) Segregation distance of radioactive material from passengers and crew General cargo ship 1 Ferry, etc. 2 Offshore support vessel 3 Break bulk (m) Containers (TEUs) 4 Up to 10 6 1 Stow at bow or stern furthest from living quarters and regularly occupied work areas Stow at stern or at platform midpoint More than 10 but not more than 20 8 1 as above as above More than 20 but not more than 50 13 2 as above not applicable More than 50 but not more than 100 18 3 as above not applicable More than 100 but not more than 200 26 4 as above not applicable More than 200 but not more than 400 36 6 as above not applicable 1 General cargo, break bulk or ro-ro containership of 150 m minimum length . 2 Ferry or cross channel, coastal and inter-island ship of 100 m minimum length . 3 Offshore support vessel of 50 m minimum length (in this case the practical maximum sum of TIs carried is 20) . 4 TEU means “20 ft Equivalent Unit” (this is equivalent to a standard freight container of 6 m nominal length) . 7.1.5 Stowage codes The stowage codes given in column 16a of the Dan gerous Goods List are as specified below: Stowage code Description SW1 Protected from sources of heat . SW2 Clear of living quarters . SW3 Shall be transported under temperature c ontrol . SW4 Surface ventilation is required to assi st in removing any residual solvent vapour . SW5 If under deck, stow in a mechanically vent ilated space . SW6 When stowed under deck, mechanical vent ilation shall be in accordance with SOLAS regulation II-2/19 (II-2/54) for flammable liquids with flashpoint below 23 ° C c . c . SW7 As approved by the competent authoriti es of the countries involved in the shipment . SW8 Ventilation may be required . The possible need to open hatches in case of fir e to provide maximum ventilation and to apply water in an emergency, and the consequent risk to the stability of the ship through flooding of the cargo spaces, shall be considered before loading . SW9 Provide a good through ventilation for b agged cargo . Double strip stowage is recommended . The illustration in 7 . 6 . 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 shows how this can be achieved . During the voyage regular temperature r eadings shall be taken at varying depths in the hold and recorded . If the temperature of the cargo exceeds the a mbient temperature and continues to increase, ventilation shall be closed down . SW10 Unless carried in closed cargo transp ort units, bales shall be properly covered by tarpaulins or the like . Cargo spaces shall be clean, dry and free fro m oil or grease . Ventilator cowls leading into the cargo s pace shall have sparking-preventing screens . All other openings, entrances and hatch es leading to the cargo space shall be securely closed . During temporary interruption of load ing, when the hatch remains uncovered, a fire-watch shall be kept . During loading or discharge, smoking in t he vicinity shall be prohibited and fire-fighting appliances kept ready for immediate operation . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 473

Chapter 7.1 – General stowage provisions 463 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Stowage code Description SW11 Cargo transport units shall be shaded from direct sunlight . Packages in cargo transport units shall b e stowed so as to allow for adequate air circulation throughout the cargo . SW12 Taking account of any supplementar y requirements specified in the transport documents . SW13 Taking account of any supplementar y requirements specified in the competent authority approval certificate(s) . SW14 Category A only if the special stowage pr ovisions of 7 . 4 . 1 . 4 and 7 . 6 . 2 . 8 . 4 are complied with . SW15 For metal drums, stowage category B . SW16 For unit loads in open cargo transport u nits, stowage category B . SW17 Category E, for closed cargo transpo rt unit and pallet boxes only . Ventilation may be required . The possible need to open hatches in case of fir e to provide maximum ventilation and to apply water in an emergency, and the consequent risk to the stability of the ship through flooding of the cargo space, shall be considered before loading . SW18 Category A, when transported in acco rdance with P650 . SW19 For batteries transported in accord ance with special provisions 376 or 377, category C, unless transported on a short international voyage . SW20 For uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solu tion stowage, category D applies . SW21 For uranium metal pyrophoric and thor ium metal pyrophoric stowage, category D applies . SW22 For AEROSOLS with a maximum capacity of 1 L : category A . For AEROSOLS with a capacity above 1 L: categ ory B . For WASTE AEROSOLS or WASTE GAS CARTRIDGE S: category C, clear of living quarters . SW23 When transported in BK3 bulk containe r, see 7 . 6 . 2 . 12 and 7 . 7 . 3 . 9 . SW24 For special stowage provisions, see 7 . 4 . 1 . 3 and 7 . 6 . 2 . 7 . 2 . SW25 For special stowage provisions, see 7 . 6 . 2 . 7 . 3 . SW26 For special stowage provisions, see 7 . 4 . 1 . 4 and 7 . 6 . 2 . 11 . 1 . 1 . SW27 For special stowage provisions, see 7 . 6 . 2 . 7 . 2 . 1 . SW28 As approved by the competent authorit y of the country of origin . SW29 For engines or machinery containing fu els with flashpoint equal or greater than 23°C, stowage Category A . SW30 For special stowage provisions, se e 7 . 1 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 7.1.6 Handling codes The handling codes given in column 16a of the Da ngerous Goods List are as specified below: Handling code Description H1 Keep as dry as reasonably practicable . H2 Keep as cool as reasonably practicable . H3 During transport, it should be stowed (o r kept) in a cool ventilated place . H4 If cleaning of cargo spaces has to be carried o ut at sea, the safety procedures followed and standard of equipment used shall be at least as effective as those employed as industry best practice in a port . Until such cleaning is undertaken, the ca rgo spaces in which the asbestos has been carried shall be closed and access to those spaces shall be prohibited . H5 Avoid handling the packaging or large pack aging or keep handling to a minimum . Inform the appropriate public health au thority or veterinary authority where persons or animals may have been exposed . △ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 474

7 464 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 7.2 General segregation provisions 7.2.1 Introduction This chapter contains the general provisions for the segregation of goods which are mutually incompatible . Additional segregation provisions are give n in: 7 . 3 Consigning operations concerning the p acking and use of cargo transport units (CTUs) and related provisions; 7 . 4 Stowage and segregation on containerships ; 7 . 5 Stowage and segregation on roll-on/roll-off ships; 7 . 6 Stowage and segregation on general cargo shi ps; and 7 . 7 Shipborne barges on barge-carrying ships . 7.2.2 Definitions 7.2.2.1 Segregation Segregation is the process of separating two or more substances or articles which are considered mutually incompatible when their packing or stowage together may result in undue hazards in case of leakage or spillage, or any other accident . However, as the extent of the hazard arising m ay vary, the segregation arrangements required may also vary as appropriate . Segregation is obtained by maintainin g certain distances between incompatible dangerous goods or by requiring the presence of one or more steel bulkheads or decks between them, or a combination thereof . Intervening spaces between such dange rous goods may be filled with other cargo compatible with the dangerous substances or articles in question . 7.2.2.2 Segregation terms The following segregation terms that are used throughout this Code are defined in other chapters of this part as they apply to packing cargo transport units and segregation on board different ship types: .1 “away from”; .2 “separated from”; .3 “separated by a complete compartment or hol d from”; .4 “separated longitudinally by an inter vening complete compartment or hold from” . Segregation terms such as “away from class … ” that are used in the Dangerous Goods List, “class …” is deemed to include: .1 all substances within “class …”; and .2 all substances for which a subsidiary haza rd label of “class …” is required . 7.2.3 Segregation provisions 7.2.3.1 To determine the segregation requireme nts between two or more dangerous goods, the segregation provisions, including the segregation table (7 . 2 . 4) and column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List sh all be consulted, see also the annex to this chapter . In case of conflicting provisions, the pro visions of column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List, always take precedence . 7.2.3.2 Whenever a segregation term applies (see 7 . 2 . 2 . 2), the goods are: .1 not permitted to be packed in the same outer pac kaging; and .2 not permitted to be transported in the same ca rgo transport unit except as provided in 7 . 2 . 6 and 7 . 3 . 4 . For “limited quantities” and “excepte d quantities” see chapters 3 . 4 and 3 . 5 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 475

Chapter 7.2 – General segregation provisions 465 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.2.3.3 Where the provisions of this Code indicate a s ingle secondary hazard (one subsidiary hazard label), the segregation provisions applicable to that hazard shall take precedence where they are more stringent than those of the primary hazard . The segregation provisions correspo nding to a subsidiary hazard of class 1 are those for class 1 division 1 . 3 . 7.2.3.4 The segregation provisions for substan ces, materials or articles having more than two hazards (two or more subsidiary hazard labels) are given in column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List . For example: In the Dangerous Goods List entry for BROMIN E CHLORIDE, class 2 . 3, UN 2901, subsidiary hazards 5 . 1 and 8, the following particular segrega tion is specified: “SG6 (segregation as for class 5 . 1), and SG19 (stow “separated from” class 7) . ” 7.2.4 Segregation table The general provisions for segregation between the various classes of dangerous goods are shown in the “segregation table” given below . Since the properties of substances, mate rials or articles within each class may vary greatly, the Dangerous Goods List shall always be consulted for particular provisions for segregation as, in the case of conflicting provisions, these take precedence over the general provisions . Segregation shall also take account of a sin gle subsidiary hazard label . CLASS 1.1 1.2 1.5 1.3 1.6 1.4 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 4.1 4.2 4.3 5.1 5.2 6.1 6.2 7 8 9 Explosives 1.1, 1.2, 1.5 * * * 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 4 2 4 X Explosives 1.3, 1.6 * * * 4 2 2 4 3 3 4 4 4 2 4 2 2 X Explosives 1.4 * * * 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 X 4 2 2 X Flammable gases 2.1 4 4 2 X X X 2 1 2 2 2 2 X 4 2 1 X Non-toxic, non-flammable gases 2.2 2 2 1 X X X 1 X 1 X X 1 X 2 1 X X Toxic gases 2.3 2 2 1 X X X 2 X 2 X X 2 X 2 1 X X Flammable liquids 3 4 4 2 2 1 2 X X 2 2 2 2 X 3 2 X X Flammable solids (including self- 4.1 reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives) 4 3 2 1 X X X X 1 X 1 2 X 3 2 1 X Substances liable to 4.2 spontaneous combustion 4 3 2 2 1 2 2 1 X 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 X Substances which, in contact 4.3 with water, emit flammable gases 4 4 2 2 X X 2 X 1 X 2 2 X 2 2 1 X Oxidizing substances (agents) 5.1 4 4 2 2 X X 2 1 2 2 X 2 1 3 1 2 X Organic peroxides 5.2 4 4 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 X 1 3 2 2 X Toxic substances 6.1 2 2 X X X X X X 1 X 1 1 X 1 X X X Infectious substances 6.2 4 4 4 4 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 1 X 3 3 X Radioactive material 7 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 X 3 X 2 X Corrosive substances 8 4 2 2 1 X X X 1 1 1 2 2 X 3 2 X X Miscellaneous dangerous 9 substances and articles X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X The numbers and symbols in the table have the following meanings: 1 – “away from” 2 – “separated from” 3 – “separated by a complete compartment or ho ld from” 4 – “separated longitudinally by an interv ening complete compartment or hold from” X – the Dangerous Goods List has to be consulted t o verify whether there are specific segregation provisions * – see 7 . 2 . 7 . 1 of this chapter for the segregation provis ions between class 1 substances or articles Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 476

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 466 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.2.5 Segregation groups 7.2.5.1 For the purpose of segregation, dangerou s goods having certain similar chemical properties have been grouped together in segregation groups as listed in 7 . 2 . 5 . 2 . The entries allocated to these segr egation groups are listed in 3 . 1 . 4 . 4 and are identified by a segregation group cod e in column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List . 7.2.5.2 The segregation group codes given in colum n 16b of the Dangerous Goods List are as specified below: Segregation Group Code Segregation Group Description SGG1 1 acids SGG1a 1, entries marked * * identifies strong acids SGG2 2 ammonium compounds SGG3 3 bromates SGG4 4 chlorates SGG5 5 chlorites SGG6 6 cyanides SGG7 7 heavy metals and their salts (including their organometallic compounds) SGG8 8 hypochlorites SGG9 9 lead and its compounds SGG10 10 liquid halogenated hydrocarbons SGG11 11 mercury and mercury compounds SGG12 12 nitrites and their mixtures SGG13 13 perchlorates SGG14 14 permanganates SGG15 15 powdered metals SGG16 16 peroxides SGG17 17 azides SGG18 18 alkalis 7.2.5.3 It is recognized that not all substances, mi xtures, solutions or preparations falling within a segregation group are listed in the IMDG Code by name . These are shipped under N . O . S . entries . Although these N . O . S . entries are not themselves listed in the se gregation groups (see 3 . 1 . 4 . 4), the consignor shall decide whether inc lusion under the segregation group is appropriate and, if so, shall mention that fact in the transport document (see 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 11) . 7.2.5.4 The segregation groups in this Code do not cover substances which fall outside the classification criteria of this Code . It is recognized that some non-hazardou s substances have similar chemical properties as substances listed in the segregation groups . A consignor or the person responsible for p acking the goods into a cargo transport unit who does have knowledge of the chemical properties of such non-dangerous goods may decide to implement the segregation requirements of a related segregation group on a voluntary basis . 7.2.6 Special segregation provisions and exempt ions 7.2.6.1 Notwithstanding 7 . 2 . 3 . 3 and 7 . 2 . 3 . 4, substances of the same class may be stowed to gether without regard to segregation required by secondary hazards (subsidiary hazard label(s)), provided that the substances do not react dangerously with each other and cause: .1 combustion and/or evolution of consider able heat; .2 evolution of flammable, toxic or asphyxia nt gases; .3 the formation of corrosive substances; or .4 the formation of unstable substances . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 477

Chapter 7.2 – General segregation provisions 467 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.2.6.2 Where the Dangerous Goods List specifies th at “segregation as for class … ” applies, the segregation provisions ap plicable to that class in 7 . 2 . 4 shall be applied . However, for the purposes of interpreti ng 7 . 2 . 6 . 1, which permits substances of the same clas s to be stowed together provided they do not react dangerously with each other, the segregation provisions of the class as represented by the primary hazard class in the Dangerous Goods List shall be applied . For example: UN 2965 – BORON TRIFLUORIDE DIMETHYL ETHER ATE, class 4 . 3 The Dangerous Goods List entry specifies “S G5 (“segregation as for class 3)”, “SG8 (stow “away from” class 4 . 1)” and “SG13 (stow “away from class 8)”” . For the purposes of establishing the segre gation provisions applicable in 7 . 2 . 4, the class 3 column shall be consulted . This substance may be stowed together with o ther class 4 . 3 substances where they do not react dangero usly with each other, see 7 . 2 . 6 . 1 . 7.2.6.3 No segregation needs to be applied: .1 between dangerous goods of different cla sses which comprise the same substance but vary only in their water content, such as sodium sulphide in classes 4 . 2 and 8 or for class 7 if the differenc e is due to quantity only; .2 between dangerous goods which belo ng to a group of substances of different classes but for which scientific evidence exists that they do not react dangerously when in contact with each other . Substances within the same table 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 . 1, 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 . 2 or 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 . 3 are compatible with one another; and .3 to substances within the table 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 . 4, except that due regard shall continue to be t aken of the dangerous reactions specified in the provisions of 7 . 2 . 6 . 1 . 1 to 7 . 2 . 6 . 1 . 4 . Table 7.2.6.3.1 UN Proper shipping name Class Subsidiary hazard(s) Packing group 2014 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, AQUEOUS SOLUTION with not less than 20% but not more than 60% hydrogen peroxide (stabilized as necessary) 5 . 1 8 II 2984 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, AQUEOUS SOLUT ION with not less than 8% but less than 20% hydrogen peroxide (stabilized as necessary) 5 . 1 III 3105 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, LIQUID (pe roxyacetic acid, type D, stabilized) 5 . 2 8 3107 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, LIQUID (perox yacetic acid, type E, stabilized) 5 . 2 8 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID (perox yacetic acid, type F, stabilized) 5 . 2 8 3149 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE AND PEROXYACETIC A CID, MIXTURE with acid(s), water and not more than 5% peroxyacetic acid, STABILIZED 5 . 1 8 II Table 7.2.6.3.2 UN Proper shipping name Class Subsidiary hazard(s) Packing group 1295 TRICHLOROSILANE 4 . 3 3/8 I 1818 SILICON TETRACHLORIDE 8 – II 2189 DICHLOROS ILANE 2 . 3 2 . 1/8 – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 478

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 468 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Table 7.2.6.3.3 UN Proper shipping name Class Subsidiary hazard(s) Packing group 3391 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, PYROPHORIC 4 . 2 I 3392 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, P YROPHORIC 4 . 2 I 3393 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, PY ROPHORIC, WATER-REACTIVE 4 . 2 4 . 3 I 3394 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, P YROPHORIC, WATER-REACTIVE 4 . 2 4 . 3 I 3395 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, WAT ER-REACTIVE 4 . 3 I, II, III 3396 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANC E, SOLID, WATER REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE 4 . 3 4 . 1 I, II, III 3397 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTAN CE, SOLID, WATER REACTIVE, SELF-HEATING 4 . 3 4 . 2 I, II, III 3398 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE , LIQUID, WATER REACTIVE 4 . 3 I, II, III 3399 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANC E, LIQUID, WATER REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE 4 . 3 3 I, II, III 3400 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANC E, SOLID , SELF-HEATING 4 . 2 II, III Table 7.2.6.3.4 UN* Proper shipping name Class Subsidiary hazard(s) Packing group 1325 FLAMMABLE SOLID, ORGANIC, N . O . S . with a technical name as listed in 2 . 5 . 3 . 2 . 4 under “exempt” 4 . 1 None II, III 3101 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, LIQ UID 5 . 2 1 and/or 8 – 3102 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, SOLID 5 . 2 1 and/or 8 – 3103 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, LIQUI D 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3104 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, SOLID 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3105 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, LIQUID 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3106 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, SOLID 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3107 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, LIQUID 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3108 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, SOLID 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3111 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, LIQUID, T EMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 1 and/or 8 – 3112 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, SOLID , TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 1 and/or 8 – 3113 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, LIQUI D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3114 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, SOLID, T EMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3115 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, LIQUID , TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3116 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, SOLID, T EMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3117 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, LIQUID , TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 None or 8 – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 479

Chapter 7.2 – General segregation provisions 469 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 UN* Proper shipping name Class Subsidiary hazard(s) Packing group 3118 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID , TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 None or 8 – 3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID, T EMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 None or 8 – * Except for substances with the technical name PEROXYACETIC ACID 7.2.6.4 Notwithstanding table 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 . 4, due regard shall continue to be taken of the da ngerous reactions specified in the provisions of 7 . 2 . 6 . 1 . 1 to 7 . 2 . 6 . 1 . 4 . 7.2.6.5 Notwithstanding the provisions of 7 . 2 . 5, substances of class 8, packing group II or II I, that would otherwise be required to be segregated from one another due to the provisions pertaining to segregation groups as identified by an entry in column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List indicating “away from” or “separated from” “acids” or “away from” or “separated from” “alkalis”, may be transported in the same cargo transport unit, whether in the same packaging or not, provided: .1 the substances comply with the provision s of 7 . 2 . 6 . 1; .2 the package does not contain more than 30 L for li quids or 30 kg for solids; .3 the transport document includes the stat ement required by 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 11 . 3; and .4 a copy of the test report that verifies that the su bstances do not react dangerously with each other shall be provided if requested by the competent authority . 7.2.7 Segregation of goods of class 1 7.2.7.1 Segregation between goods of class 1 7.2.7.1.1 Goods of class 1 may be stowed within the same com partment or hold, or closed cargo transport unit as indicated in 7 . 2 . 7 . 1 . 4 . In other cases, they shall be stowed in separ ate compartments or holds, or closed cargo transport units . 7.2.7.1.2 When goods requiring different stowage a rrangements are permitted by 7 . 2 . 7 . 1 . 4 to be transported in the same compartment or h old, or closed cargo transport unit, the appropriate stowage arrangement shall conform to the most stringent provisions for the entire load . 7.2.7.1.3 Where a mixed load of different divisions is t ransported within the same compartment or hold, or closed cargo transport unit, the entire load shall be treated as if belonging to the hazard division in the order 1 . 1 (most dangerous), 1 . 5, 1 . 2, 1 . 3, 1 . 6 and 1 . 4 (least dangerous) and the stowage arrangement shall conform to the most stringent provisions for the entire load . 7.2.7.1.4 Permitted mixed stowage for goods of class 1 Compatibility group A B C D E F G H J K L N S A X B X X C X X 6 X 6 X 1 X 4 X D X 6 X X 6 X 1 X 4 X E X 6 X 6 X X 1 X 4 X F X X G X 1 X 1 X 1 X X H X X J X X K X X L X 2 N X 4 X 4 X 4 X 3 X 5 S X X X X X X X X X X 5 X “X” indicates that goods of the corresponding compatibility groups may be stowed in the same compartment, hold, or closed cargo transport unit . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 480

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 470 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Notes 1 Explosive articles in compatibility group G (other than fireworks and those requiring special stowage) may be stowed with explosive articles of compatibility groups C, D and E provided no e xplosive substances are transported in the same compartment or hold, or closed cargo transport unit . 2 A consignment of one type in compatibility group L shall only be stowed with a consignment of the same type within compatibility group L . 3 Different types of articles of Division 1 . 6, compatibility group N, may only be transp orted together when it is proven that there is no additional risk of sympathetic detonation between the articles . Otherwise they shall be treated as divisi on 1 . 1 . 4 When articles of compatibility group N are transported with articles or substances of compatibility groups C, D or E, the goods of compatibility group N shall be treated as compatibility g roup D . 5 When articles of compatibility group N are transported together with articles or substances of compatibility group S, the entire load shall be treated as compatibility group N . 6 Any combination of articles in compatibility groups C, D and E shall be treated as compatibility group E . Any combination of substances in c ompatibility groups C and D shall be treated as the most appropriate compatibility group shown in 2 . 1 . 2 . 3, taking into account the predominant char acteristics of the combined load . This overall classification code shall be displayed on any label or placard placed on a unit load or closed cargo transport unit as prescribed in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 7.2.7.1.5 Closed cargo transport units carrying di fferent goods of class 1 do not require segregation from each other provided 7 . 2 . 7 . 1 . 4 authorizes the goods to be transported tog ether . Where this is not permitted, closed cargo tr ansport unit shall be “separated from” one another . 7.2.7.2 Segregation from goods of other classes 7.2.7.2.1 Notwithstanding the segregation prov isions of this chapter, AMMONIUM NITRATE (UN 1942), AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER (UN 2067), alkali metal nitrates (e . g . UN 1486) and alkaline earth metal nitrate s (e . g . UN 1454) may be stowed together with blasti ng explosives (except EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE C, UN 0083) provided the aggregate is treated as blasting explosives under class 1 . Note: Alkali metal nitrates include caes ium nitrate (UN 1451), lithium nitrate (UN 2722), potassium nitrate (UN 1486), rubidium nitrate (UN 1477) and sodium nitrate (UN 1498) . Alkaline earth metal nitrates include b arium nitrate (UN 1446), beryllium nitrate (UN 2464), calcium nitrate (UN 1454), magnesium nitrate (UN 1474) and strontium nitrate (UN 1507) . 7.2.8 Segregation codes The segregation codes given in column 16b of t he Dangerous Goods List are as specified below: Segregation code Description SG1 For packages carrying a subsidiary hazard label of class 1, segregation as for class 1, division 1 . 3 . However, in relation to goods of class 1, seg regation as for the primary hazard . SG2 Segregation as for class 1 . 2G . SG3 Segregation as for class 1 . 3G . SG4 Segregation as for class 2 . 1 . SG5 Segregation as for class 3 . SG6 Segregation as for class 5 . 1 . SG7 Stow “away from” class 3 . SG8 Stow “away from” class 4 . 1 . SG9 Stow “away from” class 4 . 3 . SG10 Stow “away from” class 5 . 1 . SG11 Stow “away from” class 6 . 2 . SG12 Stow “away from” class 7 . SG13 Stow “away from” class 8 . SG14 Stow “separated from” class 1 except fo r division 1 . 4S . SG15 Stow “separated from” class 3 . SG16 Stow “separated from” class 4 . 1 . SG17 Stow “separated from” class 5 . 1 . SG18 Stow “separated from” class 6 . 2 . SG19 Stow “separated from” class 7 . SG20 Stow “away from” SGG1 – acids . SG21 Stow “away from” SGG18 – alkalis . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 481

Chapter 7.2 – General segregation provisions 471 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Segregation code Description SG22 Stow “away from” ammonium salts . SG23 Stow “away from” animal or vegetable oi ls . SG24 Stow “away from” SGG17 – azides . SG25 Stow “separated from” goods of classe s 2 . 1 and 3 . SG26 In addition: from goods of classes 2 . 1 and 3 when stowed on deck of a containership a min imum distance of two container spaces athwartship shall be maintained, when stowed on ro-ro ships a distance of 6 m athwartship shall be maintained . SG27 Stow “separated from” explosives con taining chlorates or perchlorates . SG28 Stow “separated from” SGG2 – ammonium co mpounds and explosives containing ammonium compounds or salts . SG29 Segregation from foodstuffs as in 7 . 3 . 4 . 2 . 2, 7 . 6 . 3 . 1 . 2 or 7 . 7 . 3 . 7 . SG30 Stow “away from” SGG7 – heavy metals and thei r salts . SG31 Stow “away from” SGG9 – lead and its compou nds . SG32 Stow “away from” SGG10 – liquid halogena ted hydrocarbons . SG33 Stow “away from” SGG15 – powdered metal s . SG34 When containing ammonium compound s, “separated from” SGG4 – chlorates or SGG13 – perchlorates and explosives containing chlorates or perchlorates . SG35 Stow “separated from” SGG1 – acids . SG36 Stow “separated from” SGG18 – alkalis . SG37 Stow “separated from” ammonia . SG38 Stow “separated from” SGG2 – ammonium c ompounds . SG39 Stow “separated from” SGG2 – ammonium c ompounds other than AMMONIUM PERSULPHATE (UN 1444) . SG40 Stow “separated from” SGG2 – ammonium c ompounds other than mixtures of ammonium persulphates and/or potassium persulphates and/or sodium persulphates . SG41 Stow “separated from” animal or veget able oil . SG42 Stow “separated from” SGG3 – bromates . SG43 Stow “separated from” bromine . SG44 Stow “separated from” CARBON TETRACH LORIDE (UN 1846) . SG45 Stow “separated from” SGG4 – chlorate s . SG46 Stow “separated from” chlorine . SG47 Stow “separated from” SGG5 – chlorites . SG48 Stow “separated from” combustible material (particularly liquids) . SG49 Stow “separated from” SGG6 – cyanides . SG50 Segregation from foodstuffs as in 7 . 3 . 4 . 2 . 1, 7 . 6 . 3 . 1 . 2 or 7 . 7 . 3 . 6 . SG51 Stow “separated from” SGG8 – hypochlor ites . SG52 Stow “separated from” iron oxide . SG53 Shall not be stowed together with combus tible material in the same cargo transport unit . SG54 Stow “separated from” SGG11 – mercury a nd mercury compounds . SG55 Stow “separated from” mercury salts . SG56 Stow “separated from” SGG12 – nitrite s . SG57 Stow “separated from” odour-absorbin g cargoes . SG58 Stow “separated from” SGG13 – perchlor ates . SG59 Stow “separated from” SGG14 – permang anates . SG60 Stow “separated from” SGG16 – peroxid es . SG61 Stow “separated from” SGG15 – powdered m etals . SG62 Stow “separated from” sulphur . △ △ △ △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 482

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 472 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Segregation code Description SG63 Stow “separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from” class 1 . SG64 [Reserved] SG65 Stow “separated by a compl ete compartment or hold from” class 1 except for division 1 . 4 . SG66 [Reserved] SG67 Stow “separated from” d ivision 1 . 4 and “separated longitudinally by an inte rvening complete compartment or hold from” divisions 1 . 1, 1 . 2, 1 . 3, 1 . 5 and 1 . 6 except from explosives of compatibility gro up J . SG68 If flashpoint 60 ° C c . c . or below, segregation as for class 3 but “awa y from” class 4 . 1 . SG69 For AEROSOLS with a maximum capacity of 1 L : segregation as for class 9 . Stow “separated from” class 1 except for di vision 1 . 4 . For AEROSOLS with a capacity above 1 L: segre gation as for the appropriate subdivision of class 2 . For WASTE AEROSOLS: segregation as for th e appropriate subdivision of class 2 . SG70 For arsenic sulphides, “separated f rom” SGG1 – acids . SG71 Within the appliance, to the extent that t he dangerous goods are integral parts of the complete life-saving appliance, there is no need to apply the provisions on segregation of substances in chapter 7 . 2 . SG72 See tables in 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 . SG73 [Reserved] SG74 Segregation as for 1 . 4G . SG75 Stow “separated from” SGG1a – strong ac ids . SG76 Segregation as for class 7 . SG77 Segregation as for class 8 . However, in relation to class 7, no segrega tion needs to be applied . SG78 Stow “separated longitudinally by a n intervening complete compartment or hold from” division 1 . 1, 1 . 2, and 1 . 5 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 483

Chapter 7.2 – General segregation provisions 473 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Annex Segregation flow chart The use of this chart is not mandatory and is provided for information purposes only. Read the general segregation provisions (refer to 7.2) Identify the UN No., proper shipping name, class or division, subsidiary hazard class or division, if any, and where assigned packing group for each substance Comply with the exemption as appropriate Yes No Is there any specific segregation requirement in column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List (DGL) or in the Transport Document (see 5.4.1.5.11)? Use the segregation table in accordance with the general segregation provisions Conclusion A re t he da nge r ous go o ds exem pted from the ge n er al se gre g ation provisions (refer to e.g. 3.4, 3.5, 7.2.6.3 or 7.2.6.4)? Use the segregation table taking into account any specific or general segregation provisions and determine the specific segregation provisions for each substance (e.g. segregation groups) Ensure the most stringent requirements are taken Conclusion Yes No Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 484

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 474 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Examples The following examples only illustrate the process of segregation . Subsequent additional provisions of t his Code may apply (e . g . 7 . 3 . 4) . 1 Segregation of 300 kg of celluloid, scrap (UN 2 002) in one drum and 200 L of epibromohydrin (UN 2558) in one drum . . 1 According to the Dangerous Goods List, UN 20 02 is class 4 . 2, PG III, and UN 2558 is class 6 . 1, PG I and has a subsidiary hazard of class 3 . . 2 Neither are exempted by 3 . 4, 3 . 5, 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 or 7 . 2 . 6 . 4 . . 3 There are no specific segregation require ments for these substances in column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List . . 4 According to the segregation table given i n 7 . 2 . 4 for classes 4 . 2 and 6 . 1, the intersecting box shows number 1, wh ereas for classes 4 . 2 and 3, the intersecting box shows a n umber 2 . The value 2 is the more stringent, the refore the substances are required to be “separated from” one another . 2 Segregation of 50 kg of potassium perchlor ate (UN 1489) in one drum and 50 kg of nickel cyanide (UN 1653) in one drum . . 1 According to the Dangerous Goods List, UN 14 89 is class 5 . 1, PG II and UN 1653 is class 6 . 1, PG II . . 2 Neither are exempted by 3 . 4, 3 . 5, 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 or 7 . 2 . 6 . 4 . . 3 For UN 1489, column 16b of the Dangerous Goods L ist states “SG38” (“separated from” ammonium compounds other than AMMONIUM PERSULPHATE (UN 1444)) and “SG49” (“separated from” cyanides) . . 4 For UN 1653, column 16b of the Dangerous Goods Li st states “SG35” (“separated from” acids) . . 5 According to the segregation table given i n 7 . 2 . 4 for classes 5 . 1 and 6 . 1, the intersecting box shows an “1” . . 6 According to the segregation groups in sec tion 3 . 1 . 4, UN 1653 is listed in group 6 (cyanides) . . 7 Therefore, the substances are required t o be “separated from” one another . 3 Segregation of 10 kg of acetone (UN 1090) in one b ox and 20 kg of ethyldichlorosilane (UN 1183) in another box . . 1 According to the Dangerous Goods List, UN 10 90 is class 3, PG II . . 2 According to the Dangerous Goods List, UN 11 83 is class 4 . 3, PG I and has subsidiary hazards of classes 3 and 8 . . 3 Neither are exempted by 3 . 4, 3 . 5, 7 . 2 . 6 . 3 or 7 . 2 . 6 . 4 . . 4 UN 1090 has no specific segregation require ments in column 16b . . 5 For UN 1183, column 16b of the Dangerous Goods Li st states “SG5” (segregation as for class 3), “SG8” (“away from” class 4 . 1), “SG13” (“away from” class 8), “SG25” (“s eparated from” goods of classes 2 . 1 and 3) and “SG26” (in addition: fro m goods of classes 2 . 1 and 3 when stowed on deck of a containe rship a minimum distance of two container spaces athwartship shall be maintained, when stowed on ro-ro ships a distance of 6 m athwartship shall be maintained) . . 6 According to the segregation table given i n 7 . 2 . 4, the intersecting box shows an “X” for class es 3 and 3, but as UN 1183 is required to be “separated from” class 3, the substances are required to be “separated from” one another . In addition, when these substances are st owed on deck of a containership a minimum distance of two container spaces athwartship shall be maintained, and when they are stowed on ro-ro ships a distance of 6 m athwartship shall be maintained . 4 Segregation of 10 kg of adhesives (U N 1133, PG III) in limited quantities and 40 kg of beryllium nitrate (UN 2464) in the same freight container . . 1 According to the Dangerous Goods List, UN 11 33 is class 3, PG III . . 2 According to the Dangerous Goods List, UN 24 64 is class 5 . 1, PG II and has a subsidiary hazard of class 6 . 1 . . 3 According to section 3 . 4, UN 1133 in limited quantities is exempted f rom the segregation provisions of part 7 . . 4 Therefore, no segregation requirements sha ll apply . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 485

475 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Chapter 7.3 Consigning operations concerning the packing and use of cargo transport units (CTUs) and related provisions 7.3.1 Introduction This chapter contains the provisions appropriate to those responsible for the consignment operations in the dangerous goods transport supply chain, including provisions relating to packing of dangerous goods into cargo transport units . 7.3.2 General provisions for cargo transport un its 7.3.2.1 Packages containing dangerous goods sh all only be loaded in cargo transport units that are strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport, having regard to the conditions to be expected during the anticipated journey . The cargo transport unit shall be constru cted in such a way as to prevent the loss of contents . Where appropriate, the cargo transpor t unit shall be fitted with devices to facilitate securing and handling of the dangerous goods . The cargo transport units shall be adequa tely maintained . 7.3.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the applicab le provisions of the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended, shall be followed for the use of any cargo transport unit which meets the definition of a “container” within the terms of that Convention . 7.3.2.3 The International Convention for Safe C ontainers, 1972 (CSC Convention) does not apply to offshore containers that are handled in open seas . The design and testing of offshore contai ners shall take into account the dynamic lifting and impact forces that may occur when a container is handled in open seas in adverse weather and sea conditions . The requirements for such contai ners shall be determined by the approving competent authority . Such provisions should be based on the Gui delines for the approval of offshore containers handled in open seas (MSC/Circ . 860) . Such containers shall be clearly marked w ith the words “OFFSHORE CONTAINER” on the safety approval plate . 7.3.3 Packing of cargo transport units * 7.3.3.1 Prior to the use of a cargo transport unit it shal l be checked to ensure that it is apparently fit for its intended purpose . † 7.3.3.2 The interior and exterior of a cargo transpo rt unit shall be inspected prior to loading to ensure that there is no damage that could affect its integrity or that of the packages to be loaded in it . 7.3.3.3 Packages shall be examined and any found to be d amaged, leaking or sifting shall not be packed into a cargo transport unit . Care shall be taken to see that excessive wat er, snow, ice or foreign matter adhering to packages is removed before packing into a cargo transport unit . Whenever the handling provision “keep a s dry as reasonably practicable” (H1) is assigned in column 16a of the Dangerous Goods List, the cargo transport unit including any contained goods, securing or packing materials shall be kept as dry as reasonably practicable . 7.3.3.4 Drums containing dangerous goods s hall always be stowed in an upright position unless otherwise authorized by the competent authority . 7.3.3.5 Cargo transport units shall be loaded in ac cordance with 7 . 3 . 4, so that incompatible dangerous or other g oods are segregated . Specific loading instructions such as or ientation arrows, not to be double stacked, keep dry or temperature control requirements shall be met . Liquid dangerous goods shall be loaded be low dry dangerous goods whenever possible . * See CTU Code . † For safety approval plates and maintenance and examination of containers see the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended, annex I, regulations 1 and 2 (see 1 . 1 . 2 . 3) . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 486

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 476 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.3.3.6 Packages containing dangerous goods and unpackaged dangerous articles shall be secured by suitable means capable of restraining the goods (such as fastening straps, sliding slatboards, adjustable brackets) in the cargo transport unit in a manner that will prevent any movement during transport which would change the orientation of the packages or cause them to be damaged . When dangerous goods are transported wi th other goods (e . g . heavy machinery or crates), all goods sha ll be securely fixed or packed in the cargo transport units so as to prevent the release of dangerous goods . Movement of packages may also be prevente d by filling any voids by the use of dunnage or by blocking and bracing . Where restraints such as banding or strap s are used, these shall not be over-tightened to cause damage or deformation of the package or the securing points (such as D-rings) within the cargo transport unit . The packages shall be packed in such a way that t here will be a minimum likelihood of damage to fittings during transport . Such fittings on packages shall be adequat ely protected . Where restraints such as banding or strap s with integral container fittings are used, care should be taken to ensure that the Maximum Securing Load ( MSL ) of the fittings is not exceeded . 7.3.3.7 Packages shall not be stacked unless designed fo r that purpose . Where packages of different stacking designs a re to be loaded together, consideration shall be given to their compatibility for stacking with each other . Where necessary, stacked packages shall be pr evented from damaging the package below by the use of load bearing devices . 7.3.3.8 Cargo shall be entirely contained within t he cargo transport unit without overhang or projections . Oversized machinery (such as tractors a nd vehicles) may overhang or project outside of the cargo transport unit provided that the dangerous goods integral to the machinery cannot leak or spill outside of the cargo transport unit . 7.3.3.9 During loading and unloading, packages contai ning dangerous goods shall be protected from being damaged . Particular attention shall be paid to the ha ndling of packages during their preparation for transport, the type of cargo transport unit to be used for their carriage and to the method of loading or unloading, so that accidental damage is not caused through dragging or mishandling . Packages that appear to be leakin g or damaged so that the contents may escape shall not be accepted for transport . If a package is found to be damaged so that the con tents leak, the damaged package shall not be transported but moved to a safe place in accordance with instructions given by a competent authority or a designated responsible person who is familiar with the dangerous goods, the risks involved and the measures that should be taken in an emergency . Note 1: Additional operational requir ements for the transport of packagings and IBCs are provided in the special packing provisions for packagings and IBCs (see chapter 4 . 1) . 7.3.3.10 When a dangerous goods consignment forms o nly part of the load of a cargo transport unit, it should, whenever possible, be packed adjacent to the doors with marks and labels visible, so as to be accessible in the event of an emergency or to facilitate inspection . 7.3.3.11 If the doors of a cargo transport unit are locke d, the means of locking shall be such that, in cases of emergency, the doors can be opened without delay . 7.3.3.12 When venting is required, venting devices s hall be kept clear and operable . 7.3.3.13 Cargo transport units containing dange rous goods shall be marked and placarded according to chapter 5 . 3 . Irrelevant marks, labels, placards, o range panels, signs and marine pollutant marks shall be removed, masked or otherwise obliterated before packing a cargo transport unit . 7.3.3.14 Cargo transport units shall be packed so tha t the cargo is uniformly distributed consistent with the CTU Code . 7.3.3.15 If goods of class 1 are packed, the cargo transpo rt unit shall comply with the definition in 7 . 1 . 2 for closed cargo transport unit for class 1 . 7.3.3.16 If goods of class 7 are packed, the transport ind ex and, if applicable, the criticality safety index, shall be limited according to 7 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 3 . 7.3.3.17 Those responsible for the packing of dange rous goods into a cargo transport unit shall provide a “container/ vehicle packing certificate” (see 5 . 4 . 2) . This document is not required for tanks . 7.3.3.18 Flexible bulk containers are not allowed t o be transported in cargo transport units (see 4 . 3 . 4) . 7.3.4 Segregation provisions within cargo tra nsport units 7.3.4.1 Dangerous goods which have to be segreg ated from each other according to the provisions in chapter 7 . 2 shall not be transported in the same cargo tra nsport unit with the exception of dangerous goods which shall be segregated “away from” each other which may be transported in the same cargo transport unit with the approval of the competent authority . In such cases an equivalent standard of saf ety shall be maintained . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 487

Chapter 7.3 – Consigning operations concerning the packing and use of CTUs 477 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.3.4.2 Segregation in relation to foodstuffs 7.3.4.2.1 Dangerous goods having a primary or subsid iary hazard of classes 2 . 3, 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 7 (with the exception of UN 2908, 2909, 2910 an d 2911), 8 and dangerous goods having a reference to 7 . 3 . 4 . 2 . 1 in column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List shal l not be transported together with foodstuffs (see 1 . 2 . 1) in the same cargo transport unit . 7.3.4.2.2 Notwithstanding the provisions in 7 . 3 . 4 . 2 . 1, the following dangerous goods may be transported with foodstuffs provided that they are not loaded within 3 m from foodstuffs: .1 dangerous goods of packing group III of clas ses 6 . 1 and 8; .2 dangerous goods of packing group II of class 8 ; and .3 any other dangerous goods of packing group I II with a subsidiary hazard of classes 6 . 1 or 8; and .4 dangerous goods having a reference to 7 . 3 . 4 . 2 . 2 in column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List . 7.3.5 Tracking and monitoring equipment When security devices, beacons or other tracking or monitoring equipment are used, they shall be securely installed to the cargo transport unit and shall be of a certified safe type * for the dangerous goods that will be carried within the cargo transport unit . 7.3.6 Opening and unloading cargo transport units 7.3.6.1 Cargo transport units shall be approache d with caution . Before opening the doors, the nature of the contents and the possibility that leakages may have caused an unsafe condition, concentration of toxic or flammable vapours, or an oxygen-enriched or oxygen-depleted atmosphere, shall be considered . 7.3.6.2 After a cargo transport unit carrying dang erous goods has been unpacked or unloaded, precautions shall be taken to ensure that there is no contamination likely to make the cargo transport unit dangerous . 7.3.6.3 After unpacking or unloading corrosive s ubstances, particular attention shall be paid to cleaning, as residues may be highly corrosive to the metal structures . 7.3.6.4 When the cargo transport unit offers no furt her hazard, the dangerous goods placards and other marks related to dangerous goods shall be removed, masked or otherwise obliterated . 7.3.7 Cargo transport units under temperatur e control 7.3.7.1 Preamble 7.3.7.1.1 If the temperature of certain substances ( such as organic peroxides and polymerizing or self-reactive substances) exceeds a value which is typical of the substance as packaged for transport, a self-accelerating decomposition or polymerization possibly of explosive violence, may result . To prevent such decomposition or polym erization, it is necessary to control the temperature of such substances during transport . Other substances not requiring tempe rature control for safety reasons may be transported under controlled temperature conditions for commercial reasons . 7.3.7.1.2 The provisions for the temperature control of certain specified substances are based on the assumption that the temperature in the immediate surroundings of the cargo does not exceed 55°C during transport and attains this value for a relatively short time only during each period of 24 h . * Refer to the Recommendations published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, in particular, to publication IEC 60079 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 488

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 478 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.3.7.2 General provisions 7.3.7.2.1 Where a number of packages containing self -reactive substances, organic peroxides and polymerizing substances are loaded in a closed cargo transport unit, the total quantity of substance, the type and number of packages and the stacking arrangement shall not create an explosion hazard . 7.3.7.2.2 These provisions apply to certain self-r eactive substances when required by 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 4, and certain organic peroxides when requ ired by 2 . 5 . 3 . 4 . 1 and certain polymerizing substances wh en required by 2 . 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 or special provision 386 of chapter 3 . 3 which may only be transported under condit ions where the temperature is controlled . 7.3.7.2.3 These provisions also apply to the transpo rt of substances for which: .1 the proper shipping name as indicated in col umn 2 of the Dangerous Goods List of chapter 3 . 2 or according to 3 . 1 . 2 . 6 contains the word “STABILIZED”; and .2 the self-accelerating decomposition te mperature (SADT) or the self-accelerating polymerization temperature (SAPT) * determined for the substance (with or without chemical stabilization) as offered for transport is: .1 50°C or less for single packagings and IBCs; o r .2 45 ° C or less for portable tanks . When chemical inhibition is not used to sta bilize a reactive substance which may generate dangerous amounts of heat and gas, or vapour, under normal transport conditions, these substances need to be transported under temperature control . These provisions do not apply to substanc es which are stabilized by the addition of chemical inhibitors such that the SADT or the SAPT is greater than that prescribed in paragraphs 7 . 3 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 2 . 1 or 7 . 3 . 7 . 2 . 3 . 2 . 2 . 7.3.7.2.4 In addition, if a self-reactive substanc e or organic peroxide or a substance the proper shipping name of which contains the word “STABILIZED” and which is not normally required to be transported under temperature control is transported under conditions where the temperature may exceed 55 ° C, it may require temperature control . 7.3.7.2.5 The “control temperature” is the ma ximum temperature at which the substance can be safely transported . In the event of loss of temperature control , it may be necessary to implement emergency procedures . The “emergency temperature” is the temp erature at which such procedures shall be implemented . 7.3.7.2.6 Derivation of control and emergency tem peratures Type of receptacle SADT a /SAPT a Control temperature Emergency temperature Single packagings and IBC 20 ° C or less over 20 ° C to 35 ° C over 35 ° C 20 ° C below SADT/SAPT 15 ° C below SADT/SAPT 10 ° C below SADT/SAPT 10 ° C below SADT/SAPT 10 ° C below SADT/SAPT 5 ° C below SADT/SAPT Portable tanks ≤ 45 ° C 10 ° C below SADT/SAPT 5 ° C below SADT/SAPT a i . e . the SADT/SAPT of the substance as packed for transport . 7.3.7.2.7 The control and emergency temperatures a re derived using the table in 7 . 3 . 7 . 2 . 6 from the self-accelerating decompositio n temperature (SADT) or from the self-accelerating polymerization temperature (SAPT) which are defined as the lowest temperatures at which self-accelerating decomposition or self-accelerating polymerization may occur with a substance in the packaging, IBC or portable tank as used in transport . An SADT or SAPT shall be determined in order t o decide if a substance shall be subjected to temperature control during transport . Provisions for the determination of the S ADT and SAPT are given in 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 4, 2 . 5 . 3 . 4 . 2 and 2 . 4 . 2 . 5 . 2 for self-reactive substances, organi c peroxides and polymerizing substances and mixtures, respectively . 7.3.7.2.8 Control and emergency temperatures, wh ere appropriate, are provided for currently assigned self-reactive substances in 2 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 2 . 3 and for currently assigned organic perox ide formulations in 2 . 5 . 3 . 2 . 4 . 7.3.7.2.9 The actual transport temperature may be lo wer than the control temperature but shall be selected so as to avoid dangerous separation of phases . 7.3.7.3 Transport under temperature control 7.3.7.3.1 Prior to the use of cargo transport unit, the re frigeration system shall be subjected to a thorough inspection and a test to ensure that all parts are functioning properly . * The SAPT shall be determined in accordance with the test procedures established for the SADT for self-reactive substances in accordance with part II, section 28 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 489

Chapter 7.3 – Consigning operations concerning the packing and use of CTUs 479 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.3.7.3.2 Refrigerant gas shall only be replaced in ac cordance with the manufacturer’s operating instructions for the refrigeration system . Prior to filling replacement refrigera nt gas, a certificate of analysis from the supplier shall be obtained and checked to confirm that the gas meets refrigeration system specifications . In addition, if concerns about the int egrity of the supplier and/or the refrigerant gas supply chain give rise to suspicion of contamination of the gas, the replacement refrigerant gas shall be checked for possible contamination prior to use . If the refrigerant gas is found to be contami nated, it shall not be used, the cylinder shall be plainly marked “CONTAMINATED”, the cylinder shall be sealed and sent for recycling or disposal, and notification shall be given to the refrigerant gas supplier and authorized distributor and competent authority(ies) of the countries in which the supplier and distributor reside, as appropriate . The date of last refrigerant replacemen t shall be included in the maintenance record of the refrigeration system . Note: Contamination can be checked by using fl ame halide lamp tests, gas sniffer tube tests or gas chromatography . Replacement refrigerant gas cylinde rs may be marked with the test result and the date of testing . 7.3.7.3.3 When a cargo transport unit is to be filled with pa ckages containing substances having different control temperatures, all packages shall be pre-cooled to avoid exceeding the lowest control temperature . 7.3.7.3.3.1 In the event that non-temperature-cont rolled substances are transported in the same cargo transport unit as temperature controlled substances, the package(s) containing substances that require refrigeration shall be stowed in such a way as to be readily accessible from the door(s) of the cargo transport unit . 7.3.7.3.3.2 If substances with different control tem peratures are loaded in the cargo transport unit, the substances with the lowest control temperature shall be stowed in the most readily accessible position from the doors of the cargo transport unit . 7.3.7.3.3.3 The door(s) shall be capable of being opened r eadily in case of emergency so that the package(s) can be removed . The carrier shall be informed about the loc ation of the different substances within the unit . The cargo shall be secured to prevent packa ges from falling when the door(s) is (are) opened . The packages shall be securely stowed so as t o allow for adequate air circulation throughout the cargo . 7.3.7.3.4 The master shall be provided with operatin g instructions for the refrigeration system, procedures to be followed in the event of loss of control and instructions for regular monitoring of operating temperatures . Spare parts shall be carried for the system s described in 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 3, 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 4 and 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 5 so that they are available for emergency us e should the refrigeration system malfunction during transport . 7.3.7.3.5 In cases where it may not be possible to carry spe cific substances according to the general provisions, full details of the proposed method of shipment shall be submitted to the competent authority concerned for approval . 7.3.7.4 Methods of temperature control 7.3.7.4.1 The suitability of a particular means of tem perature control for transport depends on a number of factors . Among those to be considered are: .1 the control temperature(s) of the substa nce(s) to be transported; .2 the difference between the control temp erature and the anticipated ambient temperature conditions; .3 the effectiveness of the thermal insulat ion of the cargo transport unit . The overall heat transfer coefficient sh all not be more than 0 . 4 W/(m 2 ·K) for cargo transport units and 0 . 6 W/(m 2 ·K) for tanks; and .4 the duration of the voyage . 7.3.7.4.2 Suitable methods for preventing the cont rol temperature being exceeded are, in order of increasing capability: .1 thermal insulation, provided that the ini tial temperature of the substance is sufficiently below the control temperature; .2 thermal insulation with a cooling method , provided that: – an adequate quantity of non-flammable coo lant (such as liquid nitrogen or solid carbon dioxide), allowing a reasonable margin for delay, is carried; – liquid oxygen or air is not used as a coolant; – there is a uniform cooling effect even when mo st of the coolant has been consumed; and – the need to ventilate the cargo transport un it before entering is clearly indicated by a warning on the door(s) (see 5 . 5 . 3); .3 single mechanical refrigeration, pro vided that the unit is thermally insulated and, for substances with a flashpoint lower than the sum of the emergency temperature plus 5°C, explosion proof electrical fittings are used within the cooling compartment to prevent ignition of flammable vapours from the substances; Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 490

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 480 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 .4 combined mechanical refrigeration system and cooling method, provided that: – the two systems are independent of one anoth er; and – the provisions of 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 2 and 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 3 are met; .5 dual mechanical refrigeration system , provided that: – apart from the integral power supply unit, t he two systems are independent of one another; – each system alone is capable of maintainin g adequate temperature control; and – for substances with a flashpoint lower than t he sum of the emergency temperature plus 5 ° C, explosion proof electrical fittings are used within the coolant compartment to prevent ignition of flammable vapours from the substances . 7.3.7.4.3 The refrigeration equipment and its cont rols shall be readily and safely accessible and all electrical connections weatherproof . Inside the cargo transport unit, the temperature shall be measured continuously . The measurement shall be taken in t he air space of the unit, using two measuring devices independent of each other . The type and place of the measuring devices s hall be selected so that their results are representative of the actual temperature in the cargo . At least one of the two measurements shall be r ecorded in such a manner that temperature changes are easily detectable . The temperature shall be checked every fo ur to six hours and logged . 7.3.7.4.4 If substances are transported with a control temperature less than + 25 ° C, the cargo transport unit shall be equipped with a visible and audible alarm effectively set at no higher than the control temperature . The alarms shall work independently fro m the power supply of the refrigeration system . 7.3.7.4.5 If an electrical supply is necessary for the c argo transport unit to operate the refrigeration or heating equipment, it shall be ensured that the correct connecting plugs are fitted . For under deck stowage, plugs shall, as a min imum, be of an IP 55 enclosure in accordance with IEC Publication 60529, with the specification for electrical equipment of temperature class T4 and explosion group IIB . However, when stowed on deck, these plugs s hall be of an IP 56 enclosure in accordance with IEC Publication 60529 . 7.3.7.5 Special provisions for self-reactive subs tances, organic peroxides and polymerizing substances 7.3.7.5.1 For self-reactive substances (class 4 . 1) identified by UN Nos . 3231 and 3232 and organic peroxides (clas s 5 . 2) identified by UN Nos . 3111 and 3112, one of the following methods o f temperature control described in 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 shall be used: .1 the methods referred to under 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 4 or 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 5; or .2 the method referred to under 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 3 when the maximum ambient temperature to be e xpected during transport is at least 10 ° C below the control temperature . 7.3.7.5.2 For self-reactive substances (class 4 . 1) identified by UN Nos . 3233 to 3240, organic peroxides (class 5 . 2) identified by UN Nos . 3113 to 3120 and polymerizing substance s identified by UN Nos . 3533 and 3534 or for those substances where t he words “TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED” are added as part of the proper shipping name in accordance with 3 . 1 . 2 . 6 . 2, one of the following methods shall be used: .1 the methods referred to under 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 4 or 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 5; .2 the method referred to under 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 3 when the maximum ambient temperature to be e xpected during transport does not exceed the control temperature by more than 10 ° C; or .3 for short international voyages only (se e 1 . 2 . 1), the methods referred to under 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 1 and 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 2 . 2 when the maximum ambient temperature to be e xpected during transport is at least 10 ° C below the control temperature . 7.3.7.6 Special provisions for flammable gases or l iquids having a flashpoint less than 23 ° C c.c. transported under temperature control 7.3.7.6.1 When flammable gases or liquids having a flash point less than 23 ° C c . c . are packed or loaded in a cargo transport uni t equipped with a refrigerating or heating system, the cooling or heating equipment shall comply with 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 . 7.3.7.6.2 When flammable liquids having a flash point less than 23 ° C c . c . and not requiring temperature co ntrol for safety reasons are transported under temperature control conditions for commercial reasons, explosion proof electrical fittings are required except when the substances are pre-cooled to and transported at a control temperature of at least 10 ° C below the flashpoint . In case of failure of a non-explosion proof r efrigerating system, the system shall be disconnected from the power supply . It shall not be reconnected if the temperature has risen to a temperature less than 10 ° C below the flashpoint . 7.3.7.6.3 When flammable gases not requiring temper ature control for safety reasons are transported under temperature control conditions for commercial reasons, explosion proof electrical fittings are required . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 491

Chapter 7.3 – Consigning operations concerning the packing and use of CTUs 481 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.3.7.7 Special provisions for vehicles transp orted on ships Insulated, refrigerated and mechanically refrigerated vehicles shall conform to the provisions of 7 . 3 . 7 . 4 and 7 . 3 . 7 . 5 as appropriate . In addition, the refrigerating applianc e of a mechanically refrigerated vehicle shall be capable of operating independently of the engine used to propel the vehicle . 7.3.7.8 Approval The competent authority may approve that less stringent means of temperature control may be used or that artificial refrigeration may be dispensed with under conditions of transport such as short international voyages or low ambient temperatures . 7.3.8 Loading of cargo transport units on board ship s Before loading, cargo transport units used for the transport of dangerous goods shall be examined for external signs of damage, leakage or sifting of contents . Any cargo transport unit found to be damag ed, leaking or sifting shall not be loaded on to a ship until repairs have been effected or damaged packages have been removed . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 492

7 482 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 7.4 Stowage and segregation on containerships Note: To facilitate familiarization with the se requirements and to support training of relevant personnel, illustrations applicable to the segregation requirements on containerships are given in MSC . 1/Circ . 1440 . 7.4.1 Introduction 7.4.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to the st owage and segregation of containers which meet the definition of a container within the terms of the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended, which are transported on deck and in the cargo holds of container ships or on deck and in the cargo holds of other types of ships provided that these stowage positions are properly fitted to give a permanent stowage of containers during transport . 7.4.1.2 For ships carrying containers in convent ional cargo spaces not properly fitted for the permanent stowage of containers the provisions of chapter 7 . 6 apply . 7.4.1.3 For stowage of FISH MEAL, UNSTABILIZ ED (UN 1374), FISH MEAL, STABILIZED (UN 2216) and KRILL MEAL (UN 3497) in containers, the provisions of 7 . 6 . 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 also apply . 7.4.1.4 For stowage of AMMONIUM NITRATE (UN 1 942), AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER (UN 2067 AND 2071) in containers, the applicable provisions of 7 . 6 . 2 . 8 . 4 and 7 . 6 . 2 . 11 . 1 also apply . 7.4.2 Stowage requirements 7.4.2.1 Provisions for hatchless containerships Dangerous goods shall only be transported in or vertically above hatchless container holds if: .1 the dangerous goods are permitted for unde r deck stowage as specified in the Dangerous Goods List; and .2 the hatchless container hold is in full comp liance with the provisions of regulation II-2/19 of SOLAS, as amended, or regulation II-2/54 of SOLAS, as amended by the resolutions indicated in II-2/1 . 2 . 1, as applicable . 7.4.2.2 Provisions for ships with partially weathertig ht hatchway covers 7.4.2.2.1 Provisions for partially weathertigh t hatchway covers with effective gutterbars * 7.4.2.2.1.1 Partially weathertight hatchway cove rs fitted with effective gutterbars * can be regarded as “resistant to fire and liquid” for the purpose of stowage and segregation of containers containing dangerous goods on containerships fitted with such hatchway covers . Additionally segregation requirem ents shall be in accordance with the requirements in paragraph 7 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 7.4.2.2.1.2 When “not in the same vertical line unless sep arated by a deck” is required, containers containing dangerous goods shall not be stowed in any tier directly above a clear gap * unless the cargo hold complies with the relevant requirements for the class and flashpoint of the dangerous goods in regulation II-2/19 of SOLAS 74, as amended, or regulation II-2/54 of SOLAS, as amended by resolutions indicated in II-2/1 . 2 . 1, as applicable . Additionally, containers containi ng incompatible dangerous goods shall not be stowed within the relevant sensitive vertical lines * under deck . 7.4.2.2.2 Provisions for partially weathertigh t hatchway covers without effective gutterbars * 7.4.2.2.2.1 Where hatchway covers are not fitted with ef fective gutterbars , containers containing dangerous goods shall not be stowed on such hatchway covers, unless the cargo hold complies with the relevant requirements * For definitions and details see MSC/Circ . 1087 found in the IMDG Code Supplement . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 493

Chapter 7.4 – Stowage and segregation on containerships 483 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 for the class and flashpoint of the dangerous goods in regulation II-2/19 of SOLAS 74, as amended, or regulation II-2/54 of SOLAS, as amended by the resolutions indicated in II-2/1 . 2 . 1, as applicable . 7.4.2.2.2.2 Where hatchway covers are not fitted with ef fective gutterbars, * the following applies where stowage “not in the same vertical line” is required in 7 . 4 . 3 . 3 . 7.4.2.2.2.3 When containers containing dangerous goo ds are stowed on deck, containers containing incompatible dangerous goods shall not be stowed within the relevant sensitive vertical lines * of any clear gap * on either side of the hatchway cover below deck . 7.4.2.2.2.4 When containers containing dangerous g oods are stowed below deck within the relevant sensitive vertical lines of a clear gap, containers with incompatible dangerous goods shall not be stowed on the hatches above the hold . * 7.4.2.3 Provisions for containers with flammable gases and highly flammable liquids 7.4.2.3.1 In cargo ships of 500 gross tons or over and passe nger ships constructed before 1 September 1984, and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed before 1 February 1992, containers with flammable gases or with flammable liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23°C c . c, shall be stowed on deck only, unless otherw ise approved by the Administration . 7.4.2.3.2 A container with flammable gases or flammabl e liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23 ° C c . c transported on deck shall be stowed at least 2 . 4 m horizontally and projected verticall y away from any potential source of ignition . 7.4.2.3.3 A container under temperature control th at is not of a certified safe type shall not be stowed under deck together with containers containing flammable gases or with liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23 ° C c . c . 7.4.2.4 Ventilation provisions 7.4.2.4.1 In cargo ships of 500 gross tons or over and passe nger ships constructed before 1 September 1984, and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed before 1 February 1992, containers with the following dangerous goods may be stowed under deck only if the cargo space is equipped with mechanical ventilation and if under deck stowage is permitted in the Dangerous Goods List: – dangerous goods of class 2 . 1; – dangerous goods of class 3 with a flashpoint of l ess than 23 ° C c . c . ; – dangerous goods of class 4 . 3; – dangerous goods of class 6 . 1 with a subsidiary hazard of class 3; – dangerous goods of class 8 with a subsidiary h azard of class 3; and – dangerous goods to which a specific stowage requirement requiring mechanical ventilation in column 16a of the Dangerous Goods List is assigned . Otherwise containers shall be stowed on deck only . 7.4.2.4.2 The capacity of the mechanical ventilati on (number of air changes per hour) shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration . 7.4.3 Segregation requirements 7.4.3.1 Definitions and application 7.4.3.1.1 Container space means a distance of not less t han 6 m fore and aft or not less than 2 . 4 m athwartships . 7.4.3.1.2 The provisions for segregation between c ontainers on board containerships with closed cargo holds and on board hatchless containerships are given in the tables in 7 . 4 . 3 . 2 and 7 . 4 . 3 . 3, respectively . * For definitions and details see MSC/Circ . 1087 found in the IMDG Code Supplement . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 494

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 484 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.4.3.2 Table of segregation of containers on boar d containerships with closed cargo holds Segregation requirement Vertical Horizontal Closed versus closed Closed versus open Open versus open Closed versus closed Closed versus open Open versus open On deck Under deck On deck Under deck On deck Under deck “Away from” .1 One on top of the other permitted Open on top of closed permitted Otherwise as for “open versus open” Not in the same vertical line unless segregated by a deck Fore and aft No restriction No restriction No restriction No restriction One container space One container space or one bulkhead Athwartships No restriction No restriction No restriction No restriction One container space One container space “Separated from” .2 Not in the same vertical line unless segregated by a deck As for “open versus open” Fore and aft One container space One container space or one bulkhead One container space One container space or one bulkhead One container space One bulkhead Athwartships One container space One container space One container space Two container spaces Two container spaces One bulkhead “Separated by a complete compartment or hold from” .3 Fore and aft One container space One bulkhead One container space One bulkhead Two container spaces Two bulkheads Athwartships Two container spaces One bulkhead Two container spaces One bulkhead Three container spaces Two bulkheads “Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from” .4 * Prohibited Fore and aft Minimum horizontal distance of 24 m One bulkhead and minimum horizontal distance of 24 m * Minimum horizontal distance of 24 m Two bulkheads Minimum horizontal distance of 24 m Two bulkheads Athwartships Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited * Containers not less than 6 m from intervening bulkhead . Note: All bulkheads and decks shall be resistant to fire and liquids . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 495

Chapter 7.4 – Stowage and segregation on containerships 485 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.4.3.3 Table of segregation of containers on boar d hatchless containerships Segregation requirement Vertical Horizontal Closed versus closed Closed versus open Open versus open Closed versus closed Closed versus open Open versus open On deck Under deck On deck Under deck On deck Under deck “Away from” .1 One on top of the other permitted Open on top of closed permitted otherwise as for “open versus open” Not in the same vertical line Fore and aft No restriction No restriction No restriction No restriction One container space One container space or one bulkhead Athwartships No restriction No restriction No restriction No restriction One container space One container space “Separated from” .2 Not in the same vertical line As for “open versus open” Fore and aft One container space One container space or one bulkhead One container space One container space or one bulkhead One container space and not in or above same hold One bulkhead Athwartships One container space One container space Two container spaces Two container spaces Two container spaces and not in or above same hold One bulkhead “Separated by a complete compartment or hold from” .3 Fore and aft One container space and not in or above same hold One bulkhead One container space and not in or above same hold One bulkhead Two container spaces and not in or above same hold Two bulkheads Athwartships Two container spaces and not in or above same hold One bulkhead Two container spaces and not in or above same hold One bulkhead Three container spaces and not in or above same hold Two bulkheads “Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from” .4 Prohibited Fore and aft Minimum horizontal distance of 24 m and not in or above same hold One bulkhead and minimum horizontal distance of 24 m * Minimum horizontal distance of 24 m and not in or above same hold Two bulkheads Minimum horizontal distance of 24 m and not in or above same hold Two bulkheads Athwartships Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited * Containers not less than 6 m from intervening bulkhead . Note: All bulkheads and decks shall be resistant to fire and liquids . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 496

7 486 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 7.5 Stowage and segregation on ro-ro ships Note: To facilitate familiarization with the se requirements and to support training of relevant personnel, illustrations applicable to the segregation requirements on ro-ro ships are given in MSC . 1/Circ . 1440 . 7.5.1 Introduction 7.5.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to the st owage and segregation of cargo transport units which are transported in ro-ro cargo spaces . 7.5.1.2 For ro-ro ships which incorporate stowag e positions which are properly fitted to give a permanent stowage of containers during transport, the provisions of chapter 7 . 4 apply for containers carried in these spac es . 7.5.1.3 For ro-ro ships which incorporate conven tional cargo spaces, the provisions of chapter 7 . 6 apply in these spaces . 7.5.1.4 In case more than one container is loaded on the s ame chassis in a ro-ro cargo space, the segregation of chapter 7 . 4 applies between the containers . 7.5.2 Stowage provisions 7.5.2.1 Loading and unloading operations on each ro-r o cargo space shall take place under the supervision of either a working party consisting of officers and other crew members or responsible persons appointed by the master . 7.5.2.2 During the voyage, access to such spaces by pa ssengers and other unauthorized persons shall only be permitted when such persons are accompanied by an authorized crew member . 7.5.2.3 All doors leading directly to these spaces s hall be securely closed during the voyage and notices or signs prohibiting entrance to such spaces shall be conspicuously displayed . 7.5.2.4 The transport of dangerous goods shall be pr ohibited in any ro-ro cargo space in which the foregoing provisions cannot be met . 7.5.2.5 Closing arrangements for the openings be tween ro-ro cargo spaces and machinery and accommodation spaces shall be such as to avoid the possibility of dangerous vapours and liquids entering such spaces . Such openings shall normally be kept secu rely closed when dangerous cargo is on board, except to permit access by authorized persons or for emergency use . 7.5.2.6 Dangerous goods required to be carried on de ck only shall not be carried in closed ro-ro cargo spaces, but may be carried in open ro-ro cargo spaces when authorized by the Administration . 7.5.2.7 Flammable gases or liquids having a flashpo int of less than 23 ° C c . c . shall not be stowed in a closed ro-ro cargo spa ce or special category space on a passenger ship unless: – the design, construction and equipment o f the space comply with the provisions of regulation II-2/19 of SOLAS, as amended, or regulation II-2/54 of SOLAS, as amended by the resolutions indicated in II-2/1 . 2 . 1, as applicable, and the ventilation syst em is operated to maintain at least six air changes per hour; or – the ventilation system of the space is opera ted to maintain at least ten air changes per hour and non-certified safe electrical systems in the space are capable of being isolated by means other than removal of fuses in the event of failure of the ventilation system or any other circumstance likely to cause accumulation of flammable vapours . Otherwise stowage is restricted to on dec k only . 7.5.2.8 Cargo transport units with flammable gase s or liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23 ° C c . c . and transported on deck shall be stowed at le ast 3 m from any potential sources of ignition . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 497

Chapter 7.5 – Stowage and segregation on ro-ro ships 487 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.5.2.9 Mechanically operated refrigeratio n or heating equipment fitted to any cargo transport unit shall not be operated during the voyage when stowed in a closed ro-ro cargo space or a special category space on a passenger ship . 7.5.2.10 Electrically operated refrigeratio n or heating equipment fitted to any cargo transport unit stowed in a closed ro-ro cargo space or special category space on a passenger ship shall not be operated when flammable gases or liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23 ° C c . c . are present in the cargo transport unit or in t he same space, unless: – the design, construction and equipment o f the space comply with the provisions of regulation II-2/19 of SOLAS, as amended, or regulation II-2/54 of SOLAS, as amended by the resolutions indicated in II-2/1 . 2 . 1, as applicable; or – the ventilation system of the space is op erated to maintain at least ten air changes per hour and all electrical systems in the space are capable of being isolated by means other than removal of fuses in the event of ventilation failure or other circumstance likely to cause accumulation of flammable vapours; – and, in either case, the refrigeration or hea ting equipment of the cargo transport unit shall comply with paragraph 7 . 3 . 7 . 6 . 7.5.2.11 In ships the keel of which was laid be fore 1 September 1984 and for which regulation II-2/20 of SOLAS, as amended, or regulations II-2/37 and 38 of SOLAS, as amended by the resolutions indicated in II-2/1 . 2 . 1, are not applicable to a closed ro-ro cargo s pace, mechanical ventilation shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Administration . The ventilation fans shall be operating a t all times when vehicles are in such spaces . 7.5.2.12 If continuous ventilation is impractic able in a closed ro-ro cargo space other than a special category space on a passenger ship, ventilation fans shall be operated daily for a limited period, as weather permits . In any case, prior to discharge, the fans sha ll be operated for a reasonable period . The ro-ro cargo space shall be proved gas-f ree at the end of the period . When the ventilation is not continuous, e lectrical systems which are not certified safe shall be isolated . 7.5.2.13 The master of a ship carrying dangerous good s in ro-ro cargo spaces shall ensure that, during loading and unloading operations and during the voyage, regular inspections of these spaces are made by an authorized crew member or responsible person in order to achieve early detection of any hazard . 7.5.3 Segregation provisions 7.5.3.1 The provisions for segregation between c argo transport units onboard ro-ro ships are given in the table in 7 . 5 . 3 . 2 . 7.5.3.2 Table of segregation of cargo transport un its on board ro-ro ships Segregation requirement Horizontal Closed versus closed Closed versus open Open versus open On deck Under deck On deck Under deck On deck Under deck “Away from” .1 Fore and aft No restriction No restriction No restriction No restriction At least 3 m At least 3 m Athwartships No restriction No restriction No restriction No restriction At least 3 m At least 3 m “Separated from” .2 Fore and aft At least 6 m At least 6 m or one bulkhead At least 6 m At least 6 m or one bulkhead At least 6 m At least 12 m or one bulkhead Athwartships At least 3 m At least 3 m or one bulkhead At least 3 m At least 6 m or one bulkhead At least 6 m At least 12 m or one bulkhead “Separated by a complete compartment or hold from” .3 Fore and aft At least 12 m At least 24 m + deck At least 24 m At least 24 m + deck At least 36 m Two decks or two bulkheads Athwartships At least 12 m At least 24 m + deck At least 24 m At least 24 m + deck Prohibited Prohibited “Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from” .4 Fore and aft At least 36 m Two bulkheads or at least 36 m + two decks At least 36 m At least 48 m including two bulkheads At least 48 m Prohibited Athwartships Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Note: All bulkheads and decks shall be resistant to fire and liquid . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 498

7 488 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 7.6 Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships 7.6.1 Introduction 7.6.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to the st owage and segregation of dangerous goods stowed in the conventional way on board general cargo ships . They apply also to containers which are tra nsported in conventional cargo spaces, including cargo spaces on the weather deck, not properly fitted to give a permanent stowage of the containers during transport . 7.6.1.2 For ships carrying containers in stowage p ositions which are properly fitted for the permanent stowage of containers the provisions of chapter 7 . 4 apply . 7.6.2 Stowage and handling provisions 7.6.2.1 Provisions for all classes 7.6.2.1.1 The minimum stacking height for testing pa ckagings intended to contain dangerous goods in accordance with chapter 6 . 1 is 3 m . For IBCs and large packagings, the stacki ng test load shall be determined in accordance with 6 . 5 . 6 . 6 . 4 and 6 . 6 . 5 . 3 . 3 . 4 respectively . 7.6.2.1.2 Drums containing dangerous goods s hall always be stowed in an upright position unless otherwise authorized by the competent authority . 7.6.2.1.3 The stowage of dangerous goods shall be so arr anged as to ensure clear walkways and access to all facilities necessary for the safe working of the ship . When dangerous goods are stowed on deck, hy drants, sounding pipes and the like and access thereto shall be kept free and clear of such goods . 7.6.2.1.4 Fibreboard packagings, paper bags and other packag es susceptible to water damage shall be stowed under deck or, if they are stowed on deck, they shall be so protected that at no time are they exposed to weather or to seawater . 7.6.2.1.5 Portable tanks shall not be overstowed by ot her cargo unless they are designed for that purpose or unless they are protected to the satisfaction of the competent authority . 7.6.2.1.6 Cargo spaces and decks shall be clean and dry as r elevant to the hazards of the dangerous goods to be carried . In order to reduce the risk of ignition, the sp ace shall be free of dust from other cargoes, such as grain or coal dust . 7.6.2.1.7 Packages and cargo transport units found t o be damaged, leaking or sifting shall not be loaded on a general cargo ship . Care shall be taken to ensure that excessiv e water, snow, ice or foreign matter adhering to packages and cargo transport units shall be removed before loading . 7.6.2.1.8 Packages and cargo transport units and any o ther goods shall be adequately braced and secured for the voyage . * Packages shall be loaded in such a way that there will be a minimum likelihood of damage to them and to any fittings during transport . Fittings on packages or portable tanks sh all be adequately protected . 7.6.2.2 Provisions for flammable gases and highl y flammable liquids 7.6.2.2.1 In cargo ships of 500 gross tons or over and passe nger ships constructed before 1 September 1984, and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed before 1 February 1992, flammable gases or flammable liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23 ° C c . c, shall be stowed on deck only, unless otherw ise approved by the Administration . 7.6.2.2.2 Flammable gases or liquids having a flashpo int less than 23 ° C c . c . transported on deck shall be stowed at leas t 3 m from any potential source of ignition . * Refer to regulation VII/5 of SOLAS, as amended . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 499

Chapter 7.6 – Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships 489 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.6.2.3 Ventilation provisions 7.6.2.3.1 In cargo ships of 500 gross tons or over and passe nger ships constructed before 1 September 1984, and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed before 1 February 1992, the following dangerous goods, may be stowed under deck only if the cargo space is equipped with mechanical ventilation and if under deck stowage is permitted in the Dangerous Goods List: – dangerous goods of class 2 . 1; – dangerous goods of class 3 with a flashpoint of l ess than 23 ° C c . c . ; – dangerous goods of class 4 . 3; – dangerous goods of class 6 . 1 with a subsidiary hazard of class 3; – dangerous goods of class 8 with a subsidiary h azard of class 3, and – dangerous goods to which a specific stowage requirement requiring mechanical ventilation in column 16a of the Dangerous Goods List is assigned . Otherwise containers shall be stowed on deck only . 7.6.2.3.2 The capacity of the mechanical ventilati on (number of air changes per hour) shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration . 7.6.2.4 Provisions for class 1 7.6.2.4.1 All compartments or holds and cargo transp ort units shall be locked or suitably secured in order to prevent unauthorized access . The means of locking and securing shall be su ch that, in the case of emergency, access can be gained without delay . 7.6.2.4.2 Loading and unloading procedures and equ ipment used should be of such a nature that sparks are not produced, in particular where the floors of the cargo compartment are not constructed of close-boarded wood . All cargo handlers should be briefed by the s hipper or receiver of the potential risks and necessary precautions, prior to commencing the handling of explosives . In the event of the contents of packages bein g affected by water whilst on board, immediate advice shall be sought from the shipper; pending this advice, handling of the packages shall be avoided . 7.6.2.4.3 Segregation on deck When goods in different compatibility groups are transported on deck, they shall be stowed not less than 6 m apart unless their mixed stowage is allowed according to 7 . 2 . 7 . 7.6.2.4.4 Segregation in single hold ships In a single hold ship, dangerous goods of class 1 shall be segregated in accordance with 7 . 2 . 7 except that: .1 Goods in Division 1 . 1 or 1 . 2 of compatibility group B may be stowed in the sa me hold as substances of compatibility group D provided: – the net explosives mass of goods of compatib ility group B does not exceed 50 kg; and – such goods are stowed in a closed carg o transport unit which is stowed at least 6 m from the substances of compatibility group D . .2 Goods in Division 1 . 4 of compatibility group B may be stowed in the sa me hold as substances of compatibility group D provided they are separated either by a distance of at least 6 m or by a steel division . 7.6.2.4.5 In the event that a package containing goods o f class 1 is found to be suffering from breakage or leakage expert advice should be obtained for its safe handling and disposal . 7.6.2.5 Provisions for class 2 7.6.2.5.1 When pressure receptacles are stowed in a ve rtical position they shall be stowed in a block, cribbed or boxed-in with suitable sound lumber and the box or crib dunnaged to provide clearance from a steel deck . Pressure receptacles in a box or crib shall b e braced to prevent any movement . The box or crib (gas rack) shall be securely ch ocked and lashed to prevent movement in any direction . 7.6.2.5.2 Pressure receptacles stowed on deck shal l be protected from sources of heat . 7.6.2.6 Provisions for class 3 7.6.2.6.1 Class 3 substances with a flashpoint of less th an 23 ° C c . c . packaged in jerricans, plastics (3H1, 3 H2), drums, plastics (1H1,1H2), plastics receptacles in a plastic drum (6HH1, 6HH2) and Plastic Intermediate Bulk Containers (IBCs 31H1 and 31H2), shall be stowed on deck only unless packed in a closed cargo transport unit . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 500

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 490 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.6.2.6.2 Packages loaded on deck shall be protected from sources of heat . 7.6.2.7 Provisions for classes 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3 7.6.2.7.1 Packages stowed on deck shall be protected f rom sources of heat . 7.6.2.7.2 Stowage provisions for FISH MEAL, U NSTABILIZED (UN 1374), FISH MEAL, STABILIZED (UN 2216, class 9) and KRILL MEAL (UN 3497) 7.6.2.7.2.1 For loose packagings: .1 Temperature readings shall be taken 3 time s a day during the voyage and recorded . .2 If the temperature of the cargo exceeds 55 ° C and c ontinues to increase, ventilation to the hold shall be restricted . If self-heating continues, then carbo n dioxide or inert gas shall be introduced . The ship shall be equipped with facilitie s for introducing carbon dioxide or inert gas into the holds . .3 The cargo shall be stowed protected from sou rces of heat . .4 For UN 1374 and 3497, where loose bag s are being carried, double strip stowage is recommended, provided there is good surface and through ventilation . The diagram in 7 . 6 . 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 shows how this can be achieved . For UN 2216, where loose bags are being carri ed, no special ventilation is required for block stowage of bagged cargo . 7.6.2.7.2.2 For containers: .1 After packing, the doors and other opening s shall be sealed to prevent the penetration of air into the unit . .2 Temperature readings in the hold shall be ta ken once a day early in the morning during the voyage and recorded . .3 If the temperature of the hold rises excessi vely above ambient and continues to increase, the possible need to apply copious quantities of water in an eme rgency and the consequent risk to the stability of the ship shall be considered . .4 The cargo shall be stowed protected from sou rces of heat . 7.6.2.7.2.3 Double strip stowage Spar ceiling Ship’s side Plan Each tier is 2 bags wide Longitudinal section Dunnage hard against end bulkheads, boards over- lapped minimum 45 cm 2 layers of dunnage Tank top ceiling 10 cm Flaps min. 10 cm Transverse bulkhead Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 501

Chapter 7.6 – Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships 491 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7.6.2.7.3 Stowage provisions for SEED CAKE (UN 1386) 7.6.2.7.3.1 Stowage provisions for SEED CAKE, contai ning vegetable oil (a) mechanically expelled seeds, containing more than 10% oil or more than 20% oil and moisture combined: .1 through and surface ventilation is requi red; .2 if the voyage exceeds 5 days, the shi p shall be equipped with facilities for introducing carbon dioxide or inert gas into the cargo spaces; .3 bags shall always be stowed in double strip, a s shown in 7 . 6 . 2 . 7 . 2 . 3 of this Code for fish meal, unstabilized; and .4 regular temperature readings shall be ta ken at varying depths in the cargo space and recorded . If the temperature of the cargo exceeds 55 ° C an d continues to increase, ventilation to the cargo spaces shall be restricted . If self-heating continues, then carbo n dioxide or inert gas shall be introduced . 7.6.2.7.3.2 Stowage provisions for SEED CAKE, contai ning vegetable oil (b) solvent extractions and expelled seeds containing not more than 10% of oil and, when the amount of moisture is higher than 10%, not more than 20% of oil and moisture combined: .1 surface ventilation is required to assis t in removing any residual solvent vapour; .2 if bags are stowed without provision for v entilation to circulate throughout the stow and the voyage exceeds 5 days, regular temperature readings shall be taken at varying depths in the hold and recorded; and .3 if the voyage exceeds 5 days, the vessel shall b e equipped with facilities for introducing carbon dioxide or inert gas into the cargo spaces . 7.6.2.8 Provisions for class 5.1 7.6.2.8.1 Cargo spaces shall be cleaned before oxidi zing substances are loaded into them . All combustible materials which are not n ecessary for the stowage of such cargoes shall be removed from the hold . 7.6.2.8.2 As far as reasonably practicable, non- combustible securing and protecting materials and only a minimum of clean dry wooden dunnage shall be used . 7.6.2.8.3 Precautions shall be taken to avoid the pene tration of oxidizing substances into other cargo spaces, bilges, etc . , which may contain combustible material . 7.6.2.8.4 UN 1942 AMMONIUM NITRATE and UN 2067 AMMONIU M NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER may be stowed under deck in a clean cargo space capable of being opened up in an emergency . The possible need to open hatches in case of fir e to provide maximum ventilation and to apply water in an emergency and the consequent risk to the stability of the ship through flooding of cargo space shall be considered before loading . 7.6.2.8.5 After discharge, cargo spaces used for the t ransport of oxidizing substances shall be inspected for contamination . A space that has been contaminated shall be properly cleaned and examined before being used for other cargoes . 7.6.2.9 Provisions for self-reactive substan ces of class 4.1 and for class 5.2 7.6.2.9.1 Packages shall be stowed protected from so urces of heat . 7.6.2.9.2 When stowage arrangements are made, it sha ll be borne in mind that it may become appropriate to jettison a package or packages of this cargo . 7.6.2.10 Provisions for classes 6.1 and 8 7.6.2.10.1 After discharge, spaces used for the tra nsport of substances of this class shall be inspected for contamination . A space which has been contaminated shall b e properly cleaned and examined before being used for other cargoes . 7.6.2.10.2 Substances of class 8 shall be kept as dry as rea sonably practicable, since in the presence of moisture they may be corrosive to most metals and some also react violently with water . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 502

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 492 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.6.2.11 Stowage of goods of class 9 7.6.2.11.1 Stowage provisions for AMMONIUM NITRAT E BASED FERTILIZER, UN 2071 7.6.2.11.1.1 AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER, UN 20 71 shall be stowed in a clean cargo space capable of being opened up in an emergency . In the case of bagged fertilizer or fertili zer in containers or in bulk containers, it is sufficient if, in the case of an emergency, the cargo is accessible through free approaches (hatch entries), and mechanical ventilation enables the master to exhaust any gases or fumes resulting from decomposition . The possible need to open hatches in case of fir e to provide maximum ventilation and to apply water in an emergency, and the consequent risk to the stability of the ship through flooding of the cargo space, shall be considered before loading . 7.6.2.11.1.2 If suppression of decomposition shou ld prove impracticable (such as in bad weather), there would not necessarily be immediate danger to the structure of the ship . However, the residue left after decompo sition may have only half the mass of the original cargo; this loss of mass may also affect the stability of the ship and shall be considered before loading . 7.6.2.11.1.3 AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER, UN 20 71 shall be stowed out of direct contact with a metal engine-room bulkhead . In the case of bagged material, this may be done, for example, by using wooden boards to provide an air space between the bulkhead and the cargo . This requirement need not apply to short in ternational voyages . 7.6.2.11.1.4 In the case of ships not fitted with smoke-dete cting or other suitable devices, arrangements shall be made during the voyage to inspect cargo spaces containing these fertilizers at intervals not exceeding 4 h (such as to sniff at the ventilators serving them) to ensure early detection of decomposition should that occur . 7.6.2.11.2 Stowage provisions for FISH MEAL, STABIL IZED (UN 2216, class 9) 7.6.2.11.2.1 For stowage provisions for FISH MEAL, STAB ILIZED (UN 2216, class 9), see 7 . 6 . 2 . 7 . 2 . 7.6.2.12 Stowage of dangerous goods in flexible bulk c ontainers 7.6.2.12.1 The stowage of dangerous goods in flexible bu lk containers is not permitted on deck . 7.6.2.12.2 Flexible bulk containers shall be stowed i n such a way that there are no void spaces between flexible bulk containers in the hold . If the flexible bulk containers do not compl etely fill the hold, adequate measures shall be taken to avoid shifting of cargo . 7.6.2.12.3 The maximum permissible stacking heigh t of flexible bulk containers shall never exceed three high . 7.6.2.12.4 When flexible bulk containers are fit ted with venting devices, the stowage of the flexible bulk containers shall not impede their function . 7.6.3 Segregation provisions 7.6.3.1 Segregation from foodstuffs 7.6.3.1.1 For the purpose of this subsection, the term s “away from”, “separated from” and “separated by a complete compartment or hold from” are defined in 7 . 6 . 3 . 2 . 7.6.3.1.2 Dangerous goods having a primary or subsid iary hazard of classes 2 . 3, 6 . 1, 7 (with the exception of UN 2908, 2909, 2910 an d 2911), 8 and dangerous goods for which it is referred to in segregation code SG29 or SG50 in column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List stowed in a conventional way shall be “separated from” foodstuffs stowed in a conventional way . If either dangerous goods or foodstuffs a re in a closed cargo transport unit, dangerous goods shall be stowed “away from” foodstuffs . If both dangerous goods and foodstuffs ar e in different closed cargo transport units, no segregation requirements shall apply . 7.6.3.1.3 Dangerous goods of class 6 . 2 stowed in a conventional way shall be “separ ated by a complete compartment or hold from” foodstuffs stowed in a conventional way . If either dangerous goods or foodstuffs a re in a closed cargo transport unit, dangerous goods shall be stowed “separated from” foodstuffs . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 503

Chapter 7.6 – Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships 493 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.6.3.2 Segregation of packages containing dan gerous goods and stowed in the conventional way Definitions of the segregation terms Away from: Effectively segregated so that the incompatible goods cannot interact dangerously in the event of an accident but may be transported in the same compartment or hold or on deck , provided a minimum horizontal separation of 3 m, projected vertically, is obtained . Prohibited stowage area 3 m 3 m Prohibited stowage area Separated from: In different compartments or holds when stowed under deck . Provided the intervening deck is resist ant to fire and liquid, a vertical separation, i . e . in different compartments, may be accep ted as equivalent to this segregation . For on deck stowage, this segregation mean s a separation by a distance of at least 6 m horizontally . Separated by a complete compartment or hold from: Either a vertical or a horizontal separation . If the intervening decks are not resistan t to fire and liquid, then only a longitudinal separation, i . e . by an intervening complete compartmen t or hold, is acceptable . For on deck stowage, this segregation mea ns a separation by a distance of at least 12 m horizontally . The same distance has to be applied if one pack age is stowed on deck, and the other one in an upper compartment . (see note) 12 m Note: One of the two decks must be resistant to fire and to liquid Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from: Vertical separation alone does not meet this requirement . Between a package under deck and one on deck, a min imum distance of 24 m, including a complete compartment, must be maintained longitudinally . For on deck stowage, this segregation mea ns a separation by a distance of at least 24 m longitudinally . 24 m, including intervening compartment Legend Reference package … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … . . Package containing incompatible goods … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … Deck resistant to fire and liquid … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … . Note: Vertical lines represent transverse watertight bulkheads between cargo spaces . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 504

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 494 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.6.3.3 Segregation of dangerous goods stowed in t he conventional way from those transported in cargo transport units 7.6.3.3.1 Dangerous goods stowed in the conventio nal way shall be segregated from goods transported in open cargo transport units in accordance with 7 . 6 . 3 . 2 . 7.6.3.3.2 Dangerous goods stowed in the convention al way shall be segregated from goods transported in closed cargo transport units in accordance with 7 . 6 . 3 . 2 except that: .1 where “away from” is required, no segregati on between the packages and the closed cargo transport units is required; and .2 where “separated from” is required, the seg regation between the packages and the closed cargo transport units may be as for “away from” as defined in 7 . 6 . 3 . 2 . 7.6.3.4 Segregation of dangerous goods in cargo tr ansport units stowed in conventional cargo spaces 7.6.3.4.1 Dangerous goods in different closed carg o transport units (closed freight containers) stowed in holds and compartments not properly fitted to give a permanent stowage of the containers during transport shall be segregated from each other in accordance with 7 . 6 . 3 . 2 except that: .1 where “away from” is required, no segregati on between the closed cargo transport units is required; and .2 where “separated from” is required, the seg regation between the closed cargo transport units may be as for “away from” as defined in 7 . 6 . 3 . 2 . 7.6.3.5 Segregation between bulk materials posses sing chemical hazards and dangerous goods in packaged form 7.6.3.5.1 Unless otherwise required in this Code or in t he IMSBC Code, segregation between bulk materials possessing chemical hazards and dangerous goods in packaged form shall be in accordance with the following table . 7.6.3.5.2 Segregation table Dangerous goods in packaged form Bulk materials (classified as dangerous goods) CLASS 1.1 1.2 1.5 1.3 1.6 1.4 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 4.1 4.2 4.3 5.1 5.2 6.1 6.2 7 8 9 Flammable solids 4.1 4 3 2 2 2 2 X 1 X 1 2 X 3 2 1 X Substances liable to spontaneous combustion 4.2 4 3 2 2 2 2 1 X 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 X Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases 4.3 4 4 2 2 X 2 X 1 X 2 2 X 2 2 1 X Oxidizing substances (agents) 5.1 4 4 2 2 X 2 1 2 2 X 2 1 3 1 2 X Toxic substances 6.1 2 2 X X X X X 1 X 1 1 X 1 X X X Radioactive material 7 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 X 3 X 2 X Corrosive substance 8 4 2 2 1 X 1 1 1 1 2 2 X 3 2 X X Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles 9 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Materials hazardous only in bulk (MHB) X X X X X X X X X X X X 3 X X X Numbers and symbols relate to the following terms, as defined in this chapter: 1 – “away from” 2 – “separated from” 3 – “separated by a complete compartment or ho ld from” 4 – “separated longitudinally by an interv ening complete compartment or hold from” X – the segregation, if any, is shown in the Dange rous Goods List in this Code or the individual entries in the IMSBC Code Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 505

Chapter 7.6 – Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships 495 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.6.3.5.3 Definitions of the segregation terms Away from: Effectively segregated so that incompatible materials cannot interact dangerously in the event of an accident but may be transported in the same compartment or hold or on deck provided a minimum horizontal separation of 3 m, projected vertically, is provided . 3 m 3 m Prohibited stowage area Separated from: In different holds when stowed under deck . Provided an intervening deck is resista nt to fire and liquid, a vertical separation, i . e . in different compartments, may be accep ted as equivalent to this segregation . Separated by a complete compartment or hold from: Either a vertical or a horizontal separation . If the decks are not resistant to fire and liqui d, then only a longitudinal separation, i . e . by an intervening complete compartmen t, is acceptable . Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from: Vertical separation alone does not meet this requirement . Legend Reference bulk material … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … Package containing incompatible goods … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … Deck resistant to fire and liquid … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … . . Note: Vertical lines represent transverse watertight bulkheads between cargo spaces . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 506

7 496 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 7.7 Shipborne barges on barge-carrying ships 7.7.1 Introduction 7.7.1.1 The provisions of this chapter are a pplicable to shipborne barges which contain packaged dangerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards while aboard barge-carrying ships . 7.7.1.2 Barges used for the shipborne transport of p ackaged dangerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards shall be of proper design and adequate strength to resist the stresses imposed by the conditions of the services in which they are employed and they shall be adequately maintained . Shipborne barges shall be approved in acc ordance with provisions for certification of a recognized classification society, or any organization approved by and acting on behalf of the competent authority of the countries concerned . 7.7.2 Definitions 7.7.2.1 Loading , for the purpose of this chapter, mean s the placement of cargo into a shipborne barge . 7.7.2.2 Stowage , for the purposes of this chapter, mea ns the placement of a shipborne barge aboard the barge- carrying ship . 7.7.3 Barge loading 7.7.3.1 Packages shall be examined and any found to be d amaged, leaking or sifting shall not be loaded into a shipborne barge . Care shall be taken to ensure that excessiv e water, snow, ice or foreign matter adhering to packages shall be removed before loading into a shipborne barge . 7.7.3.2 Packages containing dangerous goods, c argo transport units and any other goods within a shipborne barge shall be adequately braced and secured for the voyage . Packages shall be loaded in such a way that th ere will be a minimum likelihood of damage to them and to any fittings during transport . Fittings on packages or portable tanks shal l be adequately protected . 7.7.3.3 Certain dry dangerous goods may be transpo rted in bulk in shipborne barges; this is indicated by the Code “BK2” in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List . Where such solid bulk materials possess ing chemical hazards are transported in shipborne barges, it shall be ensured that at all times the cargo is evenly distributed, properly trimmed and secured . 7.7.3.4 Shipborne barges into which packaged dan gerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards are to be loaded shall be examined visually for hull or hatch cover damage which could impair watertight integrity . If there is evidence of such damage, the ship borne barge may not be used for the transport of packaged dangerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards and shall not be loaded . 7.7.3.5 Dangerous goods which have to be segreg ated from each other according to the provisions in chapter 7 . 2 shall not be transported in the same barge wit h the exception of dangerous goods which shall be segregated “away from” each other which may be transported in the same barge with the approval of the competent authority . In such cases an equivalent standard of saf ety shall be maintained . 7.7.3.6 Dangerous goods having a primary or subsid iary hazard of classes 2 . 3, 6 . 1, 6 . 2, 7 (with the exception of UN 2908, 2909, 2910 an d 2911), 8 and dangerous goods having a reference to 7 . 7 . 3 . 6 in column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List shal l not be transported together with foodstuffs (see 1 . 2 . 1) in the same barge . 7.7.3.7 Notwithstanding the provisions in 7 . 7 . 3 . 6, the following dangerous goods may be tran sported with foodstuffs in the same barge provided that they are not loaded within 3 m from foodstuffs: .1 dangerous goods of packing group III of clas ses 6 . 1 and 8; .2 dangerous goods of packing group II of class 8 ; .3 any other dangerous goods of packing group I II with a subsidiary hazard of classes 6 . 1 or 8; and .4 dangerous goods having a reference to 7 . 7 . 3 . 7 in column 16b of the Dangerous Goods List . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 507

Chapter 7.7 – Shipborne barges on barge-carrying ships 497 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.7.3.8 Shipborne barges containing a residue of a d angerous cargo or shipborne barges loaded with empty packagings still containing a residue of a dangerous substance shall comply with the same provisions as barges loaded with the substance itself . 7.7.3.9 Stowage of dangerous goods in flexible bulk c ontainers 7.7.3.9.1 Flexible bulk containers shall be stowed i n the barge in such a way that there are no void spaces between the flexible bulk containers in the barge . If the flexible bulk containers do not compl etely fill the barge, adequate measures shall be taken to avoid shifting of cargo . 7.7.3.9.2 The maximum permissible height of the stac k of the flexible bulk containers shall never exceed three high . 7.7.3.9.3 When flexible bulk containers are fitted wit h venting devices, the stowage of the flexible bulk containers in their barge shall not impede their function . 7.7.4 Stowage of shipborne barges 7.7.4.1 Stowage of shipborne barges carrying pac kaged dangerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards aboard barge-carrying ships shall be as required for the substance in chapter 7 . 1 and in column 16a of the Dangerous Goods List . When a shipborne barge is loaded with more th an one substance, and the stowage locations differ for the substances (i . e . some substances require on deck stowage wh ile other substances require under deck stowage), the shipborne barge containing these substances shall be stowed on deck . 7.7.4.2 Provision shall be made to ensure that shipb orne barges stowed under deck and loaded with cargoes requiring ventilation because of their dangerous nature are ventilated to the extent necessary . 7.7.4.3 Where it is required that a dangerous good sha ll be protected from sources of heat, this provision shall be applied to the shipborne barge as a whole, unless suitable alternative measures are provided . 7.7.4.4 When packaged dangerous goods or solid bulk m aterials possessing chemical hazards are loaded in shipborne barges aboard barge-carrying ships having the capability of providing fixed fire-fighting systems or fire-detection systems to individual barges, care shall be taken to ensure that these systems are attached to the shipborne barge and operating properly . 7.7.4.5 When packaged dangerous goods or solid bulk m aterials possessing chemical hazards are loaded in shipborne barges aboard barge-carrying ships having fixed fire-fighting systems or fire-detection systems installed in individual barge holds, care shall be taken to ensure that the ventilation closures on the shipborne barges are open, to permit the fire fighting medium to enter the barges in case of fire . 7.7.4.6 When ventilation ducts are provided to ind ividual shipborne barges, the ventilation fans shall be secured when fire-fighting medium is introduced into the hold to permit the medium to enter the shipborne barges . 7.7.5 Segregation between barges on board barg e-carrying ships 7.7.5.1 For barge-carrying ships which incorpo rate other cargo spaces or any other method of stowage, the appropriate chapter shall apply to the relevant cargo space . 7.7.5.2 When a shipborne barge is loaded with two or mor e substances with different provisions for segregation, the most stringent segregation applicable shall be applied . 7.7.5.3 “Away from” and “separated from” require n o segregation between shipborne barges . 7.7.5.4 “Separated by a complete compartment or ho ld from” means, for barge-carrying ships with vertical holds, that separate holds are required . On barge-carrying ships having horizo ntal barge levels, separate barge levels are required and the barges shall not be in the same vertical line . 7.7.5.5 “Separated longitudinally by an interv ening complete compartment or hold from” means, for barge-carrying ships with vertical holds, that separation by an intervening hold or engine room is required . On barge-carrying ships having horizo ntal barge levels, separate barge levels and a longitudinal separation by at least two intervening barge spaces is required . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 508

7 498 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Chapter 7.8 Special requirements in the event of an incident and fire precautions involving dangerous goods Note: The provisions of this chapter are not manda tory . 7.8.1 General 7.8.1.1 In the event of an incident involving danger ous goods, detailed recommendations are contained in The EmS Guide: Revised Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods . 7.8.1.2 In the event of personnel exposure during an i ncident involving dangerous goods, detailed recommendations are contained in Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG) . 7.8.1.3 In the event that a package containing dange rous goods is found to be suffering from breakage or leakage while the ship is in port, the port authorities should be informed and appropriate procedures should be followed . 7.8.2 General provisions in the event of incidents 7.8.2.1 Recommendations on emergency action ma y differ depending on whether or not the goods are stowed on deck or under deck or whether a substance is gaseous, liquid or solid . When dealing with incidents involving fl ammable gases, or flammable liquids with a flashpoint of 60 ° C closed-cup (c . c . ) or below, all sources of ignition (such as nak ed lights, unprotected light bulbs, electric handtools) should be avoided . 7.8.2.2 In general, the recommendation is to wash sp illages on deck overboard with copious quantities of water and, where there is likely to be a dangerous reaction with water, from as far away as practicable . Disposal of spilt dangerous goods overb oard is a matter for judgement by the master, bearing in mind that the safety of the crew has priority over pollution of the sea . If it is safe to do so, spillages and leakages of s ubstances, articles and materials identified in this Code as MARINE POLLUTANT should be collected for safe disposal . Inert absorbent material should be used for liquids . 7.8.2.3 Toxic, corrosive and/or flammable vap ours in under deck cargo spaces should, where possible, be dispersed before undertaking any emergency action . Where a mechanical ventilation system i s used, care will be necessary to ensure that flammable vapours are not ignited . 7.8.2.4 If there is any reason to suspect leakage of the se substances, entry into a hold or cargo space should not be permitted until the master or responsible officer has taken all safety considerations into account and is satisfied that it is safe to do so . 7.8.2.5 Emergency entry into the hold under other ci rcumstances should only be undertaken by trained crew wearing self-contained breathing apparatus and other protective clothing . 7.3.2.6 A careful inspection for structural dama ge should be carried out after dealing with spillages of substances corrosive to steel and cryogenic liquids . 7.8.3 Special provisions for incidents involvin g infectious substances 7.8.3.1 If any person responsible for the transpor t or opening of packages containing infectious substances becomes aware of damage to or leakage from such packages, he should: .1 avoid handling the package or keep handlin g to a minimum; .2 inspect adjacent packages for contaminatio n and put aside any that have been contaminated; .3 inform the appropriate public health aut hority or veterinary authority, and provide information on any other countries of transit where persons may have been exposed to danger; and .4 notify the consignor and/or the consignee . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 509

Chapter 7.8 – Special requirements and fire precautions 499 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 7.8.3.2 Decontamination A cargo transport unit, a bulk container or a cargo space of a ship, which has been used to transport infectious substances, shall be inspected for release of the substance before re-use . If infectious substances were release d during transport, the cargo transport unit, the bulk container or the cargo space of a ship shall be decontaminated before it is re-used . Decontamination may be achieved by any me ans which effectively inactivates the infectious substance released . 7.8.4 Special provisions for incidents involvin g radioactive material 7.8.4.1 If it is evident that a package is damaged or leak ing, or if it is suspected that the package may have leaked or been damaged, access to the package should be restricted and a qualified person should, as soon as possible, assess the extent of contamination and the resultant dose rate of the package . The scope of the assessment should include the package, the conveyance, the adjacent loading and unloading areas, and, if necessary, all other material which has been transported in the conveyance . When necessary, additional steps for th e protection of persons, property and the environment, in accordance with provisions established by the relevant competent authority, should be taken to overcome and minimize the consequences of such leakage or damage . 7.8.4.2 Packages damaged or leaking radioactiv e contents in excess of allowable limits for normal conditions of transport may be removed to an acceptable interim location under supervision, but should not be forwarded until repaired or reconditioned and decontaminated . 7.8.4.3 In the event of a nuclear or radiological emer gency during the transport of radioactive material, provisions as established by relevant national and/or international organizations, should be observed to protect persons, property and the environment . This includes arrangements for prepar edness and response established in accordance with the national and/or international requirements and in a consistent and coordinated manner with the national and/or international emergency arrangements . 7.8.4.4 Attention is drawn to the latest versions of b oth The EmS Guide: Revised Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods and the Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG) . 7.8.4.5 The arrangements for preparedness and re sponse should be based on the graded approach and take into consideration the identified hazards and their potential consequences, including the formation of other dangerous substances that may result from the reaction between the contents of a consignment and the environment in the event of a nuclear or radiological emergency . Guidance for the establishment of such a rrangements is contained in “Preparedness and Response for a Nuclear or Radiological Emergency”, IAEA Safety Standards Series No . GSR Part 7, IAEA, Vienna (2015); “Criteria f or Use in Preparedness and Response for a Nuclear or Radiological Emergency”, IAEA Safety Standards Series No . GSG-2, IAEA, Vienna (2011); “Arrangeme nts for Preparedness for a Nuclear or Radiological Emergency”, IAEA Safety Standards Series No . GS-G-2 . 1, IAEA, Vienna (2007), and “Arrangement s for the Termination of a Nuclear or Radiological Emergency”, IAEA Safety Standards Series No . GSG-11, IAEA, Vienna (2018) . 7.8.4.6 In the event of a package containing radioac tive material suffering from breakage or leakage while the ship is in port, the port authorities should be informed and advice obtained from them or from the competent authority . * Procedures have been drawn up in many countries for summoning radiological assistance in any such emergency . 7.8.5 General fire precautions 7.8.5.1 The prevention of fire in a cargo of dangerous go ods is achieved by practising good seamanship, observing in particular the following precautions: .1 keep combustible material away from ign ition sources; .2 protect a flammable substance by adequat e packing; .3 reject damaged or leaking packages; .4 stow packages protected from accidental da mage or heating; .5 segregate packages from substances lia ble to start or spread fire; .6 where appropriate and practicable, stow dangerous goods in an accessible position so that packages in the vicinity of a fire may be protected; * Reference is made to chapter 7 . 9 and the IAEA list of national compe tent authorities responsible for approvals and authorizations in respect of the transport of radioactive material . The list is updated annually . △ △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 510

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 500 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 .7 enforce prohibition of smoking in dangerous areas and display clearly recognizable “NO SMOKING” notices or signs; and .8 the dangers from short-circuits, earth l eakages or sparking will be apparent . Lighting and power cables and fittings sh ould be maintained in good condition . Cables or equipment found to be un safe should be disconnected . Where a bulkhead is required to be suitabl e for segregation purposes, cables and conduit penetrations of the decks and bulkheads should be sealed against the passage of gas and vapours . When stowing dangerous goods on deck, the po sition and design of auxiliary machinery, electrical equipment and cable runs should be considered in order to avoid sources of ignition . 7.8.5.2 Fire precautions applying to individua l classes, and where necessary to individual substances, are recommended in 7 . 8 . 2 and 7 . 8 . 6 to 7 . 8 . 9 and in the Dangerous Goods List . 7.8.6 Special fire precautions for class 1 7.8.6.1 The greatest risk in the handling and transp ort of goods of class 1 is that of fire from a source external to the goods, and it is vital that any fire should be detected and extinguished before it can reach such goods . Consequently, it is essential tha t fire precautions, fire-fighting measures and equipment are of a high standard and ready for immediate application and use . 7.8.6.2 Compartments containing goods of class 1 a nd adjacent cargo spaces should be provided with a fire-detection system . If such spaces are not protected by a fixed fire- extinguishing system, they should be accessible for fire-fighting operations . 7.8.6.3 No repair work should be carried out in a co mpartment containing goods of class 1 . Special care should be exercised in carr ying out repairs in any adjacent space . No welding, burning, cutting, or riveti ng operations involving the use of fire, flame, spark, or arc-producing equipment should be carried out in any space other than machinery spaces and workshops where fire-extinguishing arrangements are available, except in any emergency and, if in port, with prior authorization of the port authority . 7.8.7 Special fire precautions for class 2 7.8.7.1 Effective ventilation should be provid ed to remove any leakage of gas from within the cargo space or spaces, bearing in mind that some gases are heavier than air and may accumulate in dangerous concentrations in the lower part of the ship . 7.8.7.2 Measures should be taken to prevent leakin g gases from penetrating into any other part of the ship . 7.8.7.3 If there is any reason to suspect leakage of a gas, entry into cargo spaces or other enclosed spaces should not be permitted until the master or respon sible officer has taken all safety considerations into account and is satisfied that it is safe to do so . Emergency entry under other circumsta nces should only be undertaken by trained crew wearing self-contained breathing apparatus, and protective clothing when recommended, and always under the supervision of a responsible officer . 7.8.7.4 Leakage from pressure receptacles containing flammable gases may give rise to explosive mixtures with air . Such mixtures, if ignited, may result in exp losion and fire . 7.8.8 Special fire precautions for class 3 7.8.8.1 Flammable liquids give off flammable vapo urs which, especially in an enclosed space, form explosive mixtures with air . Such vapours, if ignited, may cause a “fla shback” to the place in which the substances are stowed . Due regard should be paid to the provision of adequate ventilation to prevent accumulation of vapours . 7.8.9 Special fire precautions and fire fighting for c lass 7 7.8.9.1 The radioactive contents of Excepted, Ind ustrial, and Type A packages are so restricted that, in the event of an accident and damage to the package, there is a high probability that any material released, or shielding efficiency lost, would not give rise to such radiological hazard as to hamper fire-fighting or rescue operations . 7.8.9.2 Type B(U) packages, Type B(M) packages and T ype C packages are designed to be strong enough to withstand severe fire without significant loss of contents or dangerous loss of radiation shielding . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 511

501 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Chapter 7.9 Exemptions, approvals and certificates 7.9.1 Exemptions Note 1 The provisions of this section do not apply to e xemptions mentioned in chapters 1 to 7 . 8 of this Code and to approvals (including per mits, authorizations or agreements) and certificates which are referred to in chapters 1 to 7 . 8 of this Code . For the said approvals and certificates, s ee 7 . 9 . 2 . Note 2 The provisions of this section do not apply to c lass 7 . For consignments of radioactive mater ial for which conformity with any provision of this Code applicable to class 7 is impracticable, refer to 1 . 5 . 4 . 7.9.1.1 Where this Code requires that a particular p rovision for the transport of dangerous goods shall be complied with, a competent authority or competent authorities (port State of departure, port State of arrival or flag State) may authorize any other provision by exemption if satisfied that such provision is at least as effective and safe as that required by this Code . Acceptance of an exemption authorized u nder this section by a competent authority not party to it is subject to the discretion of that competent authority . Accordingly, prior to any shipment cove red by the exemption, the recipient of the exemption shall notify other competent authorities concerned . 7.9.1.2 Competent authority or competent autho rities which have taken the initiative with respect to the exemption: .1 shall send a copy of such exemption to the Inter national Maritime Organization which shall bring it to the attention of the Contracting Parties to SOLAS and/or MARPOL, as appropriate, and .2 if appropriate, take action to amend the IMD G Code to include the provisions covered by the exemption . 7.9.1.3 The period of validity of the exemption shal l be not more than five years from the date of authorization . An exemption that is not covered under 7 . 9 . 1 . 2 . 2 may be renewed in accordance with the provis ions of this section . 7.9.1.4 A copy of the exemption shall accompany each c onsignment when offered to the carrier for transport under the terms of the exemption . A copy of the exemption or an electronic copy t hereof shall be maintained on board each ship transporting dangerous goods in accordance with the exemption, as appropriate . 7.9.2 Approvals (including permits, authorizat ions or agreements) and certificates 7.9.2.1 Approvals, including permits, author izations or agreements, and certificates referred to in chapters 1 to 7 . 8 of this Code and issued by the competent autho rity (authorities when the Code requires a multilateral approval) or a body authorized by that competent authority (e . g . approvals for alternative packaging i n 4 . 1 . 3 . 7, approval for segregation as in 7 . 3 . 4 . 1 or certificates for portable tanks in 6 . 7 . 2 . 18 . 1) shall be recognized, as appropriate: .1 by other contracting parties to SOLAS if the y comply with the requirements of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS), as amended; and/or .2 by other contracting parties to MARPOL if th ey comply with the requirements of the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL, Annex III), as amended . 7.9.3 Contact information for the main designat ed national competent authorities Contact information for the main designated national competent authorities concerned is given in this paragraph . * Corrections to these addresses should be sent to the Organization . † * Reference is made to MSC . 1/Circ . 1563, and its corrigenda, as may be amended, wh ich provides a more comprehensive listing of contact information for competent authorities and bodies . † International Maritime Organization 4 Albert Embankment London SE1 7SR United Kingdom Email: info@imo . org Fax: +44 20 7587 3210 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 512

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 502 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority ALGERIA Ministère des Transports Direction de la Marine marchande et des Ports 1, Chemin Ibn Badis El Mouiz (ex Poirson) El Biar – Alger ALGÉRIE Telephone: + 213 219 29881 + 213 219 20931 Fax: + 213 219 23046 + 213 219 29894 Email: benyelles@ministere-transports . gov . dz AMERICAN SAMOA Silila Patane Harbour Master P ort Administration Pago Pago American Samoa AMERICAN SAMOA 96799 ANGOLA National Director Marine Safety, Shipping and Ports National Directorate of Merchant Marine and Ports Rua Rainha Ginga 74, 4° Andar Luanda ANGOLA Telephone: + 244 2 39 0034 + 244 2 39 7984 Fax: + 244 2 31 037 Mobile: + 244 9243 9336 Email: ispscode_angola@snet . co . ao ARGENTINA Prefectura Naval Argentina (Arg entine Coast Guard) Dirección de protección ambiental Departamento de protección ambiental y mercancías peligrosas División mercancías y residuos peligrosos Avda . Eduardo Madero 235 4 ° piso, Oficina 4 . 36 y 4 . 37 Buenos Aires (C1106ACC) REPÚBLICA ARGEN TINA Telephone: + 54 11 4318 7669 Fax: + 54 11 4318 7474 Email: dpma-mp@prefecturanaval . gov . ar AUSTRALIA Manager – Ship Inspection and Re gistration Ship Safety Division Australian Maritime Safety Authority GPO Box 2181 Canberra ACT 2601 AUSTRALIA Telephone: + 61 2 6279 5048 Fax: + 61 2 6279 5058 Email: psc@amsa . gov . au Website: www . amsa . gov . au AUSTRIA Federal Ministry for Transpor t, Innovation and Technology Transport of Dangerous Goods and Safe Containers Radetzkystraße 2 A-1030 Wien AUSTRIA Telephone: + 43 1 71162 65 5771 Fax: + 43 1 71162 65 5725 Email: st6@bmvit . gv . at Website: www . bmvit . gv . at Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 513

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 503 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority AZERBAIJAN Ministry of Emergency Situations of the Republic of Azerbaijan State Agency for Safe Working in Industry and Mountain-Mine Control 26 Najafgulu Rafiyev Street Baku Khatai Region AZ 1025 AZERBAIJAN Telephone: + 994 12 512 1501 Fax: + 994 12 512 2501 Email: dag-meden@fhn . gov . az BAHAMAS Bahamas Maritime Authority 120 Old Bro ad Street London, EC2N 1AR UNITED KINGDOM Telephone: + 44 20 7562 1300 Fax: + 44 20 7614 0650 Email: tech@bahamasmaritime . com Website: www . bahamasmaritime . com BANGLADESH Department of Shipping 141-1 43, Motijheel Commercial Area BIWTA Bhaban (8th Floor) Dhaka-1000 BANGLADESH Telephone: + 880 2 9555128 Fax: + 880 2 7168363 Email: dosdgdbd@bttb . net . bd BARBADOS Director of Maritime Affairs Minis try of Tourism and International Transport 2nd Floor, Carlisle House Hincks Street Bridgetown St . Michael BARBADOS Telephone: + 1 246 426 2710 + 1 246 426 3342 Fax: + 1 246 426 7882 Email: ctech@sunbeach . net BELGIUM Antwerp office Federale Overheid sdienst Mobiliteit en Vervoer Directoraat-generaal Maritiem Vervoer Scheepvaartcontrole Posthoflei 3 B-2000 Antwerpen (Berchem) BELGIUM Telephone: + 32 3 229 0030 Fax: + 32 3 229 0031 Email: HAZMAT . MAR@mobilit . fgov . be Ostend office Federale Overheidsdienst Mobiliteit en Vervoer Directoraat-generaal Maritiem Vervoer Scheepvaartcontrole Natiënkaai 5 B-8400 Oostende BELGIUM Telephone: + 32 59 56 1450 Fax: + 32 59 56 1474 Email: HAZMAT . MAR@mobilit . fgov . be Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 514

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 504 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority BELIZE Ports Commissioner/Harbour Master 120 Corner North Front and Pickstock Street Belize City BELIZE Telephone: + 501 223 0752 + 501 223 0762 + 501 223 0743 Fax: + 501 223 0433 Website: www . portauthority . bz BRAZIL Diretoria de Portos e Costas (DPC-20) R ua Teófilo Otoni No . 04 Centro Rio de Janeiro CEP 20090-070 BRAZIL Tele phone: + 55 21 2104 5203 Fax: + 55 21 2104 5202 Email: secom@dpc . mar . mil . br BULGARIA Head office Captain Petar Petrov, Director Directorate “Quality Management” Bulgarian Maritime Administration 9 Dyakon Ignatii Str . Sofia 1000 REPUBLIC OF BULGARIA Telephone: + 359 2 93 00 910 + 359 2 93 00 912 Fax: + 359 2 93 00 920 Email: bma@marad . bg petrov@marad . bg Regional offices Harbour Master Directorate “M aritime Administration” – Bourgas 3 Kniaz Alexander Batemberg Str . Bourgas 8000 REPUBLIC OF BULGARIA Telephone: + 359 56 875 775 Fax: + 359 56 840 064 Email: hm_bs@marad . bg Harbour Master Directorate “Maritime Adm inistration” – Varna 5 Primorski Bvd Varna 9000 REPUBLIC OF BULGARIA Telephone: + 359 52 684 922 Fax: + 359 52 602 378 Email: hm_vn@marad . bg Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 515

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 505 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority BURUNDI Minister Ministère des Transports, Postes et Télécommunications B . P . 2000 Bujumbura BURUNDI Telephone: + 257 219 324 Fax: + 257 217 773 CABO VERDE The Director General Min istry of Infrastructure and Transport St . Vincente CABO VERDE Telephone: + 238 2 328 199 + 238 2 585 4643 Email: dgmp@cvtelecom . cv CANADA The Chairman Marine Technical Review B oard Contact: Director, Operations and Environmental Programs Marine Safety, Transport Canada Tower C, Place de Ville 330 Sparks Street, 10th Floor Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 CANADA Telephone: + 1 613 991 3132 + 1 613 991 3143 + 1 613 991 3139 + 1 613 991 3140 Fax: + 1 613 993 8196 Packaging approvals Director, Reg ulatory Affairs Transport Dangerous Goods Directorate Tower C, Place de Ville 330 Sparks Street, 9th Floor Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 CANADA Telephone: + 1 613 998 0519 + 1 613 990 1163 + 1 613 993 5266 Fax: + 1 613 993 5925 CHILE Dirección General del Terr itorio Marítimo y de Marina Mercante Dirección de Seguridad y Operaciones Marítimas Servicio de Inspecciones Marítimas División Prevención de Riesgos y Cargas Peligrosas Subida Cementerio No . 300 Valparaíso CHILE Telephone: + 56 32 220 8699 + 56 32 220 8654 + 56 32 220 8692 Email: cargaspeligrosas@directemar . cl CHINA Maritime Safety Administration Peop le’s Republic of China 11 Jianguomen Nei Avenue Beijing 100736 CHINA Telephone: + 86 10 6529 2588 + 86 10 6529 2218 Fax: + 86 10 6529 2245 Telex: 222258 CMSAR CN Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 516

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 506 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority COMOROS Ministre d’État Ministère du développement, des infrastructures, des postes et des télécommunications et des transp orts internationaux Moroni UNION DES COMORES Telephone: + 269 744 287 + 269 735 794 Fax: + 269 734 241 + 269 834 241 Mobile: + 269 340 248 Email: houmedms@yahoo . fr CROATIA Ministry of Maritime Affairs, Tr ansport and Infrastructure Marine Safety Directorate MRCC Rijeka Senjsko pristani š te 3 51000 Rijeka REPUBLIC OF CROATIA Telephone: + 385 51 195 + 385 51 312 301 Fax: + 385 51 312 254 Email: mrcc@pomorstvo . hr Testing and certification of packaging s Cargo Superintendence and Testing Services Adriainspekt Ciottina 17/b 51000 Rijeka REPUBLIC OF CROATIA Telephone: + 385 51 356 080 Fax: + 385 51 356 090 Email: ai@adriainspekt . hr Website: www . adriainspekt . hr Classification society for CSC containe rs (including IMO tanks) Croatian Register of Shipping Marasovi ć eva 67 21000 Split REPUBLIC OF CROATIA Telephone: + 385 21 408 180 Fax: + 385 51 356 159 Email: constr@crs . hr CUBA Ministerio del Transporte Direcció n de Seguridad e Inspección Marítima Boyeros y Tulipán Plaza Ciudad de la Habana CUBA Telephone: + 537 881 6607 + 537 881 9498 Fax: + 537 881 1514 Email: dsim@mitrans . transnet . cu CYPRUS Department of Merchant Shipping Mi nistry of Communications and Works Kylinis Street Mesa Geitonia CY-4007 Lemesos P . O . Box 56193 CY-3305 Lemesos CYPRUS Telephone: + 357 5 848 100 Fax: + 357 5 848 200 Telex: 2004 MERSHIP CY Email: dms@cytanet . com . cy Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 517

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 507 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority CZECHIA Implementation Ministry of Transport of the Czechia Navigation Department Nábr . L . Svobody 12 110 15 Praha 1 CZECHIA Telephone: + 420 225 131 151 Fax: + 420 225 131 110 Email: sekretariat . 230@mdcr . cz Č esk ý ú ř ad pro zkou š ení zbraní a st ř eliva ( Czech office for weapon and ammunition testing) Jilmova 759/12 130 00 Praha 3 CZECHIA Telephone: + 420 284 081 831 Email: info@cuzzs . cz rockai@cuzzs . cz Examination, testing and assessing fun ctional sustainability of packages or materials used for packaging of dangerous goods IMET, s . r . o . Kam ý cká 234 160 00 Praha 6 - Sedlec CZECHIA Tele phone: + 420 220 922 085 + 420 603 552 565 Fax: + 420 220 921 676 Email: imet@imet . cz Classification of dangerous goods of cla ss 1 (explosives) (interim authorization expiring on 20 November 2010) Ceskoslovensky Lloyd, spol . s . r . o . (Czechoslovak 184) Vinohradska 184 130 00 P raha 3 Vinohrady CZECHIA Telephone: + 420 777 767 + 420 777 706 Email: info@cslloyd . cz DEMOCRATIC PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF KOREA (TH E) Maritime Administration of the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea Ryonhwa-2 Dong Central District P . O . Box 416 Pyongyang DEMOCRATIC PEOPLE’S REPU BLIC OF KOREA Telephone: + 850 2 18111 ext . 8059 Fax: + 850 3 381 4410 Email: mab@silibank . com Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 518

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 508 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority DENMARK Danish Maritime Authority Carl Jacobsens Vei 31 DK-2500 Valby DENMARK Telephone: + 45 72 19 60 00 Fax: + 45 72 19 60 01 Email: SFS@dma . dk Packing, testing and certification Embal lage og Transportinstituttet (E . T . I . ) Dansk Teknologisk Institut Gregersens vej 2630 Tåstrup DENMARK Packagings in conformity with the IMDG Code will be marked “DK Eti” DJIBOUTI Director of Maritime Affairs Ministère de l’equipement et des transports P . O . Box 59 Djibouti DJIBOUTI Telephone: + 253 357 913 Fax: + 253 351 538 + 253 931 + 253 355 879 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 519

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 509 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority ECUADOR Dirección General de la Marina Mercante y del Litoral P . O . Box 7412 Guayaquil Ecuador Telephone: + 593 4 526 760 Fax: + 593 4 324 246 Telex: 04 3325 DIGMER ED Subsecretaria de puertos y t ransporte maritimo y fluvial Ing . Ivan Solorzano Villacis Experto en infraest ructura portuaria Cdla . Los Ceibos - Av . del Bombero y Leopoldo Carrera - Edif . EP-Petroecuador - 1er piso Guayaquil Guayas E CUADOR Telephone: + 59342592080 Email: isolorzano@mtop . gob . ec Website: http://www . obraspublicas . gob . ec Subsecretaria de puertos y transporte m aritimo y fluvial (SPTMF) Ing . Richard Villacís Jefe de Contaminación Av . del Bombero y Leopoldo Carrera - Cdla . Ceibos . Edif . EP-Petroecuador . 1er piso Guayaquil Guayas ECUADOR Telephone: + 59362723008 Email: rvillacis@mtop . gob . ec Website: https://www . obraspublicas . gob . ec Superintendencia del Terminal Petroler o de “El Salitral” (SUINSA) CPNV(SP) Raúl Aguirre Baldeón Superintendente Terminal Petrolero de el Salitral Guayaquil ECUADOR Telephone: + 59345504901 Fax: + 59342504901 Ext . 102 / 109 Email: suinsa_operaciones@mtop . gob . ec suinsa_radio@mtop . gob . ec raguirreb2000@hotmail . com Superintendencia del Terminal Petrole ro de la Libertad (SUINLI) CPNV(SP) Roberto Ruiz Johns Superintendente Terminal Petrolero de la Libertad La Libertad Ecuador Telephone: + 59342785785 Fax: + 59342785781 Email: suinli_operaciones@mtop . gob . ec suinli_radio@mtop . gob . ec rruiz@mtop . gob . ec EQUATORIAL GUINEA The Director General ( Maritime Affairs) Ministerio de Transportes, Tecnología, Correos y Telecomunicaciones Malabo REPUBLICA DE GUINEA ECUATORIAL Telephone: + 240 275 406 Fax: + 240 092 618 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 520

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 510 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority ERITREA Director General Department of Maritime Transport Ministry of Transport and Communications ERITREA Telephone: + 291 1 121 317 + 291 1 189 156 + 291 1 185 251 Fax: + 291 1 184 690 + 291 1 186 541 Email: motcrez@eol . com . er ESTONIA Estonian Maritime Administratio n Maritime Safety Division Valge 4 EST-11413 Tallinn ESTONIA Telephone: + 372 6205 700 + 372 6205 715 Fax: + 372 6205 706 Email: mot@vta . ee ETHIOPIA Maritime Affairs Authority P . O . Box 1B61 Addis Ababa ETHIOPIA Telephone: + 251 11 550 36 83 + 251 11 550 36 38 Fax: + 251 11 550 39 60 Mobile: + 251 91 151 39 73 Email: maritime@ethione . et FAROES (THE) Sjóvinnust ý ri ð Faroese Mariti me Authority Inni á Stø ð , P . O . Box 26 FO-375 Mi ð vágur FAROE ISLANDS Telephone : + 298 35 5 600 Fax: + 298 35 5 601 Email: fma@fma . fo Website: www . fma . fo FIJI The Director of Maritime Safety Fiji Islands Maritime Safety Administration GPO Box 326 Suva FIJI Telephone: + 679 331 5266 Fax: + 679 330 3251 Email: fimsa@connect . com . fj Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 521

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 511 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority FINLAND Transport Safety Agency Trafi P . O . Box 320 FI-00101 Helsinki FINLAND Telephone: + 358 29 534 5000 Fax: + 358 29 534 5095 Email: kirjaamo@trafi . fi Packaging and certification institute Sa fety Technology Authority (TUKES) P . O . Box 123 FI-00181 Helsinki FINLAND Telephone: + 358 96 1671 Fax: + 358 96 1674 66 Email: kirjaamo@tukes . fi FRANCE Ministère de la Transition Écologiq ue et Solidaire Adjoint au Chef de la mission transport de matières dangereuses MTES – DGPR – Mission Transport de matières dangereuses (MTMD) 92055 Paris La Défense Cedex FRANCE Telephone: + 33 1 40 81 14 96 Fax: + 33 1 40 81 86 41 Email: pierre . dufour@developpement-durable . gouv . fr Organizations authorized for packagin gs, large packagings and intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) * 1 Association des contrôleurs indépendants (ACI) 22, rue de l’Est 92100 Boulogne-Billancourt FRANCE 2 APAVE 191, rue de Vaugirard 75738 Paris Cede x 15 FRANCE 3 Association pour la sécurité des apparei ls à pression (ASAP) Continental Square – BP 16757 95727 Roissy-Charles de Gaulle Cedex FRANCE 4 Bureau de vérifications techniques (BVT) Z AC de la Cerisaie – 31, rue de Montjean 94266 Fresnes Cedex FRANCE 5 Bureau Veritas 67-71, rue du Château 922 00 Neuilly-sur-Seine FRANCE 6 Centre français de l’emballage agréé (Ce FEA) 5, rue Janssen 75019 Paris FRANCE 7 Laboratoire d’études et de recherches des emballages Métalliques (LEREM) Marches de l’Oise – 100, rue Louis-Blanc 60160 Montataire FRANCE 8 Laboratoire national de métrologie et d’ess ais (LNE) 1, rue Gaston-Boissier 75724 Paris Cedex 15 FRANCE * Contact competent authority for further details of areas of authorization . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 522

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 512 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority FRANCE (continued) Organizations authorized for pressure receptacles * 1 Association des contrôleurs indépendants (ACI) (For contact details see above) 2 APAVE (For contact details see above) 3 Association pour la sécurité des apparei ls à pression (ASAP) (For contact details see above) 4 Bureau Veritas (For contact details see above) Organizatio ns authorized for tanks and multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) * 1 Association des contrôleurs indépendants (ACI) (For contact details see above) 2 APAVE (For contact details see above) 3 Bureau Veritas (For contact details see above) Competen t authority for issuing agreements for class 7 packages containing radioactive materials: Autorité de Sûreté Nucléaire (ASN) 15, rue Louis Lejeune CS 70013 F-92541 Montrouge Cedex FRANCE Telephone: + 33 1 46 16 41 09 Email: dts-transport@asn . fr GAMBIA (ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF) The Director General Gambia Port Authority P . O . Box 617 Banjul THE GAMBIA Telephone: + 220 4 227 270 + 220 4 227 260 + 220 4 227 266 Fax: + 220 4 227 268 GEORGIA Maritime Transport Agenc y 23 Ninoshvili Str . , 6000 Batumi GEORGIA Telephone: + 995 422 274925 Fax: + 995 422 273929 Email: info@mta . gov . ge Website: www . mta . gov . ge State Ships’ Registry and Flag State Imple mentation Department: fsi@mta . gov . ge Seafarers’ Department: stcw@mta . gov . ge Maritime Search and Rescue Centre: mrcc@mta . gov . ge GERMANY Federal Ministry of Transport and D igital Infrastructure Division G 24 – Transport of Dangerous Goods Robert-Schuman-Platz 1 53175 Bonn GERMANY Telephone: + 49 228 300-0 or 300-extension + 49 228 300 2551 Fax: + 49 228 300 807 2551 Email: ref-g24@bmvi . bund . de * Contact competent authority for further details of areas of authorization . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 523

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 513 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority GERMANY (continued) Packing, Testing and Certification Institute: Federal Institute for Materials Research and Testing (Bundesanstalt für Materialforschung und -prüfung (BAM)) Unter den Eichen 87 D-12205 Berlin GERMANY Telephone: + 49 30 8104 0 or extension + 49 30 8104 1310 + 49 30 8104 3407 Fax: + 49 30 8104 1227 Email: ingo . doering@bam . de Packagings, IBCs, and multimodal tank -containers in conformity with the IMDG Code will be marked as specified in section 6 of annex I to the Code (references are to amendment 29) . The markings in accordance with 6 . 2(f) will be “D/BAM” . GHANA The Director General Ghana Maritime Aut hority P . M . B . 34, Ministries Post Office Ministries – Ac cra GHANA Telephone: + 233 21 662 122 + 233 21 684 392 Fax: + 233 21 677 702 Email: info@ghanamaritime . org GREECE Ministry of Mercantile Marine Sa fety of Navigation Division International Relations Department 150 Gr . Lambraki Av . 185 18 Piraeus GREECE Telephone: + 301 4191188 Fax: + 301 4128150 Telex: + 212022, 212239 YEN GR Email: dan@yen . gr GUINEA BISSAU The Minister Ministry of Tran sport & Communication Av . 3 de Agosto, Bissau GUINEA BISSAU Telephone: + 245 212 583 + 245 211 308 GUYANA Guyana Maritime Authority/ Administration Ministry of Public Works and Communications Building Top Floor Fort Street Kingston Georgetown REPUBLIC OF GUYANA Telephone: + 592 226 3356 + 592 225 7330 + 592 226 7842 Fax: + 592 226 9581 Email: MARAD@networksgy . com ICELAND Icelandic Transport Authority ( ICETRA) Armuli 2 108 Reykjavik ICELAND Telephone: + 354 480 6000 Email: samgongustofa@samgongustofa . is Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 524

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 514 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority INDIA The Directorate General of Shipping Jahz Bhawan Walchand Hirachand Marg Bombay 400 001 INDIA Telephone: + 91 22 263651 Telex: + DEGESHIP 2813-BOMBAY Packaging, Testin g and Certification Institute Indian Institute of Packaging Bombay Madras Calcutta INDIA INDONESIA Director of Sea and Coast Guard Directorate General of Sea Transport Ministry of Transportation of the Republic of Indonesia INDONESIA Email: kplp_imdgcode@dephub . go . id kplp_syahbandar@dephub . go . id IRAN (ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF) Ports and Mari time Organization PMO . No . 1 . Shahidi St . , Haghani Exp’way, Vanak Sq . Tehran ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF IRAN Postal Cod e: 1518663111 Telephone: + 98 2184932081 + 98 2184932082 Email: info@pmo . ir IRELAND The Chief Surveyor Marine Survey Of fice Department of Transport Leeson Lane Dublin 2 IRELAND Telephone: + 353 1 604 14 20 Fax: + 353 1 604 14 08 Email: mso@transport . ie ISRAEL Shipping and Ports Inspectorate Itz hak Rabin Government Complex Building 2 Pal-Yam 15a Haifa 31999 ISRAEL Telephone: + 972 4 8632080 Fax: + 972 4 8632118 Email: techni@mot . gov . il ITALY Coast Guard Headquarter Via dell’Arte 1 6 00100 Rome ITALY Telephone: + 39 06 5908 4652 + 39 06 5908 4267 Fax: + 39 06 5908 4630 Email: segreteria . reparto6@mit . gov . it Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 525

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 515 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority JAMAICA The Maritime Authority of Jamaica 4th Floor, Dyoll Building 40 Knutsford Boulevard Kingston 5 JAMAICA, W . I . Telephone: + 1 876 929 2201 + 1 876 754 7260 + 1 876 754 7265 Telex: + 1 876 7256 Email: maj@jamaicaships . com Website: www . jamaicaships . com Testing and certifying authority The Bur eau of Standards 6 Winchester Road P . O . Box 113 Kingston JAMAICA Telephone: + 1 809 92 63140 7 Telex: 2291 STANBUR Jamaica Cable: STANBUREAU JAPAN Inspection and Measurem ent Division Maritime Bureau Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism 2-1-3 Kasumigaseki, Chiyoda-ku Tokyo JAPAN Telephone: + 81 3 5253 8639 Telefax: + 81 3 5253 1644 Email: hqt-mrb_ksk@gxb . mlit . go . jp Packaging, Testing and Certificatio n Institute Nippon Hakuyohin Kentei Kyokai (HK) (The Ship Equipment Inspection Society of Japan) 3-32, Kioi-Cho, Chiyoda-ku Tokyo JAPAN Telephone: + 81 3 3261 6611 Fax: + 81 3 3261 6979 Packagings, IBCs and large pack agings in conformity with the IMDG Code will be marked “J”, “J/JG” or “J/HK” KENYA Director General Kenya Maritime Authority P . O . Box 95076 (80104) Mombasa KENYA Telephone: + 254 041 2318398 + 254 041 2318399 Fax: + 254 041 2318397 Email: nkarigithu@yahoo . co . uk info@maritimeauthority . co . ke karigithu@ikenya . com Ministry of Transport & Communicati ons P . O . Box 52692 Nairobi KENYA Telephone: + 254 020 2729200 Fax: + 254 020 2724553 Email: motc@insightkenya . com peterthuo_2004@yahoo . com Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 526

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 516 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority LATVIA Maritime Administration of Latvia Maritime Safety Department Trij ā d ī bas iela, 5 LV-1048 Riga LATVIA Telephone: + 371 670 62 177 + 371 670 62 142 Fax: + 371 678 60 083 Email: zane . paulovska@lja . lv lja@lja . lv Website: www . lja . lv Classification Societies American Bur eau of Shipping Bureau Veritas Det Norske Veritas Lloyd’s Register of Shipping Russian Maritime Register of Shipping LIBERIA Commissioner/Administration Bureau of Maritime Affairs P . O . Box 10-9042 1000 Monrovia 10 Monrovia LIBERIA T elephone: + 231 227 744/37747/510 201 Fax: + 231 226 069 Email: maritime@liberia . net Testing and certification American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd’s Register of Shipping Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Polski Rejestr Statkow Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping LITHUANIA Implementation Ministry of Transport and Communications Water Transport Department Gedimino Av . 17 01505 Vilnius LITHUANIA Telephone: + 370 5 239 3986 Fax: + 370 5 212 4335 Email: d . krivickiene@transp . lt Inspection Lithuanian Maritime Safety Administration J . Janonio Str . 24 92251 Klaipeda LITHUANIA Telephone: + 370 46 469 662 Fax: + 370 46 469 600 Email: alvydas . nikolajus@msa . lt Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 527

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 517 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority MADAGASCAR Director Agence Portuaire Maritime et Fluviale (APMF) P . O . Box 581 Antananarivo – 101 MADAGASCAR Telephone : + 261 20 222 5860 Telephone/Fax: + 261 20 242 5701 Mobile: + 261 320 229 259 Email: spapmf . dt@mttpat . gov . mg MALAWI Director of Marine Services Marine D epartment Ministry of Transport & Civil Aviation Private Bag A81 Capital City Lilongwe MALAWI Telephone: + 265 1 755 546 + 265 1 752 666 + 265 1 753 531 (direct line) Fax: + 265 1 750 157 + 265 1 758 894 Email: marinedepartment@malawi . net marinesafety@africa-online . net MALAYSIA Director Marine Department Penins ular Malaysia P . O . Box 12 42009 Port Kelang Selangor MALAYSIA Tel ex: MA 39748 Director Marine Department, Sabah P . O . Box 5 87007 Labuan Sabah MALAYSIA Director Marine Department, Sarawak P . O . Box 530 93619 Kuching Sarawak MALAYSIA MARSHALL IS LANDS Office of the Maritime Administrator Technical Services Republic of the Marshall Islands 11495 Commerce Park Drive Reston, Virginia 20191-1506 UNITED STATES Telephone: + 1 703 620 4880 Fax: + 1 703 476 8522 Email: technical@register-iri . com Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 528

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 518 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority MAURITIUS Director of Shipping Ministry of Land Transport, Shipping and Public Safety New Government Centre, 4 Floor Port Louis MAURITIUS Telephone: + 230 201 2115 Mobile: + 230 774 0764 Fax: + 230 211 7699 + 230 216 1612 + 230 201 3417 Email: pseebaluck@mail . gov . mu MEXICO Stowage, segregation, labellin g and documentation of goods Coordinación General de Puertos y Marina Mercante Secretaría de Comunicación y Transportes Boulevard Adolfo López Mateos No . 1990 Col . Los Alpes Tlacopac, Del . Álvaro Obregón, C . P . 01010 México, Distrito Federal MEXICO Telepho ne: + 52 55 57239300 Email: coordgral . cgpmm@sct . gob . mx Coordinador General: Ruiz de Teresa Guille rmo Raúl Receipt and processing of notifications in the event of a package falling overboard Secretaría de Marina Eje 2 Oriente, Tramo Heroica Escuela Naval Militar No . 861 Colonia Los Cipreses, C . P . 04830 México, Distrito Federal MEXICO Telepho ne: + 52 55 56246500 (extension: 6388) Email: ayjemg@semar . gob . mx Jefe del Estado Mayor General de la Armada de Méx ico: Vicealmirante C . G . DEM Joaquín Zetina Angulo Laboratory testing o f packagings containing dangerous goods Entidad Mexicana de Acreditación, A . C . Mariano Escobedo, No . 564, Col . Nueva Anzures, Delegación Miguel Hidalgo C . P . 11590, Ciudad de México MEXICO Telephone: + 52 55 91484300 Email: Maribel . lopez@ema . org . mx Directora Ejecutiva: Mtra . María Isabel López Martínez MONGOLIA Mariti me Administration of Mongolia Division of Ship Registration and Regulation Government Building 11 Sambuu’s street 11 Chingeltei district Ulaanbaatar 211238 MONGOLIA Telephone: 976-51-261490 Telefax: 976-11-310642 Email: info@monmarad . gov . mn operation@mngship . org Website: http://monmarad . gov . mn/ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 529

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 519 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority MONTENEGRO Ministry of Interior and Public Administration of the Republic of Montenegro Department for Contingency Plans and Civil Security REPUBLIC OF MONTENEGRO Telephone: + 382 81 241 590 Fax: + 382 81 246 779 Email: mup . emergency@cg . yu MOROCCO Direction de la Marine Marchande et des Pêches Maritimes Boulevard EI Hansali Casablanca MOROCCO Telephone: + 1 212 2 278 092 + 1 212 2 221 931 Telex: 24613 MARIMAR M 22824 MOZAMBIQUE General Director National Mari time Authority (INAMAR) Av . Marquês do Pombal No . 297 P . O . Box 4317 Maputo MOZAMBIQUE Telephone: + 258 21 320 552 Fax: + 258 21 324 007 Mobile: + 258 82 153 0280 Email: inamar@tvcabo . co . mz Testing and certification of packaging , intermediate bulk containers and large packaging Instituto Nacional de Normalização e Qualidade (INNOQ) Av . 25 de Setembro No . 1179, 2° andar Maputo MOZAMBIQUE Telephone: + 258 21 303 822 + 258 21 303 823 Fax: + 258 21 304 206 Mobile: + 258 823 228 840 Email: innoq@emilmoz . com NAMIBIA Director of Maritime Affairs Mi nistry of Works, Transport and Communications Private Bag 13341 6719 Bell Street Snyman Circle, Windhoek NAMIBIA Telephone: + 264 61 208 8025 + 264 61 208 8026 Direct line: + 264 61 208 8111 Fax: + 264 61 240 024 + 264 61 224 060 Mobile: + 264 811 220 599 Email: mmnangolo@mwtc . gov . na Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 530

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 520 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority NETHERLANDS Ministry of Infrastructure and the Environment P . O . Box 20901 2500 EX The Hague NETHERLANDS Telephone : + 31 70 456 0000 Email: dangerousgoods@minienm . nl For competent authority approvals und er the IMDG Code: Ministry of Infrastructure and the Environment Human Environment and Transport Inspectorate P . O . Box 90653 2509 LR The Hague NETHERLANDS Telephone: + 31 88 489 0000 Fax: + 31 70 456 2413 Email: via www . ivw . nl/english/contact NETHERLANDS ANTILLES Dire ctorate of Shipping and Maritime Affairs Seru Mahuma z/n Curaçao NETHERLANDS ANTILLES (NETHERLANDS) Telephone: + 599 9 839 3700 Fax: + 599 9 868 9964 Email: sina@onenet . an expertise@dsmz . org management@dsmz . org NEW ZEALAND Maritime New Zealand Level 10 1 Gr ey Street Wellington PO Box 25620 Wellington 6146 NEW ZEALAND Telephone: + 64 4 473 0111 Fax: + 64 4 494 1263 Email: enquiries@maritimenz . govt . nz Website: www . maritimenz . govt . nz The authorized organizations which ha ve delegated authority from the Director of Maritime New Zealand for the approval, inspection and testing of all portable tanks, tank containers and freight containers are: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Lloyd’s Register of Shipping NIGERIA Nigerian Maritime Administration and Safety Agency (NIMASA) Marine House 4 Burma Road, Apapa PMB 12861, GPO Marina Lagos NIGERIA Telephone: + 234 587 2214 + 234 580 4800 + 234 580 4809 Fax: + 234 587 1329 Telex: 23891 NAMARING Website: www . nimasa . gov . ng Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 531

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 521 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority NORWAY Norwegian Maritime Authority Smedasundet 50A N-5528 Haugesund NORWAY Telephone: + 47 5274 5000 Fax: + 47 5274 5001 Email: postmottak@sjofartsdir . no Certification of packaging and IBCs DNV G L A/S Veritasveien 1 N-1322 Høvik NORWAY Telephone: + 47 67 57 99 00 Email: moano378@dnvgl . com NET Emballasje-org Produkttesting AS Ble kebakkvegen 45 N-3950 Brevik Norway Telephone: + 47 951 98 187 Email: info@net17025 . com Certification of CSC containers DNG GL A/S Ve ritasveien 1 N-1322 Høvik NORWAY Telephone: + 47 67 57 99 00 Email: moano374@dnvgl . com Lloyd’s Register EMEA P . O . Box 1562 Vika N-0253 Oslo NORWAY Telephone: + 47 2323 9270 Fax: + 47 2323 9271 Email: oslo@lr . org Certification of IMO tanks DNV GL A/S Veritasv eien 1 N-1322 Høvik NORWAY Telephone: + 47 67 57 99 00 Email: moano374@gnvgl . com PAKISTAN Mercantile Marine Department 70/4 T imber Hard N . M . Reclamation Keamari, Post Box No . 4534 Karachi 75620 PAKISTAN Telephone: + 92 21 2851306 + 92 21 2851307 Fax: + 92 21 4547472 (24 h) + 92 21 4547897 Telex: 29822 DGPS PK (24 h) Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 532

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 522 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority PANAMA Autoridad Marítima de Panam á Edificio 5534 Diablo Heights P . O . Box 0816 01548 Panamá PANAMA Telephone: + 507 501 5000 Fax: + 507 501 5007 Email: ampadmon@amp . gob . pa Website: www . amp . gob . pa PAPUA NEW GUINEA First Assistant Secretary De partment of Transport Division of Marine P . O . Box 457 Konedobu PAPUA NEW GUINEA Telephone: + 675 211866 Telex: 22203 PERU Dirección General de Capitanías y G uardacostas (DICAPI) Jirón Constitución No . 150 Callao PERU Telephone: + 51 12099300 Anexo: 6757/6792 Email: jefemercanciaspeligrosas@dicapi . mil . pe PHILIPPINES Philippine Ports Authority Po rt of Manila Safety Staff P . O . Box 193 Port Area Manila 2803 PHILIPPINES Tele phone: + 63 2473441 to 49 POLAND Ministry of Transport, Construction and Maritime Economy Department of Sea Transport and Shipping Safety 00-928 Warsaw ul . Cha ł ubi ń skiego 4/6 POLAND Telephone: + 48 22 630 1639 Fax: + 48 22 630 1497 Packaging, Testing and Cert ification Institute Centralny O ś rodek Badawczo-Rozwojowy Opakowa ń ul Konstanci ń ska 11 02-942 Warszawa POLAND Telephone: + 48 22 42 2011 Fax: + 48 22 42 2303 Email: info@cobro . org . pl Packagings in conformity with the IMDG Co de will be marked “PL” Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 533

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 523 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority Classification societies For CSC Containers Polski Rejestr Statków (Polish Register of Shipping) Al . Gen . J . Hallera 126 80-416 Gda ń sk POLAND Telephone: + 48 58 751 1100 + 48 58 751 1204 Fax: + 48 58 346 0392 Email: mailbox@prs . pl PORTUGAL Direção-Geral de Recursos Natu rais, Segurança e Serviços Marítimos (DGRM) Avenida Brasília Lisboa 1449-030 PORTUGAL Telephone: + 351 213 035 700 Telefax: + 351 213 035 702 Email: dgrm@dgrm . mm . gov . pt REPUBLIC OF KOREA Marine Industry and Tec hnology Division Marine Safety Bureau Ministry of Ocean and Fisheries (MOF) Government Complex Sejong, 5-Dong, 94, Dasom 2-Ro, Sejong-City, 339-012, REPUBLIC OF KOREA Telephone: + 82 44 200 5836 Fax: + 82 44 200 5849 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 534

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 524 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority RUSSIAN FEDERATION * Department of State Policy for Maritime and River Transport Ministry of Transport of the Russian Federation Rozhdestvenka Street, 1, bldg . 1 Moscow 109012 RUSSIAN FEDERATION Telep hone: + 7 499 495 05 50 Fax: + 7 499 495 00 00 (ext . 0559) Email: rusma@mintrans . ru Organizations authorized for approval, acceptance and all consequential activities related to IMO Type tanks, CSC containers, Intermediate Bulk Containers (IBCs) and packaging: Russian Maritime Register of Shipping 8, Dvortsovaya Naberezhnaya, 8 Saint-Petersburg 191186 RUSSIAN FEDERATION Telephone: + 7 812 380 20 72 Fax: + 7 812 314 10 87 Email: pobox@rs-class . org Central Marine Research and Design In stitute (CNIIMF) 6, Kavalergardskaya Street, Saint Petersburg, 191015 RUSSIAN FEDERATION Telephone: + 7 812 275 89 45 Email: cniimf@cniimf . ru SAINT KITTS AND NEVIS Department of Maritime A ffairs Director of Maritime Affairs Ministry of Transport P . O . Box 186 Needsmust ST . KITTS, W . I . Telephone: + 869 466 7032 + 869 466 4846 Fax: + 869 465 0604 + 869 465 9475 Email: Maritimeaffairs@yahoo . com St . Kitts and Nevis International Registr ar of Shipping and Seamen West Wing, York House 48-50 Western Road Romford RM1 3LP UNITED KINGDOM Telephone: + 44 1708 380 400 Fax: + 44 1708 380 401 Email: mail@stkittsregistry . net SAO TOME AND PRINCIPE The Minister Ministry of Pu blic Works, Infrastructure & Land Planning C . P . 171 SAO TOME AND PRINCIPE Telephone: + 239 223 203 + 239 226 368 Fax: + 239 222 824 SAUDI ARABIA Port Authority Saudi Ar abia Civil Defence Riyadh SAUDI ARABIA Telephone: + 966 1 464 9477 * Except for governmental explosives . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 535

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 525 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority SEYCHELLES Director General Seychelles Maritime Safety Administration P . O . Box 912 Victoria, Mahe SEYCHELLES Telephone: + 248 224 866 Telefax: + 248 224 829 Email: dg@msa . sc SIERRA LEONE The Executive Director Sier ra Leone Maritime Administration Maritime House Government Wharf Ferry Terminal P . O . Box 313 Freetown SIERRA LEONE Telephone: + 232 22 221 211 Fax: + 232 22 221 215 Email: slma@sierratel . sl slmaoffice@yahoo . com SINGAPORE Maritime and Port Authority of Si ngapore Shipping Division 21st Storey PSA Building 460 Alexandra Road Singapore 119963 Telephone: + 65 375 1931 + 65 375 6223 + 65 375 1600 Fax: + 65 375 6231 Email: shipping@mpa . gov . sg SLOVENIA Ministry of Infrastructure and Spat ial Planning Slovenian Maritime Administration Ukmarjev trg 2 6000 Koper SLOVENIA Telephone: + 386 566 32 100 + 386 566 32 106 Fax: + 386 566 32 102 Email: ursp . box@gov . si Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 536

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 526 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority SOUTH AFRICA South African Maritime Safety Authority P . O . Box 13186 Hatfield 0028 Pretoria SOUTH AFRICA T elephone: + 27 12 342 3049 Fax: + 27 12 342 3160 South African Maritime Safety A uthority Hatfield Gardens, Block E (Ground Floor) Corner Arcadia and Grosvenor Street Hatfield 0083 Pretoria SOUTH AFRICA Head Office Administration Chief Director Chief Directorate – Shipping Department of Transport Private Bag X193 0001 Pretoria SOUTH AFRICA Telephone: + 27 12 290 2904 Fax: + 27 12 323 7009 Durban, East London, Port Eliza beth and Richards Bay Chief Ship Surveyor Eastern Zone Department of Transport Marine Division Private Bag X54309 Durban SOUTH AFRICA Telephone: + 27 12 3071501 Fax: + 27 23 3064983 Cape Town, Saldanha Bay and Moss el Bay Chief Ship Surveyor Western Zone Department of Transport Marine Division Private Bag X7025 8012 Roggebaai SOUTH AFRICA Telephone: + 2721 216 170 Fax: + 2721 419 0730 SPAIN Dirección General de la Mar ina Mercante Subdirección General de Seguridad Marítima y Contaminación c/Ruiz de Alarcón, 1 28071 Madrid SPAIN Telephone: + 34 91 597 92 69 + 34 91 597 92 70 Fax: + 34 91 597 92 87 Email: mercancias . peligrosas@fomento . es pmreal@fomento . es Subdirección General de Calidad y Seguri dad Industrial Ministerio de Industria, Turismo y Comercio c/Paseo de la Castellana, 160 28071 Madrid SPAIN Telephone: + 34 91 349 43 03 Fax: + 34 91 349 43 00 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 537

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 527 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority SUDAN Director Maritime Administration Directorate Ministry of Transport Port Sudan P . O . Box 531 SUDAN Telephone: + 249 311 825 660 + 249 012 361 766 Fax: + 249 311 831 276 + 249 183 774 215 Email: smaco22@yahoo . com/info@smacosd . com SWEDEN Swedish Transport Agency Civil Aviation and Maritime Department Box 653 SE-601 78 Norrköping SWEDEN Telephone: + 46 771 503 503 Fax: + 46 11 239 934 Email: sjofart@transportstyrelsen . se Website: www . transportstyrelsen . se SP, Technical Research Institute of Swed en Box 857 SE-501 15 Borås SWEDEN Telephone: + 46 10 516 5000 Fax: + 46 33 135 520 Email: info@sp . se Website: www . sp . se SWITZERLAND Office suisse de la navigation maritime Elisabethenstrasse 33 4010 Basel SWITZERLAND Telephone: + 41 61 270 91 20 Fax: + 41 61 270 91 29 Email: dv-ssa@eda . admin . ch TANZANIA (UNITED REPUBLIC OF) Director Gen eral Surface & Marine Transport Regulatory Authority (SUMATRA) P . O . Box 3093 Dar es Salaam UNITED REPUBLIC OF TAN ZANIA Telephone: + 255 22 213 5081 Mobile: + 255 744 781 865 Fax: + 255 22 211 6697 Email: dg@sumatra . or . tz Ministry of Infrastructure Developmen t P . O . Box 9144 Dar es Salaam UNITED REPUBLIC OF TAN ZANIA Telephone: + 255 22 212 2268 Fax: + 255 22 211 2751 + 255 22 212 2079 Mobile: + 254 748 7404 + 254 748 5404 Email: brufunjo@yahoo . com Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 538

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 528 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority THAILAND Ministry of Transport and Communications Ratchadamnoen-Nok Avenue Bangkok 10100 THAILAND Telephone: + 66 2 281 3422 Fax: + 66 2 280 1714 Telex: 70000 MINOCOM TH TUNISIA Ministère du Transpor t Direction générale de la Marine Marchande Avenue 7 novembre (près de l’aéroport) 2035 Tunis B . P . 179 Tunis Cedex TUNISIA Telephone: + 216 71 806 362 Fax: + 216 71 806 413 TURKEY Ministry of Transport, Mar itime Affairs and Communications Directorate General for Regulation of Dangerous Goods and Combined Transport GMK Bulvari No: 128A/ 7 Maltepe/Ankara 06570 TURKEY Telephone: + 90 312 232 38 50 + 90 312 232 12 49 Fax: + 90 312 231 51 89 Email: dangerousgoods@udhb . gov . tr Packing, Testing and Certification Turk ish Standards Institution (TSE) 100 . Yıl Bulvarı No:99 Kat:2 Ostim/Ankara TURKEY T elephone: + 90 312 592 50 00-5039 Fax: + 90 312 592 50 05 Email: oalper@tse . org . tr Türk Loydu Vakfı İ ktisadi İş letmesi Ter saneler Caddesi 26, 34944 TURKEY Telephone: + 90 216 581 37 00 Telefax: + 90 216 581 38 00 Email: info@turkloydu . org Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 539

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 529 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority UKRAINE The Ministry of Infrastructure of Ukraine The Division for Safety on Transport and Technical Regulation Peremohy Ave . , 14, Kiev 01135 UKRAINE The authorized person : Ms . Salamatnikova Diana, Chief Specialis t of safety and dangerous goods, environmental safety and insurance policies Telephone: + 38 044 351 41 93 Email: sd@mtu . gov . ua Specialized organization regarding tr ain cargo information for its safe maritime transportation according to item 1: RPE “MORSERVICE” LTD . Preobrazhenska Str . 30, office 2, Odessa 65082 UKRAINE The authori zed person: Mrs . Afanasyeva Yevgenia, General Directo r Telephone: + 38 048 784 14 93 Email: morservice@te . net . ua Specialized organization regarding t rain cargo information for its safe maritime transportation according to item 2: carrying out testing of packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings: State Enterprise “Scientific Research and Design Institute of the Maritime Transport of Ukraine” Lanzheronivska Str . 15A, Odessa 65026 UKRAINE The authorized per son: Mr . Savinkov Sergii, Director Telephone: + 38 048 734 87 28 Email: unii@ukr . net UNITED ARAB EMIRATES National Transpor t Authority Marine Affairs Department P . O . Box 900 Abu Dhabi UNITED ARAB EMIRATES Telepho ne: + 971 2 4182 124 Fax: + 971 2 4491 500 Email: marine@nta . gov . ae UNITED KINGDOM Maritime and Coastguard Age ncy Bay 2/21 Spring Place 105 Commercial Road Southampton SO15 1EG UNITED KINGDOM Telephone: + 44 23 8032 9100 Fax: + 44 23 8032 9204 Email: dangerous . goods@mcga . gov . uk UNITED KINGDOM (Isle of Man) Department of Economic Development Mr David Morter Isle of Man Ship Registry St Georges Court Upper Church Street Douglas IM1 1EE ISLE OF MAN (United Kingdom) Telephone: + 44 1624 688500 Email: marine . survey@gov . im Website: http://www . iomshipregistry . com Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 540

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations 530 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority UNITED STATES U . S . Department of Transportation Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration Office of International Standards East Building /PHH-70 1200 New Jersey Ave S . E . Washington, D . C . 20590 UNITED STATES Telephone: + 1 202 366 0656 Email: infocntr@dot . gov Commandant (CG-ENG-5) U . S . Coast Guard, Stop 7509 Attn: Chief, Hazardous Materials Division 2703 Martin Luther King Jr . Ave . SE Washington, D . C . 20593-7509 UNITED STATES Telephone: + 1 202 372 1420 Email: hazmatstandards@uscg . mil URUGUAY Perfectura Nacional Naval Dire cción Registral y de Marina Mercante Edificio Aduana 1er . Piso CP 11 . 000 Montevideo URUGUAY Telephone: + 5982 9157913 + 5982 9164914 Fax: + 5982 9164914 Email: dirme01@armada . mil . uy dirme_secretario@armada . mil . uy delea@armada . mil . uy VANUATU Deputy Commissioner of Maritim e Affairs c/o Vanuatu Maritime Services Limited 39 Broadway, Suite 2020 New York, New York 10006 UNITED STATES Telephone: + 212 425 9600 Fax: + 212 425 9652 Email: email@vanuatuships . com Website: www . vanuatuships . com VENEZUELA (BOLIVARIAN REPUBLIC OF) Instit uto Nacional de los Espacios Acuáticos Avenida Orinoco entre calles Perijá y Mucuchies Edificio INEA, Piso 6, Las Mercedes Caracas 1060 BOLIVARIAN REPUBLIC OF VENEZUELA Telephone: + 58 212 909 1430 + 58 212 909 1450 + 58 212 909 1587 Fax: + 58 212 909 1461 + 58 212 909 1573 Email: asuntos_internacionales@inea . gob . ve Website: www . inea . gob . ve Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 541

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates 531 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) 7 Country Contact information for the main designated national competent authority VIET NAM Shipping and Maritime Services Department Viet Nam Maritime Administration No . 8 Pham Hung Street Hanoi VIET NAM Telephone: + 84 4 3768 3065 Fax: + 84 4 3768 3058 Email: dichvuvantai@vinamarine . gov . vn Website: www . vinamarine . gov . vn YEMEN Executive Chairman Maritime Affair s Authority P . O . Box 19395 Sana’a REPUBLIC OF YEMEN Telephone: + 967 1 414 412 + 967 1 419 914 + 967 1 423 005 Fax: + 967 1 414 645 Email: MAA-Headoffice@y . net . ye Website: www . MAA . gov . ye ZAMBIA Department of Maritime & Inland Water ways Ministry of Communications & Transport P . O . Box 50346 Fairley Road Lusaka ZAMBIA Telephone: + 260 1 250 716 + 260 1 251 444 + 260 1 251 022 Fax: + 260 1 253 165 + 260 1 251 795 Email: dmiw@zamtel . zm Associate Member HONG KONG, CHINA The Director of M arine Marine Department GPO Box 4155 HONG KONG, CHINA Telephone: + 852 2852 3085 Fax: + 852 2815 8596 Email: pfdg@mardep . gov . hk Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 542

A PPENDICES Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 778

Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 779

APPENDIX A 235 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) A ppendix A List of generic and N.O.S. proper shipping names Substances or articles not mentioned specifically by name in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3 . 2 shall be classified in acc ordance with 3 . 1 . 1 . 2 . Thus the name in the Dange rous Goods List which most appropriately describes the substance or article shall be used as the proper shipping name . The main generic entri es and all the N . O . S . entries given in the Dan gerous Goods List are listed below . This proper shipping n ame shall be supplemented by the technical name when special provision 274 or 318 has been assigned to the entry in column 6 of the Dangerous Goods List . For marine pollutant s, see also 3 . 1 . 2 . 9 . In this list, general and N . O . S . names are grouped acco rding to their hazard class or division . Within each hazard cla ss or division, the names have been placed into three groups as follows: – specific entries cover ing a group of substances or articles of a particular chemical or technical nature; – pesticide entries, fo r class 3 and class 6 . 1; – general entries cover ing a group of substances or articles having one or more general dangerous properties . THE MOST SPECIFIC APPLI CABLE NAME SHALL ALWAYS BE USED . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 780

Appendices 236 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name 1 0190 CLASS 1 SAMPLES, EXPLOSIVE, other than initiating explosive 1 . 1A 0473 Division 1.1 SUBSTA NCES, EXPLOSIVE, N . O . S . 1 . 1B 0461 COMPONENTS, EXPLOS IVE TRAIN, N . O . S . 1 . 1C 0462 ARTICLES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . 1 . 1C 0474 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . 1 . 1C 0497 PROPELLANT, LIQUI D 1 . 1C 0498 PROPELLANT, SOL ID 1 . 1D 0463 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . 1 . 1D 0475 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . 1 . 1E 0464 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . 1 . 1F 0465 ARTICLES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . 1 . 1G 0476 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . 1 . 1L 0354 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . 1 . 1L 0357 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . Division 1.2 1 . 2B 0382 COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIV E TRAIN, N . O . S . 1 . 2C 0466 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . 1 . 2D 0467 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . 1 . 2E 0468 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . 1 . 2F 0469 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . 1 . 2K 6 . 1 0020 AMMUNITION, TOXIC w ith burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 1 . 2L 4 . 3 0248 CONTRIVANCES, WATER -ACTIVATED with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 1 . 2L 0355 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE , N . O . S . 1 . 2L 0358 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . Division 1.3 1 . 3C 0132 DEFLAGRATING META L SALTS OF AROMATIC NITRO-DERIVATIVES, N . O . S . 1 . 3C 0470 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . 1 . 3C 0477 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . 1 . 3C 0495 PROPELLANT, LIQUID 1 . 3C 0499 PROPELLANT, SOLI D 1 . 3G 0478 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . 1 . 3K 6 . 1 0021 AMMUNITION, TOXIC w ith burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 1 . 3L 4 . 3 0249 CONTRIVANCES, WATER -ACTIVATED with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 1 . 3L 0356 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . 1 . 3L 0359 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . Division 1.4 1 . 4B 0350 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . 1 . 4B 0383 COMPONENTS, EXPLOS IVE TRAIN, N . O . S . 1 . 4C 0351 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . 1 . 4C 0479 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . 1 . 4C 0501 PROPELLANT, SOLI D 1 . 4D 0352 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . 1 . 4D 0480 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . 1 . 4E 0471 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . 1 . 4F 0472 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . 1 . 4G 0353 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . 1 . 4G 0485 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . 1 . 4S 0349 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . 1 . 4S 0384 COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N . O . S . 1 . 4S 0481 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . Division 1.5 1 . 5D 0482 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, VERY INSENSITIVE (SUBSTANCES, EVI), N . O . S . Division 1.6 1 . 6N 0486 ARTICLES, EXPLOS IVE, EXTREMELY INSENSITIVE (ARTICLES, EEI) Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 781

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. proper shipping names 237 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 2 Class 2.1 Specific entries 2 . 1 1964 HYDROCARBON GAS MIX TURE, COMPRESSED, N . O . S . 2 . 1 1965 HYDROCARBON GAS MIX TURE, LIQUEFIED, N . O . S . 2 . 1 3354 INSECTICIDE GAS, FL AMMABLE, N . O . S . General entries 2 . 1 1954 COMPRESSED GAS, F LAMMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 1 3161 LIQUEFIED GAS, FLA MMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 1 3167 GAS SAMPLE, NON-PR ESSURIZED, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . , not refrigerated liqu id 2 . 1 3312 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 1 3501 CHEMICAL UNDER PRES SURE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 1 3510 ADSORBED GAS, FLA MMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 1 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3537 ARTICLES CONTAINING FLAMMABLE GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 1 6 . 1 3504 CHEMICAL UNDER PRES SURE, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . 2 . 1 8 3505 CHEMICAL UNDER PRES SURE, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . Class 2.2 Specific entries 2 . 2 1078 REFRIGERANT GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 2 1968 INSECTICIDE GAS, N . O . S . General entries 2 . 2 1956 COMPRESSED GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 2 3163 LIQUEFIED GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 2 3158 GAS, REFRIGERATED L IQUID, N . O . S . 2 . 2 3500 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESS URE, N . O . S . 2 . 2 3511 ADSORBED GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 2 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3538 ARTICLES CONTAINING N ON-FLAMMABLE, NON-TOXIC GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 2 5 . 1 3156 COMPRESSED GAS, OX IDIZING, N . O . S . 2 . 2 5 . 1 3157 LIQUEFIED GAS, OXI DIZING, N . O . S . 2 . 2 5 . 1 3311 GAS, REFRIGERATE D LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . 2 . 2 5 . 1 3513 ADSORBED GAS, OXID IZING, N . O . S . 2 . 2 6 . 1 3502 CHEMICAL UNDER PRES SURE, TOXIC, N . O . S . 2 . 2 8 3503 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESS URE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . Class 2.3 Specific entries 2 . 3 1967 INSECTICIDE GAS, TO XIC, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 3355 INSECTICIDE GAS, TO XIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . General entries 2 . 3 1955 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXI C, N . O . S . 2 . 3 3162 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXI C, N . O . S . 2 . 3 3169 GAS SAMPLE, NON-PRE SSURIZED, TOXIC, N . O . S . , not refrigerated liqu id 2 . 3 3512 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC , N . O . S . 2 . 3 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3539 ARTICLES CONTAINI NG TOXIC GAS, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 1953 COMPRESSED GAS, TO XIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 3160 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOX IC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 3168 GAS SAMPLE, NON-PR ESSURIZED, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . , not refrigerated liquid 2 . 3 2 . 1 3514 ADSORBED GAS, TOXI C, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 + 8 3305 COMPRESSED GA S, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 + 8 3309 LIQUEFIED GAS , TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 2 . 1 + 8 3517 ADSORBED GAS, T OXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 5 . 1 3303 COMPRESSED GAS, TO XIC, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . 2 . 3 5 . 1 3307 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOX IC, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . 2 . 3 5 . 1 3515 ADSORBED GAS, TOXI C, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . 2 . 3 5 . 1 + 8 3306 COMPRESSED GAS , TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 782

Appendices 238 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 2 (continued ) Class 2.3 (continued) 2 . 3 5 . 1 + 8 3310 LIQUEFIED GAS, T OXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 5 . 1 + 8 3518 ADSORBED GAS, TO XIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 8 3304 COMPRESSED GAS, TOX IC, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 8 3308 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC , CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 2 . 3 8 3516 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC , CORROSIVE, N . O . S . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 783

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. proper shipping names 239 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 3 Specific entries 3 1224 KETONES, LIQUID, N . O . S . 3 1268 PETROLEUM DISTILL ATES, N . O . S . or PETROLEUM PRODUCT S, N . O . S . 3 1987 ALCOHOLS, N . O . S . 3 1989 ALDEHYDES, N . O . S . 3 2319 TERPENE HYDROCARBONS, N . O . S . 3 3271 ETHERS, N . O . S . 3 3272 ESTERS, N . O . S . 3 3295 HYDROCARBONS, LIQU ID, N . O . S . 3 3336 MERCAPTANS, LIQUID, F LAMMABLE, N . O . S . or MERCAPTAN MIXTURE, L IQUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 3 3343 NITROGLYCERIN MIX TURE, DESENSITIZED, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with not more than 30% nit roglycerin, by mass 3 3357 NITROGLYCERIN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, LIQUID, N . O . S . with not more than 30% nit roglycerin, by mass 3 3379 DESENSITIZED EXPLOSIVE, LIQUID, N . O . S . 3 6 . 1 1228 MERCAPTANS, LIQUI D, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . or MERCAPTAN MIXTURE, L IQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . 3 6 . 1 1986 ALCOHOLS, FLAMMA BLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . 3 6 . 1 1988 ALDEHYDES, FLAMMA BLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . 3 6 . 1 2478 ISOCYANATES, FLA MMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . or ISOCYANATE SOLUTI ON, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . 3 6 . 1 3248 MEDICINE, LIQUID , FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . 3 6 . 1 3273 NITRILES, FLAMMAB LE, TOXIC, N . O . S . 3 8 2733 AMINES, FLAMMABLE , CORROSIVE, N . O . S . or POLYAMINES, FLAMM ABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 3 8 2985 CHLOROSILANES, FLAMM ABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 3 8 3274 ALCOHOLATES SOLUTION, N . O . S . in alcohol Pesticides 3 6 . 1 2758 CARBAMATE PESTICI DE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 2760 ARSENICAL PESTICI DE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 2762 ORGANOCHLORINE P ESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 2764 TRIAZINE PESTICI DE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 2772 THIOCARBAMATE PES TICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 2776 COPPER BASED PESTI CIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 2778 MERCURY BASED PEST ICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 2780 SUBSTITUTED NITR OPHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 2782 BIPYRIDILIUM PES TICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 2784 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 2787 ORGANOTIN PESTICI DE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 3021 PESTICIDE, LIQUID , FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 3024 COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 3346 PHENOXYACETIC AC ID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C 3 6 . 1 3350 PYRETHROID PESTIC IDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint < 23 ° C General entries 3 1993 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N . O . S . 3 3256 ELEVATED TEMPERAT URE LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with flashpoint above 60 ° C , at or above its flashpoint 3 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3540 ARTICLES CONTAIN ING FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N . O . S . 3 6 . 1 1992 FLAMMABLE LIQUID , TOXIC, N . O . S . 3 6 . 1 + 8 3286 FLAMMABLE LIQ UID, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 3 8 2924 FLAMMABLE LIQUID , CORROSIVE, N . O . S . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 784

Appendices 240 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 4 Class 4.1 Specific entries 4 . 1 1353 FIBRES or FABRICS IM PREGNATED WITH WEAKLY NITRATED NITROCELLULOSE, N . O . S . 4 . 1 3089 METAL POWDER, FLAMM ABLE, N . O . S . 4 . 1 3182 METAL HYDRIDES, FLA MMABLE, N . O . S . 4 . 1 3221 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE B 4 . 1 3222 SELF-REACTIVE SOLI D TYPE B 4 . 1 3223 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE C 4 . 1 3224 SELF-REACTIVE SO LID TYPE C 4 . 1 3225 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE D 4 . 1 3226 SELF-REACTIVE SO LID TYPE D 4 . 1 3227 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE E 4 . 1 3228 SELF-REACTIVE SOL ID TYPE E 4 . 1 3229 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE F 4 . 1 3230 SELF-REACTIVE SOL ID TYPE F 4 . 1 3231 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 . 1 3232 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TY PE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 . 1 3233 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 . 1 3234 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID T YPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 . 1 3235 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 . 1 3236 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID T YPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 . 1 3237 SELF-REACTIVE LI QUID TYPE E, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 . 1 3238 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID T YPE E, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 . 1 3239 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 . 1 3240 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4 . 1 3319 NITROGLYCERIN MIX TURE, DESENSITIZED, SOLID, N . O . S . with more than 2% but not mor e than 10% nitroglycerin, by mass 4 . 1 3344 PENTAERYTHRITE TETRAN ITRATE (PENTAERYTHRITOL TETRANITRATE; PETN) MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, SOLID, N . O . S . with more than 10% but not mo re than 20% PETN, by mass 4 . 1 3380 DESENSITIZED EXPL OSIVE, SOLID, N . O . S . 4 . 1 3531 POLYMERIZING SUBSTA NCE, SOLID, STABILIZED, N . O . S . 4 . 1 3532 POLYMERIZING SUBS TANCE, LIQUID, STABILIZED, N . O . S . 4 . 1 3533 POLYMERIZING SUBST ANCE, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED, N . O . S . 4 . 1 3534 POLYMERIZING SUBST ANCE, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED, N . O . S . General entries 4 . 1 1325 FLAMMABLE SOLID, OR GANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 1 3175 SOLIDS CONTAINING F LAMMABLE LIQUID, N . O . S . 4 . 1 3176 FLAMMABLE SOLID, OR GANIC, MOLTEN, N . O . S . 4 . 1 3178 FLAMMABLE SOLID, IN ORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 1 3181 METAL SALTS OF ORGANI C COMPOUNDS, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 4 . 1 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3541 ARTICLES CONTAININ G FLAMMABLE SOLID, N . O . S . 4 . 1 5 . 1 3097 FLAMMABLE SOLID, OX IDIZING, N . O . S . 4 . 1 6 . 1 2926 FLAMMABLE SOLID, T OXIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 1 6 . 1 3179 FLAMMABLE SOLID, TO XIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 1 8 2925 FLAMMABLE SOLID, C ORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 1 8 3180 FLAMMABLE SOLID, C ORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . Class 4.2 Specific entries 4 . 2 1373 FIBRES or FABRICS, ANI MAL or VEGETABLE or SYNTHETIC, N . O . S . with oil 4 . 2 1378 METAL CATALYST, WETTE D with a visible excess of liquid 4 . 2 1383 PYROPHORIC METAL, N . O . S . or PYROPHORIC ALLOY, N . O . S . 4 . 2 2006 PLASTICS, NITROCELLUL OSE-BASED, SELF-HEATING, N . O . S . 4 . 2 2881 METAL CATALYST, DRY 4 . 2 3189 METAL POWDER, SELF-H EATING, N . O . S . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 785

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. proper shipping names 241 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 4 (continued) Class 4.2 (continued) Specific entries (continued) 4 . 2 3205 ALKALINE EARTH METAL AL COHOLATES, N . O . S . 4 . 2 3313 ORGANIC PIGMENTS, SE LF-HEATING 4 . 2 3342 XANTHATES 4 . 2 3391 ORGANOMETALLIC SU BSTANCE, SOLID, PYROPHORIC 4 . 2 3392 ORGANOMETALLIC SUB STANCE, LIQUID, PYROPHORIC 4 . 2 3400 ORGANOMETALLIC S UBSTANCE, SOLID, SELF-HEATING 4 . 2 4 . 3 3393 ORGANOMETALLIC SU BSTANCE, SOLID, PYROPHORIC, WATER-REACTIVE 4 . 2 4 . 3 3394 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBS TANCE, LIQUID, PYROPHORIC, WATER-REACTIVE 4 . 2 8 3206 ALKALI METAL ALCOHO LATES, SELF-HEATING, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . General entries 4 . 2 2845 PYROPHORIC LIQUID, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 2846 PYROPHORIC SOLID, O RGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 3088 SELF-HEATING SOLI D, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 3183 SELF-HEATING LIQUI D, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 3186 SELF-HEATING LIQUI D, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 3190 SELF-HEATING SOLI D, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 3194 PYROPHORIC LIQUID, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 3200 PYROPHORIC SOLID, I NORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3542 ARTICLES CONTAINING A SUBSTANCE LIABLE TO SPONTANEOUS COMBUSTION, N . O . S . 4 . 2 5 . 1 3127 SELF-HEATING SOL ID, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . 4 . 2 6 . 1 3128 SELF-HEATING SOL ID, TOXIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 6 . 1 3184 SELF-HEATING LIQU ID, TOXIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 6 . 1 3187 SELF-HEATING LIQU ID, TOXIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 6 . 1 3191 SELF-HEATING SOL ID, TOXIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 8 3126 SELF-HEATING SOLID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 8 3185 SELF-HEATING LIQUI D, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 8 3188 SELF-HEATING LIQUI D, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 4 . 2 8 3192 SELF-HEATING SOLID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . Class 4.3 Specific entries 4 . 3 1389 ALKALI METAL AMALGAM, LIQUID 4 . 3 1390 ALKALI METAL AMIDES 4 . 3 1391 ALKALI METAL DISPERS ION or ALKALINE EARTH METAL DISPERSION 4 . 3 1392 ALKALINE EARTH METAL A MALGAM, LIQUID 4 . 3 1393 ALKALINE EARTH METAL AL LOY, N . O . S . 4 . 3 1409 METAL HYDRIDES, WAT ER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . 4 . 3 1421 ALKALI METAL ALLOY, L IQUID, N . O . S . 4 . 3 3208 METALLIC SUBSTANC E, WATER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . 4 . 3 3395 ORGANOMETALLIC S UBSTANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE 4 . 3 3398 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBS TANCE, LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE 4 . 3 3401 ALKALI METAL AMALGAM, SOLID 4 . 3 3402 ALKALINE EARTH METAL AMALGAM, SOLID 4 . 3 3 3399 ORGANOMETALLIC SU BSTANCE, LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE 4 . 3 3 3482 ALKALI METAL DISPER SION, FLAMMABLE or ALKALINE EARTH METAL DISPERSION, FLAMMABLE 4 . 3 3 + 8 2988 CHLOROSILANES, WATER -REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 4 . 3 4 . 1 3396 ORGANOMETALLIC S UBSTANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE 4 . 3 4 . 2 3209 METALLIC SUBSTANC E, WATER-REACTIVE, SELF-HEATING, N . O . S . 4 . 3 4 . 2 3397 ORGANOMETALLIC SU BSTANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE, SELF-HEATING General entries 4 . 3 3148 WATER-REACTIVE L IQUID, N . O . S . 4 . 3 2813 WATER-REACTIVE SOL ID, N . O . S . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 786

Appendices 242 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 4 (continued ) Class 4.3 (continued) 4 . 3 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3543 ARTICLES CONTAININ G A SUBSTANCE WHICH IN CONTACT WITH WATER EMITS FLAMMABLE GASES, N . O . S . 4 . 3 4 . 1 3132 WATER-REACTIVE SO LID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 4 . 3 4 . 2 3135 WATER-REACTIVE SOLI D, SELF-HEATING, N . O . S . 4 . 3 5 . 1 3133 WATER-REACTIVE SOL ID, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . 4 . 3 6 . 1 3130 WATER-REACTIVE L IQUID, TOXIC, N . O . S . 4 . 3 6 . 1 3134 WATER-REACTIVE SO LID, TOXIC, N . O . S . 4 . 3 8 3129 WATER-REACTIVE LIQ UID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 4 . 3 8 3131 WATER-REACTIVE SOLID , CORROSIVE, N . O . S . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 787

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. proper shipping names 243 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 5 Class 5.1 Specific entries 5 . 1 1450 BROMATES, INORG ANIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 1461 CHLORATES, INORG ANIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 1462 CHLORITES, INORG ANIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 1477 NITRATES, INORGA NIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 1481 PERCHLORATES, IN ORGANIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 1482 PERMANGANATES, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 1483 PEROXIDES, INOR GANIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 2627 NITRITES, INORGA NIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 3210 CHLORATES, INORG ANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . 5 . 1 3211 PERCHLORATES, IN ORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . 5 . 1 3212 HYPOCHLORITES, I NORGANIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 3213 BROMATES, INORG ANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . 5 . 1 3214 PERMANGANATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . 5 . 1 3215 PERSULPHATES, IN ORGANIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 3216 PERSULPHATES, IN ORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . 5 . 1 3218 NITRATES, INORGA NIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . 5 . 1 3219 NITRITES, INORGA NIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . General entries 5 . 1 1479 OXIDIZING SOLID, N . O . S . 5 . 1 3139 OXIDIZING LIQUID , N . O . S . 5 . 1 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3544 ARTICLES CONTAININ G OXIDIZING SUBSTANCE, N . O . S . 5 . 1 4 . 1 3137 OXIDIZING SOLID, F LAMMABLE, N . O . S . 5 . 1 4 . 2 3100 OXIDIZING SOLID, SE LF-HEATING, N . O . S . 5 . 1 4 . 3 3121 OXIDIZING SOLID, WA TER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . 5 . 1 6 . 1 3087 OXIDIZING SOLID, T OXIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 6 . 1 3099 OXIDIZING LIQUID , TOXIC, N . O . S . 5 . 1 8 3085 OXIDIZING SOLID, COR ROSIVE, N . O . S . 5 . 1 8 3098 OXIDIZING LIQUID , CORROSIVE, N . O . S . Class 5.2 Specific entries 5 . 2 3101 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE B, LIQUID 5 . 2 3102 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE B, SOLID 5 . 2 3103 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE C, LIQUID 5 . 2 3104 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE C, SOLID 5 . 2 3105 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE D, LIQUID 5 . 2 3106 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE D, SOLID 5 . 2 3107 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE E, LIQUID 5 . 2 3108 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE E, SOLID 5 . 2 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE F, LIQUID 5 . 2 3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE F, SOLID 5 . 2 3111 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E B, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 3112 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE B, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 3113 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE C, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 3114 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE C, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 3115 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE D, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 3116 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE D, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 3117 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE E, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 3118 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE E, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE F, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5 . 2 3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE F, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED General entries 5 . 2 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3545 ARTICLES CONTAININ G ORGANIC PEROXIDE, N . O . S . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 788

Appendices 244 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 6 Class 6.1 Specific entries 6 . 1 1544 ALKALOIDS, SOLID, N . O . S . or ALKALOID SALTS, SOLI D, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1549 ANTIMONY COMPOUND, IN ORGANIC, SOLID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1556 ARSENIC COMPOUND, LIQUID, N . O . S . inorganic, including: Ars enates, n . o . s . , Arsenites, n . o . s . , and Arsenic sulphides, n . o . s . 6 . 1 1557 ARSENIC COMPOUND, SOLID, N . O . S . inorganic, including: Ars enates, n . o . s . , Arsenites, n . o . s . , and Arsenic sulphides, n . o . s . 6 . 1 1564 BARIUM COMPOUND, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1566 BERYLLIUM COMPOUND, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1583 CHLOROPICRIN MIXTUR E, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1588 CYANIDES, INORGANIC , SOLID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1601 DISINFECTANT, SOLI D, TOXIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1602 DYE, LIQUID, TOXIC, N . O . S . or DYE INTERMEDIATE, LI QUID, TOXIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1655 NICOTINE COMPOUND, S OLID, N . O . S . or NICOTINE PREPARATION, SOLID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1693 TEAR GAS SUBSTANCE, L IQUID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1707 THALLIUM COMPOUND, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1851 MEDICINE, LIQUID, T OXIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 1935 CYANIDE SOLUTION, N . O . S . 6 . 1 2024 MERCURY COMPOUND, LIQ UID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 2025 MERCURY COMPOUND, SOLI D, N . O . S . 6 . 1 2026 PHENYLMERCURIC COMPOU ND, N . O . S . 6 . 1 2206 ISOCYANATES, TOXI C, N . O . S . or ISOCYANATE SOLUTION, TOXIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 2291 LEAD COMPOUND, SOLUBLE , N . O . S . 6 . 1 2570 CADMIUM COMPOUND 6 . 1 2788 ORGANOTIN COMPOUN D, LIQUID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 2856 FLUOROSILICATES, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3140 ALKALOIDS, LIQUID , N . O . S or ALKALOIDS SALTS, LIQU ID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3141 ANTIMONY COMPOUND , INORGANIC, LIQUID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3142 DISINFECTANT, LIQU ID, TOXIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3143 DYE, SOLID, TOXIC, N . O . S . or DYE INTERMEDIATE, SO LID, TOXIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3144 NICOTINE COMPOUND , LIQUID, N . O . S . or NICOTINE PREPARAT ION, LIQUID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3146 ORGANOTIN COMPOUND, SOLID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3249 MEDICINE, SOLID, T OXIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3276 NITRILES, TOXIC, LIQUID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3278 ORGANOPHOSPHORU S COMPOUND, TOXIC, LIQUID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3280 ORGANOARSENIC CO MPOUND, LIQUID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3281 METAL CARBONYLS, LIQ UID, N . O . S . with LC 50 6 . 1 3282 ORGANOMETALLIC CO MPOUND, TOXIC, LIQUID, N . O . S . with LC 50 6 . 1 3283 SELENIUM COMPOUND , SOLID, N . O . S . with LC 50 6 . 1 3284 TELLURIUM COMPOUND, N . O . S . with LC 50 6 . 1 3285 VANADIUM COMPOUND, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3439 NITRILES, TOXIC, SO LID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3440 SELENIUM COMPOUND , LIQUID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3448 TEAR GAS SUBSTANCE, S OLID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3464 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS CO MPOUND, TOXIC, SOLID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3465 ORGANOARSENIC COMPO UND, SOLID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3466 METAL CARBONYLS, SOL ID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3467 ORGANOMETALLIC CO MPOUND, TOXIC, SOLID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3 3071 MERCAPTANS, LIQUID , TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . or MERCAPTAN MIXTURE, LIQ UID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3 3080 ISOCYANATES, TOXI C, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S or ISOCYANATE SOLUTION , TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3 3275 NITRILES, TOXIC, FL AMMABLE, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3 3279 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS COMPOUND, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3 + 8 2742 CHLOROFORMATES, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 789

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. proper shipping names 245 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 6 (continued ) Class 6.1 (continued) Specific entries (continued ) 6 . 1 3 + 8 3362 CHLOROSILANES, T OXIC, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 6 . 1 8 3277 CHLOROFORMATES, T OXIC, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 6 . 1 8 3361 CHLOROSILANES, TOX IC, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . Pesticides (a) Solid 6 . 1 2588 PESTICIDE, SOLID , TOXIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 2757 CARBAMATE PESTICID E, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2759 ARSENICAL PESTICI DE, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2761 ORGANOCHLORINE P ESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2763 TRIAZINE PESTICI DE, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2771 THIOCARBAMATE PES TICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2775 COPPER BASED PESTICI DE, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2777 MERCURY BASED PESTIC IDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2779 SUBSTITUTED NITROP HENOL PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2781 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTI CIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2783 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS P ESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2786 ORGANOTIN PESTICID E, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3027 COUMARIN DERIVATIVE P ESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3345 PHENOXYACETIC ACI D DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3349 PYRETHROID PESTIC IDE, SOLID, TOXIC (b) Liquid 6 . 1 2902 PESTICIDE, LIQUI D TOXIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 2992 CARBAMATE PESTICI DE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2994 ARSENICAL PESTI CIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2996 ORGANOCHLORINE P ESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 2998 TRIAZINE PESTIC IDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3006 THIOCARBAMATE PE STICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3010 COPPER BASED PESTI CIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3012 MERCURY BASED PESTI CIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3014 SUBSTITUTED NITRO PHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3016 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTI CIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3018 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS P ESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3020 ORGANOTIN PESTIC IDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3026 COUMARIN DERIVATI VE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3348 PHENOXYACETIC AC ID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3352 PYRETHROID PESTI CIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6 . 1 3 2903 PESTICIDE, LIQUI D, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . , flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 2991 CARBAMATE PESTICI DE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 2993 ARSENICAL PESTICI DE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 2995 ORGANOCHLORINE P ESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 2997 TRIAZINE PESTICI DE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 3005 THIOCARBAMATE PES TICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 3009 COPPER BASED PESTI CIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 3011 MERCURY BASED PEST ICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 3013 SUBSTITUTED NITR OPHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 3015 BIPYRIDILIUM PES TICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 3017 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 3019 ORGANOTIN PESTIC IDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 3025 COUMARIN DERIVATI VE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 3347 PHENOXYACETIC AC ID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6 . 1 3 3351 PYRETHROID PESTIC IDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 790

Appendices 246 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 6 (continued ) Class 6.1 (continued) General entries 6 . 1 2810 TOXIC LIQUID, ORGA NIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 2811 TOXIC SOLID, ORGAN IC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3172 TOXINS, EXTRACTED F ROM LIVING SOURCES, LIQUID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3243 SOLIDS CONTAININ G TOXIC LIQUID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3287 TOXIC LIQUID, INOR GANIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3288 TOXIC SOLID, INORG ANIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3315 CHEMICAL SAMPLE, TO XIC 6 . 1 3381 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 6 . 1 3382 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 6 . 1 3462 TOXINS, EXTRACTED F ROM LIVING SOURCES, SOLID, N . O . S . 6 . 1 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3546 ARTICLES CONTAINING TO XIC SUBSTANCE, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3 2929 TOXIC LIQUID, FLAMM ABLE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 3 3383 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 6 . 1 3 3384 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 6 . 1 3 + 8 3488 TOXIC BY INHALATI ON LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 6 . 1 3 + 8 3489 TOXIC BY INHALATIO N LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 6 . 1 4 . 1 2930 TOXIC SOLID, FLAMMAB LE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 4 . 1 3535 TOXIC SOLID, FLAMMAB LE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 4 . 2 3124 TOXIC SOLID, SELF-HE ATING, N . O . S . 6 . 1 4 . 3 3123 TOXIC LIQUID, WATER -REACTIVE, N . O . S . 6 . 1 4 . 3 3125 TOXIC SOLID, WATER-R EACTIVE, N . O . S . 6 . 1 4 . 3 3385 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQ UID, WATER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 6 . 1 4 . 3 3386 TOXIC BY INHALATION LI QUID, WATER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 6 . 1 4 . 3 + 3 3490 TOXIC BY INHALATI ON LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 6 . 1 4 . 3 + 3 3491 TOXIC BY INHALATI ON LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 6 . 1 5 . 1 3122 TOXIC LIQUID, OXID IZING, N . O . S . 6 . 1 5 . 1 3086 TOXIC SOLID, OXIDIZI NG, N . O . S . 6 . 1 5 . 1 3387 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 6 . 1 5 . 1 3388 TOXIC BY INHALATION LI QUID, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 6 . 1 8 2927 TOXIC LIQUID, CORRO SIVE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 8 2928 TOXIC SOLID, CORROSI VE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 8 3289 TOXIC LIQUID, CORRO SIVE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 8 3290 TOXIC SOLID, CORROSI VE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 6 . 1 8 3389 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 6 . 1 8 3390 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 791

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. proper shipping names 247 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 6 (continued ) Class 6.2 Specific entries 6 . 2 3291 CLINICAL WASTE, UNSP ECIFIED, N . O . S . or (BIO)MEDICAL WASTE , N . O . S . or REGULATED MEDICAL WA STE, N . O . S . 6 . 2 3373 BIOLOGICAL SUBSTAN CE, CATEGORY B 6 . 2 3549 MEDICAL WASTE, CATEGO RY A, AFFECTING HUMANS, solid or MEDICAL WASTE, CATEGORY A, AFFECTING ANIMALS only, solid General entries 6 . 2 2814 INFECTIOUS SUBSTAN CE, AFFECTING HUMANS 6 . 2 2900 INFECTIOUS SUBSTA NCE, AFFECTING ANIMALS only ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 792

Appendices 248 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 7 General entries 7 2908 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – EMPTY PACKAGING 7 2909 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES MANUFACTURED FROM NATURAL URANIUM or DEPLETED URANIUM or NATURAL THORIUM 7 2910 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – LIMITED QUANTITY OF MATERIAL 7 2911 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – INSTRUMENTS or ARTICLES 7 2912 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-I) non fissile or fissile-excepted 7 2913 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I, SCO-II or SCO-III) non fissile or fissile-excepted 7 2915 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, non-special form, non fissile or fissile-excepted 7 2916 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(U) PACKAGE non fissile or fissile-excepted 7 2917 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE non fissile or fissile-excepted 7 2919 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT non fissile or fissile-excepted 7 3321 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), non fissile or fissile-excepted 7 3322 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), non fissile or fissile-excepted 7 3323 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE non fissile or fissile-excepted 7 3324 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), FISSILE 7 3325 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), FISSILE 7 3326 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I or SCO-II), FISSILE 7 3327 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, FISSILE non-special form 7 3328 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(U) PACKAGE, FISSILE 7 3329 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE, FISSILE 7 3330 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE, FISSILE 7 3331 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT, FISSILE 7 3332 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM non fissile or fissile-excepted 7 3333 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM, FISSILE △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 793

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. proper shipping names 249 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX A Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 8 Specific entries 8 1719 CAUSTIC ALKALI LIQUID, N . O . S . 8 1740 HYDROGENDIFLUORID ES, SOLID, N . O . S . 8 1903 DISINFECTANT, LIQU ID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 8 2430 ALKYLPHENOLS, SOL ID, N . O . S . (including C 2 –C 12 homologues) 8 2693 BISULPHITES, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . 8 2735 AMINES, LIQUID, CO RROSIVE, N . O . S . or POLYAMINES, LIQUI D, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 8 2801 DYE, LIQUID, CORRO SIVE, N . O . S . or DYE INTERMEDIATE, LIQU ID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 8 2837 BISULPHATES, AQUEO US SOLUTION 8 2987 CHLOROSILANES, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 8 3145 ALKYLPHENOLS, LIQU ID, N . O . S . (including C 2 –C 12 homologues) 8 3147 DYE, SOLID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . or DYE INTERMEDIATE, S OLID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 8 3259 AMINES, SOLID, CORROS IVE, N . O . S . or POLYAMINES, SOLID , CORROSIVE, N . O . S . 8 3 2734 AMINES, LIQUID, COR ROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . or POLYAMINES, LIQUI D, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 8 3 2986 CHLOROSILANES, CORRO SIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . 8 6 . 1 3471 HYDROGENDIFLUORI DES SOLUTION, N . O . S . General entries 8 1759 CORROSI VE SOLID, N . O . S . 8 1760 CORROSIVE LIQUID, N . O . S . 8 3244 SOLIDS CONTAININ G CORROSIVE LIQUID, N . O . S . 8 3260 CORROSIVE SOLID, ACI DIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 8 3261 CORROSIVE SOLID, ACI DIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 8 3262 CORROSIVE SOLID, BASI C, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 8 3263 CORROSIVE SOLID, BASI C, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 8 3264 CORROSIVE LIQUID, AC IDIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 8 3265 CORROSIVE LIQUID, AC IDIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 8 3266 CORROSIVE LIQUID, BA SIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . 8 3267 CORROSIVE LIQUID, BA SIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . 8 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3547 ARTICLES CONTAINING CORROSIVE SUBSTANCE, N . O . S . 8 3 2920 CORROSIVE LIQUID, FL AMMABLE, N . O . S . 8 4 . 1 2921 CORROSIVE SOLID, FL AMMABLE, N . O . S . 8 4 . 2 3095 CORROSIVE SOLID, SELF -HEATING, N . O . S . 8 4 . 2 3301 CORROSIVE LIQUID, SE LF-HEATING, N . O . S . 8 4 . 3 3094 CORROSIVE LIQUID, WA TER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . 8 4 . 3 3096 CORROSIVE SOLID, WATE R-REACTIVE, N . O . S . 8 5 . 1 3084 CORROSIVE SOLID, OXI DIZING, N . O . S . 8 5 . 1 3093 CORROSIVE LIQUID, OX IDIZING, N . O . S . 8 6 . 1 2922 CORROSIVE LIQUID, T OXIC, N . O . S . 8 6 . 1 2923 CORROSIVE SOLID, TO XIC, N . O . S . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 794

Appendices 250 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) Class or division Subsidiary hazard UN No. Proper shipping name CLASS 9 General entries 9 3077 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N . O . S . 9 3082 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZA RDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N . O . S . 9 3245 GENETICALLY MODIFI ED MICROORGANISMS or GENETICALLY MODIFIED ORGANISMS 9 3257 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE LIQUID, N . O . S . at or above 100°C and below i ts flashpoint (including molten metals, molten salts, etc . ) 9 3258 ELEVATED TEMPERATU RE SOLID, N . O . S . , at or above 240°C see SP960 3334 AV IATION REGULATED LIQUID, N . O . S . see SP960 3335 AVIATION REGUL ATED SOLID, N . O . S . 9 See 2 . 0 . 6 . 6 3548 ARTICLES CONTAINING MISCE LLANEOUS DANGEROUS GOODS, N . O . S . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 795

251 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX B 251 A ppendix B Glossary of terms Note: The provisions of this appendix are not mandatory . Caution: The explanations in thi s glossary are for information only and are not to be used for purposes of hazard classification . Ammunition Generic term r elated mainly to articles of military application consisting of all kind of bombs, grenades, rockets, mines, projectiles and other similar devices or contrivances . AMMUNITION, ILLUMINA TING with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge Ammunition designed to produce a single source of intense light for lighting up an area . The term includes illu minating cartridges, grenades and projectiles; and illuminating and target identification bombs . The term excludes the fol lowing articles which are listed separately: CARTRIDGES, SIGNAL; SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND; SIGNALS, DISTRESS; FLARES, AERIAL and FLARES, SURFACE . AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY Ammunition containing incendiary substances which may be a solid, liquid or gel including white phosphorus . Except when the compos ition is an explosive per se , it also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge . The term includes: AMM UNITION, INCENDIARY, liquid or gel, with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY, WHITE PHOSPHORUS with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge . AMMUNITION, PRACTICE Ammunition without a main bursting charge, containing a burster or expelling charge . Normally it also conta ins a fuze and a propelling charge . The term excludes the fo llowing articles which are listed separately: GRENADES, PRACTICE . AMMUNITION, PROOF Ammunition containing pyrotechnic substances, used to test the performance or strength of new ammunition, weapon component or assemblies . AMMUNITION, SMOKE Ammu nition containing a smoke-producing substance such as chlorosulphonic acid mixture, titanium tetrachloride or white phosphorus; or smoke-producing pyrotechnic composition based on hexachloroethane or red phosphorus . Except when the substa nce is an explosive per se , the ammunition also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge . The term includes gr enades, smoke but excludes SIGNALS, SMOKE which are listed separately . The term includes: AMM UNITION, SMOKE with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; AMMUNITION, SMOKE, WHITE PHOSPHORUS with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 796

Appendices 252 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX B AMMUNITION, TEAR-PRODUCING with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge Ammunition containing tear-producing substance . It also contains one or mor e of the following: a pyrotechnic substance; a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge . AMMUNITION, TOXIC with b urster, expelling charge or propelling charge Ammunition containing toxic agent . It also contains one or mo re of the following: a pyrotechnic substance; a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge . ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, E XTREMELY INSENSITIVE (ARTICLES, EEI) Articles that predominantly contain extremely insensitive substances and which demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation (under normal conditions of transport) and which have passed test series 7 . ARTICLES, PYROPHORIC Articles which contain a pyrophoric substance (capable of spontaneous ignition when exposed to air) and an explosive substance or component . The term excludes ar ticles containing white phosphorus . ARTICLES, PYROTECHNI C for technical purposes Articles which contain pyrotechnic substances and are used for technical purposes such as heat generation, gas generation, theatrical effects, etc . The term excludes the fol lowing articles which are listed separately: all ammunition; CARTRIDGES, SIGNAL; CUTTERS, CABLE, EXPLOSIVE; FIREWORKS; FLARES, AERIAL; FLARES, SURFACE; RELEASE DEVICES, EXPLOSIVE; RIVETS, EXPLOSIVE; SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND; SIGNALS, DISTRESS; SIGNALS, RAILWAY TRACK, EXPLOSIVE; SIGNALS, SMOKE . Auxiliary explosive co mponent, isolated An “isolated auxiliary explosive component” is a small device that explosively performs an operation related to the article’s functioning, other than its main explosive load’s performance . Functioning of the compo nent does not cause any reaction of the main explosive loads contained within the article . BLACK POWDER (GUNPOWDER) Su bstance consisting of an intimate mixture of charcoal or other carbon and either potassium nitrate or sodium nitrate, with or without sulphur . It may be meal, granular, c ompressed or pelletized . Bombs Explosive article s which are dropped from aircraft . They may contain a flammab le liquid with bursting charge, a photo-flash composition or a bursting charge . The term excludes torpe does (aerial) and includes: BOMBS, PHOTO-FLASH; BOMBS with bursting charge; BOMBS WITH FLAMMABLE LIQUID with bursting charge . BOOSTERS Articles consis ting of a charge of detonating explosive with or without means of initiation . They are used to increase t he initiating power of detonators or detonating cord . BURSTERS, explosive Arti cles consisting of a small charge of explosive used to open projectiles or other ammunition in order to disperse their contents . Cartridges, blank Article s which consist of a cartridge case with a centre or rim fire primer and a confined charge of smokeless or black powder but no projectile . Used for training, salu ting or in starter pistols, tools, etc . CARTRIDGES, FLASH Artic les consisting of a casing, a primer and flash powder, all assembled in one piece ready for firing . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 797

Appendix B – Glossary of terms 253 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX B Cartridges for Weapons . 1 Fixed (assembled) or semi-fixed (partially-assembled) ammunition designed to be fired from weapons . Each cartridge incl udes all the components necessary to function the weapon once . The proper shipping nam e shall be used for small arms cartridges that cannot be described as “cartridges, small arms” . Separate loading amm unition is included under this proper shipping name when the propelling charge and projectile are packed together (see also “Cartridges, blank”) . . 2 Incendiary, smoke, toxic and tear-producing cartridges are descr ibed in this Glossary under AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY etc . CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS, INERT PROJECTILE Ammunition consisting of a projectile without bursting charge but with a propelling charge . The presence of a tracer c an be disregarded for classification purposes provided that the predominant hazard is that of the propelling charge . CARTRIDGES, OIL WELL Ar ticles consisting of a casing of thin fibre, metal or other material containing only propellant which projects a hardened projectile . The term excludes the fol lowing articles which are listed separately: CHARGES, SHAPED . CARTRIDGES, POWER DEVI CE Articles designed to accomplish mechanical actions . They consist of a casing wi th a charge of deflagrating explosive and a means of ignition . The gaseous produ cts of the deflagration produce inflation, or linear or rotary motion, or activate diaphragms, valves or switches or project fastening devices or extinguishing agents . CARTRIDGES, SIGNAL Art icles designed to fire coloured flares or other signals from signal pistols, etc . CARTRIDGES, SMALL ARMS Am munition consisting of a cartridge case fitted with a centre or rim fire primer and containing both a propelling charge and a solid projectile . They are designed to be fir ed in weapons of calibre not larger than 19 . 1 mm . Shotgun cartridges o f any calibre are included in this description . The term excludes: CAR TRIDGES, SMALL ARMS, BLANK listed separately in the Dangerous Goods List; and some small arms cartridges which are listed under CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS, INERT PROJECTILE . CASES, CARTRIDGE, EMP TY, WITH PRIMER Articles consisting of a cartridge case made from metal, plastics or other non-flammable material, in which the only explosive component is the primer . CASES, COMBUSTIBLE, E MPTY, WITHOUT PRIMER Articles consisting of cartridge cases made partly or entirely from nitrocellulose . Charges, bursting Arti cles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive such as hexolite, octolite or plastics bonded explosive designed to produce effect by blast or fragmentation . CHARGES, DEMOLITION Art icles containing a charge of a detonating explosive in a casing of fibreboard, plastics, metal or other material . The term excludes the fo llowing articles which are listed separately: bombs, mines, etc . CHARGES, DEPTH Article s consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a drum or projectile . They are designed to deto nate under water . Charges, expelling A char ge of deflagrating explosive designed to eject the payload from the parent articles without damage . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 798

Appendices 254 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX B CHARGES, EXPLOSIVE, COMMERCIAL without detonator Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation, used for explosive welding, jointing, forming and other metallurgical processes . CHARGES, PROPELLING Art icles consisting of a propellant charge in any physical form, with or without a casing, for use as a component of rocket motors or for reducing the drag of projectiles . CHARGES, PROPELLING FO R CANNON Articles consisting of a propellant charge in any physical form, with or without a casing, for use in a cannon . CHARGES, SHAPED, witho ut detonator Articles consisting of a casing containing a charge of detonating explosive with a cavity lined with rigid material, without means of initiation . They are designed to prod uce a powerful, penetrating jet effect . CHARGES, SHAPED, FLEXI BLE, LINEAR Articles consisting of a V-shaped core of a detonating explosive clad by a flexible metal sheath . CHARGES, SUPPLEMENTARY , EXPLOSIVE Articles consisting of a small removable booster used in the cavity of a projectile between the fuze and the bursting charge . COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE T RAIN, N.O.S. Articles containing an explosive designed to transmit the detonation or deflagration within an explosive train . CONTRIVANCES, WATER-ACTI VATED with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge Articles whose functioning depends upon physico- chemical reaction of their contents with water . CORD, DETONATING, flexibl e Article consisting of a core of detonating explosive enclosed in spun fabric, with plastics or other covering unless the spun fabric is sift-proof . CORD (FUSE), DETONAT ING, metal clad Article consisting of a core of detonating explosive clad by a soft metal tube with or without protective covering . When the core contains a su fficiently small quantity of explosive, the words “MILD EFFECT” are added . CORD, IGNITER Article cons isting of textile yarns covered with black powder or another fast-burning pyrotechnic composition and of a flexible protective covering; or it consists of a core of black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric . It burns progressivel y along its length with an external flame and is used to transmit ignition from a device to a charge or primer . CUTTERS, CABLE, EXPLOS IVE Articles consisting of a knife-edged device which is driven by a small charge of deflagrating explosive into an anvil . DETONATOR ASSEMBLIES, N ON-ELECTRIC for blasting Non-electric detonators assembled with and activated by such means as safety fuse, shock tube, flash tube or detonating cord . They may be of instantane ous design or incorporate delay elements . Detonating relays incorp or- ating detonating cord are included . Other detonating relays a re included in “Detonators, non-electric” . Detonators Articles consisting of a small metal or plastics tube containing explosives such as lead azide, PETN or combinations of explosives . They are designed to start a d etonation train . They may be constructed t o detonate instantaneously, or may contain a delay element . The term includes: DETONA TORS FOR AMMUNITION and DETONATORS for blasting, ELECTRIC, NON-ELECTRIC, and ELECTRONIC programmable . Detonating relays without flexible detonating cord are included . △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 799

Appendix B – Glossary of terms 255 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX B DETONATORS, ELECTRONIC programmable for blasting Detonators with enhanced safety and security features, utilizing electronic components to transmit a firing signal with validated commands and secure communications . Detonators of this type c annot be initiated by other means . Entire load and total con tents The phrases “entire load” and “total contents” mean such a substantial proportion that the practical hazard shall be assessed by assuming simultaneous explosion of the whole of the explosive content of the load or package . Explode The verb used to ind icate those explosive effects capable of endangering life and property through blast, heat and projection of missiles . It encompasses both deflagr ation and detonation . Explosion of the total co ntents The phrase “explosion of the total contents” is used in testing a single article or package or a small stack of articles or packages . Explosive, blasting Det onating explosive substances used in mining, construction and similar tasks . Blasting explosives are assigned to one of five types . In addition to the ingre dients listed, blasting explosives may also contain inert components such as kieselguhr, and minor ingredients such as colouring agents and stabilizers . EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING , TYPE A Substances consisting of liquid organic nitrates such as nitroglycerin or a mixture of such ingredients with one or more of the following: nitrocellulose; ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates; aromatic nitro-derivatives, or combustible materials, such as wood-meal and aluminium powder . Such explosives shal l be in powdery, gelatinous or elastic form . The term includes dynam ite gelatine, blasting and gelatine dynamites . EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING , TYPE B Substances consisting of (a) a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with an explosive such as trinitrotoluene, with or without other substances such as wood-meal and aluminium powder, or (b) a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients . Such explosives shal l not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates . EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING , TYPE C Substances consisting of a mixture of either potassium or sodium chlorate or potassium, sodium or ammonium perchlorate with organic nitro-derivatives or combustible materials such as wood-meal or aluminium powder or a hydrocarbon . Such explosives shal l not contain nitroglycerin or similar liquid organic nitrates . EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING , TYPE D Substances consisting of a mixture of organic nitrated compounds and combustible materials such as hydrocarbons and aluminium powder . Such explosives shal l not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, chlorates or ammonium nitrate . The term generally incl udes plastic explosives . EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING , TYPE E Substances consisting of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizers, some or all of which are in solution . The other constituen ts may include nitro-derivatives such as trinitrotoluene, hydrocarbons or aluminium powder . The term includes explo sives, emulsion; explosives slurry and explosives, water gel . ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 800

Appendices 256 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX B Explosive, deflagrating A substance, e . g . propellant, which rea cts by deflagration rather than detonation when ignited and used in its normal manner . Explosive, detonating A subst ance which reacts by detonation rather than deflagration when initiated and used in its normal manner . Explosive, extremely in sensitive substance (EIS) A substance which has demonstrated through tests that it is so insensitive that there is very little probability of accidental initiation . Explosive, primary Expl osive substance manufactured with a view to producing a practical effect by explosion which is very sensitive to heat, impact or friction and which, even in very small quantities, either detonates or burns very rapidly . It is able to transmit deto nation (in the case of initiating explosive) or deflagration to secondary explosives close to it . The main primary explos ives are mercury fulminate, lead azide and lead styphnate . Explosive, secondary Exp losive substance which is relatively insensitive (when compared to primary explosives), which is usually initiated by primary explosives with or without the aid of boosters or supplementary charges . Such an explosive may rea ct as a deflagrating or as a detonating explosive . FIREWORKS Pyrotechnic ar ticles designed for entertainment . Flares Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which are designed for use to illuminate, identify, signal or warn . The term includes: FLARES , AERIAL; FLARES, SURFACE . FLASH POWDER Pyrotechni c substance which, when ignited, produces an intense light . FRACTURING DEVICES, EX PLOSIVE for oil wells, without detonator Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a casing without means of initiation . They are used to fracture t he rock around a drill shaft to assist the flow of crude oil from the rock . Fuse/Fuze Although thes e two words have a common origin (French fusée, fusil) and are sometimes considered to be different spellings, it is useful to maintain the convention that fuse refers to a cord-like igniting device whereas fuze refers to a device used in ammunition which incorporates mechanical, electrical, chemical or hydrostatic components to initiate a train by deflagration or detonation . FUSE, IGNITER, tubula r, metal clad Article consisting of a metal tube with a core of deflagrating explosive . FUSE, INSTANTANEOUS, NON -DETONATING (QUICKMATCH) Article consisting of cotton yarns impregnated with fine black powder (Quickmatch) . It burns with an external fl ame and is used in ignition trains for fireworks, etc . FUSE, SAFETY Article cons isting of a core of fine-grained black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric with one or more protective outer coverings . When ignited, it burns at a pr edetermined rate without any external explosive effect . Fuzes Articles designed to s tart a detonation or a deflagration in ammunition . They incorporate mech anical, electrical, chemical or hydrostatic components and generally protective features . The term includes: FUZES , DETONATING; FUZES, DETONATING with protective features; FUZES, IGNITING . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 801

Appendix B – Glossary of terms 257 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX B GRENADES, hand or rifle Articles which are designed to be thrown by hand or to be projected by a rifle . The term includes: GRE NADES, hand or rifle, with bursting charge; GRENADES, PRACTICE, hand or rifle . The term excludes gr enades, smoke which are listed under AMMUNITION, SMOKE . IGNITERS Articles conta ining one or more explosive substances used to start deflagration in an explosive train . They may be actuated che mically, electrically or mechanically . This term excludes the f ollowing articles which are listed separately: CORD, IGNITER; FUSE, IGNITER; FUSE, NON-DETONATING; FUZES, IGNITING; LIGHTERS, FUSE; PRIMERS, CAP TYPE; PRIMERS, TUBULAR . Ignition, means of A gener al term used in connection with the method employed to ignite a deflagrating train of explosive or pyrotechnic substances (for example: a primer for a propelling charge; an igniter for a rocket motor; an igniting fuze) . Initiation, means of . 1 A device intended to caus e the detonation of an explosive (for example: detonator; detonator for ammunition; detonating fuze) . . 2 The term “with its own mean s of initiation” means that the contrivance has its normal initiating device assembled to it and this device is considered to present a significant risk during transport but not one great enough to be unacceptable . The term does not apply, h owever, to a contrivance packed together with its means of initiation provided the device is packaged so as to eliminate the risk of causing detonation of the contrivance in the event of accidental functioning of the initiating device . The means of initiat ing can even be assembled to the contrivance provided there are protective features such that the device is very unlikely to cause detonation of the contrivance in conditions which are associated with transport . . 3 For the purposes of class ification any means of initiation without two effective protective features shall be regarded as compatibility group B; an article with its own means of initiation, without two effective protective features, would be compatibility group F . On the other hand a means of i nitiation which itself possesses two effective protective features would be compatibility group D; and an article with a means of initiation which possesses two effective protective features would be compatibility group D or E . Means of initiation ad judged as having two effective protective features shall have been approved by the competent national authority . A common and effective w ay of achieving the necessary degree of protection is to use a means of initiation which incorporates two or more independent safety features . JET PERFORATING GUNS, C HARGED, oil well, without detonator Articles consisting of a steel tube or metallic strip, into which are inserted shaped charges connected by detonating cord, without means of initiation . LIGHTERS, FUSE Articles o f various design actuated by friction, percussion or electricity and used to ignite safety fuse . Mass explosion Explosio n which affects almost the entire load virtually instantaneously . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 802

Appendices 258 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX B MINES Articles consisting normally of metal or composition receptacles and a bursting charge . They are designed to be ope rated by the passage of ships, vehicles or personnel . The term includes “Bang alore torpedoes” . OXYGEN GENERATORS, CHEMI CAL Oxygen generators, chemical, are devices containing chemicals which upon activation release oxygen as a product of chemical reaction . Chemical oxygen gener ators are used for the generation of oxygen for respiratory support, e . g . in aircraft, submarin es, spacecraft, bomb shelters and breathing apparatus . Oxidizing salts such as chlorates and perchlorates of lithium, sodium and potassium, which are used in chemical oxygen generators, evolve oxygen when heated . These salts are mixed (co mpounded) with a fuel, usually iron powder, to form a chlorate candle, which produces oxygen by continuous reaction . The fuel is used to generat e heat by oxidation . Once the reaction begin s, oxygen is released from the hot salt by thermal decomposition (a thermal shield is used around the generator) . A portion of the oxygen rea cts with the fuel to produce more heat which produces more oxygen, and so on . Initiation of the r eaction can be achieved by a percussion device, friction device or electric wire . POWDER CAKE (POWDER PASTE), WETTED Substance consisting of nitrocellulose impregnated with not more than 60% of nitroglycerin or other liquid organic nitrates or a mixture of these . POWDER, SMOKELESS Substa nce based on nitrocellulose used as propellant . The term includes pro pellants with a single base (nitrocellulose (NC) alone), those with a double base (such as NC and nitroglycerin (NG)) and those with a triple base (such as NC/NG/nitroguanidine) . Cast, pressed or bag-cha rges of smokeless powder are listed under “CHARGES, PROPELLING” or “CHARGES, PROPELLING FOR CANNON” . PRIMERS, CAP TYPE Article s consisting of a metal or plastics cap containing a small amount of primary explosive mixture that is readily ignited by impact . They serve as igniting el ements in small arms cartridges, and in percussion primers for propelling charges . PRIMERS, TUBULAR Articles c onsisting of a primer for ignition and an auxiliary charge of deflagrating explosive such as black powder used to ignite the propelling charge in a cartridge case for cannon, etc . PROJECTILES Articles such a s a shell or bullet which are projected from a cannon or other artillery gun, rifle or other small arm . They may be inert, with or wi thout tracer, or may contain a burster or expelling charge or a bursting charge . The term includes: PROJECT ILES, inert, with tracer; PROJECTILES with burster or expelling charge; PROJECTILES with bursting charge . PROPELLANTS Deflagrating e xplosive used for propulsion or for reducing the drag of projectiles . PROPELLANTS, LIQUID Subs tances consisting of a deflagrating liquid explosive, used for propulsion . PROPELLANTS, SOLID Substa nces consisting of a deflagrating solid explosive, used for propulsion . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 803

Appendix B – Glossary of terms 259 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX B RELEASE DEVICES, EXPLOSIVE Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive with means of initiation . They sever rods or links t o release equipment quickly . ROCKET MOTORS Article s consisting of a solid, liquid or hypergolic fuel contained in a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles . They are designed to pr opel a rocket or a guided missile . The term includes: ROCK ET MOTORS; ROCKET MOTORS WITH HYPERGOLIC LIQUIDS with or without expelling charge; ROCKET MOTORS, LIQUID FUELLED . ROCKETS Articles consi sting of a rocket motor and a payload which may be an explosive warhead or other device . The term includes guide d missiles and: ROCKETS, LINE-THROWING; ROCKETS, LIQUID FUELLED with bursting charge; ROCKETS with bursting charge; ROCKETS with expelling charge; ROCKETS with inert head . SAFETY DEVICES, electr ically initiated Articles which contain pyrotechnic substances or dangerous goods of other classes and are used in vehicles, vessels or aircraft to enhance safety to persons . Examples are air bag infla tors, air bag modules, seat-belt pretensioners and pyromechanical devices . These pyromechanical d evices are assembled components for tasks such as but not limited to separation, locking, or release-and-drive or occupant restraint . The term includes “SAF ETY DEVICES, PYROTECHNIC” . SIGNALS Articles containing pyrotechnic substances designed to produce signals by means of sound, flame or smoke or any combinations thereof . The term includes: SIGN AL DEVICES, HAND; SIGNALS, DISTRESS, ship; SIGNALS, RAILWAY TRACK, EXPLOSIVE; SIGNALS, SMOKE . SOUNDING DEVICES, EXPLO SIVE Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive . They are dropped from shi ps and function when they reach a predetermined depth or the sea bed . STABILIZED Stabilize d means that the substance is in a condition that precludes uncontrolled reaction . This may be achieved by me thods such as the addition of an inhibiting chemical, degassing the substance to remove dissolved oxygen and inerting the air space in the package, or maintaining the substance under temperature control . SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, VERY INSENSITIVE (SUBSTANCES, EVI), N.O.S. Substances which present a mass explosion hazard but which are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation, or of transition from burning to detonation (under normal conditions of transport) and which have passed test series 5 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 804

Appendices 260 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) APPENDIX B TORPEDOES Articles containing an explosive or non-explosive propulsion system and designed to be propelled through water . They may contain an inert h ead or a warhead . The term includes: TORPE DOES, LIQUID FUELLED with inert head; TORPEDOES, LIQUID FUELLED with or without bursting charge; TORPEDOES with bursting charge . TRACERS FOR AMMUNITION Se aled articles containing pyrotechnic substances, designed to reveal the trajectory of a projectile . Warheads Articles consist ing of detonating explosives . They are designed t o be fitted to a rocket, guided missile or torpedo . They may contain a burste r or expelling charge or bursting charge . The term includes: WARH EADS, ROCKET with burster or expelling charge; WARHEADS, ROCKET with bursting charge; WARHEADS, TORPEDO with bursting charge . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 805

INDEX I NDEX Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 806

INDEX Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 807

263 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX 263 Index In this index, the word “ see ”, after the name in the substance, material or article column, means that it is a synonym and for details regarding the transport provisions reference shall be made to the entry in the Dangerous Goods List (chapter 3 . 2) which is relevant to the U N number/proper shipping name stated against the synonym . Method of indexing Substances, materials and articles have been listed in the alphabetical order of their names . For the purpose of deter mining the alphabetical order, numbers and roman numerals (I), (II) etc . and the prefixes list ed below have been disregarded, although they form an integral part of the name: N- sym- n- or normal- uns- sec- or secondary- cis- tert- or tertiary- trans- o- or ortho- d- m- or meta - α - or alpha- p- or para- β - or beta- γ - or gamma- Note 1 Certain marine pollutants are identified only in the index . These marine polluta nts have not been assigned to an N . O . S . or generic entry . These marine polluta nts may possess properties of classes 1 to 8 and should be classified accordingly . A substance which does n ot fall within the criteria of these classes should be offered for transport as an ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N . O . S . , UN 3077, or as an ENVIRONME NTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N . O . S . , UN 3082, under these entr ies in class 9 . Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 808

INDEX Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 809

Index 265 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ACETAL – 3 1088 ACETALDEHYDE – 3 1089 ACETALDEHYDE AMMONIA – 9 1841 Acetaldehyde diethyl acetal, see – 3 1088 ACETALDEHYDE OXIME – 3 2332 Acetaldol, see – 6 . 1 2839 beta -Acetaldoxime, see – 3 233 2 ACETIC ACID, GLACIAL – 8 2789 ACETIC ACID SOLUTION, more than 10% and less than 50% acid, by mass – 8 2790 ACETIC ACID SOLUTION, not less than 50% but no more than 80% acid, by mass - 8 2790 ACETIC ACID SOLUTION, more than 80% acid, by mass – 8 2789 Acetic aldehyde, see – 3 1089 ACETIC ANHYDRIDE – 8 1715 Acetic oxide, see – 8 1715 Acetoin, see – 3 2621 ACETONE – 3 1090 ACETONE CYANOHYDRIN, STABILIZED P 6 . 1 1541 Acetone hexafluori de, see – 2 . 3 2420 ACETONE OILS – 3 1091 Acet one–pyrogallol copolymer 2-diazo-1-naphthol-5-sulphonate, see – 4 . 1 3228 ACETONITRILE – 3 1648 3-Ac etoxypropene, see – 3 2333 Acetylacetone, see – 3 2310 Acetyl acetone peroxide (concentration ≤ 32%, as a paste), see – 5 . 2 3106 Acetyl acetone pero xide (concentration ≤ 42%, with diluent Type A, and water, available oxygen ≤ 4 . 7%), see – 5 . 2 3105 ACETYL BROMIDE – 8 1716 ACE TYL CHLORIDE – 3 1717 Acetyl cyclohexanesulphonyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 32%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 Acetyl cyclohexanes ulphonyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 82%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3112 Acetylene dichloride , see – 3 1150 ACETYLENE, DISSOLVED – 2 . 1 1001 Acetylene, ethylene and propylene mixtures, refrigerated liquid, see – 2 . 1 3138 ACETYLENE, SOLV ENT FREE – 2 . 1 3374 Acetylene tetrabr omide, see P 6 . 1 2504 Acetylene tetrachlo ride, see P 6 . 1 1702 ACETYL IODIDE – 8 189 8 Acetyl ketene, stabilized, see – 6 . 1 2521 ACETYL METHYL CARBINOL – 3 2 621 Acid butyl phosphate, see – 8 1718 Acid mixture, hydrofluoric and sulphuric, see – 8 1786 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 810

Index 266 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Acid mixture, nitrating acid, see – 8 1796 Acid mixture, spent, nitrating acid, see – 8 1826 Acraldehyde, stabilized, see P 6 . 1 1092 ACRIDINE – 6 . 1 2713 Acroleic acid, stab ilized, see P 8 2218 Acrolein diethyl acetal, see – 3 2374 ACROLEIN DIMER, STABILIZED – 3 2607 ACROLEIN, STABILIZED P 6 . 1 1092 ACRYLAMIDE, SOLID – 6 . 1 2074 ACRYLAMIDE SOLUTIO N – 6 . 1 3426 Acrylic acid isobut yl ester, stabilized, see – 3 2527 ACRYLIC ACID, STABILIZED P 8 2218 Acrylic aldehyde, stabilized, see P 6 . 1 1092 ACRYLONITRILE, STA BILIZED – 3 1093 Actinolite, see – 9 2212 Activated carbon, see – 4 . 2 1362 Activated charcoal , see – 4 . 2 1362 ADHESIVES containing fla mmable liquid – 3 1133 ADIPONITRILE – 6 . 1 2205 ADSORBED GAS, FLAMM ABLE, N . O . S . – 2 . 1 3510 ADSORBED GAS, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 3511 ADSORBED GAS, OXIDIZI NG, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 3513 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC , CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3516 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, F LAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3517 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC , FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3514 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3512 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, O XIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3518 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC , OXIDIZING, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3515 Aeroplane flares, see FLARE S, AERIAL – – – AEROSOLS – 2 1950 AGENT, BLASTING, TYPE B – 1 . 5D 0331 AGENT, BLASTING, TY PE E – 1 . 5D 0332 Air bag inflators, see – 1 . 4G 0503 Air bag inflators, see – 9 3 268 Air bag modules, see – 1 . 4G 0503 Air bag modules, see – 9 326 8 AIR, COMPRESSED – 2 . 2 1002 AIRCRAFT HYDRAULIC P OWER UNIT FUEL TANK (containing a mixture of anhydrous hydrazine and methylhydrazine) – 3 3165 AIR, REFRIGERATED LIQUID – 2 . 2 1003 ALCOHOLATES SOLUTION, N . O . S . in alcohol – 3 3274 Alcohol C 12 –C 16 poly(1–6)ethoxylate, see P 9 3082 Alcohol C 6 –C 17 (secondary) poly(3–6)ethoxylate, see P 9 3082 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 811

Index 267 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES, with more than 24% but not more than 70% alcohol by volume – 3 3065 ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES, with more than 70% alcohol by volume – 3 3065 ALCOHOLS, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 3 1986 ALCOHOLS, N . O . S . – 3 1987 ALDEHYDES, FLAMMAB LE, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 3 1988 ALDEHYDES, N . O . S . – 3 1989 Aldicarb, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – ALDOL – 6 . 1 2839 Aldrin, see ORGANOCHLO RINE PESTICIDE P – – ALKALI METAL ALCOHOLATES, SELF-HEATING, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3206 ALKALI METAL ALLOY, L IQUID, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 1421 ALKALI METAL AMALGAM, LIQUID – 4 . 3 1389 ALKALI METAL AMALGAM , SOLID – 4 . 3 3401 ALKALI METAL AMIDES – 4 . 3 1390 ALKALI METAL DISP ERSION – 4 . 3 1391 ALKALI METAL DISP ERSION, FLAMMABLE – 4 . 3 3482 Alkaline caustic li quid, N . O . S . , see – 8 1719 ALKALINE EARTH ME TAL ALCOHOLATES, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3205 ALKALINE EARTH METAL ALLOY, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 1393 ALKALINE EARTH META L AMALGAM, LIQUID – 4 . 3 1392 ALKALINE EARTH META L AMALGAM, SOLID – 4 . 3 3402 ALKALINE EARTH METAL DISPERSION – 4 . 3 1391 ALKALINE EARTH META L DISPERSION, FLAMMABLE – 4 . 3 3482 ALKALOIDS, LIQUID , N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3140 ALKALOIDS SALTS, L IQUID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3140 ALKALOIDS SALTS, S OLID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1544 ALKALOIDS, SOLID , N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1544 Alkyl benzenesu lphonates, branched and straight-chain (excluding C 11 –C 13 branched and straight-chain homologues), see P 9 3082 Alkyl(C 12 –C 14 )dimethylamine, see Note 1 P – – Alkyl (C 7 –C 9 ) nitrates, see Note 1 P – – ALKYLPHENOLS, LIQUID, N . O . S . (including C 2 –C 12 homologues) – 8 3145 ALKYLPHENOLS, SOLID, N . O . S . (including C 2 –C 12 homologues) – 8 2430 ALKYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, LIQUID with more than 5% free sulphuric acid – 8 2584 ALKYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, LIQUID with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid – 8 2586 ALKYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, SOLID with more than 5% free sulphuric acid – 8 2583 ALKYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, SOLID with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid – 8 2585 ALKYLSULPHURIC ACIDS – 8 2571 Allene, stabilized, see – 2 . 1 2200 ALLYL ACETATE – 3 2333 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 812

Index 268 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ALLYL ALCOHOL P 6 . 1 1098 ALLYLAMINE – 6 . 1 2334 ALLYL BROMIDE P 3 1099 ALLYL CHLORIDE – 3 1100 Allyl chlorocarbonate, see – 6 . 1 1722 ALLYL CHLOROFORMATE – 6 . 1 1722 ALLYL ETHYL ETHER – 3 2335 ALLY L FORMATE – 3 2336 ALLYL GLYCIDYL ETHER – 3 2219 ALLYL IODIDE – 3 1723 ALLYL ISOTHIOCYANATE, STABILIZED – 6 . 1 1545 Allyl mustard oil, stabilized, see – 6 . 1 1545 ALLYLTRICHLOROSIL ANE, STABILIZED – 8 1724 Aluminium alkyls, see – 4 . 2 3394 Aluminium alkyl halid es, liquid, see – 4 . 2 3394 Aluminium alkyl hali des, solid, see – 4 . 2 3393 Aluminium alkyl hydrid es, see – 4 . 2 3394 ALUMINIUM BOROHYDRIDE – 4 . 2 2870 ALUMINIUM BOROHYDRIDE IN DEVICES – 4 . 2 2870 ALUMINIUM BROMIDE, ANH YDROUS – 8 1725 ALUMINIUM BROMIDE SOLUTION – 8 2580 ALUMINIUM CARBIDE – 4 . 3 1394 ALUMINIUM CHLORIDE, A NHYDROUS – 8 1726 ALUMINIUM CHLORIDE SOLUTION – 8 2581 Aluminium dross, see – 4 . 3 3170 ALUMINIUM FERROSILICO N POWDER – 4 . 3 1395 ALUMINIUM HYDRIDE – 4 . 3 2463 ALUMINIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 1438 ALUMINIUM PHOSPHI DE – 4 . 3 1397 ALUMINIUM PHOSPHIDE PESTICIDE – 6 . 1 3048 ALUMINIUM POWDER, CO ATED – 4 . 1 1309 Aluminium powder , pyrophoric, see – 4 . 2 1383 ALUMINIUM POWDER, UN COATED – 4 . 3 1396 ALUMINIUM REMELTING B Y-PRODUCTS – 4 . 3 3170 Aluminium residues, see – 4 . 3 3170 ALUMINIUM RESINATE – 4 . 1 2715 ALUMINIUM SILICON PO WDER, UNCOATED – 4 . 3 1398 Aluminium skimmings, se e – 4 . 3 3170 ALUMINIUM SMELTING BY -PRODUCTS – 4 . 3 3170 Amatols, see EXPLOSIV E, BLASTING, TYPE B – – – AMINES, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 3 2733 AMINES, LIQUID, CORR OSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 8 2734 AMINES, LIQUID, CORR OSIVE, N . O . S . – 8 2735 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 813

Index 269 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. AMINES, SOLID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 8 3259 1-Amino-3-aminometh yl-3,5,5-trimethylcyclohexane, see – 8 2289 ortho- Aminoanisole, see – 6 . 1 2431 Aminobenzene, see P 6 . 1 1547 2-Aminobenzotrifl uoride, see – 6 . 1 2942 3-Aminobenzotriflu oride, see – 6 . 1 2948 1-Aminobutane, see – 3 1125 A minocarb, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – 2-AMINO-4-CHLOROPHENOL – 6 . 1 2673 Aminocyclohexane, see – 8 2 357 2-AMINO-5-DIETHYLAMINOPENTANE – 6 . 1 2946 Aminodimethylben zenes, liquid, see – 6 . 1 1711 Aminodimethylben zenes, solid, see – 6 . 1 3452 2-AMINO-4,6-DI NITROPHENOL, WETTED with not less than 20% water by mass – 4 . 1 3317 Aminoethane, see – 2 . 1 1036 Aminoethane, aqueous solution, see – 3 2270 1-Aminoethanol, see – 9 1841 2-Aminoethanol, see – 8 2491 2-(2-AMINOETHOXY)ETHANOL – 8 3055 N- AMINOETHYLPIPERAZINE – 8 2815 Aminomethane, anhydrous, see – 2 . 1 1061 Aminomethane, aqueou s solution, see – 3 1235 1-Amino-2-methylpropane, see – 3 1214 3-Aminomethyl-3,5,5-trimethylcyclohexylamine, see – 8 2289 1-Amino-2-nitrobenzene, see – 6 . 1 1661 1-Amino-3-nitro benzene, see – 6 . 1 1661 1-Amino-4-nitro benzene, see – 6 . 1 1661 Aminophenetoles, see – 6 . 1 2311 AMINOPHENOLS ( o- , m- , p- ) – 6 . 1 2512 1-Aminopropane, see – 3 1277 2- Aminopropane, see – 3 1221 3-Aminopropene, see – 6 . 1 2334 AMINOPYRIDINES ( o- , m- , p- ) – 6 . 1 2671 Aminosulphonic a cid, see – 8 2967 AMMONIA, ANHYDROUS P 2 . 3 1005 AMMONIA SOLUTION, r elative density between 0 . 880 and 0 . 957 at 15 ° C in water, with more t han 10% but not more than 35% ammonia, by mass P 8 2672 AMMONIA SOLUTION, relative density less than 0 . 880 at 15 ° C in water, with more t han 35% but not more than 50% ammonia P 2 . 2 2073 AMMONIA SOLUTION, r elative density less than 0 . 880 at 15 ° C in water, with more t han 50% ammonia P 2 . 3 3318 Ammonium acid fluoride , solid, see – 8 1727 Ammonium acid fluoride solution, see – 8 2817 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 814

Index 270 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. AMMONIUM ARSENATE – 6 . 1 1546 Ammonium bichromate, se e – 5 . 1 1439 Ammonium bifluorid e, solid, see – 8 1727 Ammonium bifluoride solution, see – 8 2817 Ammonium bisulphate, see – 8 2506 Ammonium bisulphite solution, see – 8 2693 Ammonium bromate (transport prohibited) – – – Ammonium bromate solution (transport prohibited) – – – Ammonium chlorate (transport prohibited) – – – Ammonium chlorate solution (transport prohibited) – – – Ammonium chlorite (transport prohibited) – – – AMMONIUM DICHROMATE – 5 . 1 1439 AMMONIUM DINITRO- o- CRESO LATE, SOLID P 6 . 1 1843 AMMONIUM DINITRO- o- CRE SOLATE SOLUTION P 6 . 1 3424 AMMONIUM FLUORIDE – 6 . 1 2505 AMMONIUM FLUOROSILIC ATE – 6 . 1 2854 Ammonium hexafluoros ilicate, see – 6 . 1 2854 AMMONIUM HYDROGENDIF LUORIDE, SOLID – 8 1727 AMMONIUM HYDROGENDIFLUORIDE SOLUTION – 8 2817 AMMONIUM HYDROGEN SULPHATE – 8 2506 Ammonium hypochlorite (transport prohibited) – – – AMMONIUM METAVANADATE – 6 . 1 2859 AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER – 5 . 1 2067 AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER – 9 2071 AMMONIUM NITRATE EMULSION, intermediate for blasting explosives – 5 . 1 3375 AMMONIUM NITRATE GEL , intermediate for blasting explosives – 5 . 1 3375 AMMONIUM NITRATE li able to self-heating sufficient to initiate decomposition (transport prohibited) – – – AMMONIUM NITRATE, LIQUID (hot concentrated solution) – 5 . 1 2426 AMMONIUM NITRATE SU SPENSION, intermediate for blasting explosives – 5 . 1 3375 AMMONIUM NITRATE – 1 . 1D 0222 AMMONIUM NITRATE wi th not more than 0 . 2% combustible substan ces, including any organic substance calculated as carbon, to the exclusion of any other added substance – 5 . 1 1942 Ammonium nitrite (tr ansport prohibited) – – – AMMONIUM PERCHLORATE – 1 . 1D 0402 AMMONIUM PERCHLORA TE – 5 . 1 1442 Ammonium permangana te (transport prohibited) – – – Ammonium permanganate solution (transport prohibited) – – – AMMONIUM PERSULPHATE – 5 . 1 1444 AMMONIUM PICRATE dry o r wetted with less than 10% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0004 AMMONIUM PICRATE, W ETTED with not less than 10% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1310 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 815

Index 271 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. AMMONIUM POLYSULPHIDE SOLUTION – 8 2818 AMMONIUM POLYVANADATE – 6 . 1 2861 Ammonium silicofluo ride, see – 6 . 1 2854 AMMONIUM SULPHIDE S OLUTION – 8 2683 Ammonium vanadate, see – 6 . 1 2859 Ammunition, blank, se e CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS, BLANK – – – Ammunition, fixed, semi-fixed or separate loading, see CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS, with bursting charge – – – AMMUNITION, ILLUMINATING with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 2G 0171 AMMUNITION, ILL UMINATING with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 3G 0254 AMMUNITION, ILLU MINATING with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 4G 0297 AMMUNITION, INCE NDIARY, liquid or gel, with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 3J 0247 Ammunition, incend iary (water-activated contrivances) with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge, see CONTRIVANCES, WATER-ACTIVATED – – – AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY, WHITE PHOSPHORUS with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 2H 0243 AMMUNITION, INCE NDIARY, WHITE PHOSPHORUS with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 3H 0244 AMMUNITION, INCE NDIARY with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 2G 0009 AMMUNITION, INCEN DIARY with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 3G 0010 AMMUNITION, INCE NDIARY with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 4G 0300 Ammunition, indust rial, see CARTRIDGES, OIL WELL and CARTRIDGES, POWER DEVICE – – – Ammunition, lachrymatory, see AMMUNITION, TEAR-PRODUCING – – – AMMUNITION, PRACTICE – 1 . 3G 0488 AMMUNITION, PRAC TICE – 1 . 4G 0362 AMMUNITION, PROOF – 1 . 4G 0363 Ammunition, smoke (water-activated contrivances), see CONTRIVANCES, WATER-ACTIVATED – – – AMMUNITION, SMOKE, WHITE PHOSPHORUS with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 2H 0245 AMMUNITION, SMOKE , WHITE PHOSPHORUS with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 3H 0246 AMMUNITION, SMOK E with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 2G 0015 AMMUNITION, SMO KE with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 3G 0016 AMMUNITION, SMO KE with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 4G 0303 Ammunition, sporting , see CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS, INERT PROJECTILE – – – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 816

Index 272 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. AMMUNITION, TEAR-PRODUCING, NON-EXPLOSIVE without burster or expelling charge, non-fuzed – 6 . 1 2017 AMMUNITION, TEAR -PRODUCING with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 2G 0018 AMMUNITION, TEAR -PRODUCING with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 3G 0019 AMMUNITION, TEAR- PRODUCING with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 4G 0301 AMMUNITION, TOXIC , NON-EXPLOSIVE without burster or expelling charge, non-fuzed – 6 . 1 2016 AMMUNITION, TOXI C with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 2K 0020 AMMUNITION, TOXIC w ith burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 3K 0021 Amorces, see FIREWORKS – – – Amosi te, see – 9 2212 Amphibole asbestos, see – 9 2212 AMYL ACETATES – 3 1104 AMYL ACID PHOSPHATE – 8 2819 Amyl alcohols, see – 3 1105 Amyl aldehyde, see – 3 2058 AMYLAMINE – 3 1106 n- Amylbenzene, see Note 1 P – – secondary- Amyl bromide, see – 3 2343 AMYL BUTYRATES – 3 2620 Amyl carbinol, see – 3 2282 AMYL CHLORIDE – 3 1107 n- AMYLENE – 3 1108 AMYL FORMATES – 3 1109 tert- Amyl hydroperoxide (concentration ≤ 88%, with diluent Type A and water), see – 5 . 2 3107 normal- Amyl mercaptan, se e – 3 1111 AMYL MERCAPTAN – 3 1111 n- AMYL METHYL KETONE – 3 1110 AMYL NITRATE – 3 1112 AMYL NITRITE – 3 1113 normal- Amyl nitrite, see – 3 1113 tert- Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3115 tert- Amyl peroxy-2-e thylhexyl carbonate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3105 tert- Amyl peroxy-3, 5,5-trimethylhexanoate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3105 tert- Amyl peroxyacet ate (concentration ≤ 62%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 tert- Amyl peroxyben zoate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3103 tert- Amyl peroxyisopr opyl carbonate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3103 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 817

Index 273 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. tert- Amyl peroxyneodecanoate (concentration ≤ 47%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3119 tert- Amyl peroxyneo decanoate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 tert- Amyl peroxypiva late (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3113 AMYLTRICHLOROSILAN E – 8 1728 ANILINE P 6 . 1 1547 Aniline chloride, se e – 6 . 1 1548 ANILINE HYDROCH LORIDE – 6 . 1 1548 Aniline oil, see P 6 . 1 1547 Aniline salt, see – 6 . 1 1548 Animal fabrics, o ily, see – 4 . 2 1373 Animal fibres, burnt, see – 4 . 2 1372 Animal fibres, damp, see – 4 . 2 1372 Animal fibres, oily, see – 4 . 2 1373 Animal fibres, wet, see – 4 . 2 1372 ANISIDINES – 6 . 1 2431 ANISOLE – 3 2222 ANISOYL CHLOR IDE – 8 1729 Anthophyllite, see – 9 2212 ANTIMONY CHLORIDE - 8 1733 Antimony chloride, solid, see – 8 1733 ANTIMONY COMPOUND, INORGANIC, LIQUID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3141 ANTIMONY COMPOUN D, INORGANIC, SOLID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1549 Antimony hydride , see – 2 . 3 2676 ANTIMONY LACTATE – 6 . 1 1550 Antimony(III) lac tate, see – 6 . 1 1550 ANTIMONY PENTACHL ORIDE, LIQUID – 8 1730 ANTIMONY PENTACHLORIDE SOLUTION – 8 1731 ANTIMONY PENTAFLUORIDE – 8 1732 Antimony perchloride, liquid, see – 8 1730 Antimony perchloride solution, see – 8 1731 ANTIMONY POTASSIUM TARTRATE – 6 . 1 1551 ANTIMONY POWDER – 6 . 1 2871 ANTIMONY TRICHLORI DE – 8 1733 Antimony trihydride, see – 2 . 3 2676 A . n . t . u, see also PESTICIDE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1651 Aqua regia, see – 8 1798 ARGO N, COMPRESSED – 2 . 2 1006 ARGON, REFRIGERATED LIQUID – 2 . 2 1951 Arsenates, liquid, n . o . s . , inorganic, see – 6 . 1 1556 Arsenates, soli d, n . o . s . , inorganic, see – 6 . 1 1557 ARSENIC – 6 . 1 1558 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 818

Index 274 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ARSENIC ACID, LIQUID – 6 . 1 1553 ARSENIC ACID, SOLI D – 6 . 1 1554 ARSENICAL DUST – 6 . 1 1562 Arsenical flue dust, se e – 6 . 1 1562 ARSENICAL PESTICID E, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 2760 ARSENICAL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2994 ARSENICAL PESTICIDE , LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 2993 ARSENICAL PESTICI DE, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2759 ARSENIC BROMIDE – 6 . 1 1555 Arsenic(III) bromide , see – 6 . 1 1555 Arsenic chloride, see – 6 . 1 1560 ARSENIC COMPOUND , LIQUID, N . O . S . inorganic, includin g: Arsenates, n . o . s . , Arsenites, n . o . s . , and Arsenic sulphides, n . o . s . – 6 . 1 1556 ARSENIC COMPOUND , SOLID, N . O . S . inorganic, includin g: Arsenates, n . o . s . ; Arsenites, n . o . s . ; and Arsenic sulphides, n . o . s . – 6 . 1 1557 Arsenic compounds (pesticides), see ARSENICAL PESTICIDE – – – Arsenic hydride, see – 2 . 3 2188 Arsenic(III) oxide, se e – 6 . 1 1561 Arsenic(V) oxide, see – 6 . 1 1559 ARSENIC PENTOXID E – 6 . 1 1559 Arsenic sulphides, liquid, n . o . s . , inorganic, see – 6 . 1 1556 Arsenic sulphides, solid, n . o . s . , inorganic, see – 6 . 1 1557 Arsenic tribromi de, see – 6 . 1 1555 ARSENIC TRICHLORIDE – 6 . 1 1560 ARSENIC TRIOXIDE – 6 . 1 1561 Arsenious chloride, se e – 6 . 1 1560 Arsenites, liquid, n . o . s . , inorganic, see – 6 . 1 1556 Arsenites, solid, n . o . s . , inorganic, see – 6 . 1 1557 Arsenous bromide, see – 6 . 1 1555 Arsenous chloride, see – 6 . 1 1560 ARSINE – 2 . 3 2188 ARSINE, ADSORBED – 2 . 3 3522 ARTICLES CONTAINING F LAMMABLE GAS, N . O . S . – 2 . 1 3537 ARTICLES CONTAINI NG NON-FLAMMABLE, NON-TOXIC GAS, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 3538 ARTICLES CONTAINING TO XIC GAS, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3539 ARTICLES CONTAINING FL AMMABLE LIQUID, N . O . S . – 3 3540 ARTICLES CONTAINING F LAMMABLE SOLID, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3541 ARTICLES CONTAINI NG A SUBSTANCE LIABLE TO SPONTANEOUS COMBUSTION, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3542 ARTICLES CONTAININ G A SUBSTANCE WHICH IN CONTACT WITH WATER EMITS FLAMMABLE GASES, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 3543 ARTICLES CONTAININ G OXIDIZING SUBSTANCE, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3544 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 819

Index 275 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ARTICLES CONTAINING ORGANIC PEROXIDE, N . O . S . – 5 . 2 3545 ARTICLES CONTAINING TOXIC SUBSTANCE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3546 ARTICLES CONTAININ G CORROSIVE SUBSTANCE, N . O . S . – 8 3547 ARTICLES CONTAIN ING MISCELLANEOUS DANGEROUS GOODS, N . O . S . – 9 3548 ARTICLES, EEI – 1 . 6N 0486 ARTICLES, EXPLOS IVE, EXTREMELY INSENSITIVE – 1 . 6N 0486 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . – 1 . 1C 0462 ARTICLES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 1D 0463 ARTICLES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 1E 0464 ARTICLES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 1F 0465 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – 1 . 1L 0354 ARTICLES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 2C 0466 ARTICLES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 2D 0467 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – 1 . 2E 0468 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIV E, N . O . S . – 1 . 2F 0469 ARTICLES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 2L 0355 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – 1 . 3C 0470 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – 1 . 3L 0356 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – 1 . 4B 0350 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – 1 . 4C 0351 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – 1 . 4D 0352 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – 1 . 4E 0471 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – 1 . 4F 0472 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – 1 . 4G 0353 ARTICLES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – 1 . 4S 0349 ARTICLES, PRESSU RIZED, HYDRAULIC (containing non-flammable gas) – 2 . 2 3164 ARTICLES, PRESSUR IZED, PNEUMATIC (containing non-flammable gas) – 2 . 2 3164 ARTICLES, PYROPHOR IC – 1 . 2L 0380 ARTICLES, PYROTECHNIC for technical purposes – 1 . 1G 0428 ARTICLES, PYROTECH NIC for technical purposes – 1 . 2G 0429 ARTICLES, PYROTECHNIC for technical purposes – 1 . 3G 0430 ARTICLES, PYROTECHNIC for technical purposes – 1 . 4G 0431 ARTICLES, PYROTECHNIC for technical purposes – 1 . 4S 0432 ARYLSULPHONIC AC IDS, LIQUID with more than 5% free sulphuric acid – 8 2584 ARYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, LIQUID with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid – 8 2586 ARYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, SOLID with more than 5% free sulphuric acid – 8 2583 ARYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, SOLID with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid – 8 2585 ASBESTOS, AMPHIBOLE – 9 2212 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 820

Index 276 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ASBESTOS, CHRYSOTILE – 9 2590 Asphalt, see – 3 1999 AVIATION REGULATED LIQUID, N . O . S . – 9 3334 AVIATION REGULATED SOLID , N . O . S . – 9 3335 Azinphos-ethyl, see ORGAN OPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Azinphos-methyl, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Aziridine, stabilized, see – 6 . 1 1185 AZODICARBONAMIDE – 4 . 1 3242 Azodicarbonamide f ormulation Type B (concentration < 100%, temperature controlled), see – 4 . 1 3232 Azodicarbonamide fo rmulation Type C (concentration < 100%), see – 4 . 1 3224 Azodicarbonamide f ormulation Type C (concentration < 100%, temperature controlled), see – 4 . 1 3234 Azodicarbonamide f ormulation Type D (concentration < 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 Azodicarbonamide f ormulation Type D (concentration < 100%, temperature controlled), see – 4 . 1 3236 2,2 ′ -Azodi(2,4-dime thyl-4-methoxyvaleronitrile) (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3236 2,2 ′ -Azodi(2,4-dime thylvaleronitrile) (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3236 2,2 ′ -Azodi(ethyl 2-me thylpropionate) (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3235 1,1 ′ -Azodi(hexahydrob enzonitrile) (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 2,2 ′ -Azodi(isobuty ronitrile), as a water-based paste (concentration ≤ 50%), see – 4 . 1 3224 2,2 ′ -Azodi(isobutyron itrile) (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3234 2,2 ′ -Azodi(2-methylbu tyronitrile) (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3236 Bag charges, see CHARGE S, PROPELLING, FOR CANNON – – – Ballistite, see POWDER, SMOKELESS – – – Bangalore torpedoes, see MINES, WITH BURSTING CHARGE – – – BARIUM – 4 . 3 1400 Barium alloys, non-p yrophoric, see – 4 . 3 1393 BARIUM ALLOYS, PYROP HORIC – 4 . 2 1854 Barium amalgams, liqu id, see – 4 . 3 1392 Barium amalgams, so lid, see – 4 . 3 3402 BARIUM AZIDE, dry or wett ed with less than 50% water, by mass – 1 . 1A 0224 BARIUM AZIDE, WETTE D with not less than 50% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1571 BARIUM BROMATE – 5 . 1 2719 BARIUM CHLORATE, SO LID – 5 . 1 1445 BARIUM CHLORATE SOL UTION – 5 . 1 3405 BARIUM COMPOUND, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1564 BARIUM CYANIDE P 6 . 1 1565 Barium dispersions , see – 4 . 3 1391 BARIUM HYPOCHLORITE with more than 22% available chlorine – 5 . 1 2741 Barium monoxide, see – 6 . 1 1884 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 821

Index 277 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. BARIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 1446 BARIUM OXIDE – 6 . 1 1884 BARIUM PERCHLORA TE, SOLID – 5 . 1 1447 BARIUM PERCHLORAT E SOLUTION – 5 . 1 3406 BARIUM PERMANGANATE – 5 . 1 1448 BARIUM PEROXIDE – 5 . 1 1449 Barium powder, py rophoric, see – 4 . 2 1383 Batteries, conta ining lithium, see – 9 3090 BATTERIES, CONTAINING SODIUM – 4 . 3 3292 BATTERIES, DRY, CON TAINING POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE, SOLID electric storage – 8 3028 BATTERIES, NICKEL-METAL HYDRIDE – 9 3496 BATTERIES, WET, FILLED WITH ACID, electric storage – 8 2794 BATTERIES, WET, FILLED WITH ALKALI, electric storage – 8 2795 BATTERIES, WET, NON-SPILLABLE, electric storage – 8 2800 Battery acid, see – 8 2796 BATTERY FLUID, ACID – 8 2796 BATTERY FLUID, ALKALI – 8 2797 Battery, lithium, see – 9 3090 BATTERY-POWERED EQUIPMENT – 9 3171 BATTERY-POWERED VEHICLE – 9 3171 Bendiocarb, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – Benfuracarb, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE – – – Benomyl, see Note 1 P – – Benquinox, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . P – – Benzal chloride, see – 6 . 1 1886 BENZALDEHYDE – 9 1990 BE NZENE – 3 1114 1,3-Benzenediol, see – 6 . 1 2876 Benzene-1,3-di sulphonyl hydrazide, as a paste (concentration 52%), see – 4 . 1 3226 Benzene phosphorus d ichloride, see – 8 2798 Benzene phosphorus thiochloride, see – 8 2799 BENZENESULPHONYL CHLORIDE – 8 2225 Benzene sulphonylhydrazide (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 Benzenethiol, see – 6 . 1 2337 Benzhydryl bromide , see – 8 1770 BENZIDINE – 6 . 1 1885 Benzol, see – 3 1114 Benzolene, see – 3 126 8 BENZONITRILE – 6 . 1 2224 BENZOQUINONE – 6 . 1 2587 Benzosulphochlori de, see – 8 2225 BENZOTRICHLORIDE – 8 2226 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 822

Index 278 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. BENZOTRIFLUORIDE – 3 2338 BENZOYL CHLORIDE – 8 1736 BENZYL BROMIDE – 6 . 1 1737 BENZYL CHLORIDE – 6 . 1 1738 Benzyl chlorocar bonate, see P 8 1739 BENZYL CHLOROFORMATE P 8 1739 Benzyl cyanide, see – 6 . 1 2470 Benzyl dichloride, see – 6 . 1 1886 BENZYLDIMETHYLAMIN E – 8 2619 4-(Benzyl(ethyl)amino)-3-ethoxybenzenediazonium zinc chloride (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 BENZYLIDENE CHLOR IDE – 6 . 1 1886 BENZYL IODIDE – 6 . 1 2653 4-(Benzyl(methyl)am ino)-3-ethoxybenzenediazonium zinc chloride (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3236 BERYLLIUM COMPOUND, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1566 BERYLLIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 2464 BERYLLIUM POWDER – 6 . 1 1567 gamma- Bhc, see ORGANOCHL ORINE PESTICIDE P – – BHUSA – 4 . 1 1327 Bichloroacetic acid, se e – 8 1764 BICYCLO[2 . 2 . 1]-HEPTA-2,5-DIENE, S TABILIZED – 3 2251 Bifluorides, N . O . S . , see – 8 1740 Binapacryl, see SUBSTITU TED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE P – – BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B – 6 . 2 3373 BIOMEDICAL WASTE, N . O . S . – 6 . 2 3291 (BIO)MEDICAL WASTE, N . O . S . – 6 . 2 3291 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTI CIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 2782 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3016 BIPYRIDILIUM PES TICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 3015 BIPYRIDILIUM PES TICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2781 Bis-, see Di- – – – N , N- Bis(2-hydr oxyethyl)oleamide (loa), see Note 1 P – – BISULPHATES, AQUEOUS SOLUTION – 8 2837 BISULPHITES, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . – 8 2693 Bitumen, see – 3 1999 BLACK POWDER , COMPRESSED – 1 . 1D 0028 BLACK POWDER granu lar, or as a meal – 1 . 1D 0027 BLACK POWDER, IN PEL LETS – 1 . 1D 0028 Blasticidin-S-3, see P ESTICIDE, N . O . S . – – – Bleaching powder, see P 5 . 1 2208 Bleach liquor, see – 8 1791 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 823

Index 279 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Bombs, illuminating, see AMMUNITION, ILLUMINATING – – – BOMBS, PHOTO-FLASH – 1 . 1D 0038 BOMBS, PHOTO-FL ASH – 1 . 1F 0037 BOMBS, PHOTO-FL ASH – 1 . 2G 0039 BOMBS, PHOTO-FLA SH – 1 . 3G 0299 BOMBS, SMOKE, NON- EXPLOSIVE with corrosive liquid, without initiating device – 8 2028 Bombs, target identification, see AMMUNITION, ILLUMINATING – – – BOMBS with bursting charge – 1 . 1D 0034 BOMBS with bursti ng charge – 1 . 1F 0033 BOMBS with bursti ng charge – 1 . 2D 0035 BOMBS with bursting charge – 1 . 2F 0291 BOMBS WITH FLAMMAB LE LIQUID with bursting charge – 1 . 1J 0399 BOMBS WITH FLAMMA BLE LIQUID with bursting charge – 1 . 2J 0400 BOOSTERS WITH DE TONATOR – 1 . 1B 0225 BOOSTERS WITH D ETONATOR – 1 . 2B 0268 BOOSTERS without de tonator – 1 . 1D 0042 BOOSTERS without detonator – 1 . 2D 0283 Borate and chlorat e mixture, see – 5 . 1 1458 BORNEOL – 4 . 1 1312 Bornyl alcohol, see – 4 . 1 1312 Boroethane, compr essed, see – 2 . 3 1911 Boron bromide, see – 8 2692 Bor on fluoride, compressed, see – 2 . 3 1008 BORON TRIBROMIDE – 8 2692 B ORON TRICHLORIDE – 2 . 3 1741 BORON TRIFLUORIDE – 2 . 3 1008 BORON TRIFLUORIDE ACETI C ACID COMPLEX, LIQUID – 8 1742 BORON TRIFLUORIDE ACETIC ACID COMPLEX, SOLID – 8 3419 BORON TRIFLUORIDE, ADSORBED – 2 . 3 3519 BORON TRIFLUORIDE DIETHYL ETHERATE – 8 2604 BORON TRIFLUORIDE DIHYDRATE – 8 2851 BORON TRIFLUORIDE DIMETHYL ETHERATE – 4 . 3 2965 BORON TRIFLUORIDE PROPI ONIC ACID COMPLEX, LIQUID – 8 1743 BORON TRIFLUORIDE PROPIONIC ACID COMPLEX, SOLID – 8 3420 Brodifacoum, see COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE P – – BROMATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3213 BROMATES, INORG ANIC, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 1450 BROMINE – 8 1744 BROMINE CHL ORIDE – 2 . 3 2901 Bromine cyanide, se e P 6 . 1 1889 BROMINE PENTAFLUORI DE – 5 . 1 1745 BROMINE SOLUTION – 8 1744 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 824

Index 280 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. BROMINE TRIFLUORIDE – 5 . 1 1746 BROMOACETIC ACID, SO LID – 8 3425 BROMOACETIC ACID SOLUTION – 8 1938 BROMOACETONE P 6 . 1 1569 omega- Bromoacetone, see – 6 . 1 2645 BROMOACETYL BROMIDE – 8 2 513 Bromoallylene, see P 3 1099 BROMOBENZENE P 3 2514 BROMOBENZYL CYANIDES, LIQUID – 6 . 1 1694 BROMOBENZYL CYANI DES, SOLID – 6 . 1 3449 1-BROMOBUTANE – 3 1126 2-B ROMOBUTANE – 3 2339 Bromochlorodifluoromethane, see – 2 . 2 1974 BROMOCHLOROMETHANE – 6 . 1 1887 1-BROMO-3-CHLOROP ROPANE – 6 . 1 2688 Bromocyane, see P 6 . 1 1889 Bromodiphenylmetha ne, see – 8 1770 1-Bromo-2,3-epoxypropane, see P 6 . 1 2558 Bromoethane, see – 6 . 1 1891 2-BROMOETHYL ETHYL ETHE R – 3 2340 BROMOFORM P 6 . 1 2515 Bromomethane, see – 2 . 3 1062 1-BROMO-3-METHYLBU TANE – 3 2341 BROMOMETHYLPROPANES – 3 2342 Bromonitrobenzenes, liquid, see – 6 . 1 2732 Bromonitrobenzene s, solid, see – 6 . 1 3459 2-BROMO-2-NITROPROP ANE-1,3-DIOL – 4 . 1 3241 2-BROMOPENTANE – 3 2343 Bro mophos-ethyl, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – BROMOPROPANES – 3 2344 3-Bromopropene, see P 3 1099 3-BROMOPROPYNE – 3 2345 3-Bromo-1-propyne, see – 3 2345 alpha- Bromotoluene, see – 6 . 1 1737 BROMOTRIFLUOROETHY LENE – 2 . 1 2419 BROMOTRIFLUOROMETH ANE – 2 . 2 1009 Bromoxynil, see PESTICID E, N . O . S . P – – Bronopol, see – 4 . 1 3241 BRUCINE – 6 . 1 1570 BURSTERS explosive – 1 . 1D 0043 But-1-yne, stabi lized, see – 2 . 1 2452 BUTADIENES AND HYDR OCARBON MIXTURE, STABILIZED containing more than 40% butadienes, stabilized – 2 . 1 1010 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 825

Index 281 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. BUTADIENES, STABILIZED – 2 . 1 1010 Butanal, see – 3 1129 Butanal oxim e, see – 3 2840 BUTANE – 2 . 1 1011 BUTANEDIONE – 3 2346 Butane -1-thiol, see – 3 2347 Butanoic acid, see – 8 2820 Butanoic anhydride, see – 8 2739 Butan-2-ol, see – 3 1120 1-Butanol, see – 3 1120 Butanol, secondary, see – 3 1120 Butanol, tertiary, see – 3 1120 3-Butanolal, see – 6 . 1 2839 BUTANOLS – 3 1120 2-Butanone , see – 3 1193 Butanoyl chloride, see – 3 2353 2-Butenal, stabilized, see P 6 . 1 1143 Butene, see – 2 . 1 1012 But-1-ene-3-on e, stabilized, see – 6 . 1 1251 1,2-Butene oxide , stabilized, see – 3 3022 2-Butenoic acid, liquid, see – 8 3472 2-Butenoic acid, solid, see – 8 2823 2-Buten-1-ol, see – 3 2614 Butocarboxim, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE – – – BUTYL ACETATES – 3 1123 Butyl acetate, secondary, see – 3 1123 BUTYL ACID PHOSPHATE – 8 1718 BUTYL ACRYLATES, STABILIZED – 3 2348 Butyl alcohols, see – 3 1120 Butyl aldehyde, see – 3 1129 n- BUTYLAMINE – 3 1125 N- BUTYLANILINE – 6 . 1 2738 BUTYLBENZENES P 3 2709 Butyl benzyl phthalate, see P 9 3082 n- Butyl bromide, see – 3 1126 secondary- Butyl bromide, see – 3 2339 tertiary- Butyl bromide, see – 3 2342 Butyl butyrate, see – 3 3272 n- Butyl chloride, see – 3 1127 secondary- Butyl chloride, see – 3 1127 tertiary- Butyl chloride, see – 3 1127 n- BUTYL CHLOROFORMATE – 6 . 1 2743 tert- Butyl cumyl per oxide (concentration > 42–100%), see – 5 . 2 3109 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 826

Index 282 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. tert- Butyl cumyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 52%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3108 tert- BUTYLCYCLOHEXY L CHLOROFORMATE – 6 . 1 2747 N 2 -tert- Butyl- N 4 -cyclopropyl-6-methylthio-1,3,5-triazine-2,4-diamine, see P 9 3077 n- Butyl 4,4-di-( tert- butylperoxy)valerate (concentration ≤ 52%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3108 n- Butyl 4,4-di-( tert- butyl peroxy)valerate (concentration > 52–100%), see – 5 . 2 3103 BUTYLENE – 2 . 1 1012 1,2-BUTYLENE OXID E, STABILIZED – 3 3022 Butyl ethers, see – 3 1149 Butyl ethyl ether, see – 3 1179 n- BUTYL FORMATE – 3 1128 tert- Butyl hydroperoxide (concentration ≤ 72%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3109 tert- Butyl hydroperox ide (concentration ≤ 79%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3107 tert- Butyl hydroperox ide (concentration > 79–90%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3103 tert- Butyl hydroperox ide (concentration ≤ 80%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 tert- Butyl hydroperox ide (concentration < 82%) + di- tert- butyl peroxide (concentration > 9%), with water, see – 5 . 2 3103 tert- BUTYL HYPOCHLORITE – 4 . 2 3255 N,n- BUTYLIMIDAZOLE – 6 . 1 2690 N,n- Butyliminazole, see – 6 . 1 2690 secondary- Butyl iodide, se e – 3 2390 tertiary- Butyl iodide, see – 3 2391 tert- BUTYL ISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2484 n- BUTYL ISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2485 BUTYL MERCAPTAN – 3 2347 n- BU TYL METHACRYLATE, STABILIZED – 3 2227 Butyl 2-methylacrylate, stabilized, see – 3 2227 BUTYL METHYL ETHER – 3 2350 tert- Butyl monoperoxymaleate (concentration ≤ 52%, as a paste), see – 5 . 2 3108 tert- Butyl monoperoxym aleate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3103 tert- Butyl monoperoxym aleate (concentration ≤ 52%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3108 tert- Butyl monoperoxym aleate (concentration > 52–100%), see – 5 . 2 3102 BUTYL NITRITES – 3 2351 tert- But yl peroxyacetate (concentration ≤ 32%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3109 tert- Butyl peroxyacet ate (concentration > 32–52%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3103 tert- Butyl peroxyacet ate (concentration > 52–77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3101 tert- Butyl peroxyben zoate (concentration ≤ 52%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3106 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 827

Index 283 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. tert- Butyl peroxybenzoate (concentration > 52–77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 tert- Butyl peroxybe nzoate (concentration > 77–100%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3103 tert- Butyl peroxybut yl fumarate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 tert- Butyl peroxycr otonate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 tert- Butyl peroxydie thylacetate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3113 tert- Butyl peroxy-2 -ethylhexanoate (concentration ≤ 12%) + 2,2-di-( tert- butylperoxy)butane (concentration ≤ 14%), with diluent Type A and inert solid, see – 5 . 2 3106 tert- Butyl peroxy-2 -ethylhexanoate (concentration ≤ 31%) + 2,2-di-( tert- butylperoxy)butane (concentration ≤ 36%), with diluent Type B, see – 5 . 2 3115 tert- Butyl peroxy-2 -ethylhexanoate (concentration ≤ 32%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3119 tert- Butyl peroxy-2 -ethylhexanoate (concentration > 32–52%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3117 tert- Butyl peroxy-2 -ethylhexanoate (concentration ≤ 52%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3118 tert- Butyl peroxy-2 -ethylhexanoate (concentration > 52–100%), see – 5 . 2 3113 tert- Butyl peroxy-2 -ethylhexylcarbonate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3105 tert- Butyl peroxyiso butyrate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 tert- Butyl peroxyiso butyrate (concentration > 52–77%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3111 tert- Butyl peroxy isop ropyl carbonate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3103 1-(2- tert- Butylperox yisopropyl)-3-isopropenyl benzene (concentrati on ≤ 42%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3108 1-(2- tert- Butylperox y isopropyl)-3-isopropenyl benzene (concentrati on ≤ 77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 tert- Butyl peroxy-2 -methylbenzoate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3103 tert- Butyl peroxyneo decanoate (concentration ≤ 32%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3119 tert- Butyl peroxyneo decanoate (concentration ≤ 42%, as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)), see – 5 . 2 3118 tert- Butyl peroxyneo decanoate (concentration ≤ 52%, as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3119 tert- Butyl peroxyneo decanoate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 tert- Butyl peroxyneo decanoate (concentration > 77–100%), see – 5 . 2 3115 tert- Butyl peroxyneo heptanoate (concentration ≤ 42%, as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3117 tert- Butyl peroxyneo heptanoate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3115 tert- Butyl peroxypi valate (concentration ≤ 27%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3119 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 828

Index 284 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. tert- Butyl peroxypivalate (concentration > 27–67%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 tert- Butyl peroxypiv alate (concentration > 67–77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3113 tert- Butyl peroxyste arylcarbonate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3106 tert- Butyl peroxy-3, 5,5-trimethylhexanoate (concentration ≤ 37%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3109 tert- Butyl peroxy-3, 5,5-trimethylhexanoate (concentration > 37–100%), see – 5 . 2 3105 tert- Butyl peroxy-3, 5,5-trimethylhexanoate (concentration ≤ 42%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3106 Butylphenols, liquid, N . O . S . , see – 8 3145 Butylphenols, solid, N . O . S . , see – 8 2430 Butylphosphoric acid , see – 8 1718 BUTYL PROPIONATES – 3 1914 Butyl thioalcohols, see – 3 2347 BUTYLTOLUENES – 6 . 1 2667 BUTYLTRICHLOROSILA NE – 8 1747 5- tert- BUTYL-2,4,6-TRINITRO- m- XYLENE – 4 . 1 2956 BUTYL VINYL ETHER, STA BILIZED – 3 2352 1-Butyne, stabilized, see – 2 . 1 2452 2-Butyne, see – 3 1144 1,4-BUTY NEDIOL – 6 . 1 2716 2-Butyne-1,4-diol, se e – 6 . 1 2716 BUTYRALDEHYDE – 3 1129 BUTY RALDOXIME – 3 2840 BUTYRIC ACID – 8 2820 BUTYRIC ANHYDRIDE – 8 2739 Butyrone, see – 3 2710 BUTYRONITRILE – 3 2411 Butyroyl chloride, see – 3 2353 BUTYRYL CHLORIDE – 3 2353 Cable cutters, explosive, see – 1 . 4S 0070 CACODYLIC ACID – 6 . 1 1572 CADMIUM COMPOUND – 6 . 1 2570 Cadmium selenide, see – 6 . 1 2570 Cadmium sulphide, see P 6 . 1 2570 CAESIUM – 4 . 3 1407 Caesium alloy, liqui d, see – 4 . 3 1421 Caesium amalgams, li quid, see – 4 . 3 1389 Caesium amalgams, s olid, see – 4 . 3 3401 Caesium amide, see – 4 . 3 1390 Caesium dispersions, se e – 4 . 3 1391 CAESIUM HYDROXIDE – 8 268 2 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 829

Index 285 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. CAESIUM HYDROXIDE SOLUTION – 8 2681 CAESIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 1451 Caesium powder, py rophoric, see – 4 . 2 1383 Caffeine, see – 6 . 1 1544 Cajeputene, see P 3 2052 CALCIUM – 4 . 3 1401 Calcium alloy, non- pyrophoric, solid, see – 4 . 3 1393 CALCIUM ALLOYS, P YROPHORIC – 4 . 2 1855 Calcium amalgams, l iquid, see – 4 . 3 1389 Calcium amalgams, s olid, see – 4 . 3 3402 CALCIUM ARSENATE P 6 . 1 1573 CALCIUM ARSENAT E AND CALCIUM ARSENITE MIXTURE, SOLID P 6 . 1 1574 Calcium bisulphite sol ution, see – 8 2693 CALCIUM CARBIDE – 4 . 3 1402 CALCIUM CHLORATE – 5 . 1 1452 CALCIUM CHLORATE , AQUEOUS SOLUTION – 5 . 1 2429 CALCIUM CHLORITE – 5 . 1 1453 CALCIUM CYANAMIDE w ith more than 0 . 1% calcium carbide – 4 . 3 1403 CALCIUM CYANIDE P 6 . 1 1575 Calcium dispersions , see – 4 . 3 1391 CALCIUM DITHIONI TE – 4 . 2 1923 CALCIUM HYDRIDE – 4 . 3 1404 Calcium hydrogen sulph ite solution, see – 8 2693 CALCIUM HYDROSULPHITE – 4 . 2 1923 CALCIUM HYPOCHLOR ITE, DRY with more than 39% available chlorine (8 . 8% available oxygen) P 5 . 1 1748 CALCIUM HYPOCHLO RITE, DRY, CORROSIVE with more than 39% available chlorine (8 . 8% available oxygen) P 5 . 1 3485 CALCIUM HYPOCHLOR ITE, HYDRATED with not less than 5 . 5% but not more than 16% wate r P 5 . 1 2880 CALCIUM HYPOCHLORI TE, HYDRATED MIXTURE, CORROSIVE with not less than 5 . 5% but not more than 16% wate r P 5 . 1 3487 CALCIUM HYPOCHLORI TE, HYDRATED, CORROSIVE with not less than 5 . 5% but not more than 16% wate r P 5 . 1 3487 CALCIUM HYPOCHLO RITE, HYDRATED MIXTURE with not less than 5 . 5% but not more than 16% wate r P 5 . 1 2880 CALCIUM HYPOCHLO RITE MIXTURE, DRY, CORROSIVE with more than 10% but not more than 39% available chlorine P 5 . 1 3486 CALCIUM HYPOCHLO RITE MIXTURE, DRY, CORROSIVE with more than 39% available chlorine (8 . 8% available oxygen) P 5 . 1 3485 CALCIUM HYPOCHLOR ITE MIXTURE, DRY with more than 10% but not more than 39% available chlorine P 5 . 1 2208 CALCIUM HYPOCHLO RITE MIXTURE, DRY with more than 39% available chlorine (8 . 8% available oxygen) P 5 . 1 1748 CALCIUM MANGANES E SILICON – 4 . 3 2844 Calcium naphthenate i n solution, see P 9 3082 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 830

Index 286 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. CALCIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 1454 CALCIUM OXIDE – 8 1910 CALC IUM PERCHLORATE – 5 . 1 1455 CALCIUM PERMANGANATE – 5 . 1 1456 CALCIUM PEROXIDE – 5 . 1 1457 CALCIUM PHOSPHIDE – 4 . 3 1360 CALCIUM, PYROPHORIC – 4 . 2 1855 CALCIUM RESINATE – 4 . 1 1313 CALCIUM RESINATE , FUSED – 4 . 1 1314 Calcium selenate, see – 6 . 1 2630 CALCIUM SILICIDE – 4 . 3 1405 Calcium silicon, see – 4 . 3 1405 Calcium superoxide, see – 5 . 1 1457 2-Camphanol, see – 4 . 1 1312 2-Camphanone, see – 4 . 1 2717 Camphechlor, see ORGANO CHLORINE PESTICIDE P – – CAMPHOR OIL – 3 1130 CAMPHOR, synthetic – 4 . 1 2717 CAPACITOR, ASYMM ETRIC (with an energy storage capacity greater than 0 . 3 Wh) – 9 3508 CAPACITOR, ELECT RIC DOUBLE LAYER (with an energy storage capacity greater than 0 . 3 Wh) – 9 3499 CAPROIC ACID – 8 2829 Ca proic aldehyde, see – 3 1207 Caprylyl chloride, see – 8 3265 CARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 2758 CARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2992 CARBAMATE PESTICI DE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 2991 CARBAMATE PESTICID E, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2757 Carbanil, see – 6 . 1 2487 Carbaryl, see CARBAMATE P ESTICIDE P – – Carbendazim, see Note 1 P – – Carbofuran, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – Carbolic acid, molten, see – 6 . 1 2312 Carbolic acid, solid, see – 6 . 1 1671 Carbolic acid solut ion, see – 6 . 1 2821 CARBON, ACTIVATED – 4 . 2 1362 CARBON, animal origin – 4 . 2 1361 Carbon bisulphide, see – 3 11 31 Carbon black, see – 4 . 2 1361 CARBON DIOXIDE – 2 . 2 1013 Carbon dioxide and et hylene oxide mixture, see ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE MIXTURE – – – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 831

Index 287 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. CARBON DIOXIDE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID – 2 . 2 2187 CARBON DIOXIDE, S OLID – 9 1845 CARBON DISULPHIDE – 3 1131 Carbonic anhydride, see – 2 . 2 1013 Carbonic anhydri de, refrigerated liquid, see – 2 . 2 2187 Carbonic anhydri de, solid, see – 9 1845 CARBON MONOXIDE, COMPRESSED – 2 . 3 1016 Carbon oxisulphide, see – 2 . 3 2204 Carbon oxyfluoride , see – 2 . 3 2417 Carbon oxyfluorid e, compressed, see – 2 . 3 2417 Carbon oxysulphide , see – 2 . 3 2204 Carbon paper, see – 4 . 2 1379 CARBON TETRABROMID E P 6 . 1 2516 CARBON TETRACHLORI DE P 6 . 1 1846 CARBON, vegetable origin – 4 . 2 1361 Carbonyl chlorid e, see – 2 . 3 1076 CARBONYL FLUORIDE – 2 . 3 2417 CARBONYL SULPHID E – 2 . 3 2204 Carbophenothion, see ORGA NOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Cargo transport unit under fumigation, see – 9 3359 Cartap hydrochloride, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – Cartridge cases, see CASES, CARTRIDGE – – – Cartridges, actuating, for fire extinguisher or apparatus valve, see CARTRIDGES, POWER DEVICE – – – Cartridges, explosive, see – 1 . 1D 0048 CARTRIDGES, FLAS H – 1 . 1G 0049 CARTRIDGES, FLAS H – 1 . 3G 0050 CARTRIDGES FOR TOO LS, BLANK – 1 . 4S 0014 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS, BLANK – 1 . 1C 0326 CARTRIDGES FOR WE APONS, BLANK – 1 . 2C 0413 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS, BLANK – 1 . 3C 0327 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS, BLANK – 1 . 4C 0338 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS, BLANK – 1 . 4S 0014 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS, INERT PROJECTILE – 1 . 2C 0328 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS, INERT PROJECTILE – 1 . 3C 0417 CARTRIDGES FOR WE APONS, INERT PROJECTILE – 1 . 4C 0339 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS, INERT PROJECTILE – 1 . 4S 0012 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS with bursting charge – 1 . 1E 0006 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS with bursting charge – 1 . 1F 0005 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS with bursting charge – 1 . 2E 0321 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS with bursting charge – 1 . 2F 0007 CARTRIDGES FOR WEAP ONS with bursting charge – 1 . 4E 0412 CARTRIDGES FOR WEA PONS with bursting charge – 1 . 4F 0348 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 832

Index 288 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Cartridges, illuminating, see AMMUNITION, ILLUMINATING – – – CARTRIDGES, OIL WELL – 1 . 3C 0277 CARTRIDGES, OIL WE LL – 1 . 4C 0278 CARTRIDGES, POWER D EVICE – 1 . 2C 0381 CARTRIDGES, POWER D EVICE – 1 . 3C 0275 CARTRIDGES, POWER D EVICE – 1 . 4C 0276 CARTRIDGES, POWER D EVICE – 1 . 4S 0323 CARTRIDGES, SIGNA L – 1 . 3G 0054 CARTRIDGES, SIGNA L – 1 . 4G 0312 CARTRIDGES, SIGNA L – 1 . 4S 0405 CARTRIDGES, SMALL AR MS – 1 . 3C 0417 CARTRIDGES, SMALL ARMS – 1 . 4C 0339 CARTRIDGES, SMALL A RMS – 1 . 4S 0012 CARTRIDGES, SMALL AR MS, BLANK – 1 . 3C 0327 CARTRIDGES, SMALL AR MS, BLANK – 1 . 4C 0338 CARTRIDGES, SMALL AR MS, BLANK – 1 . 4S 0014 Cartridges, start er, jet engine, see CARTRIDGES, POWER DEVICE – – – CASES, CARTRIDGE, EMPTY, WITH PRIMER – 1 . 4C 0379 CASES, CARTRIDGE, E MPTY, WITH PRIMER – 1 . 4S 0055 CASES, COMBUSTIBL E, EMPTY, WITHOUT PRIMER – 1 . 3C 0447 CASES, COMBUSTIBL E, EMPTY, WITHOUT PRIMER – 1 . 4C 0446 Casinghead gasoline, se e P 3 1203 CASTOR BEANS – 9 2969 CASTOR FLAKE – 9 2969 CASTOR MEAL – 9 2969 CASTOR POMACE – 9 2969 CAUSTIC ALKALI LIQUID, N . O . S . – 8 1719 Caustic potash solutio n, see – 8 1814 Caustic potash, solid, see – 8 1813 Caustic soda liquor, see – 8 1824 Caustic soda, solid, see – 8 1823 Caustic soda solution, see – 8 1824 CELLS, CONTAINING SODIUM – 4 . 3 3292 CELLULOID in block, ro ds, rolls, sheets, tubes, etc . , except scrap – 4 . 1 2000 CELLULOID, SCRAP – 4 . 2 2002 Cellulose nitrate s olution, see – 3 2059 Cellulose nitrate with alcohol, see – 4 . 1 2556 Cellulose nitrate wi th plasticizing substance, see – 4 . 1 2557 Cellulose nitrate w ith water, see – 4 . 1 2555 Cement, liquid, see – 3 1133 CER IUM, gritty powder – 4 . 3 3078 CERIUM, ingots – 4 . 1 1333 Cerium powder, pyrop horic, see – 4 . 2 1383 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 833

Index 289 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. CERIUM, rods – 4 . 1 1333 CERIUM, slabs – 4 . 1 1333 CERIUM, turnings – 4 . 3 3078 Cer Mischmetall, see – 4 . 1 1323 Cesium, see CAESIUM – – – Cha rcoal, activated, see – 4 . 2 1362 Charcoal, non-activ ated, see – 4 . 2 1361 CHARGES, BURSTING , PLASTICS BONDED – 1 . 1D 0457 CHARGES, BURSTIN G, PLASTICS BONDED – 1 . 2D 0458 CHARGES, BURSTING , PLASTICS BONDED – 1 . 4D 0459 CHARGES, BURSTING , PLASTICS BONDED – 1 . 4S 0460 CHARGES, DEMOLI TION – 1 . 1D 0048 CHARGES, DEPTH – 1 . 1D 0056 Charges, expelli ng, explosive, for fire extinguishers, see CARTRIDGES, POWER DEVICE – – – CHARGES, EXPLOSIVE, COMMERCIAL without detonator – 1 . 1D 0442 CHARGES, EXPLO SIVE, COMMERCIAL without detonator – 1 . 2D 0443 CHARGES, EXPLOS IVE, COMMERCIAL without detonator – 1 . 4D 0444 CHARGES, EXPLOSIV E, COMMERCIAL without detonator – 1 . 4S 0445 CHARGES, PROPELLI NG – 1 . 1C 0271 CHARGES, PROPEL LING – 1 . 2C 0415 CHARGES, PROPELLI NG – 1 . 3C 0272 CHARGES, PROPELLI NG – 1 . 4C 0491 CHARGES, PROPELL ING, FOR CANNON – 1 . 1C 0279 CHARGES, PROPEL LING, FOR CANNON – 1 . 2C 0414 CHARGES, PROPELL ING, FOR CANNON – 1 . 3C 0242 CHARGES, SHAPED, F LEXIBLE, LINEAR – 1 . 1D 0288 CHARGES, SHAPED, FLEXIBLE, LINEAR – 1 . 4D 0237 CHARGES, SHAPED, without detonator – 1 . 1D 0059 CHARGES, SHAPED , without detonator – 1 . 2D 0439 CHARGES, SHAPED, without detonator – 1 . 4D 0440 CHARGES, SHAPED, without detonator – 1 . 4S 0441 CHARGES, SUPPLEME NTARY, EXPLOSIVE – 1 . 1D 0060 CHEMICAL KIT – 9 3316 CHE MICAL SAMPLE, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3315 CHEMICAL UNDER PR ESSURE, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 3500 CHEMICAL UNDER PRES SURE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 3503 CHEMICAL UNDER PRES SURE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 2 . 1 3501 CHEMICAL UNDER PRE SSURE, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 2 . 1 3505 CHEMICAL UNDER PRE SSURE, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 2 . 1 3504 CHEMICAL UNDER PRE SSURE, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 3502 Chile saltpetre, se e – 5 . 1 1498 Chinomethionat, see PE STICIDE, N . O . S . – – – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 834

Index 290 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. CHLORAL, ANHYDROUS, STABILIZED – 6 . 1 2075 CHLORATE AND BORATE M IXTURE – 5 . 1 1458 CHLORATE AND MAGNE SIUM CHLORIDE MIXTURE, SOLID – 5 . 1 1459 CHLORATE AND MAGNE SIUM CHLORIDE MIXTURE SOLUTION – 5 . 1 3407 CHLORATES, INORGA NIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3210 CHLORATES, INORGA NIC, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 1461 Chlordane, see ORGANOCHLO RINE PESTICIDE P – – Chlordimeform, see ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE – – – Chlordimeform hydrochloride, see ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE – – – Chlorfenvinphos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – CHLORIC ACID, AQUEOUS SOLUTION with a concentration exceeding 10% (transport prohibited) – – – CHLORIC ACID, AQUEOUS SOLUTION with not more than 10% chloric acid – 5 . 1 2626 Chlorinated paraffins (C 10 –C 13 ), see P 9 3082 Chlorinated paraffins (C 14 –C 17 ) with more than 1% shorter chain length, see P 9 3082 CHLORINE P 2 . 3 1017 CHLORINE, ADSORBED – 2 . 3 3520 Chlorine bromide, see – 2 . 3 2901 Chlorine cyanide, st abilized, see P 2 . 3 1589 CHLORINE PENTAFLUORID E – 2 . 3 2548 CHLORINE TRIFLUORIDE – 2 . 3 1749 CHLORITES, INORGANIC , N . O . S . – 5 . 1 1462 CHLORITE SOLUTION – 8 1908 C hlormephos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Chloroacetaldehyde, see – 6 . 1 2232 CHLOROACETIC ACID, MO LTEN – 6 . 1 3250 CHLOROACETIC ACID, SO LID – 6 . 1 1751 CHLOROACETIC ACID SO LUTION – 6 . 1 1750 CHLOROACETONE, STA BILIZED P 6 . 1 1695 CHLOROACETONITRILE – 6 . 1 2668 CHLOROACETOPHENONE , LIQUID – 6 . 1 3416 CHLOROACETOPHENON E, SOLID – 6 . 1 1697 CHLOROACETYL CHLORI DE – 6 . 1 1752 para- Chloro- ortho- a minophenol, see – 6 . 1 2673 2-Chloroaniline, see – 6 . 1 2019 3-Chloroaniline, see – 6 . 1 2019 4-Chloroaniline, see – 6 . 1 2018 meta- Chloroaniline, see – 6 . 1 2019 ortho- Chloroaniline, se e – 6 . 1 2019 para- Chloroaniline, see – 6 . 1 2018 CHLOROANILINES, LI QUID – 6 . 1 2019 CHLOROANILINES, SOLI D – 6 . 1 2018 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 835

Index 291 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. CHLOROANISIDINES – 6 . 1 2233 CHLOROBENZENE – 3 113 4 CHLOROBENZOTRIFLUORIDES – 3 2234 CHLOROBENZYL CHLORIDES, LIQUID P 6 . 1 2235 CHLOROBENZYL CHLOR IDES, SOLID P 6 . 1 3427 1-Chloro-3-brom opropane, see – 6 . 1 2688 2-Chlorobutadiene-1 ,3, stabilized, see – 3 1991 1-Chlorobutane, see – 3 1127 2-Chlorobutane, see – 3 1127 CHLOROBUTANES – 3 1127 Chlorocarbonates, toxic, corrosive, flammable, n . o . s . , see – 6 . 1 2742 Chlorocarbonates, toxic, corrosive, n . o . s . , see – 6 . 1 3277 CHLOROCRESOLS, SOLI D – 6 . 1 3437 CHLOROCRESOLS SOLU TION – 6 . 1 2669 3-Chloro-4-dieth ylamino benzenediazonium zin c chloride (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 CHLORODIFLUOROBROM OMETHANE – 2 . 2 1974 1-CHLORO-1,1-DIF LUOROETHANE – 2 . 1 2517 CHLORODIFLUOROMET HANE – 2 . 2 1018 CHLORODIFLUOROMETH ANE AND CHLOROPENTAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with fixed boiling point, with approximately 49% chlorodifluoromethane – 2 . 2 1973 3-Chloro-1,2-dih ydroxypropane, see – 6 . 1 2689 Chlorodimethyl eth er, see – 6 . 1 1239 CHLORODINITROBENZE NES, LIQUID P 6 . 1 1577 CHLORODINITROBENZ ENES, SOLID P 6 . 1 3441 2-CHLOROETHANAL – 6 . 1 2232 Chloroethane, see – 2 . 1 1037 Chloroethane nitri le, see – 6 . 1 2668 2-Chloroethanol, see – 6 . 1 1135 2-Chloroethyl al cohol, see – 6 . 1 1135 CHLOROFORM – 6 . 1 1888 CHLOROFORMATES, TO XIC, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2742 CHLOROFORMATES, T OXIC, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3277 Chloromethane, see – 2 . 1 1063 1-Chloro-3-meth ylbutane, see – 3 1107 2-Chloro-2-methylbutane, see – 3 1107 CHLOROMETHYL CHLOROFORMATE – 6 . 1 2745 Chloromethyl cyan ide, see – 6 . 1 2668 CHLOROMETHYL ETHYL ETHE R – 3 2354 Chloromethyl methyl ether, see – 6 . 1 1239 Chloromethylphenol s, solution, see – 6 . 1 2669 Chloromethylphenol s, solid, see – 6 . 1 3437 3-CHLORO-4-METHYL PHENYL ISOCYANATE, LIQUID – 6 . 1 2236 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 836

Index 292 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. 3-CHLORO-4-METHYLPHENYL ISOCYANATE, SOLID – 6 . 1 3428 Chloromethylpropa nes, see – 3 1127 3-Chloro-2-methylprop-1-ene, see – 3 2554 CHLORONITROANILINES P 6 . 1 2237 CHLORONITROBENZENES , LIQUID – 6 . 1 3409 CHLORONITROBENZENES , SOLID – 6 . 1 1578 2-Chloro-6-nitro toluene, see Note 1 P – – CHLORONITROTOLUENES, LIQUID P 6 . 1 2433 CHLORONITROTOLUENES , SOLID P 6 . 1 3457 1-Chlorooctane, see P 9 3082 CHLOROPENTAFLUOROETHANE – 2 . 2 1020 Chloropentanes, see – 3 1107 3 -Chloroperoxybenzoic acid (concentration ≤ 57%, with inert solid and water), see – 5 . 2 3106 3-Chloroperoxybenz oic acid (concentration > 57–86%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3102 3-Chloroperoxybenz oic acid (concentration ≤ 77% with inert solid and water), see – 5 . 2 3106 Chlorophacinone, see ORGANOC HLORINE PESTICIDE – – – CHLOROPHENOLATES, LIQUID – 8 2904 CHLOROPHENOLATES, SOLID – 8 2905 CHLOROPHENOLS, LIQUID – 6 . 1 2021 CHLOROPHENOLS, SOLI D – 6 . 1 2020 CHLOROPHENYLTRICHLORO SILANE P 8 1753 CHLOROPICRIN P 6 . 1 1580 CHLOROPICRIN AND M ETHYL BROMIDE MIXTURE with more than 2% chloropicrin – 2 . 3 1581 CHLOROPICRIN AND METHY L CHLORIDE MIXTURE – 2 . 3 1582 CHLOROPICRIN MIXTURE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1583 CHLOROPLATINIC A CID, SOLID – 8 2507 CHLOROPRENE, STABILIZED – 3 1991 1-CHLOROPROPANE – 3 1278 2-CHLOROPROPANE – 3 2356 3-Chloropropanediol-1,2, see – 6 . 1 2689 1-Chloro-2-propanol, se e – 6 . 1 2611 3-CHLOROPROPANOL-1 – 6 . 1 2849 2-CHLOROPROPENE – 3 2456 3- Chloropropene, see – 3 1100 3-Chloroprop-1-ene, see – 3 1100 2-CHLOROPROPIONIC ACID – 8 2511 alpha- Chloropropionic acid, see – 8 2511 2-Chloropropylene, see – 3 2456 alpha- Chloropropylene, see – 3 1100 2-CHLOROPYRIDINE – 6 . 1 2822 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 837

Index 293 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. CHLOROSILANES, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 8 2986 CHLOROSILANES, COR ROSIVE, N . O . S . – 8 2987 CHLOROSILANES, FLA MMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 3 2985 CHLOROSILANES, TOX IC, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3362 CHLOROSILANES, TO XIC, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3361 CHLOROSILANES, W ATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 2988 CHLOROSULPHONIC AC ID (with or without sulphur trioxide) – 8 1754 Chlorosulphuric acid, see – 6 . 1 1834 1-CHLORO-1,2,2 ,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE – 2 . 2 1021 meta- Chlorotoluene, see – 3 223 8 ortho- Chlorotoluene, see P 3 2238 para- Chlorotoluene, see – 3 2238 CHLOROTOLUENES – 3 2238 4-CHLORO- o- TOLUIDINE HYDROCHLORIDE, SOLID – 6 . 1 1579 4-CHLORO- o- TOLUIDIN E HYDROCHLORIDE SOLUTION – 6 . 1 3410 CHLOROTOLUIDINES, LIQUID – 6 . 1 3429 CHLOROTOLUIDINE S, SOLID – 6 . 1 2239 1-CHLORO-2,2,2- TRIFLUOROETHANE – 2 . 2 1983 Chlorotrifluoroeth ylene, stabilized, see – 2 . 3 1082 CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETH ANE – 2 . 2 1022 CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETH ANE AND TRIFLUOROMETHANE AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE with approximately 60% chlorotrifluoromethane – 2 . 2 2599 2-Chloro-5-trifluor omethylnitrobenzene, see P 6 . 1 2307 Chlorovinyl acetat e, see – 6 . 1 2589 Chlorphacinone, see ORGAN OCHLORINE PESTICIDE – – – Chlorpyriphos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Chlorthiophos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Chromic acid, solid, see – 5 . 1 1463 CHROMIC ACID SOLUTI ON – 8 1755 Chromic anhydride, see – 5 . 1 1463 CHROMIC FLUORIDE, S OLID – 8 1756 CHROMIC FLUORIDE SOLUTION – 8 1757 Chromic nitrate, see – 5 . 1 2720 Chromium(VI) dic hloride dioxide, see – 8 1758 Chromium(III) fluoride, solid, see – 8 1756 Chromium fluoride, solid, see – 8 1756 Chromium fluoride solution, see – 8 1757 CHROMIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 2720 Chromium(III) nitr ate, see – 5 . 1 2720 CHROMIUM OXYCHLORID E – 8 1758 CHROMIUM TRIOXIDE, ANHYDROUS – 5 . 1 1463 CHROMOSULPHURIC ACI D – 8 2240 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 838

Index 294 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Chromyl chloride, see – 8 1758 Chrysotile, see – 9 2590 Cinene, see P 3 2052 Cinnamene, see – 3 2055 Cinnamol, see – 3 2055 CLINICAL WASTE, UNSPECIFIED, N . O . S . – 6 . 2 3291 COAL GAS, COMPRESSED – 2 . 3 1023 Coal tar, see P 9 3082 COAL TAR DISTILLATES, FLAMMABLE – 3 1136 Coal tar naphtha, see – 3 1268 Coal tar oil, see – 3 1136 COATING SOLUTION (includes surface treatments or coatings used for industrial purposes such as vehicle under-coating, drum or barrel lining) – 3 1139 COBALT NAPHTHENATES, POWDER – 4 . 1 2001 COBALT RESINATE, PR ECIPITATED – 4 . 1 1318 Cocculus, see P 6 . 1 3172 Coconitrile, see P 9 3082 Collodion cottons (class 1), see NITROCELLULOSE – – – Collodion cotton with alcohol, see – 4 . 1 2556 Collodion cotton wi th plasticizing substance, see – 4 . 1 2557 Collodion cotton wit h water, see – 4 . 1 2555 Collodion solution, see – 3 2059 C OMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N . O . S . – 1 . 1B 0461 COMPONENTS, EXPL OSIVE TRAIN, N . O . S . – 1 . 2B 0382 COMPONENTS, EXPLO SIVE TRAIN, N . O . S . – 1 . 4B 0383 COMPONENTS, EXPLO SIVE TRAIN, N . O . S . – 1 . 4S 0384 Composition B, see – 1 . 1D 0118 COMPRESSED GAS, FL AMMABLE, N . O . S . – 2 . 1 1954 COMPRESSED GAS, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 1956 COMPRESSED GAS, OXID IZING, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 3156 COMPRESSED GAS, TOX IC, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3304 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXI C, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3305 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXI C, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 1953 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXI C, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 1955 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXI C, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3306 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXI C, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3303 Container under fumig ation, see – 9 3359 CONTRIVANCES, WATER-ACTIVATED with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 2L 0248 CONTRIVANCES, WATE R-ACTIVATED with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge – 1 . 3L 0249 COPPER ACETOARSENIT E P 6 . 1 1585 Copper arsenate, see – 6 . 1 1557 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 839

Index 295 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. COPPER ARSENITE P 6 . 1 1586 Copper(II) arse nite, see – 6 . 1 1586 COPPER BASED PEST ICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3010 COPPER BASED PESTI CIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 2776 COPPER BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 3009 COPPER BASED PESTI CIDE, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2775 COPPER CHLORATE – 5 . 1 2721 Copper(II) chlorat e, see – 5 . 1 2721 COPPER CHLORIDE P 8 2802 Copper compounds, see COPPER BASED PESTICIDE – – – COPPER CYANIDE P 6 . 1 1587 Copper metal powder , see Note 1 P – – Copper sulphate, anhydrous, hydrates and solutions, see Note 1 P – – COPRA – 4 . 2 1363 CORD, DETONATING, fle xible – 1 . 1D 0065 CORD, DETONATING, flexible – 1 . 4D 0289 CORD, DETONATING , metal-clad – 1 . 1D 0290 CORD, DETONATIN G, metal-clad – 1 . 2D 0102 CORD, DETONATING, M ILD EFFECT, metal-clad – 1 . 4D 0104 CORD, IGNITER – 1 . 4G 0066 Cordite, see POWDER, SM OKELESS – – – CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 8 3264 CORROSIVE LIQUID, A CIDIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 8 3265 CORROSIVE LIQUID, B ASIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 8 3266 CORROSIVE LIQUID, B ASIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 8 3267 CORROSIVE LIQUID, F LAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 8 2920 CORROSIVE LIQUID, N . O . S . – 8 1760 CORROSIVE LIQUID , OXIDIZING, N . O . S . – 8 3093 CORROSIVE LIQUID, SELF -HEATING, N . O . S . – 8 3301 CORROSIVE LIQUID, T OXIC, N . O . S . – 8 2922 CORROSIVE LIQUID, W ATER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . – 8 3094 CORROSIVE SOLID, A CIDIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 8 3260 CORROSIVE SOLID, AC IDIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 8 3261 CORROSIVE SOLID, BA SIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 8 3262 CORROSIVE SOLID, BA SIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 8 3263 CORROSIVE SOLID, FLAM MABLE, N . O . S . – 8 2921 CORROSIVE SOLID, N . O . S . – 8 1759 CORROSIVE SOLID, O XIDIZING, N . O . S . – 8 3084 CORROSIVE SOLID, SELF- HEATING, N . O . S . – 8 3095 CORROSIVE SOLID, TO XIC, N . O . S . – 8 2923 CORROSIVE SOLID, WA TER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . – 8 3096 Cosmetics, see – 3 1266 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 840

Index 296 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Cotton, dry, see – 4 . 1 3360 COTTON WASTE, OILY – 4 . 2 1364 COTTON, WET – 4 . 2 1365 Coumachlor, see COUMARI N DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE P – – Coumafuryl, see COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE – – – Coumaphos, see COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE P – – COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 3024 COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3026 COUMARIN DERIVATI VE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 3025 COUMARIN DERIVAT IVE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3027 Coumatetralyl, see COUM ARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE – – – Creosote, see P 9 3082 Creosote salts, see P 4 . 1 1334 CRESOLS, LIQUID – 6 . 1 2076 CRESOLS, SOLID – 6 . 1 3455 Cresyl diphenyl phos phate, see P 9 3082 CRESYLIC ACID – 6 . 1 2022 Crimidine, see ORGANOCH LORINE PESTICIDE – – – Crocidolite, see – 9 2212 CROTONALDEHYDE P 6 . 1 1143 CROTONALDEHYDE, STA BILIZED P 6 . 1 1143 CROTONIC ACID, LIQUID – 8 347 2 CROTONIC ACID, SOLID – 8 2823 Crotonic aldehyde, stabilized, see P 6 . 1 1143 CROTONYLENE – 3 1144 Crot oxyphos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Crude naphtha, see – 3 1268 Crufomate, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Cumene, see – 3 1918 Cumyl hydroperoxide (concentration ≤ 90%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3109 Cumyl hydroperoxide (concentration > 90–98%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3107 Cumyl peroxyneodeca noate (concentration ≤ 52% as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3119 Cumyl peroxyneodeca noate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 Cumyl peroxyneodeca noate (concentration ≤ 87%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3115 Cumyl peroxyneohept anoate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3115 Cumyl peroxypivalat e (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 Cupric arsenite, se e P 6 . 1 1586 Cupric chlorate, see – 5 . 1 2721 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 841

Index 297 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Cupric chloride, see P 8 2802 Cupric cyanide, see P 6 . 1 1587 Cupric sulphate , see Note 1 P – – CUPRIETHYLENEDIAMINE SOLUTION P 8 1761 Cuprous chloride, see P 8 2802 Cut-backs, see – 3 1999 CUTTERS, CABLE, EXPLOSIVE – 1 . 4S 0070 Cyanazine, see TRIAZIN E PESTICIDE – – – Cyanide mixture, inorganic, solid, N . O . S . , see P 6 . 1 1588 CYANIDES, INORGA NIC, SOLID, N . O . S . P 6 . 1 1588 CYANIDE SOLUTIO N, N . O . S . P 6 . 1 1935 Cyanides, organi c, flammable, toxic, N . O . S . , see – 3 3273 Cyanides, organ ic, toxic, flammable, N . O . S . , see – 6 . 1 3275 Cyanides, organic , toxic, N . O . S . , see – 6 . 1 3276 Cyanoacetonitrile, se e – 6 . 1 2647 CYANOGEN – 2 . 3 1026 CYANOGEN BROMIDE P 6 . 1 1889 CYANOGEN CHLORIDE , STABILIZED P 2 . 3 1589 Cyanophos, see ORGANOPHO SPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – CYANURIC CHLORIDE – 8 2670 CYCLOBUTANE – 2 . 1 2601 CYCLOBUTYL CHLOROF ORMATE – 6 . 1 2744 1,5,9-CYCLODODEC ATRIENE P 6 . 1 2518 CYCLOHEPTANE P 3 2241 CYCLOHEPTATRIENE – 3 2603 1,3,5-Cycloheptatriene, see – 3 2603 CYCLOHEPTENE – 3 2242 1,4-Cyclohexadienedione, see – 6 . 1 2587 CYCLOHEXANE – 3 1145 CYC LOHEXANETHIOL – 3 3054 CYCLOHEXANONE – 3 1915 Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) (concentration ≤ 32%, with inert solid) (exempt) – – – Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) (concentration ≤ 72%, as a paste, with diluent Type A, with or without water, available oxygen ≤ 9%), see – 5 . 2 3106 Cyclohexanone peroxi de(s) (concentration ≤ 72%, with diluent Type A, available oxygen ≤ 9%), see – 5 . 2 3105 Cyclohexanone peroxi de(s) (concentration ≤ 91%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3104 CYCLOHEXENE – 3 2256 CYCLO HEXENYLTRICHLOROSILANE – 8 1762 Cycloheximide, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . – – – CYCLOHEXYL ACETATE – 3 224 3 CYCLOHEXYLAMINE – 8 2357 CYCLOHEXYL ISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2488 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 842

Index 298 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. CYCLOHEXYL MERCAPTAN – 3 3054 CYCLOHEXYLTRICHLOROSILANE – 8 1763 CYCLONITE AND CYCLOTETRAMETHYLENETETRANITRAMINE MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLONITE AND CYC LOTETRAMETHYLENETETRANITRAMINE MIXTURE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLONITE AND HMX MI XTURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLONITE AND HMX MI XTURE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLONITE AND OCTO GEN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLONITE AND OCTO GEN MIXTURE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLONITE, DESENS ITIZED – 1 . 1D 0483 CYCLONITE, WETTE D with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0072 CYCLOOCTADIENEP HOSPHINES – 4 . 2 2940 CYCLOOCTADIENES – 3 252 0 CYCLOOCTATETRAENE – 3 2358 CYCLOPENTANE – 3 1146 CYCLOPENTANOL – 3 2244 CYCLOPENTANONE – 3 2245 CYCLOPENTENE – 3 2246 CYCLOPROPANE – 2 . 1 1027 CYCLOTETRAMETHYLENETE TRANITRAMINE, DESENSITIZED – 1 . 1D 0484 CYCLOTETRAMETHYLENE TETRANITRAMINE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0226 CYCLOTRIMETHYLENETR INITRAMINE AND CYCLOTETRAMETHYLENETETRANITRAMINE MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLOTRIMETHYLENETR INITRAMINE AND CYCLOTETRAMETHYLENETETRANITRAMINE MIXTURE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLOTRIMETHYLENETR INITRAMINE AND HMX MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLOTRIMETHYLENETR INITRAMINE AND HMX MIXTURE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLOTRIMETHYLENETR INITRAMINE AND OCTOGEN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLOTRIMETHYLENETR INITRAMINE AND OCTOGEN MIXTURE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 CYCLOTRIMETHYLENETR INITRAMINE, DESENSITIZED – 1 . 1D 0483 CYCLOTRIMETHYL ENETRINITRAMINE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0072 Cyhexatin, see ORGANO TIN PESTICIDE P – – CYMENES P 3 2046 Cymol, see P 3 2046 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 843

Index 299 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Cypermethrin, see PYRETHROID PESTICIDE P – – 2,4-D, see PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE – – – DANGEROUS GOODS IN ARTICLES – 9 3363 DANGEROUS GOODS IN APPARATUS – 9 3363 DANGEROUS GOODS IN MACHINERY – 9 3363 Dazomet, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . – – – 2,4-DB, see PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE – – – DDT, see ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE P – – Deanol, see – 8 2051 DECABORANE – 4 . 1 1868 DECAHYDRONAPHTHALEN ES – 3 1147 Decaldehyde, see P 9 3082 Decalin, see – 3 1147 ([3R-(3R,5aS,6S,8aS,9R,10R,12S,12aR**)]-Decahydro-10-methoxy- 3,6,9-trimethyl-3,12-epoxy-12H-pyrano[4,3-j]-1,2-benzodioxepin), see – 5 . 2 3106 n- DECANE – 3 2247 Decyl acryla te, see P 9 3082 Decyloxytetrahydrothiophene dioxide , see Note 1 P – – DEF, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – DEFLAGRATING METAL SALTS OF AROMATIC NITRO- DERIVATIVES, N . O . S . – 1 . 3C 0132 Demephion, see ORGAN OPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Demeton, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Demeton-O, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Demeton-O-methyl, thiono isomer, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Demeton-S-methyl, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Demeton-S-methylsulphoxyd, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Depth charges, see – 1 . 1D 0056 DESENSITIZED EX PLOSIVE, LIQUID, N . O . S . – 3 3379 DESENSITIZED EXPL OSIVE, SOLID, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3380 Desmedipham, see Not e 1 P – – Detonating relays, see DETONATOR ASSEMBLIES, NON-ELECTRIC, for blasting or see DETONATORS, NON-ELECTRIC for blasting – – – DETONATOR ASSEMBLIES, NON-ELECTRIC for blasting – 1 . 1B 0360 DETONATOR ASSEMB LIES, NON-ELECTRIC for blasting – 1 . 4B 0361 DETONATOR ASSEMBL IES, NON-ELECTRIC for blasting – 1 . 4S 0500 DETONATORS, ELECT RIC for blasting – 1 . 1B 0030 DETONATORS, ELEC TRIC for blasting – 1 . 4B 0255 DETONATORS, ELECT RIC for blasting – 1 . 4S 0456 DETONATORS, ELE CTRONIC programmable for blasting – 1 . 1B 0511 ■ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 844

Index 300 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. DETONATORS, ELECTRONIC programmable for blasting – 1 . 4B 0512 DETONATORS, ELEC TRONIC programmable for blasting – 1 . 4S 0513 DETONATORS FOR AMM UNITION – 1 . 1B 0073 DETONATORS FOR AMM UNITION – 1 . 2B 0364 DETONATORS FOR AMMU NITION – 1 . 4B 0365 DETONATORS FOR AMMU NITION – 1 . 4S 0366 DETONATORS, NON-E LECTRIC for blasting – 1 . 1B 0029 DETONATORS, NON- ELECTRIC for blasting – 1 . 4B 0267 DETONATORS, NON-E LECTRIC for blasting – 1 . 4S 0455 DEUTERIUM, COMPRES SED – 2 . 1 1957 DEVICES, SMALL, HYDR OCARBON GAS POWERED – 2 . 1 3150 Diacetone, see – 3 1148 DIACE TONE ALCOHOL – 3 1148 Diacetone alcohol peroxides (concentration ≤ 57%, with diluent Type B and water, hydrogen peroxide ≤ 9%, available oxygen ≤ 10%), see – 5 . 2 3115 Diacetyl, see – 3 2346 Diacetyl p eroxide (concentration ≤ 27%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 Dialifos, see ORGANOPHOSP HORUS PESTICIDE P – – Diallate, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . P – – DIALLYLAMINE – 3 2359 DIALLYL ETHER – 3 2360 Diamine, aqueous solution, see – 6 . 1 3293 Diaminobenzenes ( orth o- ; meta- ; para- ), see – 6 . 1 1673 4,4 ′ -DIAMINODIPHENYL METHANE P 6 . 1 2651 1,2-Diaminoethane, see – 8 1 604 1,6-Diaminohexane, solid, see – 8 2280 1,6-Diaminohexane solution, see – 8 1783 Diaminopropylamine, see – 8 2269 DI- n- AMYLAMINE – 3 2841 Di- tert- amyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3107 2,2-Di-( tert- amylpero xy)butane (concentration ≤ 57%, with diluent Type A) – 5 . 2 3105 1,1-Di-( tert- amylper oxy)cyclohexane (concentration ≤ 82%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3103 Diazinon, see ORGANOPHOSPH ORUS PESTICIDE P – – DIAZODINITROPHENOL, WETTED with not less than 40% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1A 0074 2-Diazo-1-naphthol -4-sulphonyl chloride (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3222 2-Diazo-1-naphthol-5 -sulphonyl chloride (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3222 2-Diazo-1-naphth olsulphonic acid ester mixtures Type D (concentration < 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 Dibenzopyridine, se e – 6 . 1 2713 Dibenzoyl peroxi de (concentration ≤ 35%, with inert solid) (exempt) – – – Dibenzoyl peroxide (concentration > 35–52%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3106 ■ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 845

Index 301 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Dibenzoyl peroxide (concentration > 36–42%, with diluent Type A and water), see – 5 . 2 3107 Dibenzoyl peroxid e (concentration ≤ 42% as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3109 Dibenzoyl peroxid e (concentration > 52–100%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3102 Dibenzoyl peroxid e (concentration ≤ 52%, as a paste, with diluent Type A, with or without water), see – 5 . 2 3108 Dibenzoyl peroxid e (concentration > 52–62%, as a paste, with diluent Type A, with or without water), see – 5 . 2 3106 Dibenzoyl peroxid e (concentration ≤ 56 . 5% as a paste, with water), see – 5 . 2 3108 Dibenzoyl peroxid e (concentration ≤ 62%, with inert solid and water), see – 5 . 2 3106 Dibenzoyl peroxid e (concentration ≤ 77%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3104 Dibenzoyl peroxid e (concentration > 77–94%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3102 DIBENZYLDICHLOROSI LANE – 8 2434 DIBORANE – 2 . 3 1911 1,3-Dibromobenzene , see P 9 3082 1,2-DIBROMOBUTAN-3-ONE – 6 . 1 2648 1,2-Dibromo-3- chloropropane (pesticides), see DIBROMOCHLOROPROPANES – 6 . 1 2872 DIBROMOCHLOROPROPA NES – 6 . 1 2872 DIBROMODIFLUOROME THANE – 9 1941 1,2-Dibromoethane, see – 6 . 1 1605 DIBROMOMETHANE – 6 . 1 2664 2,5-Dibutoxy-4-( 4-morpholinyl)benzenediazonium tetrachlorozincate (2:1) (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3228 Di- n- BUTYLAMINE – 8 2248 Dibu tylaminoethanol, see – 6 . 1 2873 2-Dibutylaminoet hanol, see – 6 . 1 2873 DI-BUTYLAMINOETHA NOL – 6 . 1 2873 1,4-Di- tert- butylbenz ene, see P 9 3077 DI-(4- tert -butylcyclohexyl) peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 42%, as a paste), see – 5 . 2 3116 Di-(4- tert- butylcycloh exyl) peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 42%, as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3119 Di-(4- tert- butylcycloh exyl) peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3114 DIBUTYL ETHERS – 3 1149 D i- normal- butyl ketone, see P 3 1224 Di- tert- butyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3109 Di- tert- butyl peroxide (concentration > 52–100%), see – 5 . 2 3107 Di- tert- butyl peroxyaz elate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 2,2-Di-( tert- butylper oxy)butane (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3103 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 846

Index 302 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. 1,6-Di-( tert- butylperoxycarbonyloxy)hexane (concentration ≤ 72%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3103 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpero xy)cyclohexane (concentration ≤ 13%, with diluents Type A and B), see – 5 . 2 3109 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpero xy)cyclohexane (concentration ≤ 27%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3107 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpero xy)cyclohexane (concentration ≤ 42%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3109 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpero xy)cyclohexane (concentration ≤ 42%, with diluent Type A and inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3106 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpero xy)cyclohexane (concentration > 42–52%, with diluent Type A) – 5 . 2 3105 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpero xy)cyclohexane (concentration > 52–80%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3103 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpero xy)cyclohexane (concentration ≤ 72%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3103 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpero xy)cyclohexane (concentration > 80–100%), see – 5 . 2 3101 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpe roxy)cyclohexane + tert- butyl peroxy-2- ethylhexanoate (concentration ≤ 43% + ≤ 16%, with diluent Type A) – 5 . 2 3105 Di- n- butyl peroxydicarb onate (concentration ≤ 27%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3117 Di- n- butyl peroxydicarb onate (concentration > 27–52%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 Di- n- butyl peroxydicarb onate (concentration ≤ 42% as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)), see – 5 . 2 3118 Di- sec- butyl peroxydica rbonate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 Di- sec- butyl peroxydica rbonate (concentration > 52–100%), see – 5 . 2 3113 Di-( tert- butylperoxyiso propyl)benzene(s) (concentration ≤ 42%, with inert solid) (exempt) – – – Di-( tert- butylperoxyisopropyl)benzene(s) (concentration > 42–100%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3106 Di-( tert- butylperoxy ) phthalate (concentration ≤ 42%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3107 Di-( tert- butylperoxy ) phthalate (concentration > 42–52%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 Di-( tert- butylperoxy ) phthalate (concentration ≤ 52%, as a paste with diluent Type A, with or without water), see – 5 . 2 3106 2,2-Di-( tert- butylpero xy)propane (concentration ≤ 42%, with diluent Type A, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3106 2,2-Di-( tert- butylpero xy)propane (concentration ≤ 52% with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpe roxy)-3,3,5-trimethyl cyclohexane (concentr ation ≤ 32%, with diluents Type A and B), see – 5 . 2 3107 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpe roxy)-3,3,5-trimethyl cyclohexane (concentr ation ≤ 57%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3107 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpe roxy)-3,3,5-trimethyl cyclohexane (concentr ation ≤ 57%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3110 1,1-Di-( tert- butylpe roxy)-3,3,5-trimethyl cyclohexane (concentr ation > 57–90%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3103 △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 847

Index 303 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. 1,1-Di-( tert- butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethyl cyclohexane (concent ration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3103 1,1-Di-( tert- butylp eroxy)-3,3,5-trimethyl cyclohexane (concent ration ≤ 90%, with diluent Type B) – 5 . 2 3103 1,1-Di-( tert- butylp eroxy)-3,3,5-trimethyl cyclohexane (concent ration > 90–100%), see – 5 . 2 3101 2,4-Di- tert- butylphenol , see Note 1 – – – 2,6-Di- tert- butylphenol, see Note 1 – – – Di- n- butyl phthalate, see P 9 3082 Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 42% as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3119 Dicetyl peroxydic arbonate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3120 Dichlofenthion, see ORGA NOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – 1,1-DICHLORO-1-NITROETHANE – 6 . 1 2650 DICHLOROACETIC ACID – 8 17 64 1,3-DICHLOROACETONE – 6 . 1 2649 DICHLOROACETYL CHLOR IDE – 8 1765 DICHLOROANILINES, LIQUID P 6 . 1 1590 DICHLOROANILINES, SOLID P 6 . 1 3442 1,2-Dichlorobenz ene, see – 6 . 1 1591 1,3-Dichloroben zene, see P 6 . 1 2810 1,4-Dichlorobenzen e, see P 9 3082 meta- Dichlorobenzene, see P 6 . 1 2810 o- DICHLOROBENZENE – 6 . 1 1591 para- Dichloroben zene, see P 9 3082 Di-(4-chlorobenzoyl) peroxide (concentration ≤ 32%, with inert solid) (exempt) – – – Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 52%, as a paste, with diluent Type A, with or without water), see – 5 . 2 3106 Di-4-chlorobenzoy l peroxide (concentration ≤ 77%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3102 2,2 ′ -DICHLORODIETHYL E THER – 6 . 1 1916 DICHLORODIFLUOROMET HANE – 2 . 2 1028 DICHLORODIFLUOROMET HANE AND DIFLUOROETHANE AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE with approximately 74% dichloro-difluoromethane – 2 . 2 2602 Dichlorodifluorome thane and ethylene oxide mixture, see – 2 . 2 3070 DICHLORODIMETHYL ETH ER, SYMMETRICAL – 6 . 1 2249 1,1-DICHLOROETHAN E – 3 2362 1,2-Dichloroethane, see – 3 1184 1,1-Dichloroethylene, stabilized, see P 3 1303 1,2-DICHLOROETHYLENE – 3 1150 Di-(2-chloroethyl) ether, see – 6 . 1 1916 DICHLOROFLUOROMETHA NE – 2 . 2 1029 1,6-Dichlorohexane , see P 9 3082 alpha- Dichlorohydrin, see – 6 . 1 2750 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 848

Index 304 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. DICHLOROISOCYANURIC ACID, DRY – 5 . 1 2465 DICHLOROISOCYANURIC A CID SALTS – 5 . 1 2465 Dichloroisopropyl al cohol, see – 6 . 1 2750 DICHLOROISOPROPYL ETH ER – 6 . 1 2490 DICHLOROMETHANE – 6 . 1 1593 DICHLOROPENTANES – 3 115 2 2,4-Dichlorophenol, see P 6 . 1 2020 Dichlorophenols, liqui d, see – 6 . 1 2021 Dichlorophenols, solid , see – 6 . 1 2020 DICHLOROPHENYL ISOCY ANATES – 6 . 1 2250 DICHLOROPHENYLTRICHL OROSILANE P 8 1766 1,1-Dichloropropane, see – 3 1993 1,2-DICHLOROPROPANE – 3 1279 1,3-Dichloropropane, see – 3 1993 1,3-DICHLOROPROPANOL-2 – 6 . 1 2750 1,3-Dichloro-2-p ropanone, see – 6 . 1 2649 1,3-Dichloropropene , see P 3 2047 DICHLOROPROPENES – 3 2047 DICHLOROSILANE – 2 . 3 2189 1,2-DICHLORO-1,1,2 ,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE – 2 . 2 1958 Dichloro- s- triazine-2, 4,6-trione – 5 . 1 2465 Dichlorvos, see ORGANOPH OSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Diclofop-methyl, see Note 1 P – – Dicoumarol, see COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE – – – Dicrotophos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Dicumyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 52%, with inert solid) (exempt) – – – Dicumyl peroxide (concentration > 52–100%), see – 5 . 2 3110 1,4-Dicyanobutane, see – 6 . 1 2205 Dicyanogen, see – 2 . 3 1026 Dicycloheptadiene, sta bilized, see – 3 2251 DICYCLOHEXYLAMINE – 8 2565 Dicyclohexylamine nitrite, see – 4 . 1 2687 DICYCLOHEXYLAMMONI UM NITRITE – 4 . 1 2687 Dicyclohexyl perox ydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 42% as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3119 Dicyclohexyl peroxy dicarbonate (concentration ≤ 91%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3114 Dicyclohexyl peroxy dicarbonate (concentration > 91–100%), see – 5 . 2 3112 DICYCLOPENTADIEN E – 3 2048 Didecanoyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3114 2,2-Di-(4,4-di-( ter t- butylperoxy)cyclohexyl)propane (concentration ≤ 22%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3107 2,2-Di-(4,4-di-( ter t- butylperoxy)cyclohexyl)propane (concentration ≤ 42%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3106 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 849

Index 305 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Di-2,4-dichlorobenzoyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 52%, as a paste) – 5 . 2 3118 Di-(2,4-dichlorob enzoyl) peroxide (concentration ≤ 52%, as a paste, with silicon oil), see – 5 . 2 3106 Di-(2,4-dichlorob enzoyl) peroxide (concentration ≤ 77%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3102 1,2-DI-(DIMETHYLAM INO)ETHANE – 3 2372 DIDYMIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 1465 Dieldrin, see ORGANOCH LORINE PESTICIDE P – – DIESEL FUEL – 3 1202 1,1-Diethoxyethane, see – 3 1088 1,2-Diethoxyethane, see – 3 1153 Di-(2-ethoxyethyl) peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 DIETHOXYMETHANE – 3 2373 2, 5-Diethoxy-4-morpholinobenzenediazonium tetrafluoroborate (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3236 2,5-Diethoxy-4-m orpholinobenzenediazonium zinc chloride (concentration 66%), see – 4 . 1 3236 2,5-Diethoxy-4-m orpholinobenzenediazonium zinc chloride (concentration 67–100%), see – 4 . 1 3236 2,5-Diethoxy-4-( 4-morpholinyl)benzenediazonium sulphate (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 2,5-Diethoxy-4-( phenylsulphonyl)benzenediazonium zinc chloride (concentration 67%), see – 4 . 1 3236 3,3-DIETHOXYPRO PENE – 3 2374 Diethylacetaldehyde, see – 3 1178 DIETHYLAMINE – 3 1154 1-Diethylamino-4-aminopentane, see – 6 . 1 2946 Diethylaminoethanol, se e – 8 2686 2-DIETHYLAMINOETHANOL – 8 2686 3-DIETHYLAMINOPROPYLAMINE – 3 2684 N , N- DIETHYLANILINE – 6 . 1 2432 DIETHYLBENZENES – 3 2049 D iethyl carbinol, see – 3 1105 DIETHYL CARBONATE – 3 2366 DIETHYLDICHLOROSILANE – 8 1767 Diethylenediamine, see – 8 2579 Diethylenediamine, solid, see – 8 2579 1,4-Diethylene dioxide, see – 3 1165 Diethyleneglycol bis(allyl carbonate) + di-isopropyl peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≥ 88% + ≤ 12%), see – 4 . 1 3237 DIETHYLENEGLYC OL DINITRATE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 25% non-volatile, water-insoluble phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0075 Diethylene oxide, see – 3 11 65 DIETHYLENETRIAMINE – 8 2079 N , N- Diethylethanolamine, see – 8 2686 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 850

Index 306 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. DIETHYL ETHER – 3 1155 N , N- DIETHYLETHYLENEDIAMINE – 8 2685 Diethyl formal, see – 3 2373 Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 52%, as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)), see – 5 . 2 3120 Di-(2-ethylhexyl) pe roxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 62%, as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3119 Di-(2-ethylhexyl) pe roxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 Di-(2-ethylhexyl) pe roxydicarbonate (concentration > 77–100%), see – 5 . 2 3113 Di-(2-ethylhexyl)pho sphoric acid, see – 8 1902 DIETHYL KETONE – 3 1156 Diethyl oxalate, see – 6 . 1 2525 N , N- Diethyl-1,3-propane diamine, see – 3 2684 DIETHYL SULPHATE – 6 . 1 1594 DIETHYL SULPHIDE – 3 2375 D IETHYLTHIOPHOSPHORYL CHLORIDE – 8 2751 Diethylzinc, see – 4 . 2 3394 Difenacoum, see COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE – – – Difenzoquat, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . – – – 2,4-Difluoroaniline, see – 6 . 1 2941 Difluorochloroethane , see – 2 . 1 2517 Difluorodibromom ethane, see – 9 1941 1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE – 2 . 1 1030 Difluoroethane and di chlorodifluoromethane, azeotropic mixture with approximately 74% dichlorodifluoromethane, see DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE AND DIFLUOROETHANE, AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE – – – 1,1-DIFLUOROETHYLENE – 2 . 1 1959 DIFLUOROMETHANE – 2 . 1 3252 DIFLUOROPHOSPHORIC ACI D, ANHYDROUS – 8 1768 2,2-Dihydroperoxypropane (concentration ≤ 27%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3102 2,3-DIHYDROPYRAN – 3 2376 met a- Dihydroxybenzene, see – 6 . 1 2876 Di-(1-hydroxycyc lohexyl) peroxide (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3106 DIISOBUTYLAMINE – 3 2361 DI ISOBUTYLENES, ISOMERIC COMPOUNDS – 3 2050 DIISOBUTYL KETONE – 3 1157 Diisobutyryl peroxide (concentration ≤ 42%, as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3119 Diisobutyryl peroxi de (concentration ≤ 32%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 Diisobutyryl peroxi de (concentration > 32–52%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3111 DIISOOCTYL ACID PHOSP HATE – 8 1902 Diisopropyl, see – 3 2457 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 851

Index 307 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. DIISOPROPYLAMINE – 3 1158 Diisopropylbenzene dihydroperoxide (concentration ≤ 82%, with diluent Type A and water), see – 5 . 2 3106 Diisopropylbenzene s, see P 9 3082 DIISOPROPYL ETHER – 3 1159 Diisopropylnaphthalenes, mixed isomers, see P 9 3082 Diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 32%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3115 Diisopropyl peroxy dicarbonate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 Diisopropyl peroxy dicarbonate (concentration > 52–100%), see – 5 . 2 3112 DIKETENE, STABILI ZED – 6 . 1 2521 Dilauroyl peroxid e (concentration ≤ 42%, as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3109 Dilauroyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3106 Dimefox, see ORGANOPHO SPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Dimetan, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE – – – Dimethoate, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Di-(3-methoxybutyl) peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 1,1-DIMETHOXYETHAN E – 3 2377 1,2-DIMETHOXYETHANE – 3 2252 Dimethoxymethane, see – 3 1234 2,5-Dimethoxy-4-(4-methylphenylsulphonyl)benzene diazonium zinc chlo ride (concentration 79%), see – 4 . 1 3236 Dimethoxystrychnin e, see – 6 . 1 1570 Dimethyl acetal, see – 3 2 377 1,1-Dimethylacetone, see – 3 2397 Dimethylacetylene, see – 3 1144 DIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS – 2 . 1 1032 DIMETHYLAMINE, AQUEOUS SOLUTION – 3 1160 2-DIMETHYLAMINOACETONITRILE – 3 2378 4-(Dimethylamino)benzenediazonium trichlorozincate(–1) (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3228 4-Dimethylamino- 6-(2-dimethylaminoethoxy)toluene-2-diazonium zinc chloride (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3236 2-DIMETHYLAMINOETHA NOL – 8 2051 2-DIMETHYLAMINOETHYL ACRYLATE, STABILIZED – 6 . 1 3302 2-DIMETHYLAMINOETHYL ME THACRYLATE, STABILIZED – 6 . 1 2522 N , N- DIMETHYLANILINE – 6 . 1 2253 3,4-Dimethylanili ne, see – 6 . 1 1711 Dimethylarsinic acid , see – 6 . 1 1572 Dimethylbenzen es, see – 3 1307 Di-(2-methylbenzoyl) peroxide (concentration ≤ 87%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3112 △ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 852

Index 308 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Di-(3-methylbenzoyl) peroxide (concentration ≤ 20%), with benzoyl (3-methylbenzoyl) peroxide (concentration ≤ 18%), with dibenzoyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 4%) and diluent Type B, see – 5 . 2 3115 Di-(4-methylbenzoyl ) peroxide (concentration ≤ 52%, as a paste with silicon oil), see – 5 . 2 3106 Dimethylbenzylamin e, see – 8 2619 N , N- Dimethylbenzylamine, see – 8 2619 2,3-DIMETHYLBUTANE – 3 2457 1,3-DIMETHYLBUTYLAMINE – 3 2379 DIMETHYLCARBAMOYL CHLORIDE – 8 2262 Dimethyl carbinol, see – 3 1219 DIMETHYL CARBONATE – 3 1161 DIMETHYLCYCLOHEXANES – 3 2263 N , N- DIMETHYLCYCLOHEXYLAMINE – 8 2264 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(benzoylperoxy)hexane (concentration ≤ 82%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3106 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-d i-(benzoylperoxy)hexane (concentration ≤ 82%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3104 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-d i-(benzoylperoxy)hexane (concentration > 82–100%), see – 5 . 2 3102 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di -( tert- butylperoxy)hexane (concentration ≤ 47%, as a paste), see – 5 . 2 3108 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di -( tert- butylperoxy)hexane (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3109 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di -( tert- butylperoxy)hexane (concentration > 52–90%), see – 5 . 2 3105 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di -( tert- butylperoxy)hexane (concentration ≤ 77%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3108 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di -( tert- butylperoxy)hexane (concentration > 90–100%), see – 5 . 2 3103 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di -( tert- butylperoxy)hexyne-3 (concentration ≤ 52%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3106 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di -( tert- butylperoxy)hexyne-3 (concentration > 52–86%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3103 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di -( tert- butylperoxy)hexyne-3 (concentration > 86–100%), see – 5 . 2 3101 DIMETHYLDICHLOROSILA NE – 3 1162 DIMETHYLDIETHOXYSILANE – 3 2380 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(2-ethylhexanoylperoxy)hexane (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3113 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5 -dihydroperoxyhexane (concentration ≤ 82%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3104 DIMETHYLDIOXANES – 3 2707 DIM ETHYL DISULPHIDE P 3 2381 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl peroxy) hexane (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 N , N- Dimethyldodecylami ne, see Note 1 P – – Dimethyleneimine, stabilized, see – 6 . 1 1185 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 853

Index 309 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Dimethylethanolamine, see – 8 2051 DIMETHYL ETHER – 2 . 1 1033 N , N- DIMETHYLFORMAMID E – 3 2265 N , N- Dimethylglycinonitrile, see – 3 2378 Dimethylglyoxal, see – 3 2346 2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanone, see – 3 1157 1,1-Dimethylhydrazine, see P 6 . 1 1163 1,2-Dimethylhydr azine, see P 6 . 1 2382 DIMETHYLHYDRAZINE, S YMMETRICAL P 6 . 1 2382 DIMETHYLHYDRAZINE, U NSYMMETRICAL P 6 . 1 1163 1,1-Dimethyl-3 -hydroxybutyl peroxyneoheptanoate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3117 Dimethyl ketone, see – 3 1090 D imethyl ketone solutions, see – 3 1090 N , N- Dimethyl-4-nitrosoaniline, see – 4 . 2 1369 para- Dimethylnitro soaniline, see – 4 . 2 1369 Dimethylphenols, l iquid, see – 6 . 1 3430 Dimethylphenols, s olid, see – 6 . 1 2261 Dimethyl phosphor ochlorodithionate, see – 6 . 1 2267 2,2-DIMETHYLPROPA NE – 2 . 1 2044 DIMETHYL- N -PROPYLAMIN E – 3 2266 Dimethyl- n- propylamine, see – 3 2266 Dimethyl normal- propyl carbinol, see – 3 2560 DIMETHYL SULPHATE – 6 . 1 1595 DIMETHYL SULPHIDE – 3 11 64 DIMETHYL THIOPHOSPHORYL CHLORIDE – 6 . 1 2267 Dimethylzinc, see – 4 . 2 3394 Dimetilan, see CARBAMAT E PESTICIDE – – – Dimexano, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . – – – Dimyristyl peroxydi carbonate (concentration ≤ 42%, as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3119 Dimyristyl peroxy dicarbonate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3116 Di-(2-neodecanoylp eroxyisopropyl)benzene (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3115 DINGU – 1 . 1D 0489 DINITROANILINES – 6 . 1 1596 DINITROBENZEN ES, LIQUID – 6 . 1 1597 DINITROBENZEN ES, SOLID – 6 . 1 3443 Dinitrochlorobenz enes, liquid, see P 6 . 1 1577 Dinitrochloroben zenes, solid, see P 6 . 1 3441 DINITRO- o- CRESOL P 6 . 1 1598 Dinitrogen oxide, se e – 2 . 2 1070 Dinitrogen oxide, r efrigerated liquid, see – 2 . 2 2201 DINITROGEN TETROXIDE – 2 . 3 1067 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 854

Index 310 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Dinitrogen tetroxide and nitric oxide mixtures, see NITRIC OXIDE AND DINITROGEN TETROXIDE MIXTURE – – – Dinitrogen trioxide, see – 2 . 3 2421 DINITROGLYCOLURIL – 1 . 1D 0489 Dinitrophenates (c lass 1), see P 1 . 3C 0077 Dinitrophenates, we tted, see P 4 . 1 1321 DINITROPHENOLA TES, alkali metals, dry or wetted with less than 15% water, by mass P 1 . 3C 0077 DINITROPHENOLAT ES, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass P 4 . 1 1321 DINITROPHENOL, d ry or wetted with less than 15% water, by mass P 1 . 1D 0076 DINITROPHENOL SOLU TION P 6 . 1 1599 DINITROPHENOL, W ETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass P 4 . 1 1320 DINITRORESORCI NOL, dry or wetted with less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0078 DINITRORESORCI NOL, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1322 DINITROSOBENZENE – 1 . 3C 0406 N , N ′ -Dinitroso- N , N ′ -dimet hylterephthalamide, as a paste (concentration 72%), see – 4 . 1 3224 N , N ′ -Dinitrosopentame thylenetetramine (concentration 82%), see – 4 . 1 3224 Dinitrotoluene mi xed with sodium chlorate, see – 1 . 1D 0083 DINITROTOLUENES, LIQUID P 6 . 1 2038 DINITROTOLUENES , MOLTEN P 6 . 1 1600 DINITROTOLUENES, SOLID P 6 . 1 3454 Dinobuton, see SUBSTITU TED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE P – – Di- n- nonanoyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3116 Dinoseb, see SUBSTITUTE D NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE P – – Dinoseb acetate, see SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE P – – Dinoterb, see SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE – – – Dinoterb acetate, see SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE – – – Di- n- octanoyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3114 Dioxacarb, see CARBAMATE P ESTICIDE P – – DIOXANE – 3 1165 Dioxathion, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – DIOXOLANE – 3 1166 DIPENTENE P 3 2052 Di- normal- pentylamine, see – 3 2841 Diphacinone, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . P – – Di-(2-phenoxyethyl) peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 85%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3106 Di-(2-phenoxyethyl ) peroxydicarbonate (concentration > 85–100%), see – 5 . 2 3102 Diphenyl, see P 9 3077 DIPHENYLAMINE CHLOROARSINE P 6 . 1 1698 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 855

Index 311 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Diphenylbromomethane, see – 8 1770 DIPHENYLCHLOROARSINE, LIQUID P 6 . 1 1699 DIPHENYLCHLOROARSI NE, SOLID P 6 . 1 3450 DIPHENYLDICHLOROS ILANE – 8 1769 DIPHENYLMETHYL BROMIDE – 8 1770 Diphenyloxide-4,4 ′ -disulphonylhydrazide (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 DIPICRYLAMINE – 1 . 1D 0079 DIPICRYL SULPHIDE, dry or wetted with less than 10% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0401 DIPICRYL SULPHI DE, WETTED with not less than 10% water, by mass – 4 . 1 2852 Di-2-propenylami ne, see – 3 2359 Dipropionyl peroxide (concentration ≤ 27%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3117 DIPROPYLAMINE – 3 2383 Di- n- pr opylamine, see – 3 2383 4-Dipropylaminobenzenediazonium zinc chloride (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 Dipropylenetriamine , see – 8 2269 DI- n- PROPYL ETHER – 3 2384 DIPROPYL KETONE – 3 2710 Di- n- propyl peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3113 Di- n- propyl peroxydic arbonate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3113 Diquat, see BIPYRIDIL IUM PESTICIDE – – – DISINFECTANT, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 8 1903 DISINFECTANT, LIQ UID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3142 DISINFECTANT, SO LID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1601 DISODIUM TRIOXOSI LICATE – 8 3253 Disodium trioxosilicate pentahydrate, see – 8 3253 Disuccinic acid peroxide (concentration ≤ 72%, with water), see – 5 . 2 3116 Disuccinic acid peroxide ( concentration > 72–100%), see – 5 . 2 3102 Disulfoton, see ORGANOPH OSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Disulphuric acid, see – 8 1831 Disulphuryl chloride, see – 8 1817 Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide (concentration ≤ 38%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3119 Di-(3,5,5-trimet hylhexanoyl) peroxide (concentration > 52–82%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3115 Di-(3,5,5-trimet hylhexanoyl) peroxide (concentration ≤ 52%, as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3119 Di-(3,5,5-trimet hylhexanoyl) peroxide (concentration > 38–52%, with diluent Type A), see - 5 . 2 3119 DIVINYL ETHER, STABI LIZED – 3 1167 Divinyl oxide, stabilized, see – 3 1167 Divinyl, stabilized, see – 2 . 1 1010 DNOC, see P 6 . 1 1598 DNOC (pesticide), se e SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE P – – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 856

Index 312 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Dodecahydrodiphenylamine, see – 8 2565 1-dodecene, see – 3 2850 Dodecene, see P 3 2850 1-Dodecylamine, see Note 1 P – – Dodecyl diphenyl oxide disulphonate, see P 9 3077 Dodecyl hydroxypropyl sulphide, see Note 1 P – – Dodecylphenol, see P 8 3145 DODECYLTRICHLOROSILANE – 8 1771 Drazoxolon, see ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE P – – DRY ICE – 9 1845 DYE INTERMEDIATE, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 8 2801 DYE INTERMEDIATE, LI QUID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1602 DYE INTERMEDIATE , SOLID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 8 3147 DYE INTERMEDIATE, SO LID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3143 DYE, LIQUID, CORROS IVE, N . O . S . – 8 2801 DYE, LIQUID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1602 DYE, SOLID, CORROS IVE, N . O . S . – 8 3147 DYE, SOLID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3143 Dynamite, see – 1 . 1D 0081 Edifenphos, see ORGANOPH OSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Electric storage batteries, see BATTERIES – – – Electrolyte (acid) for batteries, see – 8 2796 Electrolyte (alkaline) for batteries, see – 8 2797 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with flashpoint above 60 ° C , at or above its flashpoint – 3 3256 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE LIQUID, N . O . S . at or above 100 ° C and below its fl ashpoint (including molten metals, molten salts, etc . ) – 9 3257 ELEVATED TEMPERATU RE SOLID, N . O . S . at or above 240 ° C – 9 3258 Enamel, see PA INT – – – Endosulfan, see ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE P – – Endothal-sodium, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . – – – Endothion, see ORGANOPHOSPHOR US PESTICIDE – – – Endrin, see ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE P – – ENGINE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED – 2 . 1 3529 ENGINE, FUEL CELL, FLA MMABLE LIQUID POWERED – 3 3528 ENGINE, INTERNAL COMBUSTION P 9 3530 ENGINE, INTERNAL COMBUSTION, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED – 2 . 1 3529 ENGINE, INTERNAL CO MBUSTION, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED – 3 3528 Engines, rocket, see ROCKET MOTORS WITH HYPERGOLIC LIQUIDS – – – ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N . O . S . – 9 3082 ENVIRONMENTALLY HA ZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N . O . S . – 9 3077 EPIBROMOHYDRIN P 6 . 1 2558 EPICHLOROHYDRIN P 6 . 1 2023 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 857

Index 313 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. EPN, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – 1,2-Epoxybutane, stabilized, see – 3 3022 1,2-Epoxyethane, see – 2 . 3 1040 1,2-Epoxyethane w ith nitrogen up to a total pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar) at 50 ° C, see – 2 . 3 1040 1,2-EPOXY-3-ETHOXY PROPANE – 3 2752 2,3-Epoxy-1-propanal, see – 3 2622 1,2-Epoxypropane, see – 3 1280 2,3-Epoxypropionaldehyde, see – 3 2622 2,3-Epoxypropyl ethyl ether, see – 3 2752 Esfenvalerate, see Note 1 P – – ESTERS, N . O . S . – 3 3272 Ethanal, see – 3 1089 ETHANE – 2 . 1 1035 ETHANE, REFRIGERATE D LIQUID – 2 . 1 1961 Ethanethiol, see P 3 2363 Ethanoic anhydride, see – 8 1715 ETHANOL – 3 1170 ETHANOLAMINE – 8 2491 ETHANOLAMINE SOLUTION – 8 2491 ETHANOL AND GASOLINE MIXTURE, with more than 10% ethanol – 3 3475 ETHANOL AND MOTOR SPIRIT MIXTURE, with more than 10% ethanol – 3 3475 ETHANOL AND PETROL MIXTURE, with more than 10% ethanol – 3 3475 ETHANOL SOLUTION – 3 1170 Ethanoyl chloride, see – 3 1717 Ether, see – 3 1155 ETHERS, N . O . S . – 3 3271 Ethion, see ORGANOPHO SPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Ethoate-methyl, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Ethoprophos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – 2-( N , N- Ethoxycarbonylphenylamino)-3-methoxy-4-( N- methyl- N- cyclohexylamino)benzene diazonium zinc chlori de (concentration 62%), see – 4 . 1 3236 2-( N , N- Ethoxycarbony lphenylamino)-3-methoxy-4-( N- methyl- N- cyclohexylamino)benzene diazonium zinc chlori de (concentration 63–92%), see – 4 . 1 3236 2-Ethoxyethanol, see – 3 117 1 2-Ethoxyethyl acetate, see – 3 1172 1-Ethoxypropane, see – 3 2615 3-Ethoxy-1-propene, see – 3 2335 ETHYL ACETATE – 3 1173 Ethylacetic acid, see – 8 2820 Ethylacetone, see – 3 1249 ETHYLACETYLENE, STABILIZED – 2 . 1 2452 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 858

Index 314 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ETHYL ACRYLATE, STABILIZED – 3 1917 Ethylal, see – 3 2373 ETHYL ALCOHOL – 3 1170 ETHYL ALCOHOL SOLUTION – 3 1170 Ethyl aldehyde, see – 3 1089 Ethyl allyl ether, see – 3 2335 ETHYLAMINE – 2 . 1 1036 ETHYLAMINE, AQUEO US SOLUTION with not less than 50% but not more than 70% ethylamine – 3 2270 ETHYL AMYL KETONES – 3 2271 Ethyl normal- amyl ketone, see – 3 2271 2-ETHYLANILINE – 6 . 1 2273 N- ETHYLANILINE – 6 . 1 2272 ortho- Ethylaniline, se e – 6 . 1 2273 ETHYLBENZENE – 3 1175 Ethyl benzol, see – 3 1175 N- ETHYL- N- BENZYLANILINE – 6 . 1 2274 N- ETHYLBENZYLTOLUIDI NES, LIQUID – 6 . 1 2753 N- ETHYLBENZYLTOLUIDI NES, SOLID – 6 . 1 3460 ETHYL BORATE – 3 1176 ETHYL BROM IDE – 6 . 1 1891 ETHYL BROMOACETATE – 6 . 1 1603 Ethyl butanoate, see – 3 11 80 2-ETHYLBUTANOL – 3 2275 2-ETHYLBUTYL ACETATE – 3 1177 2-Ethylbutyl alcohol, see – 3 2275 ETHYL BUTYL ETHER – 3 1179 2-ETHYLBUTYRALDEHYDE – 3 1178 ETHYL BUTYRATE – 3 1180 Ethyl carbonate, see – 3 2366 ETHYL CHLORIDE – 2 . 1 1037 ETHYL CHLOROACETATE – 6 . 1 1181 Ethyl chlorocarbo nate, see – 6 . 1 1182 Ethyl chloroethanoat e, see – 6 . 1 1181 ETHYL CHLOROFORMATE – 6 . 1 1182 ETHYL 2-CHLOROPROPI ONATE – 3 2935 ETHYL CHLOROTHIOFORMATE P 8 2826 ETHYL CROTONATE – 3 1862 Ethyl cyanide, see – 3 2404 Ethyl 3,3-di-( tert- amylperoxy)butyrate (concentration ≤ 67%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 Ethyl 3,3-di-( tert- butyl peroxy)butyrate (concentration ≤ 52%, with inert solid), see – 5 . 2 3106 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 859

Index 315 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Ethyl 3,3-di-( tert- butylperoxy)butyrate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3105 Ethyl 3,3-di-( tert- but ylperoxy)butyrate (concentration > 77–100%), see – 5 . 2 3103 ETHYLDICHLOROARSIN E P 6 . 1 1892 ETHYLDICHLOROSIL ANE – 4 . 3 1183 ETHYLENE – 2 . 1 1962 ETHYLENE, ACETYL ENE AND PROPYLENE MIXTURE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID containing at least 71 . 5% ethylene, with not mor e than 22 . 5% acetylene and not more t han 6% propylene – 2 . 1 3138 Ethylene chloride, se e – 3 1184 ETHYLENE CHLOROHYDRIN – 6 . 1 1135 ETHYLENEDIAMINE – 8 160 4 ETHYLENE DIBROMIDE – 6 . 1 1605 Ethylene dibrom ide and methyl bromide mixture, liquid, see P 6 . 1 1647 ETHYLENE DICHLORI DE – 3 1184 Ethylene fluoride, see – 2 . 1 1030 ETHYLENE GLYCOL DIETHYL ETHER – 3 1153 Ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, see – 3 2252 ETHYLENE GLYCOL MONOETHYL ETHER – 3 1171 ETHYLENE GLYCOL MONOETHYL ETHER ACETATE – 3 1172 ETHYLENE GLYCOL MONOMETHYL ETHER – 3 1188 ETHYLENE GLYCOL MONOMETHYL ETHER ACETATE – 3 1189 ETHYLENEIMINE, STABILIZED – 6 . 1 1185 ETHYLENE OXIDE – 2 . 3 1040 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CA RBON DIOXIDE MIXTURE with more than 87% ethylene oxide – 2 . 3 3300 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CA RBON DIOXIDE MIXTURE with more than 9% but not more than 87% ethylene oxide – 2 . 1 1041 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND C ARBON DIOXIDE MIXTURE with not more than 9% ethylene oxide – 2 . 2 1952 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CH LOROTETRAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with not more than 8 . 8% ethylene oxide – 2 . 2 3297 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND DI CHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE MIXTURE with not more than 12 . 5% ethylene oxide – 2 . 2 3070 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND PE NTAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with not more than 7 . 9% ethylene oxide – 2 . 2 3298 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND PR OPYLENE OXIDE MIXTURE with not more than 30% ethylene oxide – 3 2983 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND TETRAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with not more than 5 . 6% ethylene oxide – 2 . 2 3299 ETHYLENE OXIDE WITH N ITROGEN up to a total pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar) at 50 ° C – 2 . 3 1040 ETHYLENE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID – 2 . 1 1038 Ethyl ethanoate, see – 3 117 3 ETHYL ETHER – 3 1155 Ethyl fluid, see P 6 . 1 1649 ETHYL FLUORIDE – 2 . 1 2453 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 860

Index 316 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ETHYL FORMATE – 3 1190 Ethyl glycol, see – 3 1171 Ethyl glycol acetate, see – 3 1172 2-Ethylhexaldehyde, see – 3 1191 3-Ethylhexaldehyde, see – 3 1191 2-Ethylhexanal, see – 3 1191 3-Ethylhexanal, see – 3 1191 1-(2-Ethylhexanoylperoxy)-1,3-dimethylbutyl peroxypivalate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluents Type A and B), see – 5 . 2 3115 2-ETHYLHEXYLAMINE – 3 2276 2- ETHYLHEXYL CHLOROFORMATE – 6 . 1 2748 2-Ethylhexyl nitr ate, see Note 1 P – – Ethyl hydrosulphide, see P 3 2363 Ethylidene chloride, see – 3 2362 Ethylidene dichloride, see – 3 2362 Ethylidene diethyl ether, see – 3 1088 Ethylidene difluoride, see – 2 . 1 1030 Ethylidene dimethyl ether, see – 3 2377 Ethylidene fluoride, see – 2 . 1 1030 ETHYL ISOBUTYRATE – 3 2385 ETHYL I SOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2481 Ethyl isopropyl ethe r, see – 3 2615 ETHYL LACTATE – 3 1192 ETHYL MERCAPTAN P 3 2363 ETHYL METHACRYLATE, STABILIZED – 3 2277 Ethyl methanoate, see – 3 1190 1-Ethyl-2-methylbenzene, see Note 1 P – – ETHYL METHYL ETHER – 2 . 1 1039 ETHYL METHYL KETONE – 3 1193 Eth yl 2-methylpropanoate, see – 3 2385 ETHYL NITRITE (transport prohibited) – – – ETHYL NITRITE SOLUTION – 3 1194 ETHYL ORTHOFORMATE – 3 2524 ETHYL OXALATE – 6 . 1 2525 Ethylphenylamine, see – 6 . 1 2272 N- Ethyl- N- phenylbenzy lamine, see – 6 . 1 2274 ETHYLPHENYLDICHLORO SILANE – 8 2435 5-Ethyl-2-picoline, see – 6 . 1 2300 1-ETHYLPIPERIDIN E – 3 2386 N- Ethylpiperidine, see – 3 2386 Ethyl propenoate, stabilized, see – 3 1917 ETHYL PROPIONATE – 3 1195 ETHYL PROPYL ETHERS – 3 2615 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 861

Index 317 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Ethyl secondary- amyl ketone, see – 3 2271 Ethyl silicate, see – 3 1292 Ethyl sulphate, see – 6 . 1 1594 Ethyl sulphide, see – 3 2375 Ethyl tetraphosphate, see P 6 . 1 1611 Ethyl thioalcohol, see P 3 2363 Ethylthioethane, see – 3 2375 N- ETHYLTOLUIDINES – 6 . 1 2754 ETHYLTRICHLOROSILA NE – 3 1196 Ethyl vinyl ether, see – 3 1302 Explosive articles, N . O . S . , see ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE , N . O . S . – – – EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING , TYPE A – 1 . 1D 0081 EXPLOSIVE, BLAS TING, TYPE B – 1 . 1D 0082 EXPLOSIVE, BLAS TING, TYPE B – 1 . 5D 0331 EXPLOSIVE, BLAST ING, TYPE C – 1 . 1D 0083 EXPLOSIVE, BLAS TING, TYPE D – 1 . 1D 0084 EXPLOSIVE, BLAST ING, TYPE E – 1 . 1D 0241 EXPLOSIVE, BLAS TING, TYPE E – 1 . 5D 0332 Explosive, seismic , see EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPES A to D – – – Explosives, emulsion, see EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE E – – – Explosive, slurry, see EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE E – – – Explosive substances, N . O . S . , see SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSI VE, N . O . S . – – – Explosive train componen ts, N . O . S . , see COMPONENTS, EXPLOSI VE TRAIN, N . O . S . – – – Explosive, watergel, see EX PLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE E – – – EXTRACTS, AROMATIC, LIQUID – 3 1169 EXTRACTS, FLAVOURING, LIQUID – 3 1197 FABRICS, ANIMAL, N . O . S . with oil – 4 . 2 1373 FABRICS IMPREGNATE D WITH WEAKLY NITRATED NITROCELLULOSE, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 1353 FABRICS, SYNTHE TIC, N . O . S . with oil – 4 . 2 1373 FABRICS, VEGETAB LE, N . O . S . with oil – 4 . 2 1373 Fenaminosulf, see PES TICIDE, N . O . S . – – – Fenaminphos, see ORGANOPHOSP HORUS PESTICIDE P – – Fenbutatin oxide, see Note 1 P – – Fenitrothion, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Fenoxapro-ethyl, see Note 1 P – – Fenoxaprop-P-ethyl, see Note 1 P – – Fenpropathrin, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . P – – Fensulfothion, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Fenthion, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Fentin acetate, see ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE P – – Fentin hydroxide, see ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE P – – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 862

Index 318 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Fermentation amyl alcohol, see – 3 1201 FERRIC ARSENATE P 6 . 1 1606 FERRIC ARSENITE P 6 . 1 1607 FERRIC CHLORIDE, A NHYDROUS – 8 1773 FERRIC CHLORIDE SOLUTION – 8 2582 FERRIC NITRATE – 5 . 1 1466 Ferric perchloride , anhydrous, see – 8 1773 Ferric perchloride solution, see – 8 2582 FERROCERIUM – 4 . 1 1323 FERROSILICON wit h 30% or more but less than 90% silicon – 4 . 3 1408 FERROUS ARSENATE P 6 . 1 1608 FERROUS METAL BORI NGS in a form liable to self-heating – 4 . 2 2793 FERROUS METAL CUTTIN GS in a form liable to self-heating – 4 . 2 2793 FERROUS METAL SHAVIN GS in a form liable to self-heating – 4 . 2 2793 FERROUS METAL TURNIN GS in a form liable to self-heating – 4 . 2 2793 FERTILIZER AMMONIAT ING SOLUTION with free ammonia – 2 . 2 1043 Fertilizers containin g ammonium nitrate, see AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZERS – – – FIBRES, ANIMAL, burnt – 4 . 2 1372 FIBRES, ANIMAL, dam p – 4 . 2 1372 FIBRES, ANIMAL, wet – 4 . 2 1372 FIBRES, ANIMAL, N . O . S . with oil – 4 . 2 1373 FIBRES, SYNTHETIC , N . O . S . with oil – 4 . 2 1373 FIBRES, VEGETABLE, burnt – 4 . 2 1372 FIBRES, VEGETABLE , damp – 4 . 2 1372 FIBRES, VEGETABLE, dry – 4 . 1 3360 FIBRES, VEGETABLE, wet – 4 . 2 1372 FIBRES, VEGETABLE , N . O . S . with oil – 4 . 2 1373 FIBRES IMPREGNATED W ITH WEAKLY NITRATED NITROCELLULOSE, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 1353 Filler, liquid, see PAIN T – – – Films, nitrocellulose-base, from which gelatin has been removed; film scrap, see – 4 . 2 2002 FILMS, NITROCELLULO SE BASE, gelatin coated, except scrap – 4 . 1 1324 FIRE EXTINGUISHER C HARGES, corrosive liquid – 8 1774 Fire extinguisher charges, expelling, explosive, see CARTRIDGES, POWER DEVICE – – – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS with compressed or liquefied gas – 2 . 2 1044 FIRELIGHTERS, SOLI D with flammable liquid – 4 . 1 2623 FIREWORKS – 1 . 1G 0333 FIREWORKS – 1 . 2G 0334 FIREWORKS – 1 . 3G 0335 FIREWORKS – 1 . 4G 0336 FIREWORKS – 1 . 4S 0337 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 863

Index 319 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. FIRST AID KIT – 9 3316 FISH MEAL, STABILIZED anti-oxidant treated . Moisture content gre ater than 5% but not exceeding 12%, by mass . Fat content not more tha n 15% – 9 2216 FISH MEAL, UNSTABILIZED . High hazard . Unrestricted moist ure content . Unrestricted fat con tent in excess of 12%, by mass . Unrestricted fat con tent in excess of 15%, by mass, in the case of anti-oxidant treated fish meal – 4 . 2 1374 FISH MEAL, UNSTABIL IZED not anti-oxidant treated . Moisture content: mo re than 5% but not more than 12%, by mass . Fat content: not more th an 12%, by mass – 4 . 2 1374 FISH SCRAP, STABILI ZED anti-oxidant treated . Moisture content gre ater than 5% but not exceeding 12%, by mass . Fat content not more tha n 15% – 9 2216 FISH SCRAP, UNSTABILIZED . High hazard . Unrestricted moist ure content . Unrestricted fat con tent in excess of 12%, by mass . Unrestricted fat con tent in excess of 15%, by mass, in the case of anti-oxidant treated fish scrap – 4 . 2 1374 FISH SCRAP, UNSTABI LIZED not anti-oxidant treated . Moisture content: mo re than 5% but not more than 12%, by mass . Fat content: not more th an 12%, by mass – 4 . 2 1374 Flammable gas in ligh ters, see – 2 . 1 1057 FLAMMABLE LIQUID , CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 3 2924 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N . O . S . – 3 1993 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 3 3286 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 3 1992 FLAMMABLE SOLID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3180 FLAMMABLE SOLI D, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 2925 FLAMMABLE SOLID , INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3178 FLAMMABLE SOLID , ORGANIC, MOLTEN, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3176 FLAMMABLE SOLI D, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 1325 FLAMMABLE SOLID , OXIDIZING, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3097 FLAMMABLE SOLID , TOXIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3179 FLAMMABLE SOLI D, TOXIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 2926 FLARES, AERIAL – 1 . 1G 0420 FLARES, AERIAL – 1 . 2G 0421 FLARES, AERIAL – 1 . 3G 0093 FLARES, AERIAL – 1 . 4G 0403 FLARES, AERIAL – 1 . 4S 0404 Flares, distress, small, see SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND – – – Flares, highway or railway, see SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND – – – FLARES, SURFACE – 1 . 1G 0418 FLARES, SURFACE – 1 . 2G 0419 FLARES, SURFACE – 1 . 3G 0092 Flares, water-act ivated, see CONTRIVANCES, WATER-ACTIVATED – – – FLASH POWDER – 1 . 1G 0094 FLASH POWDER – 1 . 3G 0305 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 864

Index 320 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Flax, dry, see – 4 . 1 3360 Flowers of sulphur, see – 4 . 1 1350 Flue dust, arsenic al, see – 6 . 1 1562 Fluoric acid, see – 8 1790 Fl uorine compounds (pesticides), see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . – – – FLUORINE, COMPRESSED – 2 . 3 1045 Fluorine monoxide, c ompressed, see – 2 . 3 2190 Fluoroacetamide, see PES TICIDE, N . O . S . – – – FLUOROACETIC ACID – 6 . 1 2642 FLUOROANILINES – 6 . 1 2941 FLUOROBENZENE – 3 2387 FLUOROB ORIC ACID – 8 1775 Fluoroethane, see – 2 . 1 2453 Fluoroethanoic acid, see – 6 . 1 2642 Fluoroform, see – 2 . 2 1984 Fluoroformyl fluori de, compressed, see – 2 . 3 2417 Fluoromethane, see – 2 . 1 2454 FLUOROPHOSPHORIC ACID, ANHYDROUS – 8 1776 FLUOROSILICATES, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2856 FLUOROSILICIC ACID – 8 1 778 FLUOROSULPHONIC ACID – 8 1777 FLUOROTOLUENES – 3 2388 Fonofos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Formal, see – 3 1234 Formaldehyde dimethylacetal, see – 3 1234 FORMALDEHYDE SOLUTION, FLAMMABLE – 3 1198 FORMALDEHYDE SOLUTION with not less than 25% formaldehyde – 8 2209 Formalin solution, flammable, see – 3 1198 Formalin solution with not less than 25% formaldehyde, see – 8 2209 Formamidine sulphinic acid, see – 4 . 2 3341 Formetanate, see CARBAM ATE PESTICIDE P – – Formic acid ethyl ester, see – 3 1190 FORMIC ACID with more than 85% acid, by mass – 8 1779 FORMIC ACID with not less than 5% but less than 10% acid, by mass – 8 3412 FORMIC ACID with not less than 10% but not more than 85% acid, by mass – 8 3412 Formic aldehyde solution, flammable, see – 3 1198 Formothion, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – 2-Formyl-3,4-dihydro-2 H- pyran, stabilized, see – 3 2607 N- Formyl-2-(nitromethylene)-1,3-perhydrothiazine (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3236 FRACTURING DEVICE S, EXPLOSIVE without detonator, for oil wells – 1 . 1D 0099 FUEL, AVIATION, TUR BINE ENGINE – 3 1863 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 865

Index 321 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES – 3 3473 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES, containing corrosive substances – 8 3477 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES, containing hydrogen in metal hydride – 2 . 1 3479 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGE S, containing liquefied flammable gas – 2 . 1 3478 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGE S, containing water-reactive substances – 4 . 3 3476 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES C ONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT – 3 3473 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT, containing corrosive substances – 8 3477 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT, containing hydrogen in metal hydride – 2 . 1 3479 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGE S CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT, containing liquefied flammable gas – 2 . 1 3478 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGE S CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT, containing water-reactive substances – 4 . 3 3476 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES P ACKED WITH EQUIPMENT, containing corrosive substances – 8 3477 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT, containing hydrogen in metal hydride – 2 . 1 3479 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGE S PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT, containing liquefied flammable gas – 2 . 1 3478 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGE S PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT, containing water-reactive substances – 4 . 3 3476 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES P LACED WITH EQUIPMENT – 3 3473 Fuel oil No . 1, see – 3 1223 Fumaroyl dichl oride, see – 8 1780 FUMARYL CHLORIDE – 8 1780 FUMIGATED CARGO TRANSPORT UNIT – 9 3359 FURALDEHYDES – 6 . 1 1199 FURAN – 3 2389 2-Furanmet hylamine, see – 3 2526 Furathiocarb (ISO), see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – Furfuran, see – 3 2389 FURFURYL ALCOHOL – 6 . 1 2874 FURFURYLAMINE – 3 2526 al pha- Furfurylamine, see – 3 2526 2-Furyl carbinol, see – 6 . 1 2874 FUSE, DETONATING , metal-clad – 1 . 1D 0290 FUSE, DETONATIN G, metal-clad – 1 . 2D 0102 FUSE, DETONATING, M ILD EFFECT, metal-clad – 1 . 4D 0104 FUSE, IGNITER, tubu lar, metal-clad – 1 . 4G 0103 FUSEL OIL – 3 1201 FUSE, NON -DETONATING – 1 . 3G 0101 FUSE, SAFETY – 1 . 4S 0105 Fuze, combinatio n, percussion or time, see FUZES, DETONATING or FUZES, IGNITING – – – FUZES, DETONATING – 1 . 1B 0106 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 866

Index 322 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. FUZES, DETONATING – 1 . 2B 0107 FUZES, DETONATING – 1 . 4B 0257 FUZES, DETONATING – 1 . 4S 0367 FUZES, DETONATING wi th protective features – 1 . 1D 0408 FUZES, DETONATING w ith protective features – 1 . 2D 0409 FUZES, DETONATING wi th protective features – 1 . 4D 0410 FUZES, IGNITING – 1 . 3G 0316 FUZES, IGNITING – 1 . 4G 0317 FUZES, IGNITING – 1 . 4S 0368 GALLIUM – 8 2803 GAS CART RIDGES without a release device, non-refillable – 2 2037 Gas drips, hydrocarbon, see HYDROCARBONS, LIQUID, N . O . S . – – – GAS OIL – 3 1202 GASOLINE – 3 1203 Gasoli ne, casinghead, see – 3 1203 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 2 . 1 3312 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQ UID, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 3158 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQ UID, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 3311 GAS SAMPLE, NON-PRES SURIZED, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . , not refrigerated liqu id – 2 . 1 3167 GAS SAMPLE, NON-PR ESSURIZED, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . , not refrigerated liqu id – 2 . 3 3168 GAS SAMPLE, NON-PRE SSURIZED, TOXIC, N . O . S . , not refrigerated liqu id – 2 . 3 3169 Gelatin, blasting, se e – 1 . 1D 0081 Gelatin dynamite, se e – 1 . 1D 0081 GENETICALLY MODI FIED MICROORGANISMS – 9 3245 GENETICALLY MODIFIED ORGANISMS – 9 3245 GERMANE – 2 . 3 2192 GERMANE, ADSORBED – 2 . 3 3523 Germanium hydride, see – 2 . 3 2192 GLYCEROL alpha- MONOCHLO ROHYDRIN – 6 . 1 2689 Glycerol 1,3-dichl orohydrin, see – 6 . 1 2750 Glycerol trinitra te (class 1), see NITROGLYCERIN (class 1) – – – Glyceryl trinitrate, see – 3 1204 Glyceryl trinitrate (class 1), see NITROGLYCERIN (class 1) – – – Glycidal, see – 3 2622 GLYCIDALDEHYDE – 3 2622 Glycol chlorohydrin, see – 6 . 1 1135 Glycol dimethyl ether , see – 3 2252 GRENADES, hand or rifle, with bursting charge – 1 . 1D 0284 GRENADES, hand or ri fle, with bursting charge – 1 . 1F 0292 GRENADES, hand or ri fle, with bursting charge – 1 . 2D 0285 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 867

Index 323 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. GRENADES, hand or rifle, with bursting charge – 1 . 2F 0293 Grenades, illuminati ng, see AMMUNITION, ILLUMINATING – – – GRENADES, PRACTICE, hand or rifle – 1 . 2G 0372 GRENADES, PRACTI CE, hand or rifle – 1 . 3G 0318 GRENADES, PRACT ICE, hand or rifle – 1 . 4G 0452 GRENADES, PRACTI CE, hand or rifle – 1 . 4S 0110 Grenades, smoke, see AM MUNITION, SMOKE – – – Grignard solution, see – 4 . 3 1928 GUANIDINE NITRATE – 5 . 1 1467 GUANYL NITROSAMINOG UANYLIDENE HYDRAZINE, WETTED with not less than 30% water, by mass – 1 . 1A 0113 GUANYL NITROSAMI NOGUANYLTETRAZENE, WETTED with not less than 30% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1A 0114 GUNPOWDER, COMPRES SED – 1 . 1D 0028 GUNPOWDER granu lar, or as a meal – 1 . 1D 0027 GUNPOWDER, IN PELL ETS – 1 . 1D 0028 HAFNIUM POWDER, D RY – 4 . 2 2545 HAFNIUM POWDER, WET TED with not less than 25% water (a visible excess of wate r must be present) (a) mechanically prod uced, particle size less than 53 microns – 4 . 1 1326 HAFNIUM POWDER, W ETTED with not less than 25% water (a visible excess of wate r must be present) (b) chemically produc ed, particle size less than 840 microns – 4 . 1 1326 HAY – 4 . 1 1327 HALOGENATED MONOME THYLDIPHENYLMETHANES, LIQUID P 9 3151 HALOGENATED MONOMETHYLDIPHENYLMETHANES, SOLID P 9 3152 HEATING OIL, LIGHT – 3 1202 Heavy hydrogen, see – 2 . 1 1957 Heavy hydrogen, co mpressed, see – 2 . 1 1957 HELIUM, COMPRESS ED – 2 . 2 1046 HELIUM, REFRIGERATED L IQUID – 2 . 2 1963 Hemp, dry, see – 4 . 1 3360 Heptachlor, see ORGANO CHLORINE PESTICIDE P – – HEPTAFLUOROPROPANE – 2 . 2 3296 n- HEPTALDEHYDE – 3 3056 Hepta nal, see – 3 3056 HEPTANES P 3 1206 2-Heptanone, see – 3 1110 4-Heptanone, see – 3 2710 n- HEPTENE – 3 2278 Heptenophos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Heptyl aldehyde, see – 3 3056 Heptylbenzene, see P 9 3082 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 868

Index 324 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Heptyl chloride, see P 3 1993 HETP, see P 6 . 1 1611 HETP (and compressed gas, mixtures), see – 2 . 3 1612 HEXACHLOROACETONE – 6 . 1 2661 HEXACHLOROBENZENE – 6 . 1 2729 HEXACHLOROBUTADIE NE P 6 . 1 2279 Hexachloro-1,3-bu tadiene, see P 6 . 1 2279 1,3-Hexachlorobutad iene, see P 6 . 1 2279 HEXACHLOROCYCLOPEN TADIENE – 6 . 1 2646 Hexachlorophane, see – 6 . 1 2875 HEXACHLOROPHENE – 6 . 1 2875 Hexachloro-2-propano ne, see – 6 . 1 2661 HEXADECYLTRICHLORO SILANE – 8 1781 1,3-Hexadiene, see – 3 2458 1,4-Hexadiene, see – 3 2458 1,5-Hexadiene, see – 3 2458 2,4-Hexadiene, see – 3 2458 HEXADIENES – 3 2458 HEXAETHYL TETRAPHOSPHATE P 6 . 1 1611 HEXAETHYL TETRAPHOSPH ATE AND COMPRESSED GAS MIXTURE – 2 . 3 1612 HEXAFLUOROACETONE – 2 . 3 2420 HEXAFLUOROACETON E HYDRATE, LIQUID – 6 . 1 2552 HEXAFLUOROACETON E HYDRATE, SOLID – 6 . 1 3436 HEXAFLUOROETHANE – 2 . 2 2193 HEXAFLUOROPHOSPHORIC AC ID – 8 1782 Hexafluoro-2-propanone, see – 2 . 3 2420 HEXAFLUOROPROPYLENE – 2 . 2 1858 Hexahydrobenzene, se e – 3 1145 Hexahydrocresol, see – 3 2617 Hexahydromethylphenol, see – 3 2617 Hexahydropyridine, see – 8 2401 Hexahydrothiophenol, see – 3 3054 Hexahydrotoluene, see – 3 2296 HEXALDEHYDE – 3 1207 Hexamethylene, see – 3 1145 HEXAMETHYLENEDIAMINE, MOLTEN – 8 2280 HEXAMETHYLENEDIAMINE, SOLID – 8 2280 HEXAMETHYLENEDIAMINE SOLUTION – 8 1783 HEXAMETHYLENE DIISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2281 HEXAMETHYLENEIMINE – 3 24 93 HEXAMETHYLENETETRAMINE – 4 . 1 1328 Hexamine, see – 4 . 1 1328 Hexane, see P 3 1208 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 869

Index 325 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. 1,6-Hexanediamine, solid, see – 8 2280 1,6-Hexanediamine solution, see – 8 1783 HEXANES P 3 1208 HEXANITRODIPHENYLAMINE – 1 . 1D 0079 Hexanitrodiphen yl sulphide, wetted, see – 4 . 1 2852 HEXANITROSTILBENE – 1 . 1D 0392 Hexanoic acid, see – 8 2829 HE XANOLS – 3 2282 1-HEXENE – 3 2370 HEXOGEN AND CYCLOTETRAMETHYLENETETRANITRAMINE MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 HEXOGEN AND CYCLO TETRAMETHYLENETETRANITRAMINE MIXTURE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 HEXOGEN AND HMX MIX TURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 HEXOGEN AND HMX MIX TURE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 HEXOGEN AND OCTOG EN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 HEXOGEN AND OCTOG EN MIXTURE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 HEXOGEN, DESENS ITIZED – 1 . 1D 0483 HEXOGEN, WETTED w ith not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0072 Hexoic acid, see – 8 2829 HEXO LITE, dry or wetted with less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0118 Hexone, see – 3 1245 HEXO TOL, dry or wetted with less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0118 HEXOTONAL – 1 . 1D 0393 HEXOTONAL cast, se e – 1 . 1D 0393 HEXYL – 1 . 1D 0079 Hexyl acetate, s ee – 3 1233 Hexyl aldehyde, see – 3 1207 Hexylbenzene, see P 9 3082 Hexyl chloride, see P 3 1993 alpha- Hexylene, see – 3 2370 Hexylic acid, see – 8 2829 tert- Hexyl peroxyneodecanoate (concentration ≤ 71%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3115 tert- Hexyl peroxypiv alate (concentration ≤ 72%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 HEXYLTRICHLOROSILA NE – 8 1784 HMDI, see – 6 . 1 2281 HMX, DESENSITIZE D – 1 . 1D 0484 HMX AND RDX MIXTURE , WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 870

Index 326 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. HMX AND RDX MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 HMX, WETTED with not l ess than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0226 HYDRAZINE, ANHYDROU S – 8 2029 HYDRAZINE AQUEOUS SOLUTION, FLAMMABLE with more than 37% hydrazine, by mass – 8 3484 HYDRAZINE, AQUEOUS SOLUTION with more than 37% hydrazine, by mass – 8 2030 HYDRAZINE, AQUEOUS SOLUTION with not more than 37% hydrazine, by mass – 6 . 1 3293 Hydrazine base, aque ous solution, see – 6 . 1 3293 Hydrazine hydrate, see – 8 2030 Hydrazinobenzene, see – 6 . 1 2572 Hydrides, metal, wa ter-reactive, N . O . S . , see – 4 . 3 1409 HYDRIODIC ACID – 8 1787 Hy driodic acid, anhydrous, see – 2 . 3 2197 HYDROBROMIC ACID – 8 1788 HYDR OCARBON GAS MIXTURE, COMPRESSED, N . O . S . – 2 . 1 1964 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTU RE, LIQUEFIED, N . O . S . – 2 . 1 1965 HYDROCARBON GAS REFILLS FOR SMALL DEVICES with release device – 2 . 1 3150 HYDROCARBONS, LIQUID , N . O . S . – 3 3295 HYDROCHLORIC ACID – 8 1789 H ydrocyanic acid, anhydrous, stabilized, containing less than 3% water, see P 6 . 1 1051 Hydrocyanic acid, an hydrous, stabilized, containing less than 3% water and absorbed in a porous inert material, see P 6 . 1 1614 HYDROCYANIC ACID, A QUEOUS SOLUTION with not more than 20% hydrogen cyanide P 6 . 1 1613 HYDROCYANIC ACID w ith more than 20% acid, by mass (transport prohibited) – – – HYDROFLUORIC ACID AND SULPHURIC ACID MIXTURE – 8 1786 Hydrofluoric acid, anhydrous, see – 8 1052 HYDROFLUORIC ACID, with more than 60% hydrogen fluoride – 8 1790 HYDROFLUORIC ACID, with not more than 60% hydrogen fluoride – 8 1790 Hydrofluoroboric acid, see – 8 1775 Hydrofluorosilicic acid, see – 8 1778 HYDROGEN AND METHANE MIXTURE, COMPRESSED – 2 . 1 2034 Hydrogen antimonide, se e – 2 . 3 2676 Hydrogen arsenide, see – 2 . 3 2188 Hydrogen bromide, see – 8 17 88 HYDROGEN BROMIDE, ANHYDROUS – 2 . 3 1048 Hydrogen bromide solu tion, see – 8 1788 Hydrogencarboxylic acid, see – 8 1779 Hydrogen chloride, see – 8 1789 HYDROGEN CHLORIDE, ANHYDROUS – 2 . 3 1050 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 871

Index 327 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. HYDROGEN CHLORIDE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID (transport prohibited) – 2 . 3 2186 HYDROGEN, COMPRESSED – 2 . 1 1049 HYDROGEN CYANIDE , AQUEOUS SOLUTION with not more than 20% hydrogen cyanide P 6 . 1 1613 HYDROGEN CYANID E, SOLUTION IN ALCOHOL with more than 45% hydrogen cyanide (transport prohibited) – – – HYDROGEN CYANIDE, SOLUTION IN ALCOHOL with not more than 45% hydrogen cyanide P 6 . 1 3294 HYDROGEN CYANIDE , STABILIZED, containing less than 3% water P 6 . 1 1051 HYDROGEN CYANIDE , STABILIZED, containing less than 3% water and absorbed in a porous inert material P 6 . 1 1614 HYDROGENDIFLUORID ES, SOLID, N . O . S . – 8 1740 HYDROGENDIFLUORIDE S SOLUTION, N . O . S . – 8 3471 Hydrogen fluoride, see – 8 1790 HYDROGEN FLUORIDE, ANHYDROUS – 8 1052 Hydrogen fluoride solution, see – 8 1790 HYDROGEN IN A METAL HYDRIDE STORAGE SYSTEM – 2 . 1 3468 HYDROGEN IN A METAL H YDRIDE STORAGE SYSTEM CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT – 2 . 1 3468 HYDROGEN IN A METAL H YDRIDE STORAGE SYSTEM PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT – 2 . 1 3468 Hydrogen iodide , see – 8 1787 HYDROGEN IODIDE, ANHYDROUS – 2 . 3 2197 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE A ND PEROXYACETIC ACID MIXTURE with acid(s), water and not more than 5% peroxyacetic acid, STABILIZED – 5 . 1 3149 HYDROGEN PEROXID E, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, STABILIZED with more than 60% hydrogen peroxide – 5 . 1 2015 HYDROGEN PEROXI DE, AQUEOUS SOLUTION with not less than 8% but less than 20% hydrogen peroxide (stabilized as necessary) – 5 . 1 2984 HYDROGEN PEROXID E, AQUEOUS SOLUTION with not less than 20% but not more than 60% hydrogen peroxide (stabilized as necessary) – 5 . 1 2014 Hydrogen peroxid e carbamide, solid, see – 5 . 1 1511 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, S TABILIZED – 5 . 1 2015 Hydrogen phosphid e, see – 2 . 3 2199 HYDROGEN, REFRIGERATED L IQUID – 2 . 1 1966 HYDROGEN SELENIDE, A DSORBED – 2 . 3 3526 HYDROGEN SELENIDE, AN HYDROUS – 2 . 3 2202 Hydrogen silicide , compressed, see – 2 . 1 2203 Hydrogen sulphat es, aqueous solution, see – 8 2837 HYDROGEN SULPHIDE – 2 . 3 1053 Hydroselenic acid, an hydrous, see – 2 . 3 2202 Hydrosilicofluoric a cid, see – 8 1778 1-HYDROXYBENZOTRIAZOLE, ANHYDROUS, dry or wetted with less than 20% water, by mass – 1 . 3C 0508 1-HYDROXYBENZOTRIA ZOLE MONOHYDRATE – 4 . 1 3474 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 872

Index 328 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. 3-Hydroxybutanal, see – 6 . 1 2839 3-Hydroxybutan-2 -one, see – 3 2621 3-Hydroxybutyraldehyde, see – 6 . 1 2839 2-Hydroxycamphane, se e – 4 . 1 1312 Hydroxydimethylbenz enes, liquid, see – 6 . 1 3430 Hydroxydimethylben zenes, solid, see – 6 . 1 2261 3-Hydroxy-1,1-di methylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate (concentration ≤ 52%, as a stable dispersion in water) – 5 . 2 3119 3-Hydroxy-1,1-dim ethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type A) – 5 . 2 3117 3-Hydroxy-1,1-dim ethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type A) – 5 . 2 3115 2-(2-Hydroxyethox y)-1-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)benzene-4-diazonium zinc chloride (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3236 3-(2-Hydroxyetho xy)-4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)benzene diazonium zinc chloride (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3236 2-Hydroxyethylami ne, see – 8 2491 HYDROXYLAMINE SULPHATE – 8 2865 Hydroxylammonium sulphate, see – 8 2865 1-Hydroxy-3-methyl-2-penten-4-yne, see – 8 2705 3-Hydroxyphenol, see – 6 . 1 2876 HYPOCHLORITES, INORGA NIC, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3212 HYPOCHLORITE SOLUTIO N P 8 1791 IGNITERS – 1 . 1G 0121 IGNITERS – 1 . 2G 0314 IGNITERS – 1 . 3G 0315 IGNITERS – 1 . 4G 0325 IGNITERS – 1 . 4S 0454 Imazalil, see PESTICIDE , N . O . S . – – – 3,3 ′ -IMINODIPROPYLAMINE – 8 226 9 INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE, AFFECTING ANIMALS only – 6 . 2 2900 INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE , AFFECTING HUMANS – 6 . 2 2814 Inflammable … , see FLAMMABLE … – – – INSECTICIDE GAS, FLAMMAB LE, N . O . S . – 2 . 1 3354 INSECTICIDE GAS, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 1968 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOX IC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3355 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXI C, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 1967 IODINE – 8 3495 IODINE MONOC HLORIDE, LIQUID – 8 3498 IODINE MONOCHLORIDE, SOLID – 8 1792 IODINE PENTAFLUORIDE – 5 . 1 2495 2-IODOBUTANE – 3 2390 Iodom ethane, see – 6 . 1 2644 IODOMETHYLPROPANES – 3 2 391 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 873

Index 329 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. IODOPROPANES – 3 2392 alpha- Iodotoluene, see – 6 . 1 2653 Ioxynil, see PESTICIDE , N . O . S . P – – Iprobenfos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Iron carbonyl, see – 6 . 1 1994 Iron chloride, anhy drous, see – 8 1773 Iron(III) chloride, anhydrous, see – 8 1773 Iron chloride solution, see – 8 2582 IRON OXIDE, SPENT obtained from coal gas purification – 4 . 2 1376 IRON PENTACARBON YL – 6 . 1 1994 Iron perchloride, anhydrous, see – 8 1773 Iron perchloride solution, see – 8 2582 Iron powder, see – 4 . 2 1383 Iron powder, pyrop horic, see – 4 . 2 1383 IRON SPONGE, SPENT o btained from coal gas purification – 4 . 2 1376 Iron swarf, see – 4 . 2 2793 Iron trichloride, a nhydrous, see – 8 1773 Iron trichloride solution, see – 8 2582 Isoamyl acetate, see – 3 1104 Isoamyl alcohol, see – 3 1105 Isoamyl bromide, see – 3 2341 Isoamyl butyrate, see – 3 2620 alpha- Isoamylene, see – 3 2561 Isoamyl formate, see – 3 1109 Isoamyl mercaptan, see – 3 1111 Isoamyl nitrate, see – 3 1112 Isoamyl nitrite, see – 3 1113 Isobenzan, see ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE P – – Isobutanal, see – 3 2045 ISOBUTANE – 2 . 1 1969 ISOBUTANOL – 3 1212 Isobute ne, see – 2 . 1 1055 Isobutenol, see – 3 2614 Isobu tenyl chloride, see – 3 2554 ISOBUTYL ACETATE – 3 1213 ISOBUTYL ACRYLATE, STABILIZED – 3 2527 ISOBUTYL ALCOHOL – 3 1212 ISOBUTYL ALDEHYDE – 3 2045 ISOBUTYLAMINE – 3 1214 Isobutylbenzene, see P 3 2709 Isobutyl bromide, see – 3 2342 ISOBUTYLENE – 2 . 1 1055 ISOBUTYL FORMATE – 3 239 3 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 874

Index 330 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Isobutyl iodide, see – 3 2391 ISOBUTYL ISOBUTYRATE – 3 2528 ISOBUTYL ISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2486 Isobutyl mercaptan, se e – 3 2347 ISOBUTYL METHACRYLATE, STABILIZED – 3 2283 ISOBUTYL PROPIONATE – 3 2394 Isobutyl vinyl ether, see – 3 1304 ISOBUTYRALDEHYDE – 3 2045 ISOBUTYRIC ACID – 3 2529 ISOBUTYRONITRILE – 3 2284 ISOBUTYRYL CHLORIDE – 3 2395 ISOCYANATES, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 3 2478 ISOCYANATE SOLUTIO N, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 3 2478 ISOCYANATE SOLUTIO N, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3080 ISOCYANATE SOLUTI ON, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2206 ISOCYANATES, TOXI C, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3080 ISOCYANATES, TOXIC , N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2206 ISOCYANATOBENZOT RIFLUORIDES – 6 . 1 2285 3-Isocyanatomethy l-3,5,5-trimethylcyclohexyl isocyanate, see – 6 . 1 2290 Isodecyl acrylate, see P 9 3082 Isododecane, see – 3 2286 Isodrin, see ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE – – – Isofenphos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – ISOHEPTENES – 3 2287 ISOHEXENES – 3 2288 Isolan, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE – – – Isooctaldehyde, see – 3 1191 Isooctane, see P 3 1262 ISOOCTENES – 3 1216 Isooctyl nitrate, see P 9 3082 Isopentane, see – 3 1265 ISOPENTENES – 3 2371 Isopentylamine, see – 3 1106 Isopentyl nitrite, see – 3 1113 ISOPHORONEDIAMINE – 8 2289 ISOPHORONE DIISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2290 ISOPRENE, STABILI ZED P 3 1218 Isoprocarb, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – ISOPROPANOL – 3 1219 ISOPROPENYL ACETATE – 3 2403 ISOPROPENYLBENZENE – 3 2303 Isopropenyl carbinol, see – 3 2614 Isopropenyl chloride, see – 3 2456 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 875

Index 331 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. 2-Isopropoxypropane, see – 3 1159 ISOPROPYL ACETATE – 3 1220 ISOPROPYL ACID PHOSPHATE – 8 1793 ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL – 3 1219 ISOPROPYLAMINE – 3 1221 ISOPROPYLBENZENE – 3 1918 Isopropyl bromide, see – 3 2344 Isopropyl sec- butyl peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 32%) with di- sec- butyl peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 15–18%) and di-isopropyl peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 12–15%), with diluent Type A, see – 5 . 2 3115 Isopropyl sec- butyl pe roxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 52%) with di- sec- butyl peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 28%) and di-isopropyl peroxydicarbonate (concentration ≤ 22%), see – 5 . 2 3111 ISOPROPYL BUTYRATE – 3 2405 I sopropyl carbinol, see – 3 1212 Isopropyl chloride, see – 3 2356 ISOPROPYL CHLOROACETATE – 3 2947 Isopropyl chlorocarbonate, see – 6 . 1 2407 ISOPROPYL CHLOROFORM ATE – 6 . 1 2407 Isopropyl chlorome thanoate, see – 6 . 1 2407 ISOPROPYL 2-CHLOROP ROPIONATE – 3 2934 alpha- Isopropyl alpha- chloropropionate, see – 3 2934 Isopropylcumyl hydroperoxide (concentration ≤ 72%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3109 Isopropyl cyanide, see – 3 2 284 Isopropyl ether, see – 3 1159 Isopropylethylene, see – 3 2561 Isopropyl formate, see – 3 1281 Isopropylideneacetone, see – 3 1229 ISOPROPYL ISOBUTYRATE – 3 2406 ISOPROPYL ISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2483 Isopropyl mercapta n, see – 3 2402 Isopropyl methanoate, see – 3 1281 ISOPROPYL NITRATE – 3 1222 ISOPROPYL PROPIONATE – 3 2409 Isopropyltoluene, see P 3 2046 Isopropyltoluol, see P 3 2046 ISOSORBIDE-5-MONONITRATE – 4 . 1 3251 ISOSORBIDE DINIT RATE MIXTURE with not less than 60% lactose, mannose, starch, or calcium hydrogen phosphate – 4 . 1 2907 Isotetramethylben zene, see P 9 3082 Isothioate, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Isovaleraldehyde, see – 3 2058 Isovalerone, see – 3 1157 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 876

Index 332 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Isoxathion, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – JET PERFORATING GUNS, CHARGED, oil well, without detonator – 1 . 1D 0124 JET PERFORATING GU NS, CHARGED, oil well, without detonator – 1 . 4D 0494 Jet tappers, withou t detonator, see CHARGES, SHAPED, COMMERCIAL – – – Jute, dry, see – 4 . 1 3360 Kapok, dry, see – 4 . 1 3360 Kelevan, see ORGANOCHL ORINE PESTICIDE – – – KEROSENE – 3 1223 Kerosine, see – 3 1223 KETONES, LIQUID, N . O . S . – 3 1224 KRILL MEAL – 4 . 2 3497 KRYPTON, COMPRESSED – 2 . 2 1056 KRYPTON, REFRIGERATED LIQUID – 2 . 2 1970 Lacquer, see PAINT – – – Lacque r base, liquid, see PAINT – – – Lacquer base solution, see – 3 2059 LEAD ACETATE P 6 . 1 1616 Lead and zinc calcin es, see P 6 . 1 2291 LEAD ARSENATES P 6 . 1 1617 LEAD ARSENITES P 6 . 1 1618 LEAD AZIDE, WETTED wi th not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1A 0129 Lead chloride, solid, se e P 6 . 1 2291 LEAD COMPOUND, SOL UBLE, N . O . S . P 6 . 1 2291 LEAD CYANIDE P 6 . 1 1620 LEAD DIOXIDE – 5 . 1 1872 Lead dross, see – 8 1794 Lead( II) acetate, see – 6 . 1 1616 Lead(II) cyanide, see – 6 . 1 1620 LEAD NITRATE P 5 . 1 1469 Lead(II) nitrate, see LE AD NITRATE – – – Lead(II) perchlorate, see – 5 . 1 1470 LEAD PERCHLORATE, SO LID P 5 . 1 1470 LEAD PERCHLORATE SOL UTION P 5 . 1 3408 Lead peroxide, see – 5 . 1 1872 LEAD PHOSPHITE, DI BASIC – 4 . 1 2989 LEAD STYPHNATE, WET TED with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1A 0130 LEAD SULPHATE wit h more than 3% free acid – 8 1794 Lead tetraethyl, see P 6 . 1 1649 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 877

Index 333 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Lead tetramethyl, see P 6 . 1 1649 LEAD TRINITRORE SORCINATE, WETTED with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1A 0130 LIFE-SAVING APP LIANCES NOT SELF-INFLATING containing dangerous goods as equipment – 9 3072 LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES, SELF-INFLATING – 9 2990 LIGHTER REFILLS containing flammable gas – 2 . 1 1057 LIGHTERS containing fl ammable gas – 2 . 1 1057 LIGHTERS, FUSE – 1 . 4S 0131 Ligroin, see PETROLE UM DISTILLATES, N . O . S . or see PETROLEUM PRODUC TS, N . O . S . – – – Limonene, see P 3 2052 Lindane, see ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE P – – Linuron, see Note 1 P – – LIQUEFIED GASES non-flammable, charged with nitrogen, carbon dioxide or air – 2 . 2 1058 LIQUEFIED GAS, FLAMM ABLE, N . O . S . – 2 . 1 3161 LIQUEFIED GAS, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 3163 LIQUEFIED GAS, OXI DIZING, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 3157 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOX IC, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3308 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXI C, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3309 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXI C, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3160 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOX IC, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3162 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOX IC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3310 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXI C, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . – 2 . 3 3307 Liquefied petroleum ga ses, see – 2 . 1 1075 Liquified natural ga s, see – 2 . 1 1972 LITHIUM – 4 . 3 1415 Lithium alkyls, liquid , see – 4 . 2 3394 Lithium alkyls, solid , see – 4 . 2 3393 Lithium alloy (liquid ), see – 2 . 1 1001 LITHIUM ALUMINIU M HYDRIDE – 4 . 3 1410 LITHIUM ALUMINIUM HYDRIDE, ETHEREAL – 4 . 3 1411 Lithium amalgams, l iquid, see – 4 . 3 1389 Lithium amalgams , solid, see – 4 . 3 3401 Lithium amide, see – 4 . 3 1390 LITHIUM BATTERIE S INSTALLED IN CARGO TRANSPORT UNIT lithium ion batteries or lithium metal batteries – 9 3536 LITHIUM BOROHYDRIDE – 4 . 3 1413 Lithium dispersions, se e – 4 . 3 1391 LITHIUM FERROSILIC ON – 4 . 3 2830 LITHIUM HYDRIDE – 4 . 3 1414 LITHIUM HYDRIDE, FUSE D SOLID – 4 . 3 2805 LITHIUM HYDROXIDE – 8 2680 Lith ium hydroxide, solid, see – 8 2680 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 878

Index 334 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. LITHIUM HYDROXIDE SOLUTION – 8 2679 LITHIUM HYPOCHLORITE, DRY – 5 . 1 1471 LITHIUM HYPOCHLORITE M IXTURE – 5 . 1 1471 Lithium in cartouch es, see – 4 . 3 1415 LITHIUM ION BATTERIE S (including lithium ion polymer batteries) – 9 3480 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT (including lithium ion polymer batteries) – 9 3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT (including lithium ion polymer batteries) – 9 3481 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES (including lithium alloy batteries) – 9 3090 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT (including lithium alloy batteries) – 9 3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT (including lithium alloy batteries) – 9 3091 LITHIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 2722 LITHIUM NITRIDE – 4 . 3 2806 LITHIUM PEROXIDE – 5 . 1 1472 Lithium silicide, see – 4 . 3 1417 LITHIUM SILICON – 4 . 3 1417 LNG, see – 2 . 1 1972 LONDON PURPLE P 6 . 1 1621 LPG, see – 2 . 1 1075 Lye, see – 8 1823 M86 fuel, see – 3 3165 M ACHINERY, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED – 2 . 1 3529 MACHINERY, FUEL CELL , FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED – 3 3528 MACHINERY, INTERNAL COMBUSTION P 9 3530 MACHINERY, INTERNAL COMBUSTION, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED – 2 . 1 3529 MACHINERY, INTERN AL COMBUSTION, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED – 3 3528 MAGNESIUM – 4 . 1 1869 Magnesium alkyls, see – 4 . 2 3394 Magnesium alloys, see – 4 . 3 1393 MAGNESIUM ALLOYS P OWDER – 4 . 3 1418 MAGNESIUM ALLOYS wit h more than 50% magnesium in pellets, turnings or ribbons – 4 . 1 1869 MAGNESIUM ALUMI NIUM PHOSPHIDE – 4 . 3 1419 Magnesium amalgams, li quid, see – 4 . 3 1392 Magnesium amalgams, s olid, see – 4 . 3 3402 MAGNESIUM ARSENATE P 6 . 1 1622 Magnesium bisulphi te solution, see – 8 2693 MAGNESIUM BROMATE – 5 . 1 1473 MAGNESIUM CHLORATE – 5 . 1 2723 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 879

Index 335 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Magnesium chloride and chlorate mixture, see – 5 . 1 1459 MAGNESIUM DIAMIDE – 4 . 2 2004 Magnesium diphenyl, see – 4 . 2 3393 Magnesium dispersion s, see – 4 . 3 1391 MAGNESIUM FLUOROS ILICATE – 6 . 1 2853 MAGNESIUM GRANUL ES, COATED, particle size not less than 149 microns – 4 . 3 2950 Magnesium hexafluoros ilicate, see – 6 . 1 2853 MAGNESIUM HYDRIDE – 4 . 3 2010 MAGNESIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 1474 MAGNESIUM PERCHLOR ATE – 5 . 1 1475 MAGNESIUM PEROXID E – 5 . 1 1476 MAGNESIUM PHOSPHI DE – 4 . 3 2011 MAGNESIUM POWDER – 4 . 3 1418 Magnesium scrap, see – 4 . 1 1869 MAGNESIUM SILICI DE – 4 . 3 2624 Magnesium silicofluo ride, see – 6 . 1 2853 Magnesium silicon, se e – 4 . 3 2624 MAGNETIZED MATERIA L – 9 2807 Malathion, see P 9 3082 MALEIC ANHYDRIDE – 8 2215 MALEIC ANHYDRIDE, MOLTEN – 8 2215 Malonodinitrile, see – 6 . 1 2647 MALONONITRILE – 6 . 1 2647 Mancozeb (ISO), see P 9 3077 MANEB P 4 . 2 2210 MANEB PREPARATION , STABILIZED against self-heating P 4 . 3 2968 MANEB PREPARATION w ith not less than 60% Maneb P 4 . 2 2210 MANEB, STABILIZED P 4 . 3 2968 Manganese ethylene-b is-dithiocarbamate, see P 4 . 2 2210 Manganese ethylene-1 ,2-bis-dithiocarbamate, see P 4 . 2 2210 Manganese ethylene-b is-dithiocarbamate, stabilized, see P 4 . 3 2968 Manganese ethylene-1 ,2-bis-dithiocarbamate, stabilized, see P 4 . 3 2968 MANGANESE NITRATE – 5 . 1 2724 Manganese(II) nitr ate, see – 5 . 1 2724 MANGANESE RESINAT E – 4 . 1 1330 Manganous nitrate , see – 5 . 1 2724 MANNITOL HEXANIT RATE, WETTED with not less than 40% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0133 MATCHES, FUSEE – 4 . 1 2254 MATCHES, SAFETY (b ook, card or strike on box) – 4 . 1 1944 MATCHES, “STRIKE ANYWHERE” – 4 . 1 1331 MATCHES, WAX ‘V ESTA’ – 4 . 1 1945 Meal, oily, see – 4 . 2 1386 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 880

Index 336 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Mecarbam, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – MEDICAL WASTE, CATEGORY A, AFFECTING ANIMALS only, solid – 6 . 2 3549 MEDICAL WASTE, CATEG ORY A, AFFECTING HUMANS, solid – 6 . 2 3549 MEDICAL WASTE, N . O . S . – 6 . 2 3291 MEDICINE, LIQUID, FLA MMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 3 3248 MEDICINE, LIQUID, TOX IC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1851 MEDICINE, SOLID, T OXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3249 Medinoterb, see SUBSTI TUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE – – – p- Menthyl hydroperoxide (concentration ≤ 72%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3109 p- Menthyl hydroperoxi de (concentration > 72–100%), see – 5 . 2 3105 Mephosfolan, see ORGANOPHOSP HORUS PESTICIDE P – – MERCAPTAN MIXTURE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 3 3336 MERCAPTAN MIXTURE, LI QUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 3 1228 MERCAPTAN MIXTURE, L IQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3071 MERCAPTANS, LIQUI D, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 3 3336 MERCAPTANS, LIQUID, F LAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 3 1228 MERCAPTANS, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3071 Mercaptoacetic acid , see – 8 1940 Mercaptodimethur, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – 2-Mercaptoethanol, see – 6 . 1 2966 2-Mercaptopropionic acid, see – 6 . 1 2936 5-MERCAPTOTETRAZO L-1-ACETIC ACID – 1 . 4C 0448 Mercuric acetate, see P 6 . 1 1629 Mercuric ammonium c hloride, see P 6 . 1 1630 MERCURIC ARSENAT E P 6 . 1 1623 Mercuric benzoate , see P 6 . 1 1631 Mercuric bisulphate , see P 6 . 1 1645 Mercuric bromide, see P 6 . 1 1634 MERCURIC CHLORIDE P 6 . 1 1624 Mercuric cyanide, see P 6 . 1 1636 Mercuric gluconat e, see P 6 . 1 1637 Mercuric iodide, see P 6 . 1 1638 MERCURIC NITRATE P 6 . 1 1625 Mercuric oleate, see P 6 . 1 1640 Mercuric oxide, see P 6 . 1 1641 Mercuric oxycyani de, desensitized, see P 6 . 1 1642 MERCURIC POTASSIUM CYANIDE P 6 . 1 1626 Mercuric sulphate , see P 6 . 1 1645 Mercuric thiocyana te, see P 6 . 1 1646 Mercurol, see P 6 . 1 1639 Mercurous acetate, se e P 6 . 1 1629 Mercurous bisulpha te, see P 6 . 1 1645 ■ ■ Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 881

Index 337 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Mercurous bromide, see P 6 . 1 1634 Mercurous chloride , see P 6 . 1 2025 MERCUROUS NITRATE P 6 . 1 1627 Mercurous salicy late, see P 6 . 1 1644 Mercurous sulphat e, see P 6 . 1 1645 MERCURY – 8 2809 MERCURY ACETATE P 6 . 1 1629 MERCURY AMMONIUM CH LORIDE P 6 . 1 1630 MERCURY BASED PES TICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C P 3 2778 MERCURY BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC P 6 . 1 3012 MERCURY BASED PEST ICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C P 6 . 1 3011 MERCURY BASED PEST ICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC P 6 . 1 2777 MERCURY BENZOATE P 6 . 1 1631 Mercury bichlori de, see P 6 . 1 1624 Mercury bisulpha te, see P 6 . 1 1645 MERCURY BROMIDES P 6 . 1 1634 MERCURY COMPOUND, LIQUID, N . O . S . P 6 . 1 2024 MERCURY COMPOUND, SO LID, N . O . S . P 6 . 1 2025 MERCURY CONTAINE D IN MANUFACTURED ARTICLES – 8 3506 MERCURY CYANIDE P 6 . 1 1636 MERCURY FULMINAT E, WETTED with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1A 0135 MERCURY GLUCONA TE P 6 . 1 1637 Mercury(II) (mer curic) compounds, see MERCURY BASED PESTICIDE P – – Mercury(I) (mercurous) compounds, see MERCURY BASED PESTICIDE P – – MERCURY IODIDE P 6 . 1 1638 MERCURY NUCLEATE P 6 . 1 1639 MERCURY OLEATE P 6 . 1 1640 MERCURY OXIDE – 6 . 1 1641 MERCURY OXYCYANI DE, DESENSITIZED P 6 . 1 1642 MERCURY OXYCYAN IDE pure (transport prohibited) – – – Mercury potassium cyanide, see P 6 . 1 1626 MERCURY POTASSIUM IODIDE P 6 . 1 1643 MERCURY SALICYLAT E P 6 . 1 1644 MERCURY SULPHATE P 6 . 1 1645 MERCURY THIOCYANA TE P 6 . 1 1646 Mesitylene, see P 3 2325 MESITYL OXIDE – 3 1229 Mesyl chloride, see – 6 . 1 3246 Metaarsenic acid, see – 6 . 1 1554 Metacetone, see – 3 1156 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 882

Index 338 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Metal alkyl halides, water-reactive, n . o . s . , see – 4 . 2 3394 Metal alkyl hydrides , water-reactive, n . o . s . , see – 4 . 2 3394 Metal alkyls, water- reactive, n . o . s . , see – 4 . 2 3394 Metal aryl halides, wa ter-reactive, n . o . s . , see – 4 . 2 3394 Metal aryl hydrides, w ater-reactive, n . o . s . , see – 4 . 2 3394 Metal aryls, water-r eactive, n . o . s . , see – 4 . 2 3394 METAL CARBONYLS, LIQUI D, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3281 METAL CARBONYLS, SO LID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3466 METAL CATALYST, DRY – 4 . 2 2881 METAL CATALYST, WETT ED with a visible excess of liquid – 4 . 2 1378 METALDEHYDE – 4 . 1 1332 METAL HYDRIDES, FL AMMABLE, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3182 METAL HYDRIDES, WA TER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 1409 METALLIC SUBSTANCE, W ATER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 3208 METALLIC SUBSTANC E, WATER-REACTIVE, SELF-HEATING, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 3209 METAL POWDER, FLAMMA BLE, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3089 METAL POWDER, SELF- HEATING, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3189 METAL SALTS OF ORGANI C COMPOUNDS, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3181 Metam-sodium, see THIOCA RBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – Methacraldehyde, stabilized, see – 3 2396 METHACRYLALDEHYDE, STABILIZED – 3 2396 3-Methacrylic acid, liquid, see – 8 3472 3-Methacrylic acid, solid, see – 8 2823 METHACRYLIC ACID, STABILIZED – 8 2531 METHACRYLONITRILE, STABILIZED – 6 . 1 3079 METHALLYL ALCOHOL – 3 2614 Met hamidophos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Methanal, see – 3 1198 Methanal, see – 8 2209 Methane and hydrogen, mixtures, compressed, see – 2 . 1 2034 METHANE, COMPRESSE D – 2 . 1 1971 METHANE, REFRIGERATE D LIQUID – 2 . 1 1972 METHANESULPHONYL CHLORIDE – 6 . 1 3246 Methanethiol, see P 2 . 3 1064 METHANOL – 3 1230 Methasulfoc arb, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE – – – Methidathion, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Methomyl, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – ortho- Methoxyaniline, see – 6 . 1 2431 Methoxybenzene, see – 3 2222 1-Me thoxybutane, see – 3 2350 Methoxyethane, see – 2 . 1 1039 2-Methoxyethanol, see – 3 1188 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 883

Index 339 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. 2-Methoxyethyl acetate, see – 3 1189 METHOXYMETHYL ISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2605 4-METHOXY-4-METH YLPENTAN-2-ONE – 3 2293 4-Methoxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone, see – 3 2293 Methoxynitrobenzenes, liquid, see – 6 . 1 2730 Methoxynitrobenze nes, solid, see – 6 . 1 3458 1-Methoxypropane, see – 3 26 12 1-METHOXY-2-PROPANOL – 3 3092 METHYL ACETATE – 3 1231 Methylacetic acid, see – 8 1848 METHYLACETYLENE AND PROPADIENE MIXTURE, STABILIZED – 2 . 1 1060 beta -Methylacrolein, see P 6 . 1 1143 2-Methylacrolein, st abilized – 3 2396 3-Methylacrolein, stabilized, see P 6 . 1 1143 METHYL ACRYLATE, STAB ILIZED – 3 1919 METHYLAL – 3 1234 Methyl alcohol, see – 3 1230 Methyl allyl alcohol, see – 3 2614 Methylallyl alcohol, see – 3 2614 METHYLALLYL CHLORIDE – 3 2554 METHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS – 2 . 1 1061 METHYLAMINE, AQ UEOUS SOLUTION – 3 1235 2-( N , N- Methylaminoethylcarbonyl)-4- (3,4-dimethyl phenyl sulphonyl)benzenedi azonium hydrogen sulphate (concentration 96%), see – 4 . 1 3236 METHYLAMYL ACETATE – 3 1233 Me thyl amyl alcohol, see – 3 2053 Methylamyl alcohol, see – 3 2053 Methyl normal- amyl ketone, see – 3 1110 N- METHYLANILINE P 6 . 1 2294 Methylated spirit s, see – 3 1987 Methylated spirits, see – 3 1986 Methylbenzene, see – 3 1294 4-Methylbenzenesulphonylhydrazide (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 Methylbenzol, see – 3 1294 a lpha- METHYLBENZYL ALCOHOL, LIQUID – 6 . 1 2937 alpha- METHYLBENZYL ALCOHOL, SOLID – 6 . 1 3438 Methyl borate, see – 3 2 416 Methyl bromide and chloropicrin mixture, see – 2 . 3 1581 METHYL BROMIDE AND E THYLENE DIBROMIDE MIXTURE, LIQUID P 6 . 1 1647 METHYL BROMIDE wi th not more than 2 . 0% chloropicrin – 2 . 3 1062 METHYL BROMOACETATE – 6 . 1 2643 2-Methyl-1,3-bu tadiene, stabilized, see – 3 1218 2-METHYLBUTANAL – 3 3371 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 884

Index 340 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. 2-Methylbutane, see – 3 1265 Methylbutanols, see – 3 1105 3-METHYLBUTAN-2-ONE – 3 2397 3-Methyl-2-butanone, see – 3 2397 2-METHYL-1-BUTENE – 3 2459 2-METHYL-2-BUTENE – 3 2460 3-METHYL-1-BUTENE – 3 2561 2-Methyl butylacrylate, stabilized, see – 3 2227 N- METHYLBUTYLAMINE – 3 2945 METHYL tert- BUTYL ETHER – 3 2398 METHYL BUTYRATE – 3 1237 Methyl carbonate, see – 3 1161 METHYL CHLORIDE – 2 . 1 1063 Methyl chloride and c hloropicrin mixture, see – 2 . 3 1582 METHYL CHLORIDE AND METHYL ENE CHLORIDE MIXTURE – 2 . 1 1912 METHYL CHLOROACETATE – 6 . 1 2295 Methylchlorobenzene s, see – 3 2238 Methyl chlorocarbonate, see – 6 . 1 1238 Methyl chloroform, se e – 6 . 1 2831 Methylchloroform, se e – 6 . 1 2831 METHYL CHLOROFORMATE – 6 . 1 1238 METHYL CHLOROMETHYL ETHE R – 6 . 1 1239 METHYL 2-CHLOROPROPI ONATE – 3 2933 alpha- Methyl alpha- chloropropionate, see – 3 2933 METHYLCHLOROSILANE – 2 . 3 2534 Methyl cyanide, see – 3 16 48 METHYLCYCLOHEXANE P 3 2296 METHYLCYCLOHEXANOLS, flammable – 3 2617 Methylcyclohexanone peroxide(s) (concentration ≤ 67%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 METHYLCYCLOHEXANONE – 3 22 97 METHYLCYCLOPENTANE – 3 2298 METHYL DICHLOROACETATE – 6 . 1 2299 METHYLDICHLOROSILAN E – 4 . 3 1242 Methyldinitrobenze nes, liquid, see P 6 . 1 2038 Methyldinitrobenz enes, molten, see P 6 . 1 1600 Methyldinitroben zenes, solid, see P 6 . 1 3454 Methyl disulphide, see P 3 2381 Methyldithiomethane, see P 3 2381 2,2 ′ -Methylenebis-(3,4,6-trichlorophenol), see – 6 . 1 2875 Methylene bromide, see – 6 . 1 2664 Methylene chloride, see – 6 . 1 1593 Methylene chloride an d methyl chloride mixture, see METHYL CHLORIDE AND METHYLENE CHLORIDE MIXTURE – – – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 885

Index 341 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Methylene chlorobromide, see – 6 . 1 1887 Methylene cyanide, se e – 6 . 1 2647 p , p ′ -Methylenedianiline , see P 6 . 1 2651 Methylene dibromide , see – 6 . 1 2664 Methyl ether, see – 2 . 1 1033 Methyl ethyl carb inol, see – 3 1120 Methyl ethyl ether, see – 2 . 1 1039 METHYL ETHYL KETONE – 3 1193 Me thyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) (concentration ≤ 40%, with diluent Type A, available oxygen ≤ 8 . 2%), see – 5 . 2 3107 Methyl ethyl ketone p eroxide(s) (concentration ≤ 45%, with diluent Type A, available oxygen ≤ 10%), see – 5 . 2 3105 Methyl ethyl ketone p eroxide(s) (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type A, available oxygen > 10% and ≤ 10 . 7%), see – 5 . 2 3101 2-METHYL-5-ETHYLPYRIDI NE – 6 . 1 2300 METHYL FLUORIDE – 2 . 1 2454 Methylfluorobenzene s ( ortho- ; meta- ; para- ), see – 3 2388 METHYL FORMATE – 3 1243 2-METHYLFURAN – 3 2301 Methyl glycol, see – 3 1188 Methyl glycol acetate, see – 3 1189 2-Methylheptane, see P 3 1262 2-METHYL-2-HEPTANETHIOL – 6 . 1 3023 5-METHYLHEXAN-2-O NE – 3 2302 5-Methyl-2-hexanone, see – 3 2302 METHYLHYDRAZINE – 6 . 1 1244 METHYL IODIDE – 6 . 1 2644 Methyl isobutenyl k etone, see – 3 1229 METHYL ISOBUTYL CARBINOL – 3 2053 Methyl isobutyl carbinol acetate, see – 3 1233 METHYL ISOBUTYL KETONE – 3 1245 Methyl isobutyl ketone peroxide(s) (concentration ≤ 62%, with ≥ 19% by mass diluent Type A and methyl isobutyl ketone), see – 5 . 2 3105 METHYL ISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2480 METHYL ISOPROPEN YL KETONE, STABILIZED – 3 1246 Methyl isopropyl ketone, see – 3 2397 Methyl isopropyl ketone peroxide(s) (with diluent Type A and active oxygen ≤ 6 . 7%) – 5 . 2 3109 METHYL ISOTHIOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2477 METHYL ISOVALERATE – 3 240 0 METHYLMAGNESIUM BROMIDE IN ETHYL ETHER – 4 . 3 1928 METHYL MERCAPTAN P 2 . 3 1064 Methyl mercaptoprop ionaldehyde, see – 6 . 1 2785 METHYL METHACRYLATE MO NOMER, STABILIZED – 3 1247 4-METHYLMORPHOLINE – 3 2535 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 886

Index 342 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. N- METHYLMORPHOLINE – 3 2535 METHYL NITRITE (transport prohibited) – 2 . 2 2455 Methylnitrophenols, see – 6 . 1 2446 METHYL ORTHOSILICATE – 6 . 1 2606 METHYLPENTADIENES – 3 246 1 2-Methylpentane, see P 3 1208 3-Methylpentane, see – 3 1208 2-METHYLPENTAN-2-OL – 3 2560 4-Methylpentan-2-ol, see – 3 2053 4-Methyl-2-pentanone, see – 3 1245 4-Methyl-3-penten-2-one, see – 3 1229 3-Methyl-2-penten-4-yn-ol, see – 8 2705 METHYLPHENYLDICHLOROSILANE – 8 2437 Methyl phenyl ether, see – 3 2222 2-Methyl-2-phenylpropane, see P 3 2709 1-METHYLPIPERIDINE – 3 2399 N- Methylpiperidine, see – 3 2399 2-Methylpropanol-1, see – 3 1212 2-Methyl-2-propanol – 3 1120 2-Methylpropanoyl chloride, see – 3 2395 2-Methyl-2-propen-1-ol, see – 3 2614 METHYL PROPIONATE – 3 1248 2-Methylpropionic acid, see – 3 2529 Methylpropyl acrylate, stabilized, see – 3 2527 Methylpropylbenzenes, see P 3 2046 METHYL PROPYL ETHER – 3 2612 2-Methylpropyl isobutyrate, see – 3 2528 METHYL PROPYL KETONE – 3 1249 Methylpyridines (2-; 3-; 4-), see – 3 2313 3-Methyl-4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)benzenediazonium tetrafluoroborate (concentration 95%), see – 4 . 1 3234 alpha- Methylstyrene, se e – 3 2303 Methylstyrenes, stabilized, see – 3 2618 Methyl sulphate, see – 6 . 1 1595 Methyl sulphide, see – 3 116 4 METHYLTETRAHYDROFURAN – 3 2536 METHYL TRICHLOROACETATE – 6 . 1 2533 METHYLTRICHLOROSILAN E – 3 1250 Methyltrithion, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – alpha- METHYLVALERALDEHYDE – 3 2367 1-Methylvinyl acetate, see – 3 2403 Methylvinylbenzenes, stabilized, see – 3 2618 METHYL VINYL KETONE, STABILIZED – 6 . 1 1251 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 887

Index 343 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Mevinphos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Mexacarbate, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – M . I . B . C . , see – 3 2053 MINES with bursti ng charge – 1 . 1D 0137 MINES with burst ing charge – 1 . 1F 0136 MINES with burst ing charge – 1 . 2D 0138 MINES with bursti ng charge – 1 . 2F 0294 Mirex, see ORGANOCHLOR INE PESTICIDE P – – Mischmetall, see – 4 . 1 1333 Missiles, guided, see ROCK ETS – – – Mixed acid, see – 8 1796 Mixed acid, spent, see – 8 1826 Mixtures of an inorganic nitrite with an ammonium salt (transport prohibited) – – – Mobam, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE – – – MOLYBDENUM PENTACHLORIDE – 8 2508 Monobromobenzene, see P 3 2514 Monochloroacetic acid, molten, see – 6 . 1 3250 Monochloroacetic acid , solid, see – 6 . 1 1751 Monochloroacetic aci d solution, see – 6 . 1 1750 Monochloroacetone, s tabilized, see P 6 . 1 1695 Monochlorobenzene, se e – 3 1134 Monochlorobenzol, see – 3 1134 Monochlorodifluoromethane, see – 2 . 2 1018 Monochlorodifluorom ethane and monochloropentafluoroethane mixture with fixed boiling point containing about 49% monochlorodifluoromethane, see – 2 . 2 1973 Monochlorodifluoromo nobromomethane, see – 2 . 2 1974 Monochloropentafluor oethane, see – 2 . 2 1020 Monochlorotetrafluo roethane, see – 2 . 2 1021 Monochlorotrifluorom ethane, see – 2 . 2 1022 Monocrotophos, see ORGANOP HOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Monoethanolamine, see – 8 2491 Monoethylamine, see – 2 . 1 1036 Monoethylamine, aque ous solution, see – 3 2270 Monomethylamine, anhydrous, see – 2 . 1 1061 Monomethylamine, aqu eous solution, see – 3 1235 Monomethylaniline, see – 6 . 1 2294 MONONITROTOLUIDINE S – 6 . 1 2660 Monopropylamine, see – 3 1277 MOR PHOLINE – 8 2054 MOTOR FUEL ANTI-KNOCK MIXTURE P 6 . 1 1649 MOTOR FUEL ANTI-KN OCK MIXTURE, FLAMMABLE P 6 . 1 3483 MOTOR SPIRIT – 3 1203 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 888

Index 344 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Muriatic acid, see – 8 1789 Muritan, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE – – – MUSK XYLENE – 4 . 1 2956 Mysorite, see – 9 2212 Nabam, see Note 1 P – – Naled, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Naphtha, see – 3 1268 NAPHTHALENE, CRUDE P 4 . 1 1334 NAPHTHALENE, MOL TEN P 4 . 1 2304 NAPHTHALENE, REFINE D P 4 . 1 1334 Naphtha, petroleum , see – 3 1268 Naphtha, solvent, see – 3 1268 alpha- NAPHTHYLAMINE – 6 . 1 2077 beta -NAPHTHYLAMINE, SO LID – 6 . 1 1650 beta -NAPHTHYLAMINE SO LUTION – 6 . 1 3411 NAPHTHYLTHIOUREA – 6 . 1 1651 1-Naphthylthiourea , see – 6 . 1 1651 alpha- Naphthylthioure a, see – 6 . 1 1651 NAPHTHYLUREA – 6 . 1 1652 NATURAL GAS, COMPR ESSED with high methane content – 2 . 1 1971 Natural gasoline, see M OTOR SPIRIT or GASOLINE or PETROL – – – NATURAL GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID with high methane content – 2 . 1 1972 Neodymium nitrate an d praseodymium nitrate mixture, see – 5 . 1 1456 Neohexane, see – 3 1208 NEON, COMPRESSED – 2 . 2 1065 NEON, REFRIGERATED LIQ UID – 2 . 2 1913 Neopentane, see – 2 . 1 2044 Neothyl, see – 3 2612 NICKEL CARB ONYL P 6 . 1 1259 NICKEL CYANIDE P 6 . 1 1653 Nickel(II) cyanide , see P 6 . 1 1653 NICKEL NITRATE – 5 . 1 2725 Nickel(II) nitrate , see – 5 . 1 2725 NICKEL NITRITE – 5 . 1 2726 Nickel(II) nitrite, se e – 5 . 1 2726 Nickelous nitrate, see – 5 . 1 2725 Nickelous nitrite, see – 5 . 1 2726 Nickel tetracarbony l, see P 6 . 1 1259 NICOTINE – 6 . 1 1654 NICOTINE COMPOUND, LIQUID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3144 NICOTINE COMPOUND, SOL ID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1655 NICOTINE HYDROCHLOR IDE, LIQUID – 6 . 1 1656 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 889

Index 345 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. NICOTINE HYDROCHLORIDE, SOLID – 6 . 1 3444 NICOTINE HYDROCHLORI DE SOLUTION – 6 . 1 1656 NICOTINE PREPARA TION, LIQUID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3144 NICOTINE PREPARA TION, SOLID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1655 NICOTINE SALICYLA TE – 6 . 1 1657 NICOTINE SULPHA TE, SOLID – 6 . 1 3445 NICOTINE SULPHAT E SOLUTION – 6 . 1 1658 NICOTINE TARTR ATE – 6 . 1 1659 NITRATES, INORG ANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3218 NITRATES, INORG ANIC, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 1477 NITRATING ACID MIX TURE, SPENT, with more than 50% nitric acid – 8 1826 NITRATING ACID MIXTURE, SPENT, with not more than 50% nitric acid – 8 1826 NITRATING ACID MIXTURE with more than 50% nitric acid – 8 1796 NITRATING ACID MIXTURE with not more than 50% nitric acid – 8 1796 NITRIC ACID other than red fuming, with at least 65% but with not more than 70% nitric acid – 8 2031 NITRIC ACID other than red fuming, with less than 65% nitric acid – 8 2031 NITRIC ACID other than red fuming, with more than 70% nitric acid – 8 2031 NITRIC ACID, RED FUMING – 8 2032 NITRIC OXIDE AND DINITROGEN TETROXIDE MIXTURE – 2 . 3 1975 NITRIC OXIDE AND NITR OGEN DIOXIDE MIXTURE – 2 . 3 1975 NITRIC OXIDE, COMPRE SSED – 2 . 3 1660 NITRILES, FLAMMA BLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 3 3273 NITRILES, TOXIC, FL AMMABLE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3275 NITRILES, LIQUID T OXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3276 NITRILES, SOLID, T OXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3439 NITRITES, INORGA NIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3219 Nitrites, inorgan ic, mixtures with ammonium compounds (transport prohibited) – – – NITRITES, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 2627 NITROANILINES ( o- , m- , p- ) – 6 . 1 1661 NITROANISOLES, LI QUID – 6 . 1 2730 NITROANISOLES, SOL ID – 6 . 1 3458 NITROBENZENE – 6 . 1 1662 Nitrobenzene br omides, liquid, see – 6 . 1 2732 Nitrobenzene bromi des, solid, see – 6 . 1 3459 NITROBENZENESULP HONIC ACID – 8 2305 Nitrobenzol, see – 6 . 1 1662 5-NITROBENZOTRI AZOL – 1 . 1D 0385 NITROBENZOTRIFL UORIDES, LIQUID P 6 . 1 2306 NITROBENZOTRIFLUORI DES, SOLID P 6 . 1 3431 NITROBROMOBENZENE S, LIQUID – 6 . 1 2732 NITROBROMOBENZEN ES, SOLID – 6 . 1 3459 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 890

Index 346 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Nitrocarbonitrates, see EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE B – – – NITROCELLULOSE, dry or wetted with less than 25% water (or alcohol), by mass – 1 . 1D 0340 NITROCELLULOSE M EMBRANE FILTERS with not more than 12 . 6% nitrogen, by dry mass – 4 . 1 3270 NITROCELLULOSE, P LASTICIZED with not less than 18% plasticizing substance, by mass – 1 . 3C 0343 NITROCELLULOSE SO LUTION, FLAMMABLE with not more than 12 . 6% nitrogen, by dry mass, an d not more than 55% nitrocellulose – 3 2059 NITROCELLULOSE, unmodified or plasticized with less than 18% plasticizing substance, by mass – 1 . 1D 0341 NITROCELLULOSE , WETTED with not less than 25% alcohol, by mass – 1 . 3C 0342 NITROCELLULOSE WIT H ALCOHOL (not less than 25% alcohol, by mass, and not more than 12 . 6% nitrogen, by dry mass) – 4 . 1 2556 NITROCELLULOSE wi th not more than 12 . 6% nitrogen, by dry mass, MI XTURE WITHOUT PLASTICIZER, WITHOUT PIGMENT – 4 . 1 2557 NITROCELLULOSE wi th not more than 12 . 6% nitrogen, by dry mass, MI XTURE WITHOUT PLASTICIZER, WITH PIGMENT – 4 . 1 2557 NITROCELLULOSE wi th not more than 12 . 6% nitrogen, by dry mass, MI XTURE WITH PLASTICIZER, WITHOUT PIGMENT – 4 . 1 2557 NITROCELLULOSE wi th not more than 12 . 6% nitrogen, by dry mass, MI XTURE WITH PLASTICIZER, WITH PIGMENT – 4 . 1 2557 NITROCELLULOSE WI TH WATER (not less than 25% water, by mass) – 4 . 1 2555 Nitrochlorobenzene s, see – 6 . 1 1578 3-NITRO-4-CHLOR OBENZOTRIFLUORIDE P 6 . 1 2307 Nitrocotton solutio n, see – 3 2059 Nitrocotton with alcohol, see – 4 . 1 2556 Nitrocotton with pl asticizing substance, see – 4 . 1 2557 Nitrocotton with w ater, see – 4 . 1 2555 NITROCRESOLS, LIQUID – 6 . 1 3434 NITROCRESOLS, SOLID – 6 . 1 2446 NITROETHANE – 3 2842 NITROGEN , COMPRESSED – 2 . 2 1066 NITROGEN DIOXIDE – 2 . 3 1067 Nitrogen dioxide and n itric oxide mixtures, see – 2 . 3 1975 Nitrogen peroxide, see – 2 . 3 1067 NITROGEN, REFRIGERATED L IQUID – 2 . 2 1977 Nitrogen sesquioxide , see – 2 . 3 2421 NITROGEN TRIFLUORIDE – 2 . 2 2451 NITROGEN TRIOXIDE – 2 . 3 2421 NITROGLYCERIN, DESE NSITIZED with not less than 40% non-volatile water-insoluble phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0143 NITROGLYCERIN MI XTURE, DESENSITIZED, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with not more than 30% nitr oglycerin, by mass – 3 3343 NITROGLYCERIN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, LIQUID, N . O . S . with not more than 30% nitr oglycerin, by mass – 3 3357 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 891

Index 347 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. NITROGLYCERIN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, SOLID, N . O . S . with more than 2% but not mo re than 10% nitroglycerin, by mass – 4 . 1 3319 NITROGLYCERIN SO LUTION IN ALCOHOL with more than 1% but not more than 5% nitroglycerin – 3 3064 NITROGLYCERIN SOLUTION IN ALCOHOL with more than 1% but not more than 10% nitroglycerin – 1 . 1D 0144 NITROGLYCERIN S OLUTION IN ALCOHOL with not more than 1% nitroglycerin – 3 1204 NITROGUANIDINE, dry or wetted with less than 20% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0282 NITROGUANIDIN E, WETTED with not less than 20% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1336 NITROHYDROCHLORIC A CID – 8 1798 NITROMANNITE, WETTED with not less than 40% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0133 NITROMETHANE – 3 1261 Nit romuriatic acid, see – 8 1798 NITRONAPHTHALENE – 4 . 1 2538 NITROPHENOLS ( o- , m- , p- ) – 6 . 1 1663 4-NITROPHENYLH YDRAZINE with not less than 30% water, by mass – 4 . 1 3376 NITROPROPANES – 3 2608 p- NITRO SODIMETHYLANILINE – 4 . 2 1369 4-Nitrosophenol (co ncentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3236 NITROSTARCH, dry o r wetted, with less than 20% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0146 NITROSTARCH, WE TTED with not less than 20% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1337 NITROSYL CHLORIDE – 2 . 3 1069 NITROSYLSULPHURIC A CID, LIQUID – 8 2308 NITROSYLSULPHURIC ACID, SOLID – 8 3456 NITROTOLUENES, LIQUID – 6 . 1 1664 NITROTOLUENES, SOLID – 6 . 1 3446 NITROTOLUIDINE S (MONO) – 6 . 1 2660 NITROTRIAZOLONE – 1 . 1D 0490 Nitrotrichloromet hane, see – 6 . 1 1580 NITRO UREA – 1 . 1D 0147 Nitrous ether solu tion, see – 3 1194 NITROUS OXIDE – 2 . 2 1070 NITROUS OXIDE, REFR IGERATED LIQUID – 2 . 2 2201 NITROXYLENES, LIQUID – 6 . 1 1665 NITROXYLENES, S OLID – 6 . 1 3447 Non-activated ca rbon, see – 4 . 2 1361 Non-activated cha rcoal, see – 4 . 2 1361 NONANES P 3 1920 Nonylphenol, see P 8 3145 NONYLTRICHLOROSILANE – 8 1799 Norbormide, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . – – – 2,5-NORBORNADIENE, STABILIZED – 3 2251 NTO – 1 . 1D 0490 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 892

Index 348 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. OCTADECYLTRICHLOROSILANE – 8 1800 OCTADIENE – 3 2309 OCTAFLUOROBUT-2-ENE – 2 . 2 2422 Octafluoro-2-buten e, see – 2 . 2 2422 OCTAFLUOROCYCLOBUTA NE – 2 . 2 1976 OCTAFLUOROPROPANE – 2 . 2 2424 Octaldehyde, see – 3 1191 OCTAN ES P 3 1262 3-Octanone, see – 3 2271 OCTOGEN, DESENSITIZED – 1 . 1D 0484 OCTOGEN, WETTED wi th not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0226 OCTOL, dry or wetted w ith less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0266 OCTOLITE, dry or wet ted with less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0266 OCTONAL – 1 . 1D 0496 OCTYL ALDEHYDES – 3 1191 ter t- Octyl mercaptan, see – 6 . 1 3023 OCTYLTRICHLOROSILA NE – 8 1801 Oenanthol, see – 3 3056 Oil cake, see – 4 . 2 1386 OIL GAS, COMPRESSED – 2 . 3 1071 Oleum, see – 8 1831 Oleylamine, see Note 1 P – – Omethoate, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Organic peroxide, liquid, sample, see – 5 . 2 3103 Organic peroxide, li quid, sample, temperature controlled, see – 5 . 2 3113 Organic peroxide, so lid, sample, see – 5 . 2 3104 Organic peroxide, so lid, sample, temperature controlled, see – 5 . 2 3114 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E B, LIQUID – 5 . 2 3101 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E B, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 5 . 2 3111 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B , SOLID – 5 . 2 3102 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E B, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 5 . 2 3112 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E C, LIQUID – 5 . 2 3103 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E C, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 5 . 2 3113 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E C, SOLID – 5 . 2 3104 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E C, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 5 . 2 3114 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E D, LIQUID – 5 . 2 3105 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E D, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 5 . 2 3115 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E D, SOLID – 5 . 2 3106 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E D, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 5 . 2 3116 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYP E E, LIQUID – 5 . 2 3107 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 893

Index 349 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 5 . 2 3117 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE E, SOLID – 5 . 2 3108 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE E, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 5 . 2 3118 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE F, LIQUID – 5 . 2 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE F, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 5 . 2 3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE F, SOLID – 5 . 2 3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TY PE F, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 5 . 2 3120 ORGANIC PIGMENTS, S ELF-HEATING – 4 . 2 3313 ORGANOARSENIC COMP OUND, LIQUID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3280 ORGANOARSENIC CO MPOUND, SOLID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3465 ORGANOCHLORIN E PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 2762 ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2996 ORGANOCHLORINE P ESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 2995 ORGANOCHLORINE PE STICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2761 Organometallic c ompound dispersion, water-reactive, flammable, see – 4 . 3 3399 Organometallic co mpound solid, water-reactive, flammable, see – 4 . 3 3396 Organometallic co mpound solution, water-reactive, flammable, see – 4 . 3 3399 ORGANOMETALLIC COMP OUND, LIQUID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3282 ORGANOMETALLIC CO MPOUND, SOLID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3467 ORGANOMETALLIC SU BSTANCE, LIQUID, PYROPHORIC – 4 . 2 3392 ORGANOMETALLIC SUB STANCE, LIQUID, PYROPHORIC, WATER-REACTIVE – 4 . 2 3394 ORGANOMETALLIC SUB STANCE, LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE – 4 . 3 3398 ORGANOMETALLIC SUB STANCE, LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE – 4 . 3 3399 ORGANOMETALLIC SUB STANCE, SOLID, PYROPHORIC – 4 . 2 3391 ORGANOMETALLIC SUB STANCE, SOLID, PYROPHORIC, WATER-REACTIVE – 4 . 2 3393 ORGANOMETALLIC SUB STANCE, SOLID, SELF-HEATING – 4 . 2 3400 ORGANOMETALLIC SUB STANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE – 4 . 3 3395 ORGANOMETALLIC SUB STANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE – 4 . 3 3396 ORGANOMETALLIC SU BSTANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE, SELF-HEATING – 4 . 3 3397 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS COMP OUND, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3279 ORGANOPHOSPHORU S COMPOUND, LIQUID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3278 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS COM POUND, SOLID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3464 ORGANOPHOSPHO RUS PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 2784 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3018 ORGANOPHOSPHO RUS PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 3017 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS P ESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2783 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 894

Index 350 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ORGANOTIN COMPOUND, LIQUID, N . O . S . P 6 . 1 2788 ORGANOTIN COMPOUND, S OLID, N . O . S . P 6 . 1 3146 Organotin compounds (pesticides), see ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE P – – ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C P 3 2787 ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC P 6 . 1 3020 ORGANOTIN PESTICI DE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C P 6 . 1 3019 ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE , SOLID, TOXIC P 6 . 1 2786 Orthoarsenic acid, see – 6 . 1 1553 Orthophosphoric acid , liquid, see – 8 1805 Orthophosphoric acid, solid, see – 8 3453 OSMIUM TETROXIDE P 6 . 1 2471 Oxamyl, see CARBAMATE P ESTICIDE P – – OXIDIZING LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3098 OXIDIZING LIQUID, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3139 OXIDIZING LIQUID, T OXIC, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3099 OXIDIZING SOLID, COR ROSIVE, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3085 OXIDIZING SOLID, FLA MMABLE, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3137 OXIDIZING SOLID, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 1479 OXIDIZING SOLID, SE LF-HEATING, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3100 OXIDIZING SOLID, TOX IC, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3087 OXIDIZING SOLID, WAT ER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3121 Oxirane, see – 2 . 3 1040 Oxirane with nitroge n up to a total pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar) at 50 ° C – 2 . 3 1040 Oxydemeton-methyl, see ORG ANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Oxydisulfoton, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – OXYGEN, COMPRESSED – 2 . 2 1072 OXYGEN DIFLUORIDE, COM PRESSED – 2 . 3 2190 Oxygen fluoride, comp ressed, see – 2 . 3 2190 OXYGEN GENERATOR, CH EMICAL – 5 . 1 3356 OXYGEN, REFRIGERATED LIQUID – 2 . 2 1073 1-Oxy-4-nitrobenze ne, see – 6 . 1 1662 PACKAGINGS, DISC ARDED, EMPTY, UNCLEANED – 9 3509 PAINT (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) – 3 1263 PAINT (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) – 8 3066 PAINT, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) – 8 3470 PAINT, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) – 3 3469 PAINT RELATED MATERIAL (including paint thinning or reducing compound) – 3 1263 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 895

Index 351 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. PAINT RELATED MATERIAL (including paint thinning or reducing compound) – 8 3066 PAINT RELATED MATERIAL, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE (including paint thinning or reducing compound) – 8 3470 PAINT RELATED MATERIAL, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE (including paint thinning or reducing compound) – 3 3469 PAPER, UNSATURATED OIL TREATED, incompletely dried (including carbon paper) – 4 . 2 1379 Para-acetaldehyde, se e – 3 1264 PARAFORMALDEHYDE – 4 . 1 2213 PARALDEHYDE – 3 1264 Par aoxon, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Paraquat, see BIPYRIDILIUM PESTICIDE – – – Parathion, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Parathion-methyl, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – PCBs, liquid, see P 9 2315 PCBs, solid, see P 9 3432 PENTABORANE – 4 . 2 1380 PENTACHLOROETHAN E P 6 . 1 1669 PENTACHLOROPHEN OL P 6 . 1 3155 Pentachlorophenol, see O RGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE P – – PENTAERYTHRITE TETRANITRATE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 15% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0150 PENTAERYTHRITE TETRANITRATE MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, SOLID, N . O . S . with more than 10% but not m ore than 20% PETN, by mass – 4 . 1 3344 PENTAERYTHRITE T ETRANITRATE, WETTED with not less than 25% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0150 PENTAERYTHRI TE TETRANITRATE with not less than 7% wax, by mass – 1 . 1D 0411 PENTAERYTHRIT OL TETRANITRATE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 15% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0150 PENTAERYTHRI TOL TETRANITRATE MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, SOLID, N . O . S . with more than 10% but not m ore than 20% PETN, by mass – 4 . 1 3344 PENTAERYTHRITO L TETRANITRATE, WETTED with not less than 25% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0150 PENTAERYTHRI TOL TETRANITRATE with not less than 7% wax, by mass – 1 . 1D 0411 PENTAFLUOROETHAN E – 2 . 2 3220 Pentafluoroethoxy trifluoroethylene, see – 2 . 1 3154 Pentafluoroethyl t rifluorovinyl ether, see – 2 . 1 3154 Pentalin, see P 6 . 1 1669 Pentamethylene, se e – 3 1146 PENTAMETHYLHEPTANE – 3 2286 3,3,5,7,7-Pentamethyl-1,2,4-trioxepane (concentration ≤ 100%) – 5 . 2 3107 Pentanals, see – 3 2058 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 896

Index 352 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Pentane, see – 3 1265 PENTANE-2,4-DIONE – 3 2310 2,4-Pentanedione, see – 3 2310 PENTANES, liquid – 3 1265 Pentanethiols, see – 3 1111 PENTANOLS – 3 1105 2-Pentanone, see – 3 1249 3-Pentanone, see – 3 1156 1-PENTENE – 3 1108 1-PENTOL – 8 2705 PENTOLITE, dry or wetted with less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0151 Pentylamines, see – 3 110 6 n- Pentylbenzene, see Note 1 P – – Pentyl butanoates, see – 3 2620 Pentyl butyrates, see – 3 2620 Pentyl formates, see – 3 1109 Pentyl nitrates, see – 3 1112 Pentyl nitrite, see – 3 1113 PERCHLORATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3211 PERCHLORATES, INO RGANIC, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 1481 PERCHLORIC ACID wit h more than 50% but not more than 72% acid, by mass – 5 . 1 1873 PERCHLORIC ACID, w ith more than 72% acid by mass (transport prohibited) – – – PERCHLORIC ACID with not more than 50% acid, by mass – 8 1802 Perchlorobenzene, see – 6 . 1 2729 Perchlorocyclopent adiene, see – 6 . 1 2646 Perchloroethylene, se e P 6 . 1 1897 PERCHLOROMETHYL MER CAPTAN P 6 . 1 1670 PERCHLORYL FLUORIDE – 2 . 3 3083 Perfluoroacetyl chlor ide, see – 2 . 3 3057 Perfluoro-2-butene, se e – 2 . 2 2422 PERFLUORO(ETHYL VINYL ETHE R) – 2 . 1 3154 PERFLUORO(METHYL VINYL ETHER) – 2 . 1 3153 Perfluoropropane, see – 2 . 2 2424 PERFUMERY PRODUCTS wit h flammable liquid – 3 1266 PERMANGANATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3214 PERMANGANATES, I NORGANIC, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 1482 PEROXIDES, INORGA NIC, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 1483 Peroxyacetic acid and hydrogen peroxide mixture, see – 5 . 1 3149 Peroxyacetic acid, T ype D (concentration ≤ 43%), stabilized, see – 5 . 2 3105 Peroxyacetic acid, Ty pe E (concentration ≤ 43%), stabilized, see – 5 . 2 3107 Peroxyacetic acid, Ty pe F (concentration ≤ 43%), stabilized, see – 5 . 2 3109 Peroxylauric acid (c oncentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3118 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 897

Index 353 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. PERSULPHATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3216 PERSULPHATES, IN ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 5 . 1 3215 PESTICIDE, LIQU ID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N . O . S . flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 3 021 PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . flashpoint not less tha n 23 ° C – 6 . 1 2903 PESTICIDE, LIQUID , TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2902 PESTICIDE, SOLID , TOXIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2588 PETN, DESENSITIZ ED with not less than 15% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0150 PETN MIXTURE, DE SENSITIZED, SOLID, N . O . S . with more than 10% but not m ore than 20% PETN, by mass – 4 . 1 3344 PETN/TNT, see – 1 . 1D 0151 PETN, WETTED wit h not less than 25% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0150 PETN with not less t han 7% wax, by mass – 1 . 1D 0411 PETROL – 3 1203 PETROLEUM CRUDE OIL – 3 1267 PETROLEUM DISTILLATES, N . O . S . – 3 1268 Petroleum ether, see – 3 1268 P ETROLEUM GASES, LIQUEFIED – 2 . 1 1075 Petroleum naphtha, see – 3 12 68 Petroleum oil, see – 3 1268 PETROLEUM PRODUCTS, N . O . S . – 3 1268 Petroleum raffinate, se e – 3 1268 PETROLEUM SOUR CRUDE OIL, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC – 3 3494 Petroleum spirit, see PETROLEUM DISTILLATES, N . O . S . or PETROLEUM PRODUCTS, N . O . S . – – – PHENACYL BROMIDE – 6 . 1 2645 Phenarsazine chlori de, see P 6 . 1 1698 PHENETIDINES – 6 . 1 2311 Phenkapton, see ORGAN OPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – PHENOLATES, LIQUID – 8 2904 PHENOLATES, SOLID – 8 2905 PHENOL, MOLTEN – 6 . 1 2312 PHENOL, SOLID – 6 . 1 1671 PHENOL SOLUTION – 6 . 1 2821 PHENOLSULPHONIC A CID, LIQUID – 8 1803 d- Phenothrin, see Note 1 P – – PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 3346 PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3348 PHENOXYACETIC AC ID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 3347 PHENOXYACETIC AC ID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3345 Phenthoate, see ORGANOPHO SPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – PHENYLACETONITRILE, LIQUID – 6 . 1 2470 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 898

Index 354 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. PHENYLACETYL CHLORIDE – 8 2577 Phenylamine, see P 6 . 1 1547 Phenyl bromide, see P 3 2514 1-Phenylbutane, see P 3 2709 2-Phenylbutane, see P 3 2709 Phenyl carbimide, see – 6 . 1 2487 PHENYLCARBYLAMINE C HLORIDE – 6 . 1 1672 Phenylchloroform , see – 8 2226 PHENYL CHLOROFORMATE – 6 . 1 2746 Phenyl chloromethy l ketone, liquid or solid, see – 6 . 1 1697 Phenyl cyanide, see – 6 . 1 2224 Phenylcyclohexane, see P 9 3082 Phenyldichlorophosphine, see – 8 2798 Phenyldichlorophosphine sulphide, see – 8 2799 PHENYLENEDIAMINES ( o- , m- , p- ) – 6 . 1 1673 Phenylethane, see – 3 1175 Phen ylethylene, stabilized, see – 3 2055 1-Phenylethyl hydroperoxide (concentration ≤ 38%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3109 Phenyl fluoride, see – 3 2387 P HENYLHYDRAZINE – 6 . 1 2572 Phenyliminophosgene, se e – 6 . 1 1672 PHENYL ISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2487 Phenyl isocyanodic hloride, see – 6 . 1 1672 PHENYL MERCAPTAN – 6 . 1 2337 PHENYLMERCURIC ACET ATE P 6 . 1 1674 PHENYLMERCURIC COM POUND, N . O . S . P 6 . 1 2026 PHENYLMERCURIC HYDRO XIDE P 6 . 1 1894 PHENYLMERCURIC NIT RATE P 6 . 1 1895 Phenyl methyl carbi nol, solid or liquid, see – 6 . 1 2937 Phenyl methyl ether, see – 3 2222 PHENYLPHOSPHORUS DICHLORIDE – 8 2798 PHENYLPHOSPHORUS THIODICHLORIDE – 8 2799 2-Phenylpropene, see – 3 2303 PHENYLTRICHLOROSILANE – 8 1804 Phenyltrifluoromethane, see – 3 2338 Phorate, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Phosalone, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Phosfolan, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – PHOSGENE – 2 . 3 1076 Phosmet, see ORGANOPHOSPHOR US PESTICIDE P – – 9-PHOSPHABICYCLONONANES – 4 . 2 2940 Phosphamidon, see ORGANOPH OSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 899

Index 355 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. PHOSPHINE – 2 . 3 2199 PHOSPHINE, ADSORBED – 2 . 3 3525 Phosphoretted hydro gen, see – 2 . 3 2199 PHOSPHORIC ACID, SOLI D – 8 3453 PHOSPHORIC ACID, SOLUTION – 8 1805 Phosphoric anhydride, see – 8 1807 Phosphoric chloride, see – 8 1806 Phosphoric pentachloride, see – 8 1806 Phosphoric perchloride, see – 8 1806 Phosphorothioic acid, o -[(cyanophenyl methylene) azanyl] o , o -diethyl ester (concentration 82-91% (Z isomer)), see – 4 . 1 3227 PHOSPHOROUS ACID – 8 283 4 PHOSPHORUS, AMORPHOUS – 4 . 1 1338 Phosphorus bromi de, see – 8 1808 Phosphorus chloride, see – 6 . 1 1809 PHOSPHORUS HEPT ASULPHIDE, free from yellow or white phosphorus – 4 . 1 1339 PHOSPHORUS OXYBR OMIDE – 8 1939 PHOSPHORUS OXYBROMIDE, MOLTEN – 8 2576 PHOSPHORUS OXYCHLORIDE – 6 . 1 1810 PHOSPHORUS PENTAB ROMIDE – 8 2691 PHOSPHORUS PENTACHLORIDE – 8 1806 PHOSPHORUS PENTAFLUORIDE – 2 . 3 2198 PHOSPHORUS PENTAFL UORIDE, ADSORBED – 2 . 3 3524 PHOSPHORUS PENTAS ULPHIDE, free from yellow or white phosphorus – 4 . 3 1340 PHOSPHORUS PENTOXI DE – 8 1807 Phosphorus, red, see – 4 . 1 1338 PHOSPHORUS SESQ UISULPHIDE, free from yellow or white phosphorus – 4 . 1 1341 Phosphorus(V) sulph ide, free from from yellow or white phosphorus, see – 4 . 3 1340 Phosphorus sulphoch loride, see – 8 1837 PHOSPHORUS TRIBROMIDE – 8 1808 PHOSPHORUS TRICHLORIDE – 6 . 1 1809 PHOSPHORUS TRIOXI DE – 8 2578 PHOSPHORUS TRISULPHIDE, free from yellow or white phosphorus – 4 . 1 1343 PHOSPHORUS, WHITE, DRY P 4 . 2 1381 PHOSPHORUS, WHITE, I N SOLUTION P 4 . 2 1381 PHOSPHORUS, WHITE, M OLTEN P 4 . 2 2447 PHOSPHORUS, WHITE, UN DER WATER P 4 . 2 1381 PHOSPHORUS, YELLOW , DRY P 4 . 2 1381 PHOSPHORUS, YELLOW , IN SOLUTION P 4 . 2 1381 PHOSPHORUS, YELL OW, UNDER WATER P 4 . 2 1381 Phosphoryl bromid e, molten, see – 8 2576 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 900

Index 356 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Phosphoryl bromide, solid, see – 8 1939 Phosphoryl chloride, see – 6 . 1 1810 PHTHALIC ANHYDRI DE with more than 0 . 05% of maleic anhydride – 8 22 14 PICOLINES – 3 2313 Picramic acid, wetted with not less than 20% water, by mass, see – 4 . 1 3317 PICRAMIDE – 1 . 1D 0153 PICRIC ACID, dry or w etted with less than 30% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0154 PICRIC ACID, WETT ED with not less than 10% water, by mass – 4 . 1 3364 PICRIC ACID, WETTED w ith not less than 30% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1344 PICRITE, dry or wett ed with less than 20% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0282 PICRITE, WETTED wi th not less than 20% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1336 PICRYL CHLORIDE – 1 . 1D 0155 PICRYL CHLORIDE , WETTED with not less than 10% water, by mass – 4 . 1 3365 Pinanyl hydroperox ide (concentration ≤ 56%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3109 Pinanyl hydroperoxi de (concentration > 56–100%), see – 5 . 2 3105 Pindone (and salts of) , see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . P – – alpha- PINENE P 3 2368 PINE OIL P 3 1272 PIPERAZINE – 8 2579 PIPERIDINE – 8 2401 Pirimicarb, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – Pirimiphos-ethyl, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Pivaloyl chloride, see – 6 . 1 2438 Plastic explosives, se e – 1 . 1D 0084 PLASTICS MOULDING C OMPOUND in dough, sheet or extruded rope form, evolving flammable vapour – 9 3314 PLASTICS, NITROCELLULOSE-BASED, SELF-HEATING, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 2006 Platinic chloride, sol id, see – 8 2507 Polish, see PAINT – – – POLYAMINES, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 3 2733 POLYAMINES, LIQUID , CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 8 2734 POLYAMINES, LIQUID , CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 8 2735 POLYAMINES, SOLID, COR ROSIVE, N . O . S . – 8 3259 POLYCHLORINATED BIP HENYLS, LIQUID P 9 2315 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS, SOLID P 9 3432 POLYESTER RESIN KIT, liquid base material – 3 3269 POLYESTER RESIN KIT, solid base material – 4 . 1 3527 Polyether poly- tert- bu tylperoxycarbonate (concentration ≤ 52%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3107 POLYHALOGENATED BIPHE NYLS, LIQUID P 9 3151 POLYHALOGENATED BIPHENYLS, SOLID P 9 3152 POLYHALOGENATED TERPHENYLS, LIQUID P 9 3151 POLYHALOGENATED TERPHENYLS, SOLID P 9 3152 POLYMERIC BEADS, EXPANDABLE, evolving flammable vapour – 9 2211 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 901

Index 357 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. POLYMERIZING SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, STABILIZED, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3532 POLYMERIZING SUBS TANCE, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3534 POLYMERIZING SUBS TANCE, SOLID, STABILIZED, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3531 POLYMERIZING SUBS TANCE, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3533 Polystyrene beads, e xpandable, see – 9 2211 Polystyrene beads, expandable, evolving flammable vapour, see – 9 2211 POTASSIUM – 4 . 3 2257 Potassium acid fluor ide, solid, see – 8 1811 Potassium acid fluoride solution, see – 8 1811 Potassium alloys, metal, see – 4 . 3 1420 Potassium amalgam s, liquid, see – 4 . 3 1389 Potassium amalga ms, solid, see – 4 . 3 3401 Potassium amide, se e – 4 . 3 1390 Potassium antimo ny tartrate, see – 6 . 1 1551 POTASSIUM ARSE NATE – 6 . 1 1677 POTASSIUM ARSEN ITE – 6 . 1 1678 Potassium bifluo ride, solid, see – 8 1811 Potassium bifluoride solution, see – 8 3421 Potassium bisulphate, see – 8 2509 Potassium bisulphite solution, see – 8 2693 POTASSIUM BOROHYDRIDE – 4 . 3 1870 POTASSIUM BROMA TE – 5 . 1 1484 POTASSIUM CHLOR ATE – 5 . 1 1485 POTASSIUM CHLORAT E, AQUEOUS SOLUTION – 5 . 1 2427 Potassium chlora te mixed with mineral oil, see – 1 . 1D 0083 POTASSIUM CUPROC YANIDE P 6 . 1 1679 POTASSIUM CYANI DE, SOLID P 6 . 1 1680 POTASSIUM CYANIDE SOLUTION P 6 . 1 3413 Potassium cyanoc uprate(I), see P 6 . 1 1679 Potassium cyano mercurate, see P 6 . 1 1626 Potassium dicy anocuprate(I), see – 6 . 1 1679 Potassium dihyd rogen arsenate, see – 6 . 1 1677 Potassium dispe rsions, see – 4 . 3 1391 POTASSIUM DITHION ITE – 4 . 2 1929 POTASSIUM FLUORIDE, SOLID – 6 . 1 1812 POTASSIUM FLUORIDE SOLUTION – 6 . 1 3422 POTASSIUM FLUOR OACETATE – 6 . 1 2628 POTASSIUM FLUOROS ILICATE – 6 . 1 2655 Potassium hexaflu orosilicate, see – 6 . 1 2655 Potassium hydrat e, see – 8 1814 POTASSIUM HYDROGEN DIFLUORIDE, SOLID – 8 1811 POTASSIUM HYDROGEN DIFLUORIDE SOLUTION – 8 3421 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 902

Index 358 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Potassium hydrogen fluoride, solid, see – 8 1811 Potassium hydrogen fluoride solution, see – 8 3421 POTASSIUM HYDROGEN SULPHATE – 8 2509 POTASSIUM HYDROSULPHITE – 4 . 2 1929 Potassium hydroxide, l iquid, see – 8 1814 POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE, SOLID – 8 1813 POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE SOLUTION – 8 1814 Potassium hypochlorite solution, see – 8 1791 Potassium mercuric iodide, see P 6 . 1 1643 POTASSIUM METAL AL LOYS, LIQUID – 4 . 3 1420 POTASSIUM METAL ALLO YS, SOLID – 4 . 3 3403 POTASSIUM METAVANA DATE – 6 . 1 2864 POTASSIUM MONOXIDE – 8 203 3 POTASSIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 1486 Potassium nitrate a nd sodium nitrate mixture, see – 5 . 1 1499 POTASSIUM NITRATE A ND SODIUM NITRITE MIXTURE – 5 . 1 1487 POTASSIUM NITRITE – 5 . 1 1488 Potassium oxide, see – 8 2033 P OTASSIUM PERCHLORATE – 5 . 1 1489 POTASSIUM PERMAN GANATE – 5 . 1 1490 POTASSIUM PEROXID E – 5 . 1 1491 POTASSIUM PERSULPH ATE – 5 . 1 1492 POTASSIUM PHOSPHID E – 4 . 3 2012 Potassium silicofluor ide, see – 6 . 1 2655 POTASSIUM SODIUM A LLOYS, LIQUID – 4 . 3 1422 POTASSIUM SODIUM AL LOYS, SOLID – 4 . 3 3404 POTASSIUM SULPHIDE, A NHYDROUS – 4 . 2 1382 POTASSIUM SULPHID E, HYDRATED with not less than 30% water of crystallization – 8 1847 POTASSIUM SULPHIDE with less than 30% water of crystallization – 4 . 2 1382 POTASSIUM SUPEROXI DE – 5 . 1 2466 Potassium tetracy anomercurate(II), see – 6 . 1 1626 Potassium vanadate , see – 6 . 1 2864 POWDER CAKE, WETTED w ith not less than 17% alcohol, by mass – 1 . 1C 0433 POWDER CAKE, WETTE D with not less than 25% water, by mass – 1 . 3C 0159 POWDER PASTE, WETT ED with not less than 17% alcohol, by mass – 1 . 1C 0433 POWDER PASTE, WETT ED with not less than 25% water, by mass – 1 . 3C 0159 POWDER, SMOKELESS – 1 . 1C 0160 POWDER, SMOKELES S – 1 . 3C 0161 POWDER, SMOKELESS – 1 . 4C 0509 Power devices, expl osive, see CARTRIDGES, POWER DEVICE – – – Praseodymium nitrate and neodymium nitrate mixture, see – 5 . 1 1465 PRIMERS, CAP TYPE – 1 . 1B 0377 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 903

Index 359 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. PRIMERS, CAP TYPE – 1 . 4B 0378 PRIMERS, CAP TYPE – 1 . 4S 0044 Primers, small arms , see – 1 . 4S 0044 PRIMERS, TUBULAR – 1 . 3G 0319 PRIMERS, TUBULAR – 1 . 4G 0320 PRIMERS, TUBULAR – 1 . 4S 0376 PRINTING INK, flamma ble – 3 1210 PRINTING INK RELATED MATERIAL (including printing ink thinning or reducing compound), flammable – 3 1210 Projectiles, illuminating, see AMMUNITION, ILLUMINATING – – – PROJECTILES, inert with tracer – 1 . 3G 0424 PROJECTILES, ine rt with tracer – 1 . 4G 0425 PROJECTILES, ine rt with tracer – 1 . 4S 0345 PROJECTILES with b urster or expelling charge – 1 . 2D 0346 PROJECTILES wit h burster or expelling charge – 1 . 2F 0426 PROJECTILES with b urster or expelling charge – 1 . 2G 0434 PROJECTILES with b urster or expelling charge – 1 . 4D 0347 PROJECTILES with b urster or expelling charge – 1 . 4F 0427 PROJECTILES with b urster or expelling charge – 1 . 4G 0435 PROJECTILES wit h bursting charge – 1 . 1D 0168 PROJECTILES w ith bursting charge – 1 . 1F 0167 PROJECTILES w ith bursting charge – 1 . 2D 0169 PROJECTILES wi th bursting charge – 1 . 2F 0324 PROJECTILES wit h bursting charge – 1 . 4D 0344 Promecarb, see CARBAMAT E PESTICIDE P – – Promurit, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE – – – Propachlor, see Note 1 P – – Propadiene and methylacetylene mixture, stabilized, see – 2 . 1 1060 PROPADIENE, STAB ILIZED – 2 . 1 2200 PROPANE – 2 . 1 1978 PROPANETHIOLS – 3 2402 n- PR OPANOL (PROPYL ALCOHOL, NORMAL) – 3 1274 1-Propanol, see – 3 1274 2-Propanol, see – 3 1219 2-Propanone, see – 3 1090 2-Propanone solutions, see – 3 1090 Propanoyl chloride, see – 3 1815 Propaphos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Propargyl bromide, see – 3 2345 PROPELLANT, LIQUID – 1 . 1C 0497 PROPELLANT, LIQU ID – 1 . 3C 0495 PROPELLANT, SOLID – 1 . 1C 0498 PROPELLANT, SOLID – 1 . 3C 0499 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 904

Index 360 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. PROPELLANT, SOLID – 1 . 4C 0501 Propellants, single , double or triple base, see POWDER, SMOKELESS – – – Propenal, stabilized, see P 6 . 1 1092 Propene, see – 2 . 1 1077 Propenenitrile, s tabilized, see – 3 1093 2-Propenoic acid dimethylaminoethyl ester, see – 6 . 1 3302 Propenoic acid, stabi lized, see P 8 2218 3-(2-Propenoxy)propene, see – 3 2360 Propenyl alcohol, see P 6 . 1 1098 2-Propenylamine, see – 6 . 1 2334 alpha- Propenyldichlo rohydrin, see – 6 . 1 2750 PROPIONALDEHYDE – 3 1275 P ROPIONIC ACID with not less than 10% and less than 90% acid, by mass – 8 1848 PROPIONIC ACID with not less than 90% acid, by mass – 8 3463 Propionic aldehyde, see – 3 1275 PROPIONIC ANHYDRIDE – 8 2496 PROPIONITRILE – 3 2404 PROPIONYL CHLORIDE – 3 1815 Propoxur, see CARBAMATE PESTICIDE P – – 1-Propoxypropane, see – 3 2384 n- PROPYL ACETATE – 3 1276 n- Propyl alcohol, see – 3 1274 PROPYL ALCOHOL, NORMAL – 3 1274 Propyl aldehyde, see – 3 1275 PROPYLAMINE – 3 1277 n- PROPYLBENZENE – 3 2364 Propyl bromides, see – 3 2344 Propyl chloride, see – 3 1278 Propyl chlorocarbonate, see – 6 . 1 2740 n- PROPYL CHLOROFORMATE – 6 . 1 2740 Propyl cyanide, see – 3 2 411 PROPYLENE – 2 . 1 1077 Propylene, acetylene an d ethylene mixture, refrigerated liquid, see – 2 . 1 3138 PROPYLENE CHLOROHYD RIN – 6 . 1 2611 1,2-PROPYLENEDIAM INE – 8 2258 Propylene dichloride, see – 3 1279 PROPYLENEIMINE, STABILIZED – 3 1921 PROPYLENE OXIDE – 3 1280 PROPYLENE TETRAMER P 3 2850 Propylene trimer, see – 3 2057 Propyl ether, see – 3 2384 PROPYL FORMATES – 3 1281 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 905

Index 361 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Propylformic acid, see – 8 2820 Propylidene dichloride, see – 3 1993 Propyl iodides, see – 3 2392 n- PROPYL ISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2482 Propyl mercaptan, see – 3 2402 Propyl methanoates, see – 3 1281 n- PROPYL NITRATE – 3 1865 PROPYLTRICHLOROSILANE – 8 1816 Prothoate, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Prussic acid, anhydrous, stabilized, containing less than 3% water, see P 6 . 1 1051 Prussic acid, anhyd rous, stabilized, containing less than 3% water and absorbed in a porous inert material, see P 6 . 1 1614 Prussic acid, aque ous solution, see P 6 . 1 1613 Prussic acid, aque ous solution with not more than 20% hydrogen cyanide, see P 6 . 1 1613 Pyrazine hexahy dride, solid, see – 8 2579 Pyrazophos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Pyrazoxon, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – PYRETHROID PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 3350 PYRETHROID PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3352 PYRETHROID PESTI CIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 3351 PYRETHROID PEST ICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3349 PYRIDINE – 3 1282 PYROPHORI C ALLOY, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 1383 Pyrophoric article s, see – 1 . 2L 0380 PYROPHORIC LIQUID, I NORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3194 PYROPHORIC LIQUID, OR GANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 2845 PYROPHORIC METAL, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 1383 Pyrophoric organ ometallic compound, water-reactive, liquid, see – 4 . 2 3394 Pyrophoric organome tallic compound, water-reactive, solid, see – 4 . 2 3393 PYROPHORIC SOLID, I NORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3200 PYROPHORIC SOLID, O RGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 2846 Pyrosulphuric acid, see – 8 1 831 PYROSULPHURYL CHLORIDE – 8 1817 Pyroxylin solution, see – 3 2059 PYRROLIDINE – 3 1922 Quinalphos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – QUINOLINE – 6 . 1 2656 Quinone, see – 6 . 1 2587 Quizalofop, see Note 1 P – – Quizalofop-P-ethyl, see Note 1 P – – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 906

Index 362 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Racumin, see COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE – – – Radioactive isotopes ( A 1 and A 2 values for), see 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 – – – RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL , EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES – 7 2911 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES MANUFACTURED FROM DEPLETED URANIUM – 7 2909 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES MANUFACTURED FROM NATURAL THORIUM – 7 2909 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES MANUFACTURED FROM NATURAL URANIUM – 7 2909 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – EMPTY PACKAGING – 7 2908 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – INSTRUMENTS – 7 2911 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – LIMITED QUANTITY OF MATERIAL – 7 2910 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), FISSILE – 7 3324 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), FISSILE – 7 3325 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-I), non fissile or fissile-excepted – 7 2912 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), non fissile or fissile-excepted – 7 3321 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), non fissile or fissile-excepted – 7 3322 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I or SCO-II), FISSILE – 7 3326 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I, SCO-II or SCO-III), non fissile or fissile-excepted – 7 2913 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT, FISSILE – 7 3331 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT non fissile or fissile-excepted – 7 2919 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, FISSILE, non-special form – 7 3327 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, non-special form, non fissile or fissile-excepted – 7 2915 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM, FISSILE – 7 3333 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM, non fissile or fissile-excepted – 7 3332 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE, FISSILE – 7 3329 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE, non fissile or fissile-excepted – 7 2917 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL TYPE B(U) PACKAGE, FISSILE – 7 3328 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(U) PACKAGE, non fissile or fissile-excepted – 7 2916 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE, FISSILE – 7 3330 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE, non fissile or fissile-excepted – 7 3323 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, FISSILE – 7 2977 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 907

Index 363 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, non fissile or fissile-excepted – 7 2978 Radionuclides ( A 1 and A 2 values for), see 2 . 7 . 2 . 2 – – – RAGS, OILY – 4 . 2 1856 Railway fusees, see SI GNAL DEVICES, HAND – – – RDX AND CYCLOTETRAMETHYLENETETRANITRAMINE MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 RDX AND CYCLOTETRA METHYLENETETRANITRAMINE MIXTURE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 RDX AND HMX MIXTURE , DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 RDX AND HMX MIXTURE , WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 RDX AND OCTOGEN MIX TURE, DESENSITIZED with not less than 10% phlegmatizer, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 RDX AND OCTOGEN MIX TURE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0391 RDX, DESENSITIZ ED – 1 . 1D 0483 RDX/TNT, see – 1 . 1D 0118 RDX/TNT/alumin ium, see – 1 . 1D 0393 RDX, WETTED with no t less than 15% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0072 RECEPTACLES, SM ALL, CONTAINING GAS without a release device, non refillable – 2 2037 Red phosphorus, see – 4 . 1 1338 REFRIGERANT GAS, N . O . S . – 2 . 2 1078 REFRIGERANT GAS R 12 – 2 . 2 1028 REFRIGERANT GAS R 12B 1 – 2 . 2 1974 REFRIGERANT GAS R 13 – 2 . 2 1022 REFRIGERANT GAS R 13B 1 – 2 . 2 1009 REFRIGERANT GAS R 14 – 2 . 2 1982 REFRIGERANT GAS R 21 – 2 . 2 1029 REFRIGERANT GAS R 22 – 2 . 2 1018 REFRIGERANT GAS R 23 – 2 . 2 1984 REFRIGERANT GAS R 32 – 2 . 1 3252 REFRIGERANT GAS R 40 – 2 . 1 1063 REFRIGERANT GAS R 41 – 2 . 1 2454 REFRIGERANT GAS R 11 4 – 2 . 2 1958 REFRIGERANT GAS R 115 – 2 . 2 1020 REFRIGERANT GAS R 116 – 2 . 2 2193 REFRIGERANT GAS R 124 – 2 . 2 1021 REFRIGERANT GAS R 125 – 2 . 2 3220 REFRIGERANT GAS R 133 a – 2 . 2 1983 REFRIGERANT GAS R 134 a – 2 . 2 3159 REFRIGERANT GAS R 14 2b – 2 . 1 2517 REFRIGERANT GAS R 1 43a – 2 . 1 2035 REFRIGERANT GAS R 15 2a – 2 . 1 1030 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 908

Index 364 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. REFRIGERANT GAS R 161 – 2 . 1 2453 REFRIGERANT GAS R 218 – 2 . 2 2424 REFRIGERANT GAS R 227 – 2 . 2 3296 REFRIGERANT GAS R 404A – 2 . 2 3337 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407A – 2 . 2 3338 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407B – 2 . 2 3339 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407C – 2 . 2 3340 REFRIGERANT GAS R 500 – 2 . 2 2602 REFRIGERANT GAS R 502 – 2 . 2 1973 REFRIGERANT GAS R 503 – 2 . 2 2599 REFRIGERANT GAS R 1113 – 2 . 3 1082 REFRIGERANT GAS R 1132 a – 2 . 1 1959 REFRIGERANT GAS R 121 6 – 2 . 2 1858 REFRIGERANT GAS R 131 8 – 2 . 2 2422 REFRIGERANT GAS RC 318 – 2 . 2 1976 REFRIGERATING MACH INES containing flammable, non-toxic, liquefied gas – 2 . 1 3358 REFRIGERATING MACH INES containing non-flammable, non-toxic, gases or ammonia solution (UN 2672) – 2 . 2 2857 REGULATED MEDICAL WA STE, N . O . S . – 6 . 2 3291 RELEASE DEVICES, EXP LOSIVE – 1 . 4S 0173 RESIN SOLUTION, flam mable – 3 1866 Resorcin, see – 6 . 1 2876 RESORCINOL – 6 . 1 2876 RIVETS, EXPLOSIVE – 1 . 4S 0174 Road asphalt, see – 3 1999 ROCKE T MOTORS – 1 . 1C 0280 ROCKET MOTORS – 1 . 2C 0281 ROCKET MOTORS – 1 . 3C 0186 ROCKET MOTORS – 1 . 4C 0510 ROCKET MOTORS, LIQU ID FUELLED – 1 . 2J 0395 ROCKET MOTORS, LIQUI D FUELLED – 1 . 3J 0396 ROCKET MOTORS WITH HY PERGOLIC LIQUIDS with or without expelling charge – 1 . 2L 0322 ROCKET MOTORS WITH HY PERGOLIC LIQUIDS with or without expelling charge – 1 . 3L 0250 ROCKETS, LINE-THROW ING – 1 . 2G 0238 ROCKETS, LINE-THROW ING – 1 . 3G 0240 ROCKETS, LINE-THROW ING – 1 . 4G 0453 ROCKETS, LIQUID FUELL ED with bursting charge – 1 . 1J 0397 ROCKETS, LIQUID FUE LLED with bursting charge – 1 . 2J 0398 ROCKETS with bursting charge – 1 . 1E 0181 ROCKETS with burst ing charge – 1 . 1F 0180 ROCKETS with burst ing charge – 1 . 2E 0182 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 909

Index 365 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ROCKETS with bursting charge – 1 . 2F 0295 ROCKETS with expel ling charge – 1 . 2C 0436 ROCKETS with expel ling charge – 1 . 3C 0437 ROCKETS with expel ling charge – 1 . 4C 0438 ROCKETS with inert h ead – 1 . 2C 0502 ROCKETS with inert h ead – 1 . 3C 0183 ROSIN OIL – 3 1286 Roteno ne, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . P – – RUBBER SCRAP, powdered or granulated, not exceeding 840 microns and rubber content exceeding 45% – 4 . 1 1345 RUBBER SHODDY, powdered or granulated, not exceeding 840 microns and rubber content exceeding 45% – 4 . 1 1345 RUBBER SOLUTION – 3 1287 RUBI DIUM – 4 . 3 1423 Rubidium alloy (liquid ), see – 4 . 3 1421 Rubidium amalgams, liquid, see – 4 . 3 1389 Rubidium amalgam s, solid, see – 4 . 3 3401 Rubidium amide, see – 4 . 3 1390 Rubidium dispersi on, see – 4 . 3 1391 Rubidium nitrate, see – 5 . 1 1477 RUBIDIUM HYDROXID E – 8 2678 RUBIDIUM HYDROXIDE SOLUTION – 8 2677 SAFETY DEVICES, electrically initiated – 9 3268 SAFETY DEVICES, PYROTECHNIC – 1 . 4G 0503 Salithion, see ORGANOPH OSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Saltpetre, see – 5 . 1 1486 SAMPLES, EXPLOSIVE , other than initiating explosive – 1 0190 Sand acid, see – 8 1778 Schradan, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Seat-belt pretensioners, see – 1 . 4G 0503 Seat-belt prete nsioners, see – 9 3268 SEED CAKE, containing vegetable oil (a) mechanically expell ed see ds, containing more than 10% of oil or more than 20% of oil and moisture combined – 4 . 2 1386 SEED CAKE, contain ing vegetable oil (b) solvent extractions a nd expelled see ds, containing not more than 10% of oil and when the amount of moisture is higher than 10%, not more than 20% of oil and moisture combined – 4 . 2 1386 SEED CAKE with not mor e than 1 . 5% oil and not more than 11% mo isture – 4 . 2 2217 Seed expellers, oil y, see – 4 . 2 1386 SELENATES – 6 . 1 2630 SELENIC ACID – 8 1905 Sel eninyl chloride, see – 8 2879 SELENITES – 6 . 1 2630 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 910

Index 366 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. SELENIUM COMPOUND, LIQUID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3440 SELENIUM COMPOUND , SOLID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3283 SELENIUM DISULPHIDE – 6 . 1 2657 SELENIUM HEXAFLUORIDE – 2 . 3 2194 Selenium hydride, see – 2 . 3 2202 SELENIUM OXYCHLORIDE – 8 287 9 SELF-HEATING LIQUID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3188 SELF-HEATING LIQ UID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3185 SELF-HEATING LIQU ID, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3186 SELF-HEATING LIQ UID, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3183 SELF-HEATING LIQ UID, TOXIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3187 SELF-HEATING LIQ UID, TOXIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3184 SELF-HEATING SOLID, COR ROSIVE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3192 SELF-HEATING SOLID, CORR OSIVE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3126 SELF-HEATING SOLID , INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3190 SELF-HEATING SOLID, OR GANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3088 SELF-HEATING SOLID, OX IDIZING, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3127 SELF-HEATING SOLID , TOXIC, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3191 SELF-HEATING SOLID , TOXIC, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 2 3128 Self-reactive liqu id, sample, see – 4 . 1 3223 Self-reactive liq uid, sample, temperature controlled, see – 4 . 1 3233 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE B – 4 . 1 3221 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 4 . 1 3231 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE C – 4 . 1 3223 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 4 . 1 3233 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE D – 4 . 1 3225 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 4 . 1 3235 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE E – 4 . 1 3227 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE E, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 4 . 1 3237 SELF-REACTIVE LIQ UID TYPE F – 4 . 1 3229 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 4 . 1 3239 Self-reactive soli d, sample, see – 4 . 1 3224 Self-reactive soli d, sample, temperature controlled, see – 4 . 1 3234 SELF-REACTIVE SOL ID TYPE B – 4 . 1 3222 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYP E B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 4 . 1 3232 SELF-REACTIVE SOLI D TYPE C – 4 . 1 3224 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TY PE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 4 . 1 3234 SELF-REACTIVE SOL ID TYPE D – 4 . 1 3226 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TY PE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 4 . 1 3236 SELF-REACTIVE SOL ID TYPE E – 4 . 1 3228 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TY PE E, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 4 . 1 3238 SELF-REACTIVE SOL ID TYPE F – 4 . 1 3230 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TY PE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED – 4 . 1 3240 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 911

Index 367 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. SHALE OIL – 3 1288 Shaped charges, see CHARGES, SHAPED – – – Shellac, see PAINT – – – SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND – 1 . 4G 0191 SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND – 1 . 4S 0373 SIGNALS, DISTRESS, ship – 1 . 1G 0194 SIGNALS, DISTRES S, ship – 1 . 3G 0195 SIGNALS, DISTRESS, ship – 1 . 4G 0505 SIGNALS, DISTRESS, s hip – 1 . 4S 0506 Signals, distress , ship, water-activated, see CONTRIVANCES, WATER-ACTIVATED – – – SIGNALS, RAILWAY TRACK, EXPLOSIVE – 1 . 1G 0192 SIGNALS, RAILWA Y TRACK, EXPLOSIVE – 1 . 3G 0492 SIGNALS, RAILWAY T RACK, EXPLOSIVE – 1 . 4G 0493 SIGNALS, RAILWAY T RACK, EXPLOSIVE – 1 . 4S 0193 SIGNALS, SMOKE – 1 . 1G 0196 SIGNALS, SMOKE – 1 . 2G 0313 SIGNALS, SMOKE – 1 . 3G 0487 SIGNALS, SMOKE – 1 . 4G 0197 SIGNALS, SMOKE – 1 . 4S 0507 Silafluofen, see Note 1 P – – SILANE – 2 . 1 2203 Silicofluoric acid, see – 8 1 778 Silicofluorides, n . o . s . , see – 6 . 1 2856 Silicon chloride , see – 8 1818 SILICON POWDER, AMORPHOUS – 4 . 1 1346 SILICON TETRACHLO RIDE – 8 1818 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE – 2 . 3 1859 SILICON TETRAFLUORI DE, ADSORBED – 2 . 3 3521 Silicon tetrahydrid e, compressed, see – 2 . 1 2203 SILVER ARSENITE P 6 . 1 1683 SILVER CYANIDE P 6 . 1 1684 SILVER NITRATE – 5 . 1 1493 Silver orthoarse nite, see P 6 . 1 1683 SILVER PICRATE, d ry or wetted with less than 30% water, by mass (transport prohibited) – – – SILVER PICRATE, WETTED with not less than 30% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1347 Sisal, dry, see – 4 . 1 3360 SLUDGE ACID – 8 1906 Slurry , explosives, see EXPLOSIVES, BLASTING, TYPE E – – – Smokeless powder, see – 1 . 1C 0160 SODA LIME with mor e than 4% sodium hydroxide – 8 1907 SODIUM – 4 . 3 1428 SODIUM ALUMINATE, SOLID – 8 2812 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 912

Index 368 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. SODIUM ALUMINATE SOLUTION – 8 1819 SODIUM ALUMINIUM HYDRIDE – 4 . 3 2835 Sodium amalgams, liq uid, see – 4 . 3 1389 Sodium amalgams, soli d, see – 4 . 3 3401 Sodium amide, see – 4 . 3 1390 SODIUM AMMONIUM VANA DATE – 6 . 1 2863 SODIUM ARSANILATE – 6 . 1 2473 SODIUM ARSENATE – 6 . 1 1685 SODIUM ARSENITE, A QUEOUS SOLUTION – 6 . 1 1686 Sodium arsenite (pes ticide), see ARSENICAL PESTICIDE – – – SODIUM ARSENITE, SOLID – 6 . 1 2027 SODIUM AZIDE – 6 . 1 1687 Sodium bifluoride , see – 8 2439 Sodium bisulphite solution, see – 8 2693 SODIUM BOROHYDRIDE – 4 . 3 1426 SODIUM BOROHYDRIDE A ND SODIUM HYDROXIDE SOLUTION with not more than 12% sodium borohydride and not more than 40% sodium hydroxide, by mass – 8 3320 SODIUM BROMATE – 5 . 1 1494 SODIUM CACODYLATE – 6 . 1 1688 SODIUM CARBONATE P EROXYHYDRATE – 5 . 1 3378 SODIUM CHLORATE – 5 . 1 1495 SODIUM CHLORATE, AQ UEOUS SOLUTION – 5 . 1 2428 Sodium chlorate mix ed with dinitrotoluene, see – 1 . 1D 0083 SODIUM CHLORITE – 5 . 1 1496 SODIUM CHLOROACETATE – 6 . 1 2659 Sodium copper cyani de, solid, see P 6 . 1 2316 Sodium copper cyani de solution, see P 6 . 1 2317 SODIUM CUPROCYANI DE, SOLID P 6 . 1 2316 SODIUM CUPROCYANI DE SOLUTION P 6 . 1 2317 SODIUM CYANIDE, SO LID P 6 . 1 1689 SODIUM CYANIDE SOL UTION P 6 . 1 3414 Sodium 2-diazo-1- naphthol-4-sulphonate (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 Sodium 2-diazo-1- naphthol-5-sulphonate (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3226 Sodium dicyanocuprate (I), solid, see P 6 . 1 2316 Sodium dicyanocuprat e(I) solution, see – 6 . 1 2317 SODIUM DINITRO- orth o- CRESOLATE, dry or wetted with less than 15% water, by mass P 1 . 3C 0234 SODIUM DINITRO- o- CRESO LATE, WETTED with not less than 10% water, by mass P 4 . 1 3369 SODIUM DINITRO- o- CRESO LATE, WETTED with not less than 15% water, by mass P 4 . 1 1348 Sodium dioxide, see – 5 . 1 1504 Sodium dispersion, se e – 4 . 3 1391 SODIUM DITHIONITE – 4 . 2 1384 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 913

Index 369 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. SODIUM FLUORIDE, SOLID – 6 . 1 1690 SODIUM FLUORIDE SOLU TION – 6 . 1 3415 SODIUM FLUOROACETA TE – 6 . 1 2629 SODIUM FLUOROSILIC ATE – 6 . 1 2674 Sodium hexafluoro silicate, see – 6 . 1 2674 Sodium hydrate, see – 8 182 4 SODIUM HYDRIDE – 4 . 3 1427 Sodium hydrogen 4 -aminophenylarsenate, see – 6 . 1 2473 SODIUM HYDROGEND IFLUORIDE – 8 2439 Sodium hydrogen sulphite solution, see – 8 2693 SODIUM HYDROSULPHIDE with less than 25% water of crystallization – 4 . 2 2318 SODIUM HYDROSULP HIDE, HYDRATED with not less than 25% water of crystallization – 8 2949 SODIUM HYDROSULPHITE – 4 . 2 1384 SODIUM HYDROXIDE , SOLID – 8 1823 SODIUM HYDROXIDE SOLUTION – 8 1824 Sodium hypochlorite solution, see P 8 1791 Sodium metaarsenite, see – 6 . 1 2027 Sodium metasilicate , see – 8 3253 Sodium metasilicate pentahydrate, see – 8 3253 Sodium methoxide, see – 4 . 2 1431 Sodium methoxide solut ions in alcohols, see – 3 1289 SODIUM METHYLATE – 4 . 2 1431 SODIUM METHYLATE SOLU TION in alcohol – 3 1289 Sodium monochloroacetate, see – 6 . 1 2659 SODIUM MONOXIDE – 8 1825 SO DIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 1498 SODIUM NITRATE AND P OTASSIUM NITRATE MIXTURE – 5 . 1 1499 SODIUM NITRITE – 5 . 1 1500 Sodium nitrite an d potassium nitrate mixture, see – 5 . 1 1487 Sodium orthoarsena te, see – 6 . 1 1685 Sodium oxide, see – 8 1825 S ODIUM PENTACHLOROPHENATE P 6 . 1 2567 Sodium perborate, anh ydrous, see – 5 . 1 3247 SODIUM PERBORATE M ONOHYDRATE – 5 . 1 3377 Sodium percarbonate , see – 5 . 1 3378 SODIUM PERCHLORATE – 5 . 1 1502 SODIUM PERMANGAN ATE – 5 . 1 1503 SODIUM PEROXIDE – 5 . 1 1504 SODIUM PEROXOBOR ATE, ANHYDROUS – 5 . 1 3247 SODIUM PERSULPHAT E – 5 . 1 1505 SODIUM PHOSPHIDE – 4 . 3 1432 SODIUM PICRAMATE, d ry or wetted with less than 20% water, by mass – 1 . 3C 0235 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 914

Index 370 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. SODIUM PICRAMATE, WETTED with not less than 20% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1349 Sodium potassium allo ys, see – 4 . 3 1422 Sodium silicofluoride , see – 6 . 1 2674 SODIUM SULPHIDE, AN HYDROUS – 4 . 2 1385 SODIUM SULPHIDE, HY DRATED with not less than 30% water – 8 1849 SODIUM SULPHIDE with less than 30% water of crystallization – 4 . 2 1385 Sodium sulphydrate, se e – 4 . 2 2318 SODIUM SUPEROXIDE – 5 . 1 2547 SOLIDS CONTAINING CO RROSIVE LIQUID, N . O . S . – 8 3244 SOLIDS CONTAINING FLA MMABLE LIQUID, N . O . S . – 4 . 1 3175 SOLIDS CONTAINING T OXIC LIQUID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3243 Solvents, flammabl e, n . o . s . , see – 3 1993 Solvents, toxic, fl ammable, n . o . s . , see – 3 1992 SOUNDING DEVICES, E XPLOSIVE – 1 . 1D 0374 SOUNDING DEVICES, E XPLOSIVE – 1 . 1F 0296 SOUNDING DEVICES, E XPLOSIVE – 1 . 2D 0375 SOUNDING DEVICES, EX PLOSIVE – 1 . 2F 0204 Squibs, see IGNITERS, UN 0 325 and UN 0454 – – – Stain, see PAINT – – – STANNIC CHLORIDE, ANHYDROUS – 8 1827 STANNIC CHLORIDE PENTAHYDRATE – 8 2440 STANNIC PHOSPHIDE – 4 . 3 1433 Steel swarf, see – 4 . 2 2793 STIBINE – 2 . 3 2676 STRAW – 4 . 1 1327 Strontium alloy, non-pyrophoric, see – 4 . 3 1393 Strontium alloy, p yrophoric, see – 4 . 2 1383 Strontium amalgam s, liquid, see – 4 . 3 1392 Strontium amalgam s, solid, see – 4 . 3 3402 STRONTIUM ARSENITE – 6 . 1 1691 STRONTIUM CHLORATE – 5 . 1 1506 Strontium dioxide, se e – 5 . 1 1509 Strontium disper sion, see – 4 . 3 1391 STRONTIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 1507 Strontium orthoar senite, see – 6 . 1 1691 STRONTIUM PERCHLOR ATE – 5 . 1 1508 STRONTIUM PEROXIDE – 5 . 1 1509 STRONTIUM PHOSPHI DE – 4 . 3 2013 Strontium, powder, se e – 4 . 2 1383 Strontium powder, pyrophoric, see – 4 . 2 1383 STRYCHNINE P 6 . 1 1692 Strychnine pestic ides, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . P – – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 915

Index 371 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. STRYCHNINE SALTS P 6 . 1 1692 STYPHNIC ACID, dr y or wetted with less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0219 STYPHNIC ACID, WE TTED with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0394 STYRENE MONOMER , STABILIZED – 3 2055 SUBSTANCES, EVI, N . O . S . – 1 . 5D 0482 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 1A 0473 SUBSTANCES, EXPL OSIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 1C 0474 SUBSTANCES, EXPL OSIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 1D 0475 SUBSTANCES, EXPL OSIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 1G 0476 SUBSTANCES, EXPL OSIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 1L 0357 SUBSTANCES, EXPL OSIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 2L 0358 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 3C 0477 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 3G 0478 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 3L 0359 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 4C 0479 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 4D 0480 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOS IVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 4G 0485 SUBSTANCES, EXPLO SIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 4S 0481 SUBSTANCES, EXPL OSIVE, VERY INSENSITIVE, N . O . S . – 1 . 5D 0482 SUBSTITUTED NITR OPHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 2780 SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3014 SUBSTITUTED NITR OPHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 3013 SUBSTITUTED NIT ROPHENOL PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2779 Sulfotep, see ORGANOPH OSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Sulfur, see Sulphur – – – SULPHAMIC ACID – 8 2967 Sulphonyl chloride, see – 6 . 1 1834 SULPHUR – 4 . 1 1350 SULPHUR CHLORIDES – 8 18 28 Sulphur dichloride, see – 8 1828 SULPHUR DIOXIDE – 2 . 3 1079 Sulphuretted hydrog en, see – 2 . 3 1053 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE – 2 . 2 1080 Sulphuric acid and hy drofluoric acid mixture, see – 8 1786 SULPHURIC ACID, FUMING – 8 1831 SULPHURIC ACID, SPENT – 8 1832 SULPHURIC ACID with more than 51% acid – 8 1830 SULPHURIC ACID with not more than 51% acid – 8 2796 Sulphuric anhydride, stabilized, see – 8 1829 Sulphuric chloride, see – 6 . 1 1834 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 916

Index 372 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Sulphuric oxychloride, see – 6 . 1 1834 Sulphuric oxyfluori de, see – 2 . 3 2191 SULPHUR, MOLTEN – 4 . 1 2448 Sulphur monochlorid e, see – 8 1828 SULPHUROUS ACID – 8 1833 Sulphurous oxychloride, see – 8 1836 Sulphur oxychloride, see – 8 1836 SULPHUR TETRAFLUORIDE – 2 . 3 2418 SULPHUR TRIOXIDE, STAB ILIZED – 8 1829 SULPHURYL CHLORIDE – 6 . 1 1834 SULPHURYL FLUORIDE – 2 . 3 2191 Sulprophos, see ORGANOPHO SPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Synthetic fabrics, oily, see – 4 . 2 1373 Synthetic fibres, oil y, see – 4 . 2 1373 Systox, see ORGANOPHOSP HORUS PESTICIDE – – – 2,4,5-T, see PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE – – – Table Tennis Balls, see – 4 . 1 2000 Talcum with tremolit e and/or actinolite, see – 9 2212 Tallow nitrile, see P 9 3082 TARS, LIQUID, including road oils, and cutback bitumens – 3 1999 Tartar emetic, see – 6 . 1 1551 TEAR GAS CANDLES – 6 . 1 1700 TEAR GAS SUBSTANCE , LIQUID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 1693 TEAR GAS SUBSTANCE , SOLID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3448 TELLURIUM COMPOUND, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3284 TELLURIUM HEXAFLUORID E – 2 . 3 2195 Temephos, see ORGANOPHOSPH ORUS PESTICIDE P – – TEPP, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Terbufos, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Terbumeton, see TRIAZINE PESTICIDE – – – TERPENE HYDROCARBONS, N . O . S . – 3 2319 Terpenes, n . o . s . , see – 3 2319 TERPINOLENE – 3 2541 TETRABR OMOETHANE P 6 . 1 2504 1,1,2,2-Tetrabrom oethane, see P 6 . 1 2504 Tetrabromomethane, se e P 6 . 1 2516 1,1,2,2-TETRACHLO ROETHANE P 6 . 1 1702 TETRACHLOROETHYLENE P 6 . 1 1897 Tetrachloromethane , see P 6 . 1 1846 Tetrachlorophenol, see – 6 . 1 2020 Tetrachlorvinphos, see Note 1 P – – Tetraethoxysilane, see – 3 1292 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 917

Index 373 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. TETRAETHYL DITHIOPYROPHOSPHATE P 6 . 1 1704 TETRAETHYLENEPENTA MINE – 8 2320 Tetraethyllead, see P 6 . 1 1649 Tetraethyl ortho silicate, see – 3 1292 TETRAETHYL SILICATE – 3 1292 Tetrafluorodichloroethane, see – 2 . 2 1958 1,1,2,2-Tetrafluor o-1,2-dichloroethane, see – 2 . 2 1958 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUOR OETHANE – 2 . 2 3159 TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE , STABILIZED – 2 . 1 1081 TETRAFLUOROMETHAN E – 2 . 2 1982 Tetrafluorosilan e, compressed, see – 2 . 3 1859 Tetrahydro-1,4-o xazine, see – 8 2054 1,2,3,6-TETRAHYDROBENZALDEHYDE – 3 2498 Tetrahydrobenzene, see – 3 2256 TETRAHYDROFURAN – 3 2056 TETRAHYDROFURFURYLAMINE – 3 2943 Tetrahydromethylfuran, see – 3 2536 TETRAHYDROPHTHALIC ANHYDRIDES with more than 0 . 05% maleic anhydride – 8 2698 1 ,2,3,6-TETRAHYDROPYRIDINE – 3 2410 TETRAHYDROTHIOPHENE – 3 2412 Tetramethoxysilane, see – 6 . 1 2606 Tetramethrin, see Not e 1 P – – TETRAMETHYLAMMONIUM HYDROXIDE, SOLID – 8 3423 TETRAMETHYLAMMONIUM HYDROXIDE SOLUTION – 8 1835 1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl hydroperoxide (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3105 1,1,3,3-Tetrame thylbutyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate (concentration ≤ 100%), see – 5 . 2 3115 1,1,3,3-Tetrame thylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate (concentration ≤ 52%, as a stable dispersion in water), see – 5 . 2 3119 1,1,3,3-Tetrame thylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate (concentration ≤ 72%, with diluent Type B), see – 5 . 2 3115 1,1,3,3-Tetrame thylbutyl peroxypivalate (concentration ≤ 77%, with diluent Type A), see – 5 . 2 3115 Tetramethylene, see – 2 . 1 2601 Tetramethylene cya nide, see – 6 . 1 2205 N , N , N ′ , N ′ -Tetramethyleth ylenediamine, see – 3 2372 Tetramethyl lead, see P 6 . 1 1649 TETRAMETHYLSILANE – 3 2749 T etramine palladium(II) nitrate (concentration 100%), see – 4 . 1 3234 TETRANITROANILINE – 1 . 1D 0207 TETRANITROMETHANE – 6 . 1 1510 Tetrapropylene, see P 3 2850 TETRAPROPYL ORTHOTITANATE – 3 2413 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 918

Index 374 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. TETRAZENE, WETTED with not less than 30% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1A 0114 TETRAZOL-1-ACET IC ACID – 1 . 4C 0407 1 H- TETRAZOLE – 1 . 1D 0504 TETRYL – 1 . 1D 0208 TEXTILE WASTE, WET – 4 . 2 1857 THALLIUM CHLORATE P 5 . 1 2573 Thallium(I) chlorat e, see – 5 . 1 2573 THALLIUM COMPOUND, N . O . S . P 6 . 1 1707 THALLIUM NITRATE P 6 . 1 2727 Thallium(I) nitrate , see – 6 . 1 2727 Thallium sulphate, see P 6 . 1 1707 Thallous chlorate, see P 5 . 1 2573 4-THIAPENTANAL – 6 . 1 2785 Thia-4-pentanal, see – 6 . 1 2785 THIOACETIC ACID – 3 2436 Thioac etic acid, see – 3 2436 THIOCARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 2772 THIOCARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 3006 THIOCARBAMATE PES TICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 3005 THIOCARBAMATE PES TICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2771 Thiocarbonyl chlo ride, see – 6 . 1 2474 Thiocarbonyl tetr achloride, see P 6 . 1 1670 THIOGLYCOL – 6 . 1 2966 THIOGLYCOLIC ACID – 8 1940 T HIOLACTIC ACID – 6 . 1 2936 Thiometon, see ORGANOPHOSP HORUS PESTICIDE – – – Thionazin, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – THIONYL CHLORIDE – 8 1836 THIOPHENE – 3 2414 Thiophenol, see – 6 . 1 2337 THIOPHOSGENE – 6 . 1 2474 THIOPHOSPHORYL CHLORI DE – 8 1837 Thiopropyl alcohols, see – 3 2402 THIOUREA DIOXIDE – 4 . 2 3341 Tin chloride, fuming , see – 8 1827 Tin(IV) chloride, anhydrous, see – 8 1827 Tin(IV) chloride pentahydrate, see – 8 2440 TINCTURES, MEDICINAL – 3 1293 Tin monophosphide, see – 4 . 3 1433 Tin tetrachloride, see – 8 18 27 Titanic chloride, see – 6 . 1 1838 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 919

Index 375 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. TITANIUM DISULPHIDE – 4 . 2 3174 TITANIUM HYDRIDE – 4 . 1 1871 TITANIUM POWDER , DRY – 4 . 2 2546 TITANIUM POWDER, WE TTED with not less than 25% water (a visible excess of wate r must be present) (a) mechanically produc ed, particle size less than 53 microns – 4 . 1 1352 TITANIUM POWDER , WETTED with not less than 25% water (a visible excess of wate r must be present) (b) chemically produced, p article size less than 840 microns – 4 . 1 1352 TITANIUM SPONGE G RANULES – 4 . 1 2878 TITANIUM SPONGE POW DERS – 4 . 1 2878 TITANIUM TETRACHLO RIDE – 6 . 1 1838 TITANIUM TRICHLORI DE MIXTURE – 8 2869 TITANIUM TRICHLORIDE MIXTURE, PYROPHORIC – 4 . 2 2441 TITANIUM TRICHLORIDE , PYROPHORIC – 4 . 2 2441 Titanous chloride, py rophoric, see – 4 . 2 2441 TNT AND HEXANITROST ILBENE MIXTURE – 1 . 1D 0388 TNT AND TRINITROB ENZENE MIXTURE – 1 . 1D 0388 TNT, dry or wetted wi th less than 30% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0209 TNT mixed with alum inium, see – 1 . 1D 0390 TNT MIXTURE CONTA INING TRINITROBENZENE AND HEXANITROSTILBENE – 1 . 1D 0389 TNT, WETTED with no t less than 10% water, by mass – 4 . 1 3366 TNT, WETTED with not l ess than 30% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1356 Toe puffs, nitroc ellulose base, see – 4 . 1 1353 TOLUENE – 3 1294 TOLUEN E DIISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2078 Toluene trichloride , see – 8 2226 TOLUIDINES, LIQUID P 6 . 1 1708 TOLUIDINES, SOL ID P 6 . 1 3451 Toluol, see – 3 1294 2,4-TOLU YLENEDIAMINE, SOLID – 6 . 1 1709 2,4-TOLUYLENEDI AMINE SOLUTION – 6 . 1 3418 Toluylene diisocya nate, see – 6 . 1 2078 Tolylene diisocyana te, see – 6 . 1 2078 Tolylethylene, s tabilized, see – 3 2618 TORPEDOES, LIQUID FUELLED with inert head – 1 . 3J 0450 TORPEDOES, LIQUI D FUELLED with or without bursting charge – 1 . 1J 0449 TORPEDOES with bur sting charge – 1 . 1D 0451 TORPEDOES with bur sting charge – 1 . 1E 0329 TORPEDOES with bur sting charge – 1 . 1F 0330 TOXIC BY INHALATI ON LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3389 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 920

Index 376 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3390 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3488 TOXIC BY INHALATION LI QUID, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3489 TOXIC BY INHALATION LI QUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3384 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3383 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3382 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3381 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3388 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3387 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3490 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3491 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1,000 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3386 TOXIC BY INHALATION L IQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, N . O . S . with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 mL/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 – 6 . 1 3385 TOXIC LIQUID, CORROS IVE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3289 TOXIC LIQUID, CORROS IVE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2927 TOXIC LIQUID, FLAMM ABLE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2929 TOXIC LIQUID, INORGA NIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3287 TOXIC LIQUID, ORGANIC , N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2810 TOXIC LIQUID, OXIDI ZING, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3122 TOXIC LIQUID, WATER -REACTIVE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3123 TOXIC SOLID, CORROS IVE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3290 TOXIC SOLID, CORROS IVE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2928 TOXIC SOLID, FLAMM ABLE, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3535 TOXIC SOLID, FLAMMA BLE, ORGANIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2930 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 921

Index 377 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. TOXIC SOLID, INORGANIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3288 TOXIC SOLID, ORGA NIC, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 2811 TOXIC SOLID, OXIDI ZING, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3086 TOXIC SOLID, SELF- HEATING, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3124 TOXIC SOLID, WATER -REACTIVE, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3125 TOXINS, EXTRACT ED FROM LIVING SOURCES, LIQUID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3172 TOXINS, EXTRAC TED FROM LIVING SOURCES, SOLID, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3462 TRACERS FOR AMMUNI TION – 1 . 3G 0212 TRACERS FOR AMMUNI TION – 1 . 4G 0306 Tremolite, see – 9 2212 Triad imefon, see PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE – – – TRIALLYLAMINE – 3 2610 TRIALLYL BORATE – 6 . 1 2609 Triamiphos, see ORGANOP HOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – Triaryl phosphates, isopropylated, see P 9 3082 Triaryl phosphates, n . o . s . , see P 9 3082 TRIAZINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, flashpoint less than 23 ° C – 3 2764 TRIAZINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2998 TRIAZINE PESTICID E, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint not less than 23 ° C – 6 . 1 2997 TRIAZINE PESTICID E, SOLID, TOXIC – 6 . 1 2763 Triazophos, see ORGANOPH OSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Tribromoborane, see – 8 2692 Tribromomethane, see P 6 . 1 2515 TRIBUTYLAMINE – 6 . 1 2542 TRIBUTYLPHOSPHANE – 4 . 2 3254 Tributyltin compound s, see ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE P – – Tricamba, see PESTICIDE, N . O . S . – – – Trichlorfon, see ORGANOPH OSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Trichloroacetaldehyde, see – 6 . 1 2075 TRICHLOROACETIC ACID , SOLID – 8 1839 TRICHLOROACETIC ACID SOLUTION – 8 2564 Trichloroacetic aldehyde, anhydrous, stabilized, see – 6 . 1 2075 TRICHLOROACETYL CHLO RIDE – 8 2442 1,2,3-Trichlorobenzenes, see Note 1 P – – TRICHLOROBENZENES, LIQUID P 6 . 1 2321 TRICHLOROBUTENE P 6 . 1 2322 Trichlorobutylene, se e P 6 . 1 2322 1,1,1-TRICHLOROET HANE – 6 . 1 2831 1,1,2-Trichloro ethane, see – 9 3082 TRICHLOROETHYLENE – 6 . 1 1710 TRICHLOROISOCYAN URIC ACID, DRY – 5 . 1 2468 Trichloromethane, se e – 6 . 1 1888 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 922

Index 378 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Trichloromethanesulphuryl chloride, see P 6 . 1 1670 Trichloromethyl sul phochloride, see P 6 . 1 1670 Trichloronat, see ORGA NOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE P – – Trichloronitromethane, see – 6 . 1 1580 TRICHLOROSILANE – 4 . 3 1295 2,4,6-Trichloro-1,3 ,5-triazine, see – 8 2670 1,3,5-Trichloro- s- triazine-2,4,6-trione, see – 5 . 1 2468 Tricresyl phospha te, less than 1% ortho- isomer, see P 9 3082 Tricresyl phosphate, not less than 1% but not more than 3% ortho- isomer, see P 9 3082 TRICRESYL PHOSPHATE with more than 3% ortho- isomer P 6 . 1 2574 Tricyanogen chlori de, see – 8 2670 Triethoxyboron, see – 3 1176 Triethoxymethane, see – 3 2524 TRIETHYLAMINE – 3 1296 Triethylbenzene, see P 9 3082 Triethyl borate, see – 3 1176 Triethylenephosphoramide solution, see – 6 . 1 2501 TRIETHYLENETETRAMINE – 8 225 9 3,6,9-Triethyl-3,6,9-trimethyl-1,4,7-triperoxonane (concentration ≤ 17%, with diluent Type A, with inert solid) – 5 . 2 3110 Triethyl orthoforma te, see – 3 2524 TRIETHYL PHOSPHITE – 3 2323 3,6,9-Triethyl-3,6,9-trimethyl-1,4,7-triperoxonane (concentration ≤ 42%, with diluent Type A, available oxygen ≤ 7 . 6%), see – 5 . 2 3105 TRIFLUOROACETIC ACID – 8 2 699 TRIFLUOROACETYL CHLORIDE – 2 . 3 3057 Trifluorobromomethane , see – 2 . 2 1009 Trifluorochloroethane , see – 2 . 2 1983 TRIFLUOROCHLOROETHYLEN E, STABILIZED (REFRIGERANT GAS R 1113) – 2 . 3 1082 Trifluorochlorometha ne, see – 2 . 2 1022 1,1,1-TRIFLUOROETHAN E – 2 . 1 2035 TRIFLUOROMETHANE – 2 . 2 1984 Trifluoromethane and c hlorotrifluoromethane azeotropic mixture, see CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETHANE AND TRIFLUOROMETHANE AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE – – – TRIFLUOROMETHANE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID – 2 . 2 3136 Trifluoromethoxytr ifluoroethylene, see – 2 . 1 3153 2-TRIFLUOROMETHYLA NILINE – 6 . 1 2942 3-TRIFLUOROMETHYLAN ILINE – 6 . 1 2948 Trifluoromethylbenz ene, see – 3 2338 Trifluoromethylphenyl isocyanates, see – 6 . 1 2285 Trifluoromethyl trifl uorovinyl ether, see – 2 . 1 3153 Trifluoromonochlor oethylene, stabilized, see – 2 . 3 1082 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 923

Index 379 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. TRIISOBUTYLENE – 3 2324 Triisopropylated phenyl phosphates, see P 9 3077 TRIISOPROPYL BORATE – 3 2616 TRIMETHYLACETYL CHLORIDE – 6 . 1 2438 TRIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYD ROUS – 2 . 1 1083 TRIMETHYLAMINE , AQUEOUS SOLUTION, not more than 50% trimethylamine, by mass – 3 1297 1,3,5-TRIMETHYLBENZENE P 3 2325 TRIMETHYL BORATE – 3 2416 Trimethyl carbinol, see – 3 1120 TRIMETHYLCHLOROSILANE – 3 1298 TRIMETHYLCYCLOHEXYLAMINE – 8 2326 Trimethylene chlorobromide, see – 6 . 1 2688 Trimethylene chlo rohydrin, see – 6 . 1 2849 Trimethylene dich loride, see – 3 1993 Trimethylgallium, see – 4 . 2 3394 TRIMETHYLHEXAMETHYLENE DIAMINES – 8 2327 TRIMETHYLHEXAMETHYLENE DIISOCYANATE – 6 . 1 2328 2,2,4-Trimethylp entane, see P 3 1262 2,4,4-Trimethylpentene-1, see – 3 2050 2,4,4-Trimethylpentene-2, see – 3 2050 TRIMETHYL PHOSPHITE – 3 2329 2,4,6-Trimethyl-1,3,5-trioxane, see – 3 1264 TRINITROANILINE – 1 . 1D 0153 TRINITROANISOLE – 1 . 1D 0213 TRINITROBENZ ENE, dry or wetted with less than 30% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0214 TRINITROBENZENE SULPHONIC ACID – 1 . 1D 0386 TRINITROBENZE NE, WETTED with not less than 10% water, by mass – 4 . 1 3367 TRINITROBENZEN E, WETTED with not less than 30% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1354 TRINITROBENZO IC ACID, dry or wetted with less than 30% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0215 TRINITROBENZ OIC ACID, WETTED with not less than 10% water, by mass – 4 . 1 3368 TRINITROBENZOI C ACID, WETTED with not less than 30% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1355 TRINITROCHLOROBEN ZENE – 1 . 1D 0155 TRINITROCHLO ROBENZENE, WETTED with not less than 10% water, by mass – 4 . 1 3365 TRINITRO- m- CRESOL – 1 . 1D 0216 TRINITROFLUORENO NE – 1 . 1D 0387 TRINITRONAPHTHALE NE – 1 . 1D 0217 TRINITROPHENET OLE – 1 . 1D 0218 TRINITROPHEN OL, dry or wetted with less than 30% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0154 TRINITROPHEN OL, WETTED with not less than 10% water, by mass – 4 . 1 3364 TRINITROPHENOL , WETTED with not less than 30% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1344 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 924

Index 380 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. TRINITROPHENYLMETHYLNITRAMINE – 1 . 1D 0208 TRINITRORESORC INOL, dry or wetted with less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0219 TRINITRORESORC INOL, WETTED with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0394 TRINITROTOLUENE A ND HEXANITROSTILBENE MIXTURE – 1 . 1D 0388 TRINITROTOLUEN E AND TRINITROBENZENE MIXTURE – 1 . 1D 0388 TRINITROTOLUEN E, dry or wetted with less than 30% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0209 TRINITROTOLUEN E MIXTURE CONTAINING TRINITROBENZENE AND HEXANITROSTILBENE – 1 . 1D 0389 TRINITROTOLUEN E, WETTED with not less than 10% water, by mass – 4 . 1 3366 TRINITROTOLUENE , WETTED with not less than 30% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1356 Trinitrotoluol , wetted with not less than 10% water by mass, see – 4 . 1 3366 Trinitrotoluol, w etted with not less than 30% water by mass, see – 4 . 1 1356 Triphenyl phosphat e, see P 9 3077 Triphenyl phosphate/ tert- butylated triphenyl phosphates mixtures containing 5% to 10% of triphenyl phosphate, see Note 1 P – – Triphenyl phosphate/ tert- butylated triphenyl phosphates mixtures containing 10% to 48% of triphenyl phosphate, see Note 1 P – – Triphenyltin compounds (other than Fentin acetate and Fentin hydroxide), see ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE P – – TRIPROPYLAMINE – 3 2260 TRIPROPYLENE P 3 2057 TRIS-(1-AZIRIDINYL)PHOSPHINE OXIDE SOLUTION – 6 . 1 2501 Tritolyl phosphate, se e P 6 . 1 2574 TRITONAL – 1 . 1D 0390 Trixylenyl phospha te, see P 9 3082 Tropilidene, see – 3 2603 TUNGSTEN HEXAFLUORIDE – 2 . 3 2196 TURPENTINE P 3 1299 TURPENTINE SUBSTITUTE – 3 1300 UNDECANE – 3 2330 Uranium hexafluoride, fissile, see – 7 2977 Uranium hexafluoride, non fissile or fissile-excepted, see – 7 2978 URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE, less than 0 . 1 kg per package, non-fissi le or fissile-excepted – 6 . 1 3507 UREA HYDROGEN PEROXIDE – 5 . 1 1511 UREA NITRATE, dry or we tted, with less than 20% water, by mass – 1 . 1D 0220 UREA NITRATE, WETT ED with not less than 10% water, by mass – 4 . 1 3370 UREA NITRATE, WETTE D with not less than 20% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1357 Urotropine, see – 4 . 1 1328 Valeral, see – 3 2058 VALERALD EHYDE – 3 2058 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 925

Index 381 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. Valeric aldehyde(s), see – 3 2058 VALERYL CHLORIDE – 8 2502 Vamidothion, see ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE – – – VANADIUM COMPOUND, N . O . S . – 6 . 1 3285 Vanadium(IV) oxide s ulphate – 6 . 1 2931 Vanadium oxysulpha te, see – 6 . 1 2931 VANADIUM OXYTRICHL ORIDE – 8 2443 VANADIUM PENTOXIDE, non-fused form – 6 . 1 2862 VANADIUM TETRACH LORIDE – 8 2444 VANADIUM TRICHLORIDE – 8 2475 VANADYL SULPHATE – 6 . 1 2931 Varnish, see PAINT – – – Veget able fabrics, oily, see – 4 . 2 1373 Vegetable fibres, bur nt, see – 4 . 2 1372 Vegetable fibres, damp, see – 4 . 2 1372 Vegetable fibres, d ry, see – 4 . 1 3360 Vegetable fibres, o ily, see – 4 . 2 1373 Vegetable fibres, w et, see – 4 . 2 1372 VEHICLE, FLAMMABL E GAS POWERED – 9 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED – 9 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED – 9 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED – 9 3166 VINYL ACETATE, STABILIZED – 3 1301 Vinylbenzene, stabilized, see – 3 2055 VINYL BROMIDE, STABILIZED – 2 . 1 1085 Vinyl normal- butyl ether, stabilized, see – 3 2352 VINYL BUTYRATE, STABILIZED – 3 2838 VINYL CHLORIDE, STABILIZED – 2 . 1 1086 VINYL CHLOROACETAT E – 6 . 1 2589 Vinyl cyanide, sta bilized, see – 3 1093 Vinyl ether, stabilized, see – 3 1167 VINYL ETHYL ETHER, STABILIZED – 3 1302 VINYL FLUORIDE, STABILIZED – 2 . 1 1860 VINYLIDENE CHLO RIDE, STABILIZED P 3 1303 Vinylidene fluoride, see – 2 . 1 1959 VINYL ISOBUTYL ETHER , STABILIZED – 3 1304 VINYL METHYL ETHER, STABILIZED – 2 . 1 1087 VINYLPYRIDINES, S TABILIZED – 6 . 1 3073 VINYLTOLUENES, S TABILIZED – 3 2618 VINYLTRICHLOROSILANE – 3 1305 Warfarin (and salts of), see COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE P – – Warheads for guided missiles, see WARHEADS, ROCKET – – – Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 926

Index 382 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. WARHEADS, ROCKET with burster or expelling charge – 1 . 4D 0370 WARHEADS, ROCKET wi th burster or expelling charge – 1 . 4F 0371 WARHEADS, ROCKET w ith bursting charge – 1 . 1D 0286 WARHEADS, ROCKET w ith bursting charge – 1 . 1F 0369 WARHEADS, ROCKET w ith bursting charge – 1 . 2D 0287 WARHEADS, TORPEDO w ith bursting charge – 1 . 1D 0221 Water-activate d contrivances, see CONTRIVANCES, WATER-ACTIVATED – – – Water gels, see EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE E – – – WATER-REACTIVE LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 3129 WATER-REACTIVE LIQUI D, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 3148 WATER-REACTIVE LIQ UID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 3130 WATER-REACTIVE SO LID, CORROSIVE, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 3131 WATER-REACTIVE SOLI D, FLAMMABLE, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 3132 WATER-REACTIVE SO LID, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 2813 WATER-REACTIVE SO LID, OXIDIZING, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 3133 WATER-REACTIVE SO LID, SELF-HEATING, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 3135 WATER-REACTIVE SO LID, TOXIC, N . O . S . – 4 . 3 3134 White arsenic, see – 6 . 1 1561 White phosphorus, dr y, see P 4 . 2 1381 White phosphorus, wet , see P 4 . 2 1381 White spirit, see P 3 1300 White spirit, low (15–20%) aromatic, see P 3 1300 WOOD PRESERVATIVES, LIQUID – 3 1306 Wood tar, see P 9 3082 WOOL WASTE, WET – 4 . 2 1387 XANTHATES – 4 . 2 3342 XENON – 2 . 2 2036 XENON, REFRIGERATED LI QUID – 2 . 2 2591 XYLENES – 3 1307 XYLENOLS, LI QUID – 6 . 1 3430 XYLENOLS, SOLID – 6 . 1 2261 XYLIDINES, LIQUID – 6 . 1 1711 XYLIDINES, SOLID – 6 . 1 3452 Xylols, see – 3 1307 XYLYL BRO MIDE, LIQUID – 6 . 1 1701 XYLYL BROMIDE, SOLI D – 6 . 1 3417 Yellow phosphorus, d ry, see P 4 . 2 1381 Yellow phosphorus, we t, see P 4 . 2 1381 ZINC AMMONIUM NITRIT E (transport prohibited) – 5 . 1 1512 ZINC ARSENATE – 6 . 1 1712 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 927

Index 383 IMDG Code (incorporating Amendment 40-20) INDEX Substance, material or article MP Class UN No. ZINC ARSENATE AND ZINC ARSENITE MIXTURE – 6 . 1 1712 ZINC ARSENITE – 6 . 1 1712 ZINC ASHES – 4 . 3 1435 Zinc bisulphite solu tion, see – 8 2693 ZINC BROMATE – 5 . 1 2469 Zinc bromide, see P 9 3077 ZINC CHLORATE – 5 . 1 1513 ZINC CHLORIDE, ANH YDROUS P 8 2331 ZINC CHLORIDE SOLUTION P 8 1840 ZINC CYANIDE P 6 . 1 1713 ZINC DITHIONITE – 9 193 1 ZINC DUST – 4 . 3 1436 Zinc dust, pyrophori c, see – 4 . 2 1383 ZINC FLUOROSILICAT E – 6 . 1 2855 Zinc hexafluorosili cate, see – 6 . 1 2855 ZINC HYDROSULPHITE – 9 19 31 ZINC NITRATE – 5 . 1 1514 ZINC PERMANGANATE – 5 . 1 1515 ZINC PEROXIDE – 5 . 1 1516 ZINC PHOSPHIDE – 4 . 3 1714 ZINC POWDER – 4 . 3 1436 Zinc powder, pyropho ric, see – 4 . 2 1383 ZINC RESINATE – 4 . 1 2714 Zinc silicofluoride , see – 6 . 1 2855 ZIRCONIUM, DRY, coi led wire, finished metal sheets, strip (thinner than 254 microns but not thinner than 18 microns) – 4 . 1 2858 ZIRCONIUM, DRY, fini shed sheets, strip or coiled wire – 4 . 2 2009 ZIRCONIUM HYDRIDE – 4 . 1 1437 ZIRCONIUM NITRATE – 5 . 1 2728 ZIRCONIUM PICRAMA TE, dry or wetted with less than 20% water, by mass – 1 . 3C 0236 ZIRCONIUM PICRAMA TE, WETTED with not less than 20% water, by mass – 4 . 1 1517 ZIRCONIUM POWDER , DRY – 4 . 2 2008 ZIRCONIUM POWDER, WE TTED with not less than 25% water (a visible excess of wate r must be present) (a) mechanically produc ed, particle size less than 53 microns – 4 . 1 1358 ZIRCONIUM POWDER , WETTED with not less than 25% water (a visible excess of wate r must be present) (b) chemically produced, p article size less than 840 microns – 4 . 1 1358 ZIRCONIUM SCRAP – 4 . 2 1932 ZIRCONIUM, SUSPEND ED IN A FLAMMABLE LIQUID – 3 1308 ZIRCONIUM TETRACHLORIDE – 8 2503 Non-commercial use only MSC 102/24/Add.2 Annex 4, page 928